IBM System I Overview

Front cover
IBM System i Overview

Models 515, 525, 550, 570, 595, and More
A system builder for System i 515, 520, 525, 550,

570, 595, 800, 810, 825, 870, 890 models
IBM POWER6, Secure Perspective for
System i auditing, Web enablement, ...
IBM i5/OS licensing options for
selected IBM System i5 models
Jim Cook
Dick Bresenham
Harold Distler
Dwight Harrison
Henry Matos
Glen McClymont
Yohichi Nakamura
Greg Young
ibm.com/redbooks
Redpaper
International Technical Support Organization

IBM System i Overview: Models 515, 525,
550, 570, 595, and More
July 2008
REDP-5052-00
Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on
page xi.
First Edition (July 2008)

This edition applies to IBM System i5 models running IBM i5/OS V5R3 and i5/OS V5R4.
This document created or updated on 07.07.2008.
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1997 - 2008. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights -- Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule
Contract with IBM Corp.
Contents
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
The team that wrote this IBM Redpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Become a published author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Comments welcome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Summary of changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
July 2008 update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Chapter 1. Overview of this paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Topics covered in this paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Hardware capabilities in this paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Software capabilities in this paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 The System i CPW workload performance rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 Pricing and contacting sales representatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 Special RPQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
3
5
7
9
9
Chapter 2. System i POWER6 model 570 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 System i POWER6 model 570 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 Operating systems and editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2 System unit and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.3 i5/OS Edition features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4 Capacity BackUp configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 System i POWER6 model 570 minimum and maximum capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Notes for System i POWER6 model 570 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Hardware Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 9406 System i POWER6 model 570 system unit schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1 Model 9406-MMA Processor Card layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2 System i POWER6 model 570 memory layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.3 Model 9406-MMA top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.4 Model 9406-MMA front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.5 Model 9406-MMA back view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.6 9406-MMA Processor enclosure fabric connection cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.7 570 (POWER6) processor enclosure service processor cable connections. . . . .
2.6 System i POWER6 model 570 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7 Capacity on Demand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8 Supported upgrades for System i models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9 Migration considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
12
16
17
19
20
21
23
25
26
26
29
31
32
33
34
35
36
39
40
40
Chapter 3. System i POWER5-based models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 System i5 models overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 System i Model 515. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 System i Model 515 Editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Model 515 configurations overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Base system unit and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Optional features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Hardware support constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
44
47
48
48
48
49
50
Copyright IBM Corp. 1997 - 2008. All rights reserved.
iii
3.4.4 Logical partitioning on the Model 515 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

3.4.5 Warranty options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.5 System i Model 515 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.6 System i5 Model 520+ Editions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.6.1 520 Capacity BackUp editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.6.2 System i and 3Com IP Telephony. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.6.3 System i IP Telephony Express offerings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.7 System i5 Model 520+ overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.7.1 9405 Model 520 Express configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.8 System i Model 520 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.9 System i Model 525. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.10 System i Model 525 Editions overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.10.1 Base system unit and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.10.2 Express Editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.10.3 Capacity BackUp configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.10.4 Solution Editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.11 System i Model 525 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.12 System i5 Model 550+ and i5 Model 550 overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.13 System i5 Model 570+ overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.14 eServer i5 Model 570 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.15 System i5 Model 595 and Model 595+ overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3.16 Notes for System i5 Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.17 9405, 9406 and 9407 Models 515, 520+, 520, and 525 system unit schematics . . . . 97
3.17.1 Model 515, 520+, and 525 top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.17.2 Model 515, 520+, and 525 front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.17.3 Model 515, 520+, and 525 back view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.17.4 Model 520 top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.17.5 Model 520 front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.17.6 Model 520 back view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.18 9406 Models 550+ and 550 system unit schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.18.1 Models 550+ and 550 top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.18.2 Models 550+ and 550 front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.18.3 Models 550+ and 550 back view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.18.4 Models 550+ and 550 memory layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.19 9406 Models 570+ and 570 processor enclosure schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.19.1 Model 570+ top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.19.2 Models 570+ and 570 front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.19.3 Models 570+ and 570 back view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.19.4 Model 570 top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.19.5 Model 570 front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.20 9406 Model 595 system unit schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.20.1 Model 595 front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.20.2 Model 595 back view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
iv
IBM System i Overview: Models 515, 525, 550, 570, 595, and More
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
System i Models 515, 520, 520+, and 525 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System i5 Model 550+ and 550 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System i5 Model 570+ and 570 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System i5 Model 595 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System i5 and eServer i5 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported upgrades for System i5 and eServer i5 models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
117
119
125
133
133
Chapter 4. POWER5, POWER6, and System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890: Features
and placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.1 System i model features and card placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4.2 PCI card placement for System i family of processor models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.3 Power and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.4 i5/OS partitions on System p5 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
4.5 Models 825, 870, and 890 Capacity on Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.6 Main storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
4.7 PCI IOP controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
4.7.1 IOP-less IOAs and placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.8 Workstation controllers and console features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.8.1 Supported partition consoles summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
4.9 LAN and WAN adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
4.10 Disk units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4.11 Internal tape units and CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
4.12 Magnetic media controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4.13 Summary: System i direct attach disks, disk controller features, CCINs. . . . . . . . . . 308
4.13.1 System i POWER6 model 570 I/O enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.13.2 System i POWER6 model 570 and V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5
storage enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
4.13.3 RAID hot spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
4.13.4 Clustering considerations among Models 8xx and 5xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Chapter 5. EXP24 Disk Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 #5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Drawer overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 #5786 front and rear views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 #5741/#5742 Disk Slot Enabler placement and cabling recommendations . . . .
5.2.2 Load source drive considerations in #5786/#5787 for logical partitions . . . . . . .
321
322
323
324
325
Chapter 6. Integrated Virtual Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Physical port control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Media Access Control address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Logical Host Ethernet Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 Configuring the HEA from the HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 i5/OS communication resources and line description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
329
330
331
332
332
332
333
337
Chapter 7. System i towers schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1 System i towers, racks, and expansion unit schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 #5074 PCI Expansion Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 #5078/#0578 PCI Expansion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 #5079 1.8 m I/O Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5 #5088/#0588 PCI-X Expansion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7 #5095/#0595 PCI-X Expansion Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
339
341
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
v
7.1.8 #5096 PCI-X Expansion Tower (no disk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

7.1.9 #5294 PCI-X Expansion Tower. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
7.1.10 #5296 1.8m I/O Tower (no disk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
7.1.11 #5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Drawer/#5787 TotalStorage Expansion 24
Disk Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
7.1.12 #5790 PCI Expansion Drawer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
7.1.13 #5796 PCI-DDR 12XExpansion Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
7.1.14 #8093 Optional Base 1.8 m I/O Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
7.1.15 #8094 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
7.1.16 #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
7.1.17 #9094 PCI Card Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
7.2 Required EIA units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Chapter 8. Storage and media for IBM System i family models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
8.1 External tape for System i family of models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
8.1.1 Notes for storage and media support under i5/OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
8.1.2 Alternate IPL or alternate installation device considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
8.2 SAN components for System i and iSeries systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
8.2.1 Virtualization Engine TS7510 and TS7520 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
8.3 QIC tape specifications and compatibility for System i models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
8.4 VXA, LTO, and DAT tape specifications and compatibility for System i models . . . . . 384
8.5 External SCSI, Fibre Channel tape, and optical cable part numbers for IBM System i and
iSeries systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
8.6 Device cabling rules for #5702, #5705, #5712, #5715, #5736, #2718, and #2768 PCI
Magnetic Media Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Chapter 9. Customer Card Identification Numbers cross-reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Chapter 10. Feature code cross-reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Chapter 11. Software enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1 Secure Perspective for System i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.1 Secure Perspective features and benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.2 Ordering and installing IBM Secure Perspective for System i. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 i5/OS licensing by user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.1 i5/OS entitlements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.2 i5/OS Processor Entitlements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.3 i5/OS user entitlement details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3 Initial Software Maintenance for Model 515 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4 i5/OS Application Server, 5722-SSB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.1 i5/OS Application Server Processor Entitlement details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.2 Software Maintenance for entitlements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5 System x and BladeCenter integration for i5/OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.6 Web Enablement Made Easy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.6.1 Web Enablement for i5/OS, 5722-WE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.6.2 Express Runtime Web Environment for i5/OS capabilities overview . . . . . . . .
11.6.3 Web Performance Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.6.4 Web Performance Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.6.5 WebSphere performance data collected by i5/OS Collection Services . . . . . .
11.6.6 Web Administration for i5/OS configuration for a portal server . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7 i5/OS and Web services related enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7.1 i5/OS integrated Web services server for ILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
433
434
434
435
441
442
442
443
452
452
453
455
456
457
459
459
461
462
463
464
464
465
11.8 Running either 64-bit JVM or 32-bit JVM under WebSphere Application Server 6.1 for
i5/OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
11.9 IBM WebSphere Development Studio Client V7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
11.9.1 WebSphere Development Studio Client V7.0, ClearCase Integration, and Improved
RPG support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
11.9.2 New in WebSphere Development Studio Client V7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
11.9.3 New in WebSphere Development Studio Client Advanced Edition V7.0 . . . . . 482
11.9.4 Hardware requirements: WebSphere Development Studio Client and WebSphere
Development Studio Client Advanced Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
11.10 WebFacing Deployment Tool V7.0 with HATS technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
11.11 IBM Systems Workload Estimator enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
11.12 MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS, 5639-MYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
11.12.1 DB2 Web Query for System i, 5733-QU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
11.13 Value Packs for Popular i5/OS Software Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
11.13.1 DB2 Value Pack for i5/OS, 5722-DVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
11.13.2 Operations Value Pack for i5/OS, 5722-SVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
11.13.3 Zend and MySQL Value Pack for i5/OS, 5639-MVP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
11.14 Analyze Object Conversion tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
11.15 i5/OS V5R4 and Java JDK 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Chapter 12. Software for System i models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1 Minimum i5/OS and OS/400 software-level requirements for System i models . . . .
12.2 i5/OS and OS/400 general availability and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 i5/OS and OS/400 upgrade paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4 Current-release to previous-release support for i5/OS and OS/400 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5 Software ordering terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6 i5/OS V5R4 software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.7 i5/OS V5R3 software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8 OS/400 V5R2 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.9 OS/400 V5R1 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.10 Notes for Version 5 software tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.11 i5/OS and OS/400 software pricing groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.11.1 i5/OS and OS/400 Version 5 software groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.11.2 OS/400 Version 4 software groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.12 Release-to-release software product mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
501
502
506
506
507
507
508
513
517
522
526
529
530
534
535
Chapter 13. HSL, 12X, SPCN, line cord, and communication cables for the System i
family of models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
13.1 HSL cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
13.1.1 HSL cable feature descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
13.1.2 12X cable feature descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
13.2 SPCN (power) cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
13.3 Dual line cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
13.4 Communication cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Chapter 14. Withdrawals announced January 2007 through October 2007 . . . . . . .
14.1 Selected System i program features withdrawn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2 Products and features no longer marketed by IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.1 Hardware no longer marketed by IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
551
552
552
553
vii
Chapter 15. iSeries Model 800, 810, 825, 870, 890 processor features . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1 iSeries Model 800 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.6 Notes for iSeries Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.7 9406 Model 800 system unit schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.8 9406 Model 810 system unit schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.9 iSeries Models 800 and 810 #7116 System Unit Expansion schematic . . . . . . . . . .
15.10 9406 Model 825 system unit schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.11.1 Model 870 MCM and HSL relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.12.1 Model 890 MCM and HSL relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.13 iSeries Models 870 and 890 #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure schematic. . . . . . . . .
15.13.1 #9094 PCI Card Enclosure schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.14 iSeries Models 870 and 890 #8094 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack schematic . . . . . . . .
15.15 iSeries Model 800 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.20 iSeries Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.21 Supported upgrades for Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
561
562
563
565
567
568
570
575
576
577
578
580
582
583
585
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
597
597
Chapter 16. System i family upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.1 Supported model-to-model upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2 Upgrades for System i processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2.1 Side-by-side upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2.2 5733-ITL license option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3 RISC-to-RISC Data Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.4 Temporary Software License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.5 I/O considerations for upgrading to a 570 (POWER6) configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . .
599
600
601
602
602
603
603
604
Appendix A. Product previews, Statements of Direction, and planning statements for

2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Product previews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
iSeries Access for Windows with Windows Installer technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
DB2 Query and Report Writer for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
System i POWER6 model 570 12-way processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
System i POWER6 model 570 redundant service processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Major i5/OS V6R1 release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Statements of Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
iSeries Access for Windows supports ADO.NET 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
System i and MySQL AB joint Open Source database support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
viii
Planning statements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

Abbreviations and acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM Redbooks and Redpapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to get IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
619
619
620
621
623
623
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
ix
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult
your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any
reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product,
program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not
infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to
evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The
furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in
writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive, Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION
PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time
without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any
manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the
materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring
any obligation to you.
Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published
announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the
accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on the
capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.
This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them
as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products.
All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business
enterprise is entirely coincidental.
COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrate programming
techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in
any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application
programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the sample
programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore,
cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs.
xi
Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. These and other IBM trademarked terms are
marked on their first occurrence in this information with the appropriate symbol ( or ), indicating US
registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this information was published. Such
trademarks may also be registered or common law trademarks in other countries. A current list of IBM
trademarks is available on the Web at http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml
The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both:
Redbooks (logo)
1350
AIX 5L
AIX
AnyNet
AS/400e
AS/400
BladeCenter
CICS
ClearCase
DataPropagator
DB2 OLAP Server
DB2 Universal Database
DB2
Domino
DS6000
DS8000
Electronic Service Agent
Enterprise Storage Server
Enterprise Workload Manager
ES/3090
ES/9000
ESCON
eServer
FICON
i5/OS
IBMLink
IBM
Integrated Language Environment
Intelligent Miner
iSeries
Language Environment
Lotus Enterprise Integrator
Lotus Notes
Lotus
Magstar
Micro-Partitioning
MQSeries
Netfinity
NetView
Notes
Operating System/400
OS/390
OS/400
Passport Advantage
POWER
POWER Hypervisor
POWER4
POWER5
POWER5+
POWER6
Print Services Facility
pSeries
QMF
QuickPlace
Quickr
Rational Suite
Rational
Redbooks
RS/6000
S/390
Sametime
System i
System i5
System p
System p5
System Storage
System x
System/36
System/38
Tivoli
TotalStorage
Virtualization Engine
VisualAge
WebSphere
Workplace
xSeries
zSeries
The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

PostScript, and Portable Document Format (PDF) are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States, other countries, or both.
InfiniBand Trade Association, InfiniBand, and the InfiniBand design marks are trademarks and/or service
marks of the InfiniBand Trade Association.
SUSE, the Novell logo, and the N logo are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other
countries.
Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, Siebel, and TopLink are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or
its affiliates.
mySAP, SAP, and SAP logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several
other countries.
EJB, IPX, J2EE, J2SE, Java, JavaScript, JavaServer, JDBC, JDK, JMX, JSP, JVM, MySQL, Solaris,
StorageTek, Sun, Ultra, and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the
United States, other countries, or both.
Convergence, Excel, Internet Explorer, Microsoft, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Windows,
and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.
xii
Intel, Pentium, Intel logo, Intel Inside logo, and Intel Centrino logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States, other countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Notices
xiii
xiv
Preface
This IBM Redpaper publication describes the IBM System i technology-based hardware
and software capabilities that were announced between January 2007 and October 2007.
From a System i family hardware coverage viewpoint, this paper also integrates the new
hardware information announced in 2007 with existing System i hardware information. The
existing information was pulled from the IBM Redbooks publication IBM System i5, eServer
i5, and iSeries Systems Builder IBM i5/OS Version 5 Release 4 - January 2006, SG24-2155.
This paper is now the system builder for the processor hardware technology for IBM
System i Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, IBM POWER6 570, and 595; for Models 800,
810, 825, 870, and 890; and for I/O device attachments that are supported on these models
by IBM i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4. The PCI rules Redpaper publication that corresponds to the
level of information in this paper is PCI and PCI-X Placement Rules for IBM System i models:
i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 (Fourth edition), REDP-4011. Older technology hardware supported
up to IBM OS/400 V5R2 is documented in IBM eServer iSeries and AS/400e System
Builder: IBM OS/400 Version 4 Release 3 - Version 5 Release 2, REDP-0542, and PCI Card
Placement Rules for the IBM eServer iSeries Server OS/400 Version 5 Release 2:
September 2003, REDP-3638.
For more information about where to find technical marketing information, read the IBM
Technote Where to Find Today and Yesterday's System i Technical Marketing Deliverables,
TIPS0637.
System i Builder and SG24-2155: From a System i system builder perspective, this paper
contains hardware-level content that is a superset of the information that was contained in
IBM System i5, eServer i5, and iSeries Systems Builder IBM i5/OS Version 5 Release 4 January 2006, SG24-2155. We recommend that you use the information in this paper for
hardware content and no longer use the content provided in SG24-2155-12. SG24-2155
was last updated in September 2006 and has since become obsolete.
A variety of new offerings were announced in 2007 that target the minimizing of product
acquisition cost and simplifying of product administration. These new offerings are highlighted
by the new i5/OS licensing editions that are available on the IBM System i Models 515 and
525 and the simplified i5/OS licensing on the POWER6 Model 570 (also referred to in this
paper as POWER6 570 and 9406-MMA). All are intended to minimize the initial investment in
use of i5/OS. Simplification of the edition offerings of the 515, 525, and 570 (POWER6) has
greatly enhanced the product structure of each of these System i models.
IBM System i Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 9406-MMA and 595 are summarized in this
paper as well as System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 (all prior to IBM POWER5
technology). Chapter 15, iSeries Model 800, 810, 825, 870, 890 processor features on
page 561 is the last chapter in this paper to demonstrate the focus on System i 5xx models.
This paper describes the following capabilities:
Hardware:
IBM System i 9406-MMA models, which includes new support for Serially Attached
SCSI (SAS) technology disk drives, and 12X I/O loop attachment, new Integrated
Virtual Ethernet adapter (Host Ethernet Adapter), and basic upgrade considerations
IBM System i5 515 and 525 models, including reduced total prices for specific disk
hardware packages on the Model 525
xv
The Model 515 has a simplified set of configuration options that include only the most
popular I/O options to keep the ordering process as simple as possible.
Faster processor (2.3 GHz) offering on the IBM System i Model 595
New support of entry-level tape devices and associated media in DDS/DAT format
media
New higher performance dual mode (with or without IOP) disk controllers
Support of disks packaged within the SCSI-attached, EXP24 Disk Enclosures, which
are currently offered on IBM System p models
Overview of System i solution editions that include 3Com IP Telephony offerings and
Model 525 Oracle JD Edwards and SAP application offerings
Software:
i5/OS V5R4 user-based licensing on the 515 and 525 models
Application server i5/OS pricing on IBM System i5 Models 550, 570, POWER6 570,
and 595
Exclusive to the POWER6 570 model, i5/OS and Capacity Backup editions only
There are no Standard and Enterprise editions, and 5250 OLTP Enterprise
Enablement is completely optional.
Secure Perspective for System i, which provides a Web-based natural language
interface to i5/OS security for easing the automation of setting up and tracking your
i5/OS security attributes and events for security auditing purposes
A set of Web-enablement enhancements targeted to get you up and running in an IBM
WebSphere Application Server technology-based environment as quickly as possible
This support is a follow-on to the initial set of Web-enablement enhancements
announced in October 2006 and delivered prior to April 2007.
New SQL-based product offerings:
MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS available from the MySQL AB Corporation
DB2 Web Query for System i available from IBM that has been uniquely
developed for the i5/OS environment by Information Builders, Incorporated
A new version (V7.0) of WebSphere Development Studio Client for System i to extend
existing capabilities for developing and deploying i5/OS Web-based applications
For Models 515 and 525, the i5/OS Unlimited Collaboration Users feature with a
cost-effective option for adding IBM Lotus collaboration solution products
Overview of the April 2007 enhancements available for the IBM Systems Workload
Estimator for IBM System i model sizings
The team that wrote this IBM Redpaper

This paper was produced by a team of specialists from around the world working at the
International Technical Support Organization (ITSO), Rochester Center.
Jim Cook is a Senior Software Engineer Project Leader at the ITSO, Rochester Center. He
leads teams that produce IBM System i announcement presentation sets that are maintained
on the System i technical support Web sites and presents at ITSO Forums internationally. Jim
also produces Redbooks publications about various System i and i5/OS-related topics.
xvi
Dick Bresenham is a Senior iSeries Techline Specialist on the Western Area team in
Dallas, Texas, providing iSeries pre-sales technical marketing support. Prior to joining IBM
Techline, he was a System/36, System/38, and AS/400/iSeries Systems Engineer. He
joined IBM as a Process Engineer in Austin, Texas, and has 23 years of service with IBM.
Harold Distler is a Consulting Product Specialist with Sirius Computer Solutions, an IBM
Premier Business Partner. Harold assists customers with System i hardware ordering and
configuration processes and has worked on several System Handbook and System Builder
residencies.
Dwight Harrison is a System i Remote Hardware Support Specialist in Rochester,
Minnesota. He worked both in the Rochester development lab and in the field for 24 years
prior to joining the Rochester Hardware Support Center in January 1993. In the Support
Center, Dwight provides remote diagnostics and interfaces with developers to resolve
customer reported problems in both hardware and software support. He has participated in
previous residencies for the Handbook and Builder.
Henry Matos is a Senior System i Technical Sales Specialist for the IBM Latin America
Techline organization based in Atlanta, Georgia. He joined IBM in 1976 as a Computer
Operator trainee for the Program Information Department in Hawthorne, NY, where all of IBM
program products where originally distributed. After several internal staff and management
positions, in 1988, he accepted a position as an IBM AS/400 Systems Engineer for the
Midtown Manhattan DR4 Branch office. Later he joined the IBM Technical Support
organization, which then became the IBM Americas Techline organization. In 1997, he
became the first Techline Specialist for the new Latin America Techline team.
Glen McClymont is a Senior AS/400 Techline Specialist with IBM in Canada. Since 1988, he
has worked with the System i product family in customer hardware support, software support,
and most recently in pre-sales marketing support. Glen has over 30 years of experience with
IBM. He is an alumni resident for the ITSO from previous Handbook and Builder residencies,
providing expertise between updates.
Yohichi Nakamura is an IT Specialist with IBM Japan Systems Engineering Co., Ltd. He
works in IBM System i Advanced Technical Support team for Japan as a specialist for IBM
System i. He has three years of experience on the IBM System i platform. His areas of
expertise include overall of i5/OS operations, LPAR configurations, performance analysis and
networking.
Greg Young is a System i Technical Sales Specialist in Minneapolis, MN. He joined IBM in
2004 as a System i Licensed Internal Code software developer before transferring to the field
in 2006. As a Technical Sales Specialist, he provides pre-sales technical marketing, high
availability, external storage, and LPAR configuration support.
Many thanks to Susan Powers and the authors of the previous editions of the IBM eServer i5
and iSeries System Handbook i5/OS Version 5 Release 3 October 2005 -- Draft, GA19-5486,
and IBM System i5, eServer i5, and iSeries Systems Builder IBM i5/OS Version 5 Release 4 January 2006, SG24-2155.
Michael Anderson
Deb Angst
Sue Baker
Lee Cleveland
Mike Fallenstein
Pat Fleming
Randy Grim
Duane Grosz
Jim Hermes
Preface
xvii
Dave Johnson
Dan Kolz
Scott Maxson
Denis Nizinski
Mark Olson
Ray Perkins
Gene Rentz
Rita Roque
Tim Rowe
Chad Sanderson
Dennis Schroeder
Lee Sendelbach
Ashok Shamsundar
Tracy Smith
Kathy Steinman
Jeff Trachy
Kathy Tri
Diane Wilaby
IBM Rochester, Minnesota
Become a published author

Join us for a two- to six-week residency program! Help write an IBM Redbooks publication
dealing with specific products or solutions, while getting hands-on experience with
leading-edge technologies. You will have the opportunity to team with IBM technical
professionals, Business Partners, and Clients.
Your efforts will help increase product acceptance and customer satisfaction. As a bonus,
you'll develop a network of contacts in IBM development labs, and increase your productivity
and marketability.
Find out more about the residency program, browse the residency index, and apply online at:
ibm.com/redbooks/residencies.html
Comments welcome
Your comments are important to us!
We want our IBM Redpapers to be as helpful as possible. Send us your comments about this
IBM Redpaper or other Redbooks publications in one of the following ways:
Use the online Contact us review Redbooks form found at:
ibm.com/redbooks
Send your comments in an e-mail to:
redbooks@us.ibm.com
Mail your comments to:
IBM Corporation, International Technical Support Organization
Dept. HYTD Mail Station P099
2455 South Road
Poughkeepsie, NY 55901-7829
xviii
Summary of changes
This section describes the technical changes made in this update to REDP-5052. Full
POWER6 processor technology and IBM i (formerly i5/OS) 6.1 release level coverage is
planned for a future publication.
July 2008 update

The following paragraphs summarize the primary changes in this softcopy update. Change
bars appear to the left of the pertinent text to assist the reader in locating the new material.
Chapter 4, POWER5, POWER6, and System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890: Features
and placement on page 135:
Updated many feature descriptions with small but important changes including:
Model 520 memory plugging rules
Disk and tape adapter (controllers, adapters) details
Added the POWER6 smart Fibre Channel adapters #5749 and #5774
New table: Adapters supporting i5/OS Operations Console PC Workstations
Chapter 8, Storage and media for IBM System i family models on page 359:
Updated details for tape and optical devices supported on various adapters and software
release level information for IOP-less support.
Updated the description for alternate IPL (restart) considerations and added references to
additional documentation.
xix
xx
Chapter 1.
Overview of this paper

In this chapter, we summarize the content in this paper and provide references to a variety of
new offerings announced during 2007 that target minimizing product acquisition cost and
simplifying product administration. These new offerings are highlighted by the new i5/OS
licensing editions that are available on the IBM System i Models 515 and 525 and the
simplified i5/OS licensing on the System i POWER6 model 570 (also referred to in this paper
as POWER6 570 and 9406-MMA), all intended to minimize the initial investment in use of
i5/OS. Simplification of the edition offerings of the 515, 525, and 570 (POWER6) have greatly
enhanced the product structure of each of these System i models.
We summarize IBM System i Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 9406-MMA (System i
POWER6 570) and 595 in this paper as well as System i Models (prior to POWER5
technology) 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890. We intentionally placed Chapter 15, iSeries Model
800, 810, 825, 870, 890 processor features on page 561, as the last chapter in this paper to
demonstrate the focus on IBM System i Model 5xx. Both 5xx and 8xx models are covered in
other hardware chapters and sections, such as Chapter 4, POWER5, POWER6, and System
i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890: Features and placement on page 135.
In this chapter, we also highlight the new i5/OS software-based capabilities that were
introduced between January 2007 and October 2007. Chapter 11, Software enhancements
on page 433, presents an overview of specific software announcements.
System i Builder and SG24-2155: From a System i system builder perspective, this paper
contains hardware-level content that is a superset of the information that was contained in
IBM System i5, eServer i5, and iSeries Systems Builder IBM i5/OS Version 5 Release 4 January 2006, SG24-2155. We recommend that you use the information in this paper for
hardware content and no longer use the content provided in SG24-2155-12. SG24-2155
was last updated in September 2006 and has since become obsolete.
1.1 Topics covered in this paper

The announcements from January 2007 through October 2007 include many unique
capabilities on specific System i models, i5/OS, and selected software products. These new
announcements build on the strengths and capabilities of i for integration that is already
available on System i models running i5/OS and i5/OS-based software products and
applications available prior to 2006.
The System i POWER6 model 570 now includes the latest IBM POWER6 technology plus an
array of other technology advances. It is designed to deliver outstanding price/performance,
mainframe-inspired reliability and availability features, flexible capacity upgrades, and
innovative virtualization technologies.
The System i POWER6 model 570 commercial processing workload (CPW) ratings are
approximately 70% higher than equivalent POWER5 systems and approximately 30% higher
than equivalent IBM POWER5+ systems. This is accomplished within the same footprint,
electrical power, and cooling parameters as the POWER5+ 570 system. The ability to share
integrated high-speed Ethernet adapter ports is enhanced by the Integrated Virtual Ethernet
(IVE). Additionally, new 12X I/O loop attachment capabilities are offered, providing up to 50%
more bandwidth compared to high-speed link (HSL)-2 technology.
New i5/OS licensing offerings were introduced during 2007 to reduce your initial investment:
Exclusive to the System i 570 (POWER6), two new i5/OS editions simplify your choice:
i5/OS Edition and Capacity BackUp. Starting with a single i5/OS Edition, the 9406-MMA
model can be customized by processor to run multiple transaction processing, and
collaborative and application processing workloads. Software-tier level p30 pricing is
offered across all configurations up to 16-way. This offers lowered initial start-up costs as
well as improved flexibility during server consolidations and granularity for
intermediate-sized System i configurations.
In this paper, you can find more information about these unique POWER6 570 editions in
2.1.3, i5/OS Edition features on page 19.
Exclusive to the IBM System i Models 515 and 525, new i5/OS licensing per concurrent
user is available. Along with providing the typical wide-range of i5/OS functions, you get
improved flexibility, granularity, and lowered cost to use i5/OS with this licensing by
concurrent user. This pricing structure can significantly reduce the i5/OS cost to small and
medium business (SMB) customers, while providing performance levels and I/O
configurations comparable to the System i Model 520+ processor range.
Unlimited Collaboration Users i5/OS pricing also became available during 2007. It enables
reduced cost of all the Lotus Corporation products included in this offering.
You can find more information about this i5/OS licensing by concurrent user, unique to
Models 515 and 525 systems in 11.2.3, i5/OS user entitlement details on page 443.
The Model 525 now has two solution editions for SAP and Oracle JD Edwards
applications that are supported under i5/OS. These two solution editions also have
optional disk hardware packages that offer a reduced price for a combined set of disk
arms, a disk controller and a disk hardware enclosure.
New i5/OS pricing is available for IBM System i Models 550, 570, and 595 that are
designated as application servers that do not require significant use of DB2 for i5/OS.
You can find more information about this application server licensing for i5/OS in 11.4.1,
i5/OS Application Server Processor Entitlement details on page 453.
Some new software capabilities, such as the new Secure Perspective for System i product
and two new separate query-based products developed by independent software vendors
(ISVs) and based on their existing products, became available. These include My SQL for
i5/OS, which was developed and distributed by MySQL AB, and the DB2 Web Query product.
DB2 Web Query for System i was developed expressly for IBM and the System i environment
by Information Builders, Incorporated. This product (5733-QU2) can be ordered from and is
supported by IBM.
In the following topics, we expand upon the key 2007 i5/OS-based capabilities, while referring
you to the respective chapters in this paper for more information about these capabilities. For
example, 9406-MMA capabilities are summarized in Chapter 2, System i POWER6 model
570 on page 11, and all the 2007 software enhancements, including the new i5/OS licensing
topics are covered in Chapter 11, Software enhancements on page 433.
1.2 Hardware capabilities in this paper

This paper addresses the following key hardware capabilities that were announced between
January 2007 and October 2007:
IBM System i 9406-MMA models, which include new support for Serially Attached SCSI
(SAS) technology disk drives, and 12X I/O loop attachment, new IVE adapter (Host
Ethernet Adapter), and basic upgrade considerations
Refer to Chapter 2, System i POWER6 model 570 on page 11, for more information
about the 9406-MMA i5/OS software tier and the i5/OS edition.
IBM System i Models 515 and 525, including reduced total prices for specific disk
hardware packages on the Model 525
Faster processor (2.3 GHz) offering on the IBM System i Model 595
New support of entry-level tape devices and associated media in DDS/DAT format media
New higher performance dual mode (with or without IOP) disk controllers
Support of disks packaged within the SCSI-attached, EXP24 Disk Enclosures, which are
currently offered on IBM System p models
Overview of System i and 3Com IP Telephony capabilities under the IBM System i Model
520 descriptions
This paper also includes system builder-level hardware information for processor Models 515,
520, 525, 550, 570, and 595, Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890, and I/O device
attachments supported on these models by i5/OS releases V5R3 and V5R4. For more
information, refer to PCI and PCI-X Placement Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3
and V5R4 (Fourth edition), REDP-4011.
Important:
This paper contains hardware-level content that is a superset of the information
contained in IBM System i5, eServer i5, and iSeries Systems Builder IBM i5/OS Version
5 Release 4 - January 2006, SG24-2155, which was last updated in September 2006.
This paper also includes technical corrections to the information provided in the system
builder book. In addition, Chapter 8, Storage and media for IBM System i family
models on page 359, in this paper has been updated and reorganized to cover tape
hardware that is supported under i5/OS.
Refer to the IBM Technote Where to Find Today and Yesterday's System i Technical
Marketing Deliverables, TIPS0637, for a guide on where to find different hardware
technology-level technical marketing documentation among Redbooks publications for
the System i platform.
Since the original general availability of i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4, both releases have
significantly enhanced Licensed Internal Code (LIC) levels of V5R3M5 and V5R4M5,
respectively. These microcode levels offer additional hardware support that does not
require corresponding new release levels of i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4.
If you are running i5/OS V5R3 or i5/OSV5R4, we recommend that you install the
V5R3M5 and V5R4M5 levels of microcode. By doing so, you will be ready to use the
hardware that requires a microcode-level update. See the following System i Support
Web page for more information:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/i
For older hardware technology information, refer to the following publications:

PCI Card Placement Rules for the IBM eServer iSeries Server OS/400 Version 5 Release
2: September 2003, REDP-3638.
This paper contains PCI rules that are related to the iSeries Models 270, 820, 830, 840,
SB2, and SB3 configurations with OS/400 V5R2 and for rules related to the iSeries
Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 configurations up to OS/400 V5R2.
IBM eServer iSeries and AS/400e System Builder: IBM OS/400 Version 4 Release 3 Version 5 Release 2, REDP-0542
This paper offers detailed information about the iSeries Models SB2, SB3, 250, 270, 820,
830, and 840, as well as the AS/400e Model 170, Model 250 package, Models 720, 730,
740, and releases of OS/400 software from Version 4 Release 3 through Version 5
Release 2. It includes information about rules related to the #5033, #5034, #5035, and
#5077 Migration Towers that can attach to Models 820, 830, 840, SB2, or SB3, and the
description of the affected features to be migrated to these models.
In addition, refer to the following locations on the Web for further hardware information:
For general IBM POWER6 technology-based hardware documentation:
System i
System p
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/p
IBM Systems Information Center

http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp
These support pages offer a wide range of tools and resources, including hardware and
software maintenance, for example Fix Central capabilities, and technical documentation.
When accessing POWER6 hardware information, these locations provide the most
effective links to available documents, such as the System i Overview (POWER6) and
Hardware Management Console (HMC) documentation that is specific to Version 7
Release 3.1.0 or later. Links to other product documentation including POWER5 and
pre-POWER5 hardware and i5/OS-based software are also available from these locations.
We recommend that you go to these locations on the Web first to find the appropriate
categorization of hardware information.
On the System i Support page, under the Select your product area, for Hardware, select
570 - System i 570 (POWER6) and click Go. On the next page, under Hardware Documentation, click the System i 570 (9406-MMA) publications link.
From any of the hardware links, you can access documentation that applies to only
POWER5 models, only to POWER6 models, or both POWER5 and POWER6 models.
Keep in mind that updates to POWER6 documentation will be made over time.
The POWER5 technology-based IBM Systems Hardware Information Center
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/eserver/v1r3s/index.jsp
This information center contains information for System i and p models, such as installing
and activating the POWER5 system, choosing a console setup, setting up and
administering HMC-based logical partition (LPAR), setting up and using Capacity on
Demand offerings, and more.
The IBM iSeries (System i) Information Center (pre-POWER5 technology)
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/
IBM System i planning, including upgrades information

http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/i/planning/migrationupgrade.html
IBM System i hardware

http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/hardware/
1.3 Software capabilities in this paper

This paper addresses the following key software capabilities that were announced between
January 2007 and October 2007:
i5/OS V5R4 concurrent user-based licensing on the Models 515 and 525
Application server i5/OS processor licensing for the Models 550, 570, POWER6 570, and
595
Exclusive to the POWER6 570 model, i5/OS and Capacity Backup editions only
There are no Standard and Enterprise Editions, and 5250 online transaction processing
(OLTP) Enterprise Enablement is completely optional.
Secure Perspective for System i product,
This product provides a Web-based natural language interface to i5/OS security for easing
the automation of setting up and tracking i5/OS security attributes and events for security
auditing purposes. During October 2007, support was extended to AIX and Microsoft
Windows operating systems.
Addition of JDK Standard Edition (SE) 6, the latest release of the Java programming
language, in IBM i5/OS V5R4
JDK SE 6 contains many new features and enhancements to collections, jconsole, debug,
monitoring and management, instrumentation, reflection, performance, and more.
A set of Web enablement enhancements targeted to simplify the installation processes of

an IBM WebSphere Application Server-based environment, with optimum performance
This support is a follow-on to the initial set of Web enablement enhancements that were
announced in October 2006 and delivered prior to April 2007.
A new version (V7.0) of WebSphere Development Studio Client for System i to extend
existing capabilities for developing and deploying i5/OS Web-based applications
Overview of 2007 enhancements that are available for the IBM Systems Workload
Estimator for IBM System i model sizings
MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS
MySQL is a popular open source database that is often used with PHP-based Web
applications. The announcement of MySQL support for i5/OS follows the successful
introduction of PHP supported by Zend on i5/OS in 2006. Now the PHP applications can
maintain their existing program interfaces to MySQL.
DB2 Web Query for System i
This business intelligence-oriented Web-based query and report writing tool is a suite of
products developed by Information Builders expressly for i5/OS. Ordered from and
supported by IBM, the DB2 Web Query for System i tools represents a robust set of
functions that are available as a base subset of the WebFOCUS product, with some
optional downloads from IBM.
Existing Query/400 definitions running under i5/OS continue to be supported. They can
also be imported into DB2 Query for System i and enhanced under this product.
Value Packs for Popular i5/OS Software Products
These products, exclusively available for System i POWER6 model 570, contain a specific
set of individual licensed programs that are available at a reduced cost compared to
purchasing them separately:
DB2 Value Pack for i5/OS (5722-DVP)
This package includes:
DB2 Query Manager and SQL Development Kit (5722-ST1)
DB2 Symmetric Multiprocessing (DB2 SMP) (5722-SS1, Option 26)
DB2 UDB Extender (5722-DE1), which consists of two components, the XML
Extender and a linguistic search engine called Text Extender
XML Toolkit (5733-XT1)
Operations Value Pack for i5/OS (5722-SVP)

This package includes:
Backup Recovery and Media Services (BRMS) (5722-BR1)
BRMS Network Feature (5722-BR1, Option 1)
Media and Storage Extensions (5722-SS1, Option 18)
Performance Tools for i5/OS (5722-PT1) - Manager (5722-PT1, Option 1)
Zend and MySQL Value Pack for i5/OS (5639-MVP)

This package offers the software and support offerings to develop and deploy Web
applications based on PHP and MySQL on i5/OS. The Zend and MySQL products are
available directly from the vendors or can be ordered individually from IBM.
No-charge Zend Core and Studio for i5/OS is available with the standard support
offering. The no-charge MySQL Community Server offering is also available.
This Value Pack reduces the price of the individually purchased products that are part
of this package. This package can be ordered only through IBM and includes:
Zend Core for i5/OS with gold support from Zend

Zend Studio for i5/OS with gold support
Zend Platform for i5/OS with gold support
MySQL Enterprise with silver support from MySQL AB
IBM System i Model 550, 570, and 595 Enterprise Edition enhancements
For new 550, 570 and 595 Enterprise Edition systems shipped starting 17 August 2007,
additional software is included at no additional charge:
Zend Core for i5/OS, 5639-ZC1, with Standard Support
MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS, 5639-MYS, with Silver Support
If higher levels of support are required, chargeable upgrades are available.
Enhancement of System i integration with iSCSI attached BladeCenter and System x
servers to support multiple path I/O between the i5/OS partition providing the virtual I/O
and the BladeCenter or System x server and to support virtual storage for VMware ESX
server V3.0.1
New and expanded Web services and service-oriented architecture (SOA) related
capabilities introduced for 4Q 2007 availability
Chapter 11, Software enhancements on page 433, provides additional information about
most of these software items. For additional software resources, refer to the following
publications and locations on the Web:
IBM System i5 Handbook IBM i5/OS Version 5 Release 4 January 2006, SG24-7486
IBM System i5 V5R4 Technical Overview Redbook, SG24-7271
This book contains information about hardware and software that were announced
between January 2006 and 10 February 2007.
The IBM iSeries (System i) Information Center
IBM System i software Web page

http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/software
1.4 The System i CPW workload performance rating

CPW represents the IBM internal system performance benchmark. The commercial
processing workload can be characterized by as many 5250 workstation jobs active, with
background, lower priority batch work also being performed. The jobs that perform 5250 I/O
operations consume a small amount of processor utilization per transaction. CPW has been
the standard performance rating metric used for years to compare relative processor ratings
among the IBM System i family of processor models.
CPW should not be used to compare performance with processor technologies outside the
System i family. We strongly recommend that you do not use CPW as the sole metric for
sizing System i models. Consider other performance aspects, such as specific application
characteristics, like high CPU utilization and large numbers of disk I/O per second, and
running multiple applications. You should use a sizing tool, such as the IBM Systems
Workload Estimator (WLE) to size a particular System i model and its memory and I/O
configuration. In later chapters in this paper, we provide references to sizing tools.
In this paper, we use the term 5250 OLTP CPW and the term 5250 CPW interchangeably.
OLTP represents processor capacity that is available for work done by i5/OS jobs that
communicate with a 5250 workstation or 5250 workstation emulator in an interactive manner.
5250 CPW also applies to i5/OS jobs that perform work directly to a twinax attached printer of
the 5250 family of printers. Work that is performed by spooled writer jobs that print to
LAN-attached printers is not accounted toward 5250 CPW capacity.
5250 CPW is an approximate value that represents the amount of total CPW processing
power to be used to perform 5250 OLTP work. 5250 CPW is known as Interactive CPW on
earlier System i models. Performance metrics reported in the Performance Tools for iSeries
product, 5722-PT1, continue through i5/OS V5R4 to report 5250 work under the interactive
terminology.
In this paper and other publications, the full processor CPW rating is sometimes also referred
to as the batch CPW rating.
Some IBM System i models offer a 5250 OLTP CPW capacity rating lower than the maximum
(batch) CPW rating. Other System i models offer the Standard Edition that essentially has
zero 5250 OLTP CPW capacity.
For more information about CPW, refer to the following publications:
The CPW and CIW Descriptions appendix in the System i Performance Capabilities
Reference i5/OS Version 5, Release 4, SC41-0607, under the General Performance
Resources section at the following address:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/solutions/perfmgmt/resource.html
Aiming for Zero Interactive on iSeries

http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/perfmgmt/pdf/ZeroInteractive.pdf
This white paper discusses using the IBM WebFacing Tool with your 5250 application to
enable interaction with your application from a browser workstation interface. Processing
under the IBM WebFacing Tool enables your 5250 jobs to not be accounted toward the
5250 OLTP CPW rating of your system or partition. This is important on IBM System i
family models that offer a reduced 5250 OLTP CPW capacity relative to total (batch) CPW
capacity and models that offer a Standard Edition, which is defined to have zero 5250
OLTP CPW capacity.
Starting with i5/OS V5R2 and use of the WebFacing Tool as part of WebSphere
Development Studio Client for iSeries Version 5 product, the refaced applications can be
set up to not be accounted as 5250 OLTP work.
Starting with i5/OS V5R4 and WebSphere Development Studio Client for iSeries Version
6, 5250 applications using either or both the IBM WebFacing Tool or Host Access
Transformation Services (HATS) can run without being accounted toward 5250 OLTP
CPW capacity. This is accomplished by running under the WebSphere Development
Studio Client component - WebFacing Deployment Tool for WebSphere Development
Studio with HATS Technology.
In 11.10, WebFacing Deployment Tool V7.0 with HATS technology on page 484, we
discuss the latest capabilities for WebSphere Development Studio Client V7.0.
1.5 Pricing and contacting sales representatives

This paper does not contain detailed ordering instructions or pricing information. For
additional information, we recommend that you contact either an IBM representative or an
authorized IBM Business Partner.
You can go to the IBM System i How to Buy Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/buy/marketing/
From this page, you can choose to be put in contact with an IBM Business Partner or IBM
Sales Representative. You can also request a price quote. To contact an IBM U.S. Sales
Representative, call 1-888-SHOP-IBM.
1.6 Special RPQs

In this section, we identify the RPQ that became available during 2007 that the authors of this
paper determined to be of significant importance to include in this edition.
Disk Content Security PRPQ #5799-SD1 (P84513)

IBM Disk Sanitizer for i5/OS erases disk drive contents by overwriting all addressable
locations on the disk drive three times.
This RPQ is currently available for i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 and is provided through appropriate
PTFs. It includes the following benefits:
Significantly reduces the risk of data theft and accidental information dissemination
Provides regulatory compliance by meeting rigorous USA Department of Defense (DoD)
standards (5220.22-M) and furnishing appropriate audit trail documentation
Can help customers to reuse or sell storage assets rather than destroy them
See the IBM PRPQ database for more information regard ordering, prerequisites, limitations,
and so forth.
10
Chapter 2.
System i POWER6 model 570

In this chapter, we provide summary charts and diagrams, as well as identify the processor
features that are associated with each System i POWER6 TM model 570. For feature
descriptions, including details about power and packaging and main memory, refer to
and placement on page 135.
11
2.1 System i POWER6 model 570 overview

The System i POWER6 570 provides faster processor and memory technology than
POWER5 technology-based models. It is also the first System i model to support, in addition
to high-speed link (HSL)-attached I/O towers and drawers, the 12X loop technology for
attaching 12X attach-capable I/O towers and drawers.
The following figures summarize the key 9406-MMA attributes and features, all within the
same frame dimensions and weights used by the POWER5+ System i 570 rack configuration.
The text that follows expands on the capabilities shared with the POWER5+ technology
Model 570 and the new 9406-MMA unique capabilities.
The following figure shows a rack with a 16-way configuration.
System i Model 570 with POWER6 Technology

570
Up to 16-way
5,500 to 76,900 CPW
Max 768 GB memory
Max 387 TB disk storage
HSL-2 and 12X I/O
i5/OS V5R4*
P30 software tier
* With License Internal Code V5R4M5 or later
We recommend that you install the POWER6 Model 570 (as well as IBM System i POWER5
and POWER5+ models supporting a rack configuration) in a new or existing 19-inch IBM rack.
This model provides the proper dimensions, mounting surfaces, power distribution,
ventilation, stability, and other functional requirements. The design of the POWER6 Model
570, similar to the POWER5 technology-based models, is optimized for use in an IBM 36U or
42U rack (System i feature code #0551 or #0553). Both the front cover and the external
processor fabric cables occupy space on the front left side of the rack that may not be
available in racks from other companies. The rear service interface fabric cables have little
slack and might not accommodate racks from other companies, which are deeper than the
#0551/0553.
When using the IBM hardware and software ordering tool, the IBM Sales Configurator
(sometimes also referred to as e-Config), the #0551 is defaulted on a new Model 570 order.
You can edit the configurator output to use a #0553 rack instead.
The maximum amount of disk storage is somewhat less than 387,825 GB (387 TB). A size of
387 TB presumes that the maximum number of supported disk drives (1374 on a 16-way) is
on i5/OS formatted 282.25 GB drives. Since the 282.25 disk drives are not yet supported as
load source devices, actual maximum storage is somewhat less than 387 TB, depending on
12
the load source disk size and associated disks that are used to provide load source protection
(mirrored, RAID-5 or RAID-6).
The following figure shows up to four building blocks (processor and memory enclosures)
that are available to support up to a 4-way 570 (POWER6) (one block) through up to a 16-way
570 (POWER6) (4 blocks).
POWER6 System i Model 570 Building Blocks

1 enclosure (1/4-way)
5,500 21,200 CPW

Maximum two I/O loops, 192 GB memory
+2nd enclosure (2/8-way or 1/8-way)

5,500 or 10,800 40,100 CPW
Maximum four I/O loops, 384 GB memory
+3rd enclosure (2/12-way or 3/12-way)

10,800 or 15,500 58,000 CPW
Maximum six I/O loops, 576 GB memory
+4th enclosure (4/16-way or 2/16-way)

10,800 or 20,100 76,900 CPW
Maximum eight I/O loops, 768 GB memory
Note: A three-enclosure system requires an MES

order. There is no 12-way server/edition feature code.
System unit and processor enclosure: In this paper, we use several terms such as
system unit or processor enclosure or node to represent the physical enclosure that include
a set of available processor cards, memory cards, and I/O slots for the IBM system i 5xx
and 8xx models addressed in this publication. The IBM System i Model 595 system unit is
actually contained within a larger frame.
For the POWER5 and POWER6 570 Models, some IBM documentation refers to each
processor enclosure as simply a building block.
In addition to processor and memory cards, each processor enclosure (building block) has
support for a limited number of I/O devices or I/O loop (GX) adapters and can support up to
two GX (I/O loop) adapters for additional I/O attachments as described later in this chapter.
The POWER6 570 commercial processing workload (CPW) ratings are approximately 70%
higher than equivalent POWER5 systems and approximately 30% higher than equivalent
POWER5+ systems. Improved performance compared to POWER5 and POWER5+ models
is also realized for Lotus Domino Mail and Calendar Users (approximately 35%
improvement over similarly configured POWER5+ 570 model) and the IBM internal
WebSphere Application Server stock broker benchmark application Trade6 (approximately
45% improvement over similarly configured POWER5+ 570 model). This is accomplished
within the same footprint, electrical power, and cooling parameters as the POWER5+ system.
With its advanced virtualization technologies, the System i POWER6 570 can run multiple
operating systems and application environments simultaneously. System i POWER6 570
shares the following key characteristics with POWER5+ technology models:
13
Security and virus resistance

The ability to run i5/OS, Linux and AIX 5L applications on a single system and
integrate IBM eServer xSeries (System x) servers running Windows or Linux
See 2.1.1, Operating systems and editions on page 16, for supported release levels.
Advanced Power Virtualization feature for AIX and Linux support
Micro-Partitioning (up to 10 partitions per processor, 160 per system)
Simultaneous multithreading (SMT) where a single processor operates as two processors
Dynamic logical partition (LPAR) movement of processor capacity, memory, and I/O
devices
Capacity on Demand options supported on POWER5+ models:
Permanent Capacity Upgrade on Demand (CUoD) for processors and permanent
CUoD for memory
Trial Capacity on Demand (CoD)
On/Off CoD
Continued support of most HSL loop and HSL I/O enclosures currently supported on
POWER5 systems
i5/OS V5R4M0 RAID hot spare option (introduced in October 2007)
This option allows one or more disk drives to be standing by (hot spare). If a drive fails, the
second drive is automatically brought online in place of the failed drive. This option
minimizes the time that the array is running unprotected and is available for disk
controllers running either RAID-5 or RAID-6. At least one drive per disk controller is
required for the arrays protected. This protection option is not applicable to mirrored
configurations.
Using either a Service Tools interface or an iSeries Navigator interface (select
Configuration and Service Hardware), you configure a RAID set with a hot spare to
enable this automated function. See the #0347 RAID Hot Spare Specify described in 4.10,
Disk units on page 264, for more information.
The following new capabilities and offerings are offered exclusively on the 9406-MMA:
Utility Capacity on Demand (Utility CoD)
With Utility Capacity on Demand, granularity can be achieved down to a single 9406-MMA
processor minute. When enabled, it can automatically provide additional processor
capability when a workload peak occurs. See 2.7, Capacity on Demand on page 39, for
more information about all POWER6 CoD capabilities.
P30 software across the 1 to 16 processor activations
This feature offers significant cost advantages compared to the POWER5
technology-based 570 models.
i5/OS and Capacity Backup Editions
These editions are the only two software editions that are available. No Standard nor
Enterprise Edition is available. The i5/OS and Capacity Backup Editions offers significant
cost advantages compared to the POWER5 technology-based 570 models.
12X loop technology (for POWER6) supporting the 12X I/O enclosure (#5796), also called
a 12X channel
POWER6 570 system unit can have up to two GX adapters. An HSL-2 GX adapter #1800
allows a loop to attach up to six HSL I/O enclosures. The system unit 12X Channel GX
Adapter #1802 allows a loop to attach up to four 12X I/O enclosures.
14
Each POWER6 570 system unit can have up to one of the following adapter combinations:
Two HSL-2 GX adapters
Two 12X GX adapters
One HSL-2 GX adapter and one 12X GX adapter
12X is a new loop for I/O attachment technology. The 12 refers to the number of wires
within the 12X cable. Potentially, 12X technology offers up to 50% more bandwidth than
HSL technology.
12X loop technology is based upon the participation of IBM with the InfiniBand Trade
Association (IBTA). IBM 12X support is not InfiniBand compliant.
HSL I/O enclosures must be attached to an HSL loop. 12X I/O enclosures must be
attached to a 12X loop. HSL and 12X enclosures cannot be mixed on the same loop
because they are not compatible.
For System i POWER6 model 570 models, the only supported I/O drawer supporting 12X
loop attachment is the #5796 12X I/O Drawer. Two #5796 drawers can be enclosed in a
#7314 enclosure. The #5796 has the following key characteristics:
Six high-speed, PCI-X DDR slots per #5796
Dual mode or IOP-less IOAs only (no IOP support)
The #5796 is similar to the HSL #5790 with the following key differences:
The #5796 can support higher workload levels.

The #5790 has six PCI-X slots, which can support IOPs.
The #5790 has a maximum of six 5790s per HSL loop.
Note: The #5796 is supported only on the 570 (POWER6) model.

Disk controllers for attaching disks in the #5786 EXP24 Disk Drawer is supported in both
an HSL I/O enclosure and a 12X I/O enclosure. The #5786 is supported also on System i
Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890 and 520, 550, 570, 595 and POWER6 570.
The 5xx systems (POWER5 and POWER6) can be clustered. HSL-attached I/O units can
be switched, assuming that all I/O units have the faster HSL-2 adapters, indicated by
#6417 and #9517.
#5636 or #5639 Integrated Virtual Ethernet (IVE)
When ordering a 9406-MMA processor enclosure (identified by #5801), specify either a
#5636 or #5639 IVE. The Host Ethernet Adapter (HEA) is the term used in most system
documentation for IVE. This adapter replaces the POWER5 technology-based embedded
two port Ethernet Adapter in the system unit. You must specify one of the two available
processor enclosure adapters:
#5636: Two Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbps ports and two serial ports
#5639: Four Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbps ports and one serial port
These adapters are currently supported only in the 9406-MMA system unit or one of the
addition three processor enclosures. These adapters are not supported in an I/O tower or
drawer. IBM manufacturing installs this adapter in its own special slot. It does not use a
PCI slot. You can see where this adapter is placed in 2.5.5, Model 9406-MMA back view
on page 33.
These adapters provide significant options for use in a system with multiple partitions.
Each port can be owned by a different partition, or multiple MAC addresses can allow up
to eight partitions to share a port. A maximum of 16 MAC addresses is supported with the
#5636. A maximum of 32 MAC addresses is supported with the #5639.
For more information, refer to Chapter 6, Integrated Virtual Ethernet on page 329.
15
Support for a new larger capacity 282 GB disk drive

This disk drive is not currently supported as a load source device.
The new software offering Value Packs for Popular i5/OS Software Products, which
includes DB2 Value Pack for i5/OS with optional features for Database, and Operations
Value Pack for i5/OS with optional features for operations management
These value packs are designed to offer these valuable software products, at a savings, to
clients who purchase a new POWER6 570, which no longer bundles these software
products in the base configuration. See Chapter 11, Software enhancements on
page 433, for more information about all software capabilities announced October 2007,
including MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS and DB2 Web Query for System i.
We present more information about these capabilities, which were announced in October
2007, later in this paper. The remainder of this chapter focuses on the key POWER6 on
System i capabilities.
The following table gives a quick glance at the announcement and availability dates for the
System i POWER6 570.
Model and processor
Announce date
General availability date
Withdrawn from marketing
POWER6 570 #7380
24 July 2007
14 September 2007
---
2.1.1 Operating systems and editions

The 9406-MMA supports i5/OS, Linux, and AIX 5L partitions at the following release levels:
i5/OS V5R4 with cumulative PTF package level C7226540 or later and with Licensed
Internal Code level V5R4M5 (indicated on physical media as SLIC RS545-A or later)
AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 with Technology Level 5200-10 or later
AIX 5L for POWER V5.3 with Technology Level 5300-06 or later
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP1 for POWER or later
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4.5 for POWER or later
The AIX and Linux release levels are identical to those supported on the System p POWER6,
9117-MMA model.
Two new System i editions simplify choices. The POWER6 570 delivers product flexibility with
two editions: one i5/OS and one Capacity BackUp. Zero 5250 online transaction processing
(OLTP) capacity is included in either the i5/OS or Capacity BackUp Editions, but it can be
added on a per-processor basis using 5250 Enterprise Enablement features.
Notes:
Starting with a single i5/OS edition, the 9406-MMA can be customized by a processor
to run multiple transaction processing, collaborative processing, and application
processing workloads.
The single 5250 workstation job exception applies to either the i5/OS edition or
Capacity BackUp edition, as it does, for example, with a POWER5+ 570 Standard
Edition. That is, a single 5250 session can be used to perform necessary functions. To
operate multiple active 5250 sessions, you can purchase a 5250 OLTP Enterprise
Enablement per processor or an all processors option. Enterprise Enablement is
separate from the 9406-MMA editions.
16
2.1.2 System unit and features

The i5/OS Edition of the POWER6 570 is available as a 1/4-way, 2/8-way, 3/12-way (via
miscellaneous equipment specification (MES) only), or 4/16-way system, while the Capacity
BackUp Edition is available as a 1/4-way, 1/8-way, or 2/16-way system. Each POWER6 570
system unit (processor enclosure) supports two dual-core processor cards and up to six
Serially Attached SCSI (SAS) technology disk drives.
Each processor card supports twelve buffered memory slots (dual inline memory module
(DIMM) DDR2) that allow memory to be plugged into the processor card (direct attach).
Memory is plugged in quads.
#7830 4.7 GHz processor (0/2-way) processor card (two per enclosure or node).
That is there are two processor cores per processor card.
8 MB L2 cache per processor card
32 MB L3 cache per processor card
One slimline DVD drive slot
Two USB 2.0 ports for optional AIX/Linux partition usage only
IVE card
One or the other of the following mandatory options are installed, depending upon your
initial order:
Option 1: Four 1 Gb Ethernet ports and one serial port #5639
Option 2: Two 1 GB Ethernet ports and two serial ports #5636
One service interface card
Two Hardware Management Console (HMC) ports and two SPCN ports
Six PCI slots
Four Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe) slots (three if an optional
HSL/12X GX card is used for a second loop in a processor enclosure)
Two PCI-X DDR slots (IOP-less IOAs only)
PCIe adapters and slots offer potentially faster throughput than are available with PCI,
PCI-X, and PCI-X double data rate (DDR) technology. However, PCIe adapters that are
currently available are approximately the same speed as PCI-X adapters.
PCIe (supported only on POWER6 technology-based models) uses a term called lanes to
refer to its capabilities. Each lane can support a data rate of 2.5 Gb/sec in both send and
receive. The slowest and smallest PCIe comes in one lane (referred to as X1) with the
fastest PCIe up to 32 lanes (x32). Think of lanes as data paths. The more lanes there are,
the faster the data can flow, which is similar to an auto highway with multiple driving lanes.
The size of the adapter and slot vary proportionally to the number of lanes. Since the
physical size varies for both adapter and slot, an adapter with more lanes than the slot has
cannot physically be plugged together. In the reverse, if the slot has more lanes than the
adapter, then the adapter can be plugged into the slot. In summary, PCIe adapters are
supported in a slot with an equal number of lanes or less.
All four PCIe slots in the POWER6 570 processor enclosure are x8.
PCI, PCI-X, and PCI-X DDR cards have the same form factor. A PCIe card has a different
form factor. All PCIe and all PCI-X DDR slots do not support an IOP feature card. As of the
July 2007 announcement, PCIe slots are available only within the POWER6 processor
enclosure.
17
PCIe adapters and slots are physically incompatible with PCI, PCI-X, and PCI-X DDR
adapters and slots. PCIe adapters and slots only support IOP-less mode of operation.
PCI-X DDR slots only support IOP-less operation.
PCIe adapters (IOAs) announced in July 2007 (i5/OS V5R4M0 with Licensed Internal
Code V5R4M5 required) include:
#2893/9693 PCIe 2-Line WAN with Modem (i5/OS, Linux, and AIX)
#2894/9694 PCIe 2-Line WAN with Modem (CIM) (i5/OS, Linux, and AIX)
#5773 PCIe 4Gb Fibre Channel Adapter (Linux and AIX)
#5767 PCIe 1GB Ethernet UPT 2-Port IOA (i5/OS, Linux, and AIX)
#5768 PCIe 1Gb Ethernet Fiber 2-Port IOA (i5/OS, Linux, and AIX)
The PCIe Ethernet adapters support Operations Console over LAN. The PCIe 2-Line
WAN with Modem IOAs support the use of i5/OS Operations Console Direct Attach. This
i5/OS console option uses a special cable #0367 attached to a user-supplied Windows
workstation.
For these WAN and Ethernet adapters, direct Systems Network Architecture (SNA) is not
supported. For the WAN adapters, this means the Create Line SDLC (CRTLINSDLC)
command is not supported. SNA via i5/OS SNA Enterprise Extender configuration
(preferred) or AnyNet is supported.
If you need direct support of CRTLINSDLC, you must use a WAN or LAN adapter
associated with a supported IOP.
Six SAS disk slots
Integrated disk and DVD controller with zero write cache
Redundant cooling
Redundant power including redundant power regulators and dual power cords
One dedicated GX slot for either a HSL-2/RIO-G or 12X loop
One optional GX slot for a second HSL-2/RIO-G or 12X loop (blocks PCIe slot C6 does not
have to match the GX adapter in the dedicated slot)
Rack mount specify code
For items that are specifically orderable, you can find more information in Chapter 4,
POWER5, POWER6, and System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890: Features and
placement on page 135.
18
Important: The POWER6 570 does not use edition-to-edition or server-to-server feature
changes. For each increase in processor capacity of one to four, add one #5801 enclosure
via an MES order. This means that the server or edition feature code cannot be used to
know the maximum n-way of a system configuration.
When adding a #5801 processor enclosure, for each #5801, you must also add the
following items:
A #0423 feature
This feature counts the number of enclosures.
At least one processor activation
One IVE feature, which is also known as one HEA
You must select either the 2-port or 4-port adapter or accept the new order default for
one of these adapters.
One Service Interface feature
The appropriate Processor Fabric and Service Processor Cables to connect the
enclosures together
At least two memory features and their activation features
Alternatively you might already have enough extra memory features and activations on
the system to move at least 8 DIMMs to each new enclosure.
Optionally, you can also add:
One DVD drive

One to six SAS disk drives
PCI cards supported in the enclosure
One to two, HSL/12X loops adapters
I/O enclosures supported by the HSL or 12X loop adapter or adapters
I/O enclosure, I/O controller, IOP (if necessary), and I/O devices desired to be placed
within a supporting I/O enclosure
2.1.3 i5/OS Edition features

POWER6 570 i5/OS configuration 1 (#5460)
Hardware
1/4-way system with one processor activation
One PCIe WAN IOA
LPAR capable
Software
Licensing for i5/OS (one processor license - P30 tier)

iSeries Access (5722-XW1) unlimited users
IBM Director for i5/OS (5722-DR1)
IBM Web Enablement (5722-WE2)

Hardware
2/8-way system with two processor activations
One PCIe WAN IOA
LPAR capable
19
Software
Licensing for i5/OS (one processor license, P30 tier)


Hardware
4/16-way system with four processor activations
One PCIe WAN IOA
LPAR capable
Software

2.1.4 Capacity BackUp configurations

POWER6 570 Capacity BackUp configuration 1 (#7053)
Hardware
One PCIe WAN IOA
Software
Licensing for i5/OS (one processor license - P30 tier)


Hardware
One PCIe WAN IOA
Software


Hardware
2/16-way system with two processor activations
One PCIe WAN IOA
Software
20

POWER6 570 i5/OS MES 3/12-way configuration

Hardware
3/12-way system with four processor activations
Configured only with an MES upgrade via either one of the following options:
Existing 1/4-way plus two #5801 processor enclosures

Existing 2/8-way plus one #5801 processor enclosure
One PCIe WAN IOA

LPAR capable
Software

2.2 System i POWER6 model 570 minimum and maximum

capacities
The following tables provide the minimum and maximum system capacities for the System i
POWER6 model 570. The values are package dependent.
CPW: CPW has been the standard performance rating metric used for years to compare
relative processor ratings among the IBM System i family of processor models. 5250 CPW
is an approximate value that represents the amount of total CPW processing power to be
used to perform 5250 OLTP work. 5250 CPW has been known as Interactive CPW on
earlier System i models.
Do not use CPW as the sole metric for sizing workloads on any IBM System i model.
Additional considerations include disk I/O-per-second rates and application workload
attributes. We recommend that you size an IBM System i model workload using a sizing
tool, such as the IBM Systems Workload Estimator, which you can access at the following
address:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/perfmgmt/sizing.html
You can also use Performance Navigator from the Midrange Performance Group, which
you can learn more about at the following address:
http://www.mpginc.com
In addition, consider using BMC Patrol for iSeries - Predict at the following address:
http://www.bmc.com
21
To review the footnotes for the following table, see 2.3, Notes for System i POWER6 model
570 on page 23.
Model 9406-MMA
Processor feature
#7380 x 2
#7380 x 4
#7380 x 3
#7380 x 3
#7380 x 8
#7380 x 2
#7380 x 4
#7380 x 8
Server feature
#4910
#4911
MES only
MES only
#4912
#4922
#4923
#4924
Number/type/
speed of processor
1/4/
POWER6/
4.7 GHz
2/8/
POWER6/
4.7 GHz
3/12/
POWER6/
4.7 GHz
2/12/
POWER6/
4.7 GHz
4/16/
POWER6/
4.7 GHz
1/4/
POWER6/
4.7 GHz
1/8/
POWER6/
4.7 GHz
2/16/
POWER6/
4.7 GHz
Processor CPW (min/max)
5500/
21200
10800/
40100
15500/
58000
10800/
58000
20100/
76900
5500/
21200
5500/
40100
10800/
76900
Mail and Calendar Users2a
12300/
47500
24200/
89700
34700/
130000
24200/
130000
45000/
172000
12300/
47500
12300/
89700
45000/
172000
0/21200
0/40100
0/58000
0/58000
0/76900
0/21200
0/40100
0/76900
with Enterprise
Enablement6c (single/max)
5500/
21200
5500/
40100
5500/
58000
5500/
58000
5500/
76900
5500/
21200
5500/
40100
5500/
76900
L2 Cache (MB) per dual core

processor
L3 Cache (MB) per dual core

processor
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
Main storage
(GB minimum/maximum)11
4/192
8/384
12/576
12/576
16/768
4/192
8/384
16/768
Main storage DDR2 DIMMs

(quads minimum/maximum)
2/6
4/12
6/18
6/18
8/24
2/6
4/12
8/24
10 (40)
20 (80)
30 (120)
30 (120)
40 (160)
10 (40)
10 (80)
20 (160)
Minimum i5/OS level/LIC level
V5R4 with
License
Internal
Code
V5R4M5
V5R4 with
License
Internal
Code
V5R4M5
V5R4 with
License
Internal
Code
V5R4M5
V5R4 with
License
Internal
Code
V5R4M5
V5R4 with
License
Internal
Code
V5R4M5
V5R4 with
License
Internal
Code
V5R4M5
V5R4 with
License
Internal
Code
V5R4M5
V5R4 with
License
Internal
Code
V5R4M5
Software group 6c
P30
P30
P30
P30
P30
P30
P30
P30
Integrated minimum7b
Total maximum 7a
154108
232009
386118
386118
387811
154108
232009
387811
DASD arms maximum
546
822
1368
1368
1374
546
822
1374
1374
Relative system performance1, 2
5250 CPW 5
LPAR (10)12
8
Disk storage (GB) 7d
546
822
1368
1368
1374
546
822
External LUNS
Internal arms (CEC)
546
822
1368
1368
1374
546
822
1374
System unit only
12
18
18
24
12
24
Physical packaging
Rack Design - EIA units
12
12
16
16
External ports RIO-G(12X)
4 (4)
8 (8)
12 (12)
12 (12)
16 (16)
4 (4)
8 (8)
16 (16)
Max external loops

RIO-G(12X)14
Max HSL I/O drawers
2 (2)
4 (4)
6 (6)
6 (6)
8 (8)
2 (2)
4 (4)
8 (8)
12
24
36
36
48
12
24
48
Max 12X I/O drawers
16
24
24
32
16
32
Max PCI card slots - HSL

(system unit only)10
173 (5)
346 (10)
519 (15)
519 (15)
692 (20)
173 (5)
346 (10)
692 (20)
22
Model 9406-MMA
Processor feature
#7380 x 2
#7380 x 4
#7380 x 3
#7380 x 3
#7380 x 8
#7380 x 2
#7380 x 4
#7380 x 8
Server feature
#4910
#4911
MES only
MES only
#4912
#4922
#4923
#4924
Max PCI card slots - 12X(system

unit only)10
53(5)
106(10)
159(15)
159(15)
212(20)
53(5)
106(10)
212(20)
Communication lines 3
320
480
480
480
480
320
480
480
LAN ports (IVE/HEA only in

CEC)
Integrated xSeries Servers
96 (4)
128 (8)
128 (12)
128 (12)
128 (16)
96 (4)
128 (8)
128 (16)
36
48
48
48
48
36
48
48
External xSeries Servers (IXA)
16
32
48
48
57
16
32
iSCSI
42
84
126
126
168
42
84
168
Twinaxial workstation controllers
134
180
180
180
180
134
180
180
Twinaxial workstations
5360
7200
7200
7200
7200
5360
7200
7200
Internal CD-ROM/Tape
Feature I/O Tower

Tape/CD-ROM/DVD
(combined system partition)
18 (25)
26 (36)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
18 (25)
26 (36)
26 (48)
External tape
(combined system) partition)
18 (36)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
18 (36)
26 (48)
26 (48)
External optical/CD/DVD
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
Cryptographic coprocessor
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
Cryptographic accelerator
4 (8)
4 (8)
4 (8)
4 (8)
4 (8)
4 (8)
4 (8)
4 (8)
Internal DVD-ROM/ DVD-RAM
2.3 Notes for System i POWER6 model 570

Note 1
CPW is used to measure the relative performance ratings of all System i model processors announced from September
1996 onward. The CPW value is measured on maximum configurations. The type and number of disk devices, the number
of workstation controllers, the amount of memory, the system model, other factors, and the application running determine
what performance is achievable. Do not use CPW to compare performance of System i models with other hardware
platforms or real-world i5/OS applications.
As a reminder, do not use CPW as the sole metric for sizing workloads on any IBM System i model. Additional
considerations include disk I/O-per-second rates and application workload attributes. We recommend that you size an
IBM System i model workload using a sizing tool, such as the IBM Systems Workload Estimator, which you can access
at the following address: http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/perfmgmt/sizing.html
You can also use Performance Navigator from the Midrange Performance Group, which you can learn more about at the
following address: http://www.mpginc.com
Note: The System i POWER6 model 570 requires i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5.
Note 2
Processor performance represents the relative performance (maximum capacity) of a processor feature running CPW in
a client/server environment. Processor capacity is achievable when the commercial workload is not constrained by main
storage and direct access storage device (DASD). Performance of the 5250 CPW represents the relative performance
that is available to perform host-centric workloads. The amount of 5250 CPW capacity consumed reduces the available
processor capacity by the same amount.
23
Note 2a
Mail and Calendar Users (MCU) is a relative performance measurement derived by performing mail and calendar
functions using Lotus Domino and Lotus Notes clients. The MCU workload represents users on a Notes client who are
reading, updating, or deleting documents in an e-mail database. It also represents users who perform lookups in the
Domino directory and schedule calendar appointments and invitations. Reported values reflect 70% processor utilization
to allow for growth and peak loads in excess of customer workload estimates.
While MCU ratings provide a better means to compare Domino capacities relative to other System i models running i5/OS
than CPW, do not use MCU as a sizing guideline for the number of Domino users in a real world environment.
For sizing, we recommend that you use a formal sizing tool, such as IBM Systems Workload Estimator, which you can
find on the Web at the following address: http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/perfmgmt/sizing.html
To learn about other sizing references, see Chapter 16, System i family upgrades on page 599.
Note 3
One line is used if the #5544 System Console on Operations Console is used. One line can be used if the #5548 System
Console on 100 Mbps Ethernet is selected and the #0367 Operations Console PCI Cable must be connected. The
numbers include the ECS line.
Note 4
There must be one DVD-ROM or DVD-RAM per system. See the details for each system.
Note 5
5250 CPW (Interactive) is an approximate value that reflects the amount of Processor CPW that can be used for
workloads performing 5250-based tasks. Keep in mind the following points:
The System i POWER6 model 570 i5/OS Edition provides zero CPW for 5250 work. Limited 5250 CPW is available
for a system administrator to user 5250 display device I/O to manage various aspects of the server. Multiple
administrative jobs exceed this capability.
There is a single job or console exception for interactive (5250 OLTP) work. This means that, when a single job within
an i5/OS partition (or the entire system i5/OS) is active and that job performs 5250 OLTP functions, almost total
processor capacity of that partition (or system) is available for the work being done by that single job. This is true
regardless of the system limitations associated with interactive application capacity.
Keep this in mind when performing certain functions, such as running a CPU-intensive query or service diagnostics.
When multiple jobs performing 5250 functions become active, the single job exception is no longer available and their
performance is severely restricted. When more than one job must be active, consider running these CPU-intensive
functions as batch jobs rather than from a 5250 workstation.
Note 6c
System i
POWER6
model 570
24
The System i System i POWER6 model 570 i5/OS Edition can add 5250 OLTP by using the 5250 Enterprise
Enablement features.
A task submitted through a 5250 session (5250 device or 5250 emulation) that does display or printer I/O requires
5250 CPW.
A task submitted through a 5250 session (5250 device or 5250 emulation) as a "batch" job is not considered 5250
OLTP work and does not require any 5250 CPW unless the task does display or printer I/O.
Maximum 5250 CPW is equivalent to the Processor CPW for the active processor.
Software group is determined by the combination of processor feature and edition feature. Display the QPRCFEAT
system value or DSPHDWRSC TYPE(*AHW) to display the processor feature code value. This value is also shown for
the Capacity Card CCIN value when using SST to perform a Capacity Upgrade on Demand. The following table provides
a cross-reference.
Processor
Server feature
Edition feature
Software
group
Processor feature code or QPRCFEAT

value
#7380
#4910 (0-4Way)
#5460 i5/OS
P30
#5460 (7054 with full 5250 Enterprise

Enablement)
#4911 (0-8Way)
#5461 i5/OS
P30

Enablement)
#4912 (0-16Way)
#5462 i5/OS
P30

Enablement)
MES to 12-Way
NA
P30

Enablement)
#4922 (0-4Way)
#7053 Capacity BackUp
P30

Enablement)
#4923
P30

Enablement)
#4924
P30

Enablement)
MES to 12-Way
MES to 12-Way Capacity

BackUp
P30
#7047(7019 with full 5250 Enterprise

Enablement)
Note 7
External DASD cannot exceed the maximum system capacity or the maximum number of disk arms.
Note 7a
The total maximum DASD capacity (no mirroring or RAID protections) assumes 282.25 GB disk drives, which were
announced in July 2007. External DASD cannot exceed the maximum system capacity or the maximum number of disk
arms. Note the following points:
Depending upon your use of mirroring or RAID-5/RAID-6 protection, protected maximum storage is less than what is
listed here.
The 282.25 GB disk drive is not currently supported as a load source disk. Depending upon the protection
mechanism that you choose, the maximum storage is also further reduced with a 141 GB load source disk drive.
Note 7b
With the announcement of SAN Boot, there is no longer a requirement for an internal disk. San Boot requires the #2847
PCI IOP for SAN Load Source.
Note 7d
Hot spares are not considered configured units. Therefore, they do not count against the system maximums. The
maximum number of GB stated in this 570 (POWER6) table for each server feature is less than the stated maximum value.
The maximum value assumes that the maximum number of supported disk drives are configured and each such disk has
a 282.25 GB capacity. i5/OS does not yet support load source capability using the 282.25 GB disk drives. Therefore, since
IBM also requires the load source disks to be protected (mirrored or RAID (minimum of three disks) protection), the
maximum disk storage values shown in the table must be reduced by the number and size of disks dedicated to load
source and load source protection. For example, assuming two disk mirrored load source configuration using SAS drives,
each of 139.5 GB, actual maximum disk storage on a 16-way configuration can be estimated to be approximately:
387825 GB (2 x 142.75 GB) = 387539 GB
This is still approximately 387 TB.
Note 8
i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 with the latest level of the LIC and Cumulative PTF package available
for the IBM System i POWER6 570 with a 4.7 GHz processor. For the latest information, refer to the IBM Prerequisite
page at: http://www-912.ibm.com/e_dir/eServerPrereq.nsf/UpgradeCategories/Hardware?opendocument
Note 9
Does not apply to POWER6 570 models.
Note 10
The processor enclosure (system unit, also referenced as CEC) has four PCIe slots and two PCI-X DDR slots. When a
second RIO-G or 12X loop is required in a processor enclosure, one PCIe card slot (C6) in that system unit is blocked by
the RIO-G or 12X adapter. The processor enclosure does not support IOP cards. PCIe slots are currently not supported
in any supported I/O tower or drawer enclosure.
Note 11
0/32 GB memory DIMMs are not available until 30 November 2007.
Note 12
A maximum of 10 active partitions per activated processor. A maximum of 64 i5/OS partitions applies to any model with
six or more activated processors. There is a maximum of 32 processors per i5/OS partition (Model 595 or larger only).
Note 13
Does not apply to POWER6 570 models.
Note 14
RIO-G and 12X expansion drawers/towers cannot be mixed on a loop. However, one loop can be RIO-G and the other
loop can be 12X.
2.4 Hardware Management Console

To support connectivity to any POWER6 model, HMC Version 7 Release 3.1.0 or later is
required. Version 7 R3.1.0 introduces a browser-based interface. To connect your browser to
the HMC running V7R3.1.0, enable remote Web access on the HMC and enter a URL similar
to the following example:
https://HMC host name or HMC IP address
The required 9406-MMA system firmware level is version EM310. The specific
system-firmware release level of this version of EM310 shipped with the System i model was
identified in September 2007. Refer to the POWER code matrix at the following Web address,
25
which contains links to several sets of HMC information, including the supported HMC level
and required System i firmware level:
http://www14.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/power5cm/supportedcode.html
The latest HMC levels are posted at the HMC Web site, which is available at the end of this
section.
The following HMC models are supported:
7042-C06 (announced on 22 May 2007)

7042-CR4 (announced on 22 May 2007)
7310-C05 (withdrawn from marketing on 21 September 2007)
7310-C04 (withdrawn from marketing on 31 August 2006)
7310-C03 (withdrawn from marketing on 30 June 2005)
7310-CR3 (withdrawn from marketing on 27 April 2007)
7310-CR2 (withdrawn from marketing on 29 April 2005)
HMC V7R3.1.0 can also operate with POWER5 technology-based systems running at
system-firmware level SF240_299 or later.
If an HMC Machine Type 7310 is attached to a POWER5 based system, it must be updated
to HMC licensed machine code Version 7 Release 3.1.0 before attaching to a 9406-MMA.
HMC licensed machine code Version 7 Release 3.1.0 provides a Web browser-based
interface to the HMC. The following browsers are supported:
Firefox 1.5.0.6 or later
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
WebSM is not supported as an interface to HMC Version 7 Release 3.1.0 or later. WebSM
continues to be supported to HMC Version 6 or older.
For more information about supported HMC and firmware levels and updating HMC and
firmware levels, refer to the HMC Web page at:
http://www14.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/hmc/home.html
2.5 9406 System i POWER6 model 570 system unit schematics

In the following sections, we give an overview of 9406-MMA processor and memory
technologies, followed by drawings of the front, back, and top views of the system unit.
2.5.1 Model 9406-MMA Processor Card layout

The 9406-MMA processors run at 4.7 GHz. Each POWER6 processor card has a single-chip
module (SCM), which contains two processor cores as shown in the second figure on the
next page. Each processor card also contains an L3 cache that is positioned right next to the
SCM as shown. Each processor enclosure contains two processor cards, four processors.
The POWER6 processor core and processor card are similar in structure to the POWER5
technology-based processor technology but with more advanced L2 and L3 cache access
and memory access.
POWER5 and POWER5+ had approximately 2 MB (1.88 MB) of L2 cache that was shared by
the two cores on the same processor card. POWER6 has 4 MB of L2 cache for each core, for
26
a total of 8 MB on the card (chip). For applications that access a large amount of data, this
increase of more than 4 times in L2 cache size significantly improves performance.
Note: This description is in the context of processor cores packaged on the same
processor card as the L2 cache. At run time, all processor cores in the system can access
all L2 and L3 cache and main storage in the entire system as necessary.
The following figure shows the POWER6 processor card typology.
L3
Alti
Vec
P6
Core
P6
Core
L3
Control
4 MB
L2
4 MB
L2
Alti
Vec
Fabric Bus
Controller
Memory
Control
GX Bus Control
GX+ Bridge
Memory+
Processor technology upgrades of POWER6 over POWER5 (and IBM POWER4) can be
considered by using the following multiple processor technologies graphics.
27
POWER4
POWER4
Core
POWER5
Core
POWER4
Core
L2
POWER6
POWER5
L3
L3
Ctl
Alti POWER6
Vec Core
POWER5
Core
L2
L3
Distributed
Switch
4 MB
L2
Fabric Bus
Controller
Mem
Ctl
L3
Mem Ctl
4 MB
L2
Enhanced
Distributed Switch
L3
Cntrl
GX
Bus
L3
Ctrl
POWER6 Alti
Core Vec
GX
Bus
Memory
Cntrl
Memory
GX Bus Cntrl
GX+ Bridge
Memory
Memory+
The following key POWER6 processor technology characteristics are more advanced than
POWER5:
Ultra-high frequency Dual-Core chip approximately 3.5 GHz up to 4.7 GHz
System i 570 (POWER6) supports only the 4.7 GHz processor card. Top frequency speed
on POWER5 is the POWER5+ processor on the 595 model running at 2.3 GHz.
POWER5 can have five instructions in the process of execution, while POWER6 can have
six instructions, with further enhancement to SMT which was introduced with POWER5.
POWER5 SMT supports two SMT threads with alternate fetch and alternate dispatch (up
to five instructions). POWER6 SMT supports priority-based dispatch, with simultaneous
dispatch from two threads (up to seven instructions).
POWER6 has a large L2 cache for each processor core on the same chip, compared to
the shared large L2 cache on POWER5 processor cards.
POWER6 has multiple path accesses (indicated by the arrows shown in the previous
figure) between the processor core and L2 cache, between each L2 cache and a new
fabric bus controller, two paths between the fabric bus controller and the memory
controller, and four paths between the fabric bus controller and the advanced GX+ bus
controller.
The AltiVec and decimal floating point arithmetic capabilities
AIX V5L 5.3 and later V6 take advantage of native floating point decimal support. IBM and
other companies are licensed to use the AltiVec technology, which provides a software
model that accelerates the performance of various software applications as it runs on
reduced instruction set computing (RISC) microprocessors. The AltiVec technology vector
unit fetches and interprets instructions as well as processes multiple pieces of data
simultaneously. AltiVec instructions significant accelerate communications, multimedia,
and other performance-driven applications.
For more information about AltiVec, do a Web search or go to the Freescale
Semiconductor, Inc. Web site at:
28
http://www.freescale.com
POWER6 technology has additional processor redundancy capabilities over POWER5

while delivering outstanding conservation of energy consumed for equivalent performance
on earlier technology. Originally available power monitoring capabilities will be enhanced
during 2008 for POWER6 as IBM rolls out a process to monitor and control energy
consumption on all of its processor platforms and I/O hardware.
2.5.2 System i POWER6 model 570 memory layout

The following figure shows the physical layout of POWER6 memory DIMMs relative to the
processor card.
POWER6 570 4.7 GHz 0/2-way Processor Card

Buffered DDR2 Memory
Up to 677 MHz
12 DIMM slots per card
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
Front
Back
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
L3
P P
L2
L2
The buffered memory of POWER6 enables both a higher bandwidth from the memory and a
larger capacity. The larger capacity is important for Database and Java applications that use
a large amount of memory. Larger bandwidth is important to feed the faster processor, higher
bandwidth I/O operations, and the movement or copying of data from one memory location to
another.
With POWER5 technology, a bus connects two DIMMs to the processor. With POWER6, a
bus connects the processor card to one DIMM. A second bus connects the first DIMM to a
second DIMM, and a third bus connects the second DIMM to a third DIMM. Because each
bus has two connections on it, the rate at which data can be transferred across the bus is
higher than the POWER5 structure. Data from the third DIMM is transferred or buffered from
one bus to another at this same higher rate. This daisy chain of DIMMs allows more DIMMs to
be connected (increasing capacity) while maintaining the higher bandwidth.
On POWER6 models, all memory is on demand. You must purchase at least half the capacity
worth of DDR2 buffered memory activations when buying from IBM. Each 1 GB buffered
DDR2 activation feature is #5680.
For best flexibility, memory activation is associated with the system, not the memory DIMMs.
If you move memory to a different system, DDR2 buffered memory activations remain on the
original system and remain available for any DIMMs that are plugged in.
On/Off memory capability is billed in 1 GB days.
29
An HMC is required for memory activation. Memory activation codes are entered through the
HMC. The following table shows the available memory features for the System i POWER6
model 570.
Memory size
Feature number
Memory speed
0/2 GB
#5692
667 MHz
0/4 GB
#5693
667 MHz
0/8 GB
#5694
667 MHz
0/16 GB
#5695
533 MHz
0/32 GB
#5696
400 MHz
Before you order memory, you must understand the following general rules:
You must have at least one memory feature per processor card. Therefore there are at
least two features per processor enclosure.
Generally we recommend that you install a similar total GB memory per processor card
across the system.
Memory DIMMs of the same MHz can be mixed on the same processor card, independent
of their capacity. Memory DIMMs of different MHz can be mixed on the same system or
processor enclosure, but the #5696 0/32 GB feature (400 MHz) cannot be mixed on the
same processor card with smaller GB memory features (667 MHz or 533 MHz).
The 0/2 GB, 0/4 GB, and 0/8 GB memory features (667 MHz) can be mixed on the same
processor card with the 0/16 GB memory feature (533 MHz).
In summary, keep in mind the following points regarding memory frequency:
You cannot mix 400 MHz memory DIMMs with a 667/533 MHz memory DIMMs on the
same processor card.
You can mix 667 MHz and 533 MHz memory DIMMs on the same processor card.
If different frequency (speed) memory DIMMs are used, the system will run all memory at
the lowest MHz installed.
Generally having more memory compensates for slower memory.
Consider taking advantage of 12 versus 8 (POWER5) DIMM slots to use higher MHz of
memory.
For maximum memory bandwidth, use 8 DIMM slots per processor card. The third set of 4
DIMM slots adds capacity, but not bandwidth. This results in a modest performance gain
over having more memory.
For best performance, from a memory viewpoint, all memory slots should be filled with the
same size and speed of memory DIMMs. This results in a modest performance gain over
having 12 DIMM slots to use higher MHz of memory.
All memory is on demand:
You must purchase at least half the capacity of DDR2 buffered memory activations
when buying from IBM.
For best flexibility, memory activations are associated with the system, not the memory
DIMMs. If you move memory to a different system, DDR2 buffered memory activations
remain on the original system and remain available for any DIMMS plugged in.
30
The 1 GB buffered DDR2 memory activation feature is #5680. On/Off memory

capability is billed in 1 GB days.
An HMC is required for memory activation.
Important: Memory conversions from the POWER5+ 2.2 GHz 570 DDR2 memory cards
are available during initial upgrade to the 9406-MMA. For more information, see 2.9,
Migration considerations on page 40.
2.5.3 Model 9406-MMA top view

The following figure is a drawing showing the top view of the 9406-MMA.
Service
Interface
Card
CPU Card #1
CPU Card #2
CPU Reg #1
OpPanel
CPU Reg #2
CPU Reg #3
IVE (HEA) Adapter
Blower #1
GX+ Slot #2
GX+ Slot #1 or PCI-E Slot
PCI-X Slot (DDR)
Remote
Media
PCI-X Slot (DDR)

Blower #2
PCI-E Slot
PCI-E Slot
PCI-E Slot
31
2.5.4 Model 9406-MMA front view

The following figure is a drawing showing the front view of the 9406-MMA.
P2-C1 through P2-C2 for processor/memory

P2-C3 through P2-C5 for power regulators
P3-D1 through P3-D6 for SAS disk drives
32
2.5.5 Model 9406-MMA back view

The following figure is a drawing showing the back view of the 9406-MMA.
Notes:
P1-C1 through P1-C3 and PCI-C6 are PCIe slots (x8 long).
P1-C1 through P1-C3 are full length. P1-C6 is short form.
P1-C4 and P1-C5 are PCI-X slots: 64-bit, DDR technology.
(1) GX slots for either HSL-2 or 12X adapters, one base. As shown, P1-C9 is a base 12X and
P1-C6-C8 is an optional HSL-2 adapter. When a second GX adapter is configured, P1-C6 is not
available as a PCIe slot.
(2) The IVE (HEA) is shown as a specify feature #5636, two Ethernet ports (P1-C10-T1,
P1-C10-T2) and two serial ports (P1-C10-T3, P1-C10-T4) of which port 2, location P1-C10-T3
(top port) is used by i5/OS for uninterruptible power supply communications. A #1827 cable is
required.
Alternatively, feature #5639 IVE (HEA) four Ethernet ports with one serial port may be specified.
The serial port is used by i5/OS for uninterruptible power supply communication only. A #1827
cable is required.
P1-C11-T1 and P1-C11-T2 are for SPCN 0 and SPCN 1 connections.
P1-C11-T3 is for HMC 1 and P1-C11-T4 is for HMC 2 connections.
P1-C11-T5 is used if connecting multiple processor enclosures. This port connects the service
interface cards.
P1-C10-C1 is used by IBM service personnel.
33
The following sections provide examples that show the front and back views of multiple
processor enclosures that are connected together and the fabric cables that are used to
connect the enclosures.
2.5.6 9406-MMA Processor enclosure fabric connection cables

The following figure shows the front view of the fabric cables and associated features for new
and MES configurations. Connecting the processor enclosures is generally similar to
connecting the POWER5-base 570 models. The text color in the figure corresponds to the
fabric cable that is shown.
3 enclosures
2 enclosures
4 enclosures
pSeries
pSeries
pSeries
pSeries
pSeries
pSeries
pSeries
pSeries
One 2-drawer cable

#8877 (initial) / #3660 (MES)
Two 2-drawer cables

#8877 (initial) / #3660 (MES)
One 3-drawer cable
#3664 (MES)
On initial order, no-charge 8xxx features

As add 1/4-way drawers, add 3xxx
processor fabric cables no throw-away
34
pSeries
Three 2-drawer cables

#8877 (initial) / #3660 (MES)
Two 3-drawer cables
#8977 (Initial) / #3664 (MES)
One 4-drawer cable
#8979 (initial) / #3665 (MES)
2.5.7 570 (POWER6) processor enclosure service processor cable

connections
The service processors within each processor enclosure need to be connected. The following
figure shows the fabric cable connections among the service processors. Note the feature
numbers listed within the figure.
Each processor enclosure requires a Service Interface

Card #5648. A service processor is included in each
service interface card. For multi-enclosure
configurations, you must connect these cards.
8-way
12-way
2-drawer cable
#8847 on initial 9406-MMA order
#5657 for MES orders
3-drawer cable
#5658
16-way
4-drawer cable
#8849 or
#5660
Note: In summary, a 12-way (3-processor enclosures) system requires one #3664 fabric
cable feature and two #3660/#8877 fabric cable features that are attached to the front of
the system. If you are upgrading from a 2-enclosure configuration, one of the required
#3660/#8877 cables is already present. A 3-processor enclosure system also requires a
3-enclosure service interface cable #5658 to be attached to the rear of the system.
See the 3-processor enclosure (drawers) graphics in the previous figure in this section and
the figure in 2.5.6, 9406-MMA Processor enclosure fabric connection cables on page 34.
35
2.6 System i POWER6 model 570 processors

The POWER6 570 initial installation is IBM installed. Processor upgrades within models are
performed by IBM Service Representatives.
Processor
Processor
activation
feature
Server
feature
#7380
#5403
#4910
Edition
feature
#7380 4.7GHz Proc Card 0/2-Way

Includes two #7380 0/2-way POWER6 4.7 GHz processors (CCIN 53CF)
Includes one #7783 Base Processor Activation feature
Includes 32 MB L3 cache per processor card
Includes twelve main memory DIMM slots per processor card
#5460
#7380
#5403
#4911
#5403
#4912
#5403
#4922
#5403
#4923
#5403
#4924
#7063 CBU Edition for #4924

Provides limited 5250 OLTP CPW
Includes eight #7380 0/2-way POWER6 4.7 GHz processors (CCIN 53CF)
Includes two #7783 Base Processor Activation features
#7063
36

Includes four #7380 0/2-way POWER6 4.7 GHz processors (CCIN 53CF)
#7058
#7380
#5462 i5/OS Edition for #4912

Includes two #7380 0/2way POWER6 4.7 GHz processors (CCIN 53CF)
#7053
#7380

Includes eight #7380 0/2-way POWER6 4.7 GHz processors (CCIN 53CF)
Includes four #7783 Base Processor Activation features
#5462
#7380

Includes four #7380 0/2-way POWER6 4.7 GHz processors (CCIN 53CF)
Includes two #7783 Base Processor Activation features
#5461
#7380
Model 9406-MMA processor

Model 9406-MMA CUoD and OLTP features

#5403
#5403 One Processor Activation

The #5403 One Processor Activation provides an activation code that can be used to permanently activate one processor
on a Capacity Upgrade on Demand system. One or more of these no-charge activation features can be ordered, depending
on the configuration rules.
#5404
#5404 Utility Billing 100 Proc Min

The #5404 Utility Billing 100 Proc Min provides payment for 100 minutes of temporary use of one processor, feature #7380.
When the system recognizes that non-reserve processors (permanently activated processors) that are assigned or
available to the uncapped partitions have been 100% utilized, and at least 10% of one processor is needed, then additional
processor resource is automatically applied and chargeable processor minutes start accruing. Minutes stop accruing when
the utilization level drops and the base processors assigned can handle the workload.
You can use the HMC to view all processor activation statistics including utility on demand processor utilization.
Each occurrence of this feature pays for one hundred processor minutes of usage. The purchase of this feature might occur
before or after use of the processor.
#5490
#5490 Enterprise Enablement

The #5490 Enterprise Enablement provides one processors worth of 5250 OLTP capacity that can be spread across
multiple physical processors or multiple partitions. A permanently activated processor and adequate i5/OS processor
license entitlements are prerequisites.
#5491
#5491 Full Enterprise Enable

The #5491 Full Enterprise Enable is ordered when full 5250 OLTP capability is required for all permanently activated
processors. Addtional i5/OS licenses may also be required.
#5656
#5656 On/Off 1Proc-1Day Billing

The #5656 On/Off 1Proc-1Day Billing feature is ordered to enable your server for On/Off Capacity on Demand. Once
enabled, processors on a temporary basis can be requested. An On/Off Capacity on Demand contract must be signed
before this feature can be ordered. On/off usage must be reported to IBM at least monthly. This information, which is used
to compute billing data, is then provided to the sales channel. The sales channel places an order for a quantity of On/Off
Processor Day Billing features and a bill is generated. One #5656 should be ordered for each billable processor day. Prior
to reaching the enabled limit of usable temporary processor days, this feature can be reordered.
#5680
#5680 1GB CUoD Memory Activation

The #5680 1GB CUoD Memory Activation feature permanently activates 1 GB of DDR2 memory on CUoD memory
features #5692, #5693, #5694, #5695, or #5696.
#5691
#5691 On/Off 1GB-1Day Memory Bill

The #5691 On/Off 1GB-1Day Memory Bill feature is ordered to enable a server for On/Off Memory Capacity on Demand.
After the On/Off Memory function has been enabled in a system, the on/off usage must be reported to IBM at least monthly.
This information, which is used to compute the billing data, is provided to the sales channel. The sales channel places an
order on the customers behalf for the quantity of this feature that matches the reported usage. One #5691 feature should
be ordered for each billable day for each 1 GB increment of POWER6 memory that was used.
#5801
#5801 1/4-way Processor Enclosure

The #5801 1/4-way Processor Enclosure feature adds: one 570 (POWER6) expansion drawer including redundant power
and cooling, six SAS disk slots, four PCIe slots, two PCI-X DDR slots, two 0/2-way processors (#7380), two GX slots for
HSL or 12X loops adapters, IVE slot, and a DVD enclosure slot.
The #5801 is ordered as an MES after the initial 570 (POWER6) installation and does not impact the existing server or
edition features. With the #5801 order, a minimum of one processor activation (#5403), plus an IVE adapter, plus two
memory features are required. Appropriate processor fabric cables and the appropriate service interface cable are also
required.
Minimum operating system level: V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5.
#7272

The #7272 2 GB CUoD Memory Activation feature allows the conversion of 2 GB of activated POWER5+ Model 570 DDR2
memory into 2 GB of 9406-MMA DDR2 activated memory for feature code #7892.
#7273
#7273 4 GB CUoD Memory Activation

memory into 4 GB of 9406-MMA DDR2 activated memory for feature code #7893 and #4495.
#7274

memory into 8 GB of 9406-MMA DDR2 activated memory for feature code #7894 and #4496.
37
#7275

The #7275 16 GB CUoD Memory Activation feature allows the conversion of 16 GB of activated POWER5+ Model 570
DDR2 memory into 16 GB of 9406-MMA DDR2 activated memory for feature code #4497 and #4499.
#7276

The #7276 32 GB CUoD Memory Activation feature allows the conversion of 32 GB of activated POWER5+ Model 570
DDR2 memory into 32 GB of 9406-MMA DDR2 activated memory for feature code #4498.
#7728
#7728 570 Reserve Capacity Prepaid

The #7728 570 Reserve Capacity Prepaid provides 30 processor days of reserve capacity on a Capacity on Demand
server. To establish reserve capacity on the server, select a quantity of inactive processors to be placed in the server's
shared processor pool as reserve processors. When the server recognizes that non-reserve processors (permanently
activated processors) that are assigned or available to the uncapped partitions have been 100% utilized and 10% of a
Reserve CoD processor is put into use for more than 30 consecutive seconds, a processor day (good for a 24-hour period)
is subtracted from the prepaid amount of days.
You can use the HMC to view all processor activation statistics, including reserve processor on demand utilization.
Supported on Models 570+ and 570 (POWER6) CUoD servers with Reserve Capacity on Demand enabled
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 for Model 570+ and V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 for Model 570
(POWER6).
#7783
#7783 POWER6 570 Base Proc Activation

The #7738 570 Base Processor Activation provides an activation code that can be used to permanently activate one
processor on a Model 570 Capacity Upgrade on Demand system. One or more of these no-charge activation features can
be ordered, depending on the configuration rules.
Supported on 9406-MMA CUoD server
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5.
#7951
#7951 On/Off Prepaid for Model 570

The #7951 On/Off Prepaid for Model 570 is ordered to enable On/Off Capacity on Demand to temporarily enable processor
or processors. When enabled, processors are requested on a temporary basis. An On/Off Capacity on Demand contract
must be signed to order this feature. A #7951 can be reordered prior to reaching the enabled limit of usable temporary
processor days.
Available processors are required for activation.
Supported on Model 570 or Model 9406-MMA
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 for Model 570, V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 for 9406-MMA
#7954
#7954 On Demand Memory for Model 570

The #7954 On Demand Memory for Model 570 is ordered to enable On/Off Capacity on Demand. When enabled, memory
activation can be requested on a temporary basis. An On/Off Capacity on Demand contract must be signed before the
#7954 is ordered. The #7954 can be reordered prior to reaching the enabled limit of usable temporary memory days.
One or more #7890 Orderable on Demand Memory with nonactivated memory are required.
Supported on Model 570 and 9406-MMA
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 for Model 570 and i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 for
9406-MMA.
#8478
#8478 256GB CUod Memory Activate

The #8478 256GB CUod Memory Activate feature provides 256 GB permanent memory activations for buffered DDR2
memory on a 9406-MMA. Depending on the memory features ordered, several #8478s may be ordered.
Memory activations are stored in the system, not on the memory card providing system configuration flexibility. If memory
is moved to a different system, the activations remain with the original system.
#9299
#9299 Base Enterprise Enablement

The #9299 Base Enterprise Enablement is placed on an upgrade order from an Enterprise Edition server to enable one
processors worth of 5250 OLTP capability.
Supported on POWER6 570
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5
You can find feature descriptions, including details about power and packaging, main
storage, PCI IOP controllers, workstation controllers, LAN/WAN adapters, disk units, internal
tape, CD-ROM, and other magnetic media controllers in Chapter 4, POWER5, POWER6,
and System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890: Features and placement on page 135.
38
2.7 Capacity on Demand

Several types of CoD are optionally available on the 9406-MMA to help meet changing
resource requirements in an On Demand environment. The POWER5+ models CoD options
are available on the 9406-MMA, along with a new Utility CoD offering. Resources can be
installed on the system but remain inactive until needed.
Capacity Upgrade on Demand allows you to purchase additional permanent processor or
memory capacity and dynamically activate it when needed for a specific system.
On/Off Capacity on Demand enables processors or memory to be temporarily activated in
full-day increments, as needed. The system administrator is provided an interface at the
HMC to manage activation and deactivation of resources. A monitor residing on the server
logs usage activity. Charges are based on usage reporting collected monthly.
On/Off Capacity on Demand can be purchased for temporary standby processors as
needed. However, high-usage of On/Off Capacity on Demand outside a disaster can be
costly. Permanent processor activations should be considered for ongoing requirements.
Before using temporary capacity on a system, On/Off CoD must first be enabled by
ordering an enablement feature (MES only) and the required contracts signed. For more
information regarding registration, enablement, and usage of On/Off CoD, refer to the
On/Off Capacity on Demand Web page at:
http://www-912.ibm.com/supporthome.nsf/document/28640809
Utility Capacity on Demand is new on POWER6 technology. Utility CoD applies to

processors only and is designed for use for shorter workload peaks compared to On/Off
Capacity on Demand.
To use Utility CoD, a POWER6 570 system must already be registered for use at an IBM
Web site and appropriate Utility CoD activation information must have been entered into
the HMC (running Version 7 Release 3 level software) that manages that POWER6 570
system. Each partition that is defined as uncapped may take advantage of Utility CoD.
When an uncapped partition reaches 100% utilization of non-Utility CoD processors and
at least some additional processor capacity within the system is available for use, the
additional processor capacity is assigned to the uncapped partition that needs the
resource for temporary use. When at least 10% of a Utility CoD processor is used during a
one minute interval, a Utility CoD processor minute is recorded as consumed.
Assignment of the additional processor capacity is managed by the systems shared
processor pool manager as it does for managing On/Off Capacity on Demand support.
If additional workload requires a higher level of performance, the system automatically
allows the additional Utility CoD processors to be used. The system automatically and
continuously monitors and charges for the performance that is needed above the base
(permanent) level. Usage is measured in processor minute increments and is reported via
a Web interface. Billing is based on the reported usage.
On/Off CoD continues to be offered on POWER6 processor-based servers as the primary
solution for temporary activations (approximately one hour or more in duration per day).
On/Off CoD is available for both processor and memory temporary activations. Utility CoD
applies to processors only and is designed for use when shorter workload peaks require
additional processing resources to be immediately available.
39
The 570 (POWER6) Utility CoD replaces the POWER5 CoD option of Reserve CoD
(processor). The following list identifies the major differences between Utility CoD on
POWER6 processor-based servers and the Reserve CoD function on POWER5
processor-based systems:
Utility CoD counts usage in processor-minute granularity (as compared to
processor-day granularity in Reserve CoD). For example, if a workload spike requires
three processors for three minutes, then nine processor minutes of use are recorded.
Utility CoD has the ability to set a cap on the maximum amount of usage which can be
consumed by Utility CoD. For example, if a client wants to cap the total usage at 500
minutes, using the HMC panels, you can easily configure and dynamically modify this.
Reserve CoD involved prepaid usage blocks of time and also optimized processor use
within the shared pool. Utility CoD offers no paper contracts (Web-based registration)
and pay-as-you-use post pay (or pre-pay) blocks of time used. The Web-based
reporting interface provides reporting flexibility that is based on individual use and
schedules.
Trial CoD offers a one-time, no additional charge, 30-day trial to allow a customer to
explore the uses of inactive processor and memory capacity on their server. This function
is available on all System i models that come with inactive CoD processors or memory.
Trial periods are made possible with activation codes that you can requested from the
Trial Capacity on Demand Web page at:
https://www-912.ibm.com/tcod_reg.nsf/TrialCod?OpenForm
An HMC console is required when using all forms of temporary CoD activations, including
On/Off CoD, Utility CoD, and Trial CoD.
For more details about on demand processing, refer to the Capacity on Demand Web page,
which includes Utility Capacity on Demand information, at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/cod/
2.8 Supported upgrades for System i models

Refer to Chapter 16, System i family upgrades on page 599, for an overview of the upgrades
that are supported for System i5 and IBM eServer i5 models.
2.9 Migration considerations

To migrate from earlier POWER6 System i models to System i POWER6 model 570,
consider the following points about disk drives and memory.
Disk considerations
New disk protection rules
System i POWER6 model 570 has more stringent disk controller configuration rules to
continue reducing potential single points of failure. Therefore, the smaller cache disk
controllers must also have protected write cache.
Since there is no physical way to attach an auxiliary write cache IOA to these smaller write
cache disk controllers, these controllers must be mirrored or replaced by a larger disk
controller with auxiliary write cache on System i POWER6 model 570.
40
New disk technology

The embedded System i POWER6 model 570 disk controller supports SAS disk drives,
and we cannot attach existing SCSI disk drives to this controller. The up to six SAS disk
drives supported in each 9406-MMA enclosure (system unit) are supported as
unprotected or protected by mirroring.
For more information about SAS, see 4.13.2, System i POWER6 model 570 and V5R4
with License Internal Code V5R4M5 storage enhancements on page 314.
Performance
The embedded System i POWER6 model 570 disk controller has no write cache. Where
disk and disk controller performance is a consideration, use a SCSI disk with a SCSI disk
controller with write cache.
Load source disk
The load source drive can be placed in any of the following locations:
Within the system unit enclosure (processor enclosure)
If this option is selected for the 570 (POWER6), you must also select mirroring to
protect the load source. Currently the embedded SAS disk controller in the processor
enclosure does not support RAID protection.
Within a storage area network (SAN) logical disk enclosure (SAN load source option)
Within a HSL-2 or 12X I/O loop attached I/O enclosure (tower or drawer)
The supported choices include #0595/#5095, #5094/#5294, or #5786/#5787.
Feature codes for these load source options are described in Chapter 4, POWER5,
POWER6, and System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890: Features and placement on
page 135, under the descriptions for #07xx and #08xx.
i5/OS V5R4 with Licensed Internal Code (LIC) V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5
requires a minimum i5/OS load source size of 17 GB. Keep in mind that currently a disk
drive with capacity greater than approximately 140 GB disks is not supported as a load
source device.
No disks in the 9406-MMA system unit
You can optionally specify the #0719 when ordering to specify no disks within the
enclosure. That is, you place all disks in either I/O towers or drawers or in external SAN
attached disk storage systems.
Supported disk drives
All 15k rpm SCSI disk drives supported on the System i POWER5 configurations are
supported on the System i POWER6 model 570. Also supported is the SCSI i5/OS 35 GB
10k rpm disk drive. Keep in mind that the SCSI i5/OS 10k rpm disk drive smaller than
35 GB is no longer supported on the System i POWER6 model 570. The 35 GB or larger
10k and 15k rpm drives are supported in Linux and AIX partitions. These SCSI drives are
supported by multiple disk controller options.
Memory considerations
Since the memory features for the POWER6 570 are fully-buffered DDR2 memory features,
the unbuffered DDR2 memory features for the POWER5+ 570 and the DDR1 memory
features for the POWER5 570 are not compatible with the POWER6 570.
Memory conversions from POWER5+ DDR2 memory and activations to POWER6 570
memory are available only during the initial upgrade to a 9406-MMA configuration. This
provides POWER5+ investment leverage.
41
The POWER5+ 570 with DDR2 memory and DDR2 memory activation features are
converted POWER6 570 memory activations. The actual POWER5+ memory DIMMs used
for the conversion are returned to IBM.
These activations can be applied toward any size POWER6 570 memory features. For
example, a 4 GB POWER5+ DDR2 memory feature can optionally be converted to a 4 GB
POWER6 memory activation feature.
The following table shows the available memory conversion options for POWER5+ DDR2
memory feature conversions to 9406-MMA buffered DDR2 memory.
POWER5+ feature
POWER5+ DDR2 size
Convert to 9406-MMA
9406-MMA feature
#7892
2 GB
2 GB activation
#7272
#7893
4 GB
4 GB activation
#7273
#7894
8 GB
8 GB activation
#7274
#4497
16 GB
16 GB activation
#7275
#4499
16 GB
16 GB activation
#7275
#4498
32 GB
32 GB activation
#7276
#4495
4/8 GB
4 GB activation
#7273
#4496
8/16 GB
8 GB activation
#7274
#7663
1 GB activation
1 GB activation
#5680
See the memory plugging rules listed in 4.6, Main storage on page 197. For more general
upgrade planning information in this publication, see Chapter 16, System i family upgrades
on page 599.
42
Chapter 3.
System i POWER5-based models

features that are associated with each IBM System i POWER5-based Model 515, 520, 525,
550, 570, and 595. You can find feature descriptions, including details about power and
packaging and main memory, in Chapter 4, POWER5, POWER6, and System i Models 800,
810, 825, 870, 890: Features and placement on page 135.
43
3.1 System i5 models overview

The IBM System i5 POWER5-based processor models were introduced during 2005, with
various processor model enhancements during 2006 and 2007. The POWER5 processor
uses the new POWER5 processor cores, chips, card, and memory technologies, which
include simultaneous multithreading (SMT) capability. Each core is capable of running SMT,
which, to the operating system, looks like two separate processors.
High performance on a System i server is achieved by using SMT along with many individual
high performance microprocessors, I/O devices, and interconnect technologies. Key to the
System i high performance is the POWER5 distributed switch that supports large bandwidth
between processors, cache, memory, and I/O.
While programs run on POWER5 microprocessors, movement of data is handled by high
performance I/O adapters (IOAs) and, where required, I/O processors (IOPs). Data moves
between I/O towers and to Integrated xSeries Adapter (IXA) PC servers across high-speed
link (HSL) at 2 GB/s. Storage area network (SAN) disk and tape devices are supported at 2
Gbps and 4 Gbps over a Fibre Channel.
The processor POWER5 chip of IBM Models 515, 520, 525, 550, and 570 is packaged with
the L3 cache chip into a cost-effective dual-chip module (DCM) package. Each processor
card has a single DCM that contains two POWER5 processor cores, L2 cache, and a 36 MB
L3 module. A DCM and its associated L3 cache are packaged on a single processor card.
Main memory attaches to each processor card. The exception to this applies to the initially
available 520 entry-level models without L3 cache, where the POWER5 chip is packaged into
a single-chip module (SCM) package.
For the Models 515, 520+, 525, 550+, and 570+, the POWER5+ processor is 37% smaller
than the POWER5 chip. It consumes less power and requires less sophisticated cooling.
Thus, you can use the POWER5+ processor in servers where previously you could only use
low frequency chips due to cooling restrictions.
Other POWER5+ enhancements include changes in the fabric, L2 and L3 controller, memory
controller, GX+ controller, and chip reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS). Several
enhancements have been made in the memory controller for improved performance.
The 595 models contain multichip modules (MCMs), with eight processors each. In such an
MCM, four physical copper SOI chips exist, each with two processor cores. Each core is
capable of running SMT, which, to the operating system, looks like two separate processors.
The 8-way MCM is the building block for the Model 595. It is only available with four chips,
each with its attached L3 cache. A single processor on a chip has all of the L2 and L3 cache
resources attached to the module (144 MB per MCM).
On an System i Model 595, a 64-way configuration is implemented with eight MCMs, with
each MCM containing four dual-core POWER5 chips running at speeds ranging from 1.5 GHz
to 2.3 GHz.
Although an operating system gives the impression that it is concurrently executing a large
number of tasks, each processor in an symmetric multiprocessor (SMP) traditionally executes
a single tasks instruction stream at any moment. Multithreading minimizes the processor wait
or idle time.
In general, multithreading allows a single processor to process multiple threads in a different
way than a single processor without this capability. There are several distinct differences
44
between the types of multithreading implemented in the industry. In this paper, we restrict our
discussion to IBM technologies only.
The i5/OS QPRCMLTTSK system value controls whether to enable individual SMPs to
concurrently execute multiple instruction streams. Each instruction stream belongs to
separate tasks or threads. When enabled, each individual processor concurrently executes
multiple tasks at the same time. The effect of its use is likely to increase the performance
capacity of a system or improve the responsiveness of a multithreaded application.
Running multiple instruction streams at the same time does not improve the performance of
any single task. Therefore, you must have many active (ready to run) threads to take
maximum advantage of multithreading.
Note: There is always the slight possibility that multithreading results do not achieve the
highest performance efficiency in certain workload environments. However, the i5/OS
system value enables you to turn off this option should you need to.
Older System i model processors used an approach called hardware multithreading (HMT).
In the hardware multithreading approach, the hardware automatically switches between the
tasks on any long processing delay event, for example, a cache miss.
Some model processors, such as POWER4 System i models, do not support any form of
multithreading, which means the QPRCMLTTSK system value has no performance effect.
Because the system value enables the parallel use of shared processor resources, the
performance gains depend highly on the application and the model.
POWER5 SMT is a big improvement over the previously implemented System i HMT. Each
POWER5 processor has five pipelines: the branch pipe, two arithmetic pipes, and two load
store pipes. Other pipes are in the POWER5 processor implementation, but they are not
important for this level of SMT description. With POWER5, there can be at most five
instructions that are issued or dispatched per processor cycle.
Essentially each thread that is dispatched has some amount of wait time, whether it is
program-level waits or processor runtime waits, such as waiting for memory to contain
instructions or program data. SMT essentially detects such waits within a processor and,
where appropriate, runs a different thread waiting, in the processor that is waiting on the
running thread, much more efficiently than HMT.
Processor affinity is also involved, in that the systems dispatching algorithm attempts to run
a thread in the same processor in which it last ran. Above processor affinity is memory
affinity. That is, the system also attempts to run a thread in a processor whose physically
attached cache and memory cards contain the data that the thread most recently referenced.
For more information about System i SMT and memory affinity, refer to is the white paper
Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) on eServer iSeries POWER5 Processors on the Web
at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/solutions/perfmgmt/pdf/SMT.pdf
IBM System i5 servers work with a different structure when compared to the previous
technologies used with the System i5 servers. Above the POWER5 technology-based
hardware is a code layer called the POWER Hypervisor. This code is part of the firmware
shipped with the System i5 hardware. The POWER Hypervisor resides in flash memory on
the Service Processor. This firmware performs the initialization and configuration of the
System i5 hardware, as well as the virtualization support that is required to run up to 254
45
partitions concurrently on the System i5 servers. The layers above the POWER Hypervisor
are different for each supported operating system.
For more details about SCM and DCM, see IBM System i5 Handbook IBM i5/OS Version 5
Release 4 January 2006, SG24-7486.
The following table gives a quick glance at the announcement and availability dates for the
various IBM System i5 models.
Model and processor
Announce date
General availability date
515 #8327, #8330
10 April 2007
20 April 2007
---
520 #8950, #8951, #8952,

#8953, #8954, #8955
5 May 2004
31 May 2004
1 June 2006
520 #8972
12 July 2005
22 July 2005
1 June 2006
520+ #8325, #8327, #8330
31 January 2006
14 February 2006
---
525 #8330
10 April 2007
20 April 2007
---
550 #8958
17 August 2004
10 September 2004
1 June 2006
550+ #8312
31 January 2006
14 February 2006
---
570 #8961
5 May 2004
31 May 2004
1 October 2004
570 #8971
30 July 2004
31 August 2004
---
570+ #8338
31 January 2006
14 February 2006
---
570 POWER6 #7380
24 July 2007
14 September 2007
---
595 #8981
15 October 2004
19 November 2004
---
595 #8966
31 January 2006
14 February 2006
---
595+ #8968
10 April 2007
20 April 2007
---
595 #8973
11 July 2006
25 August 2006
Note: In the processor tables that follow, the maximum values are shown. Some
combinations of features might not be valid when other features are used. For more
information, see Chapter 4, POWER5, POWER6, and System i Models 800, 810, 825,
870, 890: Features and placement on page 135, and the paper PCI and PCI-X Placement
Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 (Fourth edition), REDP-4011, for
complete coverage.
46
3.2 System i Model 515

The System i Model 515 delivers the full capabilities of POWER5+
and i5/OS for entry system customers. With new i5/OS licensing
by user, the Model 515 delivers the performance to run the
applications that todays businesses require in an affordable
package. The Model 515 is ideal for small to medium-sized
businesses that want an easy-to-install, manageable system. The
9407 Model 515 has attributes that include:
Security and virus resistance.
The ability to run i5/OS, Linux and AIX 5L applications on a
single system and integrate IBM eServer xSeries (System x)
servers running Windows or Linux.
Support for 5 to 40 i5/OS licensed concurrent users with a P05
software tier.
Note: The 515 does not support an HSL adapter. Therefore the maximum number of disk
drives supported is 8, all placed within the 515 processor enclosure (CEC). Also, any
integrated xSeries server support is via an Internet Small Computer System Interface
(iSCSI) adapter.
The user-based i5/OS licensing associated with the 9407 Model 515 provides added
flexibility, enabling businesses to take advantage of i5/OS capabilities at a lower financial
investment than was available before the Model 515. The Model 515 offers i5/OS V5R4
license entitlements for 5 to 40 users in blocks of five users. There is also an option for an
unlimited number of i5/OS user entitlements for users external to your organization, such as
customers, business partners, or suppliers.
Each 9407 Model 515 is built to order and can be customized to meet customer needs. The
Model 515 features an integrated set of hardware capabilities including two 1 Gbps Ethernet
LAN ports and a disk, tape or DVD drive controller in the base. It is available as either a
desk-side or tower configuration or as a rack-mount configuration for placement in a 19-inch
rack such as the System i 25U or 36U racks. It requires only 4 EIA units or 4 U of rack space.
The Model 515 provides the full power of its POWER5+ processor available for batch work
(non-interactive), 5250 OLTP work, or both. For applications that are not I/O intensive, this
translates to 3800 CPW (batch and 5250 OLTP) for the 1-way system and 7100 CPW for the
2-way system. For applications that are disk I/O intensive, this translates to 800 CPW (batch
or 5250 OLTP) for either the 1-way or 2-way Model 515. The Model 515 has a maximum of
eight disk drives.
The Model 515 features a one-year limited warranty with 9 a.m.-5 p.m., next business day,
customer-replaceable unit (CRU), and on-site service. This can be upgraded to 24x7,
same-day service with service offerings. The included i5/OS license is provided with three
months or one year of support coverage based on the software maintenance agreement
(SWMA), depending on the configuration. The SWMA can be expanded to either one or three
years.
47
3.3 System i Model 515 Editions

The 9407 Model 515 is offered as an Express Configuration or as a Base Product
Configuration. An Express Configuration provides a package of popular options that fit many
base system needs at an attractive package price. A Base Product Configuration includes a
few pre-selected options and provides more flexibility in adding options. Features can be
added to Express or Base Configurations either initially or as an MES.
An internal tape drive is offered at no additional charge in Model 515 Express Configurations.
Depending on the configuration, the base tape drive is either the 36 GB 4mm tape drive or the
30 GB QIC tape drive. The 4 mm tape drive can be replaced by a 30 GB QIC tape drive or a
200 GB LTO-2 tape drive (#8755). The 30 GB QIC tape drive can be replaced by the 200 GB
tape drive in the system unit for an additional charge.
3.4 Model 515 configurations overview

The minimum functional system consists of the base system unit, base features, and selected
priced features. A variety of LAN and WAN adapters, an iSCSI adapter, a SCSI external tape
adapter, and rack options are available. Each Model 515 system unit has a maximum of
16 GB of memory and 560 GB of disk capacity.
The Model 515 supports hot-plug disk slots, hot-plug PCI-X card slots, and redundant
hot-plug cooling fans. A redundant hot-plug power supply is available.
The Model 515 initial installation is customer setup (CSU).
Note: Attachment of I/O towers/drawers is not supported.
3.4.1 Base system unit and features

The Model 515 POWER5+ system supports a single processor card. The processor card
supports eight dual inline memory module (DIMM DDR2) memory positions that allow
memory to be plugged in the processor card (direct attach). Memory is plugged in pairs of
DIMMs.
The processor cards:
#8327 1.9 GHz Processor (1-way)
1.9 MB L2 cache
36 MB L3 cache
#8330 1.9 GHz Processor (2-way)
1.9 MB L2 cache
36 MB L3 cache
Three media bays and one operator panel bay

The three media bays consist of one half-height and two slimline bays. The half-height bay
is for SCSI tape devices. The top slimline bay is usable by i5/OS for the required
DVD-ROM. The second slimline bay is based on integrated drive electronics (IDE). IDE is
a standard electronic interface that is used between a computer motherboards data paths
or bus and the computers disk storage devices. The IDE interface is based on the IBM PC
Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) 16-bit bus standard, but it is also used in computers
48
that use other bus standards. Most computers sold today use an enhanced version of IDE
called enhanced IDE.
Two system and two USB 2.0 ports
Neither USB port is usable by i5/OS.
Only system port T2 is usable by i5/OS (for #1827 Serial-UPS Conversion Cable).
Two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports
One of these Ethernet ports is usable for a LAN console.
Base Service Processor
Two Hardware Management Console (HMC) ports
Six PCI-X card slots
Four disk slots
Integrated disk, DVD, and tape controller
Rack mount or desk-side specify
3.4.2 Optional features

40 MB write cache disk controller for the four base disk slots
Enables RAID protection and does not use a PCI-X card slot
#5570 5727 Cache + 2 70GB Disk Package
This package provides one #5727 Integrated Cache - 40 MB and two #4327 15k rpm
70.56 GB Disk Units.
This package provides one #5727 Integrated Cache - 40 MB and six #4327 15k rpm 70.56
GB Disk Units. It requires #5592/#5593 as a prerequisite.
#5572 4-70GB Disk Package
This feature provides four #4327 15k rpm 70.56 GB Disk Units.
#5592 4 Disk Slot Exp + Controller
This feature provides a disk backplane (#6594), which enables the second set of four disk
slots in a Model 515 and provides a disk controller (#5776) to run these four disk slots.
The disk controller is plugged into either the C4 or the C6 PCI slot of the 515 system unit.
The disk controller has 90 MB write cache and can provide RAID protection for the disk
drives. Mirroring protection is provided via i5/OS.
This feature provides a disk backplane (#6594), which enables the second set of four disk
slots in a Model 515 and provides a disk controller (#0648) to run these four disk slots.
The disk controller is plugged into either the C4 or the C6 PCI slot of the 515 system unit.
The disk controller has 90 MB write cache and can provide RAID protection for the disk
drives. Mirroring protection is provided via the operating system.
The #5593 can be used to provide four disk slots capacity to a AIX 5L or Linux partition.
36 GB 4 mm tape drive, 30 GB QIC tape drive, or 200 GB LTO-2 tape drive in the system
unit driven by the embedded disk controller
The 36 GB 4 mm tape drive supports read/write of DDS3, DDS4, and DAT72 media.
An external tape drive attached via a PCI-X tape controller
49
#7940, #7966, Advanced Power Virtualization (APV)

The following feature codes are associated with the Model 515 and each System i
52n model:
#7940 - 9405-520, 9406-520, and 9406-525

#7966 - 9406-515
Enables partitioning: The ability to have more than one logical partition, for i5/OS
V5R4, AIX, and Linux
Enables micro-partitioning: The granularity to assign less than one full processor
capacity to a partition
Provides Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) capabilities: Virtualizes up to four disks of capacity
for AIX 5L or Linux partitions
Optional, chargeable per-processor feature:
If 1-way 515, order either zero #7966 features or one #7966 feature.
If 2-way 515, order either zero #7966 features or two #7966 features (two required).
There is a price per #7966 feature.
Ships a software enablement key for the system and ships VIOS and Partition Load
Manager
Note: System i, excluding Model 515, includes partitioning and micro-partitioning
without additional features. Enabling VIOS and Partition Load Manager on System i
requires the optional APV feature. The Partition Load Manager is only included in the
APV feature for POWER5 technology-based systems. Partition Load Manager is not
supported on POWER6.
On the System i models, partitioning is included as part of the base System i capabilities.
The APV feature is ordered to enable VIOS capabilities and Partition Load Manager
capabilities for AIX and Linux partitions.
3.4.3 Hardware support constraints

Based upon the objective to minimize the purchase price and simplify ordering the Model
515, the following features are not supported on the Model 515:
More than 16 GB memory
Additional sizes of disk drives
HSL-loop adapter, I/O towers/drawers, and associated Model 520 or 525 higher I/O
maximums
Integrated xSeries Server (IXS) or IXA
Fibre Channel adapters
Support of older, withdrawn IOAs (controllers)
Full rack-mount features
Choice of front door or easy-access front cover
DVD-RAM
50
3.4.4 Logical partitioning on the Model 515

In most configurations, it is anticipated that logical partitioning will not be desired. However,
logical partitioning is available. Logical partitioning on the Model 515 requires #7966
Advanced Power Virtualization.
Like other POWER5 technology-based systems, an HMC is required for an AIX 5L partition or
for a Linux partition with dedicated I/O. It is optional for up to three Linux partitions using all
i5/OS virtual I/O.
The first four disk drives are always driven by the embedded disk controller of the 515 CEC.
The second set in the Model 515 is always driven by a disk controller in a PCI slot. The
second set can be owned by the i5/OS partition or another partition. There is a maximum of
two i5/OS partitions (one per set of four disk slots). An i5/OS partition can support AIX or
Linux partitions for virtual I/O.
APV support includes the capability to define a VIOS partition, which can own resources,
such as network adapters, disk adapters, and disk drives, that are shared with Linux or AIX
5L client partitions.
3.4.5 Warranty options

The 9407 Model 515 includes a base warranty and has two optional warranty upgrades:
Standard warranty
One year
9 hours per day, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, next business day
response, and mandatory CRU (for tier 1 parts)
IBM On-site Repair (for non-tier 1 parts)
Warranty upgrade 1
One year
IBM On-site Repair, 9 hours per day, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, next
business day response
Next business day response applies to all geographies except EMEA, which is Same
Business Day.
Warranty upgrade 2
One year
IBM On-site Repair, 24 hours per day, 7 days a week
Notes:
IBM must receive service calls by a certain time of day in order for those service calls to
qualify for Same Business Day or Next Business Day service. This time varies by
geography. Contact your local IBM representative for details.
A Warranty Service Upgrade (WSU) can be purchased anytime during the original
warranty period. Depending upon the timing, you might have to pay a price for the
whole year starting with the new warranty. After each warranty period, consider another
warranty or a normal maintenance agreement.
51
In regard to CRU, Tier 1 means that, if IBM determines over the phone that the problem is in
a CRU, IBM will ship the part to the customer for replacement. If IBM installs the CRU, it is a
billable service unless covered by a maintenance upgrade. The following table lists the Model
515 CRU parts.
Model 515 CRU Tier 1
Battery for disk write cache controller
Cables external or internal
Covers
Disk drive
Disk drive backplane
DVD drive
Fan
Fan tray assembly
Memory DIMM
Operator panel
Operator panel cable
PCI adapter
Power cord
Power supply
Service processor
Tape drive
Tape/DVD drive enclosure and
backplane
Time of day battery
Voltage regulator
3.5 System i Model 515 overview

The following tables provide the minimum and maximum system capacities for the Model
515. The values are package dependent.
tool, such as the IBM Systems Workload Estimator, which you can access on the Web at:
http://www.bmc.com
52
In the following tables, read the accompanying footnotes at the bottom of each table. For the
other notes, such as 2a, 5, and 6a, refer to the general table of notes in 3.16, Notes for
System i5 Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 on page 90.
9407 Model 515
Processor
feature
#8327
#8330
Server
feature
#4901
#4903
Configuration feature
Processor/5250 CPW5
MCU2a
LPAR
1-way
2-way
1-wa
y
2-way
Base
#6010 Express Cfg 1
3800/
3800
8200
10
#6011 Express Cfg 2
3800/
3800
8200
10
#6018 Base Prod Cfg 1
3800/
3800
8200
10
#6021 Express Cfg 3
7100/7100
8200
15600
10/processor
#6028 Base Prod Cfg 2
7100/7100
8200
15600
10/processor
Note: Support for LPAR on the Model 515 requires optional feature #7966 Advanced Power Virtualization
Processor feature
9407 Model 515

#8327
#8330
Number/type/speed of processor
1/POWER5+/1.9 GHz
1/2-way/POWER5+ /1.9 GHz
L2 Cache (MB)
1.9
1.9
L3 Cache (MB)
36
36
Main storage (GB min/max)
1/16
1/16
Main storage DIMMs (min/max)
2/8
2/8
V5R4M0/V5R4M0
V5R4/V5R4M0
Software group 6a
P05
P05
Disk controller (min/max)
1/2
1/2
Disk arms (min/max)
1/8
1/8
Internal DVD/tape (min 1 DVD/max 2 DVDs, 1 tape)
1/3
1/3
External tape/optical/DVD
0/2
0/2
Physical packaging
HSL-2 ports
I/O towers/drawers
PCI card slots
0
0
6
0
0
6
Twinaxial controller (min/max)
0/1
0/1
Communication lines (min/max)
2/12
2/12
LAN ports (min/max)
2/8
2/8
System x Integration (min/max)

Internal xSeries servers
External xSeries adapters
iSCSI adapters
0/0
0/0
0/5
0/0
0/0
0/5
Note: Some maximums and combinations of devices may be subject to configuration restrictions.
53
The following table summarizes the 9407 Model 515 Base and Express configurations.
9407 Model 515 Express and Base Configurations
CPW/5250 (unconstrained)1
CPW/5250
(constrained)1
Express
Configuration 1
Express
Configuration 2
Express
Configuration 3
Base
Configuration 1
Base
Configuration 2
3800/3800
3800/3800
7100/7100
3800/7100
7100/7100
800/800
800/800
800/800
800/800
800/800
N-way
1-way
1-way
2-way
1-way
2-way
Processor/Server/Edition
#8327/4901/6010
#8327/4901/6011
#8330/4903/6021
#8327/4901/6018
#8330/4903/6028
Processor activation feature
1 x #8410
1 x #8410
2 x #8428
1 x #8410
2 x #8428
N/C (no charge) disk
2 x 9613
(2 x 70 GB)
2 x 9613
(2 x 70 GB)
4 x 9613
(4 x 70 GB)
Disk (70 GB chargeable)
0 to 6
0 to 6
0 to 4
min 1/max 8
min 1/max 8
Disk protection
0040+0308/0041/
none
0040+0308/0041/
none
0040+0308/0041/
none
0040+0308/0041/
none
0040+0308/0041/
none
Write cache/Raid enabler
#5727
Chargeable
(mirror default)
#5727
Chargeable
(mirror default)
1 x #9510
(RAID default)
#5727
Chargeable
#5727
Chargeable
Console specify - choose one
#5540/#5544/#55
50/#5552/#5553
#5540/#5544/#55
50/#5552/#5553
#5540/#5544/#55
50/#5552/#5553
#5540/#5544/#55
50/#5552/#5553
#5540/#5544/#55
50/#5552/#5553
N/C Memory
1 x 9548 (1 GB)
1 x 9548 (1 GB)
2 x 9549 (4 GB)
Memory (GB chargeable)
Max 15
Max 15
Max 12
Min 1/Max 16
Min 1/Max 16
Tape2
1 x #9258
1 x #9653
1 x #9258
N/C DVD-ROM
1 x #9540
1 x #9540
1 x #9540
1 x #9540
1 x #9540
N/C WAN (modem)
1 x #9793/#9794
1 x #9793/#9794
1 x #9793/#9794
1 x #9493/#9494
1 x #9493/#9494
N/C
N/C
IOP2d
1 x #9844
1 x #9844
1 x #9844
5722-SS1 V5R4 and all default

programs (includes Web
Enablement, 5722-WE2 and
IBM Director, 5722-DR1)
One i5/OS
processor license
plus licensing for
default programs
One i5/OS
processor license
plus licensing for
default programs
Two i5/OS
processor license
plus licensing for
default programs
One i5/OS
processor license
plus licensing for
default programs
One i5/OS
processor license
plus licensing for
default programs
N/C 5722-SSC i5/OS user

licensing
1 x #1600
(5 users)
additional users
are chargeable
1 x #1600
(5 users)
additional users
are chargeable
1 x #1600
(5 users)
additional users
are chargeable
1 x #1600
(5 users)
additional users
are chargeable
1 x #1600
(5 users)
additional users
are chargeable
5722-XW1
(unlimited users)
5722-QU1
5722-ST1
5722-XW1
(unlimited users)
5722-QU1
5722-ST1
5722-XW1
(unlimited users)
5722-XW1
(unlimited users)
5722-XW1
(unlimited users)
5722-WDS (chargeable)
1 optional
1 optional
1 optional
1 optional
1 optional
N/C SWMA
3 months
One year
One year
3 months
3 months
P05
P05
P05
P05
P05
Software
Software group
54
6a
9407 Model 515 Express and Base Configurations

Express
Configuration 1
Express
Configuration 2
Express
Configuration 3
Base
Configuration 1
Base
Configuration 2
Note 1: The Model 515 provides full processor power (batch or 5250 OLTP) for applications that are not I/O intensive. For applications
that are I/O intensive, this translates to approximately 800 CPW (batch or 5250 OLTP) for either the 1-way or 2-way because the
Model 515 has a maximum of eight disk drives. CPW is used to compare relative performance rating among processor models within
the IBM System i family.
As a reminder, do not use CPW as the sole metric for sizing workloads on any IBM System i model. Additional considerations include
disk I/O-per-second rates and application workload attributes. As a starting point for disk I/Os per second on the Model 515, consider a
maximum of approximately 115 disk I/Os per second. We recommend that you size a Model 515 workload using a sizing tool, such as
the IBM Systems Workload Estimator, which you can access at the following address:
You can also use Performance Navigator from the Midrange Performance Group, which you can learn more about at the following
address: http://www.mpginc.com
Note 2: The #9258 can be replaced with a #8753 30 GB QIC tape drive or a #8755 200GB LTO-2 Tape Unit only on initial orders for
Express Configurations 1 and 3. There is no substitution, only delete, on Express Configuration 2.
Note 2d: No charge feature #9844 IOP on the Models 9407-515 Express Configurations #1 and #3, 9407-515 Base Configurations #1
and #2, and all 9406-525 configurations were removed from the configurator, e-config, on 9 October 2007. Orders received after 26
October 2007 with feature #9844 will be invalid. If an IOP is required after this date, feature #2844 must be ordered instead of #9844.
No charge feature #9844 remains a valid feature on 9407-515 Express Configuration #2.
Note 3: The 9407 Model 515 is configurable. It is possible to add the 9407 features to these configurations or delete no-charge features.
Note 4: No charge software includes unlimited users with iSeries Access Family, 5722-XW.
Notes 2a, 5, 6a: See 3.16, Notes for System i5 Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 on page 90. Note 6a in that table summarizes
the Software tier grouping for all IBM System i5 models.
3.6 System i5 Model 520+ Editions

The following sections describe the editions that are available with the Model 520+ (1.9 GHz
processors) configurations.
As a reminder, you should not use CPW as the sole metric for sizing workloads on any IBM
System i model. Additional considerations include disk I/O-per-second rates and application
workload attributes. We recommend that you size a specific IBM System i model workload
using a sizing tool, such as the IBM Systems Workload Estimator for System i or
Performance Navigator from Midrange Performance Group.
3.6.1 520 Capacity BackUp editions

The System i 520 (i520) Capacity BackUp Editions provide greater flexibility to help meet
your requirements for backup, HA, and DR. Five i520 Capacity BackUp Edition features
provide matching performance points for the 1.9 GHz 520 Enterprise and Standard Edition
systems. The 1200 CPW, 2800 CPW, and 3800 to 7100 CPW Capacity BackUp Editions
support 520 Enterprise Edition systems. The 3800 CPW and 3800 to 7100 CPW Capacity
BackUp Standard Editions support 520 Standard Edition systems.
The 1/2-way 520 Capacity BackUp Editions provide the flexibility of a permanent processor
activation that can be used to support additional application workloads. They also deliver
capacity for role-swap operations, where the Capacity BackUp system maintains application
availability when a production system is down for planned or unplanned outages. Similarly,
Enterprise Enablement features and i5/OS Processor Entitlements can be permanently
acquired for additional processors on the Capacity BackUp system. The 1/2-way Capacity
BackUp Edition and Capacity BackUp Standard Edition enable the activation of the standby
processor using On/Off Capacity on Demand at no charge in case of a disaster that takes
down the primary system.
55
Before IBM ships a new Capacity BackUp Edition system, a primary system in the same
enterprise must be registered via the System i Capacity BackUp Registration Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/hardware/cbu/form.html
The primary system must be an equivalent Model 520 or 810 that is equal to or larger in size
than the Capacity BackUp system as measured by CPW. There may be exceptions to this
rule when a difference in generations of technology or product structure make a direct
comparison impossible. Such exceptions are documented on the Capacity BackUp
Registration Web page.
The 520 Capacity Backup Editions contain the same set of software content as the 520
Standard Edition. An underlying assumption is that a Capacity BackUp Edition system is
being used when its primary system is not available due to a planned or unplanned outage.
On/Off Capacity on Demand for temporary standby processor activation for the 1/2-way 520
can be purchased as needed. However, high usage of On/Off Capacity on Demand outside a
disaster can be costly. Consider permanent processor activations for ongoing requirements.
A disaster is defined as an event recoverable from an offsite location only that has resulted
from the unforeseen loss of a production systems computing capability due solely to forces
beyond your control. To qualify as a disaster, such outage is clearly one that, by its nature,
requires a remote recovery operation. This means that the primary data center is no longer
usable and that the outage is not due to a hardware or software failure.
The 1/2-way 520 Capacity BackUp edition includes an opportunity for an initial test of the
switchover environment with three processor days provided at no additional charge with the
On/Off Capacity on Demand function that can be used for the standby processor.
For Capacity BackUp Edition registration and additional information, go to the following Web
address:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/hardware/cbu
Upgrades are available for the 520 Capacity BackUp Editions from selected Model 810
Enterprise Edition and Standard Edition systems. Upgrades are also available from smaller
520 Capacity BackUp Editions to larger 520 Capacity BackUp Editions. Likewise, the smaller
520 Capacity BackUp Standard Edition can be upgraded to the larger 520 Capacity BackUp
Standard Edition.
3.6.2 System i and 3Com IP Telephony

Today, companies of all sizes are replacing traditional phone systems with IP telephony
solutions to realize both the productivity benefits of easily accessible advanced applications
and the infrastructure cost savings resulting from a single, converged voice and data network.
Companies have many different reasons for making the switch to IP telephony that the
deciding factors vary. The most common benefits cited by small- and mid-sized companies
are cost savings and business advantage.
Cost savings can result from implementing and maintaining a single communications
infrastructure across multiple offices. Converged systems can be easier to manage and
modify as business needs evolve. In addition, companies might experience lower
long-distance calling fees by reducing or eliminating toll charges as phone services become
supported by their LAN and WAN connectivity, rather than exclusively by the public switched
telephone network (PSTN).
Business advantages are driven by increased productivity and enhanced collaboration
among employees, customers, and partners. These benefits result from cutting-edge,
56
IP-based applications. Unified messaging offers IP telephony users voice mail and e-mail
integration and find-me, follow-me capabilities. Advanced collaborative applications, such as
instant messaging, presence, and highly scalable audio conferencing, save time and effort. IP
contact centers help drive customer satisfaction and business revenues. IP telephony
solutions built on open architectures and industry standards, such as Session Initiation
Protocol (SIP), also provide the most flexibility to connect to the third-party applications that
your business requires.
3Com IP Telephony solutions enable the implementation of a next-generation, multimedia IP
communications system that uses the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) SIP standard.
With a robust set of productivity- enhancing applications and advanced phone features that
are traditionally supplied by private-branch-exchange (PBX) systems, 3Com solutions can
help you migrate to an open, IP-based communications system in increments that best fit
your business objectives. Their centralized administration, configuration, and management
capabilities can lower installation and operating costs and optimize IT staff as the system is
implemented throughout your organization. 3Com IP Telephony helps ensure business
continuity with a distributed, replicated architecture that can deliver full-function services at
any site even during a WAN failure.
System i platforms are designed to be easy to operate and maintain. They support all critical
business applications with a single, integrated system that can now enable both full-featured
data and voice communications. Database, performance tuning, backup, reporting,
communications, Internet connectivity, and file and printing services are built in, as are
security features that can help your business meet regulatory requirements and safeguard
critical data across all of these application environments. By embracing open standards,
System i platforms give organizations broader choices and a greater capability to use already
installed systems, eliminating requirements and the expense of additional servers and added
complexity.
IP messaging
3Com messaging is a comprehensive set of communication services that are designed to
enhance productivity through location-independent access to an integrated messaging
environment. 3Com IP messaging includes an advanced range of interactive services that
help enterprises to better manage their communications and increase the productivity of their
workforce. The 3Com solution lets users consolidate voice mail, e-mail, and faxes into a
single in-box for location-independent retrieval and management. They can also schedule the
times when messages are delivered and send voice mails to individuals or groups by using
extensive and easy-to-maintain distribution lists. With find me, follow me services, users can
manage how they are contacted, while maintaining their own anytime, anywhere access to
messages.
The IP messaging auto-attendant enables you to develop your own interactive voice
response services, such as establishing dial-by-name directory functions or automated
caller-specific call routing. Callers can be directed to prerecorded announcements and voice
forms, and their answers to a predetermined set of questions can be captured. In addition, an
unlimited number of company switchboard, departmental, or even personal auto-attendants
on direct inward dial numbers can be configured.
Optimized services based on user need

Administrators can customize 3Com IP messaging services. Although groups of users are
generally allocated, a predefined class of service ranging from a simple voicemail box to a
comprehensive unified messaging mailbox with integrated e-mail and fax, almost every
feature of the mailbox can be tailored to match the exact needs of any group or single user in
the organization.
57
Seamless migration from legacy voice systems

The IP messaging application receives user connections either directly from SIP-compliant
phones or from legacy PBXs or the PSTN through SIP Voice over IP (VoIP) gateways that
connect to the messaging system. These options let enterprises deploy the software as either
a stand-alone centralized messaging application integrated with existing voice systems or as
part of a complete migration to IP telephony and SIP-based services.
Flexible scalability for multisite deployment

3Com IP messaging services are based on location-independent platforms and software that
can be centralized or distributed across multiple sites for flexibility and scalability in a
geographically dispersed organization.
Business continuity
The IP messaging solution offers network-based redundancy to ensure market-leading
business continuity. Primary and secondary platforms can synchronize stored messages
using real-time mirroring for high service availability. The application can also revert to
another IP messaging platform without disruption should it detect a phone system failure.
IP conferencing
With 3Com IP conferencing, you can use your IP network to cost effectively enhance
collaboration. Simple-to-establish and easy-to-manage conferencing, both scheduled and ad
hoc, helps you improve communications of project teams and strengthen interactions among
employees, suppliers, business partners, and customers. IP conferencing includes:
Audio conferences among participants calling in from the PSTN or using phones
connected to legacy PBXs or SIP-based phones directly connected to the IP network.
Video conferences from video-capable SIP clients that support the H.263 video codec.
The 3Com Convergence Client used with a USB webcam from any laptop or desktop
PC can provide this capability.
Desktop sharing that lets users view and interact with the desktop of a colleague. Detailed
collaboration can occur to expedite the development and review of documents created in
any PC application.
Simplify multimedia collaboration

3Com conferencing helps you reduce telecommunications costs and enhance collaboration.
Workers can quickly and easily establish an ad hoc or scheduled conference session over the
IP network for up to 100 participants with one intuitive desktop tool, the 3Com Convergence
Client. With a single portal to integrated voice, video, data, and messaging services,
communication can easily take place with whatever media is most convenient and
appropriate to the subject matter.
Expand collaboration options

With low-cost webcams and click-to-conference functionality, several co-workers can
participate in a high-quality video conference and share data files without the need for an
expensive video conferencing facility or a conference administrator.
IP presence
Presence services let you know which employees are currently using their 3Com IP phone.
Working with other components of the 3Com IP Telephony solution that use SIP, IP
conferencing and presence capabilities offer advanced services such as presence publishing.
Presence publishing supports SIP Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraged Extensions
(SIMPLE) clients, allowing them to receive availability information from other clients that are
58
registered with the 3Com IP Telephony solution. These clients include the 3Com
Convergence Client 1 and 3Com SIP-compliant IP phones.
Availability view of co-workers

Presence indicators on the 3Com Convergence Client show the on-hook/off-hook status of
3Com IP phones and the availability of co-workers, increasing user productivity and reducing
reliance on voice mail. A conference host can eliminate time-consuming roll calls by using
similar capabilities to monitor the presence of conference attendees.
IP convergence
3Com on the System i platform provides a desktop application that delivers integrated,
productivity-enhancing access to high-value business communications services such as IP
and video telephony, voice mail, conferencing, collaboration, presence, and instant
messaging. The convergence software is included with all standard phone licenses. The
3Com Convergence Client acts as a personal portal that lets users conveniently take
advantage of a variety of interpersonal communications functions, including telephony, audio
and video conferencing, messaging, presence, document sharing, and instant messaging
from any standard PC running Microsoft Windows. The client is compliant with the SIP and
uses SIP for instant messaging and presence SIMPLE for standards-based, secure services.
Easy integration of advanced business applications

The 3Com Convergence Client can be cost-effectively integrated into the enterprise network
and distributed to users with minimal installation and maintenance requirements. IT staff can
easily make the client part of a standard enterprise desktop software package.
Leverage of standards-based interoperability

For SIP-enabled software that can be deployed anywhere on an enterprise IP network, the
3Com Convergence Client enables portability of user identity and standards-based
multimedia communications features.
Easy access to conferencing services

With the client and a 3Com IP conferencing server, users can create an instant ad hoc
conference call by simply dragging and dropping names instead of setting up a conference
bridge beforehand and waiting for attendees to join the call at the appointed time. A mouse
click adds video to the conference or enables collaborative data sharing and real-time
document reviews.
Increased worker productivity

The 3Com Convergence Client speeds everyday business communications by making voice,
video, presence, instant messaging, voice mail, and desktop sharing available through one
easy-to-use interface. Increased control of collaborative services lets enterprises respond
more effectively to the needs of customers, clients, and vendors. People are easier to reach.
Information can be accessed and disseminated more efficiently and issues can be addressed
and resolved more quickly.
Optimized contact with co-workers

A presence icon on the interface indicates the availability of co-workers, helping establish
direct contact among co-workers and reducing protracted voice mail exchanges and
telephone tag. Calls can be easily initiated by clicking the icon. By leveraging a converged
network, the client enables faster cycle times and more efficient supply chain activities.
59
Seamless control of 3Com desk phones

Because the client can be associated with a physical IP phone, such as the 3Com 3102
Business Phone, a conventional handset can be used along with telephony functions, such
as voice calls, audio conferencing, and voice mail access, from the PC client.
3Com Enterprise Management

3Com Enterprise Management Systems for i5/OS provides extensive management services
for managing 3Com voice and data network and any other Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)-compliant devices. This is available for the 3Com telephony suite of
products. Enterprise Management Systems can manage up to 20 nodes, most VoIP devices
(VCX and Gateway), and some data devices (switches). 3Com Enterprise Management
System for i5/OS provides a 20-node limit.
3Com IP Telephony Suite for IBM System i

3Com IP Telephony Suite can be integrated with line-of-business applications, IBM Lotus
Domino, and IBM Lotus Sametime. 3Com IP Telephony Suite can be implemented on
System i platforms to provide highly available IP communications that are resilient to WAN
outages. System i Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), and 595 are supported,
running i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 or later.
Available enhancements with the 3Com IP Telephony Suite include:
New telephony integration for business and collaboration software
3Com IP Telephony Integration SDK for System i
APIs can be used to easily integrate telephony functions within a line-of-business

application.
3Com IP Telephony Integration for IBM Lotus Domino
Message Synchronization enables the synchronization of message stores between

3Com IP Telephony Suite and IBM Lotus Domino. The prerequisite is Lotus Domino
6.0 or later.
Domino directory synchronization with 3Com directory allows users to be managed

together with a single logical directory entry. The prerequisite is Lotus Domino 6.0
or later.
3Com IP Telephony Integration for IBM Lotus Sametime
Click-to-Call Java plug-in for click-to-call enables Sametime IM users the ability to
Click-to-Call individuals of groups in conference calls. It includes the function to let
an administrator mute/unmute participants and control other aspects of the
conference call. The prerequisite is Sametime 7.5 or later.
Sametime directory synchronization with 3Com directory allows users to be

managed together with a single logical directory entry. The prerequisite is
Sametime 7.5 or later.
The Sametime client extension enables phone awareness to be shown to users, for
example, phone off-hook or phone on-hook.
3Com Enterprise Management Systems for i5/OS, which provides extensive management
services for managing 3Com voice and data network and any other SNMP-compliant
devices.
New call center and telecommuting modules:
3Com IP EPICCenter for System i
3Com IP Telecommuting for System i
60
Re-packaging 3Com IP Conferencing for System i

Three-year software application support
Support for new phone and gateway technology:
3Com 3108 Wireless IP Telephone

3Com V6100 Digital Gateway
3.6.3 System i IP Telephony Express offerings

In this section, we summarize the specific Model 520 express offerings for running telephony
applications that are provided by 3Com. We recommend that you use the IBM Systems
Workload Estimator to size your Telephony application workloads:
Telephony Express 100 (#7381)

Telephony Express 100 is an economical package of hardware, software, and services that
can support telephony and messaging functions for 100 users of the 3Com software. The
complete package includes a server with the necessary software and licensing that are
required to support the phone needs of a small business.
Hardware
System i Model 520 1.9 GHz 1-Way (3800 CPW)

70 GB 15K rpm disk
1 GB DDR2 Main Storage
DVD-ROM
Logical Partitioning Specify
Linux Partition Specify
Software
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 (5722-SS1)

Web Enablement for i5/OS (5722-WE2)
One year of SW Maintenance (5733-SPP)
3Com components
Software licenses
3Com IP Telephony Server License (3COVS70109-05)

3Com IP Messaging Server License (3COVS70309-05)
100 3Com IP Messaging Seat Licenses (3COVS73100-05)
Enterprise Management System for i5/OS (3CR15640)
Device licenses
Two 3Com IP Standard 50 Phone Licenses (3COVS72107-05)

Four 3Com Analog FXS Media Gateway 1 Port Licenses (3COVS71110-05)
Distribution media
3Com IP Telephony, Msg, and Conferencing on DVD (3CIBMDVDA)

The Telephony Express 250 is an economical package of hardware, software, and services
that can support telephony and messaging functions for 250 users of the 3Com software. The
61
Hardware

70 GB 15K rpm disk
DVD-ROM
Software
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 (5722-SS1)

3Com components
Software licenses

Device licenses
3Com IP Standard 250 Phone License (3COVS72102-05)

Eight 3Com Analog FXS Media Gateway 1 Port Licenses (3COVS71110-05)
Distribution media

Hardware

70 GB 15K rpm disk
DVD-ROM
Software
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 (5722-SS1)

3Com components
Software licenses
62

Device licenses

24 3Com Analog FXS Media Gateway 1 Port Licenses (3COVS71110-05)
Distribution media

required to support the phone needs of a midsized business.
Hardware
System i Model 520 1.9 GHz 1/2-Way (3800/7100 CPW)

Two 70 GB 15K rpm disk units
DVD-ROM
Software
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 (5722-SS1)

3Com components
Software licenses

Device licenses

Distribution media
Telephony Express HA100 (#0486)

Telephony Express HA100 is packaged to provide a high level of availability for a 3Com
telephony implementation. This package of hardware, software, and services supports
telephony and messaging functions for 100 users of the 3Com software. The Telephony
Express HA100 includes a primary and a secondary system (1-way).
Primary system
Hardware
70 GB 15K rpm disk
63
DVD-ROM
Software
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 (5722-SS1)

3Com components
Software licenses

Device licenses

Four 3Com Analog FXS Media Gateway 1 Port Licenses (3COVS71110-05)
Distribution media
Secondary system
Hardware

70 GB 15K rpm disk
DVD-ROM
Software
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 (5722-SS1)

3Com components
Software licenses

Distribution media

Express HA250 includes a primary and a secondary system (1-way).
64
Primary system
Hardware
System i5 Model 520 1.9 GHz 1-Way (3800/7100 CPW)

70 GB 15K rpm disk
DVD-ROM
Standard Edition
Software
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 (5722-SS1)

3Com components
Software licenses

Device licenses

Eight 3Com Analog FXS Media Gateway 1 Port Licenses (3COVS71110-05)
Distribution media
Secondary system
Hardware
System i5 Model 520 1.9 GHz 1-way (3800/7100 CPW)

70 GB 15K rpm disk
DVD-ROM
Software
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 (5722-SS1)

3Com components
Software licenses

Distribution media
65

Telephony Express HA500 is packaged to provide a high-level 3Com telephony
implementation. This package of hardware, software, and services supports telephony and
messaging functions for 500 users of the 3Com software. The Telephony Express HA500
includes a primary and a secondary system (1-way).
Primary system
Hardware

70 GB 15K rpm disk
DVD-ROM
Software
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 (5722-SS1)

3Com components
Software licenses

Device licenses

Distribution media
Secondary system
Hardware

70 GB 15K rpm disk
DVD-ROM
Software
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 (5722-SS1)

3Com components
Software licenses
66

Distribution media

Express HA1000 includes a primary and a secondary system (1/2-way).
Primary system
Hardware
System i5 Model 520 1.9 GHz 1/2-Way (3800/7100 CPW)

DVD-ROM
Software
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 (5722-SS1)

3Com components
Software licenses

Device licenses

Distribution media
Secondary system
Hardware
System i5 Model 520 1.9 GHz 1/2-Way (3800/7100 CPW)

DVD-ROM
Software
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 (5722-SS1)

67
3Com components
Software licenses

Distribution media
3.7 System i5 Model 520+ overview

520+. The values are package dependent.
address:
http://www.bmc.com
To review the footnotes for the following table, see 3.16, Notes for System i5 Models 515,
520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 on page 90.
68
9405/9406 Model 520+
with
Accelerator2b
2-way with
maximum 5250
Base
with
Accelerator2b
2-way
Base
with
Accelerator2b
LPAR
#7140 Express
600/30
3100/30
6600
10
#7141 Express
600/30
3100/30
6600
10
#7142 Express
600/30
3100/30
6600
10
#0975
#7350 Value
600/30
3100/30
6600
10
#0970
#7143 Express
1200/60
3800/60
2600
8200
10
#7148 Express
1200/60
3800/60
2600
8200
10
#7144 Express
3800/60
8200
10
#7152 Express
3800/60
8200
10
#0975
#7352 Value
1200/60
3800/60
2600
8200
10
#0906
#7366 Solution
1200/1200
2600
#7373 High Availability
1200/1200
2600
2800/2800
6100
#7381 Telephony 100
3800/0
8200
10
#7382 Telephony 250
3800/0
8200
10
#7383 Telephony 500
3800/0
8200
10
#7691 Collaboration
3800/0
8200
10
#7710 CBU
1200/1200
2600
#7711 CBU
2800/2800
6100
#7712 CBU Standard
3800/0
8200
10
#7734 Enterprise
1200/1200
2600
#7735 Enterprise
2800/2800
6100
#7784 Standard
3800/0
8200
10
#7786 Solution Entry
3800/0
8200
10
#7788 1-way SAP
3800/0
8200
10
Processor
feature
Server
feature
Configuration
feature6a
#8325
#0970
#8327
MCU2a
Base
Processor/5250 CPW5
69
9405/9406 Model 520+
2-way with
maximum 5250
Base
with
Accelerator2b
2-way
Base
3800/3800
7100/7100
8200
15600
10/processor
#7384 Telephony 1000
3800/0
7100/0
8200
15600
10/processor
#7720 CBU Standard
3800/0
7100/0
8200
15600
10/processor
#7721 CBU
3800/3800
7100/7100
8200
15600
10/processor
#7736 Enterprise
3800/3800
7100/7100
8200
15600
10/processor
#7785 Standard
3800/0
7100/0
8200
15600
10/processor
#7787 Solution Growth
3800/0
7100/0
8200
15600
10/processor
#7789 2-way SAP
7100/0
15600
10/processor
9405/9406 Model 520+

#8325
Server
feature
Processor feature
#8327
with
Accelerator2b
with
Accelerator2b
Processor
feature
#0906
LPAR
Configuration
feature6a
#8330
MCU2a
Base
Processor/5250 CPW5
#8330
1/POWER5+/1.9 GHz
1/POWER5+/1.9 GHz
1/2-way/POWER5+/1.9 GHz
L2 Cache (MB)
1.9
1.9
1.9
L3 Cache (MB)
36
36
1/32
1/32
1/32
Main storage DIMMs (min/max)
2/8
2/8
2/8
Minimum i5/OS/LIC level
V5R3M0/V5R3M5
V5R3M0/V5R3M5
V5R3M0/V5R3M5
P05
P10
P20
Software group
70
6a
3.7.1 9405 Model 520 Express configurations

The 9405 Model 520 Express configurations provide ready-to-run, fixed configurations as
shown in the following table. The Express configurations are based on the 9406 Value
Editions.
9405 Model 520 Express configurations
Configuration
Entry
Entry Plus
Entry Plus
with RAID
Growth
Growth with
RAID
Turbo
Turbo with
RAID
CPW
600
600
600
1200
1200
3800
3800
CPW with
Accelerator
3100
3100
3100
3800
3800
N/A
N/A
5250 CPW
30
30
30
60
60
60
60
LPARs (i5/OS/
total)
2/10
2/10
2/10
3/10
3/10
10/10
10/10
Server feature
0970
0970
0970
0970
0970
0970
0970
Processor
8325
8325
8325
8327
8327
8327
8327
Configuration
7140
7141
7142
7148
7143
7144
7152
Disk1
2x#9256
(2x35 GB)
2x#9256
(2x35 GB)
4x#9256
(4x35 GB)
2x#9256
(2x35 GB)
4x#9256
(4x35 GB)
2x#9256
(2x35 GB)
4x#9256
(4x35 GB)
Disk1
2x#9613
(2x70 GB)
2x#9613
(2x70 GB)
4x#9613
(4x70 GB)
2x#9613
(2x70 GB)
4x#9613
(4x70 GB)
2x#9613
(2x70 GB)
4x#9613
(4x70 GB)
Disk protection
0040
Mirror
0040
Mirror
0041
RAID-5
0040
Mirror
0041
RAID-5
0040
Mirror
0041
RAID-5
Cache/RAID
None
None
9510
None
9510
None
9510
Console options
select one 3
#5540/#5553
#5550/#5552
#5540/#5553
#5550/#5552
#5540/#5553
#5550/#5552
#5540/#5553
#5550/#5552
#5540/#5553
#5550/#5552
#5540/#5553
#5550/#5552
#5540/#5553
#5550/#5552
RIO loops
DDR2 memory
9548
(1 GB)
9548
(1 GB)
9548
(1 GB)
9549
(2 GB)
9549
(2 GB)
9553
(4 GB)
9553
(4 GB)
30 GB QIC tape
9653
9653
9653
9653
9653
9653
9653
DVD-ROM
9540
9540
9540
9540
9540
9540
9540
Modem
9793/9794
9793/9794
9793/9794
9793/9794
9793/9794
9793/9794
9793/9794
Base IOP
9844
9844
9844
9844
9844
9844
9844
Twinax2
9746
9746
9746
9746
9746
9746
9746
Twinax2
4746
4746
4746
4746
4746
4746
4746
Software group
P05
P05
P05
P10
P10
P10
P10
Notes:
1. Effective April 2007, the Express configurations include 70 GB disk drives instead of 35 GB disk drives.
2. Effective 22 May 2007, new Express configuration orders have a chargeable #4746 twinax feature instead of the no-charge #9746
associated with #5540.
3. Other console options may be chosen via MES to the original order. Ensure all console options are available in your geography.
The 9405 at i5/OS V5R3 and LIC V5R3M5 supports Twinax, LAN Console without IOP, and Direct Cable Operations Console.
The 9405 at i5/OS V5R4M0 supports Twinax, LAN Console without IOP, Direct Cable Operations Console, and Thin Console.
Note: For this table, review footnote 6a in 3.16, Notes for System i5 Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 on page 90.
71

address:
http://www.bmc.com
520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 on page 90.
Processor feature
#8950
9405 Model 520

#8951
Server feature9
#0900
#0901
#0912
1/POWER5/
1.5 GHz
1/POWER5/
1.5 GHz
1/POWER5/
1.5 GHz
500
1000
2400
5500
Number/type/
speed of processor
Relative system performance 1,
Processor CPW
Mail and Calendar Users
#8972
2a, 9
5250 CPW 5
Express 6a
30
60
60
L2 Cache (MB)
1.88
1.88
1.88
L3 Cache (MB)
1/32
2/32
4/32
Main storage DIMMs (minimum/maximum)
4/8
4/8
4/8
Logical partitions (LPAR)

Minimum i5/OS level/LIC level 8a
Software group 6a
72
10
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
P05
P10
P10
9406 Model 520

Processor feature
#8950
#8951
#8952
#8953
#8954
#8955
#8972
Server feature 9
#0900
#0901
#0902
#0903
#0904
#0905
#0912
Number/
type/
speed of processor
1/
POWER5/
1.5 GHz
1/
POWER5/
1.5 GHz
1/
POWER5/
1.5 GHz
1/
POWER5/
1.5 GHz
1/
POWER5/
1.65 GHz
2/
POWER5/
1.65 GHz
1/
POWER5/
1.5 GHz
Relative system
performance1, 2
Processor CPW
500
1000
1000
2400
3300
6000
2400
Mail and Calendar

Users 2a
5250 CPW 5
---
2300
2300
5500
7300
13300
5500
Value 6a
30
60
60
60
60
1000
1000
2400
3300
6000
1000
2400
3300
6000
L2 Cache (MB)
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
L3 Cache (MB)
36
36
0.5/32
1/32
1/32
1/32
1/32
1/32
1/32
2/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
Express
6a
Standard 6a
Solution
6a
Enterprise 6a
High Availability
6a

Main storage DIMMs
(minimum/maximum)
Software group 6a
10
10
20
10
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
P05
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
P10
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
P10
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
P10
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
P20
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
P20
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
P10
3.9 System i Model 525

The System i Model 525 focuses on small- to medium-sized business needs by delivering full
POWER5+ performance and user-based i5/OS licensing in a 1/2-way system. The Model 525
supports 30 or more i5/OS users with greater systems scalability and partitioning capability
than the Model 515. It is an easy-to-install, manageable system that provides the
performance and reliability businesses expect.
Key attributes of the Model 525 include:
Ability to run i5/OS, Linux, and AIX 5L applications on a single system and integrate IBM
eServer xSeries servers running Windows
1/2-way system with a 1.9 GHz POWER5+ processor
Two customizable system configuration options, Express and Capacity BackUp
Support of 30 to unlimited i5/OS users
P10 software tier
Security and virus resistance
The System i Model 525 focuses on small- to medium-sized business needs. This 1/2-way
system with full POWER5+ performance and user-based i5/OS licensing redefines the cost to
acquire.
73
The user-based i5/OS licensing associated with the Model 525 provides added flexibility,
enabling businesses to take advantage of i5/OS capabilities at a lower financial investment
than available before with Model 520 processor and I/O attachment capabilities. The Model
525 includes license entitlements for 30 to unlimited users in blocks of 10 users. There is also
an option for an unlimited user entitlement option for external i5/OS users (clients, vendors, or
business partners).
When only one of the two processors has been permanently activated, the Model 525 has
Capacity on Demand (CoD) options that make it possible to activate an additional processor
resource in order to satisfy capacity needs that are associated with business growth or peaks.
A key is required to activate the on/off CoD.
The Model 525 provides the full power of its POWER5+ processor available for either or both
batch (non-interactive) and 5250 OLTP work. This translates to 3800 CPW (batch and 5250
OLTP) for the 1-way system and 7100 CPW for the 2-way system
The Model 525 does not have an upgrade path to a larger model such as the 550 or 570.
However, upgrades to the Model 525 from the Model 520 or 810 are available.
Each Model 525 order is built to order and may be customized to provide exact hardware
placement and IBM software preload. The Model 525 provides an integrated set of hardware
capabilities including two 1 Gbps Ethernet LAN ports and a disk, tape, or DVD drive controller
in the base. It is available as either a desk-side (tower) configuration or as a rack-mount
configuration requiring 4 EIA units (4U) of rack space in a 19-inch rack.
The 9406 Model 525 comes with a one-year hardware warranty with 24x7
same-business-day service and one year of 9x5 software maintenance support (SWMA) for
the included i5/OS license. The SWMA can be upgraded to 24x7 for three years.
3.10 System i Model 525 Editions overview

The 9406 Model 525 is offered as an Express Configuration, as a Capacity BackUp
Configuration, and as a Solution Edition. The three Express Configurations package 30, 150,
or an unlimited number of i5/OS user entitlements. The Capacity BackUp Configuration
provides a second system for backup, high availability, and disaster recovery. This
configuration includes 30 i5/OS user entitlements. Additional i5/OS user entitlements in 10
user increments can be added to the 30 or 150 entitlement Express Configurations and to the
Capacity BackUp Configuration. For Capacity BackUp Configuration registration and
additional information about the Capacity BackUp Edition, see the System i Capacity BackUp
Editions Web page at:
3.10.1 Base system unit and features

The Model 525 POWER5+ system supports a single processor card. The processor card
supports eight DIMM DDR2 memory positions that allow memory to be plugged in the
processor card (direct attach). Memory is plugged in pairs of DIMMs.
#8330 1.9 GHz Processor (1/2-way) Processor
1.9 MB L2 cache
36 MB L3 cache
74
Three media bays and one operator panel bay

The three media bays consist of one half-height and two slimline bays. The half-height bay
is for SCSI tape devices. The top slimline bay is usable by IBM i5/OS for the required
DVD-ROM. The second slimline bay is a straight IDE and is usable only with AIX 5L or
Linux partitions.
Two system and two USB 2.0 ports
Neither USB port is usable by i5/OS.
Only system port T2 is usable by i5/OS (for #1827 Serial-UPS Conversion Cable).
Two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports
One of these Ethernet ports is usable for a LAN console.
Base service processor
Two HMC ports and two SPCN ports
Six PCI-X card slots
Four disk slots
Integrated disk, DVD, and tape controller
Rack mount or desk-side specify
3.10.2 Express Editions

Model 525 Express configuration 1 (#7790)
Hardware
1/2-way system with one processor activation (3800 CPW); scalable up to two
processor activations (7100 CPW)
One WAN IOA
LPAR capable
Software
Licensing for i5/OS (one processor license)

Licensing for 30 i5/OS users (5722-SSC)

Hardware
One WAN IOA
LPAR capable
Software

75

Hardware
One WAN IOA
LPAR capable
Software

Licensing for unlimited i5/OS users (5722-SSC)
3.10.3 Capacity BackUp configuration

Model 525 Capacity BackUp configuration 1 (#6910)
Hardware
One WAN IOA
LPAR capable
Software

3.10.4 Solution Editions

The following Model 525 Solution Editions are available:
System i 525 Solution Edition for Oracle JD Edwards Enterprise One (#6913)
The applications that are supported are JD Edwards EnterpriseOne and World.
System i 525 Solution Edition for SAP Applications (#6914)
This configuration is intended for less than 100 SAP application users active. Among the
SAP applications supported by the new edition are mySAP, ERP, BI, CRM, Partition
Load Manager, and SCM.
These application solutions are essentially the Model 525 versions of corresponding similar
solution editions that are available on Models 520 and 550. Always consult with the
application solution providers for additional application considerations and for proper system
configuration performance sizing.
Hardware
1/2-way system with one processor activation processor feature #8330, activation
#8410 (3800 CPW); scalable up to two processor activations (7100 CPW)
One WAN IOA
76
#9510 (#5727) disk controller with 40 MB write cache with four #9613 (#4327) 70.56
GB disk drives
RAID or other disk protection, such as mirroring, is required. Disk protection by RAID is
the default.
LPAR capable
Up to two of three available disk packages may be ordered with an initial order to
increase system capacity at a reduced cost compared to unpackaged equivalent
hardware:
#5567
#5568
#5569
Software

Licensing for up to 60 i5/OS users (5722-SSC)
One year P10 software maintenance included

525.
tool, such as the IBM Systems Workload Estimator, which you can access at:
http://www.bmc.com
520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 on page 90.
77
9406-525
Processor
feature
Server
feature
Configuration features
Processor
CPW
No charge i5/OS user

licenses
LPAR
#8330
#0909
#6910 CBU Configuration 1
3800/7100
30
10/processor
#7790 Express Configuration 1
3800/7100
30
10/processor
3800/7100
150
10/processor
3800/7100
Unlimited
10/processor
#6913 Solution Edition: SAP

Applications
3800/7100
60
10/processor
#6914 Solution Edition: Oracle JD

Edwards Applications
3800/7100
60
9406 Model 525

#8330
Processor feature
Server feature9
#0909
Number/type/
speed of processor
Relative system performance 1,
1/2-way/POWER5+ /1.9 GHz

2
Processor CPW
5250 CPW
3800/7100
2a, 9
8200/15600
3800/7100
L2 Cache (MB)
1.88
L3 Cache (MB)
36
1/32
2/8
10/processor
Minimum i5/OS level/LIC level 8a
V5R4M0/V5R4M5
Software group
6a
Numbers are for all 9405 and 9406 520/520+/525 processor

features
P10
Base system unit
Disk storage (GB)7d

Integrated maximum7a
Total maximum 7, 7a
DASD arms maximum
Internal arms
External LUNs
Physical packaging
Rack design - EIA units
External RIO-G ports
External RIO-G loops
PCI/PCI-X Expansion Tower
External xSeries Servers
PCI card slots10a
Communication lines3
LAN ports (includes embedded)
External xSeries adapters (IXA)
78
System maximum
0
1109
8
8
-
39234
39234
278
278
278
4
0/2
0/1
6
8
6
8
5
4
2
1
6
8
90
192
36
0/1
0
18
8
Numbers are for all 9405 and 9406 520/520+/525 processor

features
Base system unit
iSCSI adapters
Internal tape/CD/DVD 4
External tape/optical/CD/DVD (single partition maximum)
System maximum
0
3
120
1 tape/2 DVD
0
21
48
1920
13 tapes/14 CD/DVD
18
External tape/optical/CD/DVD (system maximum)
36
0
0
8
2
3.12 System i5 Model 550+ and i5 Model 550 overview

The following tables provide the minimum and maximum system capacities for the Models
550+ and 550. The values are package dependent.
address:
http://www.bmc.com
520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 on page 90.
Processor feature
Server feature
Model 550+
#8958
#8312
#0915
Relative system performance1,
#0910
1/4/POWER5/1.65 GHz
1/4/POWER5+/1.9 GHz
3300/12000
3800/14000
7300/26600
8200/30000
Processor CPW
Model 550
2a, 9
5250 CPW 5
Standard 6b
Enterprise 6b
3300/12000
3800/14000
79
Model 550
Model 550+
Processor feature
#8958
#8312
Server feature9
#0915
#0910
High Availability6b
3300/12000
3800/14000
NA
3800/14000
3300/12000
3800/14000
3300/12000
3800/14000
3300/12000
3800/14000
6b
4-way SAP6b
1.9
1.9
Capacity Backup
Domino 6b
Solution
6b
Solution Edition for Oracle JDE Enterprise
One6b
C2CRM with Domino6b

2-way SAP
L2 Cache (MB)
L3 Cache (MB)
Software group
4/16
4/16
10-40
V5R3/V5R3M0
V5R3/V5R3M0
P20
P20
6b
Numbers are for all 550+ and 550 processor features
Base system unit
Disk storage (GB)7d

Integrated minimum 7b
Integrated maximum 7a
Total maximum 7,7a
DASD arms maximum
Internal arms
External LUNs
Physical packaging
PCI card slots 10
iSCSI adapters
Internal CD/DVD/tape 4
External tape/optical/CD/DVD (LPAR)
80
36
2 /64
10-40
LPAR
Minimum i5/OS/LIC level
36
2/64
System maximum
0
1128
-
0
77051
77051
8
-
548
548
4
2
1
6
8
5
6
5
4
4
2
12
16
172
320
96
0/1
0
0
2
80
2
2 (2)
1
1
36
16
27
133
5320
26
18 (36)
8
4
3.13 System i5 Model 570+ overview

570+. The values are package dependent.
address:
http://www.bmc.com
520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 on page 90.
Model 570+
Processor feature
Server feature
Number/
type/
speed of processor
#8338 x 4
#8338 x 8
#8338 x 8
#0934
#0935
#0936
#0937
8/16/
POWER5+/
2.2 GHz
2/16/
POWER5+/
2.2 GHz
2/4/
POWER5+/
2.2 GHz
4/8/
POWER5+/
2.2 GHz
8400/16000
16700/31100
31100/58500
8400/58500
18200/34500
35500/67500
67500/130000
18200/130000
Processor CPW
Mail and Calendar Users2a,
#8338 x 2
5250 CPW 5
Standard6c
Enterprise6c
High
Availability6c
Capacity BackUp6c
8400/16000
16700/31100
131100/58500
8400/16000
16700/31100
31100/58500
8400/58500
L2 Cache (MB) per processor
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
36
36
36
36
4/128
8/256
16/512
16/512
8/16
16/32
32/64
32/64
Main storage (GB

minimum/maximum)
Main storage DDR2 DIMMs
(minimum/maximum)
Logical partitions (LPAR)12
Minimum i5/OS/LIC level 8
Software group 6c
20/40
40/80
80/160
20/160
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
P30
P40
P40
P40
Disk storage (GB)7d
81
Model 570+
Processor feature
Server feature
Total maximum 7a
DASD arms maximum
#8338 x 2
#8338 x 4
#8338 x 8
#0934
#0935
#0936
#8338 x 8
#0937
77051
116000
193898
193898
546
822
1374
1374
Internal arms
546
822
1374
1374
External LUNs
546
822
1374
1374
Physical packaging
16
16
16
16
12
24
48
48

PCI card slots 10
16
32
57
57
173
346
692
695
320
480
480
480
96
128
128
128
36
48
48
48

0/36
0/48
0/48
0/48
0/16
0/32
0/57
0/57
iSCSI adapters
0/42
0/84
0/168
0/168
134
180
180
180
5360
7200
7200
7200
Internal DVD-ROM/ DVD-RAM 4
Feature I/O Tower Tape/CD-ROM/DVD

18 (25)
26 (36)
26 (48)
26 (48)
External tape
18 (36)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
4 (8)
4 (8)
4 (8)
4 (8)
82
3.14 eServer i5 Model 570 overview

address:
http://www.bmc.com
520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 on page 90.
Model 570
Processor feature
#8961
#8961 (x2)
Server feature
#0919
#0920
Processor CPW
Mail and Calendar Users 2a,
0/2/POWER5/1.65 GHz
2/4/POWER5/1.65 GHz
3300/6000
6350/12000
7300/13300
14100/26600
5250 CPW 5
Standard6c
3300/6000
6350/12000
L2 Cache (MB per processor)
1.9
1.9
36
36
2/65
2/128
Enterprise6c
Main storage (GB minimum/maximum)

Minimum i5/OS level/LIC level 8
Software group 6c
Disk storage
4/8
8/16
10/20
20/40
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
P30
P30
(GB)7d
Total maximum7a
DASD arms maximum
38949
77051
276
546
Internal arms
276
546
External LUNs
276
546
83
Model 570
Processor feature
#8961
#8961 (x2)
Server feature
#0919
#0920
Physical packaging
12
16
90
173
278
320
71
96
19
36
69
133
PCI card slots 10

2760
5360
I/O Tower Tape/CD-ROM/DVD
13 (13)
18 (25)
External tape (LPAR)
18 (36)
18 (36)
External optical/CD/DVD (LPAR)
26 (48)
26 (48)
4 (8)
4 (8)
Cryptographic coprocessor (combined system partition)

Cryptographic accelerator (combined system partition)
Model 570
Processor feature
#8971
#8971 x 2
#8971 x 4
#8971 x 6
#8971 x8
#8971
Server feature
#0930
#0926
#0928
Number/
type/
speed of processor
#0922
#0924
2/4/
POWER5/
1.65 GHz
5/8/
POWER5/
1.65 GHz
9/12/
POWER5/
1.65 GHz
13/16/
POWER5/
1.65 GHz
2/16/
POWER5/
1.65 GHz
3300/6000
6350/12000
15200/25500
25500/33400
36300/44700
6350/44700
14100/
26600
14100/25900
33600/52500
57300/77000
83600/102000
14100/102000
Processor CPW
Mail and Calendar
#0921
1/2/
POWER5/
1.65 GHz
Users2a, 9
5250 CPW 5
Standard6c
Enterprise6c
3300/6000
6350/12000
15200/25500
25500/33400
36300/44700
High Availability6c
3300/6000
6350/12000
15200/25500
25500/33400
36300/44700
6350/44700
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
Capacity BackUp6c
Main storage (GB
minimum/maximum)
Main storage DIMMs
(minimum/maximum)
Minimum i5/OS level/LIC
level8
Software group 6c
Disk storage
36
36
36
36
36
4/128
8/256
12/384
16/512
16/512
4/8
8/16
16/32
24/48
32/64
32/64
10/20
20/40
50/80
90/120
120/160
20/160
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
P30
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
V5R3M0/
V5R3M0
P30
P40
P40
P40
P40
(GB)7d
84
36
2/64
Model 570
Processor feature
#8971
#8971 x 2
#8971 x 4
#8971 x 6
#8971 x8
#8971
Server feature
#0930
#0921
#0922
#0924
#0926
#0928
Total maximum 7a
DASD arms maximum
38949
77051
116000
154949
193898
193898
276
546
822
1098
1374
1374
Internal arms
276
546
822
1098
1374
1374
External LUNs
276
546
822
1098
1374
1374
12
16
16
12
16
16
PCI/PCI-X Expansion
Tower
12
24
36
48
48

(IXA)
16
32
48
57
57
Physical packaging
PCI card slots 10
90
173
346
519
692
692
278
320
480
480
480
480
LAN ports
(includes embedded)
52
96
128
128
128
128
19
36
48
48
48
48
69
134
180
180
180
180
7200
2760
5360
7200
7200
7200
Feature I/O Tower

Tape/CD-ROM /DVD
13 (13)
18 (25)
26 (36)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
External tape (LPAR)

18 (36)
18 (36)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
26 (48)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
4 (8)
4 (8)
4 (8)
4 (8)
4 (8)
4 (8)
85
3.15 System i5 Model 595 and Model 595+ overview

The following tables provide the minimum and maximum system capacities for all 595
models. The values are package dependent.
address:
http://www.bmc.com
520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 on page 90.
Model 595+
#8968 x 2
#0954
16/32
8/16
/POWER5+/
/POWER5+/
2.3 GHz
2.3 GHz
Processor feature
Server feature
Number/type/
speed of processor
#8968
#0953
5250 CPW
#8968
#0958
2/16
/POWER5+/
2.3 GHz
#8968 x 2
#0959
4/32
/POWER5+/
2.3 GHz
Processor CPW
#8968 x 4
#0955
32/64
/POWER+/
2.3 GHz
31500/58800
61000/108000
108000/216000
8200/58800
16000/108000
68400/131K2c
131K/242K2c
242K/460K 2c
18300/131K2c
35800/242K2c
Standard6d
31500/58800
61000/108000
108000/216000
Availability6d
31500/58800
61000/108000
108000/216000
Capacity BackUp6
8200/58800
16000/108000
L2 Cache (MB per processor) MCM
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
36
36
36
36
36
8/512
16/1024
32/2048
8/512
16/1024
4/16
4/32
4/64
4/16
4/32
Enterprise6d
High
Main storage (GB minimum/maximum)11

(LPAR)12
160
254
254
160
254
Minimum i5/OS/LIC level 8
V5R3/V5R3M5
V5R3/V5R3M5
V5R3/V5R3M5
V5R3/V5R3M5
V5R3/V5R3M5
P50
P50
P60
P50
P50
Logical partitions
Software group 6d
Disk storage
(GB)7d
86
Model 595+
#8968
#8968 x 2
#0953
#0954
228614
381024
Processor feature
Server feature
Total maximum7a
DASD arms maximum7c
#8968 x 4
#0955
381024
#8968
#0958
228614
#8968 x 2
#0959
381024
1620
2700
2700
1620
2700
Internal arms
1620
2700
2700
1620
2700
External LUNs
1620
2700
2700
1620
2700
Physical
packaging13
18
18
18
18
18
14
30
62
14
30
15
External RIO-G loops 10b
15
31
36
72
96
36
72
48
57
57
48
57
504
1008
1152
504
1008
PCI card slots 10

Communication lines
600
600
600
600
600
160
160
160
160
160
60
60
60
60
60
0,1/60
0,1/60
0,1/60
0,1/60
0,1/60
0,1/48
0,1/57
0,1/57
0,1/48
0,1/57
0,1/128
0,1/128
0,1/128
0,1/128
0,1/128

iSCSI adapters
180
180
180
180
180
7200
7200
7200
7200
7200
Internal DVD-ROM/DVD-RAM 4
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
4 (16)
4 (16)
4 (16)
4 (16)
4 (16)

External tape
Model 595
#8966, #8973
#8966, #8973 x 2
#0940
#0941
8/16 /POWER5/
16/32 /POWER5/
1.9 GHz
1.9 GHz
Processor feature
Server feature
Number/type/
speed of processor
#8966, #8973 x 2
#0944
4/32/POWER5/
1.9 GHz
Processor CPW
#8966, #8973 x 4
#0943
32/64 /POWER5/
1.9 GHz
26700/50500
51000/92000
92000/184000
13600/92000
60500/114000
115000/2130002c
213000/4050002c
31500/2130002c
5250 CPW 5
Standard6d
Enterprise6d
26700/50500
51000/92000
92000/184000
High Availability6d
26700/50500
51000/92000
92000/184000
Capacity
BackUp6
13600/92000
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
36
36
36
36
8/512
16/1024
32/2048
16/1024
4/16
4/32
4/64
4/32
Main storage (GB minimum/maximum)11

87
Model 595
#8966, #8973
#8966, #8973 x 2
#0940
#0941
160
254
Processor feature
Server feature
Software group
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
6d
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
#8966, #8973 x 4
#0943
254
#8966, #8973 x 2
#0944
254
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
P50
P50
P60
P50
228614
381024
381024
381024
1620
2700
2700
2700
Internal arms
1620
2700
2700
2700
External LUNs
1620
2700
2700
2700
Disk storage (GB)7d

Total maximum
7a
DASD arms maximum7c
Physical packaging13
18
18
18
18
14
30
62
30
15
31
15
36
72
96
72
48
57
57
57
1008
PCI card slots
10
504
1008
1152
600
600
600
600
160
160
160
160

Internal DVD-ROM/DVD-RAM
External tape
Processor feature
Server feature
Number/type/
speed of processor
60
60
60
180
180
180
7200
7200
7200
7200
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32
4 (16)
4 (16)
4 (16)
4 (16)
#8981
#0946
8/16/POWER5/
1.65 GHz
Model 595
#8981 x 2
#0947
16/32/POWER5/
1.65 GHz
#8981 x 4
#0952
32/64/POWER5/
1.65 GHz
Processor CPW
60
180
24500/45500
46000/85000
86000/165000
54000/104000
105000/194000
196000/375000
5250 CPW 5
Standard6d
Enterprise6d
24500/45500
46000/85000
86000/165000
High Availability6d
24500/45500
46000/85000
86000/165000
Capacity BackUp6
1.9
1.9
1.9
36
36
36
8/512
16/1024
32/2048
Main storage (GB
88
minimum/maximum)11
Processor feature
Server feature
Logical partitions
(LPAR)12

Software group 6d
Model 595
#8981 x 2
#0947
#8981
#0946
4/16
#8981 x 4
#0952
4/32
4/64
160
254
254
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
V5R3M0/V5R3M0
P50
P50
P60
Disk storage (GB)7d

Total maximum7a
DASD arms maximum 7c
228614
381024
381024
1620
2700
2700
Internal arms
1620
2700
2700
External LUNs
1620
2700
2700
Physical packaging
Rack design - EIA units13
18
18
18
14
30
62
15
31

36
72
96
48
57
57
1152
PCI card slots 10
504
1008
600
600
600
160
160
160

60
60
60
180
180
180
7200
7200
7200
Internal DVD-ROM/DVD-RAM 4
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
26 (60)
8 (32)
8 (32)
8 (32)
4 (16)
4 (16)
4 (16)

External tape
(combined system partition
89
3.16 Notes for System i5 Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, and
595
Note 1
CPW is used to measure the relative performance ratings of all System i model processors announced from September
1996 onward. The CPW value is measured on maximum configurations. The type and number of disk devices, the number
of workstation controllers, the amount of memory, the system model, other factors, and the application running determine
what performance is achievable. Do not use CPW to compare performance of System i models with other hardware
platforms or real-world i5/OS applications.
As a reminder, do not use CPW as the sole metric for sizing workloads on any IBM System i model. Additional
considerations include disk I/O-per-second rates and application workload attributes. We recommend that you size an IBM
System i model workload using a sizing tool, such as the IBM Systems Workload Estimator, which you can access at the
following address: http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/perfmgmt/sizing.html
You can also use Performance Navigator from the Midrange Performance Group, which you can learn more about at the
following address: http://www.mpginc.com
Note: The Models 515 and 525 require i5/OS V5R4 or later. The 520 1.9 GHz, 550 1.9 GHz, 570 2.2 GHz, and 595 2.3
GHz models all require either of the following releases:
i5/OS V5R3 with machine code (LIC) level V5R3M5
i5/OS V5R4 or later
Note 2
Processor performance represents the relative performance (maximum capacity) of a processor feature running CPW in
a client/server environment. Processor capacity is achievable when the commercial workload is not constrained by main
storage and DASD. Performance of the 5250 CPW represents the relative performance available to perform host-centric
workloads. The amount of 5250 CPW capacity consumed reduces the available processor capacity by the same amount.
Note 2a
Mail and Calendar Users (MCU) is a relative performance measurement that is derived by performing mail and calendar
functions using Domino and Notes clients. The MCU workload represents users on a Notes client who are reading,
updating, or deleting documents in an e-mail database. It also represents users who are performing lookups in the Domino
directory and scheduling calendar appointments and invitations. Reported values reflect 70% processor utilization to allow
for growth and peak loads in excess of customer workload estimates.
While MCU ratings provide a better means to compare Domino capacities relative to other System i models running i5/OS
than CPW, MCU should not be used as a sizing guideline for the number of Domino users in a real world environment.
For sizing, we recommend that you use a formal sizing tool, such as IBM Systems Workload Estimator, which you can
find on the Web at: http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/perfmgmt/sizing.html
For references to other sizing references in this paper, refer to Chapter 16, System i family upgrades on page 599.
Domino and Notes Mail and Calendar use is not recommended on Model 520 #8325 processors.
Note 2b
The optional Accelerator for System i5 feature provides a dramatic boost in processor CPW for additional workloads and
partitions.
Note 2c
The MCU rating is a projected value.
Note 2d
No charge feature #9844 IOP on the Models 9407-515 Express Configurations #1 and #3, 9407-515 Base Configurations
#1 and #2, and all 9406-525 configurations was removed from the configurator, e-config, on 9 October 2007 and orders
received after 26 October 2007 with feature #9844 are invalid. If an IOP is required after this date, feature #2844 must be
ordered instead of #9844. No charge feature #9844 remains a valid feature on 9407-515 Express Configuration #2.
Note 3
One line is used if #5544 System Console on Operations Console is used. One line can be used if #5546 System Console
on 100 Mbps Token Ring or #5548 System Console on 100 Mbps Ethernet is selected and the #0367 Operations Console
PCI Cable must be connected. The numbers include the ECS line.
Note 4
There must be one tape, DVD-ROM or DVD-RAM per system. See the details for each system. For Models 870 and 890,
there must be one DVD-RAM or DVD-ROM in the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure.
90
Note 5
5250 CPW (Interactive) is an approximate value that reflects the amount of Processor CPW that can be used for workloads
performing 5250-based tasks. Keep in mind the following points:
The System i Enterprise Edition provides maximum 5250 CPW support (up to 100% of the capacity of the active
processor CPW).
The System i Standard Edition provides zero CPW for 5250 work. Limited 5250 CPW is available for a system
administrator to use 5250 display device I/O to manage various aspects of the server. Multiple administrative jobs
exceed this capability.
There is a single job/console exception for interactive (5250 OLTP) work. This means when a single job within an
i5/OS partition (or the entire system i5/OS) is active and that job performs 5250 OLTP functions, almost total
processor capacity of that partition (or system) is available for the work being done by that single job. This availability
is regardless of the system limitations that are associated with interactive application capacity. Keep this in mind
when performing certain functions, such as running a CPU-intensive query or service diagnostics. When multiple
jobs performing 5250 functions become active, the single job exception is no longer available and their performance
is severely restricted. This single job exception not only applies to Standard Edition partitions, but also to the older
System i Base (no interactive 5250 capacity) models.
When more than one job must be active, consider running these CPU-intensive functions as batch jobs rather than
from a 5250 workstation.
Note 6a
Models
515, 520+
520, 525
A task submitted through a 5250 session (5250 device or 5250 emulation) that does display or printer I/O requires
5250 CPW.
A task submitted through a 5250 session (5250 device or 5250 emulation) as a "batch" job is not considered 5250
OLTP work and does not require any 5250 CPW unless the task does display or printer I/O.
Maximum 5250 CPW is equivalent to the Processor CPW for the active processor.
Software group is determined by the combination of processor feature and edition feature. Display the QPRCFEAT system
value or DSPHDWRSC TYPE(*AHW) to display the processor feature code value. This value is also shown for the
Capacity Card CCIN value when using SST to perform a Capacity Upgrade on Demand. The following table provides a
cross-reference.
Processor
Server feature
Edition/
configuration feature
Software group
Processor feature code or

QPRCFEAT value/with
accelerator
#8325
#0970
#7140 Express
P05
7140/7680
#7141 Express
P05
7141/7681
#7142 Express
P05
7142/7682
#0975
#7350 Value
P05
7350/7355
#0970
#7143 Express
P10
7143/7354
#7144 Express
P10
7144
#7148 Express
P10
7148/7687
#7152 Express
P10
7152
#0975
#7352 Value
P10
7352/7357
#0906
#7366 Solution
P10
7366
P10
7373
P10
7374
#7381 Telephony 100
P10
7784
#7382 Telephony 250
P10
7784
#7383 Telephony 500
P10
7784
#7691 Collaboration
P10
7690
#7692 Oracle JDE
P10
7690
#7710 CBU
P10
7734
#8327
91
Note 6a
Models
515, 520+
520, 525
(contd.)
Processor
Server feature
Edition/
Software group

QPRCFEAT value/with
accelerator
#8327 (contd.)
#0906 (contd.)
#7711 CBU
P10
7735
#7712 CBU Standard
P10
7784
#7734 Enterprise
P10
7734
#7735 Enterprise
P10
7735
#7784 Standard
P10
7784
#7786 Solution Entry
P10
7784
#7788 1-way SAP
P10
7784
#6010 515 Exp Cfg 1
P05
6010
#6011 515 Exp cfg 2
P05
6011
#6018 515 Base Cfg 1
P05
6018
P20
7375
#7384 Telephony 1000
P20
7785
#7720 CBU Standard
P20
7785
#7721 CBU
P20
7736
#7736 Enterprise
P20
7736
#7785 Standard
P20
7785
#7787 Solution Growth
P20
7785
#7789 2-way SAP
P20
7785
#6910 525 CBU
P10
6910
$6913 525 Oracle JDE
P10
6913
#6914 525 SAP
P10
6914
#7790 525 Exp Cfg 1
P10
7790
#7791 525 Exp Cfg 2
P10
7791
#7792 525 Exp Cfg 3
P10
7792
#6021 515 Exp Cfg 3
P05
6021
#6028 515 Base Cfg 2
P05
6028
#7390 Express
P05
7390
#7391 Express
P05
7390
#7393 Express
P05
7390
#7411 Express
P05
7411
#7413 Express
P05
7413
#7417 Express
P05
7417
#7450 Value
P05
7450
#4901
#8330
#0906
#0909
#4903
#8950
92
#0900
Note 6a
Models
515, 520+
520, 525
(contd.)
Processor
Server feature
Edition/
Software group

QPRCFEAT value/with
accelerator
#8951
#0901
#7392 Express
P05
7392
#7394 Express
P05
7392
#7414 Express
P10
7414
#7420 Express
P10
7420
#7451 Value
P10
7451
#7458 Standard
P10
7458
#7459 Enterprise
P10
7459
#7541 Solution
P10
7459
P10
7459
#7452 Standard
P10
7452
#7453 Enterprise
P10
7453
P10
7453
#7454 Standard
P20
7454
#7455 Enterprise
P20
7455
P20
7455
#7456 Standard
P20
7456
#7457 Enterprise
P20
7457
P20
7457
#7395 Express
P10
7395
#7396 Express
P10
7395
#7397 Value
P10
7397
#8952
#8953
#8954
#8955
#8972
Note 6b
Models
550+ 550
#0902
#0903
#0904
#0905
#0912
cross-reference.
Processor
Server feature
Edition feature
Software group

QPRCFEAT value
#8312
#0910
#7154 Standard
P20
7154
#7155 Enterprise
P20
7155
P20
7551
#7629 Domino
P20
7629
#7630 Solution
P20
7630
#7631 Oracle JDE

Enterprise One
P20
7630
#7632 C2CRM
P20
7630
#7640 2-way SAP
P20
7640
#7641 4-way SAP
P20
7640
93
Note 6b
Models
550+ 550
(contd.)
Note 6c
Models
570+ 570
Processor
Server feature
Edition feature
Software group

QPRCFEAT value
#8958
#0915
#7462 Standard
P20
7462
#7463 Enterprise
P20
7463
#7530 Domino
P20
7462
#7558 Solution
P20
7463
#7531 Solution Edition for

PeopleSoft Enterprise
One
P20
7463
#7532 C2CRM Solution

Edition with Domino
P20
7463
#7533 2-way SAP

Solution Edition
P20
7462
#7534 4-way SAP

Solution Edition
P20
7462
cross-reference.
Processor
Server feature
Edition feature
Software group

QPRCFEAT value
#8338
#0934
#7757 Standard
P30
7757
#7747 Enterprise
P30
7747
P30
7763
#7758 Standard
P40
7758
#7748 Enterprise
P40
7748
P40
7764
#7759 Standard
P40
7759
#7749 Enterprise
P40
7749
P40
7765
#0937
P30
7760
#0919
#7488 Standard
P30
7450
#7489 Enterprise
P30
7451
#7469 Standard
P30
7458
#7470 Enterprise
P30
7459
#7494 Standard
P30
7494
#7495 Enterprise
P30
7495
P30
7495
#7471 Standard
P40
7441
#7472 Enterprise
P40
7472
P40
7472
#0935
#0936
#8961
#0920
#8971
#0921
#0922
94
Note 6c
Models
570+ 570
(contd.)
Processor
Server feature
Edition feature
Software group

QPRCFEAT value
#8971 (contd.)
#0924
#7473 Standard
P40
7473
#7474 Enterprise
P40
7474
P40
7474
#7475 Standard
P40
7475
#7476 Enterprise
P40
7476
P40
7476
#0928
P40
7570
#0930
#7490 Standard
P30
7490
#7491 Enterprise
P30
7491
P30
7491
#0926
Note 6d
Model 595
cross-reference.
Processor
Server feature
Edition feature
Software group

QPRCFEAT value
#8966
#0940
#7480 Standard
P50
7480
#7481 Enterprise
P50
7481
P50
7481
#7482 Standard
P50
7482
#7483 Enterprise
P50
7483
P50
7483
#7486 Standard
P60
7486
#7487 Enterprise
P60
7487
P60
7487
#0944
P50
7590
#0953
#5870 Standard
P50
5870
#5890 Enterprise
P50
5890
#5871 Standard
P50
5871
#5891 Enterprise
P50
5891
#5872 Standard
P60
5872
#5892 Enterprise
P60
5892
#5875 CBU Standard
P50
5875
#5895 CBU
P50
5895
#5876 CBU Standard
P50
5876
#5896 CBU
P50
5896
#0941
#0943
#8968
#0954
#0955
#0958
#0959
95
Note 6d
Model 595
(contd.)
Processor
Server feature
Edition feature
Software group

QPRCFEAT value
#8973
#0940
#7900 Standard
P50
7900
#7901 Enterprise
P50
7901
P50
7902
#7903 Standard
P50
7903
#7904 Enterprise
P50
7904
P50
7905
#7906 Standard
P60
7906
#7907 Enterprise
P60
7907
P60
7908
#7912 CBU Standard
P50
7912
#7909 CBU Enterprise
P50
7909
#7910 CBU Standard
P50
7910
#7911 CBU Enterprise
P50
7911
#7496 Standard
P50
7496
#7497 Enterprise
P50
7497
#7498 Standard
P50
7498
#7499 Enterprise
P50
7499
#7984 Standard
P60
7984
#7985 Enterprise
P60
7985
#0941
#0943
#0944
#0957
#8981
#0946
#0947
#0952
Note 7
External DASD cannot exceed the maximum system capacity or the maximum number of disk arms.
Note 7a
Total maximum DASD capacity (no mirroring or RAID protections) assumes 141 GB disk drives. External DASD cannot
exceed the maximum system capacity or the maximum number of disk arms.
Notes:
Depending upon your use of mirroring or RAID-5/RAID-6 protection, protected maximum storage is less than listed
here.
The 282.25 GB disk drive was announced in July 2007. This disk drive is not formally supported on System i
POWER5 models. Contact your marketing representative if you have a requirement for 282.25 GB disk support on
POWER5 technology systems.
Note 7b
With the announcement of SAN Boot, there is no longer a requirement for an internal disk. San Boot requires #2847 PCI
IOP for SAN Load Source.
Note 7c
Maximum of 2000 DASD arms in a single i5/OS partition.
Note 7d
Hot spares are not considered configured units. Therefore, they do not count against the system maximums.
Note 8
i5/OS V5R3 and LIC V5R3M5 or i5/OS V5R4 with the latest level of LIC and Cumulative PTF package fixes available at
installation time are required for the 520+ (1.9 GHz processor) and 595+ (2.3 GHz processor). For the latest information,
refer to the IBM Prerequisite Web page at:
http://www-912.ibm.com/e_dir/eServerPrereq.nsf/UpgradeCategories/Hardware?opendocument
Note 8a
For Model 520 2-way processors shipped prior to 10 December 2004 that have keyed products installed, update the server
firmware to accept the lower P20 software tier. See the following HMC Web page for the latest updates:
http://www14.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/hmc/home.html
Note 9
The server features used for iSeries for Domino specify the minimum amount of disk, memory, and Domino licenses
required for an initial order.
96
Note 10
When a second RIO-G loop is required, one PCI card slot is used for the RIO-G adapter.
Note 10a
The 520+ models have one PCI-X 2.0 card slot (P1-C4) that is for IOP-less cards only
Note 10b
The use of more than 24 RIO-G loops (48 cables) requires physical planning and careful cable placement and
management. Closing the Model 595 door can be difficult.
Note 11
One terabyte (TB) of memory can be ordered after 28 October 2004. Two TB are available in 2005.
Note 12
A maximum of 10 active partitions per activated processor. A maximum of 64 i5/OS partitions applies to any model with
six or more activated processors. There is a maximum of 32 processors per i5/OS partition (Model 595 or larger only).
Note 13
Rack containing the system unit is a 42U, 24-inch rack. The bulk power supplies are installed in 8U leaving 16U empty.
3.17 9405, 9406 and 9407 Models 515, 520+, 520, and 525
system unit schematics
3.17.1 Model 515, 520+, and 525 top view
In the following schematic of the top view of the Model 520+, T5 is port 0 and T6 is port 1.
97
3.17.2 Model 515, 520+, and 525 front view
P3-D4
P3-D3
P3-D2
P3-D1
P2-D4
P2-D3
P2-D2
P2-D1
DASD
SCSI Device
P4-D1
RAID Enablement Card / Integrated Cache
= Hot Plug Capable

= Base
USB
Operation Panel
P4-D4
3.17.3 Model 515, 520+, and 525 back view
98
SCSI IDE P4-D2
Ethernet
P1-T1
Notes:
The #1827 Serial-UPS Conversion Cable connects to the top system port on a rack
mounted system or the right system port on a desk-side system. T5 is the default port 0
for the embedded LAN console.
The P1-C21 (GX+), C21-T1 RIO 0, and C21-T2 RIO 1 ports are not available on the
9407 Model 515.
3.17.4 Model 520 top view
**
System VPD
P1-C20
P1-C10 (J0B)
P1-C11 (J0C)
P1-C12 (J0D)
Power Supply E1
T3 (RIO-G)
P1-C9P1-C19
(JOA)
T4 (RIO-G)
P1-C18
P1
Removable Media
Processors (up to 2)
Power Supply E2
*Gb Ethernet (T5-T6)
P1-C13 (J2D)
*USB Ports
P1-C14 (J2C)
P1-C7 (SP) (CCIN 28D7)
P1-C16 (J2A)
P1-C15 (J2B)
*P1-C1
*P1-C2
*DASD (CCIN 28D2)
*P1-C3 (#9793/#9794)
*P1-C4
*P1-C5 (#9793/#9794)
*P1-C6 (#9844)
RAID Card
P1-C8 (#5709)
*DASD (#6574/#6584/#6594)
= Base
* = Hot Plug Capable
**= Service Processor Communications Port
99
3.17.5 Model 520 front view
P3-D4
P3-D3
P3-D2
P3-D1
P2-D4
P2-D3
P2-D2
P2-D1
DASD
SCSI Device
P4-D1
SCSI IDE P4-D2
RAID Enablement Card

= Hot Plug Capable
= Base
Operation Panel
P4-D4
Ethernet
P1-T1
3.17.6 Model 520 back view
Power Supply
E1
HMC 1
C7 - T1
Power Supply
E2
SPCN 0
C7-T3
P1 - C6
** **
1
T3 [RIO-G]
Gb
USB0 RackInd
T9
Ethernet T7
T5
0
T4 [RIO-G]
USB1
T8
Gb
Ethernet
T6
= Base
= Hot Plug Capable

** = System Port
100
HMC 2
C7 - T2
P1 - C4
P1 - C3
P1 - C2
P1 - C1
IP
SPCN 1
C7-T4
3.18 9406 Models 550+ and 550 system unit schematics

3.18.1 Models 550+ and 550 top view
550+ Top View
Raid Card
Integrated Cache
P1-C6
Second RIO -G Loop
P1-C7
P1-C5 1,2
P1-C4 1
P1-C3 1
P1-C2 1
P1-C1 1
Processor
Card
P1-C8
VRM 1.2V
P1-C10
VRM 1.2V
P1-C11
P1
System VPD
P1-C12
1 Power Supply
E2
1 Power Supply
E1
= Base
= Hot Plug Capable
= N ot usable if optional second RIO-G loop (P1-C6) is installed
101
3.18.2 Models 550+ and 550 front view
P3-D4
P3-D3
P3-D2
P3-D1
P2-D4
P2-D3
P2-D2
P2-D1
DASD
SCSI / IDE Device
P4-D2
SCSI DEVICE
P4-D1
IDE Device
P4-D3
(AIX/Linux only)
RAID Enablement Card / Integrated Cache
= Hot Plug Capable

= Base
102
USB
Operation Panel
P4-D4
Ethernet
P1-T1
3.18.3 Models 550+ and 550 back view

The following figure represents the rear view of the Model 550.
2 P1-C5
P1-C4
P1-C3
P1-C2
P1-C1
T13
T10
T9
Ethernet 2
Ethernet 1
Rack Ind.
T7
T8
USB
USB
RIO 1 T12
T5
T6
HMC
HMC
= Base
= Hot Plug Capable
=
RIO 0 T11
T3
T4
Power Supply
E2
SPCN
SPCN
System port 1
System port 2
T1
T2
Power Supply
E1
PCI
Note: The #1827 Serial-UPS Conversion Cable connects to system port 2. T9 is the
default port 0 for the embedded LAN console.
3.18.4 Models 550+ and 550 memory layout
360
pin
VHDM
DCM
2- way
heat sink
360 pin VHDM

with power modules
DIMM Socket
J1A
DIMM Socket
J1B
DIMM Socket
J1C
DIMM Socket
J1D
SMI II
SMI II
DIMM Socket
J0D
DIMM Socket
J0C
DIMM Socket
J0B
DIMM Socket
J0A
160
pin
VHDM
power connector
Note: There are two of these cards in every Model 550 and 550+.
103
3.19 9406 Models 570+ and 570 processor enclosure

schematics
3.19.1 Model 570+ top view
The following figure shows the top view of a Model 570+ processor enclosure. The 570+ is
different from the 570 in that it has a RAID card placed just to the left of the blowers.
a set of available processor cards, memory cards, and I/O slots for the IBM system i 5xx
and 8xx models addressed in this publication. The IBM System i Model 595 system unit
is actually contained within a larger frame.
For the POWER5 and POWER6 570 models, some IBM documentation refers to each
6 Pack DASD
Backplane
Dual Slimline
Media Backplane
1 PCI Card - P1-C1 Thru P1-C6

PCI Card - P1-C1
PCI Card - P1-C2
PCI Card - P1-C4
PCI Card - P1-C5
RIO-G
(P1-C7)
2 PCI Cards *P1-C6
HMC/SPCN
CARD (P1-C8)
1 Power Supply E1
FAN
FAN
System SN VPD
(P1-C10)
BLOWER
Blower 2 2
Raid Card /
Integrated Cache
PCI Card - P1-C3
Removable
RM1
Media
BLOWER 1
Blower 1
1 , PROC REG 3
1,3
PROC REG 1
1
Op
Panel
Proc 1
FAN
FAN
3 PROC 2
PROC 1
Reg Dist-VBUS Vertical Midplane

Connect Backplane
1 = Hot Plug Capable

2 = N ot available if second RIO -G (P1-C7) is installed. *(C1-P6 not shown)
3 = Required if second RIO -G (P1-C7) is installed
= Base
= Base unit available with 6 PCI Cards, Slot (P1-C6) not accessible if
optional RIO-G (P1-C7) is installed.
104
3.19.2 Models 570+ and 570 front view

Slimline Media
Operation Panel
P4-D2 P4-D1
Ethernet
USB
P2-C1
( D1 Not supported
by i5/OS)
P2-C2
Processors
= Base
= Hot Plug Capable
P2-C4
P2-C5
CPU Regulators
P3-D1 P3-D3 P3-D5

P3-D2 P3-D4
1
DASD Six Pack
105
3.19.3 Models 570+ and 570 back view

Multi-adapter Bridge 1
2 P1-C6
1 P1-C5
Ser vice Processor

Card (P1-C8)
1 P1-C4
P1-C8-T1 (HMC1)
P1-C1
P1-C8-T2 (HMC2)
P1-C8-T3 SPCN0
P1-C8-T4 SPCN1
570+ Back view

P1-C10 - S/N VPD Card
I2C
P1-T1 - System Port (P2)4
P1-T2 - System Port (P1)
Multi-adapter Bridge 2
1 P1-E1
P1-C7-T1(1)
P1-C7-T2(0)
3 Second RIO-G Loop
1 P1-E2
P1-T9(1)
(RIO-G)
(RIO-G)
P1-T3 - RI
(Rack Ind Port)
= Base
P1-T10
System Connect
P1-T5 -USB(1) N ot usable i5/OS

P1-T6 - Ethernet(0)
P1-T4- USB(0) N ot usable i5/OS
4 = # 1827 Serial-UPS Conversion Cable connects to the (P2) system por t
Note: The #1827 Serial-UPS Conversion Cable connects to system port 2. T6 is the
default port 0 for the embedded LAN console.
106
3.19.4 Model 570 top view

The following figure shows the top view of a Model 570 processor enclosure.
6 Pack DASD
Backplane
Dual Slimline
Media Backplane
1 PCI Card - P1-C1 Thru P1-C6

PCI Card - P1-C1
PCI Card - P1-C2
PCI Card - P1-C4
PCI Card - P1-C5
RIO-G
(P1-C7)
BLOWER
Blower 2 2
Raid Card
PCI Card - P1-C3
Removable
RM1
Media
2 PCI Cards *P1-C6
HMC/SPCN
CARD (P1-C8)
1 Power Supply E1
FAN
FAN
System SN VPD
(P1-C10)
BLOWER 1
Blower 1
1 , PROC REG 3
1,3
PROC REG 1
1
Op
Panel
Proc 1
FAN
FAN
3 PROC 2
PROC 1
Reg Dist-VBUS Vertical Midplane

Connect Backplane

2 = N ot available if second RIO -G (P1-C7) is installed. *(C1-P6 not shown)
3 = Required if second RIO -G (P1-C7) is installed
= Base
= Base unit available with 6 PCI Cards, Slot (P1-C6) not accessible if
optional RIO-G (P1-C7) is installed.
107

Slimline Media
Operation Panel
P4-D2 P4-D1
Ethernet
USB
P2-C1
( D1 Not supported
by i5/OS)
P2-C2
Processors
= Base
= Hot Plug Capable
P2-C4
P2-C5
CPU Regulators
P3-D1 P3-D3 P3-D5

P3-D2 P3-D4
1
DASD Six Pack

The following diagram is for a Model 570+, which includes four shared memory interface (SMI
II) chips.
360
pin
VHDM
DCM
2- way
heat sink
360 pin VHDM

with power modules
SMI II
DIMM Socket
J1A
DIMM Socket
J1B
DIMM Socket
J1C
DIMM Socket
J1D
SMI II
SMI II
SMI II
DIMM Socket
J0D
DIMM Socket
J0C
DIMM Socket
J0B
DIMM Socket
J0A
160
pin
VHDM
power connector
Note: The diagram shown is for a Model 570. The Model 570+ has two addtional SMI II
chips.
108
3.20 9406 Model 595 system unit schematics

BPD 7837
BPA (Base)
BPC (Base)
BPR(6186)
System
Unit
Processor
Book
16-way
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05
(1-x-2-6)
(1-x-2-7)
(1-x-1-7)
(1-x-1-6)
(1-x-1-5)
(1-x-1-4)
(3-x-2-7)
(3-x-2-6)
(3-x-2-5)
(3-x-2-4)
(3-x-2-3)
(3-x-1-7)
(3-x-1-6)
(3-x-1-5)
(3-x-1-4)
(3-x-1-3)
(3-x-0-7)
(3-x-0-6)
(3-x-0-5)
(3-x-0-4)
(3-x-0-3)
D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
(2-x-0-7)
(2-x-0-6)
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

(2-x-0-5)
D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
(2-x-1-7)
(2-x-1-6)
(2-x-1-5)
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25
Power Supplies
D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
(2-x-2-7)
(2-x-2-6)
(2-x-2-5)
(2-x-2-4)
(2-x-2-3)
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35
(1-x-1-3)
(1-x-0-5)
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50

(1-x-0-4)
(1-x-0-3)
(1-x-0-1)
(1-x-0-2)
OP Panel
(1-x-2-5)
(1-x-2-3)
(1-x-0-7)
Rem Media D42
(1-x-0-6)
Rem Media D41
(2-x-1-4)
NODE 3
(2-x-1-3)
NODE 2
(2-x-0-4)
NODE 1
(2-x-0-3)
NODE 0
Lower
blowers
(1-x-2-4)
#9194 Base PCI-X I/O

Enclosure
D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
(#5168)
109
3.20.2 Model 595 back view
DASD plug sequence for optimum performance:

D31, D36, D46, D32, D37, D47, ... D50, (add 2nd
adaptor), D01, D11, D21, D02, ... D25, (add 3rd
adaptor), D06, D16, D26, D07, ... D30.
PBD 7837
BPD
BPA (Base)
PBC (Base)
BPC
PBR(6186)
BPR(6186)
NODE 1
BASE DC/DC CONVERTER ASSEMBLY
NODE 0
FAN B02
FAN B01
#9844
#9793
#2780
Air Plenum
NODE DC/DC CONVERTER ASSEMBLY
NODE 2
#9194 Base PCI-X

I/O enclosure
HSL
NODE 3
Lower
blowers
System
Unit
Upper
blowers
SPCN
CEC SPCN
P00
P01
P02
P03
P03 Always filled before P00
A02
AC Distribution Boxes
A01
110

The following schematic illustrates the memory cards for a Model 595+ and 595 processor.
DIMM Socket
J0D
DIMM Socket
DIMM Socket
DIMM Socket
J0C
J0B
J0A
SMI
SMI
(interface to
DRAMs)
(interface to
DRAMs)
The following schematic illustrates a single processor book and memory node for two MCMs
for Models 595+ and 595.
HSL2/RIO-G
A0
I/O
MC01
B0
B0
I/O
MC05
D0
MC06
D0
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
ooo
oo
oo
ooooooo
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
ooo
oo
oo
ooooooo
D2
COMPONENT FACE DOWN
MC02
TP
D1
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
ooo
oo oo oo o o o o o
MC07
B0
Air Flow
Air Flow
C0
D3
D4
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
oo oo oo o o oo o
oo
o
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
oo oo oo o o oo o
oo
o
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
ooo
oo oo oo o o o o o
COMPONENT FACE UP
MC08
A0
ooo ooo oo
ooo
ooo
ooo
o o o o o o oo oo o
MC09
MC10
oooooooo
oo oo oo
oo oo oo
oooooooo
CHIP B SMP
C0
o oooo ooo
ooo
ooo
ooo
oo
oo
ooooooo
D0
MCM 0
oooooooo
oo oo oo
oo oo oo
oooooooo
oooooooo
oo oo oo
oo oo oo
oooooooo
oooooooo
oo oo oo
oo oo oo
oooooooo
A GX
B GX
CHIP B SMI
CHIP D SMI
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
ooo
ooo
o oooo ooo
CHIP A SMI
CHIP C SMI
D GX
SMP
CHIP
C
CHIP A SMP
oooooooo
oo oo oo
oo oo oo
oooooooo
C0
TH_0
MUX1
A1
I/O
B1
I/O
MC03
MC04
I/O
MC11
D1
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
oo oo oo o o oo o
oo
o
MC12
B1
D5
ooo ooo oo
ooo
ooo
ooooooo o o o
oo
oo
D6
oo ooo ooo
o oo
ooo
ooooooo o o o
oo
oo
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
ooo
oo oo oo o o o o o
MC13
A1
D1
I/O
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
oo oo oo o o oo o
oo
o
D7
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
ooo
oo oo oo o o o o o
A1
C1
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
oo oo oo o o oo o
oo
o
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
oo oo oo o o oo oo oo
D8
DRAM
"V"
MC14
oooooooo
oo oo oo
oo oo oo
oooooooo
CHIP B SMP
oooooooo
oo oo oo
oo oo oo
oooooooo
B1
oooooooo
ooo
ooo
ooo
oooo ooo o o o o
D1
MC15
C1
MC16
C1
oooooooo
oo oo oo
oo oo oo
oooooooo
A GX
B GX
CHIP B SMI
CHIP D SMI
A
B CHIP
MCM-MCM
CHIP D
MCM-MCM
CHIP A SMI
C GX
ooo ooo oo
ooo
ooo
ooooooo o o o
oo
oo
ooo ooo oo
ooo
ooo
ooo
ooooooo o o o o
GND
CHIP C SMI
D GX
SMP
CHIP
C
TH_1
5
X1
MCM 1
oooooooo
oo oo oo
oo oo oo
oooooooo
PWR
SMP
CHIP
D
CHIP A SMP
oooooooo
oo oo oo
oo oo oo
oooooooo
1.2V
CHIP A
CHIP D
MCM-MCM MCM-MCM
C GX
A0
SMP
CHIP
D
A1
X2
TP
BERG - TP
HSL2/RIO-G
111
3.21 System i Models 515, 520, 520+, and 525 processors

The initial installation of the System i Models 515, 520, 520+ and 525 is Customer Setup
(CSU). Processor upgrades within models are performed by IBM Service
Representatives.
Processor
feature
Server
feature
Edition/
Config.
feature
#8325
#8325 600/3100 CPW Uni-Processor in Client/Server Environment

POWER5+ 1.9 GHz Uni processor (CCIN 8325).
Includes 8 DIMM memory positions (plug directly onto the backplane - direct attach).
No L3 cache.
Processor Capacity Card (CCIN 528F).
#0970
#0975
#7140
#7140 520 Express Configuration

Provides 600 CPW processor performance.
Provides 30 CPW for 5250 OLTP (CCIN 7140).
Requires #7680 Accelerator for System i5 to achieve 3100 processor CPW.
Machine type 9405.
#7141

Machine type 9405.
#7142

Machine type 9405.
#7350
#7350 Value Edition for #0975

Machine type 9406.
#8327
#8327 1200/2800/3800 CPW Uni-Processor in Client/Server Environment

POWER5+ 1.9 GHz Uni processor (CCIN 8327)
36 MB L3 cache.
#0970
#0975
112
Model 520+ and 520 processors
#7143

Machine type 9405.
#7148

Machine type 9405.
#7144

Machine type 9405.
#7152

Machine type 9405.
#7352

Machine type 9406.
Processor
feature
Server
feature
Edition/
Config.
feature
#8327
#0906
#7366
#7366 Solution Edition for #0906

Machine type 9406.
#7373
#7373 High Availabilty Edition for #0906

Machine type 9406.
#7374
#7374 High Availability Edition for #0906

Machine type 9406.
#7734
#7734 Enterprise Edition for #0906

Machine type 9406.
#7735

Machine type 9406.
#7784
#7784 Standard Edition for #0906

Machine type 9406.
#8330
#8330 3800/7100 CPW 0/2-way Processor in Client/Server Environment

POWER5+ 1.9 GHz 0/2-way processor (CCIN 8330).
A 36 MB L3 cache.
#0906
#7375

Provides 3800/7100 CPW processor performance.
Provides 3800/7100 CPW for 5250 OLTP (CCIN 7375).
Machine type 9406.
#7736

Provides 3800/7100 CPW for 5250 OLTP (CCIN 7736).
Machine type 9406.
#7785

Machine type 9406.
113
Processor
feature
Server
feature
#8950
#0900
#8951
114
Edition/
Config.
feature
#8950 500 CPW Uni-Processor in Client/Server Environment

POWER5 1.5 GHz Uni (CCIN 522A).
No L3 cache.
#7450 Processor Capacity Card (CCIN 7450).
#7390
#7390 Express Edition

Machine type 9406.
#7391

Machine type 9406.
#7393

Machine type 9406.
#7411

Machine type 9406.
The #7411 Express Edition was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 April 2005.
#7413

Machine type 9406.
#7417

Machine type 9406.
#7450
#7450 Value Edition

#0901

No L3 cache.
#7451 Processor Capacity Card (CCIN 7451).
#7392

Machine type 9405.
#7394

Machine type 9405.
#7414

Machine type 9406.
The #7414 Express Edition was withdrawn from marketing for new orders only on 01 April 2005.
Conversions to feature remain available.
#7417

Machine type 9406.
#7420

Machine type 9406.
#7451
#7451 Value Edition

Processor
feature
Server
feature
#8952
#0902
#8953
#8954
#8955
#8972
Edition/
Config.
feature

No L3 cache.
#7458/#7459 Processor Capacity Card (CCIN 7458/7459).
#7458
#7458 Standard Edition

Provides limited 5250 OLTP (CCIN 7458).
#7459
#7459 Enterprise Edition

Provides up to 1000 CPW for 5250 OLTP (CCIN 7459).
#7541
#7541 Solution Edition

#7552
#7552 High Availability Edition

#0903

No L3 cache.
#7452

#7453

#7553

#0904

POWER5 1.65 GHz Uni (CCIN 5228)
A 36 MB L3 cache.
#7454

#7455

#7554

#0905
#0912
#8955 6000 CPW 2-way Processor in Client/Server Environment

POWER5 1.65 GHz 2-way (CCIN 5229).
A 36 MB L3 cache.
#7456

#7457

#7555

#7395

Provides up to 60 CPW for OLTP (CCIN 7395).
#7396

#7397
#7397 Value Edition

115
Models 515, 520, 520+ and 525 CUoD and OLTP features
#7256
#7256 520 Enterprise Enablement

The #7256 is ordered when additional 5250 OLTP capability is required on a permanently activated processor on a Model
520 Enterprise Edition system. An additional i5/OS license might be required.
Supported on Model 520+.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3
Minimum LIC level: V5R3M5
#7320
#7320 515, 520, 520+, 525 One Processor Activation

The #7326 provides an activation code that can be used to permanently activate one additional processor on a Capacity
Upgrade on Demand (CUoD) system with the #9407 Model 515 or 9406 Models 520, 520+ and 525 and #8330 Processor
Feature.
Supported on Models 515, 520, 520+, and 525.
For Models 520, 520+:
For Models 515 and 525:
#7575

520 Enterprise Edition server. An additional i5/OS license might be required.
Supported on Model 520.
#7620
#7620 520 On/Off Processor Enablement

The #7620 is ordered to enable On/Off Capacity on Demand. When it is enabled, processors can be requested on a
temporary basis. An On/Off Capacity on Demand contract must be signed before ordering this feature.
#7621
#7621 520 On/Off Processor Day Billing

Order one #7621 for each billable processor day.
#7622

The #7622 provides 30 processor days of reserve capacity on a CUoD system.
#8410
#8410 520 Base Processor Activation

The #8410 provides an activation code that can be used to permanently activate one processor on a Model 520 CUoD
system with #0906 Server Feature and #8330 Processor Feature. An additional i5/OS license might be required.
#9286

The #9286 is placed on an order of an Enterprise Edition server to enable one processors worth of 5250 OLTP capability.
Multiple #9286s can be on the order.
Supported on Models 520 (9406 only), 550, 570, and 595
#9299

The #9299 is placed on an order of an Enterprise Edition system to enable one processors worth of 5250 OLTP
capability.
Supported on Model 520+ (9406 only)
116
3.22 System i5 Model 550+ and 550 processors

The Models 550+ and 550 initial installation is IBM installed. Processor upgrades within
models are performed by IBM Service Representatives.
Processor
feature
Server
feature
#8312
#0910
#8958
Edition
feature
Models 550+ and 550 processor

Includes two #8312 0/2-way POWER5+ 1.9 GHz processors.
Includes one #8413 550 Base Processor Activation.
Includes eight main storage DIMM positions per processor card.
36 MB L3 cache.
#7154

#7155

Provides up to 3800/14000 CPW for 5250 OLTP (CCIN 7155).
#7551
#7551 High Availablity Edition for #0910

Provides up to 3800/14000 CPW for 5250 OLTP.
Processor Capacity Card (CCIN 7551).
#7629
#7629 Domino Edition for #0910

Provides limited 5250 OLTP.
#7630

#7631
#7631 Solution Edition PeopleSoft EnterpriseOne

#7632
#7632 C2CRM Solution Edition with Domino

#7640
#7640 2-way SAP Solution Edition

#7641
#7641 4-way SAP Solution Edition

#0915

Includes two #8958 0/2-way POWER5 1.65 GHz processors.
Includes one #8450 550 Base Processor Activation.
Includes eight main storage DIMM positions per processor card.
36 MB L3 cache.
#7462

#7463

Provides up to 3300/12000 CPW for 5250 OLTP (CCIN 7463).
#7530
#7530 Domino Edition

#7531
#7531 Solution Edition for PeopleSoft EnterpriseOne

#7532
#7532 C2CRM Solution Edition with Domino

#7533
#7533 2-Way SAP Solution Edition

#7534
#7534 4-Way SAP Solution Edition

#7558
#7558 Solution Edition

117
Models 550+ and 550 CUoD and OLTP features

#7257

The #7257 is ordered when additional 5250 OLTP capability is required on a Model 550 Enterprise Edition, High
Availability Edition or Solution Edition servers. One additional processors worth of 5250 OLTP capacity is authorized with
each feature. This 5250 capacity can be used across multiple physical #8312 processors that have been permanently
activated. An additional i5/OS license might be required.
Supported on the #8312 processor only.
#7323
#7323 550 One Processor Activation

Ordering this feature results in an activation code that can be used to permanently activate one additional processor on
a Model 550. One or more activation features can be ordered.
#7341

After the #7930 On/Off Processor Enablement feature is ordered and the associated enablement code is entered into the
system, on/off usage must be reported to IBM at least monthly. This information is used to compute the billing data, which
is then given to the local sales channel. The sales channel places an order for a quantity of #7341 On/Off Processor Day
Billing features and its associated charges. One #7341 is ordered for each billable processor day.
#7930 550 On/Off Processor Enablement is required.
#7576

550 #8958 Enterprise Edition server. An additional i5/OS license might be required.
#7741

The #7741 provides 30 processor-days of reserve capacity on a Model 550 #8312 processor. CUoD server. Reserve
capacity is established on a server by selecting a quantity of inactive processors to be placed in the servers Shared
Processor Pool as reserve processors. When the server recognizes that non-reserve processors (permanently activated
processors) are either assigned or available to the uncapped partitions are 100% utilized, a processor day (valid for a
24-hour period) is subtracted from the prepaid amount of days.
#7871
#7871 550 CUoD Processor Activation

The #7871 feature results in an activation code that can be used to permanently activate one additional processor on an
eServer i5 550 server. One or more activation features can be ordered.
#7930

The #7930 is ordered to enable a 550 server for On/Off Capacity on Demand. When enabled, processors can be
requested on a temporary basis. On/Off Capacity on Demand contracts must be signed before this feature is ordered.
Prior to reaching the limit of enabled temporary processor days, this feature can be reordered.
Supported on the #8312 and #8958 processors.
#7931

After the #7930 On/Off Processor Enablement feature is ordered and the associated enablement code is entered into the
system, on/off usage must be reported to IBM at least monthly. This information is used to compute the billing data, which
is then given to the local sales channel. The sales channel places an order for a quantity of the #7931On/Off Processor
Day Billing features and its associated charges. Order one #7931 for each billable processor day.
The #7958 is supported on the #8958 processor only.
#7934

The #7934 provides 30 processor days of reserve capacity on a Model 550 CUoD server. To establish reserve capacity
on the server, select a quantity of inactive processors to be placed in the servers shared processor pool as reserve
processors. When the server recognizes that non-reserve processors (permanently activated processors) are either
assigned or available to the uncapped partitions have been 100% utilized, a processor day (good for a 24-hour period) is
subtracted from the prepaid amount of days.
Supported on #8958 processor only.
118
Models 550+ and 550 CUoD and OLTP features

#8413

The #8413 feature provides an activation code that can be used to permanently activate one additional processor on a
Model 550 server. One or more of these no-charge activation features can be ordered, depending on the configuration
rules. The #7741 is supported on the #8312 processor only.
#8450

The #8450 feature provides an activation code that can help permanently activate one additional processor on an eServer
i5 #8958 550 server. One or more of these no-charge activation features can be ordered, depending on configuration
rules. The #8450 is supported on the #8958 processor only
#9286

#9299

Supported on #8312 processor only.
3.23 System i5 Model 570+ and 570 processors

The initial installation of Models 570+ and 570 is IBM installed. Processor upgrades within
Processor
Processor
activation
feature
Server
feature
#8338
#7618
#0934
#8338
#7618
Edition
feature
Model 570+ processor

Includes two #8338 0/2-way POWER5+ 2.2 GHz processors (CCIN
8338).
Includes two #7738 Base Processor Activation features.
Includes a 36 MB L3 cache per processor card.
Includes eight main memory DIMM slots per processor card.
#7757

Provides limited 5250 OLTP CPW (CCIN 7757).
#7747

Provides up to16000 CPW for 5250 OLTP CPW (CCIN 7747).
#7763

Provides up to16000 CPW for 5250 OLTP CPW (CCIN 7763).
#0935

Includes four #8338 0/2-way POWER5+ 2.2 GHz processors (CCIN
8338).
Includes four #7738 Base Processor Activation features.
#7758

#7748

Provides up to 311000 CPW for 5250 OLTP CPW (CCIN 7748).
#7764

119
Processor
Processor
activation
feature
Server
feature
#8338
#7618
#0936
#8338
#7618
Edition
feature
#8338 31100/58500 CPW 8/16way Processor in Client/Server Environment

Includes eight #8338 0/2-way POWER5+ 2.2 GHz processors (CCIN
8338).
Includes eight #7738 Base Processor Activation features.
#7759

#7749

#7765

#0937
#8338 18100/58500 CPW 2/16-way Processor in Client/Server

Environment
Includes eight #8338 0/2way POWER5+ 2.2 GHz processors (CCIN
8338).
#7760
Processor
Processor
activation
feature
Server
feature
#8961
#7897
#0919
#8961
120
#7897
Edition
feature
#7760 Capacity BackUp Edition


Includes one #8961 0/2-way POWER5 1.65 GHz processor (CCIN 26EA).
Includes one #8452 Base Processor Activation feature.
The #8961 0/2-way processor was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 October
2004.
#7488

The #7488 Standard Edition was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 October
2004.
#7489

The #7489 Enterprise Edition was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 October
2004.
#0920

Includes two #8961 0/2-way POWER5 1.65 GHz processors (CCIN
26F2).
The #8961 2/4-way processor was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 October
2004.
#7469

#7470

The #7470 Enterprise Edition for the #8961 Processor feature was withdrawn
from marketing as of 01 October 2004. The #7495 Standard Edition for #0921
is the recommended replacement.
Processor
Processor
activation
feature
Server
feature
#8971
#7897
#0921
#8971
#8971
#8971
#8971
#8971
#7897
#7897
#7897
#7897
#7897
Edition
feature
#8971 6350/12000 CPW 2/4way Processor in Client/Server Environment

Includes one #8971 0/2-way POWER5 1.65 GHz processor (CCIN 26F2).
#7494

#7495

#7560

#0922

Includes two #8971 0/2way POWER5 1.65 GHz processor (CCIN 26F2).
Includes five #8452 Base Processor Activation features.
#7471

#7472

#7561

#0924
#8971 25500/33400 CPW 9/12 Processor in Client/Server Environment

Includes four #8971 0/2-way POWER5 1.65 GHz processor (CCIN 26F2).
Includes nine #8452 Base Processor Activation features.
#7473

#7474

33400 CPW for 5250 OLTP CPW (CCIN 7474).
#7562

#0926

Includes eight #8971 0/2-way POWER5 1.65 GHz processor (CCIN
26F2).
Includes thirteen #8452 Base Processor Activation features.
#7475

#7476

#7563

#0928
#0930

Includes eight #8971 0/2-way POWER5 1.65 GHz processor (CCIN
26F2).
Includes two 8452 Base Processor Activation features.
#7570

Provides up to 37400 CPW for 5250 OLTP for the Capacity BackUp Edition
(CCIN 7570).
#7559

Provides up to 37400 CPW for 5250 OLTP for the High Availability Edition
(CCIN 7559).
121
Model 570+ and 570 CUoD and OLTP features

#7258
#7258 570 Full Enterprise Enablement

The #7258 - 570 Full Enterprise Enable is ordered when complete 5250 OLTP capability is required for all permanently
activated processors on 2/4-way, 4/8-way and 8/16-way Model 570 Enterprise Edition or High Availability Edition systems.
An additional i5/OS license might be required.
Supported on Model 570+ Enterprise Edition or High Availability Edition systems
#7260

The #7260 570 Enterprise Enablement is ordered when additional 5250 OLTP capability is required on a Model 570
Enterprise Edition or High Availability Edition system. One additional processors worth of 5250 OLTP capacity is
authorized with each feature. This 5250 capacity can be used across multiple physical #8338 processors that have been
permanently activated. An additional i5/OS license might be required.
Supported on Model 570+ Enterprise Edition or High Availability Edition systems
#7570
#7570 On/Off Prepaid for Model 570 Capacity BackUp Edition

The #7570 On/Off Prepaid for Model 570 Capacity BackUp Edition provides an account for 30 processor days of On/Off
Capacity on Demand. The system must be enabled for On/Off Capacity on Demand before ordering prepaid days.
#7577

570 Enterprise Edition server. An additional i5/OS license might be required.
Supported on Model 570
#7597

The #7597 is ordered when complete 5250 OLTP capability is required for all permanently activated processors on
5/8-way, 9/12-way, and 13/16-way Model 570 Enterprise Edition servers. An additional i5/OS license might be required.
#7618

The #7618 provides an activation code that can be used to permanently activate one additional processor on a Model 570+
CUoD server with #8338 Processor Feature. One or more activation features can be ordered, up to the maximum for the
server.
Supported on Model 570+ CUoD servers
#7624

The #7624 On/off Processor Day Billing is for temporary use of a processor on a daily base.
When an #7624 On/Off Processor Enablement feature is ordered and the associated enablement code is entered into the
system, you must report your on/off usage to IBM at least monthly. This information, which is used to compute your billing
data, is then provided to your sales channel. The sales channel places an order for a quantity of on/off processor day billing
features and bills you. Order one #7624 for each billable processor day.
Supported on Models 570+ with On/Off Processor Enablement feature
#7663
#7663 570 1GB Memory Activation

The #7663 570 1GB Memory Activation provides the activation of 1 GB of additional Capacity on Demand memory. Multiple
#7663 features are allowed up to the maximum CUoD memory of the server. Memory activations are stored in the server.
If CUoD memory is moved to a different server, the additional activations remain with the original server.
Supported on Models 570+ with CUoD memory available for activation
#7728

The #7728 570 Reserve Capacity Prepaid provides 30 processor-days of reserve capacity on a Capacity on Demand
server. To establish reserve capacity on the server, select a quantity of inactive processors to be placed in the servers
shared processor pool as reserve processors. When the system recognizes that non-reserve processors (permanently
activated processors) that are assigned or available to the uncapped partitions have been 100% utilized, and 10% of a
Reserve CoD processor is put into use for more than 30 consecutive seconds, a processor day (good for a 24-hour period)
You can use the HMC to view all processor activation statistics, including reserve processor on demand utilization.
Supported on Models 570+ CUoD server with Reserve Capacity on Demand enabled.
122

#7738

processor on a Model 570 Capacity Upgrade on Demand system. One or more of these no-charge activation features can
Supported on Model 570+ CUoD server
#7890
#7890 Orderable on Demand Memory

The #7890 Orderable on Demand Memory is used to order on demand memory.
The #7890 provides 4 GB of activated memory and an additional 4 GB of memory available for activation. The 4 GB of
additional memory can be activated in increments of 1 GB with #7950 and #7954 or #7957.
#7897
#7897 570 CUoD Processor Activation

The #7897 570 CUoD Processor Activation is used to order a password to permanently activate one additional processor
on an #8961 or #8971 processor. One or more #7897s can be ordered on initial orders or via MES to activate additional
processors.
Customer Install Feature: Yes
#7950
#7950 On Demand Memory Activation for Model 570 (Permanent Activation)

The #7950 On Demand Memory Activation for Model 570 provides the activation of 1 GB of additional CUoD memory on
a CUoD server. Multiple #7950s are allowed on a CUoD server up to the maximum CUoD memory of the server. When
ordered, a password to permanently activate memory in 1 GB increments is provided for a Model 570 with an #8961 or
#8971 Processor. One or more #7950s can be ordered on initial orders or via MES to activate additional 1 GB memory
increments.
One or more #7890 4/8 GB DDR-1 Main Storage (#7890 Orderable on Demand Memory) with nonactivated memory
features are required.
#7951

The #7951 On/Off Prepaid for Model 570 is ordered to enable On/Off Capacity on Demand to temporarily enable processor
or processors. When enabled, processors are requested on a temporary basis. An On/Off Capacity on Demand contract
must be signed to order this feature. A #7951 can be reordered prior to reaching the enabled limit of usable temporary
processor days.
Available processors are required for activation.
#7952
#7952 On/Off Capacity on Demand Billing

A #7952 On/Off Capacity on Demand Billing feature code is used for On/Off Capacity on Demand billing for the temporary
use of a processor on a daily basis. After a #7951 On/Off Capacity on Demand feature is ordered and the associated
enablement code is installed on the system, On/Off Capacity on Demand usage must be reported monthly to IBM. Order
one #7952 for each billable processor day that is used for temporary capacity.
The number of processor days that are agreed to in the contract that is signed prior to ordering the On/Off Capacity on
Demand feature is limited. A new contract is required to continue using temporary capacity after the initial limit has been
reached and a second #7951 On/Off Capacity on Demand feature is ordered. An On/Off Capacity on Demand feature
cannot be concurrently ordered with an On/Off Capacity on Demand billing feature.
#7954
#7954 On Demand Memory for Model 570

The #7954 On Demand Memory for Model 570 is ordered to enable On/Off Capacity on Demand. When enabled, memory
activation can be requested on a temporary basis. An On/Off Capacity on Demand contract must be signed before the
#7954 is ordered. The #7954 can be reordered prior to reaching the enabled limit of usable temporary memory days.
One or more #7890 Orderable on Demand Memory with nonactivated memory is required.
123

#7956
#7956 570 Reserve Capacity on Demand

The #7956 570 Reserve Capacity on Demand provides 30 processor days of reserve capacity. After purchasing feature
#7956, enter the resulting activation code and assign a quantity of the servers currently inactive processors to the shared
processor pool as reserve capacity. When the server recognizes that the number of base (purchased or active) processors
assigned across uncapped partitions is 100% utilized, and at least 10% of an additional processor is needed (based on
multiple hits over a measured period), then a processor day (good for 24 hours) is deducted from the total number of
prepaid processor days.
Ordered via MES or as part of initial system order.
A server with inactive (un-purchased) processor capacity is required.
#7957
#7957 On Demand Memory Billing

A #7957 On Demand Memory Billing feature code is used to bill for On/Off Capacity on Demand memory requests to use
1 GB of memory for one day (one 24-hour period). Begin reporting temporary memory usage to IBM at least once quarterly
after a #7954 On/Off Memory Enablement feature is ordered and the associated enablement code is installed on the server.
One #7957 must be ordered to pay for its use (after the fact) for every GB day of memory requested during a billing period
(a quarter).
Ordered via MES.
#8452

The #8452 provides an activation code that can be used to permanently activate one additional processor on a Model 570.
One or more of these no-charge activation features can be ordered, depending on the configuration rules.
#8459
#8459 570 1 GB CUoD Memory activation

The #8459 is ordered with 570 to 570 model upgrades when 1 GB of system memory activation is desired. Multiple #8459
are allowed.
#8470
#8470 570 Base 1GB Memory Activation

The #8470 570 Base 1GB Memory Activation activates 1 GB of main storage on a Model 570+ system with Capacity on
Demand memory. Depending on the on demand memory features ordered, several #8470s can be ordered.
Supported on Model 570+ CoD memory
#9286

The #9286 Base Enterprise Enablement is placed on an order of an Enterprise Edition server to enable one processors
worth of 5250 OLTP capability.
#9298
#9298 Full Enterprise Enablement

The #9298 Full Enterprise Enablement is ordered with 570-to-570 or 595-to-595 upgrades when the starting 570 or 595
configuration already has full enterprise enablement. It provides complete 5250 OLTP capability for all permanently
activated processors on the upgraded Enterprise Edition server.
Supported on Models 570 and 595
#9299

The #9299 Base Enterprise Enablement is placed on an order of an Enterprise Edition server to enable one processors
worth of 5250 OLTP capability. Multiple #9299s can be on the order.
Supported on Model 520+, 550+, 570+, 595 1.9 GHz Enterprise Edition
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 with V5R3M5 LIC for 520+; V5R3 for 550+, 570+, 595 1.9 GHz
124
3.24 System i5 Model 595 processors

The initial installation of Models 595+ and 595 is IBM installed. Processor upgrades within the
Processor
Processor
Activation
feature
Server
feature
#8968
#7668
#0953
#7668
#7668
#7668
#7668
Edition
feature
Model 595 processors
31500/58800 CPW 8/16 Processor in Client/Server Environment

Includes one #8968 with two 8-way POWER5+ 2.3 GHz processor (MCM)
(CCIN 53BE).
Includes a 36 MB L3 cache per processor node (MCM).
Includes 16 main memory slots per processor card #8968.
#5870

Provides limited 5250 OLTP CPW (CCIN 5870)
#5890

Provides up to 58800 CPW for 5250 OLTP CPW (CCIN 5890)
#0954

Includes two #8968 with two 8-way POWER5+ 2.3 GHz processor (MCM)
(CCIN 53BE).
Includes sixteen #8427 Base Processor Activation features.
#5871

Provides limited 5250 OLTP CPW (CCIN5871).
#5891

#0955

Includes four #8968 with two 8-way POWER5+ 2.3 GHz processor (MCM)
(CCIN 53BE).
Includes thirty-two #8427 Base Processor Activation features.
#5872

#5892

#0958

Includes one #8968 with two 8-way POWER5+ 2.3 GHz processor (MCM)
(CCIN 53BE).
#5875
#5875 CBU Standard Edition for #0958

#5895

#0959

Includes two #8968 with two 8-way POWER5+ 2.3 GHz processor (MCM)
(CCIN 53BE).
#5876

#5896

125
Processor
Processor
Activation
feature
Server
feature
#8966
#7815
#0940
Edition
feature
#8966
#8966
#8966
#7815
#7815
#7815
#7480

#7481

#7580

Provides a High Availability Edition for a Model 595 with #0940 Server Feature
(8/16-way) (CCIN 7580).
#0941

Includes two #8966 with four 8-way POWER5 1.9 GHz processor (MCM)
(CCIN 528C).
Includes 16 main memory slots per processor card #8966 (32 in total).
#7482

#7483

#7581

(16/32-way) (CCIN 7581).
#0943

Includes four #8966 with eight 8-way POWER5 1.9 GHz processor (MCM)
(CCIN 528C).
Includes thirty-two #8457 595 Base Processor Activation features.
Includes a 36 MB L3 cache per processor node (MCM)
Includes 16 main memory slots per processor card #8966 (64 total)
#7486

#7487

#7583

(32/64-way) (CCIN 7583).
#0944
13600/92000 CPW 4/32-way processor in Client/Server Environment

(CCIN 528C).
Includes 16 main memory slots per processor card #8966 (32 in total)
#7590
126
Includes one #8966 with two 8-way POWER5 1.9 GHz processor (MCM)
(CCIN 528C).
Includes 16 main memory slots per processor card #8966

Provides a Capacity BackUp Edition for a Model 595 with #0944 Server
Feature (4/32-way) (CCIN 7590).
Processor
Processor
Activation
feature
Server
feature
8973
#7815
#0940
Edition
feature
#8973
#8973
#8973
#7815
#7815
#7815
(CCIN 528C).
#7900

#7901

#7902

(8/16-way) (CCIN 7902).
#0941

(CCIN 528C).
#7903

#7904

#7905

(16/32-way) (CCIN 7905).
#0943

Includes four #8973 with eight 8-way POWER5 1.9 GHz processor (MCM)
(CCIN 528C).
Includes thirty-two #8457 595 Base Activation features.
Includes 16 main memory slots per processor card #8973 (64 total).
#7906

#7907

#7908

(32/64-way) (CCIN 7908).
#0944
13600/92000 CPW 4/32-way processor in Client/Server Environment

(CCIN 528C).
#7909
#7909 Enterprise Capacity BackUp Edition

Provides a Capacity BackUp Standard Edition for a Model 595 with #0944
Server Feature (4/32-way) (CCIN 7909).
#7912
#7912 Standard Capacity BackUp Edition

127
Processor
Processor
Activation
feature
Server
feature
#8973
#7815
#0957
#8981
#8981
#7925
#7925
Edition
feature
50500 CPW 2/16-way processor in Client/Server Environment

(CCIN 528C).
#7910
#7910 Standard Capacity BackUp Edition

#7911
#7911 Enterprise Capacity BackUp Edition

#0947

Includes two #8981s with four 8-way POWER5 1.65 GHz processor
(MCM) (CCIN 52A4).
#7498

#7499

#0952

Includes four #8981 with eight 8-way POWER5 1.65 GHz processor
(MCM) (CCIN 52A4)
Includes thirty-two #8461 Base Processor Activation features.
Includes 16 main memory slots per processor card #8981 (64 total).
#7984

#7985


#5870

The #5870 Standard Edition for #0953 is ordered when a Standard Edition of a Model 595 system with #0953 8/16-way
Server Feature 595 1x8968 is required.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3M0 with LIC V5R3M5 or later releases
Customer Install Feature: No
#5871

#5872

#5875

The #5875 CBU Standard Edition for #0958 is ordered when a Capacity Backup Edition of a Model 595 system with #0958
2/16-way Server Feature 595 1x8968 and no 5250 OLTP capability is required.
128

#5876

The #5876 CBU Standard Edition for #0959 is ordered when a Capacity Backup Edition of a Model 595 system with #0959
4/32-way Server Feature 595 2x8968 and no 5250 OLTP capability is required.
#5890

The #5890 Enterprise Edition for #0953 is ordered when an Enterprise Edition of a Model 595 system with #0953 8/16-way
#5891

#5892

#5895

The #5895 CBU Edition for #0958 is ordered when a Capacity Backup Edition of a Model 595 system with #0958 2/16-way
Server Feature 595 1x8968 and 5250 OLTP capability is required.
#5896

The #5896 CBU Edition for #0959 is ordered when a Capacity Backup Edition of a Model 595 system with #0959 4/32-way
Server Feature 595 2x8968 and 5250 OLTP capability is required.
#7259

The #7259 595 Full Enterprise Enablement is ordered when complete 5250 OLTP capability is required for all permanently
activated processors on a 8/16-way, 16/32-way and 32/64-way Model 595 Enterprise Edition or High Availability Edition
system. An additional i5/OS license might be required.
#7261

A #7261 595 Enterprise Enablement is ordered when additional 5250 OLTP capability is required on a Model 595
Enterprise Edition or High Availability Edition system. One additional processor's worth of 5250 OLTP capacity is
authorized with each feature. This 5250 capacity can be used across multiple physical #8966 processors are permanently
activated. An additional i5/OS license might be required.
#7496

Server Feature is required.
#7497

#7498

129

#7499

The #7499 is ordered when an Enterprise Edition of a Model 595 system with #0947 16/32-way Server Feature is required.
#7579

The #7579 595 Enterprise Enablement is ordered when additional 5250 OLTP capability is required on a permanently
activated processor on a Model 595 Enterprise Edition server. An additional i5/OS license might be required.
#7593

Once an On/Off Processor Enablement feature is ordered and the associated enablement code is entered into the system,
you must report your on/off usage to IBM at least monthly. This information, which is used to compute your billing data, is
then provided to your sales channel. The sales channel places an order for a quantity of on/off processor day billing
features and bills you. Order one #7593 for each billable processor day on a Model 595 with #8968 Processor Feature.
#7598

The #7598 595 Full Enterprise Enablement is ordered when complete 5250 OLTP capability is required for all permanently
activated processors on Model 595 Enterprise Edition servers. An additional i5/OS license might be required.
Initial order only
#7668

Ordering the #7668 595 One Processor Activation feature results in an activation code that can be used to permanently
activate one additional processor on a Model 595 CUoD server with #8968 Processor Feature. One or more activation
features can be ordered, up to the maximum for the server.
#7799

The #7799 595 256GB Memory Activation provides the activation of 256 GB of additional CUoD memory on a CUoD server.
Multiple #7799s are allowed on a CUoD server up to the maximum CUoD memory of the server. A CUoD server with
memory available for activation must be available.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red Hat Enterprise Linux
AS for POWER Version 3
Ordered via MES or as part of initial system order
#7815

activate one additional processor on a Model 595 CUoD server with #8966 Processor Feature. One or more activation
features can be ordered, up to the maximum for the server.
#7839

The #7839 595 On/Off Processor Enablement feature is ordered to temporarily enable a Model 595 for On/Off Capacity on
Demand. When enabled, processors are requested on a temporary basis. An On/Off Capacity on Demand contract must
be signed prior to ordering a #7839. The #7839 can be reordered prior to reaching the enabled limit of usable temporary
processor days.
#7925

activate one additional processor on a Model 595 with #8981 Processor Feature. One or more activation features can be
ordered.
130

#7926

The #7926 595 Reserve Capacity Prepaid provides 30 processor-days of reserve capacity on a CUoD server. To establish
reserve capacity on the server, select a quantity of inactive processors to be placed in the servers Shared Processor Pool
as reserve processors. When the server recognizes that permanently activated processors assigned or available to the
uncapped partitions have been 100% utilized, a processor day (good for a 24-hour period) is subtracted from the prepaid
amount of days.
CUoD server with Reserve Capacity on Demand enabled Model 595 is required.
#7970

The #7970 595 1GB Memory Activation provides the activation of 1 GB of additional CUoD memory on a CUoD server.
Multiple #7970 features are allowed on a CUoD server up to the maximum CUoD memory of the server.
CUoD 595 server with memory available for activation is required.
#7971

The #7971 595 On/Off Processor Enablement is ordered to enable your server for On/Off Capacity on Demand on a Model
595 with #8966 Processor Feature. When it is enabled, you can request processors on a temporary basis. You must sign
an On/Off Capacity on Demand contract before you order this feature. Prior to reaching your enabled limit of usable
temporary processor days, you can reorder this feature.
#7972

When an On/Off Processor Enablement feature is ordered and the associated enablement code is entered into the system,
you must report your on/off usage to IBM at least monthly. This information, which is used to compute your billing data, is
then provided to your sales channel. The sales channel places an order for a quantity of on/off processor day billing
features and bills you. Order one #7972 for each billable processor day on a Model 595 with #8966 Processor Feature.
#7973
#7973 595 On/Off Memory Enablement

The #7973 595 On/Off Memory Enablement is ordered to enable On/Off Capacity on Demand. When enabled, memory is
activated on a temporary basis. An On/Off Capacity on Demand contract must be signed before this feature is ordered.
The #7973 can be re-ordered prior to reaching the enabled limit of usable temporary memory days.
#7974
#7974 595 1GB Memory Day Billing

When an On/Off Memory Enablement feature is ordered and the associated enablement code is entered into the system,
on/off usage must be reported to IBM at least monthly. Order one #7974 595 1GB Memory Day Billing for each billable
memory day.
#7975

A #7975 595 Reserve Capacity Prepaid provides 30 processor-days of reserve capacity on a CUoD server. To establish
reserve capacity on the server, select a quantity of inactive processors to be placed in the servers shared processor pool
as reserve processors. When the server recognizes that non-reserve processors (permanently activated processors) that
are assigned or available to the uncapped partitions have been 100% utilized, a processor day (good for a 24-hour period)
#7984

131

#7985

#7993

Report on/off usage to IBM at least monthly once an On/Off Processor Enablement feature is ordered and the associated
enablement code is entered into the system. Order one #7993 595 On/Off Processor Day Billing for each billable processor
day.
Ordered via MES
#8427
#8427 Base Single Processor Activation for FC8968

The #8427 Base Single Processor Activation for FC8968 provides base activation code that is used to permanently activate
processors on a Model 595 server with #8968 Processor Feature. One or more of these no charge activation features is
ordered, depending on the configuration rules.
#8457

processor on a Model 595 system with #8966 Processor Feature. One or more of these no-charge activation features can
#8460
#8460 595 1GB CUoD Memory Activation

The #8460 595 1GB CUoD Memory Activation is ordered with Model 595 to Model 595 upgrades when 1 GB of system
memory activation is desired. Multiple #8460s are allowed.
#8461
#8461 Base One Processor Activation

The #8461 Base One Processor Activation provides base activation code that is used to permanently activate processor
on a Model 595 server with #8981 Processor Feature. One or more of these no charge activation features is ordered,
depending on the configuration rules.
#8468

A #8468 595 Reserve Capacity Prepaid provides 30 processor days of reserve capacity on a CUoD server. To establish
reserve capacity on the server, select a quantity of inactive processors to be placed in the servers shared processor pool
as reserve processors. When the server recognizes that non-reserve processors (permanently activated processors)
assigned or available to the uncapped partitions have been 100% utilized, a processor day (good for a 24-hour period) is
subtracted from the prepaid amount of days.
#8966
#8966 595 1.9 Ghz Proccessor 0/16-way

The #8966 595 1.9 Ghz Proccessor 0/16-way provides a 0/16-way POWER5 processor book for the Model 595. The
1.9 GHz processors are packaged on two 8-way MCMs. The first #8966 in the system provides seven RIO-G adapter slots,
and subsequent #8966s provide eight RIO-G adapter slots. The #8966 has 16 memory card slots, and a minimum of four
memory features (four memory cards) are required for each processor book.
Note: When viewed from the HMC, the HSL/RIO-G adapter slots may be generically identified only with the characters GX
Adapter Card, rather than a feature number.
132

#8968
#8968 595 2.3GHz Processor 0/16-way

The #8968 595 2.3GHz Processor 0/16-way provides a 0/16-way POWER5 processor book for the Model 595. The
2.3 GHz processors are packaged on two 8-way MCMs. The first #8968 in the system provides seven RIO-G adapter slots
and subsequent #8968s provide eight RIO-G adapter slots. The #8968 has 16 memory card slots and a minimum of four
#8973
#8973 595 1.9 Ghz Processor 0/16-way

The #8973 595 1.9 Ghz Processor 0/16-way provides a 0/16-way POWER5 processor book for the Model 595. The
1.9 GHz processors are packaged on two 8-way MCMs. The first #8973 in the system provides seven RIO-G adapter slots
and subsequent #8973s provide eight RIO-G adapter slots. The #8973 has 16 memory card slots and a minimum of four
#9286

#9298
#9298 Full Enterprise Enablement

The #9298 Full Enterprise Enablement is ordered with a Model 570 to Model 570 or Model 595 to Model 595 upgrades
when the starting Model 570 or 595 configuration already has full enterprise enablement. It provides complete 5250 OLTP
capability for all permanently activated processors on the upgraded Enterprise Edition server.
Ordered via MES
#9299

A #9299 Base Enterprise Enablement is placed on an order of an Enterprise Edition server to enable one processors worth
of 5250 OLTP capability. Multiple #9299s can be on the order.
3.25 System i5 and eServer i5 features

You can find feature descriptions, including details about power and packaging, main
storage, PCI IOP controllers, workstation controllers, LAN/WAN adapters, disk units, internal
tape, CD-ROM, and other magnetic media controllers in Chapter 4, POWER5, POWER6,
and System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890: Features and placement on page 135.
3.26 Supported upgrades for System i5 and eServer i5 models

that are supported for System i5 and eServer i5 models.
133
134
Chapter 4.
POWER5, POWER6, and System

i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890:
Features and placement
In this chapter, we describe the supported features for the System i and iSeries 800, 810,
825, 870, and 890 system units and towers, such as the power and packaging, main storage,
workstation controller and console features, and communications features. This includes local
area networks (LANs) and wide area networks (WANs), disk units, internal tape units,
CD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, and magnetic media controllers. We describe processor
features in Chapter 3, System i POWER5-based models on page 43, and Chapter 15,
iSeries Model 800, 810, 825, 870, 890 processor features on page 561.
a set of available processor cards, memory cards, and I/O slots for the IBM System i
Models 5xx and 8xx addressed in this paper. The IBM System i Model 595 system unit is
actually contained within a larger frame.
For the POWER5 and POWER6 570 models, some IBM documentation refers to each
135
4.1 System i model features and card placement

In this chapter, we group the available IBM System i specify codes and feature codes into
various categories. Within each description, we list the System i models to which the
description applies, the i5/OS release level, and where appropriate, the microcode level
(Licensed Internal Code).
Notes:
Full card placement rules for PCI and PCI-x technology features is documented in PCI
and PCI-X Placement Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 (Fourth
edition), REDP-4011.
For the latest information about which I/O device attaches to which I/O adapter on a
specific IBM System i and System p processor model, refer to the IBM Prerequisite
Web page at:
http://www-912.ibm.com/e_dir/eServerPrereq.nsf
For reference purposes, in this chapter, we provide summary table feature information for
direct-attached disks and disk controllers in 4.13, Summary: System i direct attach disks,
disk controller features, CCINs on page 308.
136
Notes:
Some feature descriptions in this chapter do not specifically state whether the feature is
supported in a specific server. For example, some feature codes might be supported in
the System i Model 520+, 550+, 570+, and 595+, but not in the eServer i Model 520,
550, 570, or 595, or even in the iSeries 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 servers.
We have attempted to indicate clearly if a processor hardware technology does or does
not support the feature. In cases where, for example, a model 550 is listed without
qualification, this means both the POWER5 and the POWER5+ technology supports
the feature. Also when a model 570 is listed without qualification, this means the
POWER5, POWER5+ and the POWER6 technology supports the feature.
Recall that the models 515 and 525 require a minimum of i5/OS V5R4M0 and Licensed
Internal Code V5R4M0.
WAN adapters announced during 4Q 2007 usually require LIC level V5R4M5 and a
minimum CUM package level as listed in the description.
If your have doubts about code level, please consult the product announcement letter or
the IBM Sales Manual, or check with your IBM representative.
The darker shaded areas in the following tables and graphics indicate the base
features.
Some feature descriptions in this chapter do not fully identify the required minimum
operating system level. For example, a feature that is supported with i5/OS V5R4 might
require additional PTFs when installed in an i5/OS V5R3 or OS/400 V5R2 system.
Some features require a different LIC level.
To see the PTF prerequisites for a specific feature code, on the Hardware tab of the IBM
eServer Prerequisite tool, specify the model and machine type and click Go. Then in
the Search results box, click necessary link under Feature code. The IBM eServer
Prerequisite tool is located on the Web at:
You can find the high-speed link (HSL), 12X, System Power Control Network (SPCN),
and dual-line cord feature codes and descriptions in Chapter 13, HSL, 12X, SPCN, line
cord, and communication cables for the System i family of models on page 539.
POWER5, POWER6, and System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890: Features and placement
137
4.2 PCI card placement for System i family of processor

models
The implementation of Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) architecture in iSeries
servers provides flexibility in the placement of input/output processors (IOPs) and input/output
adapters (IOAs). This flexibility can result in a more efficient use of card slots, which in turn
can lower the cost of implementation. For example, a specific PCI IOP can support two
high-performance IOAs, or four slower IOAs. However, it might not have the capacity to
support one high-performance IOA and two slower IOAs.
PCI architecture changes the configuration rules that are associated with card placement in
System i POWER5 and POWER6 models and iSeries Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890
servers. PCI cards are subject to plugging rules. Earlier models require IOPs to be in specific
slots in the system and expansion towers. Increased configuration flexibility reinforces a
requirement to understand the detailed configuration rules.
Important:
If you do not fully understand and follow the configuration rules and restrictions, it is
possible to create a hardware configuration that does not work properly, marginally
works, or quits working when a system is upgraded to future software releases.
The POWER6 model processor enclosures do not support IOP cards.
The following IBM Redpaper publications describe the configuration and card placement rules
that you must understand and follow to develop valid configurations. Use these papers as a
guide when configuring IOAs and IOPs to size the system to meet client expectations.
PCI and PCI-X Placement Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 (Fourth
edition), REDP-4011
2: September 2003, REDP-3638, for OS/400 V5R2 and earlier releases
4.3 Power and packaging

Power and packaging
#0006
#0006 LPAR Restrict Build Process

The #0006 is added to an initial order where LPAR #0140 is requested. This #0006 instructs manufacturing to only load
SLIC on the minimum number of disk drives.
The #0006 is mutually exclusive with #5000 SW Preload and with #0205 RISC-to-RISC migration.
Supported on all (including + models) 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595 models; 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840,
870, 890 models.
138
#0092
#0092 External xSeries Attach Specify

The #0092 is used to specify the number of external xSeries servers connected to the system. The IBM marketing
configurator uses this specify code to determine the number of HSL and SPCN cables required and to ensure that the
number of external xSeries servers does not exceed the system limit. Each external xSeries server is cabled with HSL
cables and attached to the SPCN string like all other HSL attached I/O towers.
A 1519-100 Integrated xSeries Adapter for iSeries or 1519-200 Integrated xSeries Adapter for System i5 model is required
in each external xSeries server attached.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R1 for 1519-100 Integrated xSeries Adapter for iSeries and i5/OS V5R3 for
1519-200 Integrated xSeries Adapter
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
#0123
#0123 - #5074 Lower Unit in Rack

The #0123 feature specifies that one #5074 PCI Expansion Tower is to be mounted in the bottom of a #0551 System i 36U
1.8m Rack.
The #0123 can be specified on initial orders and on Miscellaneous Equipment Specification (MES) orders. However,
support for the field merging a #5074 into a #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack is not offered due to the weight of the #5074.
A line cord for the #5074 must be ordered with the #5074.
Corequisites:
#0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack
#5074 PCI Expansion Tower
#5101/#5111 30 Disk Expansion with Dual Line Cords
Supported on Models (including + models) 520 (9406 only), 550, 570, 595, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890.
The #0123 was withdrawn from marketing as of 03 December 2002.
#0126
#0126 CEC EIA Reduction Option

The #0126 CEC EIA Reduction Option ships the Model 595, 870 or Model 890 system unit tower in two pieces from IBM
to be fully assembled at the clients location. The tallest part of the system unit tower is reduced 14 inches (35cm) from 80
inches (2 m) to 66 inches (1.65m). The shipping pallet and packing materials add to the dimensions to allow for clearance.
Supported on Models (including + models) 595, 870 and 890.
The #0126 is not a Customer Install Feature.
#0133
#0133 Plant Install in Rack

The #0133 Plant Install in Rack feature is used to mount a Model 800 or 810 system unit (sidecar feature must be present)
in a #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack either in the plant or in the field. The #0133 can be ordered on initial orders, MES
orders or on model upgrades into the Model 810.
The system is mounted in the #0551 at the plant if the system order received at the plant contains a system unit, #7116
System Unit Expansion, #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack, and #0133 Plant Install in Rack. If any of these four components
are missing from the order, the system is not mounted in the #0551 at the plant.
If the system is not installed in a #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack in the plant, the #0133 feature provides the following
hardware components: a set of slides, cable management arm, a heavy duty tray, a Model 800 or 810 adapter plate and a
pair of Model 800 or 810 lift covers.
A line cord for both the system unit and the system unit expansion is required. For system units being mounted in the upper
portions of a rack and not using the #1422 PDU Line Cord, be sure that the line cord (and SPCN cable, if present) is of
sufficient length.
A #7116 System Unit Expansion must be present or ordered for Models 800 and 810.
An #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack is required for mounting a Model 800 or 810, but the #0551 is not required on the order,
or on the inventory records for the system for which the #0133 Plant Install in Rack is ordered.
Supported on Models 800 and 810.
The #0133 is a Customer Install Feature if installed in the field.
The #0133 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006.
139
#0134
#0134 Field Install in Rack (HD)

The #0134 Field Install in Rack (HD) is used to mount a Model 825 system unit in an #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack. The
#0134 provides a set of slides, a cable management arm, a heavy duty tray, a Model 825 adapter plate, and a pair of Model
825 lift covers.
Two line cords are required for the system unit. Be sure that the line cord (and SPCN cable, if present) is of sufficient length
for system units mounted in the upper portions of a rack and not using the #1422 PDU Line Cord.
An #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack is required for mounting the Model 825, but the #0551 is not required on the order or
on the inventory records for the system for which the #0134 Field Install in Rack (HD) is ordered. The #0134 can be
specified on an initial, model upgrade, or MES order.
The #0134 is a Customer Install Feature.
The #0134 was withdrawn from marketing as of 21 November 2003.
#0135
#0135 Rear Cover

The #0135 provides a single-wide rear cover for a Model 800 or 810 system unit without a #7116 System Unit Expansion
installed.
Supported on Models 800, 810 single wide
#0136
#0136 Rear Cover

The #0136 provides a double-wide rear cover for a Model 800 or 810 system unit with a #7116 System Unit Expansion
installed.
Supported on Models 800, 810 double wide
#0137
#0137 Field Install in Rack

The #0137 Field Install in Rack feature is used to mount a Model 800 or 810 system unit #7116 System Unit Expansion
must be present) in a #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack in the field. This feature provides a set of slides, cable management
arm, a heavy duty ray, an 800 or 810 adapter plate and a pair of 800 or 810 lift covers.
Requires a line cord for both the system unit and the system unit expansion.
For system units being mounted in the upper portions of a rack and not using the #1422 PDU Line Cord, be sure that the
line cord (and SPCN cable, if present) is of sufficient length.
A #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack is required for mounting the Model 800 and 810, but the #0551 feature is not required
on the order or on the inventory records for the system that is ordering a #0137. The #0137 can be specified on any type
of order (initial, model upgrades into a Model 810 or simple MES).
The #0137 is an IBM Customer Service Representative setup feature.
#0138

The #0138 Field Install in Rack feature is used to mount a Model 825 system unit in a #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack. This
feature provides a set of slides, cable management arm, a tray, a Model 825 adapter plate and a pair of Model 825 lift
covers. The #0138 can be specified on any type of order (initial, model upgrade or simple MES).
For system units being mounted in the upper portions of a rack and not using the #1422 PDU Line Cord, be sure that the
line cord (and SPCN cable, if present) is of sufficient length.
A #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack is required for mounting the Model 825. The #0551 feature is not required on the order
or on the inventory records for the system that is ordering a #0138.
#0140
140
#0140 Logical Partitioning Specify

The #0140 is used to specify that this system is to be logically partitioned. The #0140 is only valid on n-way processors
with OS/400 V4R5 or later. The #0140 is valid on select OS/400 V5R1 supported uni-processors (IStar and SStar
processors only). The IBM marketing configurator adds a quantity of one #0140 to the order for each logical partition (LPAR)
required.
Supported on all (including + models) 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595 models; 800, 810, 820, 825, 830,
840, 870, 890 models.
#0141
#0141 HSL OptiConnect Specify

The #0141 is used to specify that this system is to be part of a cluster using HSL OptiConnect. This feature is used to allow
the ordering of additional HSL cables to connect the systems that have OptiConnect.
Requires an HSL OptiConnect capable system.
Maximum: One
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R1
870, 890 models.
141
#0142
#0142 Linux Partition Specify

The #0142 is used to specify that this system is to be logically partitioned with a Linux partition. Specify one #0142 for each
Linux partition required. There are no minimum number of Linux direct attached features required per Linux partition. A
Linux partition can exist without any Linux direct attached features in it (in this case, virtual storage, virtual LAN and virtual
console is virtualized through the iSeries server).
The following Linux direct attach features can be directly attached to a Linux partition. Linux direct attached features cannot
be accessed by OS/400 and i5/OS partitions:
#0601 - Direct Attach #2743 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA
#0602 - Direct Attach #2760 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet UTP IOA
#0603 - Direct Attach #2744 PCI 100 Mbps Token-Ring IOA (withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006)
#0604 - Direct Attach #2763 PCI RAID Disk Unit Controller
#0607 - Direct Attach #4838 PCI 100/10 Mbps Ethernet IOA
#0608 - Direct Attach #4745 PCI WAN IOA (withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006)
#0609 - Direct Attach #2772 PCI Dual WAN/Modem IOA (withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006)
#0610 - Direct Attach #2773 PCI Dual WAN/ModemIOA (AP only)
#0611 - Direct Attach #2765 PCI Fibre Channel Tape Controller (withdrawn from marketing for new orders only on 01
April 2005)
#0612 - Direct Attach #2766 PCI Fibre Channel Disk Controller (withdrawn from marketing for new orders only on 01
April 2005)
#0613 - Direct Attach #2742 PCI 2-Line WAN IOA
#0614 - Direct Attach #2793 PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem
#0615 - Direct Attach #2794 PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem (AP only)
#0616 - Direct Attach #2805 PCI Quad Modem IOA
#0617 - Direct Attach #2806 PCI Quad Modem (CIM) (AP only)
#0618 - Direct Attach #2757 PCI-X Ultra RAID Disk Controller (withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006.
#0619 - Direct Attach #2782 PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller
#0620 - Direct Attach #5700 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA
#0621 - Direct Attach #5701 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet UTP IOA
#0623 - Direct Attach #2849 PCI 100/10 Mbps Ethernet IOA (withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006.
#0620 - Direct Attach #5700 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA is the recommended replacement)
#0624 - Direct Attach #5702 PCI-X Ultra Tape Controller (withdrawn from marketing as of 1 June 2006.
#0645 - Direct Attach #5712 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller is the recommended replacement.)
#0625 - Direct Attach #5704 PCI-X Fibre Channel Tape Controller
#0626 - Direct Attach #2787 PCI-X Fibre Channel Disk Controller
#0627 - Direct Attach #2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller
#0628 - Direct Attach #5703 PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller
#0630 - Direct Attach #5713 PCI-X 1Gbps iSCSI TOE-Copper
#0631 - Direct Attach #5714 PCI-X 1Gbps iSCSI TOE-Optic
#0632 - PCI USB 2.0 Adapter
#0633 - Graphics Adapter
#0634 - 128-port Asynchronous Adapter
#0635 - SDLC/X.25 - 2-port Adapter
#0637 - 100/10Mbps 4-port Ethernet Adapter
#0642 - PCI Ultra3 RAID Adapter
#0643 - Direct Attach #5706 PCI-X Gbps Ethernet-TX IOA
#0644 - Direct Attach #5707 PCI-X 1 Gbps Ethernet-SX IOA
#0645 - Direct Attach #5712 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller
#0646 - Direct Attach #5716 2 Gb Fibre Channel PCI-X Adapter
#0647 PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller without IOP
#0648 PCI-X Disk Controller 90MB without IOP
#0649 Direct Attach #5583 Controller with 1.5GB Auxiliary Write Cache
See the descriptions of the individual feature to understand the capabilities and PCI slot limitations of the features directly
attached to Linux partitions. Linux direct attach features do not use or require PCI IOPs. They are only supported in a
secondary LPAR partition and require a minimum operating system level of OS/400 V5R1 running in the primary partition.
Corequisite: #0140 Logical Partition Specify.
Maximum: Up to one less than the total number of partitions allowed on system/processor.
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R1.
See the note under #0145 for restrictions on POWER6 systems direct attach of disk controllers with cache.
142
#0145
#0145 AIX Partition Specify

The #0145 is used to specify that this system is to be logically partitioned with an AIX partition. A quantity of one #0145 is
required on the order/inventory records for each AIX partition required.
AIX features are only allowed within AIX partitions. AIX features are not allowed in i5/OS partitions. There is no minimum
number of AIX direct-attached features required per AIX partition. See the list of direct attached feature codes listed in the
description for #0142 Linux Partition Specify.
Corequisite: #0140 Logical Partition Specify.
Supported on all (including + models) 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595 models.
Note: On POWER6 technology systems starting in October 2007, the disk controllers with cache are not supported for
direct attach to a Linux or AIX partition. This is consistent with IBM System p POWER6 models AIX support. A controller
with cache supported by AIX or Linux is planned for a future release.
The Linux and AIX partitions can use the controllers with cache, but only when using an i5/OS partition for virtual I/O.
#0205
#0205 RISC-to-RISC Data Migration

The #0205 RISC-to-RISC Data Migration specify code is used when a client orders a new (RISC) iSeries server to replace
an existing AS/400e RISC-based system.
The #0205 is ordered on the initial order of a Models (including + models) 515, 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 800,
810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, or 890.
Manufacturing loads only the System Licensed Internal Code (SLIC) up through QSYS of OS/400 when the #0205 is
ordered. Because of this limited loading of OS/400 by manufacturing, #5000 Software Preload Required is not allowed with
the #0205. The #0205 RISC-to-RISC Data Migration and #5000 Software Preload Required are mutually exclusive.
The #0205 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 April 2005 for 9405 Model 520.
#0272
#0272 Renovated by IBM

The #0272 Renovated by IBM feature is a specify code used to indicate that the system is to be built from new or refurbished
parts.
840, 870, 890 models.
#0299
#0299 MES Conversion Analysis for #5580/5581 MES July 2005

The #0299 provides additional ordering/scheduling steps for clients adding Auxiliary Write Cache IOA to existing large
cache disk controllers (converting #2757, #2780, to #5580, #5581).
The IBM Marketing Configurator adds no-charge #0299 feature to the order to flag a conversion.
The automated tool analyzes current MRPD configuration to determine if simple MES or potentially more complex MES.
The order is scheduled if simple MES or upon confirmation the sales team has done planning for complex MES.
For more details regarding Auxiliary Write Cache, refer to the IBM Redpaper publication Planning for IBM eServer i5 Data
Protection with Auxiliary Write Cache Solutions, REDP-4003.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R2 with Cumulative PTF package C5102530 and prerequisite PTFs or
i5/OS V5R3 with Cumulative PTF package C5102530 and prerequisite PTFs.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
#0454
#0454 - LPAR Partition Init

The #0454 configures a partition and assigns the correct resources as specified by the customer.
Supported on Models (including + models) 520 (9406 only), 525, 570, 570 (POWER6), and 595.
0455
#0455 - LPAR OS Preload

The #0455 loads the operating system (i5/OS or AIX 5L) specified by the client for a partition configured via #0454 LPAR
Partition Initialization.
Supported on Models (including + models) 520 (9406 only), 525, 570, 570 (POWER6), and 595.
#0496
#0496 - Force i5/OS Preload

The #0496 preloads i5/OS on a new server. The #0496 forces a preload of i5/OS on a single partition when Linux or AIX
5L partitions with virtual storage are on the order. i5/OS is preloaded on all the disk drives in the configuration. Do not use
this feature if the Linux or AIX 5L partition has dedicated disk controllers and drives in the on order configuration.
The #0496 is mutually exclusive with a #0006.
Supported on Models (including + models) 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595.
143
#0551

The #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack provides an empty 1.8 m rack, which contains 36 EIA units of space. The following
features specify the means of populating the #0551:
#0121 Lower Unit in Rack Specify
#0122 Upper Unit in Rack Specify
#0127 - 270 Field Install in Rack
#0134 Field Install in Rack (HD)
#0578 PCI Expansion Unit in Rack
#0588 PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack
#5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Drawer
#5790 PCI Expansion Drawer in a #7307 Dual I/O Unit Enclosure/#7314 Dual 5796 I/O Unit Enclosure 19-inch Rack
Mounting Hardware
#7182 515, 520, 525 Rack Mount
#7884 520 Rack Mount
The #0578/#0588 can be installed in the same rack as a Model 270 but cannot be connected to the Model 270. The #0595
can be attached to a Model 270.
Optional features for the #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack are:
#6068 Optional Front Door (black/flat)
#6580 Optional Rack Security Kit
#7840 Side-by-Side for 1.8m Racks
#7841 Ruggedize Rack Kit
The IBM marketing configurator does not manage rack space in the #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack. See 7.2, Required
EIA units on page 356, to determine the number of EIA units required in the #0551 for each Hardware Management
Console (HMC), System i system unit or expansion tower.
One to four PDUs can be ordered with the #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack. The PDUs can be on initial orders, model
upgrades, or on MES orders. Each PDU has six power sockets that can be used to provide power for devices rack mounted
in the #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack using the #1422 PDU Line Cord.
The following PDUs are supported:
#5160 Power Distribution Unit 1 Phase NEMA (6 sockets) (withdrawn from marketing as of 12 April 2005.
A #7188 Power Distribution Unit Side Mount is the recommended replacement.)
The following line cords are supported on the #5160 for connection to utility power:
#1424 - 200V 6-ft Locking Line Cord
#1425 - 200V 6-ft Watertight Line Cord
#1446 - 4.3m 200V/30A Power Cord Korea
#1447 - 4.3m 200V/30A Power Cord AU
#1448 - 4.3m 200V/30A Power Cord NZ
#5161 Power Distribution Unit - 1 Phase IEC (6 sockets) (withdrawn from marketing as of 12 April 2005. A #7188
Power Distribution Unit Side Mount is the recommended replacement.)
#1477 - 4.3m 200V/ 16A IEC309/46 Power Cord
#1449 - 4.3m 200V/ 32A Power Cord EU 1-Phase for connection to utility power.
#5162 Power Distribution Unit - 2 of 3 Phase
144
#1450 - 4.3m 200V/ 16A Power Cord EU 2-Phase for connection to utility power.
#5163 Power Distribution Unit - 3 Phase (6 sockets) (withdrawn from marketing as of 12 April 2005. A #7188 Power
Distribution Unit Side Mount is the recommended replacement.)
#1477 - 4.3m 200V/ 16A IEC309/46 Power Cord
#0551
(contd.)

#7188 Power Distribution Unit 1 Phase NEMA
The #7188 PDU is the replacement for the #5160, #5161, #5162 and #5163.
The following line cords are supported on the #7188 to connect to utility power:
#6489 - 14-ft 3PH/24A Power Cord
#6492 - 14-ft 1PH/48-60A Power Cord
#6655 - 14-ft 1PH/24-30A Watertight Power Cord
#6658 - 14-ft 3PH/16A Power Cord Korea
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100.
#0553

The #0553 System i 42U 2.0m Rack provides a 2 m rack, which contains 42 EIA units of space. The following features
specify the means of populating the #0553:
#5790 PCI Expansion Drawer in a #7307 Dual I/O Unit Enclosure/#7314 Dual 5796 I/O Unit Enclosure 19-inch Rack
Mounting Hardware
#7798 Model 550 non-IBM Rack Mount
#7880 Side Attach Kit for Rack
#7883 Model 520 non-IBM Rack Mount
#7182 515, 520, 525 Rack Mount
#7884 520, 525 Rack Mount
One of the following features is required on the #0553:
#6069 Optional Front Door for 2.0m Rack
#6247 2.0m Rack Trim Kit
#6249 - 2.0m Rack Acoustic Doors
Optional features for the #0553 rack:
#7780 2.0m Rack Side Attach Kit
#7841 Ruggedize Rack Kit
The #0553 can support up to nine PDUs, four mounted vertically and five mounted horizontally. Horizontally mounted PDUs
occupy one EIA of rack space. The IBM marketing configurator does not manage rack space in the #0553 System i 42U
2.0m Rack. See 7.2, Required EIA units on page 356, to determine the number of EIA units required in the #0553 for each
HMC, System i system unit or expansion tower.
The PDUs can be ordered on initial orders, model upgrades, or on MES orders. Each #5160, #5161, #5162 and #5163
PDU has six power sockets and the #7188 Power Distribution Unit has 12 power sockets that can be used to provide power
for rack mounted devices in the #0553 iSeries rack using the #1422 or #6458 14-Ft Int 250V/10A Pwr Cd. Only #7188 PDUs
can be mixed with other PDU features. Otherwise, no mixing of PDU types or features within a #0553 or on a system is
allowed.
145
#0553
(contd.)

#5160 Power Distribution Unit 1 Phase NEMA (6 sockets) (withdrawn from marketing as of 12 April 2005. A #7188
#5162 Power Distribution Unit
#5163 Power Distribution Unit - 3 Phase (6 sockets) (withdrawn from marketing as of 12 April 2005.
A #7188 Power Distribution Unit Side Mount is the recommended replacement.)
#1449 - 4.3m 200V/32A Power Cord EU 1-Phase for connection to utility power
#1450- 4.3m 200V/16A Power Cord EU 2-Phase for connection to utility power
#1477 - 200V 16A 14-ft IEC 309/46 Line Cord
#7188 Power Distribution Unit 1 Phase NEMA

All rack-mounted units plugging into a PDU require either a #1422 or #6458 PDU Power Cord. Mixing of different system
models within a single #0553 2.0m rack is not allowed on initial order systems. PDU features can be ordered without a
#0553 rack being ordered or present on the system.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models and Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890.
#0554
#0554 System i 11U .6m Rack

The #0554 System i 11U .6m Rack provides a 19-inch, 0.6m (24-inch) high rack with 11 EIA units of total space for installing
rack mounted system units and/or expansion units. The #0554 includes a lockable front door. Filler panels and a perforated
front door are included to help provide proper airflow and cooling. A rear door is not offered.
The following feature is orderable on the #0554:
#0599 - Rack Filler Panel Kit (if extra filler panels are required)
146
#0554
(contd.)

The following line cord is supported on the #5161 for connection to utility power:
#1449 - 4.3m 200V/32A Power Cord EU 1-Phase
#5162 Power Distribution Unit 2 of 3 Phase (6 sockets) (supported, not orderable)

#1450- 4.3m 200V/16A Power Cord EU 2-Phase
#7188 Power Distribution Unit 1 Phase NEMA (12 sockets) (orderable)
The IBM marketing configurator does not manage rack space in the #0554 iSeries Rack. See 7.2, Required EIA units on
page 356, to determine the number of EIA units required in the #0554 for each HMC, System i system unit or expansion
tower. Mixing of different system models within a single #0554 is not allowed on initial order systems. The #0554 supports
up to six Power Distribution Units (PDU) that are mounted horizontally. Each PDU takes up one EIA of rack space.
All rack-mounted units plugging into a PDU require a PDU line cord with a C14 plug, #1422 or #6458 PDU Power Cord.
Mixing of different system models within a single #0553 2.0m rack is not allowed on initial order systems. For system units
mounted in the upper portions of a rack and not using the #1422 or #6458 PDU Power Cord, be sure the line cord (and
SPCN cable, if present) is of sufficient length. PDU features can be ordered without a #0554 rack being ordered or present
on the system.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models.
The #0554 was withdrawn from marketing on 9 October 2007.
#0555

The #0555 provides a 19-inch, 1.3m (49-inch) high rack with 25 EIA units of total space for installing rack-mounted system
units and/or expansion units. The #0555 includes lockable front and rear doors. Filler panels and perforated doors are
included to help provide proper airflow and cooling.
The following feature is orderable on the #0555:
#0599 - Rack Filler Panel Kit (if extra filler panels are required)
The IBM marketing configurator does not manage rack space in the #0555 iSeries Rack. See 7.2, Required EIA units on
page 356, to determine the number of EIA units required in the #0555 for each HMC, System i system unit or expansion
tower. Mixing of different system models within a single #0554 is not allowed on initial order systems. The #0555 supports
up to six Power Distribution Units (PDU) that are mounted horizontally. Each PDU takes up one EIA of rack space.
147
#0555
(contd.)

#1449 - 4.3m 200V/32A Power Cord EU 1-Phase
#5162 Power Distribution Unit 2 of 3 Phase (6 sockets) (supported, not orderable)

#1450- 4.3m 200V/16A Power Cord EU 2-Phase
#7188 Power Distribution Unit 1 Phase NEMA (12 sockets) (orderable)

The #7188 PDU is the replacement for the #5160, #5161, #5162 and #5163. The following line cords are supported on
the #7188 to connect to utility power:
All rack-mounted units plugging into a PDU require a PDU line cord with a C14 plug, #1422 or #6458 PDU Power Cord.
Mixing of different system models within a single #0555 iSeries Rack is not allowed on initial order systems. PDU features
can be ordered without a #0555 rack being ordered or present on the system. For system units mounted in the upper
portions of a rack and not using the #1422 or #6458 PDU cord, be sure the line cord (and SPCN cable, if present) is of
sufficient length.
#0574
#0574 - #5074 Equivalent

The #0574 indicates a #5074 installed in a #5079 rack. The #0574 PCI Expansion Unit in Rack is the equivalent of a #5074
PCI Expansion Tower, but the #0574 is installed in an #5079 1.8 m I/O Tower.
For each #5079 ordered, a default quantity of two #0574 specify codes appear on the order (one #0574 can be removed
from the #5079 order). The #0574s can be RPQ added/removed to/from system inventory records, but at least one #0574
must exist for each #5079 on the inventory records. If an existing #5079 is to be shared between two systems, one #0574
must be RPQ removed from that system the #5079 was ordered against and one #0574 must be RPQ added to the other
sharing system.
Requires a #5079.
Supported on Models (including + models) 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, and 595, as well as Models 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, 870, and 890. Also supported under 9411-100.
CSU does not apply as the #0574 is rack mounted.
148
#0578

The #0578 PCI Expansion Unit in Rack is the equivalent of a #5078 PCI Expansion Unit, but the #0578 is mounted in an
#0550, #0551, #0553, #0554, or #0555 iSeries Rack. An #0578 is eight EIA units high. Conversions between an #0578 and
a #5078 are not allowed.
Up to five #0578s are mounted in a #0551, #0553, #0554, or #0555 iSeries Rack depending on the amount of existing
empty space in the #0551, #0553, #0554, and #0555. One #0578 can be mounted in an #0550 System i Rack. The #0578
can be ordered on initial, upgrade, and MES orders. The #0578 comes with two PDU-compatible power cords.
A minimum of one PDU is required if one, two, or three #0578s are ordered to be installed in the same #0551, #0553, #0554,
and #0555. A minimum of two PDUs are required if four #0578s are ordered for the same #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack.
One PDU is required for an #0578 in an #0550. Each PDU has six power sockets for connecting rack mounted devices via
#1422 PDU Line Cord. Each #0578 comes with two integrated PDU compatible line cords. The #1422 PDU Line Cords are
not usable with this expansion unit. See the #0551, #0553, #0554, and #0555 feature descriptions for a list of available
PDUs.
See #5078 PCI Expansion Unit on page 154 for a description of #0578 and #5078 common features.
Supported on Models 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890.
The #0578 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 October 2004. A #0588 is the recommended replacement.
#0588

The #0588 PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack is the equivalent of a #5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit, but the #0588 is mounted in
an #0550, #0551, #0553, #0554, or #0555 iSeries Rack. An #0588 is 8 EIA units high. Conversions between an #0588 and
a #5088 are not allowed.
The #0588 PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack has two redundant 575W power supplies and two integrated PDU compatible
line cords. The line cords can be connected to the same PDU or separate PDUs in the #0550, #0551, #0553, #0554, and
#0555 iSeries Racks. If the line cords are connected to separate PDUs, and these PDUs are connected to two different
power sources, then the #0588 has dual line cord capability. A minimum of one PDU is required if one, two or three #0588s
are ordered to be installed in the same #0551, #0553, #0554, or #0555. A minimum of two PDUs are required if four #0588s
are ordered for the same #0551, #0553, #0554, or #0555. One PDU is required for an #0588 in an #0550. The #1422 PDU
Line Cords are not usable with the #0588. See the #0551, #0553, #0554, and #0555 descriptions for a list of available
PDUs.
Up to five #0588s can be mounted in a #0551, #0553, #0554, or #0550 System i Racks (depending on the amount of
existing empty space in the iSeries rack) and one #0588 can be mounted in a #0550 System i Rack. The #0588 can be
ordered on initial, model upgrade, or MES orders.
A #9943/#9844 Base PCI IOP can be used in a #0588 PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack, but cannot be ordered with or for the
#0588. See #5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit on page 156 for a description of #0588 and #5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit
common features.
The #0588 is also supported in Linux partitions with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red Hat Enterprise
Linux AS for POWER Version 3.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
149
#0595

The #0595 PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack is a five EIA high rack-mounted version of the #0595 PCI-X Expansion Unit in
Rack, which provides I/O capability for iSeries servers. The #0595 has identical functional capabilities to the #5095. A
#9844 Base PCI IOP is included as base for the #0595 PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack.
A #9517 Base HSL-2/RIO-G Bus Adapter is shipped for Models 520, 550, 570, and 595.
A #9877 Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter is shipped with new orders of a #5094 for Models 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870,
and 890.
The #0595 PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack has redundant power when #5138 Redundant Power and Cooling is specified.
The #5138 includes a second 435W power supply. A second line cord must be ordered and installed. With the #5138 and
second line cord installed, the #0595 has dual line cord capability. If the #0595 is to be connected to a PDU, then one or
two #1422 line cords must be ordered.
Up to eight #0595s can be installed in a #0551/#0553/#0554/#0555 System i 25U 1.3m Rack, depending on the amount of
existing empty space in the #0551/#0553/#0554/#0555. See #5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower on page 158 for a description
of #0595 and #5095 common features.
The #0595 is also supported in Linux and AIX partitions with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red Hat
Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3; and AIX 5L for POWER V5.2.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
The tower and drawer configurations no longer include a #9844 Base PCI IOP as of 31 January 2006 with the
announcement of IOP-less support in IBM System i5 and eServer i5 models.
#0599
#0599 Rack Filler Kit

The #0599 Rack Filler Kit provides four spare filler Panels 3x 1U and 1x 3U height. They should be used if equipment is
removed from racks to improve the appearance of the rack and to ensure and maintain proper air flow.
Supported in IBM 19 racks such as #0551, #0553, #0554, and #0555.
Supported on all (including + models) 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595 models and 9411-100.
#0694
#0694 - #5094 Equivalent

The #0694 - #5094 Equivalent is used by the IBM marketing configurator to keep track of the number of #5094 PCI-X
Expansion Tower rack-mounted units actually connected or cabled to the system.
For each #5294 1.8m I/O Tower ordered, the IBM marketing configurator defaults a quantity of two #0694 specify codes to
the order. One #0694 can be removed from the #5294 order. Process a Record Purposes Only (RPO) to add or remove
the #0694s to or from system inventory records, but at least one #0694 must exist for each #5294 on the inventory records.
If an existing #5294 is to be shared between two systems, process an RPO to remove one #0694 from the system that the
#5294 was ordered against and to add one #0694 to the other sharing system.
For each #8094 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack ordered, the IBM marketing configurator defaults a quantity of one #0694 specify
code on the order. The #0694 can be removed from the #8094 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack via MES after the initial order if the
rack-mounted #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower does not attach to the same system as the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure
lower unit. In this case, record-purposes-only add the #0694 to the sharing system, which attaches the #5094 tower.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
announcement of dual mode IOAs in the IBM System i5 and eServer i5 servers.
#0836
#0836 - #4328 Load Source Specify

The #0836 indicates that a #4328 Disk Unit is used as the load source.
A load source specify code is required on each new or upgrade order into Models 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), or 595.
These specify codes can be changed at any time.
Supported on all Models (including + models) 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), and 595.
150
#1800
#1800 HSL-2 Ports - 2 Copper

The #1800 HSL-2 Ports - 2 Copper is a two port copper HSL-2/RIO-G bus expansion card for the Model 570, 570+ and 570
(POWER6). The #1800 adds capacity for an additional HSL-2/RIO-G loop on to the system. Hot plug capability is
supported.
Requires a #7875 CPU Power Regulator.
Slot 6 is unavailable when #1800 is installed.
Note: When viewed from the HMC, this feature can be generically identified only with the characters GX Adapter Card, rather
than the feature number.
#1801
#1801 Optical Bus Expansion Card - 2 port

The #1801 Optical Bus Expansion Card - 2 port is a two port optical RIO-G bus expansion card for the Model 570, 570+.
The #1801 adds two optical ports, enabling capacity for an optical loop for the Model 570, 570+.
The ability to concurrently add or remove an I/O tower or drawer is not supported. When installed, slot 6 is unavailable.
Optical SPCN cables cannot be directly attached to the Model 570 system unit, but can be attached to an intermediate I/O
tower/drawer on the same SPCN loop.
Corequisite: #7875 CPU Power Regulator
Supported on Model 570, 570+.
#1802
#1802 12X Channel CEC GX Adapter

The #1802 12X Channel CEC GX Adapter provides a 12X adapter that is installed in the system unit (CEC). It provides two
ports for attaching one 12X loop for external connectivity of 12X I/O expansion drawers. The #1802 is inserted in a GX slot.
In the 570 (POWER6) processor enclosure the first GX slot does not take a PCI slot, but the second GX adapter takes the
space of a PCIe slot.
Supported on Model 570 (POWER6).
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 or later
#1806
#1806 HSL-2/RIO-G Ports - 2 Copper

The #1806 is a 2-port copper HSL-2/RIO-G Bus expansion card for Model 550, 550+. The #1806 adds two HSL-2/RIO-G
ports, enabling capacity for an additional HSL-2/RIO-G loop on the system.
See the #1807 for additional information.
#1807
#1807 RIO-G Ports - 2 optical

The #1807 RIO-G Ports - 2 optical is a 2-port optical RIO-G bus expansion card for the Model 550, 550+. The #1807 adds
two optical ports, enabling capacity for an optical loop.
The ability to concurrently add or remove an I/O tower or drawer is not supported.
Optical SPCN cables cannot be directly attached to the Model 550 system unit, but can be attached to an intermediate I/O
tower or drawer on the same SPCN loop. Plugs into the optional HSL connector in the system unit and makes system unit
slot C05 unusable for PCI card placement.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3, AIX 5L for Power V5.2, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3,
or SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER.
Supported on Model 550, 550+.
#2739
#2739 Optical Bus Adapter

The #2739 Optical Bus Adapter is used in the #5074 PCI Expansion Tower, #5079 1.8 m I/O Tower, and the #5078/#0578
PCI Expansion Unit in Rack to connect via optical HSL. The #2739 supports clustering (HSL OptiConnect).
Supported on all Models (including + models) 550, 570, and 595, as well as Models 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890.
151
#2776

The #2776 HSL-2 Ports - 8 Copper is an 8-port copper HSL-2 bus adapter, which supports up to four HSL-2 loops.
#2785

The #2785 HSL-2 Ports - 2 Copper is a 2-port copper HSL-2 adapter for the Model 825. The #2785 can be installed in either
of the two HSL adapter slots (C08 or C09) on the Model 825 backplane.
#2786
#2786 HSL Ports - 2 Optical

The #2786 HSL Ports - 2 Optical is a 2-port optical HSL adapter for the Model 825. The #2786 can be installed in either of
the two HSL adapter slots (C08 or C09) on the Model 825 backplane.
#2788

The #2788 HSL Ports - 8 Optical is an 8-port optical HSL-2 bus adapter, which supports up to four optical HSL-2 loops in
Models 870 and 890.
#2887
#2887 HSL Two Bus Adapter

This is an optional feature for HSL-2/RIO-G connectivity for PCI-X expansion towers and units.
The #2887 provides two copper HSL-2 ports. This features is used when converting bus adapters on installed towers/units.
Supported on Models (including + models) 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), and 595, as well as Models
825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and 9411-100.
#2888
#2888 RIO-G Ports - 2 Copper

the #2888 is an HSL-2/RIO-2 adapter that is installed in the system unit. It provides two ports for attaching one HSL-2 loop
for external connectivity of I/O expansion drawers and towers. The #2888 is inserted in the GX slot and does not take a PCI
slot.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R3 with V5R3M5 Licensed Internal Code
Supported on Models 520+ and 525
Note: When viewed from the HMC, the HSL/RIO-G adapter slots can be generically identified only with the characters GX
#3757
#3757 Processor Book Service Shelf

A #3757 Processor Book Service Shelf kit is required by IBM service personnel to add and to remove a Model 595
processor book. A minimum of one #3757 is required at each site with a Model 595 installed.
#4643
#4643 7040-61D I/O Drawer Attached

A #4643 7040-61D I/O Drawer Attached indicates that a 7040-61D I/O Drawer is installed in the 24-inch primary rack of a
Model 595. One to four #4643s can be installed. Only AIX and Linux adapters and disk units can be installed in the
7040-61D.
152
#5074

The #5074 PCI Expansion Tower is attached to Models 820, 830, and 840 for adding up to 45 disk units (15 are base, 30
additional with #5101 or #5111), up to 11 PCI IOAs and up to two removable media units. The #5074 includes #9691 or
#2739/#9739 bus adapter to provide the HSL interface to the system, a #9943 Base PCI IOP, space for two removable
media devices, one battery backup, and redundant or hot swap power supplies. The #5074 is capable of controlling Ultra2
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) disk units.
Select two (any combination) of the following HSL cables for the first tower on an HSL loop. For additional towers on an
HSL loop, select one HSL cable per tower:
#1460 - 3m Copper HSL Cable
#1470 - 6m Optical HSL Cable
#1474 - 6m HSL to HSL-2 Cable
For the Model 810, if the #5074 attaches to HSL ports A0 or A1, the HSL cable cannot exceed 6 m. For the Model 820, if
the #5074 attaches to HSL port A1 of the system unit, the HSL connection to port A1 cannot exceed 6 m. When a #5074
is present, one #1460 or #1461 must be selected.
Select one of the following SPCN cables per tower:
#0369 100m Optical SPCN Cable
#1463 - 2m SPCN Cable
#1468 - 250m Optical SPCN Cable
One #14xx power cord must be specified (geography dependent). See 13.2, SPCN (power) cables on page 545, for power
cord options.
Maximum: Six on the Model 520, 12 on the Model 550, 30 on the Model 570, 48 on the Model 595, five on the Model 820,
13 on Model 830, 23 on Model 840,and 47 on Model 890.
Supported on Models (including + models) 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 595, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890
and 9411-100.
The #5074 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 October 2005. A #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower is the recommended
replacement.
#5075

The #5075 PCI Expansion Tower is attached to a Model 820 for adding up to six disk units and up to seven PCI IOAs. The
#5075 includes a 32 MB PCI IOP (CCIN 284B) embedded on its backplane. In a Model 820, the seven PCI IOAs are
supported (driven) by the embedded 32 MB PCI IOP and by #2843 PCI IOPs, #2790 PCI Integrated Netfinity #2790 PCI
Integrated Netfinity Server, or #2791/#2792/#2799 PCI Integrated xSeries Servers.
The #5075 is capable of controlling Ultra2 SCSI disk units. A #5156 Redundant Power and Cooling feature can be added
to provide a redundant power supply and a cooling fan.
Select two (any combination) of the following HSL cables for the first tower on the Model 820. For additional towers, select
one HSL cable per tower:
The #1462 is not allowed to attach the #5075 PCI Expansion Tower directly to system port A1 on the Model 270, 800, 810,
or 820. When a #5075 is present, one #1460 or #1461 must be selected. For the Model 800, 810, or 820, if the #5075
attaches to HSL ports A0 or A1, the HSL cable cannot exceed 6 m. If the #5075 PCI Expansion Tower is in a clustered loop
with a Model 825, 870, or 890, select one #1460 or #1461, and two of the following HSL cables:
153
#5075
(contd.)

cord options.
Maximum: Five
Supported on Models 820, 810, and 825.
#5078
#5078 PCI Expansion Unit

The #5078 PCI Expansion Unit is a top hat that installs on top of the #9079 Base I/O Tower and on top of the #5074 PCI
Expansion Tower. The #5078 has 14 PCI slots, which allows up to 11 PCI IOAs to be added. The PCI IOAs are supported
(driven) by #2843 PCI IOPs, #2790 PCI Integrated Netfinity Server, and #2791/#2792/#2799 PCI Integrated xSeries
Servers.
Disk units and removable media devices are not supported and cannot be installed in the #5078 PCI Expansion Unit. The
#5078 includes a bus adapter to provide the HSL interface to the system. The IBM marketing configurator adds to the order
and defaults to copper HSL:
#9691 Base Bus Adapter (copper HSL)
#9739 Base Optical Bus Adapter (HSL)
The two electrical cables of the #5078 connect to the power source in the #5074/#9079. The #5078 can be ordered with a
#5074/#9079 on initial orders and the #5074/#9079 ships with the #5078 installed. The #5078 can also be ordered as an
MES install on an existing #5074/#9079.
The #5078 can be on the same HSL loop as the #5074/#9079, or it can be on a separate HSL loop from the #5074/#9079.
If the #5078 and the #5074/#9079 are on the same HSL loop, then a #1460 - 3m Copper HSL Cable should be included in
the order (for both initial orders and for MES orders) to connect the #5078 and the #5074/#9079.
If the #5074/#9079 and the #5078 are on separate HSL loops, then one or two of the following HSL cables must be on the
order. Select two HSL cables if the #5078 is the first or only expansion tower/unit on an HSL loop. Select one HSL cable if
the #5078 coexists with other expansion towers or units on an HSL loop:
Select one of the following SPCN cables per expansion unit:
The #1462 cannot be used to connect to HSL port A1 on the Model 820.
Requires a #5074 PCI Expansion Tower (1.8 m) or #9079 Base I/O Tower.
The #5078 is supported for migration on a #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower.
Not supported on the #5079 1.8 m I/O Tower.
Maximum: One per #5074 PCI Expansion Tower one per #9079 Base I/O Tower
154
#5079
#5079 1.8 m I/O Tower (PCI I/O Expansion Tower)

The #5079 1.8 m I/O Tower is attached to Models 820, 830, and 840 for adding up to 90 disk units, up to 22 PCI IOAs, and
up to four removable media units. The #5079 includes two (in any combination) #9691 or #9739 optical HSL bus adapters
to provide the HSL interface to the system. The #5079 is essentially two #5074 PCI Expansion Tower, stacked in a single
1.8 m tower. Each ordered #5079 counts as two #5074s toward the system model maximums. For each #5079 ordered, a
quantity of two #0574 - #5074 Equivalent specify codes are added to the order. The #5079 is capable of controlling Ultra2
SCSI disk units.
Select two, three, or four (any combination) of the following HSL cables for each tower:
For the Model 810 and 820, if the #5079 attaches to HSL ports A0 or A1, the HSL cable cannot exceed 6 m.
When a #5079 is present, one #1460 or #1461 must be selected.
Select two of the following SPCN cables per tower:
Two #14xx power cords must be specified (geography dependent). See 13.2, SPCN (power) cables on page 545, for
power cord options.
Maximum: Two on the Model 810 and 820, nine on the Model 825, six on the Model 830, 11 on the Model 840, and 29 on
the Model 870 and 890.
Supported on Models (including + models) 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 595, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890 and
9411-100.
The #5079 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 October 2005. A #5294 PCI-X Expansion Tower is the recommended
replacement.
#5088
#5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit

The #5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit is an 8 EIA high top hat, which can be installed on top of a #5074/#5094 PCI-X
Expansion Tower or on top of a #9079/#9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure. The #5088 has 14 PCI-X slots for installation of PCI
IOPs and IOAs. Disk units and removable media are not supported by the #5088 and cannot be installed.
The #5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit has two redundant 575W power supplies and two power connector cables that attach
internally to the ac box of the tower on which it resides. The #5088 has dual line cord capability, but to achieve it, the tower
on which it resides must have dual line cord capability.
The #5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit includes a bus adapter to provide the HSL interface to the system. The IBM marketing
configurator adds one of the following to the order:
#9876 Base Optical Bus Adapter
#9877 - Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter
Specify when attaching to optical HSL-2 ports.
#9887 Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter (default)
Specify when attaching to copper HSL ports.
For Models 810 and 820, if the #5088 attaches to HSl ports A0 or A1, the HSL cable cannot exceed 6 m. Select an
appropriate number of the following HSL/HSL-2 cables:
#1307 -1.75m Copper HSL-2 Cable
155
#5088
(contd.)

#1482 - 3.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1483 - 10m HSL-2 Cable
#1485 - 15m HSL-2 Cable
#6001 Power Control Cable - 2M
The #5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit can be ordered with a #5074 PCI Expansion Tower, #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower,
#9079 Base I/O Tower, and #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure on initial orders. The #5074, #5094, #9079, and #9094 ship with
the #5088 installed. The #5088 can also be ordered as an MES install on an existing #5074, #5094, #9079, and #9094.
A #5088 cannot be installed on a #5294 1.8m I/O Tower or an #8094 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack.
Maximum: One per #5074, #5094, #9079, and #9094
Supported on all (including + models) 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595 models; as well as Models 810, 820,
825, 830, 840, 870, and 890 and 9411-100.
#5094
#5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower

The #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower is a PCI expansion tower that provides I/O capability for iSeries servers. The #5094
has 15 disk unit slots, with an additional 30 slots available with the #5108 30 Disk Expansion Feature. The #5094 has two
removable media slots and 14 PCI-X IOP or IOA card slots. A #9844 Base PCI IOP is included as base and needs to be
listed on an initial order for a #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower.
The #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower includes a bus adapter to provide the HSL interface to the system. The IBM marketing
configurator adds one of the following to the order:
#6417 HSL-2/RIO-G Bus Adapter
#9517 Base HSL-2/RIO-G Bus Adapter
A #9517 Base HSL-2/RIO-G Bus Adapter is shipped for Models 520, 550, 570, and 595.
#9877 Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter
and 890.
For Models 810 and 820, if the #5094 attaches to HSL ports A0 or A1, the HSL cannot exceed 6 m.
Select an appropriate number of the following HSL/HSL-2 cables:
156
#5094
(contd.)

#1482 - 3.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1483 - 10m HSL-2 Cable
#1485 - 15m HSL-2 Cable
Order #5115 Dual Line Cords Tower on each #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower required to have dual line cord support. When
a #5094 is ordered without #5115, select one line cord from the following list. When a #5094 is ordered with the #5115, select
two line cords from the following list:
#1408 - 4.3m 200V/16A Power Cord Italy
#1409 - 4.3m 200V/16A Power Cord Australia/New Zealand
#1418 - 4.3m 200V/16A Power Cord South Africa
#1419 - 4.3m 200V/16A Power Cord Israel
#1420 - 4.3m 200V/16A Power Cord EU/Asia
#1421 - 4.3m 200V/16A Power Cord CH/DK
#1451 - 200V 6-ft Line Cord
#1452 - 200V 14-ft Line Cord
#1454 - 200V 12A 14-ft TL Line Cord (U.S. default)
#1476 - 4.3m 200V/12A Power Cord UK
PCI IOAs are supported (driven) by the #9844/#9943 Base PCI IOP, #2843/#2844/#2847 PCI IOPs, #2790 PCI Integrated
Netfinity Server, #2791/#2792/#2799 PCI Integrated xSeries Servers or #4710/#9710 Integrated xSeries Servers.
The 45 disk unit positions are in groups of 15. Each group of 15 disk units is further divided into three groups of five disk
units. Each group of five disk units is supported on a separate SCSI (low voltage differential (LVD)-SCSI) bus from a
PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller. Each group of 15 disk units requires one PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller.
The mounting for the first 15 disk units is included in the #5094 (part of the base tower). The mounting for the next 30 disk
units is optional by ordering feature code #5108 30-Disk Expansion Feature.
The #5094 and #9094 expansion towers offer additional LPAR configuration flexibility. Instead of the previous maximum
number of three disk controllers supported in a #5094/#9094, now up to nine total disk controllers are supported. These
can be either OS/400 controlled (maximum of six OS/400 partitions) or Linux controlled. The #5294 and #8094 are similarly
enhanced and now support a maximum of 18 disk controllers.
Each tower must have at least one PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller for each group of 15 disk units in the tower. Only the
#5703/#0628 can be ordered as an extra controller (up to two #5703/#0628s per group of 15 disk units in the same tower)
if #0143 Disk Controller Placement Exception is also ordered. A maximum of six #5703/#0628s per #5094/#9094 tower is
supported.
The number of disk units per PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller varies by configuration. Refer to Disk Controller Feature Code
Section for controller description for limitations.
The #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower supports up to two removable media devices (internal tape or internal CD-ROM or
DVD). These removable media devices are supported by the same
PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller, which supports the 15 base disk units.
157
#5094
(contd.)

870, 890 models and 9411-100.
Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3, and AIX 5L for POWER V5.2.
announcement of IOP-less support in IBM System i5 and eServer i5 servers. Refer to #9844 Inclusion Rules on page 211.
#5095

The #5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower provides I/O capability for iSeries systems. The #5095 has seven PCI-X IOP or IOA
slots. The #5095 also supports up to 12 disk units. A #9844 Base PCI IOP is included as base and should be on an initial
order for the #5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower.
The #5095 includes a bus adapter to provide the HSL-2 interface to the system. The IBM marketing configurator adds one
of the following to the order:
A #9517 Base HSL-2/RIO-G Bus Adapter is shipped for Models 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), and 595.
and 890.
#9886 Base Optical Bus Adapter (optical HSL-2)
For the Model 800 or 810, if the #5095 attaches to HSL ports A0 or A1, the HSL Cable cannot exceed 6 m.
#1482 - 3.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1483 - 10m HSL-2 Cable
#1485 - 15m HSL-2 Cable
Select one of the following line cords (select two if #5138 Redundant Power and Cooling is selected):
#1411 - 200V 14-ft Line Cord
#1412 - 125V 6-ft Line Cord (US default)
#1440 - 4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord Denmark
#1442 - 4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord Swiss
Select one of the following SPCN cables:
158
#5095
(contd.)

The #5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower supports seven PCI-X IOA/IOP card slots. One Integrated xSeries Server is supported
in slots C1 and C2.
The #5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower has redundant power when #5138 Redundant Power and Cooling is present or ordered.
The #5138 includes a second 435W power supply. A second line cord is required with #5138 to provide redundant power
support in this tower and also enables dual line cord capability.
If an Integrated xSeries Server is ordered as part of an MES, the #9844 Base PCI IOP (in slot C1) and any associated IOAs
must be repositioned within the system.
Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3, and AIX 5L for POWER V5.2.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
The tower and drawer configurations longer include a #9844 Base PCI IOP as of 31 January 2006 with the announcement
of IOP-less support in IBM System i5 and eServer i5 servers. Refer to #9844 Inclusion Rules on page 211.
#5096
#5096 PCI-X Expansion Tower (no disk)

The #5096 PCI-X Expansion Tower (no disk) #5096 is an I/O expansion tower that has 14 PCI slots. It does not support
disk units and does not support any internal removable media devices. A #5088 cannot be mounted on a #5096.
One bus adapter to provide the HSL interface to the system is required with each #5096. Select one of the following:
#9517 - Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter (to specify two copper HSL-2 ports)
#9876 - Base Optical Bus Adapter (to specify two optical HSL ports)
One or two cables must be ordered to attach to the HSL or HSL-2 ports. When ordering cables to connect to the HSL
interface, optical HSL, copper HSL, copper HSL-2, or copper HSL to HSL-2 cables are required.
An HSL loop uses all optical or all copper ports and cables. A copper loop can intermix I/O towers and units with copper
HSL and copper HSL-2 ports. Select the appropriate cable based on the type of HSL ports to which it is being attached,
and the cable length required.
The following HSL cables can be used with a #5096:
#1307 - 1.75m HSL-2 Cable
#1308 - 2.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1460 3m HSL Cable
#1461 6m HSL Cable
#1462 15m HSL Cable
#1470 6m HSL Optical Cable (model specific usage)
#1464 6m HSL to HSL-2 Cable
#1481 1m HSL-2 Cable
One of the following SPCN cables is required for each #5096:
#1463 2m SPCN Cable
#1464 6m SPCN Cable
#1465 15m SPCN Cable
#0369 100m Optical SPCN Cable (model specific usage)
#6001 2m SPCN Cable
#6006 3m SPCN Cable
159
#5096
(contd.)

#6008 6m SPCN Cable
No base IOP is included with the #5096. Each #5096 comes with redundant, hot-swap, power supplies. To enable further
#5096 redundancy, dual line cord capability for the #5096 is provided by feature #5115. An additional #5096 line cord must
be ordered when installing a #5115. Plugging in the second line cord, even if to the same outlet, enables the ac power
modules to be redundant.
The following line cords are supported on a #5096:
#1399 - 4.3m 300V/16A
#1406 - 200V 16A 14-Ft TL Line Cord
#1418 - 4.3m 200V/16A Power Cord S Afric
#1451 - 200V 6-Ft Line Cord
#1452 - 200V 14-Ft Line Cord
#1453 - 200V 6-Ft Locking Line Cord
#1454 - 200V 12A 14-Ft TL Line Cord (U.S. default)
#1455 - 200V 6-Ft Wtrtght Line Cord
#1456 - 200V 14-Ft Wtrtght Line Cord
Refer to PCI Card Placement Rules for Placement of IOPs and IOAs.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models; Models 810, 825, 870, and 890, as well as 9411-100.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3 or later, SUSE
Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later, AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer or later
Refer to #9844 Inclusion Rules on page 211.
The 5096 can be converted to a 5094.
#5097
#5097 1.8m I/O Tower

The #5097 1.8m I/O Tower is an I/O expansion tower that can contain up to 90 disk units. It has 28 PCI slots and four
removable media bays. The #5097 is the result of a conversion from an #8093 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack.
Each #5097 is essentially a #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower (bottom enclosure) and a #5074 PCI Expansion Tower (top
enclosure) with side covers and casters removed, placed in a 1.8 M rack. Each #5097 counts as one #5094 and one #5074
towards the system model maximums.
Two bus adapters are included with each #5097 to provide the HSL interfaces to the system.
Top enclosure (#5074)
#9691 Base Bus Adapter for copper HSL interfaces
#9739 Base Optical Bus Adapter for optical HSL interfaces
Bottom enclosure (#5094)
#9877 - Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter for copper HSL-2 interfaces
The upper (#5074) and lower (#5094) enclosures in a #5097 are not connected internally by an HSL cable. If the #5097 is
to be placed in an HSL loop (both upper and lower enclosure on same HSL loop), an HSL cable is required to connect the
upper and lower enclosures. An HSL loop uses all optical or all copper ports/cables. A copper loop can intermix I/O towers
or units with copper HSL and copper HSL-2 ports. Select the appropriate cable based on the type of HSL ports to which it
is being attached, and the cable length required.
Select three or four (any combination) of the following HSL cables, on the first #5097 on system, initial order. For additional
#5097s or on an MES, select two, three or four (any combination) HSL cables per tower:
#1307 1.75m Copper HSL-2 Cable
160
#5097
(contd.)

#1481 - 1m HSL-2 Cable
#1482 - 3.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1483 - 10m HSL-2 Cable
Select two of the following SPCN cables for each #5097:
Each #5097 includes two PCI IOPs.
Process a Record Purposes Only (RPO) for each #5097 to add a quantity of one #0694 - #5094 Equivalent and one #0574
- #5074 Equivalent to the attaching system.
Each of the two tower units within a #5097 fully supports 45 disk units. A #5101 or #5108 is not required.
Dual line cord capability is available for the #5079 with #5105 Dual Line Cords I/O Tower (top enclosure) and #5114 Dual
Line Cords Tower (bottom enclosure). With #5105 and #5114 installed, both tower units of a #5097 have dual line cord
capability. Order two additional line cords (for a total of four) when a #5105 and #5114 is installed.
The following line cords are supported on a #5097 (two line cord features required):
#1396 - 4.3m 200V/16A Power Cord China
#1399 - 4.3m 300V/16A
#1406 - 200V 16A 14-ft TL Line Cord
#1452 - 200V 14-ft Line Cord
#1457 - 200V 6-ft Upper Line Cord
#1458 - 200V 6-ft Upper Locking Cord
#1459 - 200V 6-ft Upper Watertight Cord
The 45 disk unit positions in each unit of a #5097 are in groups of 15. Each group of 15 disk units is further divided into
three groups of five disk units. Each group of five disk units is supported on a separate SCSI bus from a PCI Disk Unit
Controller.
The #5715 and #5703 controllers are not supported in the upper unit of a #5097.
The two removable media bays of each unit within a #5097 are supported by the same PCI Disk Unit Controller, which
supports disk unit positions D31 through D35 of each internal tower unit.
HSL connections, two to four wall electrical outlets, one #0574 and one #0694 are required.
The #5097 is only available as a MES to the #8093 during an upgrade to an eServer i5 server.
161
#5097
(contd.)

Supported on Models 570, 570+, 595 and 9411-100.
The #5097 was withdrawn from marketing for new orders only on 01 October 2005.
#5101
#5101 30 Disk Unit Expansion

The #5101 30 Disk Unit Expansion is a disk unit expansion enclosure feature for the #5074 PCI Expansion Tower, the
#9074 Base I/O Tower, and the #9074/#9079 Base I/O Tower. The #5101 includes two 15-disk unit enclosures, one
765-watt power supply, backplanes, and cables. One Disk Unit Controller is required to support one 15-disk unit enclosure.
Supported on Models (including + models) 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 595, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and
9411-100.
#5107
#5107 30 Disk Expansion

The #5107 30 Disk Expansion is a disk unit expansion enclosure feature for the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure. In the
#8093 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack/#8094 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack, 30 disk expansions are installed in the bottom and upper
units with no feature code required. The #5107 includes two 15-disk unit enclosures, one 765-watt power supply,
backplanes, and cables. One Disk Unit Controller is required to support the 15 disk units in each of the two disk unit
enclosures included with #5107.
Supported on Models 870, and 890.
#5108
#5108 30 Disk Expansion Feature

The #5108 30 Disk Expansion Feature is a disk unit expansion enclosure feature for a #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower. The
#5108 includes two 15-disk unit enclosures, one power supply, backplanes and cables. One Disk Unit Controller is required
to support each 15-disk unit enclosure.
870, 890 models and 9411-100
#5111
#5111 30 Disk Expansion with Dual Line Cords

The #5111 30 Disk Expansion with Dual Line Cords is a disk unit expansion enclosure feature for systems and towers that
are dual line cord enabled. (Model 830 system units have a #5103, and Model 840 system units have a #5104 and #5074
PCI Expansion Tower, which have #5105.) The #5111 includes two 15-disk unit enclosures, backplanes and cables. One
#4748/#4778 PCI RAID Disk Unit Controller is required to support one 15-disk unit enclosure.
A #5103 is required when ordered for a Model 830 system unit, a #5104 is required when ordered for an 840 system unit,
and a #5105 when ordered for a stand-alone #5074 PCI Expansion Tower or top unit in an #8079 Optional Base 1.8 m I/O
Rack.
Supported on Models (including + models) 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 595, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and
9411-100.
#5114
#5114 Dual Line Cords Tower

The #5114 Dual Line Cords Tower provides dual line cord capability for the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure and the lower
unit in an #8093 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack/#8094 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack. Two #14xx line cords must be ordered on an initial
order or a model upgrade into an 890 from a non-890 model. When ordering a #5114 as an MES, one 840W power supply
is shipped and one additional #14xx line cord is required to be ordered. See 13.3, Dual line cords on page 547, for power
cord options.
The #5114 has country-specific or region-specific usage.
162
#5117
#5117 30 Disk Expansion with Dual Line Cords

The #5117 30 Disk Expansion with Dual Line Cords is a disk unit expansion enclosure feature for a dual line cord enabled
#9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure. The #5117 includes two 15 disk unit enclosures, back planes and cables. One #2757 PCI-X
Ultra RAID Disk Controller, #2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller, #4748 PCI RAID Disk Unit Controller, or #4778 PCI
RAID Disk Unit Controller is required to support the 15 disk units in each of the two disk unit enclosures included with the
#5117.
#5138
#5138 Redundant Power and Cooling

The #5138 Redundant Power and Cooling provides redundant power for the #0595/#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower. A
#5138 consists of a 435W power supply and additional cooling fans. A second line cord is required on each #0595/#5095
with a #5138 installed. The #5138, together with the second line cord, enables dual line cord capability for an #0595/#5095.
Maximum: One per #0595/#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
#5156

The #5156 Redundant Power and Cooling adds an additional 575-watt power supply for redundancy and additional cooling
fan to the #5075 PCI Expansion Tower.
Marketing configurator defaults to a #5156 on a Model 820 for any added #5075 when the system unit contains a #5155
575-watt power supply. If a #5155 is ordered as an MES to an existing Model 820, default one #5156 for each #5075 present
or ordered. The #5156s are not mandatory and can be removed from an order.
Supported on Models 810, 820, and 825
#5158
#5158 850W AC Power Supply

The #5158 is an optional 850W power supply, which provides redundant power for the Model 520 system unit. A second
line cord is required.
Supported on Models 520, 520+, 525.
#5159
#5159 850 Watt Power Supply

The #5159 provides an optional 850W power supply, which installs in a 520 system unit with processor #8325, #8327 or
#8330 and provides redundant power.
The #5159 requires an additional system unit line cord feature to be ordered.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 with V5R3M5 LIC, AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer, Red Hat
Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER
Supported on Model 515, 520+ and 525.
#5168
#5168 30 Disk Expansion for #9194 Tower

The #5168 30 Disk Expansion for #9194 Tower is a unit expansion enclosure feature for the #9194 Base PCI-X Expansion
Tower. The #5168 includes two 15-disk-unit enclosures, one power supply, back-planes and cables. A minimum of one disk
unit controller is required to support each of the two 15-disk-unit enclosures included with #5168.
Supported on Model 595 #9194 towers.
#5294

The #5294 1.8m I/O Tower has space for 90 disk units, has 28 PCI-X IOP or IOA slots, and has four removable media bays.
The #5294 is equivalent to two #5094 PCI-X Expansion Towers, with covers and casters removed and positioned in a 1.8m
rack. It includes two bus adapters to provide the HSL interface to the system. The IBM marketing configurator adds two, in
any combination, of the following to the order:
A #9517 Base HSL-2/RIO-G Bus Adapter is shipped for Models (including + models) 520, 525, 550, 570, 570
(POWER6), 595 and 9411-100.
and 890.
163
#5294
(contd.)

#9886 Base Optical Bus Adapter (optical HSL-2)
The #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower is the default when a PCI IOP or IOA is ordered that requires a PCI expansion unit. The
#5294 can be specified on the IBM marketing configurators extra controllers screen. For each #5294 ordered, two #0694
- #5094 Equivalent specify codes are added to the order. If a #5294 is to be shared between two systems, process an RPO
to remove one #0694 from the original ordering system and add it to the sharing system.
The upper and lower enclosures (#5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower) in the #5294 are not connected internally by an HSL
cable. Two to four of the following HSL/HSL-2 cables are required:
#1482 - 3.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1483 - 10m HSL-2 Cable
#1485 - 15m HSL-2 Cable
For the Model 810, if the #5294 attaches to HSL ports A0 or A1, the HSL cable cannot exceed 6 m.
For the Model 820, the HSL cable connection to port A1 cannot exceed 6 m.
Two #9844 Base PCI IOPs are included with each #5294 1.8m I/O Tower. The IBM marketing configurator allows a #5294
to exist in the field without any #9844s present, but all ordered #5294s ship with two #9844s. The #5294 1.8m I/O Tower is
capable of controlling Ultra4 (u320) SCSI disk units.
If no #5116 Dual Line Cords - #5294 is installed, select two line cords from the following list.
If one #5116 Dual Line Cords - #5294 is installed, select three line cords from the following list.
If two #5116 Dual Line Cords - #5294 are installed, select four line cords from the following list.
#1452 - 200V 14-ft Line Cord
#1454 - 200V 12A 14-ft TL Line Cord (default)
#0369 - 100m Optical SPCN Cable (825, 830, 840, 870, 890)
#1463 - 2m SPCN Cable (270, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890)
#1464 - 6m SPCN Cable (270, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890)
#1465 - 15m SPCN Cable (270, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890)
#1466 - 30m SPCN Cable (270, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890)
#1468 - 250m Optical SPCN Cable (825, 830, 840, 870, 890)
The 90 disk unit positions are in groups of 15. Each group of 15 disk units is further divided into three groups of five disk
units. Each group of five disk units is supported on a separate SCSI bus from a PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller. Each group of
15 disk units requires one PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller.
Each group of 15 disk units requires one #PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller.
The #5294 1.8m I/O Tower supports up to four removable media devices (internal tape or CD-ROM or DVD). These
removable media devices are supported by the two PCI/PCI-X Disk Controllers, which support the first two groups of 15
disk units.
164
#5294
(contd.)

number of six disk controllers supported in a #5294/#8094, now up to eighteen total disk controllers are supported. These
can be either OS/400 controlled (maximum of six OS/400 partitions) or Linux controlled. The #5703/#0628 disk controller
can be used to go beyond the maximum of three, already supported PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller per top or bottom unit of the
#5294/#8094.
if #0143 Disk Controller Placement Exception is also ordered.
The #5294 1.8m I/O Tower reports to the system as two CCIN 5094.
Each ordered #5294 counts as two #5094s toward the system model maximums.
Supported in Linux and AIX partitions with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS
for POWER Version 3, and AIX 5L for POWER V5.2.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models; 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and 9411-100.
of IOP-less support in System i5 and eServer i5 servers. Refer to #9844 Inclusion Rules on page 211.
#5296
#5296 1.8m I/O Tower (no disk)

The #5296 1.8m I/O Tower (no disk) is a I/O expansion tower that has 28 PCI slots, no disk unit bays, and no removable
media bays. Each #5296 is essentially two #5096 PCI-X Expansion Towers, with side covers and casters removed, placed
in a 1.8M rack. Each #5296 counts as two #5096s towards the system model maximums.
Two bus adapters, to provide the HSL interfaces to the system, are required with each #5296. Select two of the following:
#9517 - Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter (for copper HSL-2 interfaces)
#9876 - Base Optical Bus Adapter (for optical HSL interfaces)
The upper and lower enclosures (#5096s) in a #5296 are not connected internally by an HSL cable. If the #5296 is to be
placed in an HSL loop (both upper and lower enclosure on same HSL loop), an HSL-2 cable is required to connect the
upper and lower enclosures. An HSL loop uses all optical or all copper ports/cables. A copper loop can intermix I/O
towers/units with copper HSL and copper HSL-2 ports. Select the appropriate cable based on the type of HSL ports to
which it is being attached, and the cable length required.
Select three or four of the following HSL cables, on initial orders, for the first #5296 on the system. For additional #5296s,
or on an MES order, select two, three, or four of the following HSL cables per tower:
#1307 - 1.75m HSL-2 Cable
#1308 - 2.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1460 3m HSL Cable
#1461 6m HSL Cable
#1462 15m HSL Cable
#1463 2m SPCN Cable
#1464 6m SPCN Cable
165
#5296
(contd.)

#6001 2m SPCN Cable
#6006 3m SPCN Cable
#6008 6m SPCN Cable
No base IOPs are included with a #5296. For each #5296 ordered, a quantity of two #0694, #5096 Equivalent, specify
codes will be added to the order. If a #5296 is to be shared between two systems, one #0694 must be removed from the
original ordering system and added to the sharing system, using a Record Purpose Only (RPO) change.
Dual line cord capability is available for the #5296 with feature #5116. With a #5116 installed, both tower units of a #5296
will have dual line cord capability. Two additional line cords (for a total of four), must be ordered when a #5116 is installed.
Plugging in the second line cord from the upper and lower units, even if to the same outlet, enables each units ac power
modules to be redundant. For the best power protection, the first and second line cords should be attached to different
power sources.
Two of the following line cords are required on a #5296:
#1399 - 4.3m 300V/16A
#1451 - 200V 6-Ft Line Cord
#1452 - 200V 14-Ft Line Cord
#1453 - 200V 6-Ft Locking Line Cord
#1455 - 200V 6-Ft Watertight Line Cord
#1456 - 200V 14-Ft Watertight Line Cord
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models; Models 810, 825, 870, and 890, and 9411-100.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3 or later, SUSE
Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later, AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer or later
The #5296 can be converted to a #5294.
#5554
#5554 Mirror 35 GB Disk/Controller Package

The #5554 provides a disk unit controller (#2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller equivalent) and twelve 15k rpm 35 GB
disk units (#4326 35.16 GB 15k RPM Disk Unit equivalent) for servers doing mirroring. Either #0042 Mirrored System IOP
Level or #0043 Mirrored System Bus Level is required.
AS for POWER Version 3, AIX 5L for POWER V5.2
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
The #5554 was withdrawn from marketing as of 25 October 2005. The #5555 Mirror 70 GB Disk/Controller Package or
#2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller plus a quantity of 12 of #4326 35.16 GB 15k RPM Disk Unit are the recommended
replacements.
#5555
#5555 Mirror 70 GB Disk/Controller Package

The #5555 provides a disk unit controller (#2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller equivalent) and twelve 15k rpm 70 GB
disk units (#4327 70.56 GB 15k RPM Disk Unit equivalent) for servers doing mirroring. Either #0042 Mirrored System IOP
Level or #0043 Mirrored System Bus Level is required.
AS for POWER Version 3, AIX 5L for POWER, V5.2 for iSeries
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
166
#5556
#5556 - Mirror 141.12 GB Disk/Controller Package

The #5556 provides a disk unit controller (#2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controllerequivalent) and twelve 15k rpm 141.12
GB disk units (#4328 141.12 GB 15k RPM Disk Unit equivalent) for servers doing mirroring. Either #0042 Mirrored System
IOP Level or #0043 Mirrored System Bus Level is required.
AS for POWER Version 3, AIX 5L for POWER, V5.2 for iSeries
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models and 9411-100.
#5560
#5560 - Mirror 35 GB Drawer Package

The #5560 package feature includes one #0595 rack mount I/O expansion unit, one #9844 IOP, twelve #4326 35.16 GB
15k rpm disk units and two high-function, large write cache disk controllers (#2757 or newer) for servers doing mirroring.
The I/O drawer requires five EIA of rack space and has a total of seven PCI-X IOP or IOA slots and 12 disk unit slots. Three
PCI-X slots and 12 disk unit slots are filled with the package contents, but four PCI-X slots can be used by other PCI-X IOPs
or IOAs.
On IBM ordering, shipping, and inventory documentation, the component features specifically for the #0595 I/O drawer, the
disk units, and the disk controllers are not shown. The chargeable #5560 feature number is shown and carries the price
and warranty for this package.
Use the specific component features such as #0595 for all planning and implementation documentation. See the #0595
description for HSL cable, linecord and SPCN cable selections.
Requires the #0040 Mirrored System Disk Level.
#5561
#5561 - Mirror 70 GB Drawer Package

PCI-X slots and 12 disk unit slots are filled with the package contents, but four PCI-X slots can be used by other PCI-X
IOPs/IOAs.
On IBM ordering, shipping, and inventory documentation, the component features specifically for the #0595 I/O drawer, the
disk units, and the disk controllers are not shown. The chargeable #5561 feature number is shown and carries the price
and warranty for this package.
description for HSL cable, linecord, and SPCN cable selections.
The #0040 Mirrored System Disk Level is required.
#5562
#5562 - Mirror 35 GB Tower Package

The #5562 package feature includes one #5095 tower, one #9844 IOP, twelve #4326 35.16 GB 15k rpm disk units and two
high-function, large write cache disk controllers (#2757 or newer) for servers doing mirroring. The #5095 has a total of
seven PCI-X IOP or IOA slots and 12 disk unit slots. Three PCI-X slots and 12 disk unit slots are filled with the package
contents, but four PCI-X slots can be used by other PCI-X IOPs/IOAs.
On IBM ordering, shipping, and inventory documentation, the component features specifically for the #5095 tower, the disk
units, and the disk controllers is not shown. The chargeable feature #5562 is shown and carries the price and warranty for
this package.
167
#5563
#5563 - Mirror 70 GB Tower Package

PCI-X slots and 12 disk unit slots are filled with the package contents, but four PCI-X slots can be used by other PCI-X
IOPs/IOAs.
On IBM ordering, shipping, and inventory documentation, component features specified for the #0595 I/O drawer, disk
units, and disk controllers are not shown. The chargeable #5563 feature number is shown and carries the price and
warranty for this package.
Use specific component features, such as #0595, for all planning and implementation documentation. See the #5095
#5567
#5567 Tower Disk Pkg - 8 70GB Disk with Controller

This package feature provides an expansion tower (#9372 equivalent) and eight 15k rpm 70GB disk units (#9370
equivalent), a disk controller (#9397), and an HSL-2 port (#9371) and one power supply. Features #9372, #9370 (8), #9397,
and #9371 are all no-charge features and available only on the initial order of the following Model 525 Solution Editions:
#6913 Model 525 Oracle JD Edwards Solution Edition
#6914 Model 525 SAP Solution Edition
The #9372 expansion tower is a #5095 with seven PCI-X slots and twelve SCSI disk slots.
The #9337 is a #5583 high performance disk controller with large auxiliary write cache.
The #9371 is #2888 HSL-2 bus adapter for the processor enclosure.
Each of the eight 70GB #9370 disk units is a #4327 disk unit.
The 93nn features are shown on orders but on the system the CCIN for the actual hardware listed above is shown.
A PCI slot for the disk controller, and 12 disk unit slots are required.
For disk packages #5567 and #5568, HSL/SPCN cables must be ordered separately.
i5/OS V5R3 with LIC V5R3M5 or later is required.
A maximum of two disk packages is allowed per Model 525 Solution Edition order. The ones you select do not need to be
the same. A maximum of one HSL-2 adapter is included when two disk packages are ordered.
#5568
#5568 Rack Disk Pkg - 8 70GB Disk with Controller

This package feature provides an expansion drawer (#9369 equivalent) and eight 15k rpm 70GB disk units (#9370
equivalent), a disk controller (#9397), and an HSL-2 port (#9371) and one power supply. Features #9370 (8), #9369, #9397,
and #9371 are all no-charge features and available only on the initial order of the following Model 525 Solution Editions:
#6913 Model 525 Oracle JD Edwards Solution Edition
The #9369 expansion drawer is a #0595 with seven PCI-X slots and twelve SCSI disk slots.
The #9337 is a #5583 high performance disk controller with large auxiliary write cache,
The #9371 is #2888 HSL-2 bus adapter for the processor enclosure.
Each of the eight 70GB #9370 disk units is a #4327 disk unit.
The 93nn features are shown on orders but on the system the CCIN for the actual hardware listed above is shown.
A PCI slot for disk controller, and 12 disk unit slots are required. Five EIA units of rack (19-inch) space are required.
For disk packages #5567 and #5568, HSL/SPCN cables must be ordered separately. If needed, you can order a rack and
power distribution unit (PDU) separately.
168
#5569
#5569 EXP24 Disk Pkg - 8 70GB Disk with Controller

This package feature provides an EXP24 disk drawer (#9378) with two repeaters (#9374 and #9375), a high performance
large cache disk unit controller (see below), and eight 15k rpm 70GB disk units (#9370 equivalent). One disk unit controller
must be specified.
Features #9370 (8), #9378, #9376/#9377/#9379 disk controller, #9374 and #9375 disk slot enablers are all no-charge
features and available only on the initial order of the following Model 525 Solution Editions:
#6913 Model 525 Oracle Solution Edition
The controller you need depends on the physical enclosure that will house the controller. The disk unit controller features
required are listed below, depending on the enclosure they are place in:
The 525 processor enclosure (system unit) requires disk unit controller #9379. The #9379 is a #5800 high
performance disk controller with large auxiliary write cache.
PCI expansion drawers #5790 and #5796 require disk unit controller #9377. The #9377 is a #5782 high performance
disk controller with large auxiliary write cache.
PCI-X expansion towers/units: #5094, #5294, #5096, #5296, #0588, #5088, #0595, #5095 require disk unit controller
#9376. The #9376 is a #5778 high performance disk controller with large auxiliary write cache.
The #9378 expansion drawer is a #5786 EXP24 disk drawer.
The #9374 6 disk slot enabler is a #5741 6 slot repeater for the EXP24.
The #9375 6/12 disk slot enabler is a #5742 6 /12 slot repeater for the EXP24.
The 93nn features are shown on orders, but on the system, the CCIN for the actual hardware listed above is shown.
For disk package #5569, SCSI cables must be ordered separately. If needed, you can order a rack and power distribution
unit (PDU) separately. Note that adequate PCI slots for all PCI cards are required for a valid configuration: two PCI-X slots
for disk controller, two SCSI cables (for connecting to #9374 and #9375), and four EIA units of rack (19-in) space.
#5570

This package provides one #5727 Integrated Cache - 40 MB and two #4327 15k rpm 70.56 GB Disk Units.
The #5727 provides 40 MB write cache for the embedded disk controller in the Models 515, 520 and 525 and also enables
RAID-5 capability. The 5727 is installed in its own specific internal slot of the system unit and does not require a PCI slot.
On IBM ordering, shipping, and inventory documentation, the component features specifically for the #5727 and #4327 disk
units will not be shown. The chargeable #5570 feature number will be shown and carry the price and warranty for this
package.
#5571

This package provides one #5727 Integrated Cache - 40 MB and six #4327 15k rpm 70.56 GB Disk Units.
The #5727 provides 40MB write cache for the embedded disk controller in the 515, 520, 525 and also enables RAID-5
capability. The 5727 is installed in its own specific internal slot of the system unit and does not require a PCI slot.
On IBM ordering, shipping, and inventory documentation, the component features specifically for the #5727 and #4327 disk
units will not be shown. The chargeable #5571 feature number will be shown and will carry the price and warranty for this
package.
The Model 515 requires #5592/#5593 as a prerequisite.
The #5571 is a Customer Install Feature
169
#5592

The #5592 feature provides a disk backplane, which enables the second set of four disk slots in a Model 515 and provides
a disk controller to run these four disk slots. The disk controller is plugged into either the C4 or the C6 PCI slot of the 515
system unit. The disk controller has 90 MB write cache and can provide RAID protection for the disk drives. Mirroring
protection is provided via i5/OS.
A minimum of three disk drives are required for RAID-5, providing protection against a single drive failure in an array. A
minimum of four disk drives are required for RAID-6, providing protection against up to two drives failing in an array.
The #5592 can be used to expand the number of disk slots of the primary i5/OS partition to eight disk slots or it can provide
four disk slots capacity to a second i5/OS partition.
The #5592 and #5593 are physically identical, but have different feature numbers to indicate to IBM configurator tools that
either i5/OS or AIX 5L or Linux will be driving the disk slots. The disk controller used is physically equivalent to the #5776
disk controller.
Supported in Model 515 only.
#5593

The #5593 feature provides a disk backplane, which enables the second set of four disk slots in a Model 515 and provides
a disk controller to run these four disk slots. The disk controller is plugged into either the C4 or the C6 PCI slot of the Model
515 system unit. The disk controller has 90MB write cache and can provide RAID protection for the disk drives. Mirroring
protection is provided via the operating system.
The #5593 can be used to provide four disk slots capacity to a AIX 5L or Linux partition.
The #5592 and #5593 are physically identical, but have different feature numbers to indicate to IBM configurator tools that
either i5/OS will be driving the disk slots or that AIX 5L or Linux will be driving the disk slots. The disk controller used is
physically equivalent to the #0648 disk controller.
Supported in Model 515 only.
#5636
#5636 IVE - 2x1Gb Ethernet

The #5636 is an Integrated Virtual Ethernet (IVE) adapter. This is also referred to as a Host Ethernet Adapter (HEA). It
provides two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports and two serial ports. The IVE adapter does not require a PCI slot. One IVE
adapter must be included with each 570 (POWER6) processor enclosure.
Requirements:
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4 and Licensed Internal Code V5R4M5 and later releases.
One Host Ethernet Adapter slot.
#5639

The #5639 is an Integrated Virtual Ethernet (IVE) adapter. This is also referred to as an HEA. It provides four 10/100/1000
Mbps Ethernet ports and one serial port. The IVE adapter does not require a PCI slot. One IVE adapter must be included
with each 570 (POWER6) processor enclosure.
Requirements:
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4 and Licensed Internal Code V5R4M5 and later releases.
One Host Ethernet Adapter slot.
#5786

The #5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Drawer provides disk slots for up to 24 disk units in a 19-inch, 4 EIA high rack
drawer. The #5786 provides redundant power, redundant cooling, and Ultra 320 SCSI connections for 24 Ultra 320 SCSI
disk units, which are organized in four independent groups of six disk units.
The #5786 can be packaged within an HSL or a 12X I/O enclosure.
The #5741 and/or #5742 EXP24 Disk Slot Enablers (SCSI repeaters) enable these groups of six disk unit slots. The
enabled disk slots are driven by SCSI disk controllers located outside the #5786 and connected by a SCSI cable. One to
four Disk Slot Enablers are required, depending on the number of disk unit groups populated with disk units.
One external port on a disk controller such as a #5736/#5737/#5739/#5775/#5776/#5778/#5781/#5782/#5799/#5800 is
required for each #5741 installed. Likewise, one external disk controller port is required for each #5742 installed and cabled
to run one group of six disk slots. Alternately, two #5742s can be cabled so that a single disk controller can run two groups
of six disk slots. Or, one #5741 plus one #5742 can also be cabled so that a single disk controller can run two groups of six
disk slots.
170
#5786
(contd.)

The #5786/#5787 are not connected via HSL cables and do not have SPCN connections.
The IBM Marketing Configurator defaults to two country specfic line cords.
The IBM Marketing Configurator defaults to a quantity of the following items that need to be verified:
#5741 Expansion 24 6 Disk Slot Enabler or #5742 Expansion 24 6/12 Disk Slot Enabler
#2124 1m SCSC Cable
#2125 3m SCSC Cable
#2126 5m SCSC Cable
#2127 10m SCSC Cable
#2138 0.55m SCSC Cable
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models; Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 as well as 9411-100.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 or later, AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer or later, Red Hat Enterprise
Linux AS 3 Update3 or later, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later.
#5787
#5787 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Tower

The #5787 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Tower provides disk slots for up to 24 disk units in a stand-alone disk tower.
The #5787 provides redundant power, redundant cooling, and Ultra 320 SCSI connections for 24 Ultra 320 SCSI disk units,
which are organized in four independent groups of six disk units.
The #5741 and/or #5742 EXP24 Disk Slot Enablers (SCSI repeaters) enable these groups of six disk unit slots. The
enabled disk slots are driven by SCSI disk controllers located outside the #5786 and connected by a SCSI cable. One to
four Disk Slot Enablers are required, depending on the number of disk unit groups populated with disk units.
One external port on a disk controller, such as a #5736, #5737, #5739, #5775, #5776, #5778, #5781, #5782, #5799, or
#5800, is required for each #5741 installed. Likewise, one external disk controller port is required for each #5742 installed
and cabled to run one group of six disk slots. Alternately, two #5742s can be cabled so that a single disk controller can run
two groups of six disk slots. Or, one #5741 plus one #5742 can also be cabled so that a single disk controller can run two
groups of six disk slots.
The #5786/#5787 are not connected via HSL cables and do not have SPCN connections.
The IBM Marketing Configurator defaults to two country specfic line cords.
The IBM Marketing Configurator defaults to a quantity of the following items that need to be verified:
#5741 Expansion 24 6 Disk Slot Enabler or
#5742 Expansion 24 6/12 Disk Slot Enabler
#2124 1m SCSC Cable
#2125 3m SCSC Cable
#2126 5m SCSC Cable
#2138 0.55m SCSC Cable
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models; Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890, as well as 9411-100.
Linux AS 3 Update3 or later, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later.
171
#5790
#5790 PCI Expansion Drawer

The #5790 mounts in a 19-inch rack using a ##7307 Dual I/O Unit Enclosure or a #7311 Dual I/O Unit Enclosure. Two #5790
drawers can be mounted side by side in a single #7307 or #7311 and are not required to be attached to the same system.
The #5790 is a four EIA unit I/O expansion drawer that can accommodate six full-length 64bit PCI-X-blind swap I/O adapters
and is attached to the system using a RIO/HSL bus. The #5790 comes standard with two redundant power supplies, and
dual power cords, thus providing for redundant concurrently maintainable power and cooling and the blind swap PCI
mechanism allows for PCI card servicing without removing the I/O expansion drawer. A PDU in the rack is optional.
The #5790 includes a #9531 Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter to provide the HSL-2 interface to the system. The IBM marketing
configurator adds #9531 Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter to the order.
Configurator will default to two country specfic line cords.
#1307 - 1.75m HSL-2 Cable (not supported in rack-mounted Model 520, 525, or 550 system unit)
#1308 - 2.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1481 - 1.2m HSL-2 Cable (not supported in rack-mounted Model 520, 525, or 550 system unit)
#1483 - 10m HSL-2 Cable
#6662 - 14-ft 240V/15A Power Cord
#6663 - 14-ft 240V/15A Power Cord
#6669 - 14-ft 240V/15A Power Cord
#6670 - 6-ft125V/15A Power Cord
#6680 - 9-ft 250V/10A Power Cord
#6681 14-ft 200-240V/10A Right Angle Power Cord
#6690 14-ft 200-240V/15A Power Cord
#6691 14-ft 200-240V/12A Power Cord
#6692 14-ft 200-240V/10A Power Cord
Select an appropriate number of the following SPCN cables for use with a #5790:
#0369 - 100m Optical SPCN Cable (not supported on Model 520 or 525)
#1468 - 250m Optical SPCN Cable (not supported on Model 520 or 525)
#6001 - 2m SPCN Cable (not supported in rack-mounted Model 520, 525, or 550 system unit)
Note: When viewed from the HMC, the HSL/RIO-G adapter slots can be generically identified only with the characters GX
The #5790 with a fibre channel adapter cabled to an external disk configuration, such as an IBM System Storage
DS8000 configuration, can be switched to another supporting System i model at the drawer level. This assumes
appropriate configuration as a switchable independent auxiliary storage pool (IASP).
172
#5796
#5796 PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer

The #5796 PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer is a 4 EIA unit I/O expansion drawer providing six full length, 266MHz PCI-X
DDR slots. These PCI-X DDR slots support only dual mode (smart) IOAs and do not support an IOP or an IOA that requires
an IOP. Blind swap cassettes are used to insert or remove the PCI-X cards.
The #5796 is attached to a system using a 12X loop. Either a 12X Short Run or 12X Long Run Attachment must be selected
on each #5796. Up to four #5796 can be attached on the same 12X loop using a mixture of Short Run and Long Run
Attachments.
The #5796 includes redundant hot-swap power and cooling with dual power cords. The blind swap PCI mechanism allows
for PCI card concurrent maintenance without removing the I/O expansion drawer. The #5796 mounts in a 19-inch rack using
a #7314 Dual 5796 I/O Unit Enclosure 19-inch Rack Mounting Hardware. Two #5796 drawers can be mounted side by side
in a single #7314 using a total of 4 EIA. The #5796 are not required to be attached to the same system.
The #5796 are not connected via HSL/HSL-2 cables.
The #5796 do not have disk slots.
Either #6446 12X Short Run 5796 Attach or #6457 12X Long Run 5796 Attach must be selected for connecting #5796 to
12X loop. There is a connecting rule for 12X cables and 12X adapters. For more information about this rule, see 4.13.1,
System i POWER6 model 570 I/O enhancements on page 311.
Up to 4 #5796 can be included in a 12X loop.
Select an appropriate number of the following 12X cables:
#1829 0.6 Meter 12X Cable
Select an appropriate number of the following SPCN cables:
#1463 2m SPCN Cable
#1464 6m SPCN Cable
#1827 Serial-UPS Conversion Cable
#6006 SPCN Power Cable 3m
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 or later, AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM
eServer or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3 or later, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER
or later.
Maximum Allowed: 32 (Initial Order Allowed: 32)
The #5796 is Customer Install Feature.
#5801

The #5801 1/4-way Processor Enclosure feature adds: one 570 (POWER6) expansion drawer including redundant power
and cooling, 6 Serially Attached SCSI (SAS) disk slots, 4 PCIe slots, 2 PCI-X DDR slots, two 0/2-way processors (#7380),
two GX slots for HSL or 12X loops adapters, IVE slot, and a DVD enclosure slot.
The #5801 is ordered as an MES after the initial 9406-MMA installation and does not impact the existing server or edition
features. With the #5801 order, a minimum of one processor activation (#5403), plus an Integrated Virtual Ethernet (IVE)
adapter, plus two memory features are required. Appropriate processor fabric cables and the appropriate service interface
cable are also required.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5.
173
#6068

The #6068 provides an attractive black full height rack door on the #0551 iSeries 1.8m Rack. The door is steel, with a
perforated flat front surface. The perforation pattern extends from the bottom to the top of the door to enhance ventilation
and provide some visibility into the rack.
Optional feature is a #6580 Optional Rack Security Kit.
Requires an #0551 1.8m Rack.
Initial order or MES.
840, 870, 890 models
#6069

The #6069 provides an black full height rack door on the #0553 iSeries 2.0m Rack. The door is steel with a perforated flat
front surface.
Optional feature is a #6580 Optional Rack Security Kit.
Requires an #0553 2.0m Rack.
Initial order or MES
The #6069 is also supported on Model 570 (POWER6).
#6122
#6122 UPIC Cable Primary Rack EIA 05

The #6122 feature provides redundant power cabling for an I/O drawer with the bottom of the drawer positioned at the 5U
location of the 24-inch primary system rack.
#6186
#6186 Bulk Power Regulator

The #6186 Bulk Power Regulator provides increments of power for use by the systems components such as fans, system
unit components, and I/O drawers.
#6246

The #6246 provides a trim kit for the front of a #0551 1.8m Rack.
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100.
#6247

The #6247 provides a trim kit for the front of a #0553 2.0m Rack.
#6248
#6248 1.8m Rack Acoustic Doors

The #6248 provides front and rear doors for use with the #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack. This door kit provides additional
acoustic dampening for use where a quieter environment is desired. The #6248 results in a larger footprint and requires
additional space.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
#6249
#6249 2.0m Rack Acoustic Doors

The #6249 provides front and rear doors for use with the #0553 iSeries 2.0m Rack. This door kit provides additional
additional space.
174
#6251
#6251 Slimline Doors - Primary Rack

The #6251 provides front and rear doors for use with the Model 595 24-inch primary rack. This slimline door kit provides a
minimized footprint for use where conservation of space is desired.
#6252
#6252 Acoustic Doors - Primary Rack

The #6252 provides front and rear doors for use with the Model 595 24-inch primary rack. This door kit provides additional
additional space.
#6417

The #6417 HSL-2/RIO-G Bus Adapter allows existing optical HSL/RIO connected towers the option of switching to copper
HSL-2/RIO-G connectivity. The #6417 provides copper HSL-2/RIO-G connectivity for the #5094, #5095/#0595, #5295,
#8094 PCI-X Expansion Towers and units.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models
Note: When viewed from the HMC, the HSL-2/RIO-G adapter slots can be generically identified only with the characters
GX Adapter Card, rather than a feature number.
#6446
#6446 12X Short Run 5796 Attach

The #6446 adapter provides the interface for attachment of the #5796 I/ O Drawer to a 12X Channel loop.The adapter
includes two 12X Channel connectors and is inserted into the #5796. This adapter does not include the repeater function
and is intended to support configurations where the host system and the #5796 I/O drawers in the loop are located in the
same rack.
The 12X cables attached to this adapter have the following restrictions. Cables between this adapter and a host system
cannot exceed 3.0 meters in length. Cables between two I/O drawers cannot exceed 1.5 meters if both I/O drawers include
this Short Run adapter feature #6446. Cables between two I/O drawers cannot exceed 3.0 meters if either of the I/O
drawers includes this Short Run adapter feature #6446. The required 12X cables are ordered under a separate feature
number. For longer cables, see the long run adapter #6457.
There is a connecting rule for 12X cables and 12X adapters. For more information about this rule, see 4.13.1, System i
POWER6 model 570 I/O enhancements on page 311.
The #6446 can be attached only #5796 I/O drawer.
#6457
#6457 12X Long Run 5796 Attach

The #6457 adapter provides the interface for attachment of the #5796 I/ O drawer to a 12X channel loop. The adapter
includes two 12X channel connectors and is inserted in the #5796. This adapter includes the repeater function and can
support longer cable loops allowing drawers to be located in adjacent racks. The 12X cables up to 8 meters in length can
be attached to this adapter. The required 12X cables are ordered under a separate feature number.
There is a connecting rule for 12X cables and 12X adapters. For more information about this rule, see 4.13.1, System i
POWER6 model 570 I/O enhancements on page 311.
The #6457 can be attached only #5796 I/O drawer.
#6460
#6460 - 14-ft 125V/15A Power Cord

The #6460 is a 14-foot 125V/15A power cord that distributes power from a wall outlet to a system unit. The #6460 has a
type 4 plug and an IEC320 C13 connector.
Supported on all (including + models) 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595 models; Models 800, 810, 825, 870,
and 890, as well as 9411-100.
175
#6574
#6574 - 4-Disk Slot Expansion Base Controller

The #6574 - 4-Disk Slot Expansion Base Controller is a feature disk cage that can contain up to four disks (10k and 15k
rpm only). The #6574 enables the second set of four disk unit slots in the system unit to be used. The disks in the #6574
are driven by the integrated base SCSI disk controller with or without a #5709 or #5727 write cache. Disk unit hot-plugging
is allowed.
Supported on Model 520, 520+, and 525.
#6580

The #6580 Optional Rack Security Kit provides hardware that can be added to a rack to prevent unauthorized access. It
includes keyed front and rear locks for the standard door latches. It also includes two sliding bars that mount inside the left
and right rack side panels. The sliding bars are accessible when the rack rear door is open. They can be moved to a position
that disables the external latches on the rack side panels, and prevents removal of the side panels.
Requires a #0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack or #0553 2.0m Rack.
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100.
#6584
#6584 4 Disk Slot Exp - PCI-X Controller

The #6584 - 4-Disk Slot Expansion is a disk backplane feature for the system unit, which enables the second four disk slots
for use by a separate disk controller plugged into a system unit PCI slot. Disk units plugged into the #6584 are controlled
by either a #5703 PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller or #5715 PCI-X /DASD Controller.
A #6584 can be used for obtaining disk mirroring protection with other drives in the system or for enabling these drives in
another system partition.
The #6584 is not usable by either the embedded system unit disk controller or by a #5709 RAID Enabler Card.
Supported on Models 520 (9406 only), 525.
#6585
#6585 - DASD Locking Kit

The #6585 provides a locking mechanism that secures up to four disk units in the Model 520. Two #6585 kits are required
to secure all eight available disk units in the Model 520. When the #6585 is installed and secured with a user-provided
padlock, the disk units cannot be removed easily.
Supported only on Model 515, 520, 520+ and 525.
#6586
#6586 Modem Tray for 19-Inch Rack

The #6586 Modem Tray for 19-Inch Rack provides hardware for installing one or two modems in a 19-inch rack. The modem
tray occupies 1U of rack space when it is mounted in the front of the rack. It provides a secure location in the rack for
external modems such as the ones attached to the Hardware Management Console. It is not a shelf.
Required: 19-inch rack with 1U rack space available
Supported in #0551, #0553, #0554, #0555 Racks, and on all Models (including + models) 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570
(POWER6), and 595, as well as 9411-100
#6587
#6587 Model 520 Rear Cover

The #6587 is a decorative rear cover that has sound deadening capability. The #6587 cover is for Model 520 desk-side
servers that do not have external I/O attached to an HSL loop. The cover cannot be used if HSL cables are attached to the
Model 520 server.
Supported on Model 515, 520, 520+ and 525 configurations with #7885 520 Deskside specify code.
#6592
#6592 - 4 - Disk Slot Expansion - Base Controller

The #6592 is a disk backplane feature that enables the second set of four disk unit slots in the system to be used.
Disk units plugged into the #6592 are controlled by the integrated base controller with or without a #5709 or #5727 write
cache.
Supported on Models 550, 550+.
176
#6593
#6593 - 4 - Disk Slot Expansion. - PCI -X Controller

The #6593 - 4-Disk Slot Expansion PCI-X Controller is a disk backplane feature for the Model 550 system unit, which
enables the second four disk slots for use by a separate disk controller plugged into a system unit PCI slot. Disk units
plugged into the #6593 are controlled by another disk controller such as a #5703, #5715, #5736, #5737, #5775, #5776,
#0647, or #0648. The #6593 is not usable by the integrated system unit disk controller with or without its #5709/#5727 write
cache.
another system partition. Installation of a #6593 can enable a second RAID enabled partition with the system unit itself.
Supported on Models 550, 550+.
The #0647/#0648 was withdrawn from marketing on POWER6 models in October 2007.
#6594
#6594 - 4-Disk Slot Expansion PCI-X Controller

The #6594- 4-Disk Slot Expansion PCI-X Controller is a disk backplane feature for a system unit, which enables the second
four disk slots for use by a separate disk controller plugged into a system unit PCI slot. Installation of a #6594 allows a
#5703 to be plugged in card slot 4 of the 520 system unit, enabling a second RAID enabled partition within the system unit
itself. Disk units plugged into the #6594 are controlled by another disk controller such as a #5715, #5736, #5737, #5775,
#5776, #0647, or #0648. The #6594 is not usable by the embedded system unit disk controller with or without its #5709 or
#5727 write cache.
another system partition. Installation of a #6594 can also enable a second RAID enabled partition within the system unit
itself.
The #5703 disk controller can control the #6594 disk units with the 1.5 and 1.65 GHz Model 520.
Supported on Models 520, 520+ and 525.
#6598
#6598 Disk Slot Filler

The #6598 Disk Slot Filler provides disk slot covers to install in disk slots that are emptied after the system unit is shipped
from IBM. Four disk slot filler covers are shipped with each #6598.
All disk bays should be filled with either disk drives or slot fillers when the system unit ships from IBM. If a disk is removed,
IBM recommends DASD bay slots are refilled with another disk drive or a disk slot filler. A populated DASD bay maintains
EMI compliance standards and helps ensure optimal thermal performance.
#6863
#6863 System i5 Slim-Line Doors

The #6863 - System i5 Slim-Line Doors provides front and rear doors for use with the Model 595 24-inch primary rack. This
slimline door kit provides a minimized footprint for use where conservation of space is desired. The #6863 is functionally
equivalent to #6251, but has the System i5 name and accent color.
#6864
#6864 System i5 Acoustic Doors

The #6864 - System i5 Acoustic Doors provides front and rear doors for use with the Model 595 24-inch primary rack. This
door kit provides additional acoustic dampening for use where a quieter environment is desired. The #6864 results in a
larger footprint and requires additional floor space. The #6864 is functionally equivalent to a #6252, but has the System i5
name and accent color.
#7002
#7002 HSL Enabler

The #7002 HSL Enabler is a required feature on Model 800 processors when attaching an expansion tower or unit, or the
external Integrated xSeries Servers.
177
#7116
#7116 System Unit Expansion

The #7116 System Unit Expansion allows up to an additional 12 disk units to be added to the Models 800 and 810. The
#7116 has no PCI card slots and no removable media slots. The #7116 comes standard with support for six disk units, and
requires a #7136 DASD Expansion Unit - 6 slot when installing more than six disk units. The #7116 disk units are driven
by disk unit controllers located in the system unit.
One of the following line cords must be ordered with the #7116 System Unit Expansion:
#1411 - 200V 14-ft Line Cord
#1412 - 125V 6-ft Line Cord (U.S. default)
#1422 - 3m IEC 320 C13/C14 PDU Cord
#1440 - 4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord Denmark
#1442 - 4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord Swiss
The #7116 System Unit Expansion does not attach to the HSL interface.
Requires a#7137 DASD Concurrent Maintenance Cage for the #2463 Model 800 processor.
#7124
#7124 DASD Expansion Unit - 5 slot

The #7124 DASD Expansion Unit - 5 slot is a 5-pack DASD cage for the Model 825 system unit. The #7124 Includes the
DASD cage, DASD backplane and associated SCSI cables.
Maximum: Two
#7136

The #7136 DASD Expansion Unit - 6 slot is a concurrent maintenance DASD expansion feature that is ordered to support
the second set of six disk units in a #7116 System Unit Expansion on the Models 800 and 810.
#7137
#7137 DASD Concurrent Maintenance Cage

The #7137 DASD Concurrent Maintenance Cage is a six unit DASD expansion feature for the #2463 Model 800 processor.
It replaces the base six unit DASD cage, and enables disk unit concurrent maintenance. The #7137 provides a higher speed
interface for disk devices, more than double the bandwidth of the base DASD cage. The #7137 is recommended for 15k
rpm disk drives.
The #7137 is required if a #2757 PCI-X Ultra RAID Disk Controller or an #2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller is used
or a #7116 System Unit Expansion is installed.
When upgrading a #2463 Model 800 processor, process an RPO to remove the #7137 on the installed system.
The #2464 Model 800 includes a concurrent maintenance disk unit cage as part of the base system offering.
#7180
#7180 Acoustic Front Door

The #7180 provides a front door that has acoustic dampening capabilities for the Model 520 desk-side system. The #7180
is functionally equivalent to #7753 Acoustic Front Door, but has the System i5 name and accent color.
Supported on desk-side Models 520+ and 525.
178
#7181
#7181 Easy-Access Front Cover

The #7181 provides a front cover that has an easy access bezel for the desk-side Model 520. The #7180 is functionally
equivalent to #7750 Easy-Access Front Cover, but has the System i5 name.
Supported on desk-side Models 515, 520+, and 525.
#7182
#7182 515, 520, 525 Rack Mount

The #7182 indicates this is a rack-mounted system unit. The system ships with IBM mounting rails for installation in an IBM
standard 19-inch rack. Rails are fixed at a 28 inch depth. A front bezel is included. The #7182 is functionally equivalent to
a #7884 520 Rack Mount, but the bezel has the System i5 name. Add #7198 Adjustable Depth Rack Rails to the #7182 if
adjustable length rails are needed.
Supported on rack mounted Models 515, 520+, and 525.
#7183

The #7183 indicates this is a rack-mounted system unit. The system ships with IBM mounting rails for installation in an IBM
standard 19-inch rack. Rails are adjustable up to a 29.25 inch depth. A front bezel is included. The #7183 is functionally
equivalent to a #7886 550 Rack Mount, but the bezel has the System i5 name.
Supported on rack mounted 550+ models.
#7194
#7194 Easy-Access Front Cover

The #7194 provides a front cover for the desk-side Model 550 that has an easy access bezel. The #7194 is functionally
equivalent to a #7751 Easy-Access Front Cover, but has the System i5 name.
Supported on desk-side 550+ models.
#7197
#7197 570 Front Bezel

The #7197 provides a front bezel for the Model 570. The #7197 is functionally equivalent to the bezel previously provided
without a feature code on the Model 570, but has the System i5 name.
#7198
#7198 Adjustable Depth Rack Rails

The #7198 provides rails that are adjustable to a depth of 29.5 inches for mounting a Model 520 system unit in a non-IBM
rack. The fixed depth rail provided in the required #7884 520 Rack Mount specify code are replaced by the adjustable rails.
The adjustable rails are installed by the client. The combination of #7884 and #7198 is equivalent to a #7883 specify feature.
#7199
#7199 Acoustic Front Door

The #7199 provides a front door that has acoustic dampening capabilities for the desk-side Model 550 system. The #7199
is functionally equivalent to a #7754 Acoustic Front Door, but has the System i5 name and accent color.
Supported on desk Model 550+.
#7307
#7307 Dual I/O Unit Enclosure

The #7307 Dual I/O Unit Enclosure provides the mounting hardware, with adjustable rails, required to install a #5790 I/O
drawer in a #0551, #0553, #0554, or #0555 rack. The enclosure can accommodate two #5790 drawers, side by side, but it
can also be used with only one #5790 drawer installed.
The #7307 and #7311 are functionally equivalent except the #7307 can be used in the #0554 and #0555 racks and has
rails adjustable to 29.25 inches depth.
Four EIA units of rack space are required in a #0551, #0553, #0554 or #0555 rack.
179
#7311

The #7311 Dual I/O Unit Enclosure provides the mounting hardware required to install a #5790 PCI Expansion Drawer in
a #0551, #0553, #0554, #0555 iSeries Rack. The enclosure can accommodate two #5790 drawers, side by side, but it can
also be used with only one #5790 unit installed.
Four EIA units of rack space are required in a #0551 or #0553 rack.
#7314
#7314 Dual 5796 I/O Unit Enclosure 19-inch Rack Mounting Hardware
The #7314 provides the mounting hardware required to install a #5796 PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer in a #0551, #0553,
#0554 or #0555 19-inch rack. The enclosure can accommodate two #5796 drawers, side by side, but it can also be used
with only one #5796 drawer installed.
4 EIA units of rack space are required in a #0551, #0553, #0554 or #0555 rack.
The #7314 has rails adjustable to 29.25 inches depth.
#7750
#7750 - Easy access Front Cover

The #7750 provides an easy access front cover for the desk-side Model 520.
Supported on desk-side Model 520.
#7751
#7751 - Easy Access Front Cover

The #7751 provides an easy access front cover for the desk-side Model 550.
#7753
#7753 - Acoustic Front Door

The #7753 provides an acoustic front door fro the desk-side Model 520.
#7754
#7754 - Acoustic Front Door

The #7754 provides an acoustic front door fro the desk-side Model 550.
#7768
#7768 CPU Power Regulator

The #7768 provides a redundant processor power regulator for the Model 570 single enclosure system. One #7768 can be
ordered to provide hot-plug redundant power regulation.
Supported single enclosure Model 570+ system only.
#7780
#7780 2.0m Rack Side Attach Kit

The #7780 allows a row of racks without side panels to be bolted together in a continuous suite, using the provided
side-to-side rack connecting hardware. When multiple racks are joined in this way, cables can be easily run between racks
without exiting the continuous rack enclosure. A small gap is maintained between the two adjacent racks that is filled by
three matching steel trim pieces that snap into place on the front, top, and rear, between each rack. Side panels are needed
only for the two end racks of the suite.
Supported on #0553 System i 42U 2.0m Rack.
#7798
180
#7798 Model 550 Non-IBM Rack Mount

The #7798 provides the necessary hardware to mount a Model 550 system unit in an non-IBM rack. The #7798 fits deeper
racks than the standard IBM 28-inch rack depth. Model 550 system orders containing the #7798 are integrated into a
non-IBM rack at the customer location.
#7818
#7818 HSL-2/RIO-G 2-Ports Copper

The #7818 is a 2 port (copper) HSL-2/RIO-G bus adapter that provides connections for one HSL-2/RIO-G loop.
The #7818 is installed into an empty slot on one processor book.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3, AIX 5L for POWER V5.2, AIX 5L for POWER V5.2
#7819
#7819 HSL/RIO 2-Ports Optical

The #7819 is a 2 port optical HSL/RIO bus adapter that provides connections for one optical HSL/RIO loop. It is installed
into an empty slot on one processor book.
The #7819 was withdrawn from marketing as of 30 August 2005.
#7837
#7837 Bulk Power Distribution

The #7837 is a power distribution assembly that provides connector locations for cable attachment of I/O drawers and
system unit DC power converters on a Model 595. It provides 10 power connectors.
#7840
#7840 Side-by-Side for 1.8m Racks

The #7840 allows a row of racks without side panels to be bolted together in a continuous suite, using the provided
side-to-side rack connecting hardware. When multiple racks are joined in this way, cables can be easily run between racks
without having to exit the continuous rack enclosure. A small gap is maintained between the two adjacent racks that is filled
by three matching steel trim pieces that snap into place on the front, top, and rear, between each rack. The trim pieces
cover the space between each rack for an enhanced appearance and for additional protection of the equipment inside the
racks. Side panels are needed only for the two end racks of the suite.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
#7841
#7841 Rugged Rack Kit

The #7841 Rugged Rack Kit provides additional hardware that reinforces the rack and anchors it to the floor. The #7841 kit
is designed to provide enhanced rigidity and stability for racks primarily installed in locations where earthquakes are a
concern. The feature includes a large steel brace or truss that bolts into the rear of the rack. It is hinged on the left side so
it can swing out of the way for easy access to the rack drawers when necessary. The #7841 also includes hardware for
bolting the rack to a concrete floor or a similar surface, and bolt-in steel filler panels for any unoccupied spaces in the rack.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
#7861
#7861 Blind Swap Cassette (Short)

The #7861 provides a short, type 3, blind swap cassette for use in the Model 570 system unit.
Supported on Models 570, and 9411-100.
#7862
#7862 Blind Swap Cassette (Long)

The #7862 provides a standard length, type 3, blind swap cassette for use in the Model 570 system unit and #5790.
#7863
#7863 Blind Swap Cassette (Double)

The #7863 provides a double wide standard length, type 3, blind swap cassette for the Integrated xseries Server used in
the Model 570 system unit or #5790.
#7875
#7875 CPU Power Regulator

The #7875 is a processor power regulator for the Model 570. One #7875 is required per processor card. A single redundant
The #7875 can be ordered to provide redundant power regulation for the Model 570.
181
#7881
#7881 Service Processor

The #7881 is the Model 570 Service Processor. The #7881 contains the system Rack Indicator Port, two SPCN (RS485)
ports for control of attached I/O subsystems, and two Service Processor Ethernet /HMC ports.
The #7881 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 April 2005.
#7882
#7882 SCSI to IDE Converter Card

The #7882 is a SCSI to integrated development environment (IDE) converter card used on the Model 570 to convert the
removable media bays from IDE format to SCSI. Although #7882 converts one IDE media bay to SCSI, it geographically
requires both slots.
#7883
#7883 Model 520 Non-IBM Rack Mount

The #7883 provides the necessary hardware to mount a Model 520 system unit in an non-IBM rack. The #7883 fits deeper
racks than the standard IBM 28-inch rack depth. Model 520 system orders that contain the #7883 are integrated into a
non-IBM rack at the customer location.
#7884

The #7884 indicates that this order is for a rack-mount Model 520 system. The system ships with fixed length IBM mounting
rails for installation in an IBM rack.
Conversion from #7884 520 Rack Mount to #7885 Deskside remains available.
#7885
#7885 515, 520, 525 Deskside

The #7885 indicates that this order is for a desk-side Model 515, 520, or 525 system.
Conversion from #7885 Deskside with a 520 to #7182 Rack Mount is available.
#7886

The #7886 indicates that this order is for a rack-mount Model 550 system. The system ships with fixed length IBM mounting
rails for installation in an IBM rack.
#7887
#7887 550 Deskside

The #7887 indicates that this order is for a desk-side Model 550 system.
#7889
Redundant Power Supply

The #7889 is an optional 1475W power supply, which provides redundant power for the Model 550 system unit. A second
line cord is required.
#7937
#7937 - 595 Bolt-Down (Lo Raised Fl)

The #7937 provides Rack ruggedizing and bolt-down hardware for securing a 24-inch rack to a concrete floor beneath a
9.25-inch to a 11.75-inch (235 mm to 298 mm) raised floor. Installation of this feature helps to secure and protect the rack
and its contents from damage when exposed to vibrations and shocks, such as those in a seismic event
#7938
#7938 - 595 Bolt-Down (Hi Raised Fl)

The #7938 provides Rack ruggedizing and bolt-down hardware for securing a 24-inch rack to a concrete floor beneath a
11.75-inch to 16.0-inch (298 mm to 405 mm) raised floor. Installation of this feature helps to secure and protect the rack
and its contents from damage when exposed to vibrations and shocks, such as those in a seismic event.
#7939
#7939 - 595 Bolt-Down (Non-Raised Fl)

The #7939 provides Rack ruggedizing and bolt-down hardware for securing a 24-inch rack to a concrete floor. Installation
of this feature helps to secure and protect the rack and its contents from damage when exposed to vibrations and shocks,
such as those in a seismic event.
182
#7940
#7941
#7942
#7992
#7940, #7941, #7942, #7992 - Advanced Power Virtualization

The #7940, #7941, #7942, and #7992 provide both Virtual I/O Server and Partition Load Manager capability. The Virtual
I/O Server is a special-purpose partition that provides virtual I/O resources to AIX 5L and Linux client partitions. The Virtual
I/O Server owns the resources that are shared with clients. A physical adapter assigned to a partition can be shared by one
or more other partitions, enabling administrators to minimize the number of physical adapters they require for individual
clients. The Virtual I/O Server helps reduce costs by eliminating the need for dedicated network adapters, disk adapters,
and disk drives.
The Partition Load Manager provides automated processor and memory distribution between dynamic LPARs and
Micro-Partition-capable LPARs running the AIX 5L operating system. The Partition Load Manager application is based on
a client/server model for the sharing of system information, such as processor or memory events, across concurrent
present LPARs.
Each feature ordered provides one processor authorization. One processor authorization is required for each processor's
worth of workload used across all partitions utilizing Advanced POWER Virtualization.
Supported on #7940 Model 520 and 525, #7941 Model 550, #7942 Model 570, 570 (POWER6), #7992 Model 595.
The #7940, #7941, #7942, #7992 are Customer Install Features.
There are several pSeries-based Redbooks publications on APV.
#7966
#7966 Advanced Power Virtualization

The #7966 provides partitioning, Micro-Partitioning and Virtual I/O Server capability on the Model 515.
Partitioning provides the ability to have more than one partition on the system. Micro-partitioning provides processor
partition granularity to tenths of a processor. The Virtual I/O Server is a special-purpose partition that provides virtual I/O
resources to AIX 5L and Linux client partitions. The Virtual I/O Server partition owns the resources that are shared with
clients.
On the Model 515, Advanced Power Virtualization must be purchased for either none of the processors or all of the
processors of the system. Therefore, if a 1-way #8327: Qty = 0 or 1. If a 2-way #8330: Qty = 0 or 2.
There are several pSeries-based Redbooks publications on APV.
#7997
#7997 - Service Processor

The #7997 provides optional redundant service processor function for the Model 570. One service processor is included in
each Model 570. Initial iSeries Model 570 shipments did not use a feature code to designate the presence of the first service
processor. Later Model 570 shipments use feature #8420 to designate the first service processor.
The #7997 contains the system Rack Indicator Port, two SPCN (RS485) ports for control of attached I/O subsystems, and
two Service Processor Ethernet or HMC ports.
Because a second Model 570 processor enclosure is required for the #7997, it cannot be installed in 1/2-way and 2/4-way
servers.
#8093
#8093 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack

The #8093 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack is an optional base I/O rack shipped on the Model 890 instead of a #9094 Base PCI
I/O Enclosure. The #8093 supports up to 90 disk units with a #5101/#5111 installed in the top unit and a #5107/#5117
installed in the lower unit, up to 28 PCI IOA slots, and up to four removable media units. A #9691/#9739 HSL bus adapter
is required for the upper unit. The #8093 has two battery back up units and redundant or hot swap power supplies.
The PCI IOAs are supported (driven) by two #9943 Base PCI IOPs and #2843/#2844/#2847 PCI IOPs, or the #2792/#2799
PCI Integrated xSeries Server. An #8093 is a #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure with a #5074 (#0574 specify code) tower
packaged in a rack.
The #8093 is capable of controlling Ultra2 SCSI disk units. It also supports up to three additional removable media devices
(internal tape or CD-ROM or DVD-ROM/RAM). The following removable media devices are supported by a PCI/PCI-X Disk
Controller. If the top enclosure is to be attached to a different system than ordered, process an RPO to remove the #0574
specify code from the initially ordered machine and add it to the target machine.
The #8093 can be converted to a #5097.
Select three or four of the following HSL cables depending on the requirements of optical and copper HSL:
#1482 - 3.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1483 - 10m Optical HSL-2 Cable
#1485 - 15m HSL-2 Cable
And select two (any combination) of the following HSL to HSL-2 cables:
183
#8093
(contd.)

Specify two line cords for the #8093 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack. Some countries or regions offer fewer choices of line cords
and some countries or regions are shipped a default line cord type.
Supported for conversion only on the Model 570 and 595; cannot be ordered.
#8094

The #8094 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack is a racking option for the Model 890. It supports up to 90 disk units, has 28 PCI-X IOP
or IOA slots, and has four removable media bays. The #8094 consists of a 1.8 m rack with two enclosures. The bottom
enclosure is essentially a #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure with side covers and casters removed and with the #5107 30 Disk
Expansion included as base (no feature code required). The bottom unit includes a #9587. The top enclosure is essentially
a #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower with side covers and casters removed, and with the #5108 30-Disk Expansion Feature
included as base (no feature code required). The top unit includes a #9886 or #9887, #9876 or #9877 or #9715.
Included with the bottom enclosure are one JTAG cable and one V/S Communications (VPD and SPCN) cable to attach
the bottom enclosure to the Model 890 system unit. Also included are a #9887 Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter and #9844 Base
PCI IOP. A #2757 PCI-X Ultra RAID Disk Controller or #4748/#4778 PCI RAID Disk Unit Controller is required with this unit.
Included with the top enclosure is a #9887 Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter or a #9886 Base Optical Bus Adapter to provide the
HSL interface to the system (specify one, one feature code required), #0694 - #5094 Equivalent (feature code required),
and #9844 Base PCI IOP (feature code required).
Each enclosure supports 45 disk unit positions for a total of 90 disk units. The 45 disk unit positions are in groups of 15.
Each group of 15 disk units is further divided into three groups of five disk units. Each group of five disk units is supported
on a separate Ultra4 SCSI (LVD-SCSI) bus from a PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller. See the PCI Expansion Tower layout and disk
unit plugging sequence diagrams in 7.1, System i towers, racks, and expansion unit schematics on page 341. Each group
of 15 disk units requires support by one PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller.
number of six disk controllers supported in a #5294/#8094, now up to eighteen total disk controllers are supported. These
can be either OS/400 controlled (maximum of six OS/400 partitions) or Linux controlled. The #5703/#0628 disk controller
can be used to go beyond the maximum of three PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller top or bottom unit of the #5294/#8094.
#0143 Disk Controller Placement Exception is also ordered.
The #8094 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack supports up to four removable media devices (internal tape, CD-ROM, and DVD). The
following removable media devices are supported by the two #PCI/PCI-X Disk Controllers that support the first group of 15
disk units in each enclosure.
The two enclosures in the #8094 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack are separately attached to the system unit via HSL cables as
though they were a stand-alone #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure and #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower. They are treated as
separate units for HSL loop plugging and configuration rules and recommendations. The bottom enclosure must be
attached to the system units first HSL loop. Both enclosures can be connected to the first HSL loop. The top enclosure of
the #8094 can be used on a different system than the bottom enclosure, but cannot be ordered this way. To use the top
enclosure on another system, after the system is received, process an RPO to remove the #0694 or #5094 Equivalent from
the records of the original ordered system and add it to the records of the other system.
For the Model 800 and 810, if the #8094 attaches to HSL ports A0 or A1, the HSL cable cannot exceed 6 m. For the Model
820, if the #8094 attaches to the HSL port A1 of the system unit, the HSL cable connection to port A1 cannot exceed 6 m.
184
#8094
(contd.)

#1482 - 3.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1483 - 10m HSL-2 Cable
#1485 - 15m HSL-2 Cable
Select two line cords from the following list for the lower enclosure (#9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure):
#1452 - 200V 14-ft Line Cord
#1454 - 200V 12A 14-ft TL Line Cord (Default-US)
#1476 - 4.3m 200V 12A Power Cord UK
If a #5115 Dual Line Cords Tower is not present, select one line cord from the following list for the upper enclosure (#5094).
If a #5115 Dual Line Cords Tower is present, select two line cords from the following list for the upper enclosure (#5094):
#1452 - 200V 14-ft Line Cord
#1454 - 200V 12A 14-ft TL Line Cord (default-U.S.)
#1476 - 4.3m 200V 12A Power Cord UK
Select one of the following SPCN cables (for the upper unit):
The #8094 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack reports to the system as CCIN 8094-001 for the bottom enclosure and 8094-002 for
the top enclosure.
The #8094 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 October 2005.
185
#8294
#8294 Optional Base 1.8m Rack

The #8294 is a racking option for a Model 595. It supports up to 90 disk units, has 28 PCI-X slots and has four removable
media slots. The #8294 consists of a 1.8m rack with two enclosures; a bottom enclosure and a top enclosure.
The bottom enclosure is essentially a #9194 Base PCI-X Expansion Tower with side covers and casters removed and with
a 30-disk expansion feature included as base (no feature code required).
The top enclosure is essentially a #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower with side covers and casters removed and a 30-disk
expansion feature included as base (no feature code required). Included with the bottom enclosure is a #9517 Base
HSL-2/RIO-G Bus Adapter and a #9844 Base PCI IOP. Also, a PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller is required to drive the load source
DASD and the removable media devices. Included with the top enclosure is a #9517 Base HSL-2/RIO-G Bus Adapter or a
#9876 Base Optical Bus Adapter (select one), a #9844 Base PCI IOP and a #0694 - #5094 Equivalent.
Each enclosure supports 45 disk units for a total of 90 disk units. The 45 disk unit positions are partitioned into groups of
15, and each group of 15 requires support by one PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller. Each group of 15 is further divided into groups
of 5 disk units, each group of 5 disk units supported on a separate Ultra4 SCSI bus from the PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller.
of IOP-less support in IBM System i5 and eServer i5 servers. Refer to #9844 Inclusion Rules on page 211.
The #8294 also supports up to four removable media devices. These removable media devices are supported by the two
PCI/PCI-X Disk Controllers that support the first group of 15 disk units in each enclosure.
The two enclosures in the #8294 are separately attached to the system unit via HSL cables as though they are stand-alone
#9194 and #5094. The bottom enclosure must be on the first HSL loop attached via two HSL-2/RIO-G cables to the system
unit and the top enclosure can be on this same HSL loop or a separate HSL loop. The top enclosure can be attached via
HSL to a different system than the bottom enclosure, but cannot be ordered this way. When the system is received, process
an RPO to remove the #0694 from the records of the original ordered system and add it to the records of the other system.
An HSL loop uses all optical or all copper ports/cables. A copper loop can intermix I/O towers/units with copper HSL and
copper HSL-2 ports. Select the appropriate cable based on the type of HSL ports to which it is being attached, and the
cable length required.
The following HSL cables can be used with an #8294:
#1482 - 3.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1483 - 10m HSL-2 Cable
Both the top and bottom enclosures in the #8294 must be connected via SPCN cables. They must be in an SPCN cable
loop. Three SPCN cables are required to connect both enclosures of the #8294 to the ports of the system unit. If the top
enclosure of the #8294 is attached to a different system unit, then the top enclosure is connected to the SPCN cable loop
of that system and one or two SPCN cables are required.
Select three or four of the following SPCN cables for each #8294:
186
#8294
(contd.)

Dual line cord capability is required with the bottom enclosure of the #8294, #5164 Dual Power Cord is required on the
order. Dual line cord capability is also required on the top enclosure of the #8294, with a #5165 Dual Power Cord, if the top
enclosure is attached to the same system unit as the bottom enclosure. If the top enclosure is attached to a different system
unit, then #5165 is optional. An additional line cord (for a total of four) must be ordered when a #5165 is installed. Plugging
in the second line cord, even if to the same outlet, enables the ac power modules to be redundant.
The following line cords are supported on an #8294 (three or four line cord features required):
#1399 - 4.3m 300V/16A
#1409 - 4.3m 200V/16A Per Cord Australia/New Zealand
#1418 - 4.3m 200V/16A Per Cord South Africa
#1419 - 4.3m 200V/16A Per Cord Israel
#1420 - 4.3m 200V/16A Per Cord EU/Asia
#1421 - 4.3m 200V/16A Per Cord CH/DK
#1452 - 200V 14-ft Line Cord
#8420
#8420 - Base Service Processor

Provides service processor function for the Model 570. The #8420 contains the system Rack Indicator Port, two SPCN
(RS485) ports for control of attached I/O subsystems, and two Service Processor Ethernet or HMC ports.
#8453
#8453 - Base custom placement

The #8453 places hardware components as directed by hardware placement information from the LPAR Verification Tool
(LVT). The #8453 is supported on new system builds only.
If the #8453 is not on the initial order, hardware placement can be provided at the customer site by IBM Global Services
for a fee.
Supported on Models 570, 570 (POWER6), 595 and 9411-100.
Customer Install Feature: N/A
#9074
#9074 Base I/O Tower

The #9074 Base I/O Tower is the base I/O tower shipped on the Model 830. The #9074 supports up to 45 disk units (15
units are base, with an additional 30 provided with #5101 or #5111), up to 11 PCI IOAs, up to two removable media units,
one battery backup, and redundant or hot swap power supplies. The #9074 has a #9943 Base PCI IOP and a #9748 Base
PCI RAID Disk Unit Controller. The 14 PCI slots are used and supported (driven) by the #9943 Base PCI IOP and by
#2843/#2844/#2847 PCI IOPs.
The #2790 PCI Integrated Netfinity Server or the #2791/#2792/#2799 PCI Integrated xSeries Server can also support
selected LAN cards.
The #1460 - 3m Copper HSL Cable is included automatically on the order.
Select an additional two of the following HSL cables when the Model 830 is in a clustered loop with the Models 825, 870,
or 890:
187
#9074
(contd.)

cord options.
The #9074 is capable of controlling Ultra2 SCSI disk units.
The two removable media devices (internal tape, CD-ROM or DVD) are supported by the #9748/#9778.
The #9074 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 January 2004. A #5074 attached to the Model 520 or 570 is the
recommended replacement.
#9079

The #9079 Base I/O Tower is the base I/O tower shipped on the Model 840. The #9079 supports up to 45 disk units (15
are base, with an additional 30 provided with #5101 or #5111), up to 11 PCI IOAs, up to two removable media units, one
battery backup, and redundant or hot swap power supplies. The #9079 has a #9943 Base PCI IOP and a #9748 Base PCI
RAID Disk Unit Controller. The 14 PCI slots are used and supported (driven) by the #9943 Base PCI IOP and by
#2843/#2844/#2847 PCI IOPs. The #2790 PCI Integrated Netfinity Server or the #2791/#2792/#2799 PCI Integrated
xSeries Server can also support selected LAN cards.
Select two (any combination) of the following HSL cables:
Select an additional two of the following HSL cables, when the Model 840 is in a clustered loop with Model 825, 870 or 890:
One #14xx power cord (two when dual line cord feature #5104 is ordered for the 840 system unit) feature must be specified
(geography dependent). See Chapter 13, HSL, 12X, SPCN, line cord, and communication cables for the System i family
of models on page 539, for power and line cord options.
The #9079 is capable of controlling Ultra2 SCSI disk units.
The two removable media devices (internal tape, CD-ROM, and DVD) are supported by the #9748/#9778 PCI Raid Disk
Unit Controller.
Supported on Models 840, 870, 890.
#9094
#9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure

The #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure is the base enclosure shipped with the 870 and 890 system units to constitute a system.
The #9094 is attached to the system unit via HSL cable through a #9887 Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter. A #9887 Base HSL-2
Bus Adapter is required on the order. One JTAG cable and one V/S Communications cable (VPD and SPCN combined)
are included for the attachment of the #9094 to the system unit.
The #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure has 15 disk unit slots, with an additional 30 slots available with #5107 30 Disk
Expansion. The #9094 also has two removable media slots and 14 PCI-X card slots. A #9844 Base PCI IOP or #9943 Base
PCI IOP is included (feature code required) and a PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller is required. The PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller
drives the disk units in the base 15 disk unit slots and the removable media devices in the two removable media slots. The
PCI/PCI-X Disk Controllers (one or two) are required to drive the disk units in the 30 feature disk unit slots. The disk unit
slots (both base and feature) are in groups of 15. Each group of 15 is further divided into three groups of five disk units.
Each group of five disk units is on a separate SCSI bus from a PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller
number of three disk controllers supported in a #5094/#9094, now up to nine total disk controllers are supported. These
can be either OS/400 controlled (maximum of six OS/400 partitions) or Linux controlled. The #5294 and #8094 are similarly
enhanced and now support a maximum of 18 disk controllers.
188
#9094
(contd.)

if #0143 Disk Controller Placement Exception is also ordered. A maximum of six #5703/#0628s per #5094/#9094 tower is
supported.
The 14 PCI slots are used and supported (driven) by the #9844 Base PCI IOP or the #9943 Base PCI IOP, by feature
#2843/#2844/#2847 PCI IOPs and by #2790/#2791/#2792/#2799 PCI Integrated xSeries Servers or #4710/#9710
Integrated xSeries Servers.
#1482 - 3.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1483 - 10m HSL-2 Cable
#1485 - 15m HSL-2 Cable
With a #5114 Dual Line Cords Tower, two of the following line cords for the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure are required to
be specified:
#1452 - 200V 14-ft Line Cord
#1454 - 200V 12A 14-ft TL Line Cord (default U.S.)
#9194
#9194 Base PCI-X Expansion Tower

This feature is the base PCI I/O enclosure that is shipped with a Model 595 system. The #9194 is attached to the Model
595 system unit via 2 HSL-2/RIO-G cables (HSL-2/RIO-G loop) through a #9517 Base HSL-2/RIO-G Bus Adapter. Two
SPCN cables are also required to form an SPCN loop with service processors in the system unit. The #9194 also has dual
line cord capability; #5164 Dual Power Cords - #8294/#9194 must be on the order.
The #9194 has 15 disk unit slots, with an additional 30 slots available with a #5168 30-Disk Expansion for the #9194 Tower.
The #9194 also has two removable media slots and 14 PCI card slots. A #9844 Base PCI IOP is included (feature code
required) and a #2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller is also required. The PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller drives the disk
units in the base 15 disk unit slots and the removable media devices in the two removable media slots. One or two
PCI/PCI-X Disk Controllers are required to drive the disk units in the 30 feature disk unit slots. The disk unit slots (both base
and feature) are partitioned in groups of 15 and each group of 15 is further partitioned into three groups of five. Each group
of five is on a separate SCSI bus from the PCI/PCI-X Disk Controller.
The 11 PCI IOAs are supported (driven) by the #9844 Base PCI IOP, by #2844 PCI IOP(s) and by #4810/#4812 PCI
Integrated xSeries Servers.
#1482 - 3.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1483 - 10m HSL-2 Cable
Specify two of the following line cords for the #9194 Base PCI Enclosure:
#1452 - 200V 14-ft Line Cord
189
#9194
(contd.)

#1454 - 200V 12A 14-ft TL Line Cord (Default-US)
#1463 2m SPCN Cable
#1464 6m SPCN Cable
#6001 2m SPCN Cable
#6006 3m SPCN Cable
#6008 6m SPCN Cable
#9369,
#9370,
#9371,
#9372,
#9374,
#9375,
#9376,
#9377,
#9378,
#9379,
#9397
190
Disk attachment-based hardware for Model 525 Solution Edition disk packages
The following are disk hardware features that are part of the optional #5567, #5568, and #5569 disk packaging features
available on for:
#6913 Model 525 Oracle Solution Edition
The following features are without distinction as being part of either #5567, #5568, or #5569 disk packaging features. See
the feature descriptions for #5567, #5568, and #5569 for that information.
#9369: PCI-X Expansion Drawer (#0595 PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack)
#9370: 70.56GB 15k rpm Disk Unit (#4327 70.56 GB 15k RPM Disk Unit)
#9371: HSL-2/RIO-G Ports - 2 Copper (#2888 RIO-G Ports - 2 Copper)
#9372: PCI-X Expansion Tower(#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower- 5095)
#9374: EXP24 6 Disk Slot Enabler (#5741 Expansion 24 6 Disk Slot Enabler)
#9375: EXP24 6/12 Disk Slot Enabler (#5742 Expansion 24 6/12 Disk Slot Enabler)
#9376: EXP24 Controller (#5778 PCI-X EXP24 Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches without IOP)
9377: Total Storage EXP24 Controller 1.5GB (#5782 PCI-X EXP24 Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches
without IOP)
#9378: Total Storage EXP24 Disk Drawer (#5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Drawer)
#9379: Total Sto rage EXP24 Controller 1.5 GB in Model 525 processor enclosure (#5800 PCI-X EXP24 Controller 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches without IOP)
#9397: 1.5 GB Disk Controller with Auxiliary Write Cache (#5583 Controller with 1.5GB Auxiliary Write Cache without
IOP)
#9517

The #9517 Base HSL-2/RIO-G Bus Adapter provides two HSL-2/RIO-G ports. The #6417 can be selected as base on initial
orders of #0595, #5094, #5095, #5294 or #8294 expansion units and towers. The #9517 is a base feature version of the
#6417 HSL-2/RIO-G Bus Adapter.
The migration of existing #9517s to eServer i5 servers is allowed. Existing #9517s are installed in migrated #0595, #5094,
#5095 and #5294 expansion towers/units.
#9531

The #9531 Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter is a base feature on the #5790 PCI Expansion Drawer. It provides two HSL-2/RIO-G
ports.
#9691
#9691 Base Bus Adapter (Copper HSL)

The #9691 is a base bus adapter card that installs in the #5074 PCI Expansion Tower and #5079 1.8 M I/O Tower, the #9079
Base I/O Tower or the #8079 Optional Base 1.8 M I/O Rack on a Model 840 system unit, and in the #0578/#5078 PCI
Expansion Unit. The #9691 supports HSL Copper.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models and Models 810, 825, 870, and 890.
Customer Install Feature: N/A
#9730
#9730 Base HSL-2 Ports - 4 Copper

The #9730 Base HSL-2 Ports - 4 Copper is a base 4-port copper HSL-2 bus adapter for Models 870 and 890. This adapter
also has connectors for JTAG and CSP.
#9739

The #9739 Base Optical Bus Adapter is used in the #5074 PCI Expansion Tower and #5079 1.8 M I/O Tower and in the
#5078/#0578 to allow these towers to connect via optical HSL. The #9739 supports clustering (HSL OptiConnect).
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R1 or V5R2 when connected to Models 810, 825, 870, and 890
#9785

The #9785 Base HSL-2 Ports - 2 Copper is a base 2-port copper HSL-2 adapter for the Model 825. The #9785 can be
installed in either of the two HSL adapter slots (C08 or C09) on the Model 825 backplane. This feature can be ordered with
a new Model 825 system unit on initial order or on model upgrade. If the system unit is already installed, order a #2785
HSL-2 Ports - 2 Copper for this function.
The #9785 withdrawn from marketing as of 01 October 2005.
191
#9786
#9786 Base HSL Ports - 2 Optical

The #9786 Base HSL Ports - 2 Optical is a base 2-port optical HSL adapter for the Model 825. The #9786 can be installed
in either of the two HSL adapter slots (C08 or C09) on the Model 825 backplane. This feature can be ordered with a new
Model 825 system unit on initial order or on model upgrade. If the system unit is already installed, order a #2786 HSL Ports
- 2 Optical for this function.
The #9786 withdrawn from marketing as of 01 October 2005.
#9787

The #9787 Base HSL-2 Ports - 2 Copper board provides two copper HSL-2 ports. On the Model 825, the #9787 is attached
to the processor board and does not plug into HSL adapter slots C08 or C09.
#9789
#9789 Base HSL Ports - 4 Optical

The #9789 Base HSL Ports - 4 Optical is a base 4-port optical HSL-2 bus adapter for the Model 890. This adapter also has
connectors for JTAG and CSP.
#9876

The #9876 Base Optical Bus Adapter is a base feature that provides optical HSL connectivity with two HSL optical ports to
support the #0588/#5088, #0595/#5095, #5094, #5294, and #8294 expansion towers and expansion units. The #9876 is
only available on initial orders.
Migration of existing #9876 adapters to eServer i5 servers is allowed. Existing #9876 adapters are installed in migrated
#5074, #5079, #5094, #5294, #0595, and #5095 expansion towers/units.
The #9876 replaces the #9886 Base Optical Bus Adapter.
Supported on Models 550, 570, 595, 825, 870, and 890.
#9877
#9877 - Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter

The #9877 - Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter is a base feature, which provides optical HSL-2/RIO-G connectivity with two HSL
optical ports to support #0588/#5088 expansion towers and expansion units. The #9877 is only available on initial orders.
Migration of existing #9877 adapters to eServer i5 servers is allowed. Existing #9877 adapters are installed in migrated
#5074, #5079, #5094, #5294, #0595, and #5095 expansion towers or units.
The #6417 is required on the #5088/#0588 when migrating to a Model 520, 550, 570, or 595.
The #9877 replaces the #9887 Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
#9886

The #9886 Base Optical Bus Adapter provides optical HSL connectivity for the #5094, #0595/#5095, #0588/#5088 PCI,
#5294, #8094 (top unit only), and #9094 expansion towers and expansion units. The #9886 can only be ordered with a new
expansion tower or unit. If the expansion unit is already installed, order a #2886 for this function.
Supported on Models 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890.
The #9886 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006. A #9876 Base Optical Bus Adapter is the recommended
replacement.
192
#9887

The #9887 Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter provides HSL-2 connectivity for the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure. The #9887 can
only be ordered with a new expansion tower or unit. If the expansion unit is already installed, order a #2887 for this function.
The #9887 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006. A #9877 is the recommended replacement.
4.4 i5/OS partitions on System p5 models

i5/OS partitions on System p models
9411-100
9411-100 eServer p5 I/O Subsystem for i5/OS

Specific IBM System p Models 570 and 595 support an i5/OS partition. The IBM System p5 9411-100 type model number
enables the ordering of i5/OS supported I/O hardware. Each i5/OS supported I/O tower, drawer, IOP, I/O adapter controller,
and disk device is a feature of the subsystem of this machine type.
A unique 9411-100 serial number is associated with a specific System p5 machine and stays with that system. All the I/O
features associated with the 9411-100, with the exception of the Enterprise Enablement feature, can be transferred to
another 9411-100, associated with a different System p5 server. The 9411-100 uses the same hardware feature codes as
used for the 9406 System i5 machine type. If a System p5 client has all the System i (iSeries) I/O they need, the 9411-100
starts as an empty model. The IBM ordering administrative system transfers the existing System i5 I/O features into this
9411-100. New System i5 I/O features are ordered against the 9411-100.
The 9411-100 provides the I/O for any i5/OS partitions running on a 1.65 GHz System p5 570, 590, or 595 server.
Specifically, the 9411-100 is supported on the following System p5 models:
The 1.65 GHz 9117 570, which supports one processor worth of i5/OS workload
The 1.65 GHz 9119 590 and 595, which support up to two processors worth of i5/OS workload.
The I/O maximums for a 9411 are consistent with an IBM System p5 Model 570:
270 disk drives
19 TB disk storage
18 Integrated xSeries Servers
Eight Integrated xSeries Adapters
84 PCI slots
192 communication lines
36 LAN ports
48 twinax controllers
12 internal DVD/CD/tape drives
The minimum configuration for a 94100 is:
One IOP in an iSeries I/O tower or drawer
One disk controller for a load source drive
For more information go to the IBM Systems Hardware Information Center at:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/eserver
Select IBM Systems Hardware Information Center. Search for 9411.
193
4.5 Models 825, 870, and 890 Capacity on Demand

Models 825, 870 and 890 Capacity On Demand
#1609
#1609 825 CUoD Activation

The #1609 825 CUoD Activation is used to order a password to activate one additional processor on the Model 825 with a
CUoD processor feature. Up to three #1609s can be ordered on initial orders or via MES to activate additional processors.
Supported on the #2473 Model 825 3/6-way processor.
#1610

The #1610 890 CUoD Activation is used to order a password to activate one additional processor on the Model 890 with a
CUoD processor. Up to eight #1610s can be ordered on initial orders or via MES to activate additional processors.
Supported on the #2487 Model 890 16/24-way Processor and #2488 Model 890 24/32-way Processor
#1611

The #1611 870 CUoD Activation is used to order a password to activate one additional processor on a Model 870 with a
Supported on the #2486 Model 870 8/16-way Processor.
#1612

#1613

#1614

CUoD processor. Up to three #1614s can be ordered on initial orders or via MES to activate additional processors.
#1682

The #1682 On/Off Prepaid for Model 825 Standard Edition provides an account for 30 processor days of On/Off Capacity
on Demand. The system must be enabled for On/Off Capacity on Demand before ordering prepaid days.
Supported on the #2473 Model 825 3/6-way Processor with #1773 TCoD Enablement.
#1683

The #1683 On/Off Prepaid for Model 825 Enterprise Edition provides an account for 30 processor days of On/Off Capacity
#1684

194
#1685

#1686

#1688

#1689

#1691

#1692

#1695

#1697

#1698

Supported on the #2496 Model 870 2/16-way Processor with #1780 TCoD Enablement
#1699

195
#177x
#177x On/Off Capacity on Demand (enablement)

A #177x feature code is used to enable On/Off Capacity on Demand by providing a password to be installed on an iSeries
server. After this password is installed, unused On/Off Capacity on Demand processors can be activated. A limit of 192
processor days can be used on a temporary basis.
Requires a contract to be signed before the #177x feature is ordered. On/Off Capacity on Demand processor usage must
be reported on, minimally, a monthly basis to IBM or the clients Business Partner. A #178x or #179x On/Off Capacity on
Demand billing feature initiates quarterly invoices based on the number of processor days used. A new contract can be
signed and the #177x feature reordered as the limit of usable temporary processor days approaches.
Supported feature codes by model are:
#1773 TCoD Enablement for Model 825
#178x
#179x
#178x-#179x On/Off Capacity on Demand Billing

A #178x-#179x feature code is used for On/Off Capacity on Demand billing. After a #177x On/Off Capacity on Demand
feature is ordered and the associated password is installed on the system, the user must report monthly to IBM their On/Off
Capacity on Demand usage. This information is used to compute the On/Off Capacity on Demand billing. One On/Off
Capacity on Demand billing feature is required for each processor day that is used for temporary capacity.
There is a limit to the number of processor days that are agreed to in the contract that was signed prior to ordering the
On/Off Capacity on Demand feature. To continue using temporary capacity after the initial limit has been reached, a new
contract is required and a second On/Off Capacity on Demand feature is ordered. An On/Off Capacity on Demand feature
cannot be concurrently ordered with an On/Off Capacity on Demand billing feature.
#9603
196
#1782 TCoD Billing for Model 825

Prerequisites: #1773 TCoD Enablement for Model 825, #7416 Standard Edition
Prerequisites: #1773 TCoD Enablement for Model 825, #7418 Enterprise Edition
Prerequisites: #1779 TCoD Enablement for Model 825, #7439 Capacity BackUp Edition
#9603 Base CUoD Activation

The #9603 Base CUoD Activation feature is used to activate one additional processor with a CUoD feature as part of an
initial order on Models 870 and 890 Enterprise Editions.
4.6 Main storage

Main storage
Base
There is no base memory on Models 520, 525, 550, 570 595, 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890. On a system supporting and
configured with different memory card features, the memory plugged into the same processor card run at the slowest
memory speed.
Model 515,
520+ and
525 Main
Memory
Rules
Memory features for the Model 515, 520 and 525 with #8325, #8327 and #8330 processors
#4400 - 1 GB DDR2 Main Storage (2 x 512 MB DIMMs: 533 MHz sdram CCIN 313A)
#4474 - 2 GB DDR2 Main Storage (2 x 1 GB DIMMS: 533 MHz sdram CCIN 313B)
#4475 - 4 GB DDR2 Main Storage (2 x 2 GB DIMMs: 533 MHz sdram CCIN 313D)
#4477 - 8 GB DDR2 Main Storage (2 x 4 GB DIMMs: 533 MHz sdram CCIN 313E)
#9548 - Base1 GB DDR2 Main Storage (2 x 512 MB DIMMs: 533 MHz sdram CCIN 313A)
#9549 - Base 2 GB DDR2 Main Storage (2 x 1 GB DIMMs: 533 MHz sdram CCIN 313B)
Each feature code is a pair of DIMMs. A minimum of one pair of DIMMs is required on each processor card. That is, DIMMs
may be installed in pairs (one FC), not in quads. For 9405, 9406 and 9407 processors, the first or only DIMM pair goes into
DIMM slots J0A & J2A. If additional memory DIMMs are to be installed, the second pair of DIMMs goes into slots J0C &
J2C, the third pair goes into DIMM slots J0B & J2B and the fourth pair goes into DIMM slots J0D & J2D.
Model 520
Main
Memory
Rules
Memory features for the Model 520

#3093 - 512 MB Main Storage DIMM (DDR; 256 Mb technology, unstacked, CCIN 3093) (9406 Model 520 only)
#3094 - 1 GB Main Storage DIMM (DDR; 256 Mb technology, stacked, CCIN 3094) (9406 Model 520 only)
#3096 - 2 GB Main Storage DIMM (DDR; 256 Mb technology, stacked, CCIN 3096) (9406 Model 520 only)
#4443 - 512 MB DDR Main Storage (DDR1; 256 Mb technology, CCIN 309B)
#4444 - 1 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1; 256 Mb technology, CCIN 309B) (ships four 256 MB DIMMs for a total of
1 GB)
#4445 - 4 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1; 128 Mb technology, CCIN 30D3) (ships four 1 GB DIMMs for a total of 4 GB)
#4447 - 2 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1; 64 Mb technology, CCIN 30D2) (ships four 512 MB DIMMs for a total of
2 GB)
#4449 - 8 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1; 128 Mb technology, stacked, CCIN 30D5) (ships four 2 GB DIMMs for a total
of 8 GB)
#4450 - 16 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1; 1 Gb technology, stacked, CCIN 30AC) (ships four 4 GB DIMMs for a total
of 16 GB)
Install DIMMs in sets of four (quads) with one exception: A single pair of 256 MB DIMMs is allowed on the #8950 processor.
Add an additional pair of 256 MB DIMMs to the original pair (to make a quad) whenever more DIMMs are added. Then one
additional quad of DIMMs can be added to the system. For the #8950 processor, the first DIMM pair goes into DIMM slots
J0A and J2A. The second pair of DIMMs goes into slots J0C and J2C.
The first quad of DIMMs is plugged into DIMM slots J0A, J2A, J0C, and J2C.
The second quad of DIMMs is plugged into DIMM slots J0B, J2B, J0D, and J2D.
Model 550+
Main
Memory
Rules
Memory features for the Model 550 with #8312 processors

#4400 - 1 GB DDR2 Main Storage (2 x 512 MB DIMMs: 533 MHz sdram CCIN 313A)
#4474 - 2 GB DDR2 Main Storage (2 x 1 GB DIMMs: 533 MHz sdram CCIN 313B)
#4475 - 4 GB DDR2 Main Storage (2 x 2 GB DIMMs: 533 MHz sdram CCIN 313D)
#4477 - 8 GB DDR2 Main Storage (2 x 4 GB DIMMs: 533 MHz sdram CCIN 313E)
The Model 550+ has two x #8312 processor cards. A minimum of one memory feature (one pair of DIMMs) is required on
each processor card.
Each feature code is a pair of DIMMs. A minimum of one pair of DIMMs is required on each processor card. That is, DIMMs
may be installed in pairs (one FC), not in quads per card. The first DIMM pair goes into DIMM slots P1-C8-C1 and
P1-C8-C8, or slots P1-C9-C1 and P1-C9-C8.
If additional memory DIMMs are to be installed:
The second pair of DIMMs goes into slots P1-C8-C3 and P1-C8-C6, or slots P1-C9-C3 and P1-C9-C6.
The third pair goes into DIMM slots P1-C8-C2 and, P1-C8-C7, or slots P1-C9-C2 and P1-C9-C7.
The fourth pair goes into DIMM slots P1-C8-C4 and P1-C8-C5, or slots P1-C9-C4 and P1-C9-C5.
The Model 550+ requires a minimum of 2 GB memory.
197
Model 550
Main
Memory
Rules

#3093 - 512 MB Main Storage (DIMM; DDR 256 Mb technology)
#3094 - 1 GB Main Storage (DIMM; DDR 256 Mb technology)
#3096 - 2 GB Main Storage (DIMM; DDR 256 Mb technology)
#4444 - 1 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1; 256 Mb technology, CCIN 309B) (ships four 256 MB DIMMs for a total of
1 GB)
#4445 - 4 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1; 128 Mb technology, CCIN 30D3) (ships four 1 GB DIMMs for a total of 4 GB)
#4447 - 2 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1; 64 Mb technology, CCIN 30D2) (ships four 512 MB DIMMs for a total of
2 GB)
#4449 - 8 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1; 128 Mb technology, stacked, CCIN 30D5) (ships four 2 GB DIMMs for a total
of 8 GB)
#4450 - 16 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1; 1 Gb technology, stacked, CCIN 30AC) (ships four 4 GB DIMMs for a total
of 16 GB)
Install DIMMs in sets of four (quads).
The 550 has two processor cards and best memory access performance is achieved when memory is balanced on each
processor card:
Plug the first quad of memory modules into memory module slots P1-C8-C1, P1-C8-C3, P1-C8-C6, and P1-C8-C8 on
each processor card, or slots P1-C9-C1, P1-C9-C3, P1-C9-C6, and P1-C9-C8 on each processor card.
Plug the second quad of memory modules into memory module slots P1-C8-C2, P1-C8-C4, P1-C8-C5, and
P1-C8-C7 on each processor card or, slots P1-C9-C2, P1-C9-C4, P1-C9-C5, and P1-C9-C7 on each processor card.
Model 570
(POWER6)
Main
Memory
Rules
Memory features for the Model 570 (POWER6)

#5692 0/2GB DDR2 Memory provides 0/2GB of 667MHz DDR2 buffered memory and consists of four 512MB DDR2
DIMMs. On the system, this is identified by either of the following CCIN values: 319B or 31B5.
#5693 0/4GB DDR2 Memory provides 0/4GB of 667MHz DDR2 buffered memory and consists of four 1 GB DDR2
DIMMs. On the system, this is identified by either of the following CCIN values: 319C or 31B6.
#5694 0/8GB DDR2 Memory provides 0/8GB of 667 MHz DDR2 buffered memory and consists of four 2 GB DDR2
DIMMs. On the system, this is identified by either of the following CCIN values: 319E or 31B7.
DIMMs. On the system, this is identified by either of the following CCIN values: 319D or 31B9.
DIMMs. On the system, this is identified by either of the following CCIN values: 31BD, 319F, 31BA, or 31BC.
The different CCIN values are based on engineering change level updates - EC level.
System i POWER6 model 570 uses fully buffered DDR2 DIMMs. Each processor card has 12 memory DIMM slots. Each
memory feature represents four physical DIMMs that are plugged in quads. Each processor card must have at least one
memory feature. Therefore, there must be at least two memory features per processor enclosure. The requirement for at
least one memory feature per processor card is independent of the number of processor activations.
System i POWER6 model 570 memory features must be purchased from IBM with memory activations for at least 50% of
the memory feature capacity. Memory Capacity on Demand activates memory hardware only in the system serial number
for which it is purchased. If memory is moved to a different system, the memory activations remain on the system for which
the memory was initially ordered. These activations can be used for other memory features on the initial system. For special
situations, contact IBM CoD administration about transferring memory activations between systems.
Memory DIMMs of the same MHz can be mixed on the same processor card independent of their capacity. Memory DIMMs
of different MHz frequency can be mixed on the same system or processor enclosure, but the #5696 0/32 GB feature (400
MHz) cannot be mixed on the same processor card with smaller GB memory features (667 MHz or 533 MHz). The 0/2 GB,
0/4 GB and 0/8 GB memory features (667 MHz) can be mixed on the same processor card with the 0/16 GB memory feature
(533 MHz). If different frequency memory DIMMs are used, the system will run all memory at the lowest MHz installed.
When you configure the memory in a System i POWER6 model 570, placing two memory features (8 DIMMs) on a single
processor card gives you the maximum available memory bandwidth. Adding the third memory feature gives you additional
memory capacity but does not increase memory bandwidth. System performance that is dependent on memory bandwidth
can be improved by purchasing two smaller memory features per processor card as opposed to one large feature per
processor card. You should weigh this two-feature performance advantage against the future need for additional memory.
The Model 570 (POWER6) memory activation features are #5680 1 GB activation and #5681 256 units of 1 GB memory
activation.
The unbuffered DDR2 memory features for the POWER5+ Model 570 and the DDR1 memory features for the POWER5
Model 570 are not compatible with the System i POWER6 model 570 memory features.
198
Model 570+
Main
Memory
Rules
Memory features for the IBM System i5 570+

#7892 - 2 GB DDR2 Main Storage provides 2 GB of MS and consists of four 512 MB DDR2 DIMMs (CCIN 30F0).
#7893 - 4 GB DDR2 Main Storage provides 4 GB of MS and consists of four 1 GB DDR2 DIMMs (CCIN 30F2).
#7894 - 8 GB DDR2 Main Storage provides 8 GB of MS and consists of four 2 GB DDR2 DIMMs (CCIN 30F3).
#4495 - 4/8 GB CUoD DDR2 Main Storage provides 4 GB of activated and additional 4 GB of DDR2 memory available
for activation with four 2 GB DIMMs (CCIN 316F). The 4 GB of additional memory can be activated in increments of 1
GB. If a memory feature is moved to a different system, that system recognizes only 4 GB as available unless
additional memory activations are acquired or already present on that server. For the original system, four 1 GB
memory activations remain and can be used for other CUoD memory features. For special situations, contact IBM
CoD administration about transferring memory activations between systems.
#4496 - 8/16 GB CUoD DDR2 Main Storage provides 8 GB of activated DDR2 and additional 8 GB of DDR2 memory
available for activation with four 4 GB DIMMs (CCIN 314E). The 8 GB of additional memory can be activated in
increments of 1 GB. If a memory feature is moved to a different server, that server recognizes only 8 GB as available
unless additional memory activations are acquired or already present on that server. For the original server, eight
1 GB memory activations remain and can be used for other CUoD memory features. For special situations, contact
IBM CoD administration about transferring memory activations between servers.
#4497 - 16 GB DDR2 Main Storage provides 16 GB of MS and consists of four 4 GB DDR2 DIMMs (CCIN 312F).
#4498 - 32 GB DDR2 Main Storage provides 32 GB of MS and consists of four 8 GB DDR2 DIMMs (CCIN 314C). The
#4498 is comprised of 400 MHz DDR2 DIMMs and cannot be mixed with other Model 570 memory on the same
processor card. The #4498 can be mixed with other DDR2 memory in the same enclosure or in the same system.
#7663 - 570 1GB Memory Activation provides the activation of 1 GB of additional Capacity on Demand memory.
Multiple #7663 features are allowed up to the maximum CUoD memory of the server. Memory activations are stored
in the server. If CUoD memory is moved to a different server, the additional activations remain with the original server.
The System 570+ offers pluggable DIMMs for memory. Each feature above ships four DDR2 Dimms. There is a minimum
of two memory features per processor enclosure.
2/4-way = minimum 2, maximum 4; 4/8-way = minimum 4, maximum 8; 8/16-way = minimum 8, maximum 16
The minimum memory for a 2/4-way 570+ is 4 GB, for a 4/8-way it is 8 GB and for the 8/16-way it is 16 GB. The maximum
memory capacity depends upon the number of processors ordered for the system and on the type of memory and
functionality required.
The rules for mixing and matching DIMMs are:
Install memory DIMMs in quads.
Quads must be the same DIMM.
Memory balancing and spreading is required.
Model 570
Main
Memory
Rules

#3043 - 512 MB Main Storage DIMM (DDR: 256 Mb technology, unstacked, CCIN 3043)
#3044 - 1 GB Main Storage DIMM (DDR; 256 Mb technology, stacked, CCIN 3044)
#3046 - 2 GB Main Storage DIMM (DDR; 256 Mb technology, stacked, CCIN 3046)
#4452 - 2 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1 CCIN 309D) (ships four 512 MB DIMMs for a total of 2 GB)
#4454 - 8 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1 CCIN 30AA) (ships four 2 GB DIMMs for a total of 8 GB)
#4490 - 4 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1 CCIN 309E) (ships four 1 GB DIMMs for a total of 4 GB)
#4491 - 16 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1 CCIN 30B3) (ships four 4 GB DIMMs for a total of 16 GB)
#4492 - 32 GB DDR Main Storage (DDR1 CCIN 30F7) (ships four 8 GB DIMMs for a total of 32 GB) (#8971 Processor
only). Must be installed on a processor card by itself or with another #4492 or with features #4494 or #7049.
#4494 - 16 GB Main Storage (ships four 4 GB DIMMs for a total of 16 GB) Must be installed on a processor card by
itself or with another #4494 or with features #4492 or #7049.
#7049 - 8/16 GB DDR-1 Main Storage: Provides 8 GB of activated memory and an additional 8 GB of memory
available for activation. The 8 GB of additional memory can be activated in increments of 1 GB. The #7049 must be
installed on a processor card either by itself or with another #7049 or with features #4492 or #4494.
The Model 570 offers pluggable DIMMs for memory. Each 0/2-way processor card contains eight slots for up to eight
pluggable DIMMs. The minimum memory for a for a Model 570 is 2 GB. The maximum memory capacity depends upon the
number of processors ordered for the system and on the type of memory and functionality required.
The rules for mixing and matching DIMMs are:
Install memory DIMMs in quads.
Quads must be the same DIMM.
Memory balancing and spreading is required.
For the #0931 1/2-way server, DIMMs are installed in the following sequence:
The first quad of DIMMs is plugged into DIMM slots J0A, J0C, J1A, and J1C.
The second quad of DIMMs is plugged into DIMM slots J0B, J0D, J1B, and J1D.
199
Model 570
Main
Memory
Rules
(contd.)

Enclosure 1, Processor Card 1: Slots J0A, J0C, J1A, and J1C
Enclosure 1, Processor Card 2: Slots J0B, J0D, J1B, and J1D
Each processor feature should have at least one memory feature associated with it.
Memory spreading and balancing: Performance measurements have determined that optimal performance requires both
spreading of memory across processors and balancing memory across processors. Use the following rules for Model 570
memory.
Memory minimums: Each processor card must have at least one set of memory DIMM placed on it. Memory is in
feature codes of quads.
Balancing: Each 0/2-way processor card must have a minimum of 2 GB memory on it.
Spreading: Spread memory across the processor cards. Select memory DIMMs to enable equal memory
configurations across processors in a n-way unit. If memory greater than the minimum is ordered, base the selection
of memory features on driving the most number of DIMM quads onto the system, as evenly distributed across the
processors as possible.
200
Model 595
Main
Memory
Rules

#7816 CUoD 2/4 GB (4 X 1 GB), DDR1, 512 Mb, 266 MHZ, DRAM DIMMS (CCIN 303E)
#7828 16 GB (4 X 4 GB), DDR1 1 Gb, 266 MHZ, DRAM DIMMS (CCIN 304E)
#7829 32 GB (4 X 4 GB), DDR1 1 Gb, 266 MHZ, DRAM DIMMS
#7835 CUoD 4/8 GB (4 X 2 GB), DDR1 512 Mb, 266 MHZ, DRAM DIMMS
#4500 CUoD 0/4 GB (4 X 1 GB), DDR2 512 Mb 533 MHZ, DRAM DIMMS (CCIN 316A)
A minimum of 50% (2 GB) of the memory must be activated via features #7669 or #7280 at time of purchase. Memory
can be activated up to the maximum memory in increments of:
#7269: Increment of 1 GB (for example, two #7269s achieve a 2 GB increment)
#7280: Package of 256 DDR2 activations
4501 CUoD 0/8 GB (4 X 2 GB), DDR2 512 Mb, 533 MHZ, DRAM DIMMS (CCIN 316B)
A minimum of 50% (4 GB) of the memory must be activated via features #7669 or #7280 at time of purchase. Memory
can be activated up to the maximum memory in increments of:
#7269: Increment of 1 GB (For example, two #7269s achieve a 2 GB increment.)
#4502 CUoD 0/16 GB (4 X 4 GB), DDR2 1 Gb, 533 MHZ, DRAM DIMMS (CCIN 316C)
A minimum of 100% (16 GB) of the memory must be activated via features #7669 or #7280 at time of purchase. Note
that DDRn model rules specify that activations are for a specific system. However, customers do move memory cards
to another system. If this memory feature is moved to a system other than the ordered system, its initial memory
capacity will be 0 GB. Memory can be activated up to the maximum memory in increments of:
#7269: Increment of 1 GB (For example, two #7269s achieve a 2 GB increment.)
#4503 CUoD 0/32 GB (4 X 8 GB), DDR2 1 Gb, 400 MHZ, DRAM DIMMS (CCIN 316D
A minimum of 100% (16 GB) of the memory must be activated via features #7669 or #7280 at time of purchase. Note
that DDRn model rules specify that activations are for a specific system. However, customers do move memory cards
to another system. If this memory feature is moved to a system other than the ordered system, its initial memory
capacity will be 0 GB. Memory can be activated up to the maximum memory in increments of:
#7269: Increment of 1GB (For example, two #7269s achieve a 2 GB increment.)
Memory rules:
The minimum memory requirements are four feature codes (two pairs) per node with 16 GB per node.
DDR2 memory is not compatible with DDR1 memory. DDR2 memory is supported on 1.9 GHz or faster models.
DDRn model rules specify that activations are for a specific system.
Memory must be ordered in identical pairs.
Each node #8981 has 16 memory slots. There can be up to four nodes in a system.
Memory is spread out in identical pairs per MCM.
Only one increment difference is allowed in memory size within a node. This means that 4 and 8, 8 and 16, 16 and 32
GB increments in a node are allowed, but 4 and 16/4 and 32/8in a node are not allowed.
The #7799 requires #7835 x 64.
The #7970 requires at least one #7816 or #7835.
The #7976 requires at least one #7828 or #7829.
Placement rules:
Memory must be placed in pairs.
The placement sequence is:
Fill slots 1 and 2 first starting with Node 1, 2, 3, and then 4 (2).
Fill slots 3 and 4 starting with Node 1, 2, 3, and then 4 (3).
Fill slots 7 and 10 slots starting with Node 1, 2, 3, and then 4 (7).
Fill 11 and 14 slots starting with Node 1, 2, 3, and then 4.
Nodes 1, 2, 3 and 4 are placed left to right as viewed from the front.
Model 800
Main
Memory
Rules
Memory features for the Model 800 #2463 and #2464 processors:
#3092 - 256 MB Main Storage DIMM (DDR - 128 Mb technology, unstacked)
#3094 - 1 GB Main Storage DIMM (DDR - 256 Mb technology, stacked)
A single main storage DIMM feature is allowed on Model 800 processors.
When the total number of main storage DIMMs is increased greater than one, the single existing DIMM must be paired up
with a DIMM of the same capacity. Any additional DIMMs must be added in pairs of the same capacity.
Eight memory DIMM slots are available in the base system for main storage DIMMs, which plug directly onto the backplane.
201
Model 810
Main
Memory
Rules
Memory features for the Model 810 #2465, #2466, and #2467 processors
A single main storage DIMM feature is allowed on Model 810 processors.
When the total number of main storage DIMMs is increased greater than one, the single existing DIMM must be paired up
with a DIMM of the same capacity. Any additional DIMMs must be added in pairs of the same capacity.
Eight memory DIMM slots are available in the base system for main storage DIMMs, which plug directly onto the backplane.
Memory features for the Model 810 #2469 processor
There are 16 DIMM memory positions on the memory riser card (CCIN 2884), and all memory plugs into this card:
#3022 - 128 MB Main Storage (64 Mb technology): Support only, orderable up to the minimum number of DIMMs
required to meet a pair or quad system memory requirement.
#3024 - 256 MB Main Storage (128 Mb technology) (unstacked)
#3025 - 512 MB Main Storage (128 Mb technology) (stacked): The #3025 cannot be mixed with the #3026 for pairs or
quads.
#3026 - 512 MB Main Storage (256 Mb technology) (unstacked): The #3026 cannot be mixed with the #3025 for pairs
or quads.
#3027 - 1 GB Main Storage (256 Mb technology) (stacked)
#3029 - 128 MB Main Storage (128 Mb technology) (unstacked): The #3029 cannot be mixed with the #3022 for pairs
or quads.
A maximum of eight #3029 DIMM features is allowed on a system.
A minimum of two DIMMs (same feature code) must be selected. If more than two DIMMs are required, all memory features
must be in sets of four (quads) of the same feature code. This means a quad must also be made out of the initial two DIMMs.
Model 825
Main
Memory
Rules
Memory features for the Model 825:

The following memory features are available on the Model 825:
#3042 - 256 MB Main Storage DIMM (default 4 x 256 MB) (DDR - 128 Mb technology, unstacked)
#3044 - 1024 MB Main Storage DIMM (DDR - 256 Mb technology, stacked)
#3046 - 2048 MB Main Storage DIMM (DDR - 512 Mb technology, stacked)
For the Model 825, the main storage DIMMs are installed directly onto the processor cards. Each processor card has eight
DIMM slots. The eight slots are arranged in two sets of four. The DIMMs must be installed in sets of four (quads). Each set
of four DIMMs must be the same memory capacity and technology. Each system order must have at least three sets of four
main storage DIMMs (quad) installed (twelve DIMMs total). The exception is the 2 GB memory capacity where two quads
(8 DIMMs total) are allowed.
There is a total of 24 DIMM slots in which 8, 12, 16, 20, or 24 memory DIMMs can be installed.
Except on systems with 2 GB of memory capacity, no processor is allowed to contain more than twice the memory capacity
of any other processor. The IBM marketing configurator determines the correct quantity and correct card capacities for valid
system configurations based on the total amount of memory desired.
On systems with 2 GB of memory, the IBM marketing configurator issues a message informing the user that IBM does not
recommend operating a system with this memory configuration.
The sequence for plugging memory DIMMs for processor #2473 is:
Fill four slots on the first processor card.
Then fill four slots on the second processor card.
Then fill four slots on the third processor card.
Then start again with the first processor card filling four slots.
202
Model 870
Main
Memory
Rules

#3020 - 4096 MB Main Storage Card (inside): Plugs into memory card slots 0, 1, 2, and 3
#3017 - 32768 MB Main Storage Card inside): Plugs into memory card slots 0, 1, 2, and 3
There are eight main storage card sockets on the backplane, but a maximum of four main storage cards can be placed in
the system.
The Model 870 main storage cards are installed according to the following rules:
Main storage cards are installed in pairs of equal capacity.
Pairs of main storage cards must plug into memory card slots under the same MCM (slots 0 and 1, slots 2 and 3).
Mixed main storage cards must be of the adjacent capacity. (4 GB with 8 GB is allowed, and 4 GB with 16 GB is not
allowed.)
Cannot mix main storage cards of more than two capacities. (4 GB with 8 GB is allowed, and 4 GB with both 8 GB and
16 GB is not allowed.)
Mixed main storage cards can be in any order.
Model 890
Main
Memory
Rules

#3020 - 4096 MB Main Storage Card (inside): Plugs into memory card slots 0, 1, 2 and 3
#3021 - 4096 MB Main Storage Card (outside): Plugs into memory card slots 4, 5, 6 and 7
The Model 890 main storage cards are installed into the eight memory card slots in the system unit backplane.
The Model 890 main storage cards are installed according to the following rules:
Main storage cards are installed in pairs of equal capacity.
The pairs of main storage cards must plug into memory card slots under the same MCM (slots 0 and 1, slots 2 and 3,
slots 4 and 5, and slots 6 and 7).
Mixed main storage cards must be of the adjacent capacity. (4 GB with 8 GB is allowed, and 4 GB with 16 GB is not
allowed.)
Cannot mix main storage cards of more than two capacities. (4 GB with 8 GB is allowed, 4 GB with 8 GB and 16 GB
is not allowed.)
Mixed main storage cards can be in any order.
Important: Fill all slots. An exception is allowed for 16 GB on a 24-way processor and for 24 GB on a 32-way processor.
#3015
8192 MB Main Storage Card ((PSIMM))

The #3015 is used in the Models 870 and 890. The #3015 can be placed in an inside main storage card slot only (slots
0, 1, 2, and 3).
See Model 870 Main Memory Rules on page 203 or Model 890 Main Memory Rules on page 203 for memory
restrictions.
#3016
8192 MB Main Storage Card (PSIMM)

The #3015 is used in the Model 890. The #3016 can be placed in an outside main storage card slot only (slots 4, 5, 6,
and 7).
See Model 890 Main Memory Rules on page 203 for memory restrictions.
#3017

0, 1, 2, and 3)
restrictions.
#3018

and 7).
203
#3020

0, 1, 2, and 3).
restrictions.
#3021

and 7).
#3022
128 MB Main Storage (DIMM 64 Mb technology)

The #3022 is available as a support only feature on the Model 810. It can only be ordered up to the minimum number of
DIMMs are required to meet a pair or quad system memory requirement.
Supported on the Model 810 #2469 processor
#3024
256 MB Main Storage (DIMM 128 Mb technology, unstacked)

Supported on the Model 810 #2469 processor.
#3025
512 MB Main Storage (DIMM 128 Mb technology, stacked)

The #3025 cannot be mixed with the #3026 in pairs or quads.
#3026

#3027
1 GB Main Storage (DIMM 256 Mb technology, stacked)

#3029

204
#3035

0, 1, 2, and 3).
See Model 870 Main Memory Rules on page 203 and Model 890 Main Memory Rules on page 203 for memory
restrictions.
#3036

and 7).
#3042
256 MB Main Storage (DIMM - DDR - 128 Mb technology, unstacked)

Refer to Model 825 Main Memory Rules on page 202 for memory restrictions.
Supported on Model 825 processors.
#3043
512 MB Main Storage (DIMM - DDR - 256 Mb technology, unstacked)

Refer to Model 570 Main Memory Rules on page 200 and Model 825 Main Memory Rules on page 202 for memory
restrictions.
Supported on the Model 570 and 825 processors.
#3044
1024 MB Main Storage (DIMM - DDR - 256 Mb technology, stacked)

Refer to Model 570 Main Memory Rules on page 200 and Model 825 Main Memory Rules on page 202 for memory
restrictions.
Supported on the Model 570 and Model 825 #2486 processors.
#3046
2048 MB Main Storage (DIMM - DDR - 512 Mb technology, stacked)

Refer to Model 570 Main Memory Rules on page 200 and Model 825 Main Memory Rules on page 202 for memory.
Supported on the Model 570 and 825 processors.
#3092
256 MB Main Storage DIMM (DDR - 128 Mb technology, unstacked)

See Model 800 Main Memory Rules on page 201 and Model 810 Main Memory Rules on page 202 for memory
restrictions.
Supported on the Model 800 #2463 and #2464 processors, and Model 810 #2465, #2466, and #2467 processors
#3093
512 MB Main Storage DIMM (DDR - 256 Mb technology, unstacked)

See Model 520 Main Memory Rules on page 197, Model 550 Main Memory Rules on page 198, Model 800 Main
Memory Rules on page 201, and Model 810 Main Memory Rules on page 202 for memory restrictions.
Supported on the Model 520 #8950, #8951, #8952, #8953, #8954 and #8955 (9406) processors, Model 550 #8958
processor, Model 800 #2463 and #2464 processors, and the Model 810 #2465, #2466, and #2467 processors
205
#3094
1 GB Main Storage DIMM (DDR- 256 Mb technology, stacked)

See Model 520 Main Memory Rules on page 197, Model 550 Main Memory Rules on page 198, Model 800 Main
Memory Rules on page 201, and Model 810 Main Memory Rules on page 202 for memory restrictions.
processor, Model 800 #2463 and #2464 processors, and the Model 810 #2465, #2466, and #2467 processors
#3096
2 GB Main Storage DIMM (DDR- 256 Mb technology, stacked)

See Model 520 Main Memory Rules on page 197, Model 550 Main Memory Rules on page 198, and Model 800 Main
Memory Rules on page 201, for memory restrictions.
processor, and Model 800 #2463 processor, and the Model 820 #2465, #2466, #2467 processors
#4400
#4400 1GB DDR2 Main Storage

The #4400 - 1 GB DDR2 Main Storage Consists of two 512 MB DDR2 DIMMs for a total of 1 GB of main storage.
Two available DIMM slots are required.
Supported on Models 515, 520+, 525, and 550+.
#4443
512 MB DDR Main Storage

DDR1 - 256 Mb technology
Ships two 256 MB DIMMs for a total of 512 MB. It is orderable on the #8950 processor with a maximum of two of these
features per system.
See Model 520 Main Memory Rules on page 197.
Supported on Model 520 processors.
#4444
1 GB DDR Main Storage

Ships four 256 MB DIMMs for a total of 1 GB
See Model 520 Main Memory Rules on page 197 and Model 550 Main Memory Rules on page 198.
Supported on Model 520 and 550 processors.
#4445

Ships four 1 GB DIMMs for a total of 4 GB
#4447

206
#4449

DDR1 - 128 Mb technology, stacked
Supported on Model 520 and 550 processors
The #4449 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006. A #4450 16 GB DDR-1 Main Storage is the recommended
replacement.
#4450

DDR1 - 1 GB technology, stacked
#4452

DDR1 memory
Supported on Models 570.
#4454

DDR1 memory, stacked
Supported on Models 570.
#4474

The #4474 - 2 GB DDR2 Main Storage consists of two 1 GB DDR2 DIMMs for a total of 2 GB of main storage.
See Model 515, 520+ and 525 Main Memory Rules on page 197 and Model 550+ Main Memory Rules on page 197 for
memory restrictions.
Supported on all Models 515, 520+, 525, and 550+.
#4475

Supported on all Models 515, 520+, 525, and 550+.
#4477

See Model 515, 520+ and 525 Main Memory Rules on page 197 and Model 550+ Main Memory Rules on page 197 for
memory restrictions.
Supported on all Models 520+, 525, and 550+.
207
#4490

#4491

#4492

The #4492 32 GB DDR-1 Main Storage feature consists of four 8 GB DIMMs for a total of 32 GB of main storage. The #4492
must be installed on a processor card either by itself (other four DIMM slots empty), with another #2292, with feature #4494,
or #7409.
#4494
#4494 - 16 GB DDR-1 Main Storage

The #4494 16 GB DDR1 Main Storage consists of four 4 GB DDR1 DIMMs for a total of 16 GB of main storage. The #4494
must be installed on a processor card either by itself (other four DIMM slots empty), with another #4494, or with features
#4492 or #7049.
Four available memory DIMM slots are required.
#4495
#4495 4/8GB DDR2 Main Storage

The #4495 - 4/8 GB DDR2 Main Storage provides 4 GB of activated DDR2 memory and an additional 4 GB of DDR2
memory available for activation with four 2 GB DIMMs. The 4 GB of additional memory can be activated in increments of
1 GB. If a memory feature is moved to a different system, that system recognizes only 4 GB as available unless additional
memory activations are acquired or already present on that server. For the original system, four 1 GB memory activations
remain and can be used for other CUoD memory features. For special situations, contact IBM CoD administration about
transferring memory activations between systems.
See Model 570+ Main Memory Rules on page 199 for memory restrictions.
Supported on Model 570+ CUoD systems.
#4496
#4496 8/16GB DDR2 Main Storage

The #4496 - 8/16 GB DDR2 Main Storage provides 8 GB of activated DDR2 memory and an additional 8 GB of DDR2
memory available for activation with four 4 GB DIMMs. The 8 GB of additional memory can be activated in increments of
1 GB. If a memory feature is moved to a different server, that server recognizes only 8 GB as available unless additional
memory activations are acquired or already present on that server. For the original server, eight 1 GB memory activations
remain and can be used for other CUoD memory features. For special situations, contact IBM CoD administration about
transferring memory activations between servers.
Supported on Model 570+ CUoD systems.
208
#4497

The #4497 - 16 GB DDR2 Main Storage provides 16 GB of DDR2 system memory with four 4 GB DDR2 DIMMs.
4498

The #4498 - 32 GB DDR2 Main Storage provides 32 GB of DDR2 system memory with four 8 GB DDR2 DIMMs. The #4498
is comprised of 400 MHz DDR2 DIMMs and cannot be mixed with other Model 570 memory on the same processor card.
The #4498 can be mixed with other DDR2 memory in the same enclosure or in the same system.
#7049
#7049 - 8/16 GB DDR1 Main Storage

The #7049 - 8/16 GB DDR-1 Main Storage provides 8 GB of activated memory and an additional 8 GB of memory available
for activation. The 8 GB of additional memory can be activated in increments of 1 GB. The #7049 must be installed on a
processor card either by itself or with another #7049 or with features #4492 or #4494.
#7816
#7816 2/4 GB CUoD Main Storage

The #7816 is a DDR1, 512 Mb, 266 MHz, DRAM DIMMS DDR1 memory card, which provides 2 GB of activated system
memory and an additional 2 GB of system memory available for activation. The 2 GB of additional system memory can be
activated in increments of 1 GB. One #3757 Processor Book Service Shelf is required at the customer site for this upgrade.
#7828
#7828 16 GB Main Storage

The #7828 is a DDR1 memory card, which provides 16 GB of activated system memory with four 4 GB DIMMS on a card.
Initial order or MES. One #3757 Processor Book Service Shelf is required at the customer site if this is an upgrade.
#7829
#7829 32 GB Main Storage

The #7829 is a DDR1 memory card, which provides 32 GB of activated system memory with four 8 GB DIMMS on a card.
One #3757 Processor Book Service Shelf is required at the customer site if this is an upgrade.
#7835
#7835 4/8 GB CUoD Main Storage

The #7835 is a DDR1 memory card, which provides 4 GB of activated system memory and an additional 4 GB of system
memory available for activation. The 4 GB of additional system memory can be activated in increments of 1 GB.
One #3757 Processor Book Service Shelf is required at the customer site for this upgrade.
209
#8195
#8195 - 256 GB Main Storage (32X8)

The #8195 provides 32 #7835 4/8 GB fully activated memory features for a total of 256 GB of active DDR1 system memory.
Only the #8195 feature is shown on the order or in the install records, not the 32 #7835 features. No #7970 memory
activations are required.
Requires 32 empty system memory slots an any of processor boards
Supported only on Model 595.
#8197
#8197 512 GB Main Storage (32x16)

The #8197 provides 32 #7828 16 GB fully activated memory features for a total of 512 GB of active DDR1 system memory.
Only the #8197 feature is shown on the order or in the install records, not the 32 #7828 features.
#8198
#8198 - 512 GB Main Storage (16x32)

The #8198 provides 16 #7829 32 GB fully activated memory features for a total of 512 GB of active DDR1 system memory.
Only the #8198 feature is shown on the order or in the install records, not the 16 #7829 features.
The #8198 was withdrawn from marketing as of 31 January 2006.
#9544
#9544 Base 1 GB DDR Main Storage

Supported on Model 520 #7390, #7391, #7393 Express Editions.
#9545
#9545 Base 4 GB DDR Main Storage

Supported on Model 520 #7395 and #7396 Express Editions.
#9547

Supported on Models 520 #7392, #7394 Express Editions.
#9548
#9548 Base 1GB Main Storage

Provides 1 GB of zero-priced main storage.
#9548 consists of two 512 MB DDR2 DIMMs
Supported on 9405 520 and 9407 515
#9549

#9549 consists of two 1 GB DDR2 DIMMs.
Supported on 9405 520, 9406 520+ and 9407 515.
#9553

#9553 consists of two 2 GB DDR2 DIMMs.
Supported on 9405 520 and 9406 520+
210
4.7 PCI IOP controllers

PCI IOP controllers
PCI Rules
PCI cards are subject to plugging rules. Refer to 4.2, PCI card placement for System i family of processor models on
page 138, for an introduction to PCI. PCI and PCI-X Placement Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4
(Fourth edition), REDP-4011, and PCI Card Placement Rules for the IBM eServer iSeries Server OS/400 Version 5
Release 2: September 2003, REDP-3638, for OS/400 V5R2 and earlier releases, describe the configuration and card
placement rules that you must understand and follow to develop valid configurations. Use these papers as a guide when
configuring IOAs and IOPs so that the system is sized to meet client expectations.
Embedded
IOP
Embedded 32 MB Base PCI IOP (CCIN 284C)

The embedded IOP is standard on every Model 800, 810, and 820 system tower, and the #5075 PCI Expansion Tower.
This IOP is embedded and, therefore, does not require a PCI card slot. The embedded base PCI IOP provides support for
a maximum of four IOAs, including the #5702 PCI-X Ultra Tape Controller or #9767 Base PCI Disk Unit Controller SCSI
IOA, the #9771, #9773, or #9774 PCI 2-Line WAN with integrated modem and the System Console IOA. See #2843 PCI
IOP on page 213 for a list of other supported cards.
#9844
Base IOP
#9844 Base PCI IOP

The #9844 Base PCI IOP (CCIN 2844) is a PCI I/O processor, which drives PCI IOA adapters. It has been included as part
of the base system units for Models 515, 520, 525, 570, 825, 870, and 890, and also can be included as part of the base
with the following expansion towers or units:
#0595/#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower
#5294 1.8m I/O Tower (Quantity of two)
#8094 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack (Quantity of two)
The #9844 Base PCI IOP can be on initial system orders or on MES orders that add #0595/#5095, #5094, #5294, #8094,
or #9094 towers to an installed system. As of 31 January 2006, the #9844 is not included in all systems and towers. See
#9844 Inclusion Rules on page 211 for configuration considerations.
On the #0588/#5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit or Tower, a #9844 Base PCI IOP is not included as part of the base unit or
tower.
See #2844 #9844 on page 214 for a list of other supported cards.
Supported on Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 825, 870, 890, and 9411-100. See the following #9844
Inclusion Rules for additional considerations as inclusion with some model base orders has changed over time.
#9844
Inclusion
Rules
As of 31 January 2006, the #9844 is not always included in system units and expansion towers. The inclusion rules
are as follows:
For expansions ordered after 31 January 2006, a #9844 or #9943 IOP is not included at no-charge. The order process
tools (LVT, manufacturing configurator and marketing configurator) cease to default any IOP for expansion units, but
do require priced IOPs (for example, the #2844) as required to support the IOAs that are ordered. The exception to
this is the base I/O tower (#8294 or #9194) on the Model 595. The marketing configurator defaults to a #9844 on a
Model 595 with a 1.65 GHz processor and allows de-selection of the #9844 if i5/OS V5R4 is ordered.
The existing definition of features #5560, #5561, #5562 and #5563 mirror tower packages include an enclosure
equivalent to a #0595 or #5095. The #0595 and #5095 have included an IOP to be ordered at no-charge. That IOP is
assumed to be part of the #0595 and #5095 in the four mirror tower packages. As of 31 January 2006, #0595 and
#5095 ordered as features, on their own, no longer allow a no-charge IOP to be ordered for them. However, because
each of the four mirror tower package features also include two disk IOAs (that cannot run IOP-less), the intent is to
continue to allow a no-charge IOP (a #9844) to be ordered with each of the four mirroring package features.
Model 520, 550 and 570 systems ordered with processors announced prior to 31 January 2006 (1.5 GHz and
1.65 GHz processors) include one no-charge IOP (a #9844) to be placed in the first IOP slot in the system unit. This is
limited to one #9844 per system including a Model 570 with multiple system unit enclosures.
A Model 595 system ordered with processor features (1.65 GHz) announced prior to 31 January 2006 include one
no-charge IOP (#9844), regardless of whether i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 is ordered. When V5R3 is ordered, this #9844
must be placed in the #8294 or #9194. When V5R4 is ordered, the marketing configurator allows the #9844 to be
de-selected. If the #9844 is ordered, it can be placed wherever required within the system.
211
#9844
Inclusion
Rules
(contd.)
Inclusion rules (contd.)
9406 systems ordered with 31 January 2006 announced processors (1.9 GHz and 2.2 GHz) do not allow any
no-charge IOPs (except in conjunction with mirror tower package features), regardless of whether i5/OS V5R3 or
V5R4 is ordered.
Models 550, 570 and 595 ordered with 31 January 2006 announce processors (1.9 GHz and 2.2 GHz) and i5/OS
V5R3 require an IOP. The required IOP (a #2844) must be purchased.
9405 Model 520 systems ordered with 31 January 2006 announce processors (1.9 GHz) allow a single no-charge IOP
(a #9844 to drive the included twinaxial IOA) to be ordered and placed in the first IOP slot in the system unit.
9406 systems ordered with i5/OS V5R4 support IOP-less in all expansion towers, including the primary I/O tower on
the Model 595 (1.65 GHz and 1.9 GHz processors). A Model 595 ordered with a 1.65 GHz processor and i5/OS V5R4
continues to default a no-charge IOP, even though IOP-less is supported in the primary I/O tower. The marketing
configurator defaults to a #9844 on the interface for all Model 595s when a 1.65 GHz processor is selected. The
#9844 can be deselected if i5/OS V5R4 is also selected. See page 222 for IOP-less placement considerations.
IOPs on existing systems (both priced and no-charge features) migrate when doing model upgrades. No-charge IOP
features are supported but are not orderable, except as explicitly noted otherwise.
Originally announced as included in all Model 515 and 525 Express and 525 Capacity BackUp configurations, as of
9 October 2007, most 515 and 525 configurations no longer include the #9844. 515 Express configuration #2 (#6011)
continues to support the #9844. The following 515 and 525 editions no longer include the #9844:
515:
Express configuration #1 (#6010)

Express configuration #3 (#6021
525:

Capacity BackUp configuration #1 (#6910
Note: If an IOP is required, feature #2844 can be ordered. Alternatively a supported IOP-less adapter (IOA) can be ordered.
For example, if a WAN adapter is required for an Express or Capacity BackUp configuration, a n older WAN adapter that
require an IOP, then you can order #2844. Otherwise, you should consider using the dual mode (smart) IOA WAN
adapters supported by i5/OS V5R4 and LIC level V5R4M5. These can operate without an IOP:
#2893/9693 PCIe 2-Line WAN with Modem (i5/OS, Linux, AIX)
#2894/9694 PCIe 2-Line WAN with Modem (Complex Impedence Matching (CIM)) (i5/OS, Linux, AIX)
#9943
Base IOP
#9943 Base PCI IOP The #9943 Base PCI IOP (CCIN 2843) is included as the base IOP for Model 830 (in the #9074
Base I/O Tower), Model 840 (in either the #9079 Base I/O Tower or the #8079 Optional Base 1.8 M I/O Rack), and Model
890 (in either the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure or #8093 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack) and in the #5074 PCI Expansion Tower
and #5079 1.8 M I/O Tower.
The #5079, #8079, and #8093/#5097 include two base IOPs.
See #2843 PCI IOP on page 213 for a list of other supported cards.
#2843
#9943
#2843 PCI IOP

The #2843/#9943 is a PCI I/O processor with 64 MB of memory that drives up to four PCI IOA adapters on the Models 810,
820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, #5074 PCI Expansion Tower, #5075 PCI Expansion Tower when attached to the Model 820,
and on the #0578/#5078 PCI Expansion Unit, #0588/#5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit, #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower,
#0595/#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower, #5294 1.8m I/O Tower, and the #5079 1.8 M I/O Tower.
The #2843 can be also used on Models 520 (not the 9405 Model 520), 525, 550, 570 (POWER6), and 595.
The following IOAs are supported (driven) by the embedded PCI IOP on the Model 820 and the #2843/#9943 PCI IOP:
#2742 Two-Line WAN IOA
#2743 1 Gbps PCI Ethernet IOA
#2744 PCI 100 Mbps Token Ring IOA
#2749 PCI Ultra Magnetic Media Controller
#2757 PCI-X Ultra RAID Disk Controller
#2760 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet UTP Adapter
#2763 PCI RAID Disk Unit Controller
#2765 PCI Fibre Channel Tape Controller
#2766 PCI Fibre Channel Disk Controller
#2768 PCI Magnetic Media Controller
#2772 PCI Dual WAN/Modem IOA
#2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller
#2787 PCI-X Fibre Channel Disk Controller
212
#2843
#9943
(contd.)
#2843 PCI IOP

#2793 Two-Line WAN IOA with Modem
#2794 Two-Line WAN IOA with Modem
#2805 PCI Quad Modem IOA
#2806 PCI Quad Modem (CIM)
#2817 PCI 155 Mbps MMF ATM IOA
#2849 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter
#4723 PCI 10 Mbps Ethernet Adapter
#4745 PCI 2-line WAN IOA
#4746 PCI Twinaxial IOA
#4750 PCI ISDN BRI U IOA
#4751 PCI ISDN BRI S/T IOA
#4761 PCI Integrated Analog Modem
#4801 PCI Cryptographic Coprocessor
#4805 PCI Cryptographic Accelerator
#4815 PCI ATM 155 Mbps UTP OC3
#4816 PCI ATM 155 Mbps MMF
#4818 PCI ATM 155 Mbps SMF OC3
#4838 PCI 100/10 Mbps Ethernet IOA
#5700 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA
#5701 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet UTP IOA
#5702 PCI-X Ultra Tape Controller
#5703 PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller
#5704 PCI-X Fibre Channel Tape Controller
#5705 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller
#5760 PCI-X Fibre Channel DASD Controller
#9767 Base PCI Disk Unit Controller
#9771 Base PCI 2-Line WAN with integrated modem
#9778 Base PCI RAID Disk Unit Controller
#9793 2-Line WAN IOA with Modem
#9794 2-Line IOA with Modem
Up to five #2843 PCI IOPs can be added to the Model 820 system unit. When attached to a Model 820, the #5075 can
contain or support up to three #2843 PCI IOP features.
On the #5074 PCI Expansion Tower, a PCI IOP is not embedded, but a #9943 Base PCI IOP is included. Up to five #2843
PCI IOPs can be added to a #5074. Up to six #2843 PCI IOPs can be added to a #5078.
On the #5079 1.8 M I/O Tower, a PCI IOP is not embedded, but two #9943 Base PCI IOP are included. Up to 10 #2843 PCI
IOPs can be added to the #5079.
The #9943 can only be on initial system orders or on MES orders that add #5074, #5078, or #5079 towers to an installed
system. The maximum number of #9943s installed on a system is one in the system unit, plus one in each #5074 and two
in each #5079. Refer to PCI and PCI-X Placement Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 (Fourth edition),
REDP-4011, or PCI Card Placement Rules for the IBM eServer iSeries Server OS/400 Version 5 Release 2: September
2003, REDP-3638, for OS/400 V5R2 and earlier releases, for further restrictions.
The #281x ATM, #2750, #2751, and #2761 are not supported with i5/OS V5R3.
213
#2844
#9844
#2844 PCI IOP

The #2844 PCI IOP is a PCI I/O processor, which drives PCI IOA adapters in the Model 270, 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570
(POWER6), 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890 system units and the following expansion towers and units:
#5079 1.8 M I/O Tower
#8079 Optional Base 1.8 M I/O Rack
#8294 Optional Base 1.8 M Rack
#9079 Base I/O Tower (PCI)
The #9844 Base PCI IOP is included with some 5xx, 8xx, and I/O tower orders and not others, depending upon when the
order was placed. See the index entry for #9844 Inclusion Rules for more information.
The following IOAs are supported (driven) by the #2844/#9944 PCI IOP:
CCIN 288E Embedded 10/100 Mbps Ethernet IOA (Model 825 only)
#2742 2-Line WAN IOA
#4801 PCI Cryptographic Coprocessor (not supported by embedded IOP)
#4805 PCI Cryptographic Accelerator (not supported by embedded IOP)
#4811 PCI Integrated xSeries Server
214
#2844
#9844
(contd.)
#2844 PCI IOP

#5738 Controller with 1.5 GB Auxiliary Write Cache with IOP
#2780 Controller with Auxiliary Write Cache
#5736 PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller with IOP
#5737 PCI-X Disk Controller 90MB with IOP
#5738 PCI-X Ultra320 SCSI Disk Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches with IOP
#5739 PCI-X EXP24 Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches with IOP
#5760 PCI-X Fibre Channel DASD Controller
#9767 Base PCI Disk Unit Controller
#9794 2-Line IOA with Modem
#9812 Base PCI Integrated xSeries Server
Placement considerations (maximums) for the #2844 include:
Up to two in the Model 270, 800, and 810 system units
Five in the 820 system tower
Up to five in the Model 820 system unit
Up to three in the Model 825 system unit
Four in the base I/O tower of the Model 830 and 840
Up to four in the Model 830, 840, 870, and 890 system units
Three in a #5075 PCI Expansion Tower
Two in an #0595/#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower
Two can be added to the base #9844 PCI IOP in the #0595/#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower
Five in a #5074 PCI Expansion Tower and #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower
Up to five can be added to the base #9844 PCI IOP in a #5074/#5094
Six in an #0578, #0588, #5078, or #5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit
Up to six can be added in the #0578/#5078 and #0588/#5088
10 in a #5079 1.8 M I/O Tower and #5294 1.8m I/O Tower
Up to 10 can be added to a #5079/#5294
The #5790 PCI Expansion Drawer supports two #2844s with blindswap cards. Two #5790s can be placed side by side
in a rack with #7307/#7311 Dual I/O Unit Enclosure
The #2844 supports a maximum of 16 devices.
The #281x ATM, #2750, #2751, #2761, and #4761 are not supported with i5/OS V5R3.
215
#2847
#2847 PCI IOP for SAN Load Source

The #2847 PCI IOP for SAN Load Source provides the specialized function required to locate the load source disk on an
external disk server attached via a fibre channel adapter, and boot from that load source. The #2847 PCI IOP for SAN Load
Source does not support multipath for the i5/OS load source disk unit, but does support multipath for all other logical unit
numbers (LUNs) attached to this IOP. A minimum of two IOPs are required to enable redundancy. Refer to iSeries and IBM
TotalStorage: A Guide to Implementing External Disk on eServer i5, SG24-7120, for more information.
The #2847 PCI IOP for SAN Load Source supports a maximum of one IOA of either of the following types:
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models system units and on the following expansion towers and units:
#5079 1.8 M I/O Tower
#8079 Optional Base 1.8 M I/O Rack
#9079 Base I/O Tower (PCI)
#9194 Base PCI-x Expansion Tower
#8294 Optional Base 1.8m rack
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 with #0531 i5/OS V5R3M5 LIC
Note: LUN size up to 141 GB is supported for Load Source.
#2790
#2791
#2799
#2790 PCI Integrated Netfinity Server, #2791 PCI Integrated xSeries Server, #2799 PCI Integrated xSeries Server
The #2790 PCI Integrated Netfinity Server contains a 700 MHz processor. The #2791 PCI Integrated xSeries Server
contains an 850 MHz processor. The #2799 PCI Integrated xSeries Server contains a 1.0 GHz Intel Pentium III
processor. Each processor contains four memory slots in the xSeries IOP.
The #2790, #2791, or #2799 is supported in the system unit of the Models 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890, and #5074
PCI Expansion Tower, #5075 PCI Expansion Tower, #5078 PCI Expansion Unit, #0588/#5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit, and
#5079 1.8 M I/O Towers.
Each main storage slot of the #2790, #2791, or #2799 server can contain either a 128 MB, 256 MB, or 1024 MB xSeries
server main storage card, providing a total server main storage capacity ranging from 128 MB to 4096 MB (4 GB). A
minimum of one main storage card is required on the xSeries IOP. A maximum of 3712 MB of memory is addressable.
Allowable main storage increments in MB are 128, 256, 384, 512, 640, 768, 896, 1024, 1152, 1280, 1408, 1536, 1664,
1792, 2048, 2176, 2304, 2432, 2560, 3072, 3200, 3328, and 4096.
The following main storage cards provide server memory for the #2790, #2791, or #2799 when installed in a Model 820,
825, 830, 840, 870, or 890 system unit or attachable HSL towers:
#2795 - 128 MB server memory (withdrawn from marketing as of 19 November 2004)
#2796 - 256 MB server memory (withdrawn from marketing as of 19 November 2004)
#2797 - 1 GB server memory (withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006)
#2895 - 128 MB server memory (withdrawn from marketing as of 19 November 2004 for new orders only; conversions
to feature remain)
#2896 - 256 MB server memory (withdrawn from marketing as of 19 November 2004 for new orders only; conversions
to feature remain)
The #2790, #2791, and #2799 can support PCI 100/16/4 Mbps Token Ring IOAs, PCI 100/10 Mbps Ethernet IOAs, or PCI
1 Gbps Ethernet IOAs in any combination. At least one LAN IOA is required. The supported LAN IOA features are:
216
#2790
#2791
#2799
(contd.)
#2790 PCI Integrated Netfinity Server, #2791 PCI Integrated xSeries Server and #2799 PCI Integrated xSeries
Server
A #0223 100 Mbps Token-Ring specify code is required on the Integrated xSeries Server for each #2744 selected to run
on the #2790, #2791, or #2799.
A #0224 100/10 Mbps Ethernet specify code is required on the Integrated xSeries Server for each #4838 selected to run
on the #2790, #2791, or #2799.
A #0225 1 Gbps Ethernet specify code is required on the Integrated xSeries Server for each #2743/#2760 selected to run
on the #2790, #2791, or #2799.
Up to three IOA LAN features are supported by the #2790, #2791, or #2799, depending on which system or expansion
tower position the #2790, #2791, or #2799 is placed. The #2790, #2791, and #2799 require three PCI card slots on the
Model 820, 830, or 840 system unit backplane. One slot is consumed. The second slot is unusable. The third slot is reduced
to a short card slot, which is then used by the first attached LAN IOA card.
The #2790, #2791, and #2799 do not require a #2843 or #9943. However, placement is limited to specific slots within the
specific system tower and expansion tower.
The #2790, #2791, and #2799 support only the Windows NT, Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 operating
systems. The Windows 2003 Server operating system is supported at OS/400 V5R2 with PTFs and i5/OS V5R3.
The following rules apply:
#0325 IPCS Extension Cable for Windows is the default but can be removed.
#1700 IPCS Keyboard or Mouse for Windows is the default in those countries or regions offering it.
A display must be connected to the #2790 PCI Integrated Netfinity Server to support Windows.
Windows NT is not supported with i5/OS V5R3. Upgrade to Windows 2000.
For a non-U.S. keyboard, mouse and display, see: http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/integratedxseries/
Restrictions:
Native OS/400 functions are not supported.
The #2790, #2791, and #2799 do not support an external host LAN.
The #2849 is not supported on any Integrated Netfinity Server/Integrated xSeries Server.
Refer to PCI Card Placement Rules for the IBM eServer iSeries Server OS/400 Version 5 Release 2: September 2003,
REDP-3638, for complete rules for placing these PCI cards in OS/400 V5R2 and earlier configurations.
Minimum operating system level to support #2743 or #2760 on the #2790, #2791, or #2799: OS/400 V5R1
Minimum operating system level to support #2790 or #2791: OS/400 V4R5 with Cumulative Package C1005450
Minimum operating system level to support #2799: OS/400 V5R1 with PTFs identified in Information APAR II13105 at:
http://www-304.ibm.com/jct01004c/systems/support/supportsite.wss/brandmain?brandind=5000027
The #2790, #2791, or #2799 are Customer Install Features or an IBM Customer Service Representative setup features
depending upon card placement.
#2792
#9792

The #2792 PCI Integrated xSeries Server contains a 1.6 GHz processor and four memory slots in the xSeries IOP. The
#9792 Base PCI Integrated xSeries Server is included with Models 825, 870, and 890 when ordered with the iSeries
Enterprise Edition. The #9792 includes two #9726 server memory features (must be ordered as a pair). The #9792 is
allowed only on new systems that have sufficient PCI slots for manufacturing to place the feature within the system.
Each server memory slot of the #2792 PCI Integrated xSeries Server can contain either a 512 MB server memory card or
1024 MB server memory card. At least two server memory cards are required in the xSeries IOP and must be installed in
identical pairs. Allowable main storage increments in MB are 1024, 2048, 3072, and 4096. A minimum of 1 GB xSeries IOP
memory is required.
The following server memory cards provide memory for the #2792 PCI Integrated xSeries Server:
#0426 - 512 MB Server Memory (withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006)
#0427 - 1 GB Server Memory (withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006)
#9726 - Base 512 MB server memory (available only on the #9792 Base PCI Integrated xSeries Server)
The #2792 PCI Integrated xSeries Server includes one embedded 100/10 Mbps Ethernet LAN controller. The #2792 PCI
Integrated xSeries Server can be ordered without any further LAN cards, but supports up to three LAN IOAs in any
combination depending on which slot the #2792 is placed. The features for the LAN IOAs are:
217
#2792
#9792
(contd.)

One #0223 100 Mbps Token-Ring Specify is required for each #2744 selected to run on the #2792.
One #0226 1 Gbps Ethernet Specify code is required for each #5700 or #5701 selected to run on the #2792.
The #2792 does not require a #2843, #2844, #9943, or #9844 IOP. Placement is limited to specific slots within the system
towers and expansion towers. The #2792 requires two PCI slots and does not extend into a third slot. The #2792 ships with
a keyboard or mouse splitter cable and can support either a standard or USB 1.1 keyboard or mouse. The #2792 PCI
Integrated xSeries Server supports only the Windows 2000 Server and Windows 2003 Server operating systems. Windows
2003 Server operating system is supported with OS/400 V5R2 and required PTFs.
#0325 IPCS Extension Cable for Windows is the default (but can be removed).
#1700 IPCS Keyboard/Mouse for Windows is the default (in those countries or regions offering it).
A display must be connected to the Integrated xSeries Server to support Windows.
For a non-U.S. keyboard or mouse and display, see: http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/integratedxseries/
Native OS/400 functions are not supported. The #2792 does not support external host LAN. The #2849 10/100 Mbps
Ethernet Adapter is not supported on the #2792/#9792 Base PCI Integrated xSeries Server.
Supported in the system unit of Models 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890 and in the following towers: #5074 PCI Expansion
Tower, #5075 PCI Expansion Tower, #0578/#5078 PCI Expansion Unit, #5079 1.8 M I/O Tower, #0588/#5088 PCI-X
Expansion Unit, #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower, #0595/#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower, #5294 1.8m I/O Tower,
#8093/#8094 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack.
Card placement determines whether #2792 is a Customer Install Feature or an IBM Customer Service Representative
setup feature.
The #2792 and #9792 are withdrawn from marketing as of 01 January 2004.
#2890
#2891
#2899
The #2890 PCI Integrated Netfinity Server contains a 700 MHz processor. The #2891 PCI Integrated xSeries Server
contains an 850 MHz processor. The #2899 PCI Integrated xSeries Server contains a 1 GHz Pentium III processor. Each
processor contains four memory slots in the xSeries IOP.
Each main storage slot of the #2890, #2891, or #2899 can contain either a 128 MB, 256 MB, or 1024 MB xSeries server
main storage card, providing a total main storage capacity ranging from 128 MB to 4096 MB (4 GB). Allowable main storage
increments in MB are: 128, 256, 384, 512, 640, 768, 896, 1024, 1152, 1280, 1408, 1536, 1664, 1792, 2048, 2176, 2304,
2432, 2560, 3072, 3200, 3328, and 4096. A minimum of 128 MB xSeries IOP memory is required. When the maximum
memory is installed, only 3712 MB is addressable.
The following main storage cards provide server memory for the #2890, #2891, and #2899:
#2795 - 128 MB Server Memory (withdrawn from marketing as of 19 November 2004)
#2796 - 256 MB Server Memory (withdrawn from marketing as of 19 November 2004)
The #2890, #2891, or #2899 can support PCI 100/16/4 Mbps Token Ring IOAs, PCI 100/10 Mbps Ethernet IOAs, or PCI
1 Gbps Ethernet IOAs in any combination. At least one LAN IOA is required. The following LAN IOA features:
A #0223 100 Mbps Token-Ring Specify is required on the #2890/#2891/#2899 PCI Integrated xSeries Server for each
#2744 selected to run on the #2890/#2891/#2899.
A #0224 100/10 Mbps Ethernet Specify is required on the #2890/#2891/#2899 PCI Integrated xSeries Server for each
A #0225 1 Gbps Ethernet Specify is required on the #2890/#2891/#2899 PCI Integrated xSeries Server for each #2743 or
218
#2890
#2891
#2899
(contd.)
Up to three IOA LAN features can be supported by the #2890, #2891, or #2899, depending on which system or expansion
tower position the #2890, #2891, or #2899 is placed. The #2890, #2891, or #2899 requires three PCI card slots. One slot
is consumed. The second slot is unusable. The third slot is reduced to a short card slot, which is then used by the first
attached LAN IOA card.
The #2890, #2891, or #2899 does not require a #2843 or #9943, but placement is limited to specific slots within the various
system towers and expansion towers. The #2890, #2891, or #2899 supports only the Windows NT, Windows 2000, and
Windows 2003 operating systems. Ships with a keyboard or mouse splitter cable. The following considerations apply:
#0325 IPCS Extension Cable for Windows is the default (but can be removed).
#1700 IPCS Keyboard/Mouse for Windows is the default (in those countries or regions that offer it).
A display must be connected to the Integrated xSeries Server to support Windows.
Restrictions:
The #2890, #2891, or #2899 does not support external host LAN.
The #2849 is not supported on any Integrated Netfinity Server/Integrated xSeries Server.
Minimum operating system level to support #2890/#2891: OS/400 V4R5 with Cumulative Package C1005450
Minimum operating system level to support #2899: OS/400 V5R1 with PTFs identified in Information APAR II13105 at:
Minimum operating system level to support #2743 or #2760 on the #2890, #2891, or #2899: OS/400 V5R1
The #2890, #2891, or #2899 is supported (for migration only) in the Model 800, Model 810, and the #5074 PCI Expansion
Tower, #5075 PCI Expansion Tower, #0578/#5078 PCI Expansion Unit, and #5079 1.8 M I/O Tower, #0595/#5095 PCI-X
Expansion Tower, #5094/#5294 Expansion Towers, and #0588/#5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit.
The #2890, #2891, and #2899 are Customer Install Features.
The #2899 was withdrawn from marketing as of 21 November 2003 for new orders. Conversion to feature #2899 can be
available.
A #4811, #4812, or #4813 PCI Integrated xSeries Server is the recommended replacement, depending upon system IBM
System i model.
#2892

The #2892 PCI Integrated xSeries Server contains a 1.6 GHz processor and four memory slots in the xSeries IOP. Each
server memory slot of the #2892 PCI Integrated xSeries Server can contain either a 512 MB server memory card or a 1024
MB server memory card, providing allowable main storage options of 1024 MB, 2048 MB, 3072 MB, and 4096 MB. All
server memory cards must be installed in identical pairs.
The following main storage cards provide memory for the #2892 PCI Integrated xSeries Server:
#0446 - 512 MB Server Memory
#0447 - 1 GB Server Memory
The #2892 PCI Integrated xSeries Server includes one embedded 100/10 Mbps Ethernet LAN controller. The #2892 can
be ordered without any further LAN cards. The #2892 supports up to three, in any combination (depending into which
system or expansion tower position the #2892 is placed), of the following LAN IOA features:
One #0223 100 Mbps Token-Ring Specify is required for each #2744 selected to run on the #2892.
One #0226 1 Gbps Ethernet Specify is required for each #5700 or #5701 selected to run on the #2892.
The #2892 PCI Integrated xSeries Server does not require a #2843, #2844, #9943 or #9944 IOP, but placement is limited
to specific slots within the various system towers and expansion towers. The #2892 requires two PCI slots and does not
extend into a third slot. The #2892 supports only the Windows 2000 Server and the Windows.NET Server operating
systems. The #2892 ships with a standard keyboard/mouse splitter cable, and can support either a standard or USB 1.1
keyboard, mouse, or both.
#0325 (IPCS Extension Cable for Windows) is the default (but can be removed).
#1700 (IPCS Keyboard/Mouse for Windows) is the default (in those countries or regions offering it).
A display must be connected to the #2790 PCI Integrated Netfinity Server to support Windows.
219
#2892
(contd.)

For the Models 800 and 810, the #2892 is orderable for placement in the #5074, #5094, #0578, #0588, #5078 and #5088
expansion towers or units and in the #5079 and #5294 on the Model 810.
Native OS/400 functions are not supported. The #2892 PCI Integrated xSeries Server does not support external host LAN.
The #2849 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter is not supported on the #2892.
Supported on the Model 270, 800, and 810 system units, on the #5075 PCI Expansion Tower when it is attached to the
Model 270.
Supported in the #5075 PCI Expansion Tower and #0595/#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower when these towers are attached
to a Model 800 or 810.
Card placement determines whether the #2892 is a Customer Install Feature or an IBM Customer Service Representative
setup feature.
A #4811, #4812, or #4813 PCI Integrated xSeries Server is the recommended replacement, depending on IBM System i
model.
#4710
#4810
#9710
#4710/#4810/#9710 PCI Integrated xSeries Server

The #4710, #4810, or #9710 PCI Integrated xSeries Servers have 2 GHz processor and four memory slots. Each server
memory slot can contain one of the following features, providing a total main storage capacity from 1024 MB to 4096 MB.
The feature numbers of the server memory cards are:
#0426/#9726 - 512 MB Server Memory (withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006)
A minimum of two server memory cards are required and must be installed in identical capacity pairs. On model upgrades
or MES orders, a #4710/#4810 can be ordered without memory features if usable supported memory features already exist
on the installed system.
The #4710, #4810, or #9710 includes one embedded 100/10 Mbps Ethernet LAN controller. The following LAN IOAs are
supported in combination:
The #4710/#4810 can be ordered without any LAN IOA features.
When a LAN feature is used in conjunction with a #4710, the following ordering rules apply:
One #0223 100 Mbps Token-Ring Specify is required for each #2744 driven.
One #0226 1 Gbps Ethernet Specify is required for each #5700/#5701 driven.
Up to three IOA LAN features can be supported by the #4710/#4810, depending on the system unit or tower position
into which the #4710, #4810, or #9710 is placed.
The #4710, #4810, or #9710 do not support external host LAN.
The #4710, #4810, or #9710 do not require a #2843, #2844, #9943 or #9844. Placement is limited to specific slots within
the selected system unit and expansion tower. The #4710, #4810, or #9710 require two PCI card slots, and do not hang
over a third slot. The #4710, #4810, or #9710 ship with a standard keyboard and mouse splitter cable and can support
either standard or USB 1.1 keyboard, mouse, or both. Windows 2000 Server with PTFs and Windows 2003 Server
operating systems are supported.
The following apply:
#0325 (IPCS Extension Cable for Windows) is the default (but can be removed).
A minimum of 1 GB server memory is required.
#1700 (IPCS keyboard or mouse for Windows) is default (in countries offering it).
A display must be connected to the Integrated Server to support Windows.
For a non-US keyboard/mouse and display, see: http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/integratedxseries/
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R2 with PTFs identified in Information APAR II13609 at:
The #4710/#9710 is supported in the Model 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 and the system unit of Models 820, 825, 830, 840,
870, and 890. It is also supported in the following expansion towers when attached to these models: #0578, #0588, #0595,
#5074, #5075, #5078, #5079, #5088, #5094, #5095, and #5294, #8079, #8094, #9079, and #9094.
220
#4710
#4810
#9710
(contd.)
#4710/#4810/#9710 PCI Integrated xSeries Server

The #4810 is supported in Model 270, 800, and 810 system units. It is also supported in the following towers when attached
to the #5075, #0578/#5078, #0588/#5088, and #0595/#5095 Expansion Towers. For Models 800 and 810, if the #4810 is
placed in a #5094 or #5294, the client install instructions indicate that an IBM Customer Service Representative must be
called for card installation.
The #9710 is supported in the Model 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 and the system unit of Models 825, 870, and 890. It is
also supported in the following expansion towers when attached to the #0578, #0588, #0595, #5074, #5075, #5078, #5079,
#5088, #5094, #5095, and #5294 Expansion Towers.
A #4710 is the recommended replacement for the #2792 PCI Integrated xSeries Server.
A #4810 is the recommended replacement for the #2892 PCI Integrated xSeries Server.
The #4710, #4810 and #9710 are withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006. A #4811, #4812, or #4813 PCI Integrated
xSeries Server is the recommended replacement, depending on IBM System i model.
#9726
#9726 Base 512 MB Server Memory

The #9726 provides 512 MB DDR server memory for the #9792 Base PCI Integrated xSeries Server. The #9726 Base 512
MB Server Memory is allowed on the following editions, with a maximum of two per edition:
The #9726 Base 512 MB Server Memory must be ordered in pairs.
The #9726 is allowed on new systems or upgrades from non 810, 825, 870, or 890 systems into the 810, 825, 870, or 890
models. If the client does not select the #9726 on the initial order, they are not entitled to receive the feature in the future.
Supported on Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 825, 870, 890, and 9411-100.
#9744
#9744 Base PCI IOP

The #9744 Base PCI IOP is a base PCI I/O processor that drives PCI IOA adapters in the system unit and in HSL attached
PCI or PCI-X I/O expansion towers/units. One #9744 can drive a maximum of four IOAs, subject to configuration
restrictions. One #9744 is the default on each order, but can be removed, when a #4811, #4812, #4813, #9812, or #9813
PCI-X Integrated xSeries Server is on the order.
Supported on Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 825, 870, 890, and 9411-100.
4.7.1 IOP-less IOAs and placement

Starting in 2006, the System i5 models started supporting IOAs, also referred to as
controllers, that can operate with or without a controlling IOP. As a result, there are three
classes or types of IOAs that are supported by i5/OS:
IOP controlled IOAs

IOP-less
IOP-less only IOAs, such as the port Ethernet LAN adapter that is embedded in the
515, 520, 525, 550,and 570 processor enclosure (system unit) and its I/O tower or
drawer pluggable feature #5706 PCI-X 1 Gbps Ethernet-TX IOA or #5707 PCI-X 1
Gbps Ethernet-SX IOA
Single mode IOP-less IOAs that are not recognized by IOPs
These IOAs can be placed virtually anywhere relative to installed IOPs without causing
problems.
Dual mode IOAs (also referred to as smart IOAs), such as the #5582, #5583, #5736,
#5737, #5739, #5775, #5776, #5778, #5781, #5782, #5799, and #5800 disk controller and
their auxiliary write cache feature SCSI adapters
If an IOP controls the IOA, order the IOA by the column A feature code. Place the IOA
after an IOP on the same EADs boundary. To run in IOP-less mode, place the dual-mode
IOA in front of (that is, in a lower) EADs address of any IOP in an EADs.
221
Dual-mode capability is dependent on i5/OS release level. See the following information
for details. If the dual-mode IOA is placed in a slot that is under IOP control, then the IOA
runs as IOP-based. If the slot is not controlled by an IOP, then the adapter runs in
IOP-less mode.
IOP control of a dual-mode adapter always takes precedence over IOP-less, except in
specific load source situations.
IOP control: An IOP in one partition cannot control an IOA in a different partition.
For the latest information about IOAs without or with an IOP, refer to PCI and PCI-X
Placement Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 (Fourth edition),
REDP-4011.
The placement details that are documented in this paper include:
Features are supported with an IOP with i5/OS V5R3.
i5/OS V5R4 is required to run in IOP-less mode except for the 1.9 GHz Model 520. This
Model 520 supports the use of dual-mode IOAs and controllers running in IOP-less mode
in the system unit with i5/OS V5R3 and V5R3M5 LIC. Dual-mode IOAs can run in
IOP-less mode in attached I/O towers.
The 1.9 and 2.2 GHz Models 550 and 570 support the use of dual-mode IOAs and
controllers running in IOP-less mode in the system unit with OS/400 V5R4. Dual-mode
cards can also run in IOP-less mode in attached I/O towers.
Dual-mode IOAs and controllers are not supported running in IOP-less mode in the
system unit of the 1.5 and 1.65 GHz Models 520, 550, or 570. Dual-mode cards can run in
IOP-less mode in attached I/O towers.
An Integrated xSeries Server can be placed in the 1.9 GHZ Model 520 system unit. An
Integrated xSeries Server continues to require an IOP.
Conversions between direct-attach, IOP- required, and IOP-less features are available.
Controllers are auto-configured as IOP-less when possible.
Direct access IOAs run without an IOP when used in a System i AIX or Linux partition.
Refer to the feature descriptions in this chapter for the IOA description and limitations for
each feature. Refer to PCI and PCI-X Placement Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3
and V5R4 (Fourth edition), REDP-4011, for the latest information about IOA placement rules.
222
4.8 Workstation controllers and console features

Workstation controllers and console features
#4746
#9746

The #4746 PCI Twinaxial IOA provides support for up to 40 active twinaxial displays and printer addresses or up to 120
active shared sessions. A 20-foot (6.2 m) cable with an eight-port expansion (breakout) box is included with this adapter.
Each port supports seven attached devices, allowing for 56 total attached devices, of which only 40 can be active.
The #9746 Base PCI Twinaxial IOA is allowed only on new systems. If the client does not select the feature on the initial
order, they are not entitled to receive the feature in the future. The #9746 requires an #0864 and a #7400.
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100.
The #4746 is a chargeable Customer Install Feature. The #9746 is the same IOA but indicates no charge as part of an initial
Model 20 Express order.
#5540
#5540 System Console on Twinaxial Workstation IOA

A system console specify code must be selected on each new order. When the #5540 is on the order, the system console
is driven by a #4746 PCI Twinaxial IOA.
Supported on Models (including + models) 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595; Models 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870,
and 890.
#5544
#5544 System Console on Operations Console

A system console specify code must be selected on each new order. When a #5544 is specified, the primary i5/OS system
console is driven by an IOP-based WAN adapter. The system console can be connected to a #0367 Operations Console
PCI Cable attached to a #4745 PCI 2-line WAN IOA or a #9771, #9793, or #9794 Base PCI 2-Line WAN with integrated
modem.
840, 870, 890 models.
#5546
#5546 System Console on 100 Mbps Token Ring

is LAN attached to a #2744 PCI 100 Mbps Token Ring IOA. This LAN adapter must be dedicated to console functions and
cannot be used for any other purpose.
One #0367 Operations Console PCI Cable is required to be on the order or present on the system. One #0367 per system
is sufficient, regardless of the number of LAN consoles (via LPAR) defined per system.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R1, except V5R3 or later required on System i5 models.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models; Models 800, 810, 820, 830, 840, 870, and 890.
#5548
#5548 System Console on 100 Mbps Ethernet

is LAN attached to a #4838 PCI 100/10 Mbps Ethernet IOA or a #2849 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter. This LAN adapter
must be dedicated to console functions and cannot be used for any other purpose. The #5548 is specifically used for
IOP-based IOAs.
The embedded Ethernet ports on the Model 520, 550 and 570 system units can be used for LAN console when running
under i5/OS V5R3 and with Licensed Internal Code V5R3M5 installed or V5R4 and Licensed Internal code V5R4M5
installed. See the #0553 specify code.
One #0367 Operations Console PCI Cable is required to be on the order or present on the system. One #0367 per system
is sufficient, regardless of the number of LAN consoles (via LPAR) defined per system.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R1 except V5R3 or later required on System i5 models.
870, 890 models.
223
#5550
#5550 System Console on HMC

function is driven by the HMC via an Ethernet connection to a dedicated HMC port on the system unit. The HMC is required
for LPAR, Capacity Upgrade on Demand, Concurrent Maintenance and Upgrade and Redundant Service Processor (SP)
operations.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3. Model POWER6 570 requires i5/OS V5R4 and Licensed Internal Code
V5R4M5 or later.
For POWER6 570, HMC level V7R3.1.0 or later is required. Firmware level must be at version EM310_048_048 or later.
HMC V7R3.1.0 can also operate with POWER5 technology-based systems running at system firmware level 240_320 or
later.
#5552
#5552 System Console on Thin Console

function is provided by a 9944-100 Thin Console attached via a standard Ethernet cable to either of the system unit HMC
ports. The 9944-100 is made by Neoware for IBM. An alternative to twinax-attached 5250, HMC, and Operations Console
(LAN or Direct attach), the Thin Console is designed to provide a 5250 interface to a single i5/OS partition.
IBM does not support environments with both an HMC and Thin Console concurrently active on the same machine.
Neoware provides hardware warranty and software support.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4.
Supported on Models (including + models) 515, 520, 525 and 550.
Note: Thin Console might not be a choice in some geographies.
#5553
#5553 System Console Ethernet w/o IOP

A system console specify code must be selected on each new order. When the #5553 System Console Ethernet w/o IOP
is on the order, it indicates the use of an embedded system unit LAN port for the system console connection using
Operations Console (LAN). This LAN port is then dedicated to the console function and no longer available for other
functions.
On Models 515, 520 and 525, the embedded LAN console port is T5
On Model 550, the embedded LAN console port is T9
On Model POWER5 570, the embedded LAN console port is T6
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 with LIC V5R3M5 on Model 520+; i5/OS V5R4 required for Models 515, 520,
525, 550, 550, 570 and 570 (POWER6).
#5557

The #5557 provides a system console connection through an IOP-less Ethernet LAN adapter. A system console specify
code must be selected on each new order. A #5706 or #5707 PCI-X IOP-less Ethernet LAN adapter is required. When the
#5706 or #5707 is used for LAN console, one port of the LAN adapter is dedicated to console support functions and cannot
be used for any other purpose.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 and Licensed Internal Code V5R3M5 or i5/OS V5R4 and later releases.
Supported on all 595 models at i5/OS V5R3 and Licensed Internal Code V5R3M5 and later.
Supported on all System i5 Models (including + models) 520, 550, and 570 at i5/OS V5R4.
4.8.1 Supported partition consoles summary

Supported console types:
HMC
HMC V7R3.1.0 operates with POWER6 technology-based systems running at system
firmware level EM310_048_048 or later.
HMC V7R3.1.0 can also operate with POWER5 technology-based systems running at
system firmware level SF240_299 or later.
HMC Version 5.2.1 and HMC Version 6.1.2 or later can also operate with POWER5
technology-based systems running at system firmware level SF240_299 or later.
224
IOP-less LAN consoles

#5636/#5639 IVE/HEA (default)
On the HMC:
i. Select the managed system.
ii. Select the partition.
iii. Click Manage Profile and you see the Managed Profiles window.
The partition operating system must define one Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (LHEA)
that represents a logical port associated with one of the physical ports of the
associated physical Host Ethernet Adapter (Integrated Virtual Ethernet (IVE)) on the
system. Refer to the following publications to help you configure an LHEA as a partition
console:
System i Operations Guide for i5/OS Consoles, SA76-0128

https://www-01.ibm.com/servers/resourcelink/lib03030.nsf/pagesByDocid/55719E40DD8
536A7852573500046E6EF?OpenDocument&pathID=36
System i and System p Logical Partitioning Guide, SA76-0098

https://www-01.ibm.com/servers/resourcelink/lib03030.nsf/pagesByDocid/0E6125F89F8
B8EF6852572E6007E884D?OpenDocument&pathID=36
#5767/#5768
#5706/#5707
To learn about the procedure to enable or disable a specific IOA and port for a partition
console, refer to the IBM Systems Hardware Information Center at:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/scope/hw/index.jsp
When you reach the information center, navigate through the topics Managing consoles,
interfaces, and terminals Managing i5/OS consoles Managing Operations
Console Working with Operations Console Working with the console service
functions (65+21) Using the console service functions (65+21).
IOP-less Async (Direct cable #0367)
#9693/#9694
#6833/#6834
225
IOP Consoles
#2849 Upgrade, withdrawn from marketing (1 June 2006)
#2742 Async (Direct cable #0367)
#4746/2746 PCI Twinaxial Workstation IOA
The following table summarizes operations console support on various System i adapter
features, i5/OS releases, and processor technologies.
Table 4-1 Adapters supporting i5/OS Operations Console PC Workstation
Console
Connection
Type
Adapter Feature Number
Supported on 800, 810,

825, 870, 890 /
Minimum LIC level
POWER5 515, 520, 525,

570, 595
/ Minimum LIC level
POWER6 - requires
minimum LIC level
V5R4M5
LAN
#2744 (IOP reqd)
Yes, V5R2M0
Yes, V5R3M0
Yes
#4838/2838 (IOP reqd)
Yes, V5R2M0
Yes, V5R3M0
Not supported
#2849 (IOP reqd)
Yes, V5R2M0
Yes, V5R3M0
Yes
POWER5
515,520,525,550,570
Processor Enclosure 2
port adapter (IOP-less)
No
Yes, V5R3M5 (default)
Not
#5706/#5707 (IOP-less)
No
Yes, V5R3M5
Yes
#5767/#5768 (IOP-less)
No
No
POWER6 only
#5636/#5639 IVE/HEA
(POWER6 570 Enclosure
2 or 4 port adapter IOP-less)
No
No
POWER6 only, (default)
#2742 (with/without IOP)
Yes, V5R2M0
IOP w/ V5R3M0 /
IOP-less w/V5R4M5
Yes /
IOP-less
#6805 (IOP-less)
No
Yes /
V5R4M5 POWER5 only
Yes
#2793/#2893/#9793 (with
or without IOP)
Yes, V5R2M0 (IOP

required)
Yes /
IOP-less w/V5R4M5
Yes /
IOP-less
Async direct
attach/remote
support
Yes / IOP-less
#2794/2894/#9794 (PCIe
no IOP, requires POWER6
system)
4745/2745 (IOP reqd)
Yes, V5R2M0
Yes, V5R3M0
Not supported
9771/2771 (IOP reqd)
Yes, V5R2M0
Yes, V5R3M0
Not supported
#6803/6804/#6833/#9493/
#9494/#9933/#9934
(IOP-less)4
No
Yes /
IOP-less w/ V5R4M5
Yes
Notes:
1. Supported PC workstation operating systems include: Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional, and Windows
Vista. Windows Vista can only be used for a local console on a network configuration. You cannot use Windows Vista for a local
console directly attached or for a remote console. The System i Access for Windows versions, for both the local console and the
remote console, must be at the same level. PC5250 or IBM Personal Communications V5.9 (V5.7 with CICS system definition
data set (CSD) 1 minimum) needs to be installed for the console only. It is not required for configurations that are used only for
remote control panel.
2. Some IOAs originally required a controlling IOP. In later releases, the IOA could run without an IOP. In some cases the without an
IOP could be ordered under a different feature. However, many of these older IOAs and new IOP-less feature number cards
report as the same CCIN value. Newer License Internal Microcode (LIC) supports the IOP-less mode. Some older processor
technology models do not support IOP-less mode.
3. LIC level V5R3Mn is associated with i5/OS V5R3M0. LIC level V5R4Mn is associated with i5/OS V5R4M0
4. Not formally supported. Should work.
226
All of these consoles provide a 5250 workstation interface. In 4.8, Workstation controllers
and console features on page 223, we list the specific codes for the console offerings.
Refer to the following publications for more information about System i console support:
https://www-01.ibm.com/servers/resourcelink/lib03030.nsf/pagesByDocid/55719E40DD8536A785
2573500046E6EF?OpenDocument&pathID=36
At V5R4, according to this publication, Operations Console supports the following

adapters:
Operations Console (LAN): #2744, #2849, POWER5 processor enclosure embedded
two-port adapter; the #5706/#5707 adapter, #5767/#5768 adapter, and Integrated
Virtual Ethernet (HEA) features #5636 and #5639
For operations console support, the IOP-less LAN adapters #5706/#5709,
#5767/#5768, #5636, and #5639 all require i5/OS V5R4 and licensed internal code
(microcode) level V5R4M5. i5/OS V5R3 supports IOP-less LAN adapters for
Operations Console with licensed internal code V5R3M5 installed.
On the two port LAN adapters, except the #5636, the LAN console port must be:
The left-most or top port (labeled port 0 or A) on POWER5 Models 515, 520, 525,
550, and 570 embedded in a processor enclosure two-port adapter
The left-most or top port (labeled port 0 or A), depending on the horizontal or
vertical position of the enclosure for #5706/#5707, or #5767/#5768 in I/O tower or
drawer enclosure
For POWER6 only processor enclosure two-port #5636 adapter, the left-most or
top-most port, depending on the horizontal or vertical position of the enclosure
For POWER6 only processor enclosure four-port #5639 adapter, the left-most or
top-most port.
The port used for Operations Console is dedicated only for Operations Console work
and to a single active partition.
For all adapters, except #5636 or #5639, after a port is assigned to a partition for
general TCP/IP functions (non-console), all ports on that adapter are also owned by
the partition. For additional details, including Operations Console over #5636 or #5639,
read System i Operations Guide for i5/OS Consoles SA76-0128.
Operations Console (Direct): #2742, #2793/#2794, and #2893/#2894 (576C)
#2744, #2849, and #2742 adapters: The #2744, #2849, and #2742 adapters require
an IOP and can only be located in an expansion unit.
i5/OS Console Choices (V5R3 and V5R4) white paper
ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/common/ssi/rep_wh/n/ISW00530USEN/ISW00530USEN.PDF
Hardware Management Console V7 Handbook, SG24-7487 (Redbooks publication)

For additional documentation, refer to Related publications on page 619.
227
4.9 LAN and WAN adapters

LAN and WAN adapters
Comm.
Restrictions apply when using specific adapters and I/O processors. See Comm. Restrictions on page 230, for
Restrictions communications rules and restrictions. Also see PCI and PCI-X Placement Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3
and V5R4 (Fourth edition), REDP-4011, or PCI Card Placement Rules for the IBM eServer iSeries Server OS/400 Version
5 Release 2: September 2003, REDP-3638, for further placement rules.
Networking
Fault
Tolerance
Starting with OS/400 (i5/OS) V5R2M0 networking fault tolerance configuration support enables elimination of a single point
of an Ethernet LAN-attached network failure.
Requirements:
Two or more physical network adapters must be connected to a separate link partner (hub or switch).
Each link partner has a physical connection to each router to ensure fault tolerance.
This cabling configuration prevents a single hardware failure from interrupting transmissions to or from the System i
environment. To get full fault tolerance in this configuration, you must also configure i5/OS Virtual IP; refer to IBM Software
Technical Document 25191404, Fault Tolerance Configuration for the IBM System i Server Using Virtual IP, which
discusses fault tolerance configuration for the IBM System i products using RIP and Virtual IP:
http://www-912.ibm.com/s_dir/slkbase.NSF/1ac66549a21402188625680b0002037e/6f3c2d316d97cd9286256b140048c770
?OpenDocument
Comm.
Configuration considerations for extra high performance adapters, including 5717, 5771, 5772, 5721, 5722, 1981, 5718,
Restrictions 1982, 5719, 1954, 5740:
Performance Maximum: 2 adapters (for example, #5740) per 2 active processor cores and 1 per PCI Host Bridge
(PHB) for best performance for the specific adapter and system-wide.
Connectivity Maximum: 4 adapter (for example, #5740 per active processor core and 2 per PHB for connectivity
when performance is not a factor.
Pre-provisioning Maximum: 4 adapters per processor core. Operating more than 4 adapters can results in data
overrun, service time out to be logged and affect overall system performance.
Note: Not all operating systems support each adapter. For purposes of this documentation, consider PCI Host Bridge to be
the same as the Multi-Adapter Bridge term familiar to IBM i customers.
Configuration considerations for extra high performance adapters, including 5767, 5768, 1983, 1984, 5706, 5707, 1978,
1979, 5700, 5701:
Performance Maximum: 4 adapters per active processor core for best adapter performance and system performance.
Connectivity Maximum: 8 adapters per active processor core when performance is not a factor.
Pre-provisioning Maximum: 8 adapters per active processor core. Operating more than 8 adapters per active
processor, can results in data overrun, service time out to be logged and affect overall system performance.
Note: Not all operating systems support each adapter.
228
Basic communications restrictions when using the MFIOP, #2629, #2699, #2720, #2721, #2745, #2809, #2824, and other
Comm.
Restrictions communications functions are identified and briefly summarized here:
Maximum protocol speeds on the EIA-232/ITU V.24 electrical interfaces:
(contd.)
64 Kbps for Synchronous PPP, BSC, SDLC, and X.25
115.2 Kbps for Asynchronous protocols (including Asynchronous PPP)
Maximum protocol speeds on the ITU V.35:
Permitted only on 20-ft (6.2 m) cable
2.048 Mbps for Synchronous PPP, SDLC, and Frame Relay
230.4 Kbps for Asynchronous PPP
640 Kbps for X.25
64 Kbps for BSC
Speeds faster than 512 Kbps can require either the looped or inverted clocking to be configured.
Maximum protocol speeds on the EIA-449/ITU V.36:
230.4 Kbps for Asynchronous PPP
640 Kbps for X.25
64 Kbps for BSC
Looped clocking is required on cables longer than 20 ft (6 m).
Maximum protocol speeds on the ITU X.21 electrical interfaces:
Permitted only on 20-ft (6.2 m) cable
640 Kbps for X.25
Only one Frame Relay or one X.25 communication line is allowed per IOP.
One high-speed line is permitted per IOP.
ASYNC and ASYNC PPP above 115.2 Kbps is a high-speed line.
Frame Relay, SDLC, SYNC PPP, and X.25 above 64 Kbps is a high-speed line.
High-speed lines are supported on ITU X.21, ITU V.35 20-ft (6 m) cables, or EIA-449/ITU V.36 electrical
interfaces.
229

Comm.
Restrictions
(contd.)
No high-speed communication line is allowed when a #2750, #2751, or #2761 is installed under the same I/O
processor.
If it is desired to run multiple emulated LAN lines on an #281x ATM IOA, then the following restrictions must be
satisfied:
The #281x ATM IOA must be running under a dedicated #2824 PCI Feature Controller (no other IOAs of any
type).
The number of emulated LANs running on the #281x ATM IOA is limited to a maximum of two, one token ring and
one Ethernet.
Frame Relay restrictions:
Minimum line speed 56 Kbps
Frame Relay is not allowed on EIA-232/V.24 electrical interface
Other IOAs allowed under same #2809 PCI LAN/WAN/Workstation IOP or #2824 PCI Feature Controller, one of two
restrictions:
Either a #281x or #2838
A #2718 or #2729 and maximum of one #2721, #2722, #2723, #2724, #2729, #2745, or #2746
IPX is supported on Frame Relay, LAN, and ATM.
IPX is supported only on OS/400 V5R1 and earlier releases. IPX is not supported on OS/400 V5R2 or later
releases.
Devices running IPX over the Integrated xSeries Server is limited to 2400 routes and 2400 services.
Devices running IPX are limited to 1400 routes and 1400 services when:
#2723, #2724, or #2838 IOAs are not controlled by the Integrated xSeries Server.
Frame Relay running over a #2721, #2745, or #2699 IOA.
SNA restrictions: None of the IOP-less WAN adapters or 1 Gbps LAN adapters directly support SNA. For the WAN
adapters this means the Create Line SDLC (CRTLINSDLC) command is not supported. Some of these adapters can
run with or without an IOP. To use an SDLC line description and thus run direct SNA, the adapter must run
associated with a supported IOP. Alternatively SNA protocol can run over these IOP-less adapters encapsulated in
TCP/IP protocol using AnyNet or, starting with i5/OS V5R4 or later, Enterprise Extenders (EE) support. EE is
preferred. EE is preferred. See the iSeries Information Center for information about how to configure AnyNet and EE
support: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/
SDLC restrictions:
Maximum of 64 remote locations per #2809, #2824, or #2629 IOP.
X.25 restrictions:
Limit of 16 virtual circuits (16 remote locations).
Limit of 64 virtual circuits (64 remote locations) in the #5065 Storage/PCI Expansion Tower.
Speeds faster than 512 Kbps can require either looped or inverted clocking to be configured.
The other port of the #2721 or #2745 can be used as a low-speed communications line.
No more than seven #2629s can be placed into each #5072 1063 Mbps System Unit Expansion Tower.
Bisync is always limited to a maximum of 64 Kbps.
Not allowed on the #2720/#9720 if this combination of adapters is installed on the base MFIOP:
#2722 or #2746 plus one #2723 or #2724
Additional restrictions include:

V.25 autocall cable is not supported.
Select standby mode is not supported.
#2750, #2751, #2761, #4750, #4751, #4761 are not supported on i5/OS V5R3 and later releases.
#2817, #481x #28x ATM not supported. Upgrade to Ethernet.
Important:
It is imperative that these restrictions be understood and followed. If they are not followed, it is possible that a
hardware configuration can be built that marginally works and later quits working when the machine is upgraded to
future software releases.
For best performance, we recommend that no other features be intermixed with a #2838 PCI 100/10 Mbps Ethernet
IOA or a #2811, #2812, #2815, #2816, #2818, or #2819 ATM IOA on a #2809 PCI LAN/WAN/Workstation IOP.
The quantity and speed of each communications line must be known. Complete this table to determine the total
communications CPW that is required. The #2750, #2751, and #2761 count as eight low-speed communications lines.
Maximum High-Speed Communication lines Calculation Table
Quantity
Factor
CPW
Number of lines operating at
64 Kbps or less
______
x 0.92
=
______
Number of lines operating above
64 Kbps up to 128 Kbps
______
x 1.84
=
______
______
x 3.68
=
______
______
x 7.36
=
______
512 Kbps up to 1,024 Kbps ______
x 14.72
=
______
1,024 Kbps up to2,048 Kbps ______
x 29.44
=
______
Total ______
For more information, refer to iSeries Performance Capabilities Reference, SC41-0607.
230
#0613
#0613 - Direct Attach-2742

The #0613 is ordered when the function of a #2742 IOA is required but the card will be controlled by a non-OS/400
operating system.
Cards controlled by a non-OS/400 operating system do not use/require PCI IOPs. Direct attach cards are supported only
in a non-OS/400 partition.
870, 890 models.
Prerequisites:
#0140 Logical Partitioning Specify.
#0142 Linux Partitioning Specify.
Attributes provided: #2742 controlled by Linux Operating System.
Attributes required: #0140, #0142.
#0629
#0629 - Direct Attach #5758 4Gbps Fibre Channel 1-Port

The #0629 is the direct attach to AIX or Linux partition for the #5758 PCI-X 4Gbps Fibre Channel 1-Port feature. The
#0629/#5758 provides a 4 Gbps Single Port Fibre Channel PCI-X 2.0 Adapter, which is a 64-bit address/data, short form
factor PCI-X adapter with an LC type external fiber connector that provides single initiator capability over an optical fiber
link or loop. With the use of appropriate optical fiber cabling, this adapter provides the capability for a network of high-speed
local and remote located storage.
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for Power V5.2S for IBM eServer or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER
Version 4 or later, or SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later
#0630
#0630 - Direct Attach #5713 PCI-X 1Gbps iSCSI TOE-Copper

The #0630 provides a 1 Gbps iSCSI TOE PCI-X adapter that encapsulates SCSI commands and data into TCP and
transports them over the Ethernet via IP packets. The adapter operates as an iSCSI TCP/IP Offload Engine (TOE). This
offload of the host eliminates protocol processing and reduces CPU interrupts. The adapter uses RJ45 1 Gbps Ethernet
connector. This iSCSI adapter can be used to initiate requests to external storage devices from AIX 5L and Linux partitions.
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer or later, or SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for
POWER or later
#0631
#0631 - Direct Attach #5714 PCI-X 1Gbps iSCSI TOE-Optic

The #0631 provides a 1 Gbps iSCSI TOE PCI-X adapter that encapsulates SCSI commands and data into TCP and
transports them over the Ethernet via IP packets. The adapter operates as an iSCSI TOE. This offload of the host eliminates
protocol processing and reduces CPU interrupts. The adapter uses small form factor LC type fiber optic connector. This
iSCSI adapter can be used to initiate requests to external storage devices from AIX 5L and Linux partitions.
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer or later, or SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for
POWER or later
#0632
#0632 PCI USB 2.0 Adapter

The #0632 is a USB 2.0 capable adapter that provides for the connection of one USB keyboard and mouse.
for POWER Version 3, or AIX 5L for POWER V5.2. Support is limited to USB 1.1 with AIX.
#0633
#0633 Graphics Adapter

The #0633 POWER GXT135P Graphics Accelerator with Digital Support adapter is a versatile 2D graphics accelerator,
which can be configured to operate in either 8-bit or 24-bit color modes. The #0633 supports both analog and digital
monitors.
Minimum operating system level: AIX Versions 5.1 or 5.2 for analog and digital support
231
#0634
#0634 128-port Asynchronous Adapter

The #0634 provides attachment for up to 128 asynchronous lines from a single PCI bus slot. This gives the system the
ability to serve a large number of user of EIA-232 or RS-422 devices such as terminals, printers, and modems.
Two 2.4 Mbps synchronous channels link the adapter to a maximum of eight 16-Port Remote Async Nodes (RANs). Up to
four RANs can be linked to each synchronous channel. RANs can also be used with this adapter. If the RANs are connected
the synchronous channel the data rate drops down to 1.2 Mbps. For the best results, keep the previous and new RANs on
separate synchronous channels.
One PCI slot and a #0140 Logical Partitioning Specify and #0145 AIX Partition Specify are required.
Supported in Linux and AIX partitions with AIX 5L for POWER V5.2, or AIX 5L for POWER V5.2
The #0634 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 December 2005
#0635
#0635 SDLC/X.25 - 2-port Adapter

The #0635 SDLC/X.25 - 2-port Adapter provides high-speed connections between stand-alone system units on a WAN. To
access WAN lines, the #0635 adapter connects via external communications equipment including Channel Service Units
(CSU) and Data Service Units (DSU).
This adapter, together with IBM AIX link/X.25, provides a two-port connection to X.25 packet switched networks. IBM
AIXlink/X.25 is a separately orderable LPP (5696-926).
The #0635, with an appropriate cable, is compatible with:
#2954 X.21 DCE - Using 2-Port Cable, X.21
CCITT X.21 Signalling
CCITT V.11 Electrical
CCITT X.27 Electrical
EIA-422-A Electrical
ISO 4903 Connector for DCE side of an X.21 VHSI Modem Cable
V.24 DCE - Using 2-Port Cable, V.24/EIA-232 (#2951)
CCITT V.24 Signalling
CCITT X.21bix Electrical and Signalling
EIA-232-C Electrical and Signalling
ISO 2110 Connector for DCE side of an V.24 VHSI Modem Cable
V.35 DCE - Using 2-Port Cable, V.35 (#2952)
CCITT V.35 Some signals for signalling
CCITT V.28 Some signals for electrical and signalling
ISO 2593 Connector for DCE side of an V.35 VHSI Modem Cable
V.36 DCE - Using 2-Port Cable, V.36/EIA-449 (#2953)
One PCI slot, #0140 Logical Partitioning Specify and #0145 AIX Partition Specify code is required.
#2732
#2732 PCI Serial HIPPI Adapter

The #2732 is a single slot, full size, 32-bit PCI adapter supporting TCP/IP over a serial High Performance Parallel Interface
(HIPPI) link. Data is sent and received over optical fiber at 1.2 Gbps using the HIPPI standard 20/24 bit encoding scheme
with short wave optical transducers. The effective maximum data rate of the HIPPI interface is 800 Mbps.
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer or later
Supported on Models 570, 570 (POWER6), and 595.
#2737
#2737 PCI USB 1.1 Adapter

This adapter provides for connection of one USB keyboard and mouse.
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for
POWER Version 3 or later, or SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later
232
#2742
#2742 2-Line WAN IOA

The #2742 2-Line WAN IOA supports up to two multiple protocol communications (RVX) ports when one or two (in any
combination) of the following cables are attached. Select one of the following cables to attach to port 1 or 2 (RVX port):
#0348 V.24/EIA232 20-ft (6 m) PCI cable
#0353 V.35 20-ft PCI cable
#0355 V.35 80-ft/24m PCI cable
#0358 V.36 150-ft/45m PCI cable
#0359 X.21 20-ft PCI cable
#0365 V.24/EIA232 80-ft PCI cable
#0367 Operations Console PCI Cable
The #0367 cable ships with a 25 pin to 9 pin adapter. When #0140 Logical Partitioning Specify is ordered, multiple #0367
cables can be ordered to connect the operations console in each partition. One #0367 cable per #2742.
When #2742 is selected to support ECS, one of following cables must be specified:
The #2742 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0613 - Direct Attach #2742 PCI 2-Line WAN
IOA, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2742 cannot be accessed by OS/400
partitions. The #2742 does not support Remote Power On.
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100.
With an associated supported IOP, the following protocols are supported on this adapter.
Async
Bisync
Fax
PPP
SNA
With i5/OS V5R4 and Licensed Internal Code V5R4M5 and later installed this adapter can run IOP-less. When running
IOP-less, the following restrictions apply:
X.25 is not supported.
Remote power on via ring-indicator is not supported.
SNA is supported only through the i5/OS AnyNet or Enterprise Extender support.
#2743

The #2743 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA feature allows the iSeries server to attach to IEEE standard 802.3Z high-speed
Ethernet LANs (1 Gbps). It can also be used to connect to existing 100 Mbps Ethernet LANs using switches with
10/100/1000 Mbps ports.
The adapter supports multi-mode fiber media attachment to client-supplied cabling. The multi-mode interface has a
62.5/125 micron (m) or 50.0/125 m cable requirement with an SC connector.
The #2743 requires a gigabit-capable switch with at least one port that supports a 1000BASE-SX interface with IEEE
802.3z and 802.3u compliance. It supports only a multi-mode fiber optic cable connection from the adapter to the switch.
The #2743 supports 1000 Mbps (1 Gbps) full duplex interface only. It cannot negotiate down to a lower speed. Stations on
the 10 Mb and 100 Mb switched LANs can communicate with the #2743 through a switch that is capable of handling all
these speeds. In this case, the switch handles the speeds.
If a #2743 is controlled by a #2790, #2791, or #2799, then one specify code #0225 1 Gbps Ethernet Specify must be
ordered for each #2743 controlled by an Integrated Server. It can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered
as #0601 - Direct Attach #2743 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux
partition, the #2743 cannot be accessed by OS/400 partitions.
233
#2743
(contd.)

A 64-bit card slot is required.
Protocols supported: TCP/IP only; IPX connections are not supported. SNA supported with Enterprise Extenders with
V5R4.
Maximum: One per Multi-adapter Bridge Boundary
Minimum operating system level when used with the #2790/#2791: OS/400 V4R5 with Cumulative PTF package C1005450
Minimum operating system level when used with the #2799: OS/400 V5R1 with PTFs identified in Information APAR
II13105 at: http://www-304.ibm.com/jct01004c/systems/support/supportsite.wss/brandmain?brandind=5000027
Supported on Models 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 595, 810, 820, 830, 840, 870, 890 and 9411-100.
#2744

The #2744 PCI 100 Mbps Token Ring IOA provides a single attachment to a 100 Mbps, 16 Mbps, or 4 Mbps IBM Token
Ring Network. The feature consists of an IOA card, with internal code that supplies IEEE 802.5 Media Access Control
(MAC) and IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) functions. The 100/16/4 Token Ring IOA is capable of operating in half
or full duplex mode. A 2.44m (8 ft) Token Ring Type 1 cable is included with the #2744. As an alternative, the client can
attach a separately priced twisted pair cable to the RJ45 connection on the IOA. IBM Cabling System patch cables, included
with the #2744, can increase the length as required. If the #2744 is selected to run on the #2790 PCI Integrated Netfinity
Server or the #2791/#2799 PCI Integrated xSeries Server, a #0223 100 Mbps Token-Ring Specify is required for each
#2744 selected to run on the #2790, #2791, or #2799.
The #2744 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0603 - Direct Attach #2744 PCI 100 Mbps
Token-Ring IOA, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2744 cannot be accessed by
OS/400 partitions.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
#2760

The #2760 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet UTP Adapter feature allows the iSeries server to attach to IEEE standard 802.3Z
high-speed Ethernet LANs (1 Gbps) to provide a significant performance improvement over other LAN solutions. The
adapter supports a UTP CAT 5 media interface. When driven by a #2843 PCI IOP, this adapter only supports TCP/IP.
This adapter can directly attach to 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps networks. The #2760 is supported by a #2790, #2791, or #2799
PCI Integrated xSeries Server. If a #2760 is controlled by a #2790, #2791, or #2799, then one specify code #0225 1 Gbps
Ethernet Specify must be ordered for each #2760 controlled by an Integrated Server.
Maximum: One per Multi-adapter Bridge Boundary. Ignore this maximum for any #2760 controlled (driven) by an Integrated
xSeries Server. Combinations of Integrated Server controlled and PCI IOP controlled #2760s within Multi-adapter Bridge
boundaries are permitted.
The #2760 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0602 - Direct Attach #2760 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet
UTP IOA, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2760 cannot be accessed by OS/400
partitions.
One 64-bit PCI slot is required. There are exceptions for 32-bit slot placement in the Model 270 and 820 system units.
TCP/IP is the only protocol supported. IPX connections are not supported. SNA supported using Enterprise Extenders
starting in V5R4.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
234
#2772

The #2772 PCI Dual WAN/Modem IOA is a two-line WAN adapter, with two ports (RJ11) supporting V.90 56K Async PPP
and Fax applications at data rates up to 14.4K via internal modems. Connection to the V.90 ports is via telephone cable.
This is the non-CIM version of the #2772/#2773 card.
The #2772 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0609 - Direct Attach #2772 PCI Dual
WAN/Modem IOA, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2772 cannot be accessed by
OS/400 partitions.
The #2772 does not ship with country-specific or region-specific telephone cables. A minimum of one modem cable, or a
maximum of two, must be selected/ordered for each #2772. All modem cables ordered or present on a system must be the
same feature number.
#1010 Modem Cable-Austria
#1011 Modem Cable-Belgium
#1012 Modem Cable-Africa
#1013 Modem Cable-Israel
#1014 Modem Cable-Italy
#1015 Modem Cable-France
#1016 Modem Cable-Germany
#1017 Modem Cable-United Kingdom
#1018 Modem Cable-Iceland/Sweden
#1021 Modem Cable-Finland/Norway
#1022 Modem Cable-Netherlands
#1023 Modem Cable-Swiss
#1024 Modem Cable-Denmark
#1025 Modem Cable-U.S./Canada
The feature is country-specific or region-specific.
Remote ring indicate is not supported.
One PCI card slot is required.
Supported on Models (including + models) 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and
9411-100.
The #2772 was withdrawn from marketing 01 June 2006.
#2773

The #2773 is a two-line WAN adapter, with two ports (RJ11) supporting V.90 56K Async PPP and Fax applications at data
rates up to 14.4K via internal modems. Connection to the V.90 ports is via telephone cable. This is the CIM version of this
#2772/#2773 card.
The #2773 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0610 - Direct Attach #2773 PCI Dual
WAN/ModemIOA, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2773 cannot be accessed by
OS/400 partitions.
The #2773 does not ship with country-specific or region-specific telephone cables. A minimum of one modem cable, or
maximum of two, must be selected or ordered for each #2773. All modem cables ordered or present on a system must be
the same feature number.
#1019 Modem Cable-Australia
#1020 Modem Cable-China (Hong Kong S.A.R.)/New Zealand
The feature is country-specific or region-specific.
Remote ring indicate is not supported.
PCI card slots required: One
Supported on Models (including + models) 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and
9411-100.
The #2773 was withdrawn from marketing 01 June 2006.
235
#2793
#9793

The #2793/#9793 is a two-line WAN with modem adapter and is the non-CIM version that is offered in all countries or
regions except Australia and New Zealand. Port 0 is the modem port and supports V.92 56K Async PPP, V.92 data modem,
V.44 data compression, and V.34 Fax modem and Fax functions such as ECM and 2D/1D conversion. Port 0 does not
provide sync modem capabilities (SDLC and Sync PPP). Port 1 is the RVX port and supports multiple communications
protocols.
w/Modem, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2793 cannot be accessed by OS/400
partitions.
Select one of the following cables to attach to port 0 (modem port):
Select one of the following cables to attach to port 1 (RVX port):
#0358 V.36 150-ft/45m PCI cable
#0367 cable ships with a 25 pin to 9 pin adapter
When #0140 logical partitioning is specified, multiple #0367 cables can be ordered to connect the operations console in
each partition.
ECS is supported from the RVX port and one of the following cables is required to support ECS: #0348, #0349, or #0365.
ECS is supported from the modem port with OS/400 V5R1 or later.
For further configuration information, see: http://www.iseries.ibm.com/tstudio/planning/esa/esa.htm
See the Soft rules: iSeries IOA requirements topic in PCI and PCI-X Placement Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS
V5R3 and V5R4 (Fourth edition), REDP-4011, or PCI Card Placement Rules for the IBM eServer iSeries Server OS/400
Version 5 Release 2: September 2003, REDP-3638, for OS/400 V5R2 and earlier releases, for additional restrictions.
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100.
With an associated supported IOP the following protocols are supported on port 1 of this adapter.
V.92 56K Async SLIP/PPP
Async
Bisync
Fax
PPP
SNA via CRTLINSDLC
236
#2793
#9793
(contd.)

Minimum operating system level for IOP-less protocols supported with i5/OS V5R4 and Licensed Internal Code V5R4M5
and CUM C7282540 and prerequisite PTFs, or later releases. IOP-less supported on Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, and
595. When running IOP-less, the following support applies to port 1 of this adapter:
V.92 56K Async SLIP/PPP is supported.
Fax applications at data rates up to 33.6K is supported.
Bisync is supported.
SNA communications is supported through i5/OS AnyNet or Enterprise Extender functions.
#2794
#9794

The #2794/#9794 is a two-line WAN with modem adapter and is the CIM version that is offered only in Australia and New
Zealand. Port 0 is the modem port and supports V.92 56K Async PPP, V.92 data modem, V.44 data compression, and V.34
Fax modem and Fax functions such as ECM and 2D/1D conversion. Port 0 does not provide sync modem capabilities
(SDLC and Sync PPP). Port 1 is the RVX port and supports multiple communications protocols.
w/Modem, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2794 cannot be accessed by OS/400
partitions.
#1019 Modem Cable-Australia
#1020 Modem Cable-China (Hong Kong S.A.R.)/New Zealand
#0358 V.36 150-ft/45m PCI cable
The #0367 cable ships with a 25 pin to 9 pin adapter.
When #0140 logical partitioning is specified, multiple #0367 cables can be ordered to connect the operations console in
each partition.
ECS is supported from the RVX port and one of the following cables is required to support ECS: #0348, #0349 or #0365.
ECS is supported from the modem port with OS/400 V5R1 or later.
The #2794 does not support the remote ring indicate function.
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100.
With an associated supported IOP, the following protocols are supported on port 1 of this adapter:
Async
Bisync
Fax
PPP
SNA via CRTLINSDLC
237
#2794
#9794
(contd.)

595. When running IOP-less, the following support applies to port 1 of this adapter:
V.92 56K Async SLIP/PPP is supported.
Fax applications at data rates up to 33.6K is supported.
Bisync is supported.
238
#2805

The #2805 is a four-line WAN adapter with four WAN ports with internal modems. Connection to the ports is via telephone
cable (RJ-11). This is the non-CIM version of the IOA.
Supported protocols are:
V.92 56K Async PPP
Fax applications at data rates up to 33.6K
The V.92 functions offer increased upload throughput, improved V.44 data compression, and shortened modem
synchronization periods.
The #2805 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0616 - Direct Attach #2805 PCI Quad Modem
IOA, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2805 cannot be accessed by OS/400
partitions.
Country- or region-specific telephone cables must be ordered. A minimum of one modem cable and a maximum of four
must be selected for each #2805. All modem cables on a system must be the same feature number.
The supported modem cables are:
#1018 Modem Cable-Iceland/ Sweden
The feature is country-specific or region-specific. Contact your IBM representative or Business Partner for details on
availability.
Restrictions:
The call waiting and modem on hold functions associated with V.92 are not supported.
Remote Power On via ring-indicator, SDLC, and synchronous PPP are not supported.
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100.
With an associated supported IOP, the following protocols are supported on this adapter:
Async
Bisync
Fax
PPP
SNA via CRTLINSDLC
595. When running IOP-less, the following support applies:
V.92 56K Async PPP is supported
Fax applications at data rates up to 33.6K is supported
239
#2806

The #2806 is a four-line WAN adapter with four WAN ports with internal modems. Connection to the ports is via telephone
cable (RJ-11). This is the CIM version of the IOA. Supported protocols are:
V.92 56K Async PPP
Fax applications at data rates up to 33.6K
synchronization periods.
The #2806 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0617 - Direct Attach #2806 PCI Quad Modem
(CIM), an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2806 cannot be accessed by OS/400
partitions.
Country- or region-specific telephone cables must be ordered. A minimum of one modem cable and a maximum of two
must be selected for each #2806. All modem cables on a system must be the same feature number.
#1019 Modem Cable- Australia
#1020 Modem Cable- China (Hong Kong S.A.R.)/New Zealand
The #2806 is country-specific or region-specific. Contact your IBM representative or Business Partner for details on
availability.
Restrictions:
The call waiting and modem on hold functions associated with V.92 are not supported.
Remote Power On via ring-indicator, SDLC, and synchronous PPP are not supported.
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100.
With an associated supported IOP, the following protocols are supported on this adapter:
Async
Bisync
Fax
PPP
SNA via CRTLINSDLC
595. When running IOP-less, the following support applies:
V.92 56K Async PPP is supported
Fax applications at data rates up to 33.6K is supported
#2817

The #2817 is a 155 Mbps Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) PCI card that allows the server to be attached to an ATM
network using the Multi-Mode Fiber (MMF) 62.5 m interface. This interface is intended for connection to both local area
switches and direct connection to service provider equipment. The #2817 is typically used where 155 Mbps speeds are
required over distances of less than 2 km.
The #2817 is capable of supporting both multiple emulated LAN environments and enhanced TCP/IP performance with
OS/400 V5R1. The #2817 is a 64-bit card, but is allowed to plug into any 32-bit or 64-bit slot. Feature maximums can be
limited when used in combination with other LAN/ATM IOPs.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R1; not supported with i5/OS V5R3
240
#2848
#2848 PCI 2D Entry Graphics Adapter

The #2848 PCI 2D Entry Graphics Adapter is a versatile, low-priced 2D graphics accelerator, which can be configured to
operate in either 8-bit or 24-bit color modes.
Hardware description:
128-bit graphics processor
8-bit CLUT or 24-bit true color
16 MB SDRAM
32-bit PCI interface
Universal PCI (5.0v or 3.3v)
One hardware color map
Features supported:
Up to approximately 16.7 million colors
Rectangular clipping
Two analog monitor outputs
Up to 1600 x 1200 resolution
60 to 85 Hz refresh rates (ISO 9241, Part 3)
APIs supported
X-Windows and Motif
UMS 2.3.0 (no hardware scaling)
POWER Version 3 or later, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later
Supported on Models 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), and 595.
#2849
#9749

The #2849 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter allows an iSeries server to attach to standardized 100 Mbps high-speed
Ethernet LANs and allows attachment to existing 10 Mbps Ethernet LANs. The adapter comes standard with an RJ45
connector for attachment to UTP-5 media. Cabling for 10 Mbps must be CAT-3 or CAT-5, cabling for 100 Mbps must be
CAT-5 that meets or exceeds Industry Standard EIA/TIA T568A or T568B. Maximum cable length is 100m.
The #9749 Base PCI 100/10 Ethernet IOA is an optional feature available on new Model 800 and 810 systems, or as part
of an upgrade order from a Model 270, 720, 730, or 820 to a Model 810. If the client does not select the feature on the initial
order, they are not entitled to receive the feature in the future.
The #2849 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0623 - Direct Attach #2849 PCI 100/10 Mbps
Ethernet IOA, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2849 cannot be accessed by OS/400
partitions.
Supports LAN console. The #2849 is not supported on any Integrated Netfinity Server or Integrated xSeries Server.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
The #2849 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006. A #5701 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA is the recommended
replacement.
241
#2893
#9693
#2893 PCIe 2-Line WAN IOA with Modem

The #2893/#9693 is a two-line WAN with modem adapter and is the non-CIM version that is offered in all countries or
regions except Australia and New Zealand.
#0367 Operations Console PCI Cable (ships with a 25 pin to 9 pin adapter). Multiple #0367 cables can be ordered but
only one per #2893) to serve as consoles for secondary partitions when logical partitioning is used. ECS is supported
from both the modem port and the RVX port.
ECS is supported from the RVX port with #0348 - V.24/EIA232 20-Ft PCI Cable. For further configuration information, see:
http://www.iseries.ibm.com/tstudio/planning/esa/esa.htm
and CUM C7282540 and prerequisite PTFs, or later releases. Supported on Model 570 (POWER6).
When running IOP-less, the following support applies to this adapter:
Port 0 is the modem port and supports:
V.92 56K Async PPP
V.92 data modem,
V.44 data compression
V.34 Fax modem and Fax functions such as ECM and 2D/1D conversion
Port 1Port 1 is the RVX port and supports multiple communications protocols, including synchronous operations.
Fax
Bisync
SNA communications is supported through i5/OS V5R4 Enterprise Extender function and later releases.
X.21
One PCIe slot is required.
Restrictions:
IOP-less X.25 is not supported.
242
#2894
#9694
#2894 PCIe 2-Line WAN with Modem CIM

The #2894/#9694 is a two-line WAN with modem PCIe adapter. This feature is the CIM version that is offered only in
Australia and New Zealand.
#1019 Modem Cable - Australia
#0367 Operations Console PCI Cable (ships with a 25 pin to 9 pin adapter). Multiple #0367 cables can be ordered but
only one per #2894) to serve as consoles for secondary partitions when logical partitioning is used. ECS is supported
from both the modem port and the RVX port.
ECS is supported from the RVX port with #0348 - V.24/EIA232 20-Ft PCI Cable. For further configuration information, see:
and CUM C7282540 and prerequisite PTFs, or later releases. Supported on Model 570 (POWER6).
When running IOP-less, the following support applies to this adapter:
Port 0 is the modem port and supports:
V.92 56K Async PPP
V.92 data modem,
V.44 data compression
V.34 Fax modem and Fax functions such as ECM and 2D/1D conversion.
Port 1Port 1 is the RVX port and supports multiple communications protocols, including synchronous operations.
Fax
Bisync
X.21
One PCIe slot is required.
Restrictions:
#4723

The #4723 PCI Ethernet IOA provides single attachment to one Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect Local Area
Network. The feature consists of an adapter card and internal code that supplies Ethernet version 2 and IEEE 802.3 MAC
plus IEEE 802.2 LLC functions. The Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 IOA is capable of operating in half or full duplex mode. The #4723
has an RJ45 connector and a 15 pin D-Shell connector for attachment to client-supplied cabling. A vendor AUI Ethernet
cable or RJ45 twisted pair cable must be ordered separately.
The #4723 is not supported by the #2790 PCI Integrated Netfinity Server or the #2791/#2799 PCI Integrated xSeries
Server.
Both SNA and TCP/IP protocols are directly supported.
Supported on Models 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 595, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and 9411-100.
Notes:
The #4723 IOA requires a supporting IOP.
The #2723/#9723 PCI 10 Mbps Ethernet Adapter are the same card except the they were designated as IBM CE
installed.
The #2723, #9723, or #4723 are no longer marketed. A #5701 is the recommended replacement.
243
#4745

The #4745 supports up to two multiple protocol communications ports when one or two of the following cables are attached:
The #4745 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0608 - Direct Attach #4745 PCI WAN IOA, an
IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #4745 cannot be accessed by OS/400 partitions.
When #0140 Logical Partitioning Specify is ordered, multiple #0367 cables can be ordered to connect the operations
console in each partition. One #0367 cable per #4745.
When the #4745 is selected to support ECS, one of the following cables must be specified:
#0348 V.24/EIA232 20-ft (6 m) PCI cable (Default)
Restrictions: Requires an IOP
Supported on Models 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 595, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and 9411-100.
#4750

The #4750 is a four-port (8 channel) ISDN BRI (basic rate) full sized PCI card. Each port consists of 2B+D configuration.
The #4750 is the U-bus (2 wire) version of the ISDN BRI PCI card. The #4750 supports the following protocols:
PPP (communicates with remote analog modems (V.90) as well as with remote ISDN devices)
IDLC
Fax
Four 30-ft (9.3 m) RJ-45 to RJ-45 network cables are shipped with each #4750. For configuration purposes, each #4750
counts as eight lines (two lines per port) toward the system communication maximums. Supports full duplex.
The #4750 requires country (region) certification or homologation.
A full sized PCI card slot is required.
Maximum: One per IOP
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V4R5; OS/400 V5R1 is the last release to support the #4750.
Supported in Models 820, 830, 840, 890, #5075, #0578, #5078, #5074, #5079, #8079, #8093/5097, #9074, and #9079.
#4751

The #4751 is a four-port (eight channel) ISDN BRI (basic rate) full sized PCI card. Each port consists of a 2B+D
configuration. The #4751 is the S/T-bus (four wire) version of the #4750 PCI ISDN BRI U IOA. The #4751 requires a
network terminating device in the circuit. In the United States and Canada, this must be provided by the client. In other
countries or regions, it is most likely provided by the telephone company. The #4751 supports the following protocols:
PPP (communicates with remote analog modems (V.90) as well as with remote ISDN devices)
IDLC
Fax
Four 30-ft (9.3 m) RJ-45 to RJ-45 network cables are shipped with each #4751. For configuration purposes, each #4751
counts as eight lines (two lines per port) towards the system communication maximums. Supports full duplex.
Maximum: One per IOP.
The #4751 requires country or region certification or homologation.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V4R5; OS/400 V5R1 is the last release to support the #4751.
Supported in Models 270, 820, 830, 840, #5075, #0578, #5074, #5078, #5079, #8079, #8093/#5097, #9074, and #9079.
244
#4761

The #4761 is based on the latest Digital Signal Processor (DSP) technology. The #4761 allows the modem function to be
integrated into the IOA and supports multiple analog modem ports (eight phone lines). The #4761 supports the following
protocols without the need for an external modem:
SLIP/PPP (uses V.90, so the maximum line speed is 56 Kbps)
SDLC (uses V.34, so the maximum line speed is 33.6 Kbps)
Fax (uses V.17 to achieve a 14.4 Kbps maximum line speed)
OS/400 V5R1 is the last release to support non-Fax functions on the #4761. An ASYNC line description is required for Fax
and can only be used for Fax. The ECS line is not supported. To the iSeries or AS/400e server, the #4761 appears like a
single IOA with eight individual line resources available. Eight 30-ft (8 m) phone cables are shipped with each #4761. For
configuration purposes, each #4761 counts as eight communications lines toward the system communication maximums.
Supports full duplex.
The #4761 requires country or region certification or homologation.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V4R5; not supported on i5/OS V5R3 and later releases.
Supported in Models 820, 830, 840, #5075, #0578, #5078, #5074, #5079, #8079, #8093/#5097, #9074, and #9079.
#4801
#4801 PCI Cryptographic Coprocessor

The #4801 is a hardware cryptography solution. The #4801 is a half-length PC form-factor PCI card that offers rich
cryptography function, secure storage of cryptographic keys, and 12 MBps performance (at the card level) for bulk data
encryption and triple DES capability. The #4801 is available worldwide. The level of cryptographic function is determined
by the Cryptographic Access Provider licensed program that is downloaded to the adapter.
If your application requires a Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-1 certified, tamper-resistant module for
storing cryptographic keys, financial PIN processing, or both, then the #4801 PCI Cryptographic Coprocessor should be
your choice. FIPS 140-1 is a U.S. Government National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) administered
standard and certification program for cryptographic modules.
Due to temperature requirements (card temperature must not drop below 5 degrees F (-15 degrees C)), the #4801 is
shipped separately from the system in special packing.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
The #4801 was withdrawn from marketing as of 1 June 2006. A #4806 PCI-X Cryptographic Coprocessor is the
Note: The #4801 is the System i hardware feature code for the IBM 4758-023 PCI Cryptographic Coprocessor. Other
features codes that are associated with the 4758 include:
#4802: CCIN = 4758-023
#4803: CCIN = 4548-002
#4804: CCIN = 4758-002
#4805

The #4805 provides improved performance for high transaction rate secure Web applications that use the Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocols. The process of using SSL/TLS secure Web connections is
compute intensive. The Cryptographic Accelerator can be used to off-load cryptographic processing from a main CPU.
SSL/TLS secure Web connections are used to protect information (for example, credit card number) as it is transferred over
the Internet, such as between a Web browser and a server. The Cryptographic Accelerator is targeted to high transaction
rate secure Web applications using SSL/TLS.
There is a maximum of two per IOP.
The #4805 requires an available PCI card slot under a feature IOP, not under a base or embedded IOP in the system unit.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
Note: The #4805 is the System i hardware feature code for the 2058 PCI Cryptographic Coprocessor.
245
#4806
#4806 PCI-X Cryptographic Coprocessor

The #4806 PCI-X Cryptographic Coprocessor provides both cryptographic coprocessors and secure-key cryptographic
accelerator functions in a single PCI-X card. The coprocessor functions are targeted to banking and finance applications.
Financial PIN processing and Europay, Master Card, Visa (EMV) credit card functions are provided. EMV is a standard for
integrated-chip based credit cards. The secure-key accelerator functions are targeted to improving the performance of
i5/OS SSL transactions. The #4806 provides the security and performance required to support e-business and emerging
digital signature applications.
The #4806 provides secure storage of cryptographic keys in a tamper-resistant hardware security module (HSM), which is
designed to meet FIPS 140 security requirements. FIPS 140 is a U.S. Government NIST administered standard and
certification program for cryptographic modules.
The firmware for the #4806 is available on a separately ordered/distributed CD. This firmware is an LPO product: 5733-CY1
Cryptographic Device Manager.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models (except 515 models) and 9411-100.
This feature has country-specific usage. Refer to your IBM representative in your country for availability or restrictions.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models (except 515 models)
Notes:
The #4806 also requires licensed program 5722-AC3 Cryptographic Access Provider to enable data encryption, up
through i5/OS V5R3. The 5722-ACx products were required through i5/OS V5R3,because these products contained a
Function Control Vector (FCV) for the coprocessor. The FCV is used to enable cryptography on the card. 5722-AC3 is
not available starting with i5/OS V5R4. Starting with V5R4, the FCV has been moved i5/OS, 5722-SS1, itself.
#4806 is the System i hardware feature code for the IBM 4764-000 PCI-X Cryptographic Coprocessor.
On System i configurations, the #4806 is a Customer Install Feature.
#4811
#4812
#4813
#9812
#9813
#4811/#4812/#4813/#9812/#9813 PCI-X Integrated xSeries Server

The #4811/#4812/#4813/#9812/#9813 PCI-X Integrated xSeries Server contains a 2.0 GHz processor with 2 MB integrated
L2 cache.
The #4811 is supported in the 520 and 525 system tower.
The #4812 is supported in the 550, 570 (POWER6), 595, 800, 810, 825, 870 and 890 system towers and in the #0588,
#0595, #5088, #5095, #5074, #5079, #5094 and #5294 expansion towers.
The #4813 is supported in the 570 and 570 (POWER6) system tower and in the #5790 PCI Expansion Drawer.
The #9812 and #9813 are functionally identical to #4812 and #4813 but are included in the base with orders for Enterprise
Editions on Models 550, 595 and 570.
The #4811/#4812/#4813/#9812/#9813 PCI-X Integrated xSeries Server has two memory slots and supports up to 2 GB of
memory. Both slots must always contain a pair of identical memory features. When the #4811, #4812, #4813, #9812, or
#9813 is ordered, the configurator adds two #9726 base 512 MB server memory features to the order. The two #9726
features can be replaced with two #8546 optional base 1 GB server memory features.
The following main storage cards provide memory for the #4811/#4812/#4813/#9812/#9813 PCI-X Integrated xSeries
Server:
#9726 - Base 512 MB Server Memory (Initial order only)
#8546 - Opt Base 1 GB Server Memory (Initial order only)
#0446 - 512 MB DDR Server Memory (Upgrade only)
#0447 - 1 GB DDR Server Memory (Upgrade only)
The #4811/#4812/#4813/#9812/#9813 PCI-X Integrated xSeries Server occupies two PCI slots and requires an IOP
#9744, #9844 or #2844 to drive it. The configurator adds no charge feature #9744 Base PCI IOP to the order. However the
#9744 can be removed from the order for PCI slot conservation. The IOP can be shared with other IOAs, but only one
#4811/#4812/#4813/#9812/#9813 is permitted per IOP.
Placement of the #4811 is limited to slot P1-C4 on the Model 520 or 525 system unit. The #4811 hangs over slot P1-C5
and occupies two PCI slots. The #4811 Integrated xSeries Server is mutually exclusive with #6594 - 4-Disk Slot Expansion,
as the #6594 repositions the SCSI cable connector so that a long card can be placed in card slot 4 and forces card slot 5
to be a short card. Therefore, you cannot have #4811 PCI Integrated xSeries Server in the 520 or 525 system unit if you
also have a #6594.
Placement of the #4812/#9812 is limited to specific PCI slots within the 550, 595, 800, 810, 825, 870 and 890 system towers
and in the various expansion towers. Placement of the #4813/#9813 is limited to specific PCI slots within the 570 system
unit and #5790 PCI Expansion Drawer.
246
#4811
#4812
#4813
#9812
#9813
(contd.)
#4811/#4812/#4813/#9812/#9813 PCI-X Integrated xSeries Server

The #4811/#4812/#4813/#9812/#9813 PCI-X Integrated xSeries Server includes two embedded 1000/100/10 Mbps UTP
Ethernet LAN ports for attachment to IEEE standard 802.3Z high-speed (1 Gbps) Ethernet LANs. The Ethernet LAN ports
can also be used to connect to existing 10 and 100 Mbps Ethernet LANs. The adapter supports UTP CAT 5 or higher media
interface and TCP/IP.
The #4811/#4812/#4813/#9812/#9813 PCI-X Integrated xSeries Server ships with a standard keyboard/mouse splitter
cable and supports either a standard or USB 1.1 keyboard or mouse. An SVGA video port is included to connect a display.
The #4811/#4812/#4813/#9812/#9813 PCI-X Integrated xSeries Server runs Windows or Linux.
The supported versions of Windows are:
Windows 2000 Server and 2000 Advanced Server
Windows Server 2003 Standard, Enterprise and Web Edition
The supported versions of Linux are:
Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES 3
Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS 3
For the latest information about Windows on iSeries and eServer i5, see:
http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/integratedxseries/
For the latest information about Linux on Series and eServer i5, see:
http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/integratedxseries/linux
The following rules apply when ordering the PCI-X Integrated xSeries Server:
The #0325 IPCS Extension Cable for Windows is the default (but can be removed).
The #1700 IPCS Keyboard and Mouse for Windows is the default (in those countries or regions offering it).
Requires a display and must be connected to the #4811/#4812/#4813/#9812/#9813 to support Windows 2000.
A display is not required for Windows 3000. If no display is connected the Virtual system Console is used.
Restrictions:
Native OS/400 functions and external host LAN are not supported.
TCP/IP only supported on the Ethernet LAN ports.
Not supported in system tower of Model 820, 830, 840 or earlier.
The #4811, #4812, #4813, #9812, and #9813 are Customer Install Features.
#4815

The #4815 is a 155 Mbps ATM PCI card that allows the iSeries or AS/400e server to be attached to an ATM network using
the Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP-5) interface. This interface is intended for connection to both local area switches and
direct connection to service provider equipment. The #4815 is typically used where 155 Mbps speeds are required over
distances of less than 100m. Technical specifications and industry standards supported are available at the IP/MPLS
Forum Web site at: http://www.ipmplsforum.org/index.shtml
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V4R5; not supported on i5/OS V5R3 and later releases
Supported on Models 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890.
#4816

The #4816 is a 155 Mbps ATM PCI card that allows the iSeries or AS/400e server to be attached into an ATM network using
the MMF 62.5 m interface. This interface is intended for connection to both local area switches and direct connection to
service provider equipment. The #4816 is typically used where 155 Mbps speeds are required over distances of less than
2 km. Technical specifications and industry standards supported are available at the IP/MPLS Forum Web site at:
http://www.ipmplsforum.org/index.shtml
The #4816 is orderable for use in OS/400 V4R5 secondary partitions. For OS/400 V5R1 systems or partitions, order the
#2817 PCI 155 Mbps MMF ATM IOA.
247
#4818

The #4818 is a 155 Mbps ATM PCI card that allows the iSeries or AS/400e server to be attached to an ATM network using
the Single-Mode Fiber (SMF) 9 m interface. This interface is intended primarily for direct connection to service provider
equipment. The #4818 is typically used where 155 Mbps speeds are required over distances of from 16 to 40 km. Technical
specifications and industry standards supported are available at the IP/MPLS Forum Web site at:
#4838

The #4838 PCI 100/10 Mbps Ethernet IOA feature allows the IB System i model to attach to standardized 100 Mbps
high-speed Ethernet LANs and allows attachment to existing 10 Mbps Ethernet LANs. The adapter comes standard with
an RJ45 connector for attachment to UTP-5 media. Cabling for 10 Mbps must be CAT-3 or CAT-5, and cabling for 100 Mbps
must be CAT-5 that meets or exceeds Industry Standard EIA/TIA T568A or T568B. The maximum cable length is 100m.
This Ethernet IEEE 802.3 IOA is capable of operating in half or duplex mode. If the #4838 is selected to run on the #2790
PCI Integrated Netfinity Server or #2791/#2799 PCI Integrated xSeries Server, then specify code #0224 is required for each
#4838 selected to run on the #2790/ #2791/#2799.
The #4838 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0607 - Direct Attach #4838 PCI 100/10 Mbps
Ethernet IOA, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #4838 cannot be accessed by OS/400
partitions.
Both SNA and TCP/IP protocols are directly supported.
Supports LAN console.
Supported on Models 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and 9411-100.
Notes:
The #4838 IOA requires a supporting IOP.
The #2838 PCI 100/10 Mbps Ethernet Adapter and the #4838 are the same card; the #2838 was designated as IBM
CE installed.
The #2838 and #4838 were withdrawn from marketing as of 01 October 2004. A #5701 is the recommended
replacement.
#4960
#4960 Cryptographic Accelerator

The IBM e-business Cryptographic Accelerator is a short form factor PCI SSL hardware accelerator adapter. For Secure
Web transaction, SSL operations is a key requirement. To do this, public-key cryptographic operations using SSL
handshake protocol is employed. The IBM e-business Cryptographic Accelerator is a hardware cryptographic solution that
off-loads this compute-intensive public-key cryptographic processing from the host.
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for POWER V5.2
Supported for conversion only.
#4963
#4963 PCI Crypto Coprocessor

The #4963 is a 2/3 length PCI adapter that combines hardware and software to provide a wide variety of security services.
The PCI Cryptographic Coprocessor (FIPS-4) is a second generation adapter of the Cryptographic Coprocessor family that
provides high performance secure hardware engines for secure internet transactions such as transmitting data, verifying
electronic signatures, bulk data encryption and decryption. In addition, the card is enclosed in a tamper-proof enclosure to
restrict access to on card resources, designed to FIPS 140-1 Level 4 standards.
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for POWER V5.2
248
#5700

The #5700 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA allows an iSeries server to attach to IEEE standard 802.3Z high-speed (1 Gbps)
Ethernet LANs. It can also be used to connect to existing 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps Ethernet LANs by using switches with 10,
100, or 1000 Mbps ports. It cannot directly attach to 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps LANs. Crossover cables are not supported.
The #5700 adapter supports a multimode fiber interface with a 62.5 m or 50.0 m cable requirement. The #5700 adapter
has a duplex LC fiber optic connector for attachment to client-supplied cabling. The #5700 uses shortwave technology
(around 500m maximum). The 5700 supports auto-negotiation but only negotiates to the gigabit fiber standard of 1000/full.
The #5700 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA can be run under a #2792 PCI Integrated xSeries Server or #2892 PCI Integrated
xSeries Server. If a #5700 is controlled by a #2x92 Integrated xSeries Server, then #0226 1 Gbps Ethernet Specify must
be ordered. Order one #0226 for each #5700 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA controlled by an Integrated xSeries Server.
When the #5700 is not installed in an Integrated xSeries Server, there is a maximum of one #5700 per Multi-adapter Bridge
Boundary. Combinations of #5700s controlled by Integrated xSeries Server-controlled and controlled by PCI IOPs are
allowed within a Multi-adapter Bridge Boundary.
The #5700 can be directly attached to a Linux or AIX partitions with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red
Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3, and AIX 5L for POWER V5.2. When ordered as #0620 - Direct Attach #5700
PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #5700 cannot be accessed
by OS/400 partitions.
PCI card slots required: One 32-bit slot in the Model 830, 840, SB2, or SB3 system units, or in the #0578, #5074, #0574,
#5075, #5078, #5079, #8079, #8093-002, #9074, #9079 PCI Expansion Towers.
There are exceptions for 32-bit slot placement in the Model 270 and 810 system units. See the system unit schematics in
15.8, 9406 Model 810 system unit schematic on page 576, and PCI and PCI-X Placement Rules for IBM System i models:
i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 (Fourth edition), REDP-4011, or PCI Card Placement Rules for the IBM eServer iSeries Server
OS/400 Version 5 Release 2: September 2003, REDP-3638, for backplane layout, PCI slot positions, and allowable #5700
slot plugging rules by model.
The following rules do not apply when the #5700 is controlled by a #2790/#2890 PCI Integrated Netfinity Server or by a
#2791/#2891, #2792/#2892, #4710/#4810, or #2799/#2899 PCI Integrated xSeries Server.
Must be placed in a 64-bit slot in the Model 825, 870, 890 or in the #0588, #0595, #5094/#0694, #5088, #5095,
#5294, #8094, and #9094 towers.
Limit the quantity of one #5700 adapter per Multi-adapter Bridge boundary.
Can be combined with a maximum of one other IOA on an IOP.
Restrictions:
SNA is supported using Enterprise Extenders starting with i5/OS V5R4.
Does not support LAN console.
IPX connections not supported.
The 1000 Mbps speed is not supported in Half Duplex (HDX) mode.
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R2 with PTF MF33086 or i5/OS V5R3 MF33087.
249
#5701

The #5701 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet UTP IOA allows a System i server to attach to IEEE standard 802.3z high-speed (1 Gbps)
Ethernet LANs. The #5701 can directly connect to 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps Ethernet LANs, however, it does not run at gigabit
speeds in this configuration. Crossover cables are not supported. The #5701 adapter supports a UTP CAT 5 media
interface.
A #5701 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet UTP IOA can be run under a #2792 PCI Integrated xSeries Server or #2892 PCI Integrated
xSeries Server. If a #5701 is controlled driven by a #27x2 Integrated xSeries Server, then #0226 1 Gbps Ethernet Specify
must be ordered. Order one #0226 for each #5701 controlled by an Integrated xSeries Server. When the #5701 is not
installed in an Integrated xSeries Server, there is a maximum of one #5701 per Multi-adapter Bridge Boundary.
Combinations of Integrated xSeries Server controlled and PCI IOP controlled #5701s within an Multi-adapter Bridge
Boundary are allowed.
The #5701 supports auto-negotiation if configured as *Auto/*Auto for gigabit interfaces and negotiates to the highest
capability of the link partner. This is usually 100/full or 1000/full. When the link partner is not capable of auto-negotiation
then hard coded values can be entered (for example, 100/half, 1000/full). In this case, auto negotiation is turned off and the
configured speed is used.
The #5701 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0621 - Direct Attach #5701 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet
UTP IOA, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #5701 cannot be accessed by OS/400
partitions.
PCI card slots required: One 32-bit slot in the Model 830, 840, SB2, or SB3 system units, or in the #0578, #5074, #0574,
#5075, #5078, #5079, #8079, #8093-002, #9074, #9079 PCI Expansion Towers
The following rules do not apply when the #5701 is controlled by a #2790/#2890 PCI Integrated Netfinity Server or by a
#2791/#2891, #2792/#2892, #4710/#4810, or #2799/#2899 PCI Integrated xSeries Server.
Must be placed in a 64-bit slot in the Model 825, 870, 890 or in the #0588, #0595, #5094/#0694, #5088, #5095,
#5294, #8094, and #9094 towers.
Limit the quantity of one #5701 adapter per Multi-adapter Bridge boundary.
Can be combined with a maximum of one other IOA on an IOP.
Restrictions:
IPX connections not supported.
Does not support LAN console.
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R2 with PTF MF33086 or i5/OS V5R3 MF33087.
#5706
#5706 PCI-X 1 Gbps Ethernet-TX IOA

The #5706 PCI-X 1 Gbps Ethernet-TX IOA is a 2-port 1000/100/10 Mbps Base-TX Ethernet PCI-X Adapter. The #5706 is
a full duplex, dual ported, Gigabit Ethernet adapter designed with highly integrated components. The #5706 adapter can
be configured to run each port at 1000, 100, or 10 Mbps data rates. The #5706 interfaces to the system via a PCI or PCI-X
bus and connects to a network using a 4-pair CAT-5 UTP cable for distances of up to 100m. The #5706 adapter conforms
to the IEEE 802.3ab 1000 Base-T standard. Jumbo frames are supported when running at the 1000 Mbps speed.
The #5706 can be directly attached to a Linux or AIX partition as supported with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for
POWER or Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3, and AIX 5L for POWER V5.2. When ordered as #0643 Direct Attach #5706 PCI-X Gbps Ethernet-TX IOA an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux/AIX partition,
the #5706 cannot be accessed by OS/400 partitions.
The #5706 does not require (is not supported by) a PCI IOP, even in an OS/400 partition.
For optimum performance, place the adapter in a 64 bit PCI-X card slot.
Restrictions:
LAN console is supported with i5/OS V5R3 and Licensed Internal Code V5R3M5, i5/OS V5R4 and later releases.
When the #5706 is used for LAN console, one port is dedicated to console function.
250
#5706
(contd.)
#5706 PCI-X 1 Gbps Ethernet-TX IOA

The following functions are supported by AIX, but are not supported by i5/OS with the #5706 PCI-X 1 Gbps Ethernet-TX
IOA:
Large Send, sometimes known as TCP Segmentation, offloads the TCP segmentation operation from the IP layer to the
adapter for outgoing (transmit side) TCP segments.
Checksum Offload offloads the TCP/UDP Checksum Operation or workload from the CPU to the adapter. Checksum
Offload is supported by Linux with the 2.6 kernel, for example SLES9xx.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 with PTF MF33087
#5707
#5707 PCI-X 1 Gbps Ethernet-SX IOA

The #5707 PCI-X 1 Gbps Ethernet-SX IOA is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter that provides two 1 Gbps (1000
Base-SX) full-duplex Ethernet LAN connections with throughput on a standard shortwave multimode optical cable that
conforms to the IEEE 802.3z standard. The adapter supports distances of 260m for 62.5 m MMF and 550m for 50.0 m
MMF. Jumbo frames are supported when running at the 1000 Mbps speed.
The #5707 PCI-X 1 Gbps Ethernet-SX IOA supports Large Send (sometimes known as TCP segmentation). This function
offloads the TCP segmentation operation from the IP layer to the adapter for outgoing (transmit side) TCP segments. The
#5707 also supports Checksum Offload, which offloads the TCP/UDP Checksum Operation or workload from the CPU to
the adapter.
The #5707 does not require (is not supported by) a PCI IOP, even in an i5/OS partition.
For optimum performance, the adapter should be placed in a 64 bit PCI-X card slot whenever possible.
The 2-port IBM Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter incorporates an LC type connector on the card.
Restrictions:
LAN console is supported with i5/OS V5R3 and Licensed Internal Code V5R3M5, i5/OS V5R4 and later releases.
When the #5707 is used for LAN console, one port is dedicated to console function.
Half duplex (HDX) mode is not supported.
The following functions are supported by AIX, but are not supported by i5/OS with the #5707 PCI-X 1 Gbps Ethernet-TX
IOA:
Large Send, sometimes known as TCP Segmentation, offloads the TCP segmentation operation from the IP layer to the
adapter for outgoing (transmit side) TCP segments.
Checksum Off load offloads the TCP/UDP Checksum Operation or workload from the CPU to the adapter. Checksum
Offload is supported by Linux with the 2.6 kernel, for example SLES9xx.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 with MF33087.
#5718
#5718 10 Gbps Ethernet Adapter (short reach)

The #5718 provides 10 Gigabit Ethernet PCI-X based server connections. Supports distances of up to 33m using 62.5um
multimode fiber or 300m using 50 m multimode fiber with 2000 MHz km minimum model bandwidth at 850 nanometer
(nm). Adapter connector type is LC.
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for Power V5.2S for IBM eServer or later
Supported on Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), and 595.
#5719
#5719 10 Gbps Ethernet Adapter (long reach)

The 10 Gigabit Ethernet PCI-X-based server provides connections over a maximum of 10km of 1310 nm single-mode fiber
optic cable. The adapter conforms to the IEEE 802.3ae standard. The adapter requires 9 m single-mode fiber optic cables
and uses an SC connector type for connecting into network infrastructure components like 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch or
router with SC connectors.
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for POWER V5.2S for IBM eServer or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for
POWER Version 3 or later, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later
Supported on Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), and 595.
251
#5721
#5721 PCI-X 10Gbps Ethernet-SR IOA

The #5721 PCI-X 10Gbps Ethernet-SR IOA provides 10 Gbps Ethernet server connection using a PCI-X DDR IOA.
Supports distances of up to 33m using 62.5um multimode fiber or 300m using 50um multimode fiber with 2000 MHz km
minimum model bandwidth at 850nm. Adapter connector type is LC. The #5721 does not support SNA. The #5721 is a
smart IOA and operates only in IOP-less mode, even when used by i5/OS.
Linux AS for POWER Version 4 or later, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later
Restriction: SNA supported with i5/OS AnyNet or starting with V5R4 Enterprise Extenders (EE) support.
#5722
#5722 PCI-X 10Gbps Ethernet-LR IOA

The #5722 PCI-X 10Gbps Ethernet-LR IOA provides 10 Gbps Ethernet server connection using a PCI-X DDR IOA.
Supports distances of up to 10 kilometers of 1310nm 9um single-mode fiber optic cable. The #5722 conforms to the IEEE
802.3ae standard. The #5722 requires 9um single-mode fiber optic cables and uses an SC connector type for connecting
into network infrastructure components like 10 Gbps Ethernet switch/router with SC connectors.
The #5722 does not support SNA. The #5722 is a smart IOA and operates only in IOP-less mode, even when used by
i5/OS.
Linux AS for POWER Version 4 or later, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later
#5723
#5723 2-Port Async EIA -232 PCI IOA

The #5723 provides connection for two asynchronous EIA-232 devices. Ports are programmable to support EIA-232
protocols at a line speed of 128 Kbps.
Provides two asynchronous ports. Occupies one PCI slot.
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for POWER, OS/400 V5R2 for iSeries
#5740
#5740 1Gbps BaseT Ethernet (4-port)

The #5740 provides a 4-port 10/100/1000 Mbps Base Ethernet adapter, which supports four 1-Gigabit ports on a single
adapter, delivering increased bandwidth for slot-constrained servers and providing high connectivity and reliability using
two integrated, dual-port Gigabit Ethernet controllers.
Characteristics include:
Supports 64-bit Bus Mastering on the PCI-X bus
Compliant with IEEE 802.3ab 1000Base-T, 803.u 100Base-TX, 802.3 10Base-T standards and supports 802.1q
VLAN tagging
Supports interrupt moderation
TCP Segmentation off-load and encapsulation in hardware
Checksum off-loading of IP, TCP, and UDP frame
Remote Management Support
Delivers increased connectivity while significantly reducing CPU Utilization
Provides 10/100/1000 Mbps connectivity through four RJ-45 ports using CAT-5 cables
Support for Boot ROM on two ports
Supports advanced cable diagnostics
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER
Version 4, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models
252
#5749
#5749 4Gbps PCI-X Fibre Channel 2-Port

The 4 Gigabit Dual-Port Fibre Channel PCI-X 2.0 DDR Adapter is a 64-bit address/data, short form factor PCI-X adapter
with an LC type external fiber connector that provides single or dual initiator capability over an optical fiber link or loop. With
the use of appropriate optical fiber cabling, this adapter provides the capability for a network of high-speed local and remote
torage. The adapter will auto-negotiate for the highest data rate between adapter and an attaching device at 1 Gbps,
2 Gbps or 4 Gbps of which the device or switch is capable. Distances of up to 500 meters running at 1 Gbps data rate, up
to 300 meters running at 2 Gbps data rate, and 4 Gbps data rate up to 150 meters are supported between the adapter and
an attaching device or switch. When used with IBM Fibre Channel storage switches supporting long-wave optics, distances
up to 10 kilometers are capable of running at either 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, or 4 Gbps data rates.
This adapter can be used to attach devices either directly, or by means of Fibre Channel Switches. If attaching a device or
switch with SC type fiber connector(s), use of an LC-SC 50 Micron Fiber Converter Cable (#2456) or an LC-SC 62.5 Micron
Fiber Converter Cable (#2459) is required.
Minimum operating system levels:
AIX direct support not available.
LINUX direct support not available.
IBM i (formerly i5/OS) 6.1 or later. This is a smart IOA (it can run with or without a supporting IOP). It supports IBM
DS8000 attachment, multipath, and an IBM i load source disk. A supported tape device may be used for alternale IPL.
Customers can mix tape and disk on the same Fibre Channel adapter, but there may be significant performance
considerations with concurrent tape and disk operations.
The tape libraries supported by IBM i 6.1 on this adapter include:
3592 with 3592 J1A / 3592 E05 drives
3584 (TS3500) with LTO 2 or LTO 3 drives
3583 with 3592 J1A / 3592 E05 drives
3494 with 3592 J1A / 3592 E05
Supported on POWER6 systems.
The #5749 is a Customer Set Up feature.
Additonal tape support is planned .
Refer to the following IBM Web sites for the latest support information:
IBM System Storage and TotalStorage products at: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/storage/product/index.html
IBM Prerequisites at: http://www-912.ibm.com/e_dir/eServerPrereq.nsf/
#5767
#5767 PCIe 1Gb Ethernet UTP 2Port

The #5767 IBM 2-Port 10/100/1000 Base-TX Ethernet PCI Express (PCIe) Adapter is a Full Duplex, dual ported, Gigabit
Ethernet adapter. This adapter:
Can be configured to run each port at 10, 100, or 1000 Mbps data rates.
Interfaces to the system via a PCIe bus. (It is PCIe x4 capable and conforms to the PCIe 1.0a standard).
Connects to a network using a 4-pair CAT-5 UTP cable for distances of up to 100m.
Supports jumbo frames when running at the 1000 Mbps speed.
The adapter conforms to the IEEE 802.3ab 1000Base-T standard.
Maximum allowed Model 570 (POWER6): 15 (Initial order maximum: 15)
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 or later, AIX 5.3 or AIX 6.1 or later, SUSE
Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER Systems, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 for POWER Systems or later, or Red
Hat Enterprise Linux AS 4 for POWER or later
253
#5768
#5768 PCIe 1Gb Ethernet Fiber 2Port

The #5768 IBM 2-Port Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI Express (PCIe) Adapter provides two 1 Gbps (1000Base-SX) full-duplex
Ethernet LAN connections. This adapter offers the following features:
Interfaces to the system via a PCIe bus.
Is PCIe x4 capable and conforms to the PCIe 1.0a standard.
Connects to a network using a standard shortwave multimode optical cable that conforms to the IEEE 802.3z
standard.
Supports distances of 260m for 62.5 m MMF and 550m for 50.0 m MMF.
Supports jumbo frames when running at the 1000 Mbps speed.
Maximum allowed Model 570 (POWER6): 15 (Initial order maximum: 15)
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 or later, AIX 5.3 or AIX 6.1 or later;
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER Systems; SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 for POWER Systems or later; or
Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS 4 for POWER or later
#5773
#5773 PCIe 4Gb Fibre Channel 1Port

The #5773 4 Gigabit Single Port Fibre Channel Adapter is a 64-bit address/ data, short form factor PCIe adapter with an
LC type external fiber connector. With the use of appropriate optical fiber cabling, this adapter provides the capability for a
network of high-speed local and remote located storage. The adapter auto-negotiates for the highest data rate between
adapter and an attaching device at 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps or 4 Gbps of which the device or switch is capable. Distances up to 500
meters running at 1 Gbps data rate, up to 300 meters running at 2 Gbps data rate, and 4 Gbps data rate up to 150 meters
are supported between the adapter and an attaching device or switch. When used with IBM Fibre Channel storage switches
supporting long-wave optics, distances up to 10 kilometers are capable running at either 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, or 4 Gbps data
rates. The 4 Gigabit 1 PCIe Single Port Fibre Channel Adapter can be used to attach devices either directly, or by means
of Fibre Channel Switches. If attaching a device or switch with a SC type fiber connector(s), use of an LC-SC 50 m Fiber
Converter Cable (#2456) or a LC-SC 62.5 Micron Fiber Converter Cable (#2459) is required.
Refer to the following IBM Storage Subsystem Web page for additional supported server attachment information for IBM
devices: http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/product/products_pseries.html
Consult with your IBM representative or Business Partner for additional information relative to any third party attachment.
Maximum allowed:
8203-E4A: 3
8204-E8A: 3
9407-M15: 15 (Initial order maximum: 15)
AIX 5.3 with the 5300-07 Technology Level or later. AIX 5.3 with the 5300-06 Technology Level with Service Pack 4 or
later. AIX 6.1 or later.
SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 9 for POWER
SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 10 SP1 for POWER Systems, or later.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux for POWER, Version 4.5 or later. Red Hat Enterprise Linux for POWER, Version 5.1 or later.
Supported on POWER6 models.
IBM System Storage and TotalStorage products at: http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/product/index.html
254
#5774
#5774 PCIe 4Gb Fibre Channel 2-Port

The #5774 4 Gigabit Dual 1 Port Fibre Channel Adapter is a 64-bit address/ data, short form factor PCIe adapter with an
LC type external fiber connector that provides single or dual initiator capability over an optical fiber link or loop. With the
use of appropriate optical fiber cabling, this adapter provides the capability for a network of high-speed local and remote
located storage. The adapter will auto-negotiate for the highest data rate be tween adapter and an attaching device at
1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, or 4 Gbps of which the device or switch is capable. Between the adapter and an attaching device or switch,
the distances supported are up to: 500 meters running at 1 Gbps data rate, 300 meters running at 2 Gbps data rate, and
150 meters running at 4 Gbps data rate. When used with IBM Fibre Channel storage switches supporting long-wave optics,
distances of up to 10 kilometers are capable running at either 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, or 4 Gbps data rates. The 4 Gigabit PCIe
Dual Port Fibre Channel Adapter can be used to attach devices either directly or by means of Fibre Channel Switches. If
attaching a device or switch with a SC type fiber connector(s), use of an LC-SC 50 Micron Fiber Converter Cable (#2456)
or a LC-SC 62.5 Micron Fiber Converter Cable (#2459) is required.
Maximum allowed: 15 (Initial order maximum: 15)
AIX 5.3 with the 5300-07 Technology Level or later. AIX 5.3 with the 5300-06 Technology Level with Service Pack 4 or
later. AIX 6.1 or later.
SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 9 for POWER.
SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 10 SP1 for POWER Systems, or later.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux for POWER, Version 4.5 or later. Red Hat Enterprise Linux for POWER, Version 5.1 or later.
IBM i (formerly i5/OS) 6.1 or later. This is a smart IOA (can run with or without a supporting IOP). It supports IBM
DS8000 attachment, multipath, and an IBM i load source disk. A supported tape device may be used for alternale IPL.
Customers can mix tape and disk on the same Fibre Channel adapter, but there may be significant performance
considerations with concurrent disk and tape operations.
The tape libraries supported by IBM i 6.1 on this adapter include:
3592 with 3592 J1A / 3592 E05 drives
3584 (TS3500) with LTO 2 or LTO 3 drives
3583 with 3592 J1A / 3592 E05 drives
3494 with 3592 J1A / 3592 E05
Supported on POWER6 models.
Additonal tape support is planned .
IBM System Storage and TotalStorage products at: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/storage/product/index.html
#5783
#5783 PCI-X iSCSI HBA Copper

The #5783 is a 1 Gbps copper iSCSI target host bus adapter (HBA), which is used to connect to the iSCSI initiator HBAs
installed in selected System x models or IBM BladeCenter blade servers. It uses a RJ45 Gigabit Ethernet connector and
provides 1000 Mbps of connectivity over standard CAT-5e or CAT6 cables to support communications up to a distance of
100m. It conforms to IEEE 802.3ab 1000Base-T standard.
Minimum operating system level: V5R4 with V5R4M5 Machine Code, or later.
Note: Your network might require specific IP switches to be used with iSCSI connections. You can find additional
information on the Web at: http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/bladecenter/iscsi/switches.html
You can also find additional information on the iSCSI Web page at: http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/bladecenter/iscsi
This Web page includes a link, under Documentation, to iSCSI install read me first for planning information and a Library
link to System i integration with BladeCenter and System x: iSCSI Network Planning Guide, which you can find directly at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/bladecenter/pdf/iscsi_planning.pdf
255
#5784
#5784 PCI-X iSCSI HBA Fiber

The #5784 is a 1 Gbps fiber iSCSI target HBA, which is used to connect to the iSCSI initiator HBAs installed in selected
System x models or IBM BladeCenter blade servers. It uses a small form factor LC type fiber optic connector and provides
1000 Mbps connectivity on a standard shortwave (850 nm) 50/62.5 m multimode fiber optic cable. It supports distances
up to 220m for 62.5u MMF and up to 500m for 50.0u MMF over a single port. It conforms to the IEEE 802.3z standard.
Minimum operating system level: V5R4 with V5R4M5 Machine Code, or later.
Note: Your network might require specific IP switches to be used with iSCSI connections. You can find additional
information on the Web at: http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/bladecenter/iscsi/switches.html
You can also find additional information on the iSCSI Web page at: http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/bladecenter/iscsi
This Web page includes a link, under Documentation, to iSCSI install read me first for planning information and a Library
link to System i integration with BladeCenter and System x: iSCSI Network Planning Guide, which you can find directly at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/bladecenter/pdf/iscsi_planning.pdf
#6800
#6800 PCI 1Gbps Ethernet IOA

The #6800 - PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA provides a PCI-X IOA, which does not require an IOP and allows a system to attach
to IEEE standard 802.3Z high speed (1 Gbps) Ethernet LANs. The #6800 adapter supports a multimode fiber interface with
a 62.5 m or 50.0 m cable requirement. The adapter has a duplex LC fiber-optic connector for attachment to
customer-supplied cabling.
The #6800 only supports TCP/IP and requires an intervening switch, hub, or router when connected to 100 Mbps or 10
Mbps networks. The #6800, #0620, and #5700 are physically the same adapter card but have different feature numbers
that denote to IBM configurator tools whether an IOP is required. See the description of the #5700 on page 249 for
information about the function provided by the #6800.
595, and 9411-100. When running IOP-less, the following support applies:
#6801
#6801 PCI 1Gbps Ethernet UTP IOA

The #6801 - PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet UTP IOA provides a PCI-X IOA, which does not require an IOP and allows a system to
attach to IEEE standard 802.3ab high speed (1 Gbps) Ethernet LANs. It can also be used to directly connect to existing
10 Mbps or 100 Mbps Ethernet LANs. However, it does not run at gigabit speeds in this configuration. Cross-over cables
are not supported. The adapter supports a UTP CAT 5 media interface and has a RJ-45 connector.
The #6801, #0621, and #5701 are physically the same adapter card but have different feature numbers that denote to IBM
configurator tools whether an IOP is required. See #5701 on page 250 for more information about the function provided
by the #6801.
256
#6803
#9493
#6803 PCI WAN for ECS

The #6803 is a WAN w/modem adapter which provides connectivity for IBM Electronic Customer Support (ECS) only. This
feature is the non-CIM (Complex Impedance Matching) version offered in all countries except Australia and New Zealand.
#6803 is functionally equivalent to #0614/#2793/#9793, but #6803 indicates to IBM configurator tools that the IOA is being
used by i5/OS in an IOP-less mode. When in IOP-less mode the adapter function is restricted to communicating to IBM
ECS on port 0 (modem port).
Port 0 supports V.92 56K PPP, V.92 data modem and V.44 data compression. Port 0 does not provide synchronous modem
capabilities (SDLC and Synchronous PPP).
#1010 Modem Cable - Austria
#1011 Modem Cable - Belgium
#1012 Modem Cable - Africa
#1013 Modem Cable - Israel
#1014 Modem Cable - Italy
#1015 Modem Cable - France
#1016 Modem Cable - Germany
#1017 Modem Cable - UK
#1018 Modem Cable - Iceland/Sweden
#1020 Modem Cable - HK/NZ
#1021 Modem Cable - Finland/Norway
#1022 Modem Cable - Netherlands
#1023 Modem Cable - Swiss
#1024 Modem Cable - Denmark
#1025 Modem Cable - US/Canada
The #6803 does not support the remote ring indicate function. This feature has country- or region-specific usage.
Minimum operating system level for IOP-less protocols support requires i5/OS V5R3 and LIC V5R3M5 for Model 520+.
Minimum IOP-less protocols support on the following models requires i5/OS V5R4 and Licensed Internal Code V5R4M5
and CUM C7282540 and prerequisite PTFs, or later releases: Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595, and 9411-100.
#6804
#9494
#9794
#6804 PCI WAN for ECS (CIM)

The #6804 is a WAN w/modem adapter, which provides connectivity for IBM Electronic Customer Support (ECS) only. This
feature is the CIM version offered in Australia and New Zealand. The #6804/#9494 is functionally equivalent to
#0615/#2794/#9794. The #6804 /#9494 indicates that the IOA is being used by i5/OS in IOP-less mode. When in IOP-less
mode, the adapter function is restricted to communicating to IBM ECS on port 0 (modem port). Port 0 supports V.92 56K
PPP, V.92 data modem and V.44 data compression. Port 0 does not provide synchronous modem capabilities (SDLC and
Synchronous PPP).
#1010 Modem Cable - Austria
#1011 Modem Cable - Belgium
#1012 Modem Cable - Africa
#1013 Modem Cable - Israel
#1014 Modem Cable - Italy
#1015 Modem Cable - France
#1016 Modem Cable - Germany
#1017 Modem Cable - UK
#1018 Modem Cable - Iceland/Sweden
#1020 Modem Cable - HK/NZ
#1021 Modem Cable - Finland/Norway
#1022 Modem Cable - Netherlands
#1023 Modem Cable - Swiss
#1024 Modem Cable - Denmark
#1025 Modem Cable - US/Canada
#0348 - V.24/EIA232 20-ft PCI Cable
The #6804/#9494 does not support the remote ring indicate function. This feature has country- or region-specific usage.
Minimum operating system level for IOP-less protocols support requires i5/OS V5R3 and LIC V5R3M5 for Model 520+.
Minimum IOP-less protocols support on the following models requires i5/OS V5R4 and Licensed Internal Code V5R4M5
and CUM C7282540 and prerequisite PTFs, or later releases: Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595, and 9411-100.
257
#6805
#6805 PCI 2-Line WAN IOA No IOP

The #6805 is a WAN IOA, which supports up to two multiple protocol communications (RVX) ports when one or two of the
following cables are attached:
#0348 V.24/EIA232 20-Ft PCI cable
#0349 V.24/EIA232 50-Ft PCI Cable (support only, not orderable)
#0353 V.35 20-Ft PCI cable
#0355 V.35 80-Ft PCI Cable (support only, not orderable)
#0358 V.36 80-Ft PCI Cable (support only, not orderable)
#0359 X.21 20-Ft PCI cable
The #0367 cable ships with a 25 pin to 9 pin adapter. Multiple #0367 cables can be ordered (but only one per #6805) to
serve as consoles for secondary partitions when logical partitioning is used.
When #6805 is selected to support ECS, one of following cables must be specified:
#0348 V.24/EIA232 20-Ft PCI Cable
#0349 V.24/EIA232 50-Ft PCI Cable (support only, not orderable)
#0365 V.24/EIA232 80-Ft PCI Cable
The #6805 does not make use of an IOP.
Async
Bisync
Fax
PPP
SNA communications through the i5/OS V5R4 Enterprise Extender function and later releases
X.21
Restrictions:
#6808
#6808 PCI Quad Modem IOA No IOP

The #6808 is a four-line WAN modem adapter, with four RJ-11 ports. Connection to the V.92 ports is via telephone cable.
synchronization periods. The #6808 is non-CIM.
The supported protocols are:
V.92 56K Async SLIP/PPP.
V.34 Fax applications at data rates up to 33.6K via integrated modems.
A minimum of one modem cable must be ordered for each #6808. All modem cables installed on a system must be the
258
#6808
(contd.)
#6808 PCI Quad Modem IOA No IOP

availability.
Restrictions:
The call waiting and modem on hold functions associated with V.92 is not supported.
Remote power on via ring-indicator and SDLC are not supported.
Minimum operating system level: IOP-less protocols are supported with i5/OS V5R4 and Licensed Internal Code V5R4M5
and CUM C7282540 and prerequisite PTFs, or later releases.
Supported on Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595 and 9411-100.
#6809
#6809 PCI Quad Modem IOA No IOP CIM

The #6809 is a four-line WAN modem adapter, with four RJ-11 ports. Connection to the V.92 ports is via telephone cable.
synchronization periods. The #6809 has CIM.
V.92 56K Async SLIP/PPP.
V.34 Fax applications at data rates up to 33.6K via integrated modems.
A minimum of one modem cable must be ordered for each #6809. All modem cables installed on a system must be the
#1019 - Modem Cable - Australia
availability.
Restrictions:
The call waiting and modem on hold functions associated with V.92 is not supported.
Remote power on via ring-indicator and SDLC are not supported.
Minimum operating system level: IOP-less protocols supported with i5/OS V5R4 and Licensed Internal Code V5R4M5 and
CUM C7282540 and prerequisite PTFs, or later releases.
Supported on Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595 and 9411-100.
259
#6833
#9933
#6833 PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem, No IOP

The #6833 is a two-line/port WAN w/modem adapter. This feature is the non-CIM version offered in all countries except
Australia and New Zealand. The #6833/#9933 is physically the same card as #0614/#2793/#9793, but #6833/#9933
indicates to IBM configurator tools that the IOA is being used by i5/OS in an IOP-less mode. The #6833/#9933 is physically
the same card as the IOP-less #6803/#9493, but with i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 additional function
is provided including the use of the 2nd communication port and a separate feature code is used to denote this.
Port 0 is a RJ-11port. Connection to the V.92 port is via a telephone cable. The V.92 functions offer increased upload
throughput and improved V.44 data compression.
V.92 56K Async SLIP/PP
V.92 56K Async SLIP/PPPV.92 56K Async SLIP/PPP
V.34 FAX modem and FAX functions, such as ECM and 2D/1D conversion
Port 0 does not provide Sync modem capabilities for:
SDLC
Sync PPP
Bisync
Port 1 is the RVX port and supports multiple communications protocols when one of the following cables is attached:
#0356 V.36 20-Ft PCI cable)
#0367 - Operations Console PCI Cable (ships with a 25-pin to 9-pin adapter).
Async SLIP/PP
FAX
Bisync
SNA communications is supported through i5/OS AnyNet or i5/OS V5R4 Enterprise Extender function and later
releases. If direct SNA is desired, choose a WAN adapter that requires an IOP. See the iSeries Information Center
for information about how to configure AnyNet and EE support: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/
CRTLINSDLC is not supported.
ECS is supported from both the modem port, and the RVX port.
Port 0 cable feature listed above.
Port 1 cable #0348 V.24/EIA232 20-Ft PCI Cable.
The #6833 does not use an IOP.
Port 0 and 1 restriction summary:
595.
260
#6834
#9934
#6834 PCI 2-Ln WAN w/Mod, No IOP CIM

The #6834 is a two-line/port WAN w/modem adapter. This feature is the CIM version that is offered only in Australia and
New Zealand. The #6834 is functionally equivalent to #0614/#2793/#9793, but #6834 indicates to IBM configurator tools
that the IOA is being used by i5/OS in an IOP-less mode. The #6834/#9934 is physically the same card as
#0614/#2794/#9794, but #6834/#9934 indicates to IBM configurator tools that the IOA is being used by i5/OS in an IOP-less
mode. The #6834/#9934 is physically the same card as the IOP-less #6804/#9494, but with i5/OS V5R4 with License
Internal Code V5R4M5, additional function is provided including the use of the second communication port and a separate
feature code is used to denote this.
Port 0 is a RJ-11port. Connection to the V.92 port is via a telephone cable. The V.92 functions offer increased upload
throughput and improved V.44 data compression.
V.92 56K Async SLIP/PP.
V.92 56K Async SLIP/PPPV.92 56K Async SLIP/PPP.
V.34 FAX modem and FAX functions, such as ECM and 2D/1D conversion.
Port 0 does not provide Sync modem capabilities
SDLC
Sync PPP
Bisync
Port 1 is the RVX port and supports multiple communications protocols when one of the following cables is attached:
#0367 - Operations Console PCI Cable (ships with a 25 pin to 9 pin adapter).
Async SLIP/PP
FAX
Bisync
SNA communications is supported through i5/OS AnyNet or i5/OS V5R4 Enterprise Extender function and later
releases. If direct SNA is desired, choose a WAN adapter that requires an IOP. See the iSeries Information Center
for information about how to configure AnyNet and EE support: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/
CRTLINSDLC is not supported.
ECS is supported from both the modem port and the RVX port:
Port 0 cable feature listed above
Port 1 cable #0348 V.24/EIA232 20-Ft PCI Cable
The #6834 does not use an IOP.
Restrictions:
595.
261
#9812
#9812 PCI-X Integrated xSeries Server

The #9812 is a double-wide PCI card that contains a 2.0 GHz processor with 2 MB integrated L2 cache. It has two
integrated 1000, 100, or 10 Mbps Ethernet ports, two USB 1.1 ports and traditional PC keyboard and mouse ports. A
keyboard and mouse can either connect to the traditional ports or connect to the USB ports. There is an SVGA video port
for connection of a display.
The #9812 has two memory slots. These slots must always contain a pair of identical memory features. Available memory
features are:
#0446 - 512 MB DDR Server Memory (MES only)
#0447 - 1 GB DDR Server Memory (MES only)
#8546 - Opt Base 1 GB Server Memory (Initial order only)
#9726 - Base 512 MB Server Memory (Initial order only)
The #9812 requires a #2844, #9744, or #9844 IOP to drive it. The IOP can be shared, but only one #9812 is permitted per
IOP.
When #9812 is ordered, the configurator adds two #9726 Base 512 MB Server Memory features to the order. The two
#9726 features can be replaced with two #8546 Optional Base 1 GB Server Memory features or the two server memory
features can be removed from the order and two #0446 or two #0447 can be installed in the field. The configurator also
adds a #9744 Base PCI IOP to drive the #9812. The #9744 can be removed from the order for PCI slot conservation.
The two integrated 1000, 100, or 10 Mbps Ethernet LAN ports included on the #9812 provide attachment to IEEE standard
802.3ab high-speed (1 Gbps) Ethernet LANs. They can also be used to connect to existing 10 and 100 Mbps Ethernet
networks. The adapter supports UTP CAT 5 or higher media interface and TCP/IP. The #9812 does not support any other
LAN features and does not support native i5/OS functions.
The following features are defaulted (where offered) and can be removed from the order:
#0325 IPCS Extension Cable for Windows (for display, mouse and keyboard)
#1700 IPCS Keyboard and Mouse for Windows
The supported Windows versions are:
Windows 2000 Server
Windows 2000 Advanced Server
Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition
Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition
Windows Server 2003 Web Edition
A display for versions of Windows 2000 is required and must be connected to the #9812. A display is not required for
versions of Windows 2003 but can be connected to the #9812 to support Windows. If no display is connected, the Virtual
System Console is used.
For Linux server products supported on the #9812, see: http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/integratedxseries/linux
An IOP and two 3.3V PCI card slots are required.
The #9812 is functionally identical to #4812 but is included in the base with orders for Enterprise Editions on Models 550
and 595.
Supported on Models 550, 570 and 595.
#9813
262
#9813 PCI-X Integrated xSeries Server

The #9813 is functionally identical to #4813 but is included in the base with orders for Enterprise Editions on system Model
570. See #4811 #4812 #4813 #9812 #9813 on page 246
#9771

The #9771 is a two-line WAN adapter. One port supports V.90 56K async data on PPP via an internal modem. The second
port supports multiple protocol communications (WAN). Connection to the V.90 port uses a telephone cable. Connection
to the WAN communication port is through one of the following cables:
The #9771 supports the #0367 Operations Console PCI Cable on the WAN (RVX) port to directly connect the Operations
Console for OS/400 V5R1 or later or with OS/400 V4R5 and PTF MF25397. Direct connection of the Operations Console
is mutually exclusive with V.90 support of the dial-in Operations Console.
The #9771 supports the #5544 System Console on Operations Console on the V.90 port for dial-in Operations Console
with V5R1. An additional #4745 on OS/400 V4R5 systems is required for dial-in Operations Console support.
The #9771 ships with a country- or region-specific telephone cable. A modem cable feature is not required on the order.
ECS is supported over TCP/IP on the V.90 telephone cable port with V5R1, or with OS/400 V4R5 and PTF SF64124. Fax
is supported on the V.90 port with V5R1, or with OS/400 V4R5 and PTFs MF25290 and SF64604.
To support ECS on the WAN port of the #9771, specify one of the following cables:
#0348 V.24/EIA232 20-ft (6 m) PCI cable (default)
ECS operates on the WAN port of the #9771 by changing the *RSRCNAME parameter of the QESLINE and QTILINE line
descriptions to that of the WAN port on the #9771 card.
Remote Power On is not supported. The #9771 does not support the remote ring indicate function.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V4R5 with supporting PTFs
263
4.10 Disk units

Disk units
Disk model
identifier
The system configuration list (rack configuration) shows the disk type and model in the format XXXX-YYY, where XXXX
identifies the CCIN of the disk and YYY identifies the potential or actual disk protection and compression. Refer to
Chapter 9, Customer Card Identification Numbers cross-reference on page 391, for a listing of the CCINs.
The YYY identifiers are:
030: Unprotected or mirrored unit attached to a non-RAID capable controller.
050: Unprotected or mirrored unit attached to a RAID capable controller.
060: Unprotected or mirrored unit attached to a RAID capable controller. Data compression is active.
070: Non-parity member of a parity (RAID) set. Full capacity. Data compression is inactive.
071: Parity member of a parity (RAID) set with sixteen parity members. Fifteen-sixteenths capacity. Data compression is
inactive.
072: Parity member of a parity (RAID) set with eight parity members. Seven-eighths capacity. Data compression is inactive.
074: Parity member of a parity (RAID) set with four parity members. Three-fourths capacity. Data compression is inactive.
078: Parity member of a parity (RAID) set with two parity members. Half capacity. Data compression is inactive.
080: Non-parity member of a parity (RAID) set. Full capacity. Data compression is active.
082: Parity member of a parity (RAID) set with eight parity members. Seven-eighths capacity. Data compression is active.
084: Parity member of a parity (RAID) set with four parity members. Three-fourths capacity. Compression is active.
099: Parity member of a parity (RAID) set.
090: Non-parity member of a parity (RAID) set. Full capacity.
Disk data
rate
IBM System i5 15K RPM disk drives from January 2006 onward support data rates up to 320 MB with the proper disk
controller. Disk controllers that support disk data rates up to 320 MB (U320 or Ultra4 SCSI) include the #0647, #0648,
#2780, #5580, #5736, #5737, #5766, #5775, and #5776. The data rate is not a significant performance factor compared to
other specifications such as the cache size and the disk RPM.
#0040
#0040 Mirrored System Disk Level Protection Capability

This code indicates the level of disk protection desired and helps ensure that adequate hardware is in the final configuration.
For new systems: Causes the order to fail if sufficient disk units are not ordered to support device-level mirrored protection.
The #0040 causes all disk units to be placed into configurations capable of implementing mirrored pairs.
For upgrade orders: The #0040 causes a warning message to be generated during implementation of mirroring if
sufficient disk units are unavailable to provide mirror capability. The customer is responsible for starting mirroring on their
system. Mirrored system disk level protection requires all disk units to be placed into mirrored pairs and mirroring be
started. The load source must be controlled by the first disk controller on the first system bus and must be mirrored to a like
disk unit also attached to the first disk controller on the first system bus. Refer to:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/pubs/html/as400/infocenter.htm
Logically partitioned systems require additional planning.
The minimum number of disks allowed on a system is two.
#0041
#0041 Device Parity Protection Capability

The #0041 Device Parity Protection Capability indicates the level of disk protection desired and helps ensure that adequate
hardware is in the final configuration. The #0041 is the default specify code for data protection capability.
For new systems, the #0041 causes the order to fail if a disk unit or adapter is ordered that is not capable of implementing
RAID protection. The #0041 causes all internal disk units to be placed into configurations capable of implementing RAID
arrays using a RAID-capable disk controller.
For upgrade orders, the #0041 causes the order to replace adapters that are not RAID-capable with RAID-capable
adapters. A warning message is generated during RAID enablement if there are not enough disk units to support a
minimum RAID configuration.
It is the customer's responsibility to start RAID on their system.
Device parity protection requires all disk units to be placed in sets large enough to turn on RAID protection, as well as be
connected to a RAID-capable adapter. The rules for RAID can be found in the disk controller descriptions.
264
#0042
#0042 Mirrored System IOP Level Protection Capability

The #0042 Mirrored System IOP Level Protection Capability indicates the level of disk protection desired and helps ensure
that adequate hardware is in the final configuration.
For new systems, the #0042 causes the order to fail if sufficient disk units and IOPs are not included on the order to support
IOP-level mirrored protection. The #0042 causes all disk units to be placed into configurations capable of IOP-level
mirroring. Each disk unit and its mirrored pair must be on a different disk unit IOP.
For upgrade orders, the #0042 causes a warning message to be generated during implementation of the upgrade if
sufficient disk units, adapters, and IOPs are not available to provide the capability to enable IOP-level mirrored protection
for all DASD. It is the customers responsibility to start mirroring on their system.
The load source disk unit in a new, preloaded system is device-level mirrored. (This is the same protection as provided with
#0040.) This means that the load source is controlled by the first disk unit controller on the first system bus and is mirrored
with a like disk unit that is also attached to the same first disk controller on the first system bus.
The minimum number of disks allowed on a system is four.
#0043
#0043 Mirrored System Bus Level Protection Capability

The #0043 Mirrored System Bus Level Protection Capability indicates the level of disk protection desired and helps ensure
that adequate hardware is in the final configuration.
For new systems, the #0043 causes the order to fail if sufficient disk units, IOPs and expansion units are not included on
the order to support bus-level mirrored protection for all disk units.
The load source disk unit in a new, preloaded system is device-level mirrored. This means that the load source is controlled
by the first disk controller on the first system bus and is mirrored with a like disk unit that is also attached to the same first
disk controller on the first system bus. Bus-level mirroring of the Load Source disk unit can be achieved only by enabling
Remote Load Source Mirroring before starting Mirrored Protection. For details about implementing Remote Load Source
Mirroring, refer to the iSeries Information Center at:
For upgrade orders, a warning message is generated during installation of the upgrade if sufficient disk units, IOPs, and
expansion units are not available to provide the capability to enable bus-level mirrored protection for all disk units.
It is the customer's responsibility to start mirroring on their system.
Bus-level mirroring requires all disk units to be placed into mirrored pairs on separate busses. Refer to the iSeries
Information Center for important Mirrored Protection and Remote Load Source Mirroring implementation details. Logically
partitioned systems require additional planning.
The minimum number of disks allowed on a system is four.
#0047
#0047 Device Parity RAID-6 All

The #0047 code indicates the level of disk protection desired and helps ensure that adequate hardware is in the final
ordered configuration. RAID-6 requires a storage adapter that supports RAID-6. CCINs 571B, 571E, & 571F support
RAID-6.
For new systems, the #0047 causes the order to fail if a disk unit or adapter is ordered that is not capable of implementing
RAID-6 protection. The #0047 causes all internal disk units to be placed into configurations capable of implementing
RAID-6 arrays using a RAID-6 capable disk controller.
RAID-6 arrays require a minimum of four disk units per array. All disk units within an array must be of the exact same
capacity. The exception to this configuration rule is that the disk drives inside the Model 520, 525, 550 and 570 system units
support RAID-5 arrays since the integrated disk controllers are not capable of RAID-6.
For upgrade orders, the #0047 causes the order to replace adapters that are not RAID-6 capable with RAID-6 capable
adapters. A warning message is generated during RAID enablement if there are not enough disk units to support a
minimum RAID configuration.
It is the customer's responsibility to start RAID (5 or 6) on their system.
Device parity protection requires all disk units to be placed in sets large enough to turn on RAID protection, as well as be
connected to a RAID-capable adapter. The rules for RAID can be found in the disk controller descriptions.
In general we recommend that you use more than four disk units in a RAID-6 parity set, because the capacity of two disk
units is dedicated to storing parity data in a parity set.
265
#0347
#0347 RAID Hot Spare Specify

The #0347 is a specify code that indicates to IBM configuration tools and to IBM Manufacturing that RAID-5 or RAID-6 disk
arrays should be further protected using the i5/OS function of RAID hot spare. If specified, IBM will ship a configuration that
has at least one stand-by disk drive for each disk controller in the system or designated partition. After the system is
installed, the hot spare configuration can be altered by selecting different options.
Specify codes #0041 or #0047 must be specified in addition to #0347.
Supported on all (including + models) 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595 models and 9411-100. Hot spare is
supported also on Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890, although these cannot be ordered new.
The #0347 RIAD Hot Spare Specify is supported with disk controllers having a write cache of 757 MB or larger
(#2757/5581/5591, #2780/5580/5590, #5582/5583/5738/5777, #5739/5778/5799/5800/5781/5782), disk controllers with
40 MB (#5703/2782) and 90 MB (#5737/5776) write cache, and with the embedded disk controllers of the Models 515, 520,
525, 550, and 570 having a 16-40 MB write cache card (#5709/5726/9509/5727/5728/9510). This specify code tells IBM
Manufacturing to set up one hot spare drive for all disk controllers supporting the function. If you are ordering an EXP24
disk enclosure, IBM Manufacturing assumes:
One spare if 18 or fewer disks per the EXP24
Two spares if 19 or more disks per the EXP24
You configure a disk array with the hot spare option to enable this function.
0719
#0719 No disk drives in the system unit

Use this to indicate that no disks will be placed within the 9406-MMA system unit. See #07xx and #08xx for load source
specify codes.
#07xx
#07xx Load Source Placement Specify Codes

In a 570 (POWER6), a load source can be placed outside of the system unit in an attached I/O tower/drawer. If the load
source is not placed in the system unit, one of the following specify codes from #0720 to #0725 is selected depending on
the desired I/O tower/drawer:
#0720 Load Source in #0595/5095
#0721 Load Source in #5094/5294
#0725 Load Source in #5786/5787
You can use system disks within the system unit for normal applications and data. You can also optionally specify #0719 to
order a system with no disks within the 9406-MMA system unit.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 or later.
See also the #08xx for additional load source specify codes.
266
#08xx
#08xx Load Source Specify Codes

Beginning with the V5R1 announcement, one of the following specify codes is required on all initial order for Model 800,
810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890s. In addition, one of the following specify codes is required on all upgrades into this
model range from previous models:
#0826 - #4314 Load Source specify
#0835 - #4327 Load Source specify (valid only for 515)
Manufacturing uses the #08xx specify to place a corresponding disk unit feature in the load source position. Initial orders
and model upgrade orders into the Model 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890 from previous models that contain a
load source specify, but no corresponding disk unit feature, are invalid orders. The following specify codes can be changed
on model upgrades or on MES orders.
A Load Source specify code is required on each new or upgrade order into Models 515 (new only), 520, 525, 550, 570,
9406-MMA, and 595. These specify codes can be changed at any time.
If you specify storage area network (SAN) drives as load source drives, you must specify #0837. The #0837 requires #2847
PCI IOP with SAN Load Source and #2787 PCI-X Fibre Channel Disk Controller.
#0837 - SAN Load Source specify
Model 570 (POWER6) configurations support up to six SAS Disk Drives within the system unit and any additional processor
enclosure (building block). If you specify SAS Disk Drives as load source drives, you must use one of the following specify
codes depending on specify codes of SAS Disk Drives. The #0838 and #0839 are valid only for 570 (POWER6).
#0838 - #3676 Load Source specify. Indicates that a #3676 Disk Unit is being used as the Load Source.
#0839 - #3677 Load Source specify. Indicates that a #3677 Disk Unit is being used as the Load Source.
Note that protection of the load source disk is also required on all new POWER5 and POWER6 system configurations.
Therefore, if you specify a SAS disk as load source capable, mirrored protection is required.
The #0826, #0827, #0828 and #0829 are withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006.
#1266
#1266 35.16GB 15k rpm Disk Unit

The #1266 35.16GB 15k rpm Disk Unit provides a 15k rpm disk unit with 35.16 GB capacity and a SCSI. The #1266 is
installed in a #5786 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer or a #5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Tower. The #1266 is physically
identical to a #4326 disk unit, but it has a different feature number to enable IBM configuration tools to better understand
its placement
Linux AS for POWER Version 3 or later, or SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later
Supported in Feature Code #5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Drawer and #5787 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk
Tower
#1267

The #1267 70.56GB 15k rpm Disk Unit provides a 15k rpm disk unit with 70.56 GB capacity and a SCSI. The #1267 is
installed in a #5786 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer or a #5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Tower. The #1267 is physically
identical to a #4327 disk unit, but it has a different feature number to enable IBM configuration tools to better understand
its placement.
Tower
267
#1268

The #1268 141.12GB 15k rpm Disk Unit provides a 15k rpm disk unit with 141.12 GB capacity and an Ultra320 SCSI. The
#1268 is installed in a #5786 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer or a #5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Tower. The #1268 is
physically identical to a #4328 disk unit, but it has a different feature number to enable IBM configuration tools to better
understand its placement
Tower
#1269

The #1269 282.25GB 15k rpm Disk Unit provides a 15k rpm disk unit with 282.25 GB of storage capacity and an Ultra320
SCSI speed of up to 320 MBps. The #1269 is for i5/OS and is installed in a #5786 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer or a
#5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Tower.
Supported on POWER6 models. Not formally supported on POWER5 models and 9411-100. Contact your IBM
representative if you require i5/OS support for disks larger than 141.12 GB disks.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4 or later (on 570 (POWER6) or i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code
V5R4M5 required)
Tower. Placement in the system unit, a #0595/5095, or #5094/5294 and use as an i5/OS load source device is not
supported.
#1292
#1292 300GB 15k rpm Disk Unit

The #1292 300GB 15k rpm Disk Unit provides a 15k rpm disk unit with 300 GB of storage capacity and an Ultra320 SCSI
speed of up to 320 MBps. The #1292 is installed in a #5786 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer or a #5787 TotalStorage
EXP24 Disk Tower.
POWER Version 4 with quarterly update 3 or later, or SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER with service pack 3 or
later
Tower
The #1269 and #1292 are the same disk drive, with #1292 formatted for AIX and Linux usage. The #1292 is a Customer
Install Feature.
#1293

The #1293 36.4GB 10k rpm Disk Unit provides a 10k rpm disk unit with 36.4 GB of storage capacity and an industry
standard Ultra320 SCSI speed of up to 320 MBps. The #1293 is installed in a #5786 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer or
a #5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Tower. The #1293 is physically identical to a #1893 disk unit, but it has a different feature
number to enable IBM configuration tools to better understand its placement.
POWER Version 3 or later, or SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later.
Tower
The #1293 was withdrawn from marketing on 6 February 2007.
#1294

POWER Version 3 or later, or SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later.
Tower
The #1294 was withdrawn from marketing on 8 May 2007.
268
#1295

Tower
#1296

Tower
#1297

Tower
#1298

Tower
#1299

The #1299 300GB 10k rpm Disk Unit provides a 10k rpm disk unit with 300 GB of storage capacity and an industry standard
Ultra320 SCSI speed of up to 320 MBps. The #1299 is installed in a #5786 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer or a #5787
TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Tower. The #1299 is physically identical to a #3578 disk unit, but it has a different feature number
to enable IBM configuration tools to better understand its placement.
Tower
269
#1893

The #1893 provides a 10,000 RPM Disk Unit with 36.4 GB of storage capacity and an ULTRA320 SCSI.
Supported only with AIX and Linux.
Supported only during a model conversion on a Model 595. No additional quantities can be ordered for the Model 595.
The #1893 was withdrawn from marketing 15 April 2005.
#1894

The #1894 was withdrawn from marketing on 13 July 2007.
#1895

Supported only with AIX or Linux.
The #1894 was withdrawn from marketing on 13 July 2007.
#1896

Supported only with AIX or Linux.
#1897

#1898
#1898 146.8GB Disk Unit

The #1898 146.8GB Disk Unit provides a 15,000 rpm disk unit with 146.8 GB of storage capacity for AIX 5L and Linux
partitions and an ULTRA320 SCSI. This disk drive requires attachment to a supported Ultra320 SCSI adapter in a system
that supports an Ultra320 SCSI cable or backplane in order for the drive to run at 320 MBs. All other SCSI devices on the
same SCSI bus must also be Ultra2, Ultra3, or Ultra320 SCSI devices in order for this disk drive to run at 320 MBs.
Not supported by i5/OS. Supported only by AIX and Linux.
#3578
#3578 - 300 GB 10K rpm Disk Unit

The #3578 provides a 10,000 RPM disk unit with 300 GB of storage capacity and an industry-standard Ultra3 SCSI speed
of up to 160 MBps.
Not supported by i5/OS. Supported only by AIX or Linux.
270
#3646
#3646 73.4GB 15k rpm SAS Disk Drive

The #3646 provides a 15,000 RPM, 3.5-inch Disk Unit with 73.4 GB capacity and a SAS interface. The #3646 is mounted
in a carrier and hot swap is supported.
Not supported by i5/OS.
Supported only by AIX or Linux. AIX: 5.2S or 5.3J or Later, Linux; for information about Linux support, see the following
Web page: http://www.ibm.com/systems/p/hardware/factsfeatures.html
Supported only on a SAS Disk Unit Controller.
The #3646 is a Customer Install Feature
#3647

Supported only by AIX or Linux. AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER
Version 4 or later, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later
#3648
#3648 300GB 15k rpm SAS Disk Drive

The #3648 provides a 15,000 RPM, 3.5-inch Disk Unit with 300 GB capacity and a SAS interface. The #3648 is mounted
Supported only by AIX or Linux. AIX: 5.2S or 5.3J or Later, Linux; for information about Linux support, see the following
Web page: http://www.ibm.com/systems/p/hardware/factsfeatures.html
#3676

Supported only on i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 or later
#3677

Supported only a SAS Disk Unit Controllers.
#3678

#4308
#4308 4.19 GB Disk Unit

The #4308 provides an additional 4.19 GB single disk unit with 4.19 GB capacity (7200 RPM).
The #4308 was withdrawn from marketing as of December 2000.
271
#4314
#4314 8.58 GB Disk Unit (Ultra SCSI)

The #4314 provides an additional 3 -inch two-byte single disk unit with 8.58 GB capacity (7200 RPM).
#4317
#4317 8.58 GB 10k RPM Disk Unit (Ultra2 SCSI)

The #4317 provides an additional 3 -inch single disk unit with 8.58 GB capacity. During MES upgrades, the #6717, #6817,
#8617, and #8817 8.58 GB disk units can be converted to #4317s. The #4317 is also supported in Linux partitions with
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3, and AIX 5L for POWER
V5.2.
Supported on Models 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890. Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 Models 5xx
except Model 515, and 9405 520.
The #4317 was withdrawn from marketing for new orders on 03 December 2002. Feature conversions to the #4317 remain
available.
#4318

The #4318 provides an additional 3 -inch single disk unit with 17.54 GB capacity. During MES upgrades, the #6718,
#6818, #8618, and #8818 8.58 GB disk units can be converted to #4318s. The #4318 is also supported in Linux partitions.
Supported on Model 270, 9406 520, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and 9411-100.
The #4318 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2004 for new orders. Conversions to feature #4318 remain
available.
#4319

The #4319 provides an additional 3 -inch single disk unit with 35.16 GB capacity. The #4319 is also supported in Linux
and AIX partitions with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version
3, and AIX 5L for POWER V5.2.
870, 890 models and 9411-100.
The #4319 cannot be mounted in a #5065 Storage/PCI Expansion Tower.
#4324
#4324 17.54 GB Disk Unit (Ultra SCSI)

The #4324 provides a 3 -inch single disk unit with 17.54 GB capacity for additional disk storage (7200 RPM).
#4326
#4326 35.16 GB 15k RPM Disk Unit (SCSI)

The #4326 provides a single 3 -inch disk unit for additional disk storage with 35.16 GB capacity (15000 RPM). Quantities
of 150 of this feature can be ordered in the IBM marketing configurator as #7508 Quantity 150 of Feature #4326.
Supported on Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 system units and base I/O towers,
and in the base I/O towers, the #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower, the #0595/#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower, and the #5294
1.8m I/O Tower.
272
#4327
#4327 70.56 GB 15k RPM Disk Unit (SCSI)

The #4327 provides a 3 -inch single disk unit for additional disk storage with 70.56 GB capacity (15000 RPM). Quantities
of 150 of this feature can be ordered in the IBM marketing configurator as #7509 Quantity 150 of Feature #4327.
Supported on Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 system unit and base
I/O towers, the #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower, the #0595/#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower, and the #5294 1.8m I/O Tower.
#4328
#4328 - 141.12 GB 15K rpm Disk Unit

The #4328 provides a 15,000 RPM disk unit with 141.12 GB of storage capacity and an Ultra320 SCSI. Quantities of 150
of this feature can be ordered in the IBM marketing configurator as #7510 Quantity 150 of Feature #4328.
#6585
#6585 - DASD Locking Kit

Provides a locking mechanism that secures up to four disk units in the Model 515, 520, 520+, 525. Two #6585 kits are
required to secure all eight available disk units in the Model 520. When #6585 is installed and secured with a user-provided
padlock, the disk units cannot be removed easily.
Supported on Model 515, 520, 520+, 525.
#7262
#7262 Quantity 150 of #1292

The #7262 features cause 150 of the #1292 disk units to be shipped. The configurator can either generate this feature or
allow users to select this feature as they would any other single disk unit feature. This feature remains on the inventory
records.
Supported on Models 550, 570, 595, and 570 (POWER6).
POWER Version 4, with quarterly update 3 or later, or SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER with service pack 3 or
later
#75xx
#75xx Quantity 150 of Feature #xxxx

The #75xx features cause 150 of the specified disk units to be shipped. When over 150 disk units are requested in the IBM
marketing configurator, a #75xx feature is automatically added for each group of 150 specified. For example, if 180 #4314
8.58 GB Disk Units are requested, the IBM marketing configurator adds one #7500 and 30 #4314s to the order.
The following features are supported on Models 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890:
#7500 Quantity 150 of Feature #4314
The configurator can either generate the following feature or allow users to select this feature as they would any other single
disk unit feature. This feature remains on the inventory records. The following features are supported on all POWER5 and
POWER6 models and Models 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890. The #7509 is not supported on Model 810 or 820.
#7504 Quantity 150 of Feature #4319 (withdrawn from marketing as of 30 August 2005)
The following feature is supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models:
#7510 Quantity of 150 of Feature #4328
The following features are supported on Models 570, 570 (POWER6), and 595:
The following features are supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models and 9411-100:
#7516 Quantity 150 0f Feature #1269
273
#75xx
(contd.)
#75xx Quantity 150 of Feature #xxxx

The following feature is supported on Models (including + models) 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), and
595:
The following features are supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models:
RPQ
847102
RPQ 847102 ships the disk mounting hardware and instructions required to convert a #6717/#6817 to a #4317, and a
#6718/#6818 to a #4318. One RPQ is required for each disk unit to be converted.
This conversion allows the customer to move 8.5 GB 10K RPM and 17 GB 10K rpm files from current towers to the #5065,
#5066, #5074/#9074, #5075, #5079/#9079 PCI Expansion Towers, the #5094, #5095, #5294 PCI-X Expansion Towers,
iSeries Models 270, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, or eServer i5 Models 520, 550, 570, and 595.
Confirm and that there is available space in the existing or on order system or tower for the converted disk units and that
the required number of #2748 PCI RAID Disk Unit Controllers are available. After the conversion, process an RPO to add
the appropriate number of #4317/#4318 and remove the appropriate number of #6717/#6818 features.
RPQ 847102 is installed by an IBM Customer Service Representative.
4.11 Internal tape units and CD-ROM

Internal tape units and CD-ROM
Supported
media
See 8.3, QIC tape specifications and compatibility for System i models on page 383, and 8.4, VXA, LTO, and DAT tape
specifications and compatibility for System i models on page 384, for the supported media for each tape device.
#1889
#9689
#1889 80 GB VXA-2 Tape Device

The #1889 80 GB VXA-2 Tape Device is a 5.25-inch, half-high, Ultra2 LVD 16-bit tape drive, which provides a high capacity
for save/restore and archive functions. This tape drive uses VXA tape data cartridges and is compression capable,
providing a capacity of up to 160 GB. It uses a helical scan, rotating head technology and has a SCSI-2 (LVD/SE)
asynchronous or synchronous interface. The tape operates in streaming mode. Refer to 8.4, VXA, LTO, and DAT tape
specifications and compatibility for System i models on page 384, for additional characteristics.
This tape device is supported on an IOP-less IOA.
One 1.6-inch (41 mm) half-high media bay and one SCSI-2 internal 16-bit address is required.
Supported in Linux SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3,
and AIX 5L for POWER V5.2
the #1889 is supported as an IOP-less drive in the 9405 520, 9406 520, and Models 520+, 525, 550, and 550+ with a
minimum operating system level of i5/OS V5R4 and i5/OS V5R3 with LIC V5R3M5 on Models 520 and 520+.
#2640
#2640 DVD-ROM
The #2640 DVD-ROM is a Slimline IDE DVD-ROM drive. It uses an internal tray loading DVD-ROM drive. The #2640
provides up to 3600 KBps (CD-ROM) and 10.3 MBps (DVD-ROM) data transfer rates.
Characteristics:
Media Data Transfer Rate (maximum): CD-ROM=3600 KBps, DVD- ROM=10.3 MBps.
Interface: IDE/ATAPI
Average Random Access Time: CD-ROM=95ms (typical), DVD-ROM=150ms (typical)
Buffer Memory: 256KB
Media capacity: CD-ROM=650 MB, DVD-ROM= 4.7 GB (single sided)/9.4 GB (double-sided)
Multi session capable (Reads CD/R and CD-R/W media)
12.7 mm Slimline form factor
Operates in either vertical or horizontal positions
Interface supports standard and extended XA formats
Loading tray supports 12cm and 8cm disks
DVD video is not supported
274
#2640
(contd.)
#2640 DVD-ROM
Requires one Slimline media bay.
for POWER Version 3, and AIX 5L for POWER V5.2
Supported on Models 515, 520, 525, 550, and 570.
#4425
#4525
#4625
#4425/#4525/#4625 CD-ROM
The #4425, #4525, or #4625 can be used for alternate IPL (IBM distributed CD-ROM media only) and program distribution.
A CD-ROM, DVD-RAM or DVD-ROM is required for each system.
Minimum operating system level for the #4525: OS/400 V4R5
Supported for migration in Linux and AIX partitions with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red Hat Enterprise
Linux AS for POWER Version 3, and AIX 5L for POWER V5.2
The #4425 CD-ROM device can be mounted in the base PCI enclosure of Models 830, 840, 870, and 890, in the
#5074/#5079 PCI Expansion Towers, and in the #5094/#5294 Expansion Towers.
The #4525 CD-ROM device can be mounted in the system unit of the Model 810 and 820.
The #4625 CD-ROM replaces the #4425. The difference between the #4625 and the #4425 is in the mounting hardware.
A #4625 can be placed everywhere that a #4425 can be placed, and can also be placed in a Model 825 system unit.
The #4425 is not supported in a Model 820 or 825 system unit.
The #4425 was withdrawn from marketing as of 21 November 2003 for new orders. Conversion to feature #4425 remains
available.
The #4625 was withdrawn from marketing as of 15 July 2005.
#4430
#4530
#4630
#4430/#4530/#4630 DVD-RAM
The #4430/#4530/#4630 reads and writes 4.7 GB on a single-sided media. For double-sided media, the media must be
manually flipped.
The #4430, #4530, or #4630 is capable of reading 640 MB CD-ROM disks. It can read CD-R, DVD-ROM and DVD-R media.
The #4430, #4530, or #4630 can be used for alternate IPL, program distribution, and data interchange. It is not supported
as an Alternate Installation Device (by selection via DST Boot Manager) with OS/400 V5R1.
The #4430 DVD-RAM device can be mounted in the base PCI enclosure of Models 830 and 840, in the #5074/#5079 PCI
Expansion Towers, in the #8093 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack, and in the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure of the Model 890.
The #4530 DVD-RAM device can be mounted in the system unit of Models 800, 810, and 820.
The #4630 CD-ROM replaces the #4430. The difference between the #4630 and the #4430 is in the mounting hardware.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V4R5 with PTFs or OS/400 V5R1
Linux AS for POWER Version 3, and AIX 5L V5.2
A #4630 can be placed everywhere a #4430 can be placed, and can also be placed in a Model 825 system unit.
The #4430 is not supported in a Model 825 system unit.
The #4430, #4530, and #4630 DVD-RAM are 5.25-inch devices that install in a removable media device slot. A disk unit
controller is required in the system unit or tower where the device is mounted.
The #4430 is supported on Models 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595; Models 810, 820, 825, 830, 840,
870, and 890 models, as well as 9411-100.
The #4530 is supported on Models 800, 810, and 820.
The #4630 is supported on Models 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), and 595; Models 800, 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, 870, and 890, as well as 9411-100.
The #4430 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 January 2004. A #4630 is the recommended replacement.
275
#4482
#4582
#4682
#4482/#4582/#4682 4 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Device

The #4482, #4582, or #4682 4 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Device can be used for save/restore, alternate IPL, program
distribution, migration, and -inch cartridge tape exchange using the appropriate media and density. This tape unit is not
compatible with System/36 -inch cartridge tape units.
An available removable media device slot and disk unit controller is required in the system unit or expansion tower in which
the device is mounted.
Minimum operating system level for the #4582 and #4682: OS/400 V4R5
The #4482 is supported in the Model 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, and 595. The #4482 can be mounted in the base PCI
enclosure of Models 810, 820, 825, 830 and 840, in the #8093 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack, and in the #9094 Base PCI I/O
Enclosures of the Model 890. It is supported in the Model 870, the #5074/#5079 PCI Expansion Towers the #5094/#5294
Expansion Towers, the #8093 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack, and the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure of the Model 890.
The #4582 can be mounted in the system unit of Models 800, 810, and 820.
The #4682 can be mounted in the system unit of 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890, in the #5074/#5079 PCI
Expansion Towers, and in the #5094/#5294 Expansion Towers.
#4483
#4583
#4683

The #4483, #4583, and #4683 16 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Device are 25 GB -inch cartridge tape units that mount in a
removable media device slot of a system unit or an expansion drawer or tower. The #4483, #4583, and #4683 16 GB -inch
Cartridge Tape Device can be used for save/restore, alternate IPL, migration, and -inch cartridge tape exchange using
the appropriate media and density. This tape unit is not compatible with System/36 -inch cartridge tape units. Refer to
8.3, QIC tape specifications and compatibility for System i models on page 383, for additional characteristics.
The #4483 can be mounted in the base PCI enclosure of Models 810, 820, 825, 830 and 840, in the #5074/#5079 PCI
Expansion Towers, and is supported via upgrade in the Models 870 and 890. Supported in Models 520 (9406 only), 525,
550, 570, and 595.
The #4583 can be mounted in the system unit of Models 810 and 820.
The #4683 is supported in the Model 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890 for
upgrades only.
Supported for migration in Linux partitions with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red Hat Enterprise Linux
Minimum operating system level: for the #4483: OS/400 V4R4
Minimum operating system level: for the #4583 and #4683: OS/400 V4R5
The #4483/#4583/#4683 are Customer Install Features.
#4486
#4586
#4686

The #4486, #4586, and #4686 25 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Device is a 25 GB -inch cartridge tape unit that mounts in
a removable media device slot of a system unit or an expansion drawer/tower. The #4486, #4586, and #4686 25 GB -inch
Cartridge Tape Device can be used for save/restore, alternate IPL, program distribution, migration and -inch cartridge
tape exchange. This tape unit is not compatible with System/36 -inch cartridge tape units. Refer to 8.3, QIC tape
Supported for migration in Linux partitions with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red Hat Enterprise Linux
AS for POWER Version 3.
The #4486 is supported by the Model 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 595, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890. The
#4486 can be mounted in the base PCI enclosure of Models 830, 840, and 890, and in the #5074/#5079 PCI Expansion
Towers.
276
#4486
#4586
#4686
(contd.)

The #4586 can be mounted in the system unit of Models 810 and 820.
The #4686 can be mounted in the base PCI enclosure of Models 810, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890, in the #5074/#5079
PCI Expansion Towers, in the #5094/#5294 Expansion Towers, in the #8093 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack, and in the #9094
Base PCI I/O Enclosure of the Model 890. The #4686 is supported for upgrades only in the Model 520 (9406 only), 525,
550, 570, 590, 820, 830, and 840.
#4487
#4587
#4687
#8287

The #4487/#4587/#4687 50 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Device can be used for save/restore, alternate IPL, program
distribution, migration, and -inch cartridge tape exchange using the appropriate media and density. These tape units
are not compatible with System/36 -inch cartridge tape units. The #8287 is an optional base 50 GB -inch Cartridge
Tape Unit for the Model 800 Standard and Advanced Editions. A disk unit controller in the system unit or tower is required
where the device is mounted. Refer to 8.3, QIC tape specifications and compatibility for System i models on page 383,
for additional characteristics.
The #4487 can be mounted in the base PCI enclosure of the Models 830 and 840, in the #5074/#5079 PCI Expansion
Towers, in the #8093 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack, and in the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure of the Model 890.
The #4587 can be mounted in the system unit of Models 270, 800, 810, and 820.
The #4687 can be mounted in the base PCI enclosure of Models 825, 870, and 890, in the #5074/#5079 PCI Expansion
Towers, and in the #5094/#5294 Expansion Towers.
The #8287 can be mounted in a removable media device slot in the Model 800 system unit or in the expansion tower.
Linux AS for POWER Version 3, and AIX 5L for POWER V5.2.
The #4487 is supported in Models 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870,
and 890. Also supported on System p under #9411-100
The #4587 is supported in Models 800, 810, and 820.
The #4687 is supported in Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and
890.
The #8287 is supported in the Model 800.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R1 (or earliest i5/OS release supporting the system model processor
technology, when used with an IOP. The #4487 and #4687 are supported as an IOP-less drive in Models 520 (9406 only),
525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595. IOP-less support requires a minimum software level of i5/OS V5R4 and V5R3 and
LIC V5R3M5 on Models 520 and 520+. For the latest prerequisite information, go to the Hardware tab of the IBM
Prerequisite Web page at the following address: http://www-912.ibm.com/e_dir/eserverprereq.nsf
The #4487, #4587, or #4687 are Customer Install Features.
277
#4531
#4631
#4531 DVD-ROM/#4631 DVD-ROM

The #4531/#4631 DVD-ROM is a 5 -inch device that is mounted in a removable media device slot. The #4531/#4631 is
capable of reading 640 MB CD-ROM media and 4.7 GB DVD-RAM media. It is an alternate IPL (IDE bus attach) device,
so a SCSI/ATAPI converter card is required and is included with the device. The converter card requires its own power
source, so a power flex cable is included.
The #4531/#4631 can be used for Alternate IPL (IBM distributed CD-ROM media only) and program distribution.
The #4631 can be mounted in the system unit of Models 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, in the #5074/#5079 PCI Expansion
Tower, and in the #5094/#5294 Expansion Towers.
A disk unit controller is required in the system unit or tower where the device is mounted.
A CD-ROM, DVD-RAM or DVD-ROM is required for each system.
The #4531 is supported in the Models 270, 800, 810, and 820.
The #4631 is supported in the Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890,
SB2, and SB3.
The #4531 and #4631 are Customer Install Features.
The #4631 was withdrawn from marketing for new orders only on 01 December 2005.
#4584
#4684
#9284
#4584 30 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Device/#4684 30 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Device

The #4584/#4684, #9284, 30 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Device can be mounted in a removable media device slot of a
system unit or an expansion tower. The #4584/#4684, and #9284 can be used for save/restore, alternate IPL, program
distribution, migration, and -inch cartridge tape exchange. The #9284 is a base 30 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Unit for the
Model 800 Standard and Advanced Editions. Refer to 8.3, QIC tape specifications and compatibility for System i models
on page 383, for additional characteristics.
The #4584 is supported in Models 800, 810, and 820.
The #4684 is supported in Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890.
Also supported on System p under #9411-100.
The #9284 is supported in the Model 800.
The #4684 can be mounted in the base PCI enclosure of Models 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890, in the #5074/#5079 PCI
Expansion Towers, in the #5094/#5294 Expansion Towers, in the #8093 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack, and in the #9094 Base
PCI I/O Enclosure of the Model 890.
The #9284 can be mounted in a removable media device slot in the Model 800 system unit or in the expansion tower.
Minimum operating system level for the #4584 and #4684: OS/400 V4R5 or earliest release supporting the system
processor technology when using an IOP.
Minimum operating system level for the #4684 to function as an IOP-less drive: in Models 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570,
570 (POWER6), 595. IOP-less support requires a minimum software level of i5/OS V5R4 and V5R3 and LIC V5R3M5 on
Models 520 and 520+. For the latest prerequisite information, go to the Hardware tab of the IBM Prerequisite Web page at
the following address: http://www-912.ibm.com/e_dir/eserverprereq.nsf
Minimum operating system level for the #9284: OS/400 V5R2.
278
#4585
#4685
#9285
#4585 80 GB VXA-2 Tape Device/#4685 80 GB VXA-2 Tape Device

The #4585 and 4685 can be used for save and restore, alternate IPL, program distribution, and migration. The tape format
is not compatible with other tape units currently offered on iSeries systems. The #9285 is a Base 80 GB VXA-2 Cartridge
Tape Unit for the Model 800 Standard and Advanced Editions. Refer to 8.4, VXA, LTO, and DAT tape specifications and
compatibility for System i models on page 384, for additional characteristics.
The #4585 is supported by the #2757, #2763, #2780, #2782, #4748, #4778, #5705 (Model 800 and 810), and #9767.
The #4685 is supported by the #2757, #2763, #2780, #2782, #4748, and #4778.
The #4585 is supported in the Models 800, 810, and 820.
The #4685 is supported in Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890.
The #4585 80 GB VXA-2 Tape Device can be mounted in a removable media device slot of a Model 800, 810, or 820 system
unit. The #4685 80 GB VXA-2 Tape Device can be mounted in a removable media device slot of a Model 825, 830, 840,
870, or 890 system unit, or a #5065, #5066, #5074, #5079, #5094, #5294 expansion tower.
The #9285 can be mounted in a removable media device slot in the system unit or expansion tower.
#4633
#4633 DVD-RAM
The #4633 DVD-RAM is a half high optical media device. The #4633 uses cartridgeless media only. This is different from
the #4630 DVD-RAM, which can use cartridge media. The media can be removed from the cartridge to be used in the
#4633. Media support is limited to writing DVD-RAM only and reading of CD-ROM, CD-R, DVD-ROM and DVD-RAM.
Supported on Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 570 (POWER6), 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and in #5074,
#5079, #5094, #5294 and #9094 expansion towers. The Model 570 (POWER6) is not orderable within CEC enclosures.
#5746
#5746 Half High 800GB/1.6TB LTO4 SAS Tape Drive

The #5746 SAS Tape Drive uses industry standard Ultrium media. The tape drive Write/Read Ultrium4 (LTO-4),
Write/Read Ultrium3 (LTO-3), and Read Ultrium2 (LT02) formats. It has capacity of 800GB native or 1.6TB compressed.
Key attributes include:
Uses streaming I/O operations.
Data Transfer Rate: 120 MB/sec with speed matching down to 31 MB/sec with LTO-4 media.
Compatability: LTO4 (Read/Write), LTO3 (Read/Write) and LTO2 (Read).
This feature includes one each of the following: HHLTO-4 SAS Tape Drive, LTO-4 Cleaning Cartridge, and LTO-4 Test
Cartridge.
Requires SAS cable group #3655 (SAS HH) or #3656 (SAS Y SFF).
Can be used as a choice tape device for a system unit 1.6-inch (41mm) half-high media bay of a POWER6 Power 520
8203-E4A, 9407-M15, 9409-M35 and a POWER6 Power 550 8204-E8A, 9409-M15 machine types.
System unit minimum / maximum: 0 / 1
Operating System levels required:
IBM i 5.4 with PTF SInnnn or later
IBM i 6.1 with PTF SInnnn or later
AIX 6.1 with the 6100-01 Technology Level, or later
AIX 5.3 with the 5300-08 Technology Level, or later
AIX 5L for POWER version 5.3 with the 5300-06 Technology Level and Service Pack 7
AIX 5L for POWER version 5.3 with 5300-07 and Server Pack 4
AIX Version 6.1 with the 6100-00 Technology Level and Service Pack 5
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP1 for POWER Systems, or later
Red Hat Enterprise Linux for POWER version 4.5 or later
Red Hat Enterprise Linux for POWER version 5.1 or later
Initial Order/MES/Both/Supported: Both
#5746 is a Customer Install Feature.
279
#5751
#5751 DVD-RAM
The #5751 DVD-RAM is an IDE DVD slimline device with multiple DVD media read/write capability. Refer to 8.3, QIC tape
Supported by i5/OS if placed in the top slimline bay.
Supported in Linux and AIX partitions if placed in the bottom slimline bay.
Supported in system unit of Models 520, 525, 550, and 570.
#5753
#9653
#5753 30 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Device/#9653 Base 30 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Unit
The #5753/#9653 is a 30 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Unit that can be mounted in a removable media device slot in the
system unit. The #5753 can be used for save/restore, alternate IPL, program distribution, migration and -inch Cartridge
Tape exchange. The #9653 is a base 30 GB -Inch Cartridge Tape Unit for System i5 Express Configurations. Refer to 8.3,
QIC tape specifications and compatibility for System i models on page 383, for additional characteristics.
The #5753 supports SLR60 and is supported as an IOP-less drive.
Supported on Models 515, 520, 525, 550.
The #5753 can be mounted in Models 9405 520, 520+, and 550+.
The #9653 can be mounted in a removable media device slot of a 9405 520+ and 9406 520+ and 9407 515.
Minimum operating system level for the #5753, and #9653 to function as an IOP-less drive: i5/OS V5R4; or i5/OS V5R3
with LIC V5R3M5 on Models 520 and 520+.
#5754
#8754
#5754 50 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Device/#8754 Optional Base 50 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Unit
The #5754 is a 50 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Unit that can be mounted in a removable media device slot of a system unit.
The #5754 can be used for save/restore, alternate IPL, program distribution, migration and -inch Cartridge Tape
exchange. Refer to 8.3, QIC tape specifications and compatibility for System i models on page 383, for additional
characteristics.
The #5754 is supported as an IOP-less drive in the 520+, 525, 550+, 9405 520, 9406 520, 550.
Minimum operating system level for the #5754 to function as an IOP-less drive: i5/OS V5R4; or i5/OS V5R3 with LIC
V5R3M5 on Models 520 and 520+.
280
#5755
#5755 - 200 GB LTO-2 Tape Unit

The #5755 provides a 200 GB native capacity (400 GB compressed capacity) tape device that installs in a half-high
removable media device slot in the system unit. The #5755 can read and write both LTO Gen-1 and LTO Gen-2 tape
cartridges.
The characteristics are:
Capacity: 200 GB native
Compression Mode: 400 GB
Form factor: 5.25-inch, half-high
Media: LTO Gen-1 or LTO Gen-2 Data Cartridge
Technology: Linear Tape Open
Data rate (compressed): 48 MBps
Interface: SCSI-3 low LVD/single ended (SE)
Refer to 8.4, VXA, LTO, and DAT tape specifications and compatibility for System i models on page 384, for additional
characteristics.
The half-high LTO-2 tape drive does not require an IOP.
Note: The #5755 is used for Base Product Configuration, Express Configuration 2, or for any MES order. When ordering a
new Express Configuration 1 or Express Configuration 3, use the #8755 when replacing the 4mm tape drive normally
included in these packages.
The #5755 is supported as an IOP-less drive on Models 515, 520, 520+, 525, 550, 550+ in the System Unit. Minimum
operating system level: i5/OS V5R4 and V5R3 and LIC V5R3M5 on Models 520 and 520+. For the latest prerequisite
information, go to the Hardware tab of the IBM Prerequisite Web page at the following address:
http://www-912.ibm.com/e_dir/eserverprereq.nsf
Minimum operating system level for other than i5/OS are AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer, Red Hat Enterprise
Linux AS for POWER Version 3, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER
#5756
#5756 DVD-ROM Drive IDE Slimline

The 8x/24x (max) Slimline IDE DVD-ROM is an internal tray loading DVD-ROM drive providing up to 3600 KB/sec
(CD-ROM) and 10.3 MBps (DVD-ROM) data transfer rates. It is a 12.7mm slimline form factor multi-session capable,
DVD-ROM drive that provides state-of-the-art performance and supports existing 650 MB CD-ROM, 4.7 GB DVD-ROM,
and 9.4 GB DVD-ROM (double-sided) disks. This drive also reads Type II (removable from cartridge) DVD-RAM disks at
DVD-ROM speeds. System boot and install functions are supported with CD-ROM and DVD-RAM media.
Media Data Transfer Rate: CD-ROM=3600 KB/sec (max): DVD-ROM=10.3 MBps (max)
Interfaces: IDE/ATAPI
Average Random Access Time: CD-ROM=95 ms (typical): DVD-ROM=150 ms (typical)
Buffer Memory: 256 KB
Media Capacity: CD-ROM=650 MB: DVD-ROM= 4.7 GB (single-sided); 9.4 GB (double-sided)
Multisession capable (Reads CD/R and CD/RW media)
12.7 mm Slimline form factor
Interface supports standard and extended XA formats
Loading tray supports 12 cm and 8cm disks
The limitations are:
DVD video is not supported.
DVD-ROM only reads CD-type formatted media with AIX 5.1 or later.
281
#5757
#5757 DVD-RAM Drive IDE Slimline

The IBM 4.7 GB IDE Slimline DVD-RAM Drive is an internal tray loading, multifunction storage device capable of reading
and writing 4.7 GB DVD-ROM disks as well as reading other optical media disks. This drive also reads Type II (removable
from cartridge) DVD-RAM disks. It is a 12.7mm high Slimline form factor, multi-session capable, DVD-RAM drive. System
boot and install functions are supported with CD-ROM and DVD-RAM media.
Media Data Transfer Rate: 3600 KB/sec CD-ROM (24X) max at the outer diameter; 10.8 MBps read (8X DVD-ROM);
2.7MBps write (2X DVD-RAM) and 2.7MBps read (2X DVD-RAM)
Interface: Parallel IDE
Average Random Access Time: 150 ms CD-ROM; 180 ms DVD-ROM; 229 ms DVD-RAM
Buffer memory: 2 MB
High-speed burst rate of 16, 16, or 33 MBps for PIO/MDMA/UDMA transfers respectively
Loading tray accommodates both 8 cm disks and 12 cm disks.
Reads multi-session disks
Reads CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, and DVD-RAM disks.
Reads 2.6GB DVD-RAM media; reads and writes 4.7 GB and 9.4 GB (double-sided) DVD-RAM media
Supports all major CD-ROM formats including Mode 1, Mode 2, XA, CDDA and audio
The limitations are that DVD video is not supported.
#6134
#6134 60 GB 8 mm Tape Device

The #6134 is an 8 mm, 5.25-inch half-high, 16-bit, internal Auto-docking tape drive, usable with a Linux operating system
only. The #6134 provides a high capacity tape drive for save/restore and archiving functions. This tape drive uses IBM
8 mm data cartridges and is compression capable, providing a capacity of up to 150 GB.
Capacity: 60 GB native mode
Compression Mode, 150 GB (typical)
Form factor: 5.25-inch Half-high
Media: IBM 8 mm Data Cartridge with Smart Clean Technology
Technology: Helical Scan, Rotating Head
Operation: Streaming
Data Transfer Rate: 12 MBps native mode, 30 MBps typical
Interface: SCSI-2 16-bit LVD/Single-ended (SE) Asynchronous/Synchronous
Minimum operating system level: SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER
Version 3
The #6134 was withdrawn from marketing as of 24 June 2005. A #6120 or #6169 are the recommended replacements.
#6258
#9258
#6258 36GB 4mm Tape Unit/#9258 36GB 4mm Tape Unit

The #6258 36GB 4mm Tape Unit/#9258 36GB 4mm Tape Unit can be mounted in a removable media device slot of a
system unit. The #6258 can be used for save/restore, alternate IPL, program distribution, migration and 4 mm Cartridge
Tape exchange.
Capacity: 36 GB native mode
Compression Mode, 72 GB (typical)
Form factor: 5.25-inch Half-high
Media: IBM DAT72 Data Cartridge
Technology: Helical Scan, Rotating Head
Data Transfer Rate: 3 MBps native mode, 6 MBps typical
Interface: SCSI-2 16-bit LVD/single
characteristics.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4, AIX 5L and Linux.
Supported on Models 515, 520, 525,
282
#6279
#6279 160 GB VXA-320 Tape Drive

The #6279 160 GB VXA-320 Tape drive is a 5.25-inch, half-high, Ultra2 SCSI tape drive, which provides a high capacity
for save/restore and archive functions. This tape drive uses VXA tape data cartridges and is compression capable,
providing a capacity of up to 320 GB.
Characteristics:
Form Factor: 5.25-inch, half-high
Media: uses VXA tape data cartridges
Technology: Helical scan, rotating head
Interface: Ultra2 SCSI, 16-bit (wide), LVD and SE compatible
characteristics.
The #6279 is driven by the embedded disk or tape controller depending upon configuration, either IOP based or IOP-less.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3, SUSE Linux Enterprise
Server 9 for POWER, AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer
Supported in Models 520+, 525, 550+, 9405 and 9406 520, 550.
RPQ
847184
RPQ 847184 provides the mounting hardware to convert selected iSeries #63xx/#64xx tape features into #45xx equivalents
for installation in iSeries systems. See the RPQ description for a complete list of applicable conversions.
4.12 Magnetic media controllers

Magnetic media controllers
#0165
#0165 VHDCI attachment

The #0165 VHDCI attachment is used to indicate that an external CD, DVD, or tape device is to be attached to a #5702
PCI-X Ultra Tape Controller, #5705 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller, #5712 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller, or #5715 PCI-X
Tape/DASD Controller.
Supported on Models 520, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890.
#0618
#0618 - Direct Attach #2757 PCI-X Ultra RAID Disk Controllerr

The #0618 is the Linux direct attach feature for the #2757 PCI-X Ultra RAID Disk Controller.
A #0627 - Direct Attach #2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller is the recommended replacement.
#0624
#0624 - Direct Attach #5702 PCI-X Ultra Tape Controller

#0624 is the direct attach of the #5702 PCI-X Ultra Tape Controller to an AIX or Linux partition.
#0641
(#0641) - Direct Attach #5590 PCI-X Ultra320 SCSI Disk Controller

The #0641 is the AIX or Linux direct attach for the #5590 that consists of the #2780 disk controller with 757 MB Write Cache
Controller and 1.5 GB auxiliary write cache. The #0641 can support operating system-based or application-based mirroring
protection or support controller-based RAID-5. Concurrent battery maintenance is not supported. The controller also
supports internal tape units, CD-ROM units, and DVD units. The #0641 has four internal u320 SCSI buses.
The #5590 and #0641 are physically the same disk controller and auxiliary write cache IOA pair of cards, but have different
feature numbers to denote to IBM configurator tools which operating system is using them. The #0641 indicates no IOP is
used and the card is directly controlled by an AIX 5L or Linux partition.
Supported on POWER5 Models 520, 525, 550, 570, and 597. Not supported for direct attach on POWER6 models.
283
#0647

The #0647 provides a PCI-X Disk/Tape SCSI Controller with zero write cache and without RAID support. The #0647 is the
#0647 is the Linux direct attach feature for the #5736 PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller with IOP.
A maximum of six disk drives is supported on the #0647. Removable media devices (tape, optical libraries, CD-ROM,
DVD-ROM, and DVD-RAM) are also supported.
The #0647 has two U320 buses each with a bus data rate of up to 320 MBs. Each SCSI bus can be either internal (using
an internal port) or external (using an external port), but not both. There are four physical ports on the #0647, two internal
and two external. Internal devices connect to the internal ports (1 or 2). External devices connect to the external ports (one
or two) and use an LVD interface and VHDCI connectors. A #1850 VHDCI to P Converter Cable is available to connect to
external devices with type P connectors.
The #0647, #5736, #5766, and #5775 are physically the same adapter card. An #0647 indicates that the card is dedicated
to an AIX 5L or Linux partition and an IOP is not being used.
840, 870, 890 models.
#0648

The #0648 is the Linux direct attach feature for the #5737 PCI-X Disk Controller 90MB with IOP. The #0648 has two U320
SCSI buses each with a bus data rate of up to 320 MBs. A maximum of 12 internal disk drives and up to two internal
removable media devices (tape, CD-ROM, DVD-ROM or DVD-RAM) are supported on the #0648.
The #0648, #5737, and #5776 are physically the same adapter card.
The #2780/#5580 and #2757/#5581 disk controllers with an effective 757 MB write cache provide greater disk performance
and can have an auxiliary write cache IOA to protect the write cache contents.
870, 890 models.
The #0648 was withdrawn from marketing on POWER6 models in October 2007.
#0649
#0649 Direct Attach #5583 Controller with 1.5GB Auxiliary Write Cache
The #0649 is the Linux direct attach feature for the #5583 Controller with 1.5GB Auxiliary Write Cache without IOP.
The #0649 was withdrawn from marketing on POWER5 and POWER6 models in October 2007.
#0650
#5778 PCI-X EXP24 Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches without IOP
The #0650 is the AIX or Linux direct attach feature for the #5778 PCI-X EXP24 Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read
caches without IOP.
#0651
caches without IOP.
#0654
caches without IOP.
The #0654 was withdrawn from marketing on POWER5 models in October 2007.
#0705
#0705 Forced #2749 Placement

The #0705 Forced #2749 Placement forces placement of a #2749 PCI Ultra Magnetic Media Controller in the first
Multi-adapter Bridge Boundary of the system. With this configuration, using the Alternate Install Device Option via DST is
not required. Any device attached to that #2749 is then the Alternate-IPL device.
#0707

The #0707 Forced #2768 Placement forces placement of a #2768 PCI Magnetic Media Controller IOA in the first
Multi-adapter Bridge Boundary of the system. With this configuration, using the Alternate Install Device Option via DST is
not required. Any device attached to that #2768 is then the Alternate-IPL device.
284
#0708

The #0708 Forced #5702 Placement forces placement of a #5702 PCI-X Ultra Tape Controller IOA in the first Multi-adapter
Bridge Boundary of the system. With this configuration, using the Alternate Install Device Option via DST is not required.
Any device attached to that #5702 is then the Alternate-IPL device.
#2749

The #2749 is an Ultra SCSI IOA that provides attachment capability for external tape devices and external optical devices.
The #2749 can attach one tape drive or one optical drive. The LTO, 3494, 3590, Optical and 8mm tape devices requiring
External High Voltage Differential (HVD) connections can be attached. See the tables in 8.1, External tape for System i
family of models on page 360, for a complete listing of compatible tape devices.
Use other tape attachment-capable controllers for tape devices or tape libraries that use LVD connections or fibre channel
connections.
870, 890 models and 9411-100. This controller uses an IOP. The POWER6 model processor enclosures do not support
IOP cards.
The #2749 was withdrawn from marketing as of 03 March 2005.
#2757

The #2757 PCI-X Ultra RAID Disk Controller is an Ultra SCSI controller with a maximum write cache size of 235 MB
(757 MB compressed) that provides RAID-5 protection for internal disks and also supports internal tape units, CD-ROM,
and DVD units. The #2757 has four Ultra4 SCSI buses.
In addition to providing RAID-5 protection for disks, the #2757 PCI-X Ultra RAID Disk Controller is designed to work as a
high performance controller for disks protected by system mirroring or disks with no protection.
The #2757 PCI-X Ultra RAID Disk Controller supports a maximum of 20 disk units. A minimum of three disk units of the
same capacity are needed for a valid RAID-5 configuration. A maximum of six arrays is allowed per controller, with a
maximum of 18 disk units allowed per array. All disk units in an array must be of the same capacity. Parity is spread across
either 2, 4, 8, or 16 disk units in an array. If an array of three disk units is started, parity is spread across two disk units. If
an array of four to seven disk units is started, parity is spread across four disk units. If an array of 8-15 disk units is started,
parity is spread across eight disk units. If an array of 16-18 disk units is started, parity is spread across 16 disk units.
Availability is the number of arrays and size of each array can be influenced by specifying an optimization of either Balance,
Performance, or Capacity in iSeries Navigator when starting arrays. An optimization of Balance is used by default when
starting arrays from DST or SST options. If disk units are included into an existing array, parity can be spread across less
than the preferred number of disk units. In this case, the RAID function must be stopped and then started to redistribute
the parity.
The #2757 controls up to two removable media devices (internal tape, CD-ROM, and DVD).
The #2757 does not support DASD compression.
Due to system unit and system unit expansion disk unit cage SCSI bus designs, only the Models 800 and 810 have a
suitable system configuration to allow 18 disk units to attach to a single #2757. All other system unit or tower disk
configurations restrict the number of attaching disk units to 15 or less.
Requires a #7137 DASD Concurrent Maintenance Cage for the Model 800.
870, 890 models and 9411-100. This controller can use an IOP. The POWER6 model processor enclosures do not support
IOP cards.
Notes:
The #2757 was withdrawn from marketing as of 3 March 2007.
The auxiliary write cache controller #5591with 1.5 GB write cache can be used with the #2757. There is no
performance gain using the #5591.
New order alternatives to the #2757 include #2780, #5738, or #5777 PCI disk controllers.
285
#2763

The #2763 is an Ultra2 SCSI controller with a 10 MB write-cache that provides RAID-5 protection for internal disk units and
supports up to two removable media devices (internal tape units and CD-ROM units). In addition to providing RAID-5
protection for disks, the #2763 is also designed to work as a high performance controller for disks protected by system
mirroring or disks with no protection. The #2763 controller supports a maximum of 12 disk units and is only supported on
the Model 820, #5075 PCI Expansion Tower, and supported on the #0595/#5095.
A minimum of four disk units of the same capacity are needed for a valid RAID-5 configuration. A maximum of three arrays
is allowed per controller, with a maximum of 10 disk units allowed per one array. All disk units in an array must be of the
same capacity. Parity is spread across four disk units for arrays of four to 10. The #2763 does not support hardware disk
compression. The #2763 does not support the #4331 1.6 GB Read Cache Device.
The #2763 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0604 - Direct Attach #2763 PCI RAID Disk Unit
Controller, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2763 cannot be accessed by OS/400
partitions. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2763 does not support RAID or hardware disk compression.
Requires a long PCI card slot.
Supported on Models 250, 270, 9406 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and 9411-100.
The #2763 was withdrawn from marketing as of 21 November 2003 for new orders. Conversions to feature #2763 remain
available. A #5703 PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller is the recommended replacement.
286
#2765

The #2765 PCI Fibre Channel Tape Controller provides Fibre Channel attachment capability for external tape devices. The
#2765 supports point-to-point and arbitrated loop topologies and has an LC type cable connector. Each #2765 is shipped
with a wrap connector (P/N 05N6767).
The devices supported for Fibre Channel attachment are:
3534-1RU SAN Fibre Channel Managed Hub (1 Gbps)
Fibre Channel Switches:
2031-224 McDATA Sphereon 4500 Fabric Switch
2109 S08/S16 (1 Gbps)
2109 F16 (2 Gbps)
3534 F08 (2 Gbps)
SAN Fabric Directors:
2032-064 McDATA Intrepid 6064 Enterprise Fibre Channel Director
2032-140 McDATA Intrepid 6140 Director
See the tables in 8.1, External tape for System i family of models on page 360, for a complete listing of compatible tape
devices.
A #0163 Fibre Channel Attach Specify code is required for each device attaching to a System i server via a #2765.
The following adapter kits are required when connecting SC-type cables to the #2765:
#0371 - LC-SC Adapter Kit (50 m) can be ordered on initial, model upgrade, and simple MES orders. This optional kit
is used to attach SC- type Fibre (50 m) cables to a #2765. This kit contains a 2m LC-ST cable and ST-SC adapter for
50 m fibre.
#0372 - LC-SC Adapter Kit (62.5 m) can be ordered on initial, model upgrade, and simple MES orders. This optional
kit is used to attach SC-type Fibre (62.5 m) cables to a #2765. This kit contains a 2m LC-ST cable and ST- SC
adapter for 62.5 m fibre.
The #2765 can be directly attached to a Linux or AIX partition. When ordered as #0611 - Direct Attach #2765 PCI Fibre
Channel Tape Controller, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux/AIX partition, the #2765 cannot be
accessed by i5/OS partitions.
An optics cleaning kit (P/N 46G6844) and instruction sheet (P/N 21P6238, form number SY27-2604) are supplied, one per
system, when a #2765/#2766 is ordered.
Multitarget support with a maximum of 16 targets with OS/400 V5R2. i5/OS V5R3 or later required to support the
TS3100/TS3200 Tape Library Express.
The #2765 does not support the Alternate IPL device function. A D-mode IPL is required using CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, or
another alternate IPL tape device. Then select a #2765 to complete the installation or recovery process.
Supported on Models 270, 9406 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and 9411-100.
287
#2766

The #2766 provides Fibre Channel attachment capability for external disk devices. The #2766 supports point-to-point and
arbitrated loop topologies and has an LC type cable connector. Each #2766 is shipped with a wrap connector
(P/N 05N6767).
The following devices are supported by the #2766:
2105-F10/F20/800 IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server
3534-1RU SAN Fibre Channel Managed Hub (1 Gbps)
Fibre Channel Switches:
2109 S08/S16 (1 Gbps)
2109 F16 (2 Gbps)
3534 F08 (2 Gbps)
SAN Fabric Directors:
2032-064 McDATA Intrepid 6064 Enterprise Fibre Channel Director
2032-140 McDATA Intrepid 6140 Director
The following adapter kits are required when connecting SC type cables to the #2766:
#0371 - LC-SC Adapter Kit (50 m) optional kit is used to attach SC-type Fibre (50 m) cables to a #2766. The #0371
kit contains a 2m LC-ST cable and ST-SC adapter for 50 m fibre.
#0372 - LC-SC Adapter Kit (62.5 m) optional kit is used to attach SC-type Fibre (62.5 m) cables to a #2766. The
#0372 kit contains a 2m LC-ST cable and ST-SC adapter for 62.5 m fibre.
An optics cleaning kit (P/N 46G6844) and instruction sheet (P/N 21P6238, form number SY27-2604) are supplied, one per
system, when a #2765/#2766 is present or ordered.
The #2766 requires a dedicated IOP. No other IOA is allowed on an IOP with the #2766.
The #2766 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0612 - Direct Attach #2766 PCI Fibre Channel
Disk Controller, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux partition, the #2766 cannot be accessed by
OS/400 partitions.
Clients must supply all Fibre Channel cables for the #2766. See the Hard rules: iSeries IOA capabilities topic in PCI and
PCI-X Placement Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 (Fourth edition), REDP-4011, or PCI Card
Placement Rules for the IBM eServer iSeries Server OS/400 Version 5 Release 2: September 2003, REDP-3638, for
OS/400 V5R2 or earlier releases, for additional restrictions.
Multitarget support with a maximum of 32 targets is supported with OS/400 V5R2.
Supported on Models 270, 9406 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and 9411-100.
#2768

The #2768 PCI Magnetic Media Controller provides Ultra SCSI attachment capability for an external tape or an external
CD-ROM device that has a Single Ended SCSI. The #2768 has one HD68 connector/port.
The #2768 supports a minimum of one of the following devices:
7206-VX2 80 GB VXA-2 External Tape Drive
7207-122 QIC-SLR Tape Bridge Box (4 GB External -inch Cartridge Tape Drive)
7208-345 60 GB External 8 mm Tape Drive
7329-308 SLR100 -inch Tape Autoloader
7210-020 CD-ROM Bridge Box
7210-025 DVD-RAM Drive
See 8.6, Device cabling rules for #5702, #5705, #5712, #5715, #5736, #2718, and #2768 PCI Magnetic Media Controller
on page 389, for additional information about connecting devices to the #2768, including daisy-chaining options.
Minimum operating system level: to support the 7329-308 and 7208-345: OS/400 V4R5
Minimum operating system level: to support the 7206-VX2, 7210-020, and 7210-025: OS/400 V5R1
Supported on Models 810, 825, 870, and 890.
The #2768 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 October 2004. A #5712 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller is the
288
#2780

The #2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller is an Ultra4 (u320) SCSI controller with a maximum compressed write cache
size of 757 MB and maximum compressed read cache of one GB. The #2780 provides RAID-5 protection for internal disks
and also supports internal tape units, CD-ROM, and DVD units. The #2780 has four Ultra4 SCSI buses. In addition to
providing RAID-5 protection for disks, the #2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller is designed to work as a high
performance controller for disks protected by system mirroring or disks with no protection.
The #2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller supports a maximum of 20 disk units. A minimum of three disk units of the
same capacity are needed for a valid RAID-5 configuration. A maximum of six arrays is allowed per controller, with a
maximum of 18 disk units allowed per array.
All disk units in an array must be of the same capacity. Parity is spread across either two, four, eight, or 16 disk units in an
array. If an array of three disk units is started, parity is spread across two disk units. If an array of four to seven disk units
is started, parity is spread across four disk units. If an array of 8-15 disk units is started, parity is spread across eight disk
units. If an array of 16-18 disk units is started, parity is spread across 16 disk units.
The number of arrays and size of each array can be influenced by specifying an optimization of either Balance, Performance,
or Capacity when starting arrays in iSeries Navigator. An optimization of Balance is used by default when starting arrays from
DST or SST options. If disk units are included into an existing array, the number of parity drives does not increase, so parity
can be spread across less than the preferred number of disk units. In this case, the RAID function must be stopped and
then started in order to redistribute the parity.
The #2780 controls up to two removable media devices (internal tape, CD-ROM, and DVD).
The #2780 does not support DASD compression.
The #2780 has a battery that provides concurrent maintenance and improved resiliency.
The #2780 can be directly attached to a Linux or AIX partition. When ordered as #0627 - Direct Attach #2780 PCI-X Ultra4
RAID Disk Controller, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux or AIX partition, the #2780 cannot be
accessed by OS/400 partitions.
Requires one 3V long PCI slot.
A #7137 DASD Concurrent Maintenance Cage is required for the Model 800.
Placement rules:
Not supported in Slot 1 of #5074, #5079, #5094, and #5294.
Due to system unit and external tower disk unit cage SCSI bus designs, only the Models 270, 800 and 810 have a
suitable system configuration to allow 18 disk units to attach to a single #2780. All other system unit or tower disk
configurations restrict the number of attaching disk units to 15 or less.
Further restrictions apply when a MES Conversion #0299 to add an Auxiliary Write Cache is made. The card
providing the write cache attaches to a #2780 on one of the Ultra4 SCSI buses, thus reducing the available SCSI
busses to attach disk drives by one.
SCSI port 1 is used to connect to the removable media slots in the Model 825.
SCSI port 1 can support LVD or single-ended devices.
SCSI ports 0, 2 and 3 are LVD only.
Minimum operating system level: SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER
Version 3 or OS/400 V5R2
IOP cards.
Since July 2005, the #2780 can only be ordered if system has mirrored protection (#0040 prerequisite). Order #0299 MES
Conversion to improve cache data redundancy when system has RAID protection.
Notes:
The auxiliary write cache controller #5590 with 1.5 GB write cache can be used with the #2780. There is no
performance gain using the #5590.
New order alternatives to the #2780 include #5738, or #5777 PCI disk controllers.
289
#2782

The #2782 PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller is a PCI-X SCSI controller with a 40 MB cache that provides RAID-5 protection
for internal disks and supports internal tape units, CD-ROM and DVD devices. The #2782 has two SCSI buses that support
up to 12 disk units. Hardware data compression is not supported.
In addition to providing RAID-5 protection for disks, #2782 also works as a high-performance controller for disks protected
by system mirroring, or disks with no protection. In the RAID-5 configuration, disk unit protection is provided at less cost
than mirroring, and with better performance than system checksums.
A minimum of three disk units of the same capacity are needed for a valid RAID-5 configuration. A maximum of four arrays
is allowed per controller, with a maximum of 12 disk units allowed per array. All disk units in an array must be of the same
capacity.
Parity is spread across either two, four, or eight disk units in an array. If an array of three disk units is started, parity is spread
across two disk units. If an array of four to seven disk units is started, parity is spread across four disk units. If an array of
eight to twelve disk units is started, parity is spread across eight disk units.
The number of arrays and size of each array can be influenced by specifying an optimization of either Balance,
Performance, or Capacity when starting arrays in iSeries Navigator. An optimization of Balance is used by default when
starting arrays from the DST or SST options. If disk units are included into an existing array, parity can be spread across
less than the preferred number of disk units. In this case the RAID function must be stopped and then started in order to
redistribute the parity.
The #2782 controls up to two removable media devices (internal tape, CD-ROM and DVD).
The #2782 PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller does not support hardware data compression.
The #2782 does not support the attachment of external devices.
Supported on Models 270, 9406 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890 and 9411-100.
The #2782 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 January 2004. A #5703 PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller is the
#2787

The #2787 PCI-X Fibre Channel Disk Controller provides Fibre Channel attachment capability for external disk devices.
The #2787 supports point-to-point and arbitrated loop topologies and has an LC-type cable connector. Each #2787 is
shipped with a wrap connector (part number 05N6767). It supports 64-bit, 133 MHz PCI-X bus speeds. It is the PCI-X
replacement card for the #2766 PCI Fibre Channel Disk Controller.
The following adapter kits are required when connecting SC-type cables to the #2787:
#0371 - LC-SC Adapter Kit (50um) can be ordered, both on initial, model upgrades, and simple MES orders. This
optional kit is used to attach SC-type fibre (50 m) cables to a #2787. The #0371 kit contains a 2m LC-ST cable and
ST-SC adapter for 50 m fiber cable.
#0372 - LC-SC Adapter Kit (62.5um) can be ordered, both on initial, model upgrades, and simple MES orders. This
optional kit is used to attach SC-type fiber (62.5 m) cables to a #2787. The #0372 kit contains a 2m LC-ST cable and
ST-SC adapter for 62.5 m fiber cable.
An optics cleaning kit (part number 46G6844) and instruction sheet (part number 21P6238, form number SY27-2604) is
supplied, one per system, when a #2787 is ordered.
When used as a direct attached adapter for Linux, the #0626 - Direct Attach #2787 PCI-X Fibre Channel Disk Controller
should be ordered in place of the #2787.
Maximum physical quantities are determined by requiring a dedicated IOP and limited to two per Multi-adapter Bridge
boundary.
All Fibre Channel cables required for the #2787 PCI-X Fibre Channel Disk Controller are supplied by the client.
IOP cards.
290
#4748
#9748

The #4748/#9748 is an Ultra2 SCSI controller with a 26 MB write-cache that provides RAID-5 protection and compression
for internal disk units and supports internal tape units and CD-ROM units.
The #4748/#9748 supports both compression and non-compression modes. The mode of operation is determined by a
hardware jumper. The #4748/#9748 is shipped in non-compression mode. By moving the hardware jumper, the controller
functions in compression mode.
In addition to providing RAID-5 protection for disks, the #4748/#9748 is also designed to work as a high performance
controller for disks protected by system mirroring or disks with no protection. The #4748 also supports #4331 1.6 GB Read
Cache Device, which provides increased performance. The #4331 1.6 GB Read Cache Device is supported only when
#4748/#9748 is not in compression mode.
The #4748 does not support data compression on 35 GB or larger disk units.
The #4748 controller supports a maximum of 15 disk units.
The #9748 is the base disk controller for Models 830 and 840.
A minimum of four disk units of the same capacity are needed for a valid RAID-5 configuration. A maximum of four arrays
capacity. Parity is spread across four disk units for arrays of four to seven disk units. Parity can be spread across either four
or eight disk units for arrays of 8 to 10 disk units. For systems started with 8 to 10 disk units in an array, the parity for that
array is spread across eight disk units. For systems that are started with less than eight disk units in an array and later MES
upgraded to 8, 9, or 10 disk units, the RAID function must be stopped and then started before the parity is spread across
eight disk units.
The #4748/#9748 controls up to two removable media devices (internal tape or CD-ROM).
The #4748 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When installed as #0605 - Direct Attach #4748 PCI RAID Disk Unit
Requires a long PCI card slot.
Supported on Models 270, 520, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and 9411-100.
The #4748 and #9748 are Customer Install Features. This controller can use an IOP. The POWER6 model processor
enclosures do not support IOP cards.
The #4748 and #9748 are withdrawn from marketing as of 02 July 2002. A #2757 PCI-X Ultra RAID Disk Controller is the
#4778
#9778

The #4778/#9778 is an Ultra2 SCSI controller with a maximum compressed write cache size of 104 MB that provides
RAID-5 protection and compression for internal disk units and supports internal tape units, CD-ROM and DVD-RAM units.
The #4778 does not support data compression on 70 GB or larger disk units.
The #4778/#9778 supports both disk compression and enhanced modes. The mode of operation is determined by a
hardware jumper. The #4778/#9778 is shipped in enhanced mode, which enables compression of the write cache and
Extended Adaptive Cache. A Read Cache Device is needed for Extended Adaptive Cache. By moving the hardware jumper,
the controller functions in disk compression mode. Disk compression mode should only be used when disk compression is
desired.
In addition to providing RAID-5 protection for disks, #4778/#9778 is also designed to work as a high performance controller
for disks protected by system mirroring or disks with no protection. In the RAID-5 configuration, disk unit protection is
provided at less cost than mirroring, and with better performance than system checksum.
The #4778/#9778 also supports the #4331 1.6 GB Read Cache Device, which is used by Extended Adaptive Cache to
provide increased performance. The #4331 1.6 GB Read Cache Device is supported only when the #4778/#9778 is in
enhanced mode. The #4778/#9778 controller supports a maximum of 18 disk units.
A minimum of four disk units of the same capacity are needed for a valid RAID-5 configuration. A maximum of four arrays
capacity. Parity is spread across 4 disk units for arrays of 4 to 7 disk units. Parity can be spread across either 4 or 8 disk
units for arrays of 8 to 10 disk units. For systems started with 8 to 10 disk units in an array the parity, for that array, is spread
across eight disk units. For systems that are started with less than eight disk units in an array and later MES upgraded to
8, 9, or 10 disk units, the RAID function must be stopped and then started before the parity is spread across eight disk units.
The #4778/#9778 controls up to two removable media devices (internal tape, CD-ROM or DVD-RAM).
291
#4778
#9778
(contd.)

Due to system unit and external tower disk unit cage SCSI bus designs, only the Model 800 and 810 have a suitable system
configuration to allow 18 disk units to attach to a single #4778. All other system unit and tower disk unit configurations
restrict the number of attaching disk units to 15 or less.
The #4778 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0606 - Direct Attach #4778 PCI RAID Disk Unit
The #4778 was withdrawn from marketing as of 19 November 2004. Conversions to the #4778 remain available.
#5580
#5580 - 2780 Ctlr w/Aux Write Cache

The #5580 provides a disk controller with auxiliary write cache to improve cache data redundancy. The #5580 includes a
#2780 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller and a secondary IOA with 757 MB of auxiliary maximum compressed write cache.
The #2780 and the secondary IOA each require one PCI-X slot and must be installed together in the same system unit or
I/O unit, drawer, or tower. The #2780 and the auxiliary write cache IOA are connected by a SCSI cable (provided). Feature
#2780 does not appear on IBM ordering, shipping, or inventory documentation.
The connecting SCSI cable is attached to port four of the #2780, reducing the number of SCSI buses that support disk
drives from four to three. The reduction of SCSI buses can also reduce the number of disk drives supported by the #2780,
depending on the system or I/O unit, drawer, or tower in which the #2780 is installed. No disk drives are driven by the
auxiliary write cache IOA.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R2 with CUM C5123520 and prerequisite PTFs, or i5/OS V5R3 with
cumulative PTF package C5102530 and prerequisite PTFs.
IOP cards.
Note: The #5580 was withdrawn from marketing as of 13 July 2007. It can be replaced by a #5590 #2780 Ctlr w/Aux Write
Cache.
#5581
#5581 - 2757 Ctlr w/Aux Write Cache

The #5581 provides a disk controller with auxiliary write cache to improve cache data redundancy. The #5581 includes a
#2757 PCI-X Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller and a secondary IOA with 757 MB of auxiliary maximum compressed write cache.
The #2757 and the secondary IOA each require one PCI-X slot and must be installed together in the same system unit or
I/O unit, drawer, or tower. The #2757 and the auxiliary write cache IOA are connected by a SCSI cable (provided). Feature
#2757 does not appear on IBM ordering, shipping, or inventory documentation.
depending on the system unit or I/O unit, drawer, or tower in which the #5738 is installed. No disk drives are driven by the
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R2 with cumulative PTF package C5123520 and prerequisite PTFs, or i5/OS
V5R3 with cumulative C5102530 and prerequisite PTFs.
IOP cards.
Note: The #5581 was withdrawn from marketing as of 13 July 2007. It can be replaced with a #5591 - #2757 Ctlr w/Aux
Write Cache.
292
#5582
#5738 Controller with 1.5 GB Auxiliary Write Cache with IOP

The #5738 Controller with 1.5 GB Auxiliary Write Cache with IOP provides a disk controller with auxiliary write cache to
improve cache data redundancy. The #5582 includes a #5738 PCI-X RAID disk controller and an auxiliary write cache IOA
with a maximum compressed write cache of 1.5 GB. The #5738 and the auxiliary IOA each require one PCI-X slot and must
be installed together in the same system unit or I/O unit, drawer, or tower. The #5738 and the auxiliary write cache IOA are
connected by a SCSI cable (provided). Feature #5738 will not appear on IBM ordering, shipping, or inventory
documentation.
depending on the system or I/O unit, drawer, or tower in which the #5738 is installed. No disk drives are driven by the
The #5582 and #5583 are physically the same adapter cards but have different feature numbers that denote to IBM
configurator tools whether an IOP is required. The #5582 indicates an IOP is used.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 or later
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models; Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890, as well as 9411-100. This controller
can use an IOP. The POWER6 model processor enclosures do not support IOP cards.
#5583
#5583 Controller with 1.5GB Auxiliary Write Cache without IOP

The #5583 Controller with 1.5GB Auxiliary Write Cache without IOP provides a disk controller with auxiliary write cache to
improve cache data redundancy. The #5583 includes a #5777 PCI-X disk controller and a secondary IOA with 1.5 GB of
auxiliary maximum compressed write cache. The #5777 and the secondary IOA each require one PCI-X slot and must be
installed together in the same system unit or I/O unit, drawer, or tower. The #5777 and the auxiliary write cache IOA are
connected by a SCSI cable (provided). Feature #5777 will not appear on IBM ordering, shipping, or inventory
documentation.
The #5583 and #5582 are physically the same adapter cards but have different feature numbers that denote to IBM
configurator tools whether an IOP is required. The #5583 does not require an IOP.
#5590

The #2780 Controller with Auxiliary Write Cache provides a disk controller with auxiliary write cache to improve cache data
redundancy. The #5590 includes a #2780 PCI-X RAID Disk Controller with 757 MB of write cache and a secondary IOA
with 1.5 GB of auxiliary maximum compressed write cache. The #2780 and the secondary IOA each require one PCI-X slot
and must be installed together in the same system unit or I/O unit, drawer, or tower. The #2780 and the auxiliary write cache
IOA are connected by the provided SCSI cable. Feature #2780 will not appear on IBM ordering, shipping, or inventory
documentation.
IOP cards.
293
#5591

The #2757 Controller with Auxiliary Write Cache provides a disk controller with auxiliary write cache to improve cache data
redundancy. The #5591 includes a #2757 PCI-X RAID Disk Controller with a 757 MB write cache and a secondary IOA with
1.5 GB of auxiliary maximum compressed write cache. The #2757 and the secondary IOA each require one PCI-X slot and
must be installed together in the same system unit or I/O unit, drawer, or tower. The #2757 and the auxiliary write cache
IOA are connected by a SCSI cable (provided). Feature #2757 will not appear on IBM ordering, shipping, or inventory
documentation.
auxiliary write cache IOA
IOP cards.
5679
#5679 SAS RAID Enablement with 175 MB write cache

This provides RAID capability and 175 MB protected write cache to augment the performance and function of the
embedded SAS disk controller in the POWER6 system unit (processor enclosure).
This provides daughter cards which contain the RAID function and the 175MB of write cache. The auxiliary daughter card
plugs into a special slot on the planar and provides the battery power pack and redundant 175MB write cache memory for
the daughter card. Concurrent maintenance of the RAID daughter card and the auxiliary daughter card is not supported.
Concurrent maintenance of the battery pack is supported. The daughter cards are installed in their own specific internal
slots on the system unit backplane and do not require a PCI slot.
The #5679 adds RAID-5 and RAID-6 capability. A minimum of three disk units are required for a RAID-5 disk array, and a
minimum of four disk units are required for a RAID-6 disk array.
The two-core 9408-M25 and the 9409-M50 can use a SAS DASD/Media Backplane #8345 in combination with FC #5679
to provide one external RAID-enabled SAS port. One SAS EXP 12S disk drawer can be attached to this port and its disk
drives controlled by the imbedded SAS disk controller. The one-core 9407-M15 does not support this attachment.
Attributes provided: Write cache for performance and RAID Data Protection for system unit disk units.
Attributes required: Available RAID Enabler Card slots on the system unit backplane.
294
#5702
#5702 PCI-X Ultra Tape Controller (VHDCI)

The #5702 PCI-X Ultra Tape Controller provides a SCSI Ultra PCI attachment capability for external tape devices and
removable media devices. The #5702 has two ports that can attach two external tape devices. Each port can support at a
minimum one of the following devices:
LTO, VXA-2, VXA-320, QIC-SLR External LVD Tape Devices
See the tables in 8.1, External tape for System i family of models on page 360, for a complete listing of compatible
tape devices.
7210-020 External CD-ROM
7210-025 External DVD-RAM
The #5702 can be directly attached to a Linux partition. When ordered as #0624 - Direct Attach #5702 PCI-X Ultra Tape
partitions.
A #5702 running in an i5OS or OS/400 partition cannot drive internal disk units in any expansion tower, base I/O tower, or
system unit enclosure. See 8.6, Device cabling rules for #5702, #5705, #5712, #5715, #5736, #2718, and #2768 PCI
Magnetic Media Controller on page 389, for information about connecting devices to the #5702 including daisy-chaining
options.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R2. i5/OS V5R3 or later required to support the TS3100/TS3200 Tape Library
Express.
Supported on Models 520 (9406 only), 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, and 9411-100.
The #5702 is a Customer Install Feature. This controller can use an IOP. The POWER6 model processor enclosures do
not support IOP cards.
The #5702 was withdrawn from marketing as of 01 June 2006. A #5712 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller is the recommended
replacement. Otherwise, a #5766 for IOP based tape attachment, or a #5736 IOP based with #0290 - External Tape
Attached Placement Code are the recommended replacements. For IOP-less tape attachment, use a #5775 with #0290 External Tape Attached Placement Code.
Some supported tape drives might also be removed from marketing. See the Tape systems Web page for more details
about tape support on all operating systems. From this Web page, click the link for the tape system you need, and on the
next page, click the Interoperability matrix link. http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/tape
295
#5703

The #5703 PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller is an Ultra3 SCSI controller with a cache size of 40 MB that provides RAID-5
protection for internal disks and internal tape units, CD-ROM, DVD-RAM and DVD-ROM units. The #5703 has two Ultra3
SCSI buses. In addition to providing RAID-5 protection for disks, the #5703 is designed to work as a high performance
controller for disks protected by system mirroring or disks with no protection. In the RAID-5 configuration, disk unit
protection is provided at less cost than mirroring, and with better performance than system checksum.
The #5703 controller supports a maximum of 12 disk units. When used in a Model 520 or 525, the #5703 controls disks in
the #6584 4 Disk Slot Exp - PCI-X Controller.
Due to a system unit and external tower disk unit cage SCSI bus designs, only the 270, 800 and 810 Models, and the
#0595/#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower have a suitable system configuration to allow 12 disk units to attach to a single
#5703. All other system unit and tower disk configurations restrict the number of attaching disk units to 10 or less.
A minimum of three disk units of the same capacity are needed for a valid RAID-5 configuration. A maximum of four arrays
capacity. Parity is spread across either two, four, or eight disk units in an array. If an array of three disk units is started, parity
is spread across two disk units. If an array of four to seven disk units is started, parity is spread across four disk units. If an
array of 8-12 disk units is started, parity is spread across eight disk units.
The number of arrays and size of each array can be influenced by specifying an optimization of either Balance, Performance,
or Capacity in Operations Navigator when starting arrays. An optimization of Balance is used by default when starting arrays
from the green screens. If disk units are included into an existing array, parity can be spread across fewer than the preferred
number of disk units. In this case, the RAID function must be stopped and then started to redistribute the parity.
The #5703 controls up to two removable media devices (internal tape, CD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM).
The #5703 does not support the attachment of external devices.
A #5703 is the recommended replacement for the #2782 PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller.
When ordered as #0628 - Direct Attach #5703 PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller, an IOP is not required. When directly
attached to a Linux/AIX partition, the #5703 cannot be accessed by OS/400 partitions.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R2 later (or earliest release level supporting the system processor technology).
870, 890 models and 9411-100. Also supported on the 270. This controller can use an IOP. The POWER6 model processor
enclosures do not support IOP cards.
A #5735 IOP-based disk attachment, #5776 IOP-less disk attachment, or #0648 are the recommended replacements.
#5704

The #5704 PCI-X Fibre Channel Tape Controller provides Fibre Channel attachment capability for external tape devices.
The #5704 supports point-to-point and arbitrated loop topologies and has an LC-type cable connector. Each #5704 is
shipped with a wrap connector (part number 05N6767). The #5704 supports 64-bit, 133 MHz PCI-X bus speeds. It is the
PCI-X card replacement for the #2765 PCI Fibre Channel Tape Controller.
All Fibre Channel cables required for the #5704 are supplied by the client.
See the tables in 8.1, External tape for System i family of models on page 360, for a complete listing of compatible tape
devices.
The #5704 does not support the Alternate IPL device function. A D-mode IPL is required using CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, or
another alternate IPL tape device. Then select a #5704 to complete the installation or recovery process.
IOP cards.
Some supported tape drives might also be removed from marketing. See the Tape systems Web page for more details
about tape support on all operating systems. From this Web page, click the link for the tape system you need, and on the
next page, click the Interoperability matrix link. http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/tape
296
#5705

The #5705 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller provides SCSI Ultra4 PCI attachment capability for external tape devices, external
removable media devices, and internal DASD devices. There are two SCSI buses on each #5705. Each SCSI bus has both
an internal port and an external port for a total of four ports on the card. Each SCSI bus can have only one attachment,
either internal or external. Attaching internal and external devices to the same SCSI bus causes the internal device to
become disabled.
The internal SCSI port supports up to six disk units, but does not support RAID. If two external SCSI ports are required, a
#5702 should be ordered.
The external port can support the following devices:
tape devices.
on page 389, for information about connecting devices to the #5705 including daisy-chaining options.
Minimum operating system level: OS/400 V5R2. i5/OS V5R3 or later required to support the TS3100/TS3200 Tape Library
Express.
Refer to Informational APAR II13440 at:
A #5736 for IOP-based attachment or #5775 for IOP-less disk attachment are the recommended replacements.
#5709
#5709 RAID Enabler Card

The #5709 RAID Enabler Card is an optional SCSI RAID controller with a 16 MB write cache. The #5709 supports up to
eight disk unit positions in the Model 520 or 525 system unit and up to six disk unit positions in the Model 570 POWER5
system unit. The #5709 plugs into its own specific internal slot and does not require/use a PCI card slot.
In the Model 520 or 525, the #5709 can be used with or without a #6574 - 4-Disk Slot Expansion Base Controller. When
installed without a #6574 4-pack disk backplane, the #5709 allows disk units plugged into the base 4-pack disk backplane
to be in a RAID array (minimum of three disk units for an array). For the Model 520 or when a #5709 is installed, the base
integrated non-RAID SCSI disk controller is deactivated.
For originally shipped Model 570 POWER5 system units, the #5709 was required. Newer Model 570 POWER5 system units
use either a #5726 (POWER5) or a #5728 (POWER5+).
The i5/OS operating system does not have the capability to interface directly to the embedded SCSI controller. The #5709
communicates solely with the embedded controller. An IOP must be present for the #5709 to communicate with the i5/OS
operating system.
Supported on Models 520, 525, 550, and 570.
The #5709 was withdrawn from marketing in 2005 for the Model 570.
A #5726 is the recommended replacement for the Model 570.
A #5728 is the recommended replacement when upgrading to Model 570+.
#5710
#5710 PCI-X Dual Channel Ultra 320 SCSI Blind Swap Adapter (LVD)
Supported in a Linux partition. See the #5712 for supported devices.
297
#5712

The #5712 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller provides a SCSI Ultra PCI attachment capability for external tape devices and
removable media devices.
The #5712 has two ports that can attach two external tape devices. Each port can support, at a minimum, one of the
following devices:
LLTO, VXA-2, VXA-320, QIC-SLR External LVD Tape Devices
tape devices.
The #5712 can be directly attached to a Linux or AIX 5 partition. When ordered as #0645 - Direct Attach #5712 PCI-X
Tape/DASD Controller, an IOP is not required. When directly attached to a Linux/AIX partition, the #5712 cannot be
accessed by OS/400 partitions.
A #5712 running in an i5/OS or OS/400 partition cannot drive internal disk units in any expansion tower, base I/O tower, or
system unit enclosure.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models and 9411-100.This controller can use an IOP. The POWER6 model
processor enclosures do not support IOP cards.
A #5766 PCI-X Tape Controller for IOP based tape attachment on System i models, or #5736 IOP based with #0290 External Tape Attached Placement Code are the recommended replacements. For IOP-less tape attachment, use the
#5775 with a #0290 - External Tape Attached Placement Code.
#5713
#5713 PCI-X 1Gbps iSCSI TOE-Copper

The #5713 PCI-X 1Gbps iSCSI TOE-Copper adapter encapsulates SCSI Commands and data into TCP and transports the
commands over the Ethernet via IP packets. The #5713 adapter operates as an iSCSI TOE. The offload of the host
eliminates protocol processing and reduces CPU interrupts.
The #5713 iSCSI adapter uses an RJ45 1 Gbps Ethernet connector. The #5713 adapter can be used to initiate requests
to external storage devices from AIX 5L and Linux partitions. An available PCI-X slot is required.
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER
Supported on Models 570 (POWER6), 520+, 525, 550+, 570+, 595 1.9 GHz, 520, 550, 570, 595, and 9411-100.
#5714
#5714 PCI-X 1Gbps iSCSI TOE - Optic

The #5714 PCI-X 1Gbps iSCSI TOE - Optic adapter encapsulates SCSI commands and data into TCP and transports the
commands over Ethernet via IP packets. The #5714 adapter operates as an iSCSI TOE. The offload of the host eliminates
protocol processing and reduces CPU interrupts.
The #5714 iSCSI adapter uses a small form factor LC type fiber optic connector. The #5714 adapter can be used to initiate
requests to external storage devices from AIX 5L and Linux partitions. A PCI-X slot is required.
Minimum operating system level: AIX 5L for POWER V5.2 for IBM eServer or SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER
Supported on Models 570 (POWER6), 520+, 525, 550+, 570+, 595 1.9 GHz, 520, 550, 570, 595, and 9411-100.
298
#5715

The #5715 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller provides SCSI Ultra4 PCI attachment capability for external tape devices, external
removable media devices, and internal DASD devices. There are two SCSI buses on each #5715. Each SCSI bus has both
an internal port and an external port for a total of four ports on the card. Each SCSI bus can have only one attachment,
either internal or external. Attaching internal and external devices to the same SCSI bus causes the internal device to
become disabled.
The internal SCSI port supports up to six disk units, but does not support RAID. If two external SCSI ports are required, a
#5712 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller should be ordered. When used in a Model 520 or 525, the #5715 controls disks in the
#6584 4 Disk Slot Exp - PCI-X Controller.
The external port can support the following devices:
tape devices.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models and 9411-100. This controller can use an IOP. The POWER6 model
processor enclosures do not support IOP cards.
A #5736 for IOP-based disk attachment or #5775 for IOP-less disk attachment are the recommended replacements.
#5726
#5726 - RAID Enabler Card

The #5726 provides a SCSI RAID controller that is installed into its own specific internal slot of a system unit and does not
require a PCI slot. It functionally replaces the base integrated disk controller, adding RAID-5 capability and 40 MB disk
controller write cache.
The Model 570 originally used feature #5709 to describe this card. There is a slightly different enclosure kit for the card,
and the #5726 is now used to identify the card and enclosure kit.
A minimum of three disk units are required for a RAID disk array.
#5727
#5727 Integrated Cache 40MB

controller write cache and is capable of running in an IOP-less mode.
A minimum of three disk units is required for a RAID disk array.
The #9510 is a no-charge feature for Express Configurations with RAID.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 and LIC V5R3M0 when running in dedicated mode (IOP required)
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 and LIC V5R3M5 when running in dual-mode (IOP-less)
Supported on Models 515, 520+, 525 and 550+
#5728
#5728 Integrated Cache 40MB

controller write cache and is capable of running in IOP-less mode.
A minimum of three disk units are required for a RAID disk array.
The # 5728 is a required feature on the Model 570+ if more than three disk are used in the processor enclosure.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R3 and LIC V5R3M0, when running in dedicated mode (IOP required)
i5/OS V5R4, when running in dual mode (IOP-less).
299
#5736
#5736 PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller with IOP

The #5736 PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller with IOP provides a PCI-X Disk/Tape SCSI Controller with zero write cache and
without RAID support. Disk mirroring support is supported through i5/OS. A maximum of six disk drives is supported on
the #5736. Removable media devices (tape, optical libraries, CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, or DVD-RAM) are also supported on
the #5736.
The #5736 has two U320 buses each with a bus data rate of up to 320 MBs. The 5736 runs at U160 for tape attachment.
Each SCSI bus can be either internal (using an internal port) or external (using an external port), but not both. There are
four physical ports on the #5736, two internal and two external.
Internal devices connect to the internal ports (one or two). External devices connect to the external ports (one or two) and
use an LVD interface and VHDCI connectors. An #1850 VHDCI to P Converter Cable is available to connect to external
devices with type P connectors.
The external ports can support the following tape and optical devices:
LTO, VXA-2, VXA-320, QIC-SLR External LVD, DAT72 Tape Devices
tape devices.
An #0290 - External Tape Attached via #5736 Placement Code indicates that one external port of a #5736 is used to control
an external tape device.
The #0647, #5736, #5766 and #5775 are physically the same adapter card. The #5736 should be the choice over the #5702
and #5712 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller or the #5705 and #5715 controllers for systems running i5/OS V5R3.
840, 870, 890 models and 9411-100. This controller can use an IOP. The POWER6 model processor enclosures do not
support IOP cards.
Note: #0300 is used to indicate that the external port of a #5736/#5775 will be connected to one 6-pack of disk slots on a
#5786/#5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer/Tower. A #5736/#5775 connected to a #5786/#5787 is not capable of
attaching/driving any additional internal disk units.
Some supported tape drives may also be removed from marketing. See the Tape systems Web page for more details about
tape support on all operating systems. From this Web page, click the link for the tape system you need, and on the next
page, click the Interoperability matrix link. http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/tape
#5737
#5737 PCI-X Disk Controller 90MB with IOP

The #5737 PCI-X Disk Controller 90MB with IOP provides a PCI-X SCSI disk controller that has a 90 MB write cache and
can provide RAID-5 or RAID-6 protection of disk units.
The #5737 has two U320 SCSI buses each with a bus data rate of up to 320 MBs. A maximum of 12 internal disk drives
and up to two internal removable media devices (tape, CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, or DVD-RAM) are supported on the #5737.
The #0648, #5737, and #5776 are physically the same adapter card. The #2780/#5580 and #2757/#5581 disk controllers
with an effective 757 MB write cache provide greater disk performance and can have an auxiliary write cache IOA to protect
the write cache contents.
IOP cards.
Note: #0301 is used to indicate that one external port of a #5737/#5776 will be connected to one or two 6-packs of disk
slots on a #5786/#5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer/Tower.
Both external ports of a #5737/#5776 can be connected to #5786s/#5787s. Both ports of a #5737/#5776 can connect to
the same #5786/#5787 or to different 5786s/#5787s. With both ports connected to #5786s/#5787s, a #5737/#5776 is not
capable of attaching/driving any additional internal disk units and/or internal tape/optical devices.
300
#5738
#5738 PCI-X Ultra320 SCSI Disk Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches with IOP
The #5738 PCI-X Ultra320 SCSI Disk Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches with IOP provides a high-performance
PCI-X Ultra320 SCSI disk controller with a maximum compressed write cache of 1.5 GB and read cache of 1.6 GB. The
#5738 supports i5/OS mirroring protection for internal disk drives using its write cache but will not start RAID-5 or RAID-6
unless an auxiliary write cache IOA is attached. When an auxiliary write cache IOA is attached, the pair of cards is denoted
by feature code #5582.
Concurrent battery maintenance is supported. The controller also supports internal tape units, CD-ROM units, and DVD
units. The #5738 has four internal Ultra320 SCSI buses.
The #5738 and #5777 are physically the same adapter card but have different feature numbers to denote to IBM
configurator tools whether an IOP is required. The #5738 indicates an IOP is used.
Supported on System i 520, 525, 550, 570 processor enclosures, 595 system units, and supported I/O enclosures except
#5790. Supported on IBM System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890. This controller can use an IOP. The POWER6
model processor enclosures do not support IOP cards.
#5739
The #5739 PCI-X EXP24 Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches with IOP provides an EXP24 disk controller with
PCI-X DDR technology, a maximum of 1.5 GB compressed write cache, and a maximum 1.6 GB compressed read cache.
The controller supports RAID-5 and RAID-6 and mirroring is supported via i5/OS. Embedded auxiliary 1.5 GB write cache
and concurrent battery maintenance are provided. The controller is implemented using two physical cards that are firmly
connected and requires two adjacent PCI slots. It provides three Ultra320 SCSI ports/buses for the attachment of disk
drives located in a #5786/#5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer/Tower.
The #5739 and #5778 are physically the same adapter cards but have different feature numbers to denote to IBM
configuration tools whether an IOP is required. The #5739 indicates an IOP is used. The #5781/#5782 and #5799/#5800
are also the same adapter cards, but the #5781/#5782 indicates the adapter is placed in a double-wide blind swap cassette
and #5799/#5800 indicates the adapter is placed in a Model 520 or 525 system unit and has a light pipe inserted into the
feature.
Supported on System i 520, 525, 570 processor enclosures 595 system units, and supported I/O enclosures except #5790.
This controller can use an IOP. The POWER6 model processor enclosures do not support IOP cards.Supported on IBM
System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890.
Note; #0310 is used to indicate that one port of a #5739/#5778/#5781/#5782/#5799/#5800 will be connected to one or two
6-packs of disk slots of a #5786/#5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer/Tower.
All three external ports of a #5739/#5778/#5781/#5782/#5799/#5800 can be connected to #5786s/#5787s. All three ports
of a #5739/#5778/#5781/#5782/#5799/#5800 can connect to the same #5786/#5787 or to different 5786s/#5787s.
#5741
#5741 Expansion 24 6 Disk Slot Enabler

The #5741 Expansion 24 6 Disk Slot Enabler provides a SCSI card (repeater) located in a #5786/#5787 TotalStorage
EXP24 Disk Drawer/Tower. The #5741 receives and sends Ultra320 SCSI signals from an external port of a SCSI disk
controller such as a #5736/#5775, #5737/#5776, or #5739/#5778/#5781/#5782/#5799/#5800 via a SCSI cable. It then
sends and receives the signals to the DASD backplane in the #5786/#5787.
A #5741 can enable up to six disk units in a #5786/#5787.
One to four #5741s are supported in a #5786/#5787.
Supported on 5786 and 5787.
301
#5742
#5742 Expansion 24 6/12 Disk Slot Enabler

The #5742 Expansion 24 6/12 Disk Slot Enabler provides a SCSI card (repeater) located in a #5786/#5787 TotalStorage
EXP24 Disk Drawer/Tower. The #5742 receives and sends Ultra320 SCSI signals from an external port of a SCSI disk
controller such as a #5736/#5775, #5737/#5776, or #5739, #5778, #5781, #5782, #5799, or #5800 via a SCSI cable. It then
sends and receives the signals to the DASD backplane in the #5786/#5787.
A single #5742 can enable up to six disk units in a #5786/#5787. Two #5742s can be cabled so that up to 12 disk units can
be driven by a single SCSI disk controller port with a single SCSI cable. Also a #5742 and a #5741 can be cabled so that
up to 12 disk units can be driven by a single SCSI disk controller port with a single SCSI cable.
One to four #5742s are supported in a #5786/#5787.
Supported on 5786 and 5787.
#5749
#5749 4Gbps PCI-X Fibre Channel 2-Port

The 4 Gigabit Dual-Port Fibre Channel PCI-X 2.0 DDR Adapter is a 64-bit address/data, short form factor PCI-X adapter
with an LC type external fiber connector that provides single or dual initiator capability over an optical fiber link or loop. With
the use of appropriate optical fiber cabling, this adapter provides the capability for a network of high-speed local and remote
located storage. The adapter will auto-negotiate for the highest data rate between adapter and an attaching device at 1
Gbps, 2 Gbps, or 4 Gbps of which the device or switch is capable. Distances of up to 500 meters running at 1 Gbps data
rate, up to 300 meters running at 2 Gbps data rate, and 4 Gbps data rate up to 150 meters are supported between the
adapter and an attaching device or switch. When used with IBM Fibre Channel storage switches supporting long-wave
optics, distances up to 10 kilometers are capable of running at either 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, or 4 Gbps data rates.
The adapter can be used to attach devices either directly, or by means of Fibre Channel Switches. If attaching a device or
switch with SC type fiber connector(s), use of an LC-SC 50 Micron Fiber Converter Cable (#2456) or an LC-SC 62.5 Micron
Specific IBM System Storage tape or disk devices are supported. Each port can connect either tape or disks. Each port
can be active with either disks or tapes concurrently. However, for maximum performance reasons, we do not recommend
tape and disks be attached to the same physical fibre channel controller and run concurrently.
If dual path is requested, you must use at least 2 cards. Disk support includes IBM DS8000 attachment, multipath, SAN
load source. Tape support includes alternate IPL.
Through May 2008, specific disk and tape support is as follows:
Disk: IBM DS8000
Tape:
3592: 3592 J1A and 3592 E05 rack mounted drive
3584 (TS3500): LTO 2 / 3 3592 J1A, 3592 E05
3494: 3592 J1A, 3592 E05
Expanded disk and tape connectivity are planned over time. Refer to the following IBM Web site for full support details:
http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/storage/index.html
302
#5758
#5758 PCI-X 4Gbps Fibre Channel 1-Port

The #5758 provides a 4 Gbps Single Port Fibre Channel PCI-X 2.0 Adapter, which is a 64-bit address/data, short form factor
PCI-X adapter with an LC type external fiber connector that provides single initiator capability over an optical fiber link or
loop. With the use of appropriate optical fiber cabling, this adapter provides the capability for a network of high-speed local
and remote located storage.
The #5758 will auto-negotiate for the highest data rate between adapter and an attaching device at 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps or
4 Gbps of which the device or switch is capable. Distances of up to 500 meters running at 1Gbps data rate and up to 300
meters running at 2Gbps data rate and 4Gbps data rate up to 150 meters are supported between the adapter and an
attaching device or switch. When used with IBM supported Fibre Channel storage switches supporting long-wave optics,
distances of up to 10 kilometers are capable of running at either 1, 2, or 4 Gbps data rates.
The #5758 can be used to attach devices either directly, or by means of Fibre Channel Switches. If attaching a device or
switch with an SC type fiber connector, use of an LC-SC 50 Micron Fiber Converter Cable (#0371) or an LC-SC 62.5 Micron
Features #5758 and #5761 are physically the same card, but have different feature numbers that denote to IBM configurator
tools whether an IOP is required. The #5758 does not require a PCI IOP.
Refer to 8.1, External tape for System i family of models on page 360, for a complete listing of compatible tape devices.
For information about additional supported system attachment for IBM devices, refer to the following Web page:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/product/products_pseries.html
Contact your IBM representative or Business Partner for additional information about any third-party attachment.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models. Minimum operating system level: Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for
POWER Version 4 or later, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER or later, or AIX V5.2 or later.
#5759
#5759 4Gbps Fibre Channel 2-Port

The #5759 provides a 4Gbps Dual-Port Fibre Channel PCI-X 2.0 Adapter, which is a 64-bit address/data, short form factor
PCI-X adapter with an LC type external fiber connector that provides single or dual initiator capability over an optical fiber
link or loop. With the use of appropriate optical fiber cabling, this adapter provides the capability for a network of high-speed
local and remote located storage.
The #5759 will auto-negotiate for the highest data rate between adapter and an attaching device at 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, or
4 Gbps of which the device or switch is capable. Distances of up to 500 meters running at 1 Gbps data rate, up to 300
meters running at 2 Gbps data rate, and 4 Gbps data rate up to 150 meters are supported between the adapter and an
attaching device or switch. When used with IBM Fibre Channel storage switches supporting long-wave optics, distances
up to 10 kilometers are capable running at either 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, or 4 Gbps data rates.
switch with an SC type fiber connector(s), use of an LC-SC 50 Micron Fiber Converter Cable (#0371) or an LC-SC 62.5
Micron Fiber Converter Cable (#0372) is required.
For additional information about supported server attachment information for IBM devices, visit:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/product/products_pseries.html
Contact your IBM representative or Business Partner for additional information about any third-party attachment.
Minimum operating system level: Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 4 or later, SUSE Linux Enterprise
Server 9 for POWER or later, or AIX V5.2 or later.
303
#5760

The #5760 PCI-X Fibre Channel Disk Controller provides a 4 Gbps Single Port Fibre Channel PCI-X 2.0 Adapter that
attaches external DASD devices. The #5760 is a 64-bit address/data, short form factor PCI-X adapter with an LC type
external fiber connector that provides single initiator capability over an optical fiber link or loop. With the use of appropriate
optical fiber cabling, this adapter provides the capability for a network of high-speed local and remote located storage.
The #5760 auto-negotiates for the highest data rate between adapter and an attaching device at 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps or 4 Gbps
of which the device or switch is capable. Distances of up to 500m running at 1 Gbps data rate and up to 300m running at
2 Gbps data rate and 4 Gbps data rate up to 150m are supported between the adapter and an attaching device or switch.
When used with IBM supported Fibre Channel storage switches supporting long-wave optics, distances of up to 10km are
capable running at either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps or 4 Gbps data rates.
switch with an SC type fiber connector, use of a #0371 LC-SC Adapter Kit (50 m) or a #0372 LC-SC Adapter Kit (62.5 m)
is required.
The #5760 requires a dedicated PCI IOP.
Refer to the IBM storage subsystem Web page for additional supported server attachment information for IBM devices.
http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/product/products_iseries.html
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models: Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890, as well as 9411-100. This controller
#5761

The #5761 PCI-X Fibre Channel Tape Controller provides a 4 Gbps Single Port Fibre Channel PCI-X 2.0 adapter that
attaches external tape devices. The #5761 is a 64-bit address/data, short form factor PCI-X adapter with an LC type
external fiber connector that provides single initiator capability over an optical fiber link or loop. With the use of appropriate
optical fiber cabling, the #5761 adapter provides the capability for a network of high-speed local and remote located
storage.
The #5761 auto-negotiates for the highest data rate between adapter and an attaching device at 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps or 4 Gbps
of which the device or switch is capable. Distances of up to 500m running at 1 Gbps data rate and up to 300m running at
2 Gbps data rate and 4 Gbps data rate up to 150m are supported between the adapter and an attaching device or switch.
When used with IBM supported Fibre Channel storage switches supporting long-wave optics, distances of up to 10km are
capable running at either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps or 4 Gbps data rates.
switch with an SC type fiber connector, use of a #0371 LC-SC Adapter Kit (50um) or a #0372 LC-SC Adapter Kit (62.5um)
is required.
Two #5761 adapters can be under the same IOP.
The #5758 and #5761 are physically the same adapter. A #5761 indicates an IOP is used.
Refer to 8.1, External tape for System i family of models on page 360, for a complete listing of compatible tape devices.
Refer to the IBM storage subsystem Web page for additional supported server attachment information for IBM devices:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/product/products_iseries.html
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models: Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890, as well as 9411-100. This controller
#5766
#5766 PCI-X Tape Controller

The #5766 PCI-X Tape Controller provides a PCI-X tape controller with two U320 SCSI buses for attachment of external
removable media devices, either tape or optical. The two external ports have an LVD interface and VHDCI connectors and
are driven at the U320 SCSI bus date rate of 320 MBs. A #1850 VHDCI to P Converter Cable is available to connect to
external devices with type P connectors.
The #0647, #5736, #5766 and #5775 are physically the same adapter card. A #5766 indicates an IOP is being used.
Supported on Models 270, 800, 810, 825, 870, 890, 820, 830, and 840.
304
#5775

The #5775 PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller without IOP provides a PCI-X Disk/Tape SCSI Controller with zero write cache and
without RAID support. Disk mirroring is supported through i5/OS. A maximum of six disk drives is supported on the #5775.
Removable media devices (tape, optical libraries, DVD-ROM, or DVD-RAM) are also supported on the #5775.
The #5775 has two U320 buses each with a bus data rate of up to 320 MBs. Each SCSI bus can be either internal (using
an internal port) or external (using an external port), but not both. There are four physical ports on the #5775, two internal
and two external.
Internal devices connect to the internal ports (one or two). External devices connect to the external ports (one or two) and
use an LVD interface and VHDCI connectors. A #1850 VHDCI to P Converter Cable is available to connect to external
devices with type P connectors.
The #0647, #5736, #5766 and #5775 are physically the same adapter card. The #5775 should be the choice over #0645
(#5702 and #5712 IOP-less equivalent) or #5705/#5715 controllers for systems running i5/OS V5R3 or later when attaching
devices that do not require an IOP - IOA combination.
Tape devices supported in an IOP-less environment include:
SLR60 30GB QIC: 5753, 7207 330, 7212 w/FC1107
SLR100 50GB QIC: 5754, 7212 w/FC1108
VXA-2 80GB: 1889, 7206 VX2, 7212 w/FC1104
VXA-320 160GB: 6279, 4688, 7206 VX3, 7212 w/FC1114
HH LTO-2 200GB: 5755, 7212 w/FC1109
DAT72 36GB: 6258, 7206 336, 7212 w/FC1108
Optical devices supported in an IOP-less environment include:
4.7GB DVD-RAM: 6330, 6333, 7210-025(6330), 7210-030(6333), 7212-102 w/FC1103(6333), 7212-102 with
FC1102(6330)
4.7GB SLIM DVD-RAM: 6331
DVD-ROM: 6336, 7212 102 w/FC1106(6336)
SLIM DVD-ROM: 6337
OPTICAL LIBRARIES: 399F, 3996 (V5R4M0 + PTFs)
The #5775 does not support 8mm, 3573, 358x, or 359x tape devices. The older technology QIC and 8mm tape devices are
not supported by this IOP-less controller. Use a #5702, #5705, #5712, #5715, #5736 or #5766 (IOP-based) controller to
attach a 3573, 358x, or 359x. The older 3995 Optical Library is supported using the older IOP-based HVD SCSI #2749
controller.
Note: #0300 is used to indicate that the external port of a #5736/#5775 will be connected to one 6-pack of disk slots on a
#5786/#5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer/Tower. A #5736/#5775 connected to a #5786/#5787 is not capable of
attaching/driving any additional internal devices.
Supported on POWER5+ and POWER6 models under IBM i (formerly i5/OS) as follows:
Model 520 POWER5+ via IBM i 5.3 and LIC 5.3.5 (processor enclosure only)
All POWER5 and POWER5+, 9411-100, and POWER6 models in processor enclosure and supported I/O enclosures
via IBM i 5.4, 6.1, or later
305
#5776

The #5776 PCI-X Disk Controller 90MB without IOP provides a PCI-X SCSI disk controller that has a 90 MB write cache.
In addition to providing RAID-5 or RAID-6 protection for disks, the #5776 is designed to work as a high performance
controller for disks protected by system mirroring or disks with no protection.
The #5776 has two U320 SCSI buses each with a bus data rate of up to 320 MBs. A maximum of 12 internal disk drives
and up to two internal removable media devices (tape, DVD-ROM, or DVD-RAM) are supported on the #5776.
The #0648, #5737, and #5776 are physically the same adapter card.
The #2780/#5580 and #2757/#5581 disk controllers with an effective 757 MB write cache provide greater disk performance
and can have an auxiliary write cache IOA to protect the write cache contents.
Minimum operating system level: i5/OS V5R4; or i5/OS V5R3 with LIC V5R3M5 on Model 520+.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models and 9411-100; or attached I/O tower/drawers #0595, #5095, #5094,
#5294, #8294, #9194, #5074, and #5079.
Note; #0301 is used to indicate that one external port of a #5737/#5776 will be connected to one or two 6-packs of disk
slots on a #5786/#5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer/Tower.
Both external ports of a #5737/#5776 can be connected to #5786s/#5787s. Both ports of a #5737/#5776 can connect to
the same #5786/#5787 or to different 5786s/#5787s. With both ports connected to #5786s/#5787s, a #5737/#5776 is not
capable of attaching/driving any additional internal disk units and/or internal tape/optical devices.
#5777
#5777 PCI-X Ultra320 SCSI Disk Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches without IOP
The #5777 PCI-X Ultra320 SCSI Disk Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches without IOP provides a
high-performance PCI-X Ultra320 SCSI disk controller with a maximum compressed write cache of 1.5GB and read cache
of 1.6 GB. The #5777 supports i5/OS mirroring protection for internal disk drives using its write cache but will not start
RAID-5 or RAID-6 unless an auxiliary write cache IOA is attached. When an auxiliary write cache IOA is attached, the pair
of cards is denoted by feature code #5582.
Concurrent battery maintenance is supported. The controller also supports internal tape units, CD-ROM units, and DVD
units. The #5738 has four internal Ultra320 SCSI buses.
configurator tools whether an IOP is required. The #5777 indicates no IOP is used.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models, and supported I/O enclosures except #5790.
306
#5778
The #5778 PCI-X EXP24 Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches without IOP provides an EXP24 disk controller with
PCI-X DDR technology, a maximum of 1.5 GB compressed write cache and a maximum 1.6 GB compressed read cache.
The controller supports RAID-5 and RAID-6 and mirroring is supported via i5/OS. Embedded auxiliary 1.5 GB write cache
The #5778 and #5739 are physically the same adapter cards but have different feature numbers to denote to IBM
configuration tools whether an IOP is required. The #5778 indicates an IOP is not used. The #5781/#5782 and
#5799/#5800 are also the same adapter cards, but the #5781/#5782 indicates the adapter is placed in a double-wide blind
swap cassette and #5799/#5800 indicates the adapter is placed in a Model 520 or 525 system unit and has a light pipe
inserted into the feature.
Supported on all POWER5 and POWER6 models, and supported I/O enclosures except #5790. Also supported under
9411-100.
Note: #0310 is used to indicate that one port of a #5739/#5778/#5781/#5782/#5799/#5800 will be connected to one or two
6-packs of disk slots of a #5786/#5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer/Tower.
All three external ports of a #5739/#5778/#5781/#5782/#5799/#5800 can be connected to #5786s/#5787s. All three ports
of a #5739/#5778/#5781/#5782/#5799/#5800 can connect to the same #5786/#5787 or to different 5786s/#5787s.
#5781
The controller supports RAID-5 and RAID-6 and mirroring is supported via i5/OS. Embedded 1.5 GB auxiliary write cache
This feature includes a double-wide blind swap cassette in which the disk controller is placed. The cassette is required to
locate the disk controller in a 570 system unit or #5790 I/O drawer.
and #5799/#5800 indicates the adapter is placed in a Model 520 or 525 system unit and has a light pipe inserted into the
feature.
Supported in System i 570 (POWER5 only) processor enclosures and #5790. Also supported under 9411-100.
#5782
This feature includes a double-wide blind swap cassette in which the disk controller is placed. The cassette is required to
locate the disk controller in a 570 system unit or #5790 I/O drawer.
configuration tools whether an IOP is required. The #5782 indicates an IOP is not used. The #5739/#5778 and
swap cassette and #5799/#5800 indicates the adapter is placed in a Model 520 or 525 system unit and has a light pipe
inserted into the feature.
Supported in System i 570 (including POWER6) processor enclosures and #5790. Also supported under 9411-100.
307
#5799
This feature includes an attached light pipe for viewing system status LEDs and can only be placed in the Model 520 or
525 system unit enclosure.
and #5799/#5800 indicates the adapter has a light pipe inserted into the feature.
Supported on all Models 520 and 525.
#5800
This feature includes an attached light pipe for viewing system status LEDs and can only be placed in the Model 520 or
525 system unit enclosure.
configuration tools whether an IOP is required. The #5800 indicates an IOP not is used. The #5739/#5778 and
swap cassette and #5799/#5800 indicates the adapter has a light pipe inserted into the feature.
Supported on all Models 520 and 525.
4.13 Summary: System i direct attach disks, disk controller

features, CCINs
The following tables are provided for reference purposes. They summarize key disk device
(arm) and disk controller identification numbers, RAID-level support, and performance-related
information. The following table summarizes the supported disk devices.
308
CCIN
codes
Approx.
size (GB)
Rev per
minute
(RPM)
Seek time (ms)
Read
Write
Latency
(ms)
Maximum drive interface speed (MBps) when mounted in

a given enclosure
5074/
5079
5094/
5294
5786/
5787
570
(POWER6)
processor
enclosure
6718
18
10 K
4.9
5.9
80
80
Not
supported
Not supported
6719
35
10 K
4.7
5.3
80
160
Not
supported
Not supported
4326
35
15 K
3.6
4.0
Not
supported
160
320
Not supported
4327
70
15 K
3.6
4.0
Not
supported
160
320
Not supported
4328
140
15 K
3.6
4.0
Not
supported
160
320
Not supported
433B
69.7
15 K
3.5
4.0
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
433C
139.5
15 K
3.5
4.0
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
433D
283.7
15 K
3.5
4.0
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Note: The actual drive interface speed (MBps) is the minimum value of the maximum supported speeds of the drive, the enclosure and
the disk controller (IOA).
The following table summarizes the supported disk controllers (IOAs).

CCIN
Orderable
Feature Codes
Cache size
non-compressed/
up to compressed
Min./max.
number of disks
in a RAID set a
Max. disk
interface speed
supported
(MBps)
Suggested ops
per second
guideline
10K/15K RPM b
5702
5705, 5712,
5715
Not applicable
Not applicable
160
46/69
5703
5703
40 MB
3/18
320
75/115
2757
2757, 5581,
5591c
235 MB write/up to
757 MB
390 MB write/up to
1.5 GB aux write cache
as #5591
3/18
160
84/127
235 MB write/up to
757 MB
390 MB write/up to
as #5590
256 MB read/up to 1 GB
3/18
160
89/134
3/8
NA
75/115
2780
2780, 5580,
5590c
5709 with built-in

IOA write cache
5709, 5725,
9509
40 MB
(16 MB on originally shipped
controllers)
309
CCIN
Orderable
Feature Codes
Cache size
non-compressed/
up to compressed
Min./max.
number of disks
in a RAID set a
Max. disk
interface speed
supported
(MBps)
Suggested ops
per second
guideline
10K/15K RPM b
573D with built-in

IOA write cache
5727 (dual
mode), 5728
(dual mode),
9510
40 MB
3/8
NA
75/115
571A
5736 (IOP),
5775 (no IOP),
0647
NA
NA
320
50/76
571B
5737 (IOP),
5776 (no IOP),
0648
90 MB
3/18 for RAID-5

4/18 for RAID-6
320
83/127
571E, 574F (aux

write cache)
5738 (IOP),
5777 (no IOP),
5582 (IOP),
5583 (no IOP)
390 MB write/up to 1.5

GB
390 MB write/up to 1.5
GB aux write cache as
#5582, #5583
415 MB read/up to 1.6
GB
3/18 for RAID-5

4/18 for RAID-6
320
108/163
390 MB write/up to
1.5 GB
390 MB write/up to
as #5581, #5582
415 MB read/up to
1.6 GB
3/18 for RAID-5

4/18 for RAID-6
320
110/165
571F, 575B
(auxiliary write
cache)
Support
attachment of the
EXP24 Disk
Enclosure
5739 (IOP),
5778 (no IOP),
5781 (570 IOP),
5782 (570 no
IOP), 5799 (520
IOP), 5800 (520
no IOP)
a. Not all disk enclosures support the maximum disks in a RAID set.
b. The suggested input and output operations per second values are shown here for each controller with all disk drives up to 18
(usually 15 maximum) attached or lower per the maximum supported by the disk controller and all disks running at either 10K
or 15K Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The guideline values are taken from the IBM Systems Workload Estimator for System i,
Disk Attachment Types help text information that is available from the System i user options.
The values are based upon assumptions of an average arm percent busy value of 40%, specific ratio of read and write
percentages using RAID-5, and read or write cache hit percentages. The attached disk controller can also have a maximum
good performance operations per second guideline value that is less when larger-than-assumed blocks of data are
exchanged. Alternatively you might achieve excellent performance when the measured metric indicates an above guideline
value. An example of this is when there is a high percentage of write cache hits. Some sizing experts advocate using a lower
percentage of average disk arm busy, such as 25% or even 15%. Therefore there is a conservative-to-aggressive range of disk
operations per second values that depend upon your workload environment. Guidelines are good starting places for any sizing
effort. Use real-world experience if statistics are available. For detailed information about using the Workload Estimator for
System i, go to: http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/support/estimator
c. Attaching the larger auxiliary write cache controller to the #2757 (#5991) or to the #2780 (#5590) does not improve write
performance compared to attaching the smaller #2757 auxiliary write cache (#5581) or compared to the smaller #2780 auxiliary
write cache (#5580). You attach the #5591 or #5591 if you are considering replacing the #2757 or #2780 later with a #5738 or
#5777 disk controller.
Important: Place the advanced technology disk controllers #5582, #5583, #5738, #5739,
#5746, #5777, #5778, #5781, #5782, #5799, and #5800 in a recommended card location
within a supporting system unit, processor enclosure, or I/O tower. See PCI and PCI-X
Placement Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 (Fourth edition),
REDP-4011, for details.
310
4.13.1 System i POWER6 model 570 I/O enhancements

In this section, we summarize the new I/O loop attachment capabilities that are introduced
with the POWER6 technology.
New I/O loop 12X I/O architecture support

The System i POWER6 model 570 can attach I/O in multiple ways, allowing large, flexible
growth options. A new option available on the System i POWER6 model 570 system is a 12X
loop and an associated 12X I/O enclosure. This is also called a 12X channel.
12X is a channel-based serial exchange I/O architecture that does not depend on the type of
computers or connecting devices. It is designed to satisfy rapid interconnect in a large system
environment. This architecture is used to connect computers to storages, network devices,
and so on. 12X consist of 12 connections (wires), and the bandwidth of each connection is
2.5 Gbps. Therefore the bandwidth of 12X is 30 Gbps. 12X supports a full-duplex
communication.
Many HSL loop and HSL I/O enclosures that were previously supported on POWER5
systems are supported on the System i POWER6 model 570.
Each System i POWER6 model 570 processor enclosure can attach up to two GX adapters.
An HSL-2 GX adapter #1800 allows a loop to attach up to six HSL I/O enclosures. A 12X
Channel CEC GX Adapter #1802 allows a loop to attach up to four 12X I/O enclosures. Each
System i POWER6 model 570 processor enclosure can have up to one of the following
adapters:
Two HSL-2 GX adapters
Two 12X GX adapters
One HSL-2 GX adapter and one 12X GX adapter
HSL I/O enclosures must be attached to an HSL loop. 12X I/O enclosures must be attached
to a 12X loop. HSL and 12X enclosures cannot be mixed on the same loop. HSL and 12X
cables are not compatible.
12X I/O drawers cannot be switched between two POWER6 570 systems.
The System i POWER6 model 570 supports a new #5796 PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer,
which contains six full-length PCI-X DDR high-speed slots. Two #5796 features require only
4U or 4 EIA of 19-inch rack space. Each #5796 takes half the 19-inch rack width. Up to two
#5796 features can be placed in a #7314 Dual 5796 Unit Enclosure each can be cabled to
different 12X loops. The #5796 has a 12X Channel adapter with two ports.
The key characteristics of the #5796 include:
Six high-speed, PCI-X DDR slots
Dual mode or IOP-less IOAs only (no IOP support)
The #5796 is similar to the HSL #5790. The key differences include:
The #5796 can support higher I/O workload levels.
The #5790 has six PCI-X slots that can support IOPs.
The #5786 EXP24 Disk Drawer, introduced in February 2007, is supported in both an HSL I/O
enclosure and a 12X I/O enclosure. Note that the #5796 is supported on IBM System i
Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890 and 520, 550, 570, 595 as well as POWER6 570.
Each #5796 takes one of four possible positions per 12X loop. The #5796 attaches to the 12X
loop using one of two #5796 12X adapters, one for shorter distances or one for longer
311
distances. The short run (SR) adapter #6446/9533 can be used with 12X loops on which all
units are contained in the same rack. The long run (LR) adapter #6457/8532 can be used for
units spread across multiple racks. Short run and long run adapters can be mixed on the
same loop.
In the following table, Yes indicates that the 12X cable identified in that column can be used to
connect the configuration identified in the first column. In this table, No means it cannot be
used in the configuration.
Configuration
0.6M (#1829)a
1.5M (#1830)
3.0M (#1840)b
8.0M (#1834)c
#5796 to #5796
with Short Run
adapter (#6446) in
both drawers
Yes
Yes
No
No
#5796 with Short

Run adapter
(#6446) to #5796
with Long Run
adapter (#6457)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
#5796 to #5796
with Long Run
adapter (#6457)in
both drawers
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
#5796 with Short

Run adapter
(#6446) to 12X
Channel CEC
adapter (#1802)
No
Yes
Yes
No
#5796 with Long

Run adapter
(#6457) to 12X
Channel CEC
adapter (#1802)
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
a. The 0.6M 12X cable (#1829) cannot be used to connect to a processor enclosure because of
its short length. It is intended for use between two #5796s mounted side by side in the same
#7314 enclosure or to be used to connect between two #5796s located one beneath the other
in a rack.
b. It is possible in some limited configurations to use the 3.0 M 12X cable (#1840) to locate #5796
drawers in adjacent racks. The cable length requires careful management of each drawer
location within the rack. The best choice for connecting a #5796 drawer in an adjacent rack is
the 8.0 M 12X cable (#1834).
c. The 12X cable (#1834) is intended for use when connecting between two modules that are
located in adjacent racks. This cable cannot be connected to the 12X Short Run adapter
(#6446).
312
The following figure shows the front view of the #5796 PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer. Note
that #5796 does not have disk slots.
Figure 4-1 Front view of #5796 PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer
The following figure shows the back view of the #5796 PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer.
P1-C7-T1 and P1-C7-T2 in the figure are 12X ports. The #5796 supports only IOAs that can
run without an IOP. Therefore it does not support IOAs that requires an IOP.
The #5796 includes redundant concurrently maintainable power and cooling. The blind swap
PCI mechanism allows for PCI card servicing without removing the I/O expansion drawer. All
of the #5796 six I/O slots are PCI-X 2.0 (64-bit, 266MHz) slots.
For more information about PCI placement rules, see PCI and PCI-X Placement Rules for
IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 (Fourth edition), REDP-4011.
313
The System i POWER6 model 570 supports a number of HSL I/O enclosures providing PCI-X
slots and potentially disk slots. These enclosures have been previously announced on
POWER5 systems. The PCI slots provided are PCI-X slots, which support IOPs, not PCI-X
DDR slots. These enclosures are:
#0595/5095 (7 PCI-X slots and 12 SCSI disk slots)

#5094/5294 (14 PCI-X slots and 15-45 SCSI disk slots)
#5096/5296 (14 PCI-X slots and 0 disk slots)
#0588/5088 (14 PCI-X slots and 0 disk slots)
#5790 (6 PCI-X slots and 0 disk slots)
All of these HSL I/O enclosures are attached to the System i POWER6 model 570 via HSL-2
physical ports and run over an HSL-2 interface. I/O units that were attached to earlier systems
using the HSL-1interface (#9877, #9886, #9887, #2886, #2887) must be upgraded before
being attached to the System i POWER6 model 570. This includes the #0588/5088, which
previously had supported the HSL-2 interface only with an RPQ on POWER5 and POWER5+
systems. You can order the HSL-2 interface as #6417 (MES) or #9517 (from factory with new
I/O tower/drawer).
The #5786/5787 Disk Enclosure is supported. This I/O enclosure holds up to 24 internal 15k
rpm SCSI disk drives, which are run by a disk controller in a PCI slot located in the System i
POWER6 model 570 processor, 12X, or HSL enclosure.
4.13.2 System i POWER6 model 570 and V5R4 with License Internal Code
V5R4M5 storage enhancements
Serial attached SCSI support
The System i POWER6 model 570 processor enclosure/system unit includes an IBM SAS
controller, which supports up to six SAS disk drives. SAS architecture defines a serial device
interconnection and transportation protocol that defines the rules for information exchange
between devices. SAS is an evolution of the parallel SCSI device interface into a serial
point-to-point interface.
SAS physical links (phys) are a set of four wires used as two differential signal pairs. One
differential signal transmits in one direction while the other differential signal transmits in the
opposite direction. Data can be transmitted in both directions simultaneously.
Phys are contained in ports. A port contains one or more phys. A port is a wide port if there is
more than one phy in the port. A port is a narrow port if there is only one phy in the port. A port
is identified by a unique SAS worldwide name (also called SAS address). A SAS controller
contains one or more SAS ports.
A path is a logical point-to-point link between a SAS initiator port in the controller and a SAS
target port in the I/O device (that is, a disk). A connection is a temporary association between
a controller and an I/O device through a path. A connection enables communication to a
device. The controller can communicate to the I/O device over this connection using either
the SCSI command set or the Advanced Technology Attachment (ATA)/ Advanced
Technology Attachment Packet Interface (ATAPI) command set depending on the device
type.
An expander facilitates connections between a controller port and multiple I/O device ports.
An expander routes connections between the expander ports. There can exist only a single
connection through an expander at any given time. Using expanders creates more nodes in
the path from the controller to the I/O device. If an I/O device supports multiple ports, it is
possible for more than one path to the device when there are expander devices on the path.
314
SAS fabric refers to the summation of all paths between all controller ports and all I/O device
ports in the SAS subsystem.
The benefits of IBM SAS controllers include:
A robust SAS expandable architecture that incorporates fibre channel like functionality
(that is, dual path)
An improved signal quality because of a point-to-point connection between device and
adapter, and or expander
Improved availability and redundancy, with dual paths to each drive
Reduced potential customer problems with point-to-point:
There is no contention when accessing a drive.
They minimize command time-outs.
Performance growth capability
An improved disk/adapter ratio, providing more addressability: parallel SCSI up to 36 and
SAS up to 60
Utilization of SCSI commands, providing:
Minimal impacts to operating systems
Compatibility for high-speed software (applications)
Quick detection of failing devices
The IBM SAS controllers are optimized for SAS disk configuration that use dual paths through
dual expanders for redundancy and reliability. They offer the following features:
A PCI-X 266 MHz system interface or PCI Express system interface
A physical link speed of 3 Gb per second supporting transfer rates of 300 MBps
Support of SAS devices and non-disk Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA)
devices
Manage path redundancy and path switching for multiported SAS devices
As stated previously, the System i POWER6 model 570 processor enclosure has six disk
slots (driven by the embedded SAS disk controller). Up to six SAS 15k rpm SAS disk drives
are supported in a System i POWER6 model 570 processor enclosure. They are available for
i5/OS in the following three capabilities:
69.7 GB (#3676)
139.5 GB (#3677)
283.7 GB (#3678)
The following options are available for Linux or AIX partitions that own their own disk drives:
73.4 GB (#3646)
146.8 GB (#3647)
300 GB (#3648)
Important: Use care when proposing the SAS disk drives in the System i POWER6 model
570. You must be confident that you clearly understand the disk performance implications.
The embedded System i POWER6 model 570 SAS disk controller that supports these
drives has zero write cache. Where disk and disk controller performance is a
consideration, use a SCSI disk with a SCSI disk controller with write cache.
315
The System i POWER6 model 570 processor enclosure supports only the new SAS DASD
hard disks internally. The older SCSI disk drives can be attached to the System i POWER6
model 570 but must be located in a remote I/O drawer.
SAS and SCSI drives can mirror each other, given similar capacities. The smaller capacity is
used by both drives, for example 69.7 GB to 70.56 GB.
SATA devices support

Since disk controllers of System i POWER6 model 570 processor enclosure are SAS disk
controllers and Integrated Drive Electronics devices cannot be attached directly to these
controllers, the conversion mechanism between the SATA and Integrated Drive Electronics
devices is supported within the System i POWER6 model 570 processor enclosure.
SATA is the interface specification that offers increased data rate performance over Parallel
Advanced Technology Attachment (PATA). Developed by a group of leading technology
vendors, SATA was designed to overcome the performance barriers of PATA technologies,
while maintaining the benefits and cost-efficiency of PATA technology.
New features and benefits introduced with SATA include:
Lower voltage
SATA operates at 250 millivolts, and PATA is based on 5-volt signaling. This low voltage is
compatible with upcoming circuitry, and the resulting low power consumption, meaning
lower cooling needs, makes SATA attractive for multi-drive RAID arrays.
Data transfer rates
Parallel ATA is limited to data transfer rates of 133 MBps; Serial ATA has a data transfer
rate of 150 MBps initially. This might look like a disappointing improvement and is still less
than SCSI and Fibre Channel, but as mentioned earlier, the SATA road map calls for 300,
and then 600 MBps data transfer capability.
Point-to-point connectivity
The master/slave shared connectivity approach is replaced with a point-to-point
connection scheme supporting only one device per cable. This allows each drive to
communicate directly with the system at anytime. Because there is no sharing on the bus,
performance scales linearly: adding a disk on a SATA system gives you the additional
maximum throughput of the added disk.
Serial transmission
Serial transmission is used in many recent technologies including Gigabit Ethernet, USB
2.0, IEEE 1394, and Fibre Channel. In fact, serial is used for most of the fastest data
transfer technology and will enable SATA to rival SCSI and Fibre Channel in speed.
Cyclic redundancy checking (CRC)
CRC provides improved data protection and integrity over PATA and confers to SATA
another feature already found in SCSI.
Improved performance with hot-swappable drives
SATA features greater performance and hot-swappable drives. This enables you to swap
out a drive without taking the system offline or rebooting. This is an essential characteristic
of SATA that makes it viable for enterprise solutions were system down time is usually not
an option.
Improved cabling and connector
A simplified cabling scheme offers a narrow serial cable with compact connectors for
improved connectivity and ventilation, facilitating improved product design and hardware
316
assembly. Practically, the connector size is reduced from 40 pins with PATA to 7 pins with
SATA. PATA uses 16 separate wires to send 16-bits of data and thus must use a bulky flat
cable, which is the cause of electromagnetic interference that compromises data integrity.
Backward compatibility with older ATA storage devices
SATA is designed to be backward compatible with previous PATA devices. To system
software, SATA is not different from PATA.
Compatibility with SAS connector
SATA is designed to be compatible with SAS. A SATA devices can connect to a SAS
connector.
System i POWER6 model 570 supports the #5756 DVD-ROM Drive IDE Slimline and the
#5757 DVD-RAM Drive IDE Slimline. This drive can be attached to the System i POWER6
model 570 processor enclosure. In the System i POWER6 model 570 processor enclosure,
these drives are attached to the embedded SAS Disk Controller, which preforms the
conversion mechanism.
The following figure shows a logical representation of the connection between an embedded
SAS Disk Controller and an IDE DVD Drive via a SATA-IDE converter.
System i POWER6 model 570 enhanced disk storage configuration rules

System i POWER6 model 570 implements enhanced disk storage configuration rules. IBM
configuration tools and IBM technical support personnel do not support configurations unless
they can protect against possible single-disk-drive failure and protect disk-controller-write
cache.
Internal and integrated disk drives must be protected by either mirroring or using RAID-5 or
RAID-6 arrays. Disk controllers with write cache must protect the cache by either mirroring
the disk controller (IOA-level mirroring or higher) or using an auxiliary write cache IOA. This is
true for all partitions of all types running on the System i platform, including i5/OS, AIX, and
Linux.
External drives attached via Fibre Channel adapters are supported for both database and
integrated file system. The IBM System Storage DS6000, DS8000 and Enterprise Storage
Server (ESS) products are supported. External drives can also be attached via Ethernet LAN
adapters and used by the i5/OS integrated file system, but not the i5/OS database. The same
317
System i POWER6 model 570 protection rules apply here as for internal and integrated disk
storage. Drives must be protected against a single drive failure, and write cache must be
protected.
As an additional disk storage enhancement, load source drives can now be placed outside of
the System i POWER6 model 570 processor enclosure. In addition to the SAN load source
option, you can specify the i5/OS load source drives to be placed in an attached I/O tower or
drawer. The choices include #0595/5095, #5094/5294, or #5786/5787.
4.13.3 RAID hot spare

You can order one or more hot spare disk devices to be available for automated use
(inclusion) in a defined RAID-5 or RAID-6 disk array set. This hot spare capability requires
i5/OS V5R4 with V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 running on the following models:
515, 520, 525, 550, 570, POWER6 570, and 595
800, 810, 825, 870, 890
Hot spare is supported on the following disk controllers with write cache:
1.5 GB controllers: #5739, #5778, #5799, #5800, #5781, or #5782 and #5582, #5583,
#5738, or #5777
757 MB controllers: #2757, #5581, or #5591 and #2780, #5580, or #5590
90 MB controllers: #5737 or #5776
40 MB controllers: #5703 or #2782
Embedded disk controllers of the Models 515, 520, 525, 550, and 570, having a 16 MB
through 40 MB write cache card: #5709, #5726, #9509, #5727, #5728, or #9510
You configure the RAID array with one or more hot spare disks using the normal i5/OS
interfaces to set up RAID-5 or RAID-6 protection as discussed later in this section.
Prior to hot spare, if a disk fails in a RAID-5 array, the array is not protected against a second
disk failure until the failed disk is physically replaced and the data contents are rebuilt on the
replacement disk. Similarly, if two disk drives fail on a RAID-6 array, the array is not protected
against a third disk failure in the array.
With RAID hot spare, in the event of a disk drive failure, a spare disk is dynamically assigned
to take over the failed disks role, and the rebuilding operation is started. The time between
problem occurrence and the time in which protection is re-established is reduced. The time
reduction is the time it takes for the operator to recognize the error and for someone to
respond and physically replace the failed drive.
Using the hot spare disk drive, disk drive failure is now handled in parallel to the automatic
system response. With the systems existing hot plug or concurrent maintenance capability,
the failed drive can be replaced without taking the system down. The replacement drive then
takes over the role of standing by as the hot spare.
The RAID hot spare disk drive is plugged into the system and does not contain any data until
it takes over for a failed disk drive. Therefore, it requires a disk slot. The hot spare disk drive
is associated with a specific controller. Assuming all drives are the same capacity, one hot
spare disk drive can stand by, protecting all the arrays managed by the disk controller.
Depending on the level of protection that is desired, you can have more than one hot spare
disk drive per disk controller. This protects against the combined sequential failures of more
than two (RAID-5) or three (RAID-6) disk failures. It does not protect against non-sequential
318
failures where multiple drives fail at one time or if another failure occurs when the hot spare
drive rebuilding was not yet completed in a RAID-5 array.
When ordering a new system from IBM, you can request that RAID hot spare be implemented
by IBM manufacturing by specifying feature code #0347. This feature is assumed by IBM to
be system-wide, unless you are defining protection by partition. One hot spare disk drive is
assigned per disk controller except in the EXP24 Disk Enclosure. The EXP24 1.5 GB Disk
Controller (#5739, #5778, #5799, #5800, #5781, # or 5782 or CCIN 571F) has one hot spare
disk if there are 18 or fewer drives in the EXP24 or two hot spare disk drives if there are 19-24
drives.
#0347: The #0347 cannot be ordered for the Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 because
IBM no longer manufactures these models as new systems. The hot spare function is
supported on these models with i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5.
You can control the use of hot spare drives with more granularity than what the #0347 hot
spare specify indicates. You can assign as many hot spare drives as desired to each specific
IOA or controller. This can be useful if you have separate auxiliary storage pools (ASPs) for
which you desire different levels of protection.
It is important to do proper planning for use of a hot spare disk. Here is an overview of how to
set up hot spare disk units on your system:
To start device parity protection with hot spare protection using IBM Systems Director
Navigator for i5/OS:
a. From the IBM Systems Director Navigator for i5/OS window, select Configuration and
Service.
b. Select Show All Configuration and Service Tasks.
c. Select Start Parity.
d. In the Hot Spare Protection list, select Yes.
To start device parity protection with hot spare protection using System i Navigator:
a. In System i Navigator, expand My Connections your System i Configuration
and Service Hardware Disk Units.
b. Right-click Parity Sets and select Start Parity.
c. In the Hot Spare Protection list, select Yes.
To start device parity protection with hot spare protection using a command line:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Start System Service Tools (STRSST), and specify the user name and password.
On the System Service Tools (SST) display, select Work with disk units.
On the Work with Disk Units display, select Work with disk configuration.
On the Work with Disk Configuration display, select Work with device parity
protection.
e. On the Work with Device Parity Protection display, select Start device parity
protection - RAID 5 with Hot Spare Protection or Start device parity protection RAID 6 with Hot Spare Protection depending on the level of parity protection that is
desired.
For more information about the specification of this feature, see the #0347 in 4.10, Disk
units on page 264.
319
4.13.4 Clustering considerations among Models 8xx and 5xx

In this section, we summarize the clustering and switching of I/O devices among IBM
System i model configurations:
The 8xx and 5xx systems can be clustered. However, switching I/O towers between 8xx
and POWER6 570 systems is not supported.
The 5xx systems (POWER5 and POWER6) can be clustered, and HSL-attached I/O units
can be switched. This requires all I/O enclosures to have the faster HSL-2 adapters as
indicated by #6417 and #9517.
The HSL-attached I/O drawers of a Models 800, 810, 820, 830, 840, 870, or 890 are not
switchable with I/O drawers of a POWER6 570.
The #5094/#5294, #0595/#5095, and #0588/#5088 on 8xx models run at a slower
HSL-1 speed even though the physical copper ports or cables are HSL-2 capable, as
indicated by the #9887 or #2887.
When HSL I/O is attached to a Model 520, 525, 550, 570, or 595, the model uses the
faster HSL-2 speed interface, as indicated by the #6417 or the #9517.
POWER5/POWER5+ systems can run a limited number of I/O towers or drawers at
HSL-1 speed and the rest at HSL-2 speed. However, all POWER6 570 models run all
of these I/O towers or drawers at HSL-2 speed.
Therefore, you cannot use switchable I/O towers because there is no common
denominator I/O.
The POWER6 570 does not support the long distance (but slow) optical HSL connections.
The higher speed copper HSL technology is used.
At this time, 12X I/O drawers cannot be switched between two POWER6 570 systems.
DataMirror iCluster and high availability solutions: During 2007, IBM completed the
acquisition of DataMirror and announced the IBM DataMirror iCluster product as part of the
System i high availability solution portfolio.
IBM will offer iCluster on all System i products as an option for high availability and disaster
recovery deployment, in addition to other current System i disk-replication solutions,
including cross-site mirroring, Metro Mirror, and Global Mirror. This entire enhanced set of
offerings increases System i competitiveness by enabling IBM to provide a complete
resiliency solution for clients who want an end-to-end high availability solution from a single
vendor.
Other high availability solutions in the System i marketplace include the well-established
product portfolio of Vision Solutions, one of most important IBM Premier Business
Partners. IBM continues work in close cooperation with Vision Solutions, as well as other
solutions providers such as Maximum Availability and QSL Group.
All of this cooperation and set of high availability solutions can be used with System i
Capacity BackUp Edition offerings. Customers must evaluate each solution offering and
determine which is best for their working environment.
320
Chapter 5.
EXP24 Disk Enclosures

In this chapter, we provide information about the #5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk
Drawer and the #5787 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Tower. We include diagrams that
show the disk slots and addressing and provide recommendations forSmall Computer
System Interface (SCSI) repeater placement and cabling.
321
5.1 #5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Drawer overview

The #5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Drawer provides disk slots for up to 24 disk units
in a 19-inch, 4 EIA high rack drawer. The #5787 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Tower
Provides disk slots for up to 24 disk units in a stand-alone disk tower. They both provide
redundant power, redundant cooling, and Ultra 320 SCSI connections for up to 24 Ultra 320
SCSI disk units. These disk units can be packaged in up to four independent groups of six
disk units. Each group of six disk units is referred to as a 6-pack.
Each 6-pack with one or more disks is enabled by either a #5741 Expansion 24 6 Disk Slot
Enabler or a #5742 Expansion 24 6/12 Disk Slot Enabler. Each six pack must be driven by a
port on a supporting SCSI disk controller located outside the #5786/#5787.
Disk slot enable and SCSI repeater: Each disk slot enabler is also referred to as a SCSI
repeater in IBM documentation. User documentation uses the terms repeater and enabler
interchangeably. One repeater is required for each 6-pack regardless of the type of
repeater.
The port on the disk controller is connected to either a #5741 or a #5742 via a SCSI cable.
One to four disk slot enablers (repeaters) are required, depending on the number of 6-packs
that are populated with disk units.
The #5741 Expansion 24 6 Disk Slot Enabler is termed a single SCSI repeater and the #5742
Expansion 24 6/12 Disk Slot Enabler is termed a dual SCSI repeater. The #5742 can support
a single 6-pack or up to two 6-packs (up to 12 disks), when functioning as a dual repeater.
When functioning as a dual repeater, a #5742 must be connected to the supported disk
controller port. It then can be daisy-chain connected, via a SCSI cable, to either another
#5741 or #5742 (the second 6-pack). This second repeater must not be connected to any
other repeater or disk controller port.
Notes:
The #5786 and #5787 do not use HSL cables and do not have SPCN connections.
When the EXP is connected to a single input/output adapter (IOA) through its enabler,
then up to 36 DASD can be attached to each IOA. Minimum drives in a RAID-5 set is 4
and the maximum is 18. Therefore a minimum of two RAID sets with 36 drives are
attached to the IOA. We recommend that you configure up to 24 disks within a single
EXP24 from a best performance viewpoint.
The disk controller features supporting attachment of either a #5786 TotalStorage Expansion
24 Disk Drawer or a #5787 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Tower include the #5736, #5737,
#5739, #5775, #5776, #5778, #5781, #5782, #5799, or #5800.
Specific disk unit feature numbers are used to identify disk units that will be placed in the
#5786/#5787. These disk units are physically the same disk units as used in other System i
system units and I/O towers or drawers. Using separate feature codes allows IBM
configuration tools to better understand their placement. Feature code numbers of
#5786/#5787 disk units include the #1266, #1267, #1268, #1293, #1294, #1295, #1296,
#1297, #1298, and #1299.
322
#5786/#5787 EXP24 disk configuration: The #5786/#5787 EXP24 disk configurations

can support a larger number of disk drives with fewer disk controllers (IOAs) and therefore
use fewer PCI slots than was previously required with older disk controllers. From an
attachment standpoint, a single disk controller (IOA) and a single EXP24 allow up to 24
disks to be physically attached.
When one and a half EXP24 enclosures are attached to a single controller (three SCSI
buses), up to 36 disks can be attached. However for performance reasons, 24 disks per
high-speed controller are usually the practical limit and are inferred as the maximum in
most EXP24-based documentation. By comparison, the previous maximum per disk
controller was 20 disk drives (in a mirroring environment, where four SCSI buses could be
used) or 15 to 18 disk drives in a RAID-5 environment with auxiliary write cache support.
Because the EXP24 enclosure is organized into four sets of up to six drives, each set of six
disks can be attached to the same or a different disk controller IOAs. This flexibility can be
of significant value when configuring small logical partitions (LPARs).
5.2 #5786 front and rear views

The following diagram shows the front view of the #5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk
Drawer.
Front
Controlled by C3
Disk Fan
Controlled by C2
Disk Fan
Disk Fan
323
The following diagram shows the back view of the #5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk
Drawer. In the back view, C2, C3, C4 and C5 are slots for the #5741/#5742 SCSI repeaters.
Back
C2
C3
Controlled by C4
Controlled by C5
C5
C4
Power Supply
Power Supply
C2 controls
C3 controls
Drives P1-D7-D12
Drives P1-D1-D6
C4 controls
C5 controls
Drives P2-D1-D6
Drives P2-D7-D12
Note: On tower models (#5787), the locations C3 and C5 are located on the top, and C2
and C4 are located on the bottom. This makes C3 the top left and C5 the top right, and it
makes C2 the bottom left and C4 the bottom right when viewed from the rear. Follow the
location codes when placing repeater cards.
5.2.1 #5741/#5742 Disk Slot Enabler placement and cabling recommendations

A repeater (also referred to as an enabler) is required whenever there are disk drives in the
slots that are controlled by that repeater. The repeater slots may be populated in several
ways:
All #5741 single repeaters (allow up to six disks per disk controller port).
All #5742 dual repeaters (not recommended as more expensive and unnecessary).
For greatest flexibility, use two #5741 single repeaters and two #5742 dual repeaters.
The #5741/#5742 placement affects the disk device SCSI addressing and the number of
potential LPAR load source disk units.
A combination of #5741 single and #5742 dual repeaters (allows up to 12 disks per
controller port).
When using a combination of #5742 dual and #5741 single repeaters, we recommend
that you place the #5742 dual repeaters in C3 and C4. This placement keeps the disk
device SCSI addressing consistent without change but limits the available LPAR load
source disk units to two.
When connecting (daisy-chaining) repeaters, the SCSI cabling should go from the disk
controller port to a #5742 dual repeater and then to a #5741 single repeater.
The repeaters should be connected (daisy-chained) so that a pair of repeaters controls
the disk slots in either the front or rear half of the #5786/#5787 (C3 to C2 and C4 to
C5).
324
The SCSI ports on the #5741/#5742 repeaters are not labelled. The following figure shows a
representation of the repeaters as viewed from the rear. It shows only the cabling between
SCSI repeaters. A complete working configuration for controlling up to twelve disks also
requires a SCSI cable connection from a SCSI port on a disk controller to a port on the #5742
dual repeater. In this example, that port on the #5742 is labelled A.
#5742 Dual Enabler
#5741 Single Enabler
When cabling SCSI ports always connect A to B or B to A.

A to A or B to B will not function properly.
5.2.2 Load source drive considerations in #5786/#5787 for logical partitions

Each i5/OS LPAR requires a load source disk unit. The server uses the load source to start
the LPAR. Each LPAR has specific supported slot placements for its load source disk
depending on the type of system unit or expansion unit where the load source is installed. A
specific connection to a disk IOA is then required to control the load source disk unit for each
LPAR.
System Planning Tool (SPT): The information provided here does not replace the System
Planning Tool. Use this information as a resource with the SPT output. Its purpose is to
assist you in the load source placement for your i5/OS LPARs.
The load source drive requires a SCSI device address of 1, 2, 3, or 4 and must be connected
to SCSI port 0 of a disk controller. Under certain circumstances, the SCSI device addresses
in the EXP24 are A, B, C, D, E and F. Therefore, care is needed to ensure addressing is
correct when attempting to have more than two load sources contained in a single EXP24.
325
The following figure shows the SCSI device addressing and the effect of using a #5742 dual
repeater or a #5741 single repeater and the effects of cabling between repeaters.
C3 (P1-D1 to D6)
Always address A-F with dual
repeater or if single cabled to C2
C2 (P1-D7 to D12)
Always address 2-7
with single or dual repeater
C2
Controls front dasd
C3
C4
Controls rear dasd
C5
C4 (P2-D1 to D6)
Always address A-F with dual
repeater or if single cabled to C5
C5 (P2-D7 to D12)
Always address 2-7
with single or dual repeater
Figure 5-1 Card slot device addressing rules using #5741 single and #5742 dual repeaters
The SCSI addressing for DASD positions P1-D7 to P1-D12 and P2-D7 to P2-D12 does not
change. The positions are always SCSI address 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. This means that the first
three positions in the right six-pack viewed from the front (P1-D7, D8, D9), and the first three
positions in the right six-pack viewed from the rear (P2-D7, D8, D9), can always be load
source candidates.
P1-D1 to P1-D6 and P2-D1to P2-D6 device positions change to addresses A, B, C, D, E, and
F in two cases. They change whenever a #5742 dual repeater controls them or if a #5741
single repeater controlling them is cabled to a #5742 dual repeater. Addresses A, B, C, D, E
and F are in hexadecimal format. These same addresses may be displayed in decimal format
(10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15) in some i5/OS displays such as Hardware Service Manager or error
logs.
Load source rules for #5786 and #5787

The load source disk must be controlled by the SCSI bus port 0 of the load source disk
unit controller.
P1-D1, P1-D2, or P1-D3 can contain the load source disk only if slot C3 contains a #5741
single repeater card that is connected to SCSI port 0 of the disk controller.
P1-D7, P1-D8, or P1-D9 can contain the load source if the #5741 in C2 is connected to
SCSI port 0 on the disk controller or if the #5741 in C2 is cabled to the #5742 dual
repeater in C3 and the #5742 in C3 is connected to SCSI port 0 on the disk controller.
P2-D1, P2-D2, or P2-D3 can contain the load source disk only if slot C4 contains a #5741
single repeater card that is connected to SCSI port 0 of the disk controller.
P2-D7, P2-D8, or P2-D9 can contain the load source if the #5741 in C5 is connected to
SCSI port 0 on the disk controller or if the #5741 in C5 is cabled to the #5742 dual
repeater in C4 and the #5742 in C4 is connected to SCSI port 0 on the disk controller.
326
#5741 and #5742 SCSI repeater card placement recommendations

To have four load source disks available in a single #5786/#5787, the #5786/#5787 must
contain four #5741 single repeaters or #5742 dual repeaters in C2 and C5 and #5741
single repeaters in C3 and C4.
To keep SCSI addressing consistent with no changes, but limit the available load source
disks to two instead of four, then the #5786/#5787 should have a #5741 single repeater in
C2 and C5 and #5742 dual repeaters in C3 and C4.
When daisy-chaining SCSI repeaters, connect C2 to C3 and connect C5 to C4. This way,
the repeaters in C2 and C3 control the disks in the front of the #5786/#5787 and the
repeaters in C4 and C5 control the disks in the rear.
PCI-X EXP24 Controller-1.5 GB (CCIN571F/575B) SCSI port addresses

The controller consists of two physical cards that are firmly connected to each other and
requires two adjacent PCI-X slots. It provides three Ultra320 SCSI ports or buses for the
attachment of disk drives located in a #5786/#5787 TotalStorage EXP24 Disk Drawer/Tower.
THe #5739 and #5778 are physically the same adapter cards, but have different feature
numbers to denote to IBM configuration tools whether an IOP is required. The #5739
indicates that an IOP is used. The #5781/#5782 and #5799/#5800 are also the same adapter
cards. However, the #5781/#5782 indicates that the adapter is placed in a double-wide blind
swap cassette, and the #5799/#5800 indicates that the adapter is placed in a system unit and
has a light pipe inserted into the feature.
The following figure shows the SCSI port addressing on the double-wide EXP24 disk
controller.
A- Battery cover
B- SCSI port 2
C- SCSI port 0
D- SCSI port 1
The IBM Systems Hardware Information Center contains additional information about the
EXP24 using both System i (#5786 or #5787) and System p (#7031-D24 or #7031-T24) disk
enclosure feature numbers. Refer to the Hardware Information Center on the Web at:
Search the information center using the feature numbers #5786, #5787, #7031-D24, or
#7031-T24. Add the word repeaters to the search to find line drawings and instructions in
addition to the information provided in this paper.
327
328
Chapter 6.
Integrated Virtual Ethernet

In this chapter, we provide information about the Integrated Virtual Ethernet (IVE) adapter
from the viewpoint of i5/OS V5R4 with Licensed Internal Code level V5R4M5 on a System i
POWER6 model 570 system. The IVE capabilities enable easy sharing of the integrated
high-speed Ethernet adapter ports among partitions. It is an integrated resource that comes
within the processor enclosure (building block) on each Model 570 (POWER6) system and
its resources are virtualized to the operating systems of each partition.
A single IVE can be shared by all partitions in the system without requiring the Advanced
Power Virtualization (APV) feature and without being made part of a Virtual I/O Server (VIOS)
partition. Host Ethernet Adapter (HEA) is the term that is used in most system documentation
for IVE. It is also the term that the Hardware Management Console (HMC) interface uses to
set up the IVE for use by a partition. The acronyms IVE or HEA each mean exactly the same
physical hardware. In this paper, we use the term Host Ethernet Adapter or its acronym HEA
in most cases.
When ordering any System i POWER6 model 570 processor enclosure, you must specify
either a #5636 IVE adapter or a #5639 IVE adapter. Currently only the 570 (POWER6)
processor enclosure supports the IVE/HEA.
329
6.1 Overview
A #5636 IVE two-port 10/100/1000 Mbps adapter or a #5639 IVE four port 10/100/1000 Mbps
adapter must be specified for each processor enclosure (system unit) of a System i Model
570 (POWER6). Neither of these adapters uses an input/output processor (IOP) or requires a
PCI slot.
Note: The System p Model 570 (POWER6), 9117-MMA, supports the #5636, #5639, and
an additional #5637 integrated 2-port 10 Gbps SR3 (optical) adapter. The System i
platform does not yet support the #5637.
The IVE feature code is installed by manufacturing. Any time you order a 570 (POWER6)
processor enclosure, you must specify an IVE adapter. The #5636 is the default that is
automatically selected by the IBM hardware configuration tool.
Similar to other integrated ports, the feature is neither hot-swappable nor hot-pluggable
and must be serviced by a trained IBM System Service Representative.
The following HEA capabilities or characteristics are most important:
Unlike most other types of I/O devices, you can never assign the HEA itself to a logical
partition (LPAR). Instead, multiple LPARs can connect directly to the same HEA and use
its resources. This allows these LPARs to access external networks through the HEA
without having to go through an Ethernet bridge on another LPAR. To connect an LPAR to
an HEA, you must create a Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (LHEA) for the LPAR. Each
LHEA looks to the operating system as either a two- or four-port hardware LAN adapter.
The HEA enables the sharing of a single RJ-45 port across LPARs. Each partition defines
an LHEA that links to the physical port on a #5636 or #5639.
Each partition operating system thinks it has a dedicated physical port or ports.
Each partition works directly with HEA hardware structures.
Transmit and receive of data is done independently of the hypervisor.
The system hypervisor manages HEA resources.
Logical ports are mapped to physical ports using the HMC for each partition.
Up to 16 partitions can share a single HEA #5636. Therefore, there is no need to buy 16
Ethernet adapters.
Up to 32 partitions can share a single HEA #5639. Therefore, there is no need to buy 32
Ethernet adapters.
HEA-LHEA offers improved performance over a VIOS partition (supporting client AIX or
Linux partitions) where all traffic must go through that VIOS partition. i5/OS V5R4 cannot
be a client partition to a VIOS partition.
HEA-LHEA offers improved performance over Virtual LAN (VLAN).
The #5636 HEA includes two serial ports of which port 2, location P1-C10-T3 (top port), is
used by i5/OS only when a uninterruptible power supply sense cable is connected with a
feature code #1827 cable. The second serial port is not usable by i5/OS.
The #5639 HEA includes one serial port used by i5/OS only when an uninterruptible
power supply sense cable is connected with a feature code #1827 cable.
The following figure illustrates an example configuration with three LPARs, each of which
thinks it has a dedicated LAN port (defined via the HMC as LHEA port). The lines with two
dark arrows indicate the two physical ports in which the #5636 is installed and the two dark
330
arrows with two lighter colors arrows indicate the two additional ports that are available with
the four physical ports of the #5639 connected to the network.
AIX
i5/OS
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Driver
Driver
Driver
Linux
L entX
L CMNXX
H
E
H
E
H
E
ethX
HYPERVISOR
HEA / IVE adapter #5636 or #5639
Network
6.2 Physical port control

The HMC is used to configure the LHEA port and associate it with a specify HEA port. This
configuration is similar to that which corresponds to the real adapter of a shared Ethernet
adapter when using a VIOS partition. A VIOS partition is supported on the System i platform,
but only as a resource for a Linux or AIX partition, not for a V5R4 i5/OS partition.
Generally, partitions are not allowed to alter the speed/duplex parameters or bring up or
down the physical ports.
Only the HMC is allowed to manipulate the physical ports.
Partitions are not allowed to access the physical port counters. Only the HMC has access
to these counters.
Each partition can access the logical port counters for any logical port they own.
On a Manufacturing Default Configuration (MDC) machine, the partition gets one logical
port per physical port and is allowed to manipulate the physical ports. In MDC mode, the
single partition can access the physical port counters.
The Hypervisor HEA firmware at initialization brings up the physical ports if possible
without any input from HMC. They are brought up in AUTO speed/duplex mode or
1 Gbps full duplex per port when connected to a 1 Gbps network.
HEA does not support half duplex operation. Only full duplex connections can be made to
HEA. If the switch is configured for half duplex only, the link to HEA will not activate.
331
6.3 Media Access Control address

Each port of the #5636 IVE adapter or a #5639 IVE has a Media Access Control (MAC)
address (MAC address) or hardware address or adapter address:
Each logical port maps to one MAC address.
The #5636 adapter card vital product data (VPD) contains 16 globally unique IEEE MAC
addresses.
The #5639 adapter card VPD contains 32 globally unique IEEE MAC addresses.
HEA sorts received frames by MAC address to the correct logical port.
6.4 Multicast
A logical port can communicate with all other logical ports that are connected to the same
physical port on the HEA. The physical port and its associated logical ports form a logical
Ethernet network. Broadcast and multicast packets are distributed on this logical network as
though it was a physical Ethernet network.
A multicast manager exists in the system Hypervisor that duplicates broadcast or multicast
frames and sends them to all partitions that have registered to receive them.
Partitions can register to receive broadcast/multicast addresses via Hcall instructions.
Up to 16 logical ports may be connected to a physical port using this logical network.
6.5 Logical Host Ethernet Adapter

An LHEA is a representation of a physical HEA within an LPAR. An LHEA appears to the
partition operating system as if it were a physical Ethernet adapter, just as a virtual Ethernet
adapter appears as if it were a physical Ethernet adapter.
When an LHEA is created for an LPAR, the resources that the LPAR can use on the actual
physical HEA are specified:
One LHEA can exist per HEA per partition.
A partition can have multiple LHEAs, but each must be associated with a separate HEA.
Each LHEA can contain up to four logical ports: two on a #5636 IVE two port adapter or
four on a #5639 IVE four port adapter.
Refer to the following publications to help you configure an LHEA and optionally an LHEA as
a partition console:
Hardware Management Console V7 Handbook, SG24-7491
Integrated Virtual Ethernet Adapter Technical Overview and Introduction, REDP-4340

https://www-01.ibm.com/servers/resourcelink/lib03030.nsf/pagesByDocid/0E6125F89F8B8EF685
2572E6007E884D?OpenDocument&pathID=36
332
You may also search for Host Ethernet Adapter in the IBM Systems Information Center at:
We provide a compressed view of associating a partition LHEA to a physical HEA later in the
following section.
6.6 Configuring the HEA from the HMC

A physical port on an HEA is not usable by a partition unless an HEA resource is associated
with an LHEA in that partition. The information presented in this topic is based upon and is a
subset of the contents of the following documents:
Integrated Virtual Ethernet Adapter Technical Overview and Introduction, REDP-4340

Each LPAR can have one LHEA for each physical HEA on the managed system. Each LHEA
can have one or more logical ports, and each logical port can connect to a physical port on
the HEA. You can create an LHEA for an LPAR by using either of the following methods:
You can add the LHEA to a partition profile, shut down the LPAR, and reactivate the LPAR
using the partition profile with the LHEA.
You can add the LHEA to a running LPAR using dynamic logical partitioning.
When you activate an LPAR, the LHEAs in the partition profile are considered to be required
resources. If the physical HEA resources required by the LHEAs are not available, then the
LPAR cannot be activated.
However, when the LPAR is active, you can remove any LHEAs you want from the LPAR.
After you create an LHEA for an LPAR, a network device is created in the LPAR. This
network device is named entX on AIX LPARs, CMNXX on i5/OS LPARs, and ethX on Linux
LPARs, where X represents sequentially assigned numbers.
The user can then set up TCP/IP configuration similar to a physical Ethernet device to
communicate with other LPARs. A logical port can communicate with all other logical ports
that are connected to the same physical port on the HEA. The physical port and its
associated logical ports form a logical Ethernet network.
The following task is a condensed version of creating a usable LHEA using the dynamic LPAR
method via the HMC V7R3 interface:
333
1. In the left navigation pane of the HMC, expand Systems Management Servers, and
select the partition for which you want to set up the HEA-LHEA configuration.
In the right pane, click the Tasks button. In the Tasks pane, select Dynamic Logical
Partitioning Host Ethernet Add.
The following figure illustrates an example for partition called greenbee with the Add link
about to be selected.
334
2. In the Add Logical HEA Resources panel (next figure), select the HEA whose resources
you want the LPAR to use.
CCIN 181a and CCIN 181C: On a System i model, resource CCIN 181A means feature
#5636 2 port, or CCIN 181C means feature #5639 4 port.
In the following figure, we select the HEA (one per 570 (POWER6) processor enclosure)
identified as U789D.001.DQDTTPM-P1 and its physical port C10-T1, physical port ID 1.
This is the physical port that we want the LPAR greenbee to use for the LHEA that we
create.
Leave the LHEA Capability parameter as its default value of Base Minimum.
LHEA capability values: Discussion of LHEA capability values is beyond the scope of
this paper. We also do not discuss how to change the Options values from the defaults
that are shown.
Click Configure.
335
3. In the Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (LHEA) Configuration window, set the logical port to
accept packets with any virtual LAN ID (VLAN ID) or to accept only packets with specific
VLAN IDs.
If you want the logical port to accept packets with any VLAN ID, select Allow all VLAN
IDs. If you want the logical port to accept only packets with specific VLAN IDs, enter each
VLAN ID in the VLAN to add field and click Add. You can repeat this step, to allow up to 20
VLAN IDs to be accepted on the logical port.
Click OK.
4. Repeat these steps for each additional physical port whose resources you want the LPAR
to use.
5. When you are done, you return to the Hardware Management Console window. You see a
summary window from which you can make changes or indicate that you are done.
After you finish, one or more new Ethernet adapters are visible to the operating system of the
LPAR. An adapter is displayed as CMNnn to an i5/OS partition. The operating system must
now perform its normal Ethernet configuration for that LHEA resource.
336
6.7 i5/OS communication resources and line description

The following figure shows an example of a #5636 LHEA adapter whose resources are
presented to an i5/OS partition communication resource as #181A. As stated earlier, the
#5639 communication resources are presented as type 181C.
Work with Communication Resources
System:
Type options, press Enter.
5=Work with configuration descriptions
Opt
Resource
CMB05
LIN06
CMN06
CMN07
Type
181A
181A
181A
181A
xxxxxxx
7=Display resource detail
Status
Operational
Operational
Operational
Operational
Text
Comm Processor
Comm Adapter
Ethernet Port
Ethernet Port
For the #5639, you see 181C and four CMNnn Ethernet ports. The following figure illustrates
an example of an Ethernet line description for communication line (LHEA) resource CMN07.
Display Line Description
Line description . . . . . . . . . :
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
Category of line . . . . . . . . . :
HEACMN07
*BASIC
*ELAN
Resource name . . . .
Online at IPL . . . .
Vary on wait . . . . .
Network controller . .
Local adapter address
Exchange identifier .
Ethernet standard . .
Line speed . . . . . .
Current line speed . .
Duplex . . . . . . . .
Current duplex . . . .
Maximum frame size . .
Maximum controllers .
Line description . . .
Option . . . . . . . .
Category of line . . .
Error threshold level
Generate test frame .
Message queue . . . .
Current message queue
Library . . . . . .
Text . . . . . . . . .
CMN07
*YES
*NOWAIT
HEA07NET
00145E5F0EC1
05696C00
*ETHV2
*AUTO
1G
*AUTO
*FULL
8996
40
HEACMN07
*BASIC
*ELAN
*OFF
*YES
*SYSVAL
QSYSOPR
QSYS
*BLANK
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
337
338
Chapter 7.
System i towers schematics

In this chapter, we identify the system diagrams for the towers that are supported by the IBM
System i, eServer i5, and iSeries servers, as well as the power and packaging features for
those towers. IBM System i, eServer i5, and iSeries Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 do
not support System Products Division (SPD) towers and expansion units or migration towers.
When upgrading from earlier models to these models, it is necessary to plan for the loss of
towers and input/output processors (IOPs) and input/output adapters (IOAs) that are not
supported on the later systems.
The tower schematics might have a shaded card slot showing a base IOP. A base IOP might
not be included in the tower. Refer to the model feature descriptions in Chapter 4, POWER5,
POWER6, and System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890: Features and placement on
page 135, to see where a base IOP might be included or allowed.
Refer to the following publications for an explanation of remote input/output (RIO-G)
configuration rules and placement considerations:
IBM eServer iSeries Migration: A Guide to Upgrades and Migrations to POWER
Technology, SG24-7200
This book also contains configuration rules for IBM System i5 and eServer i5 models and
towers.
IBM eServer iSeries Migration: System Migration and Upgrades at V5R1 and V5R2,
SG24-6055
This book also contains configuration rules for iSeries models and towers.
DB2 UDB for OS/390 and Continuous Availability, SG24-5486, for i5/OS V5R4
IBM eServer i5 and iSeries System Handbook i5/OS Version 5 Release 3 October 2005 Draft, GA19-5486, OS/400 V5R3
High-speed Link Loop Architecture for the IBM eServer iSeries Server: OS/400 Version 5
Release 2, REDP-3652
V5R3 high-speed link (HSL) presentation from 22 November 2005
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/ha/pdf/V5R3_HSL_Rules.pdf
339
For further information, refer to the IBM Systems Hardware Information Center at:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/eserver/v1r2s/en_US/index.htm
The following table lists the original availability dates and any announced withdrawal from
marketing dates (cannot be ordered) for the I/O enclosures and racks that are supported for
System i models listed in this paper.
Model
General availability
23 April 2001
01 October 2004
28 February 2003
01 June 2006
28 February 2003
---
12 June 2000
01 October 2005
12 June 2000
21 November 2003
23 April 2001
01 October 2004
#5079 1.8 m I/O Tower
12 June 2000
01 October 2005
28 February 2003
01 June 2006
28 February 2003
---
28 February 2003
---
16 February 2007
#5097 1.8m I/O RACK
July 2004
01 October 2005
28 February 2003
---
16 February 2007
16 February 2007
#5787 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Tower
16 February 2007
15 October 2004
---
#8093 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack
14 May 2002
07 May 2003
28 February 2003
01 October 2005
15 October 2004
---
#9057 Storage Expansion Unit
19 August 1997
01 January 2004
12 June 2000
January 2004
12 June 2000
October 2004
14 May 2002
01 October 2005
15 October 2004
---
Note: The darker shaded areas in the following tables and graphics indicate the base
features.
340
7.1 System i towers, racks, and expansion unit schematics

This section shows the schematics of the towers, racks, and expansion units supported by the
System i models represented in this paper.
7.1.1 #5074 PCI Expansion Tower

The #5074 PCI Expansion Tower is supported by Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 595 810, 820,
825, 830, 840, SB2, SB3, 870 and 890.
Note: The total number of disk bays is 45.
DISK SLOTS
Slots
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
DISK SLOTS
AC
Input
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
T01
T02
7,8 IOA
765 W
Power
Supply
A01
A02
765 W
Power
Supply
(#5101)
A03
(unused)
T03
T04
T05
Back
Front
Legend
Required Feature
Note 1: If C05 has an Integrated xSeries Server,

slot C06 is unavailable, and slot C07 is available
only as a short slot.
765 W
Power
Supply
Batteries
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
Base Feature
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
DISK SLOTS
1,2 IOP/Int. xSeries Svr

3 IOA
4 IOA
HSL adapter
5,6 IOP/IOA
DISK SLOTS
DB2
C05
C06
C07
#5101/#5111
Multi-Adapter Bridge Bus

Number
DB1
IOP
#9843
IOA
IOP/IOA
IOA
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
1,2
3,4
5,6
7,8
DISK SLOTS
C01
C02
C03
C04
DISK SLOTS
4 IOA
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
C09
C10
OP Panel
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
DISK SLOTS
Rem Media D41
FAN
B02
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
FAN
B01

3 IOA
DB3
PCI Cards
Rem Media D42
Unavailable if
Integrated xSeries
Server is installed

Note 3: #5700/#5701 must be placed in a 32-bit

slot.
341

The #5075 PCI Expansion Tower includes a 32 MB Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI)
IOP (CCIN 284B) embedded on its backplane. The #5075 is supported by Models 270, 810,
820, and 825.
Multi-Adapter Bridge
Bus Number
OP Panel
OP Panel
Fan
#5156
B02
Fan
#5156
B02
Fan
B01
Fan
B01
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
7,8
5,6
3,4
1,2
PCI Cards
IOA
Short
1
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA/Int. xSeries Svr
Slots
C08
C07
C06
C05
7,8
5,6
3,4
2
1
2
IOA
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA/Int. xSeries Svr
DISK IOA
Embedded IOP
C04
C03
C02
C01
Disk Unit
Cage
D01
D02
D03
D04
D05
D06
Front
575W
575W
Power Supply
#5156
PO2
PO2
575W
575W
Power Supply
Power Supply
PO1
PO1
Right
Legend
Base Feature
Required Feature

342
PCI
PCI
PCI
DISK IOA
PCI
Power Supply
#5156
DISK SLOTS
DB1
EMBED
PCI Short
PCI
PCI
PCI
Back
Unavailable if
Integrated xSeries
Server is installed

Note 3: #5700/#5701 must be placed in

a 32-bit slot. If #5700/#5701 is installed
in C01 then move Disk IOA to next
available slot.
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
7.1.3 #5078/#0578 PCI Expansion Unit
B04
Back
Front
Legend
Base Feature
IOP/Int. xSeries Svr

IOA
IOA
IOP/IOA
IOA
B03
HSL adapter
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
BULK
C09
C10
BULK
C11
1,2
C12
3
C13
4
C14
5,6
C15
7,8
OP Panel
Bridge Bus
Slots Multi-Adapter
PCI Cards
Number
C01
1,2 IOP
C02
3,4 IOA
C03
5,6 IOP/IOA
C04
7,8 IOA
C05
C06
3 IOA
C07
4 IOA
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
The #5078 PCI Expansion Unit or #0578 PCI Expansion Unit in Rack is attached to the top of
a #5074 PCI Expansion Tower or #9079 Base I/O Tower. It can also be mounted in a #0551
System i 36U 1.8m Rack.
Required Feature
Unavailable if
Integrated xSeries
Server is installed
Note 1: If C05 has an Integrated xSeries Server, Note 2: If C11 has an Integrated xSeries Server,
slot C06 is unavailable, and slot C07 is available slot C12 is unavailable, and slot C13 is available
Note 3: If #5700/#5701 is installed in C01

then move Disk IOA to next available slot.
Restriction: #5700/#5701 must be placed in a

32-bit slot
343
7.1.4 #5079 1.8 m I/O Tower

The #5079 1.8 m I/O Tower is supported by Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, 870, and 890. The #5079 consists of two #5074 PCI Expansion Towers with side
covers and casters removed.
Note: Total number of disk bays is 2 x 45
AC
Input
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
344
AC
Input
DISK SLOTS
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
IOP/Int. Netfinity Svr.

IOA
IOA
IOP/IOA
IOA
1,2
3
4
5,6
7,8
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
(unused)
T03
FAN
B02
765 W
Power
Supply
765 W
Power
Supply
765 W
Power
Supply
A01
A02
A03
(unused)
Batteries
T01
T05
T04
DISK SLOTS
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
DISK SLOTS
A03
FAN
B01
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
DISK SLOTS
A02
T02
DISK SLOTS
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
DISK SLOTS
A01
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
OP Panel
T01
PCI Cards
Rem Media D41
765 W
Power
Supply
Batteries
Multi-Adapter
Bridge Bus
Number
Rem Media D42
765 W
Power
Supply
C11 1,2 IOP/Int. Netfinity Svr.

3 IOA
C12
4 IOA
C13
C14 5,6 IOP/IOA
C15 7,8 IOA
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
765 W
Power
Supply
Slots
C01
C02
C03
C04
DISK SLOTS
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
PCI Cards
DISK SLOTS
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
DISK SLOTS
Required Feature

3 IOA
C06
4 IOA
C07
HSL adapter
C09 5,6 IOP/IOA
C10 7,8 IOA
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
Base Feature

3 IOA
C06
C07
4 IOA
HSL adapter
C09 5,6 IOP/IOA
C10 7,8 IOA
DISK SLOTS
1,2
3,4
5,6
7,8
DISK SLOTS
C01
C02
C03
C04
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
IOP #9943
IOA
IOP/IOA
IOA
DISK SLOTS
Legend
FAN
B02
IOP
#9943
IOA
IOP/IOA
IOA
DISK SLOTS
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
1,2
3,4
5,6
7,8
OP Panel
Multi-Adapter
Bridge Bus
Number
Rem Media D41
FAN
B01
DISK SLOTS
Slots
Rem Media D42
T02
T03
T04
T05
Unavailable if
Integrated Netfinity
Server is installed
Note 1: If C05 has an
Integrated Netfinity Server,
slot C06 is unavailable, and
slot C07 is available only as a
short slot.
Integrated Netfinity Server,
slot C13 is available only as
a short slot.
7.1.5 #5088/#0588 PCI-X Expansion Unit
Note: All slots are 3.3V
HSL adapter
1,2
3
4
5,6
7,8
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
IOP/IOA/IXS
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA
IOA
C05 1,2 IOP/IOA/IXS

C06
3 IOP/ IOA/IXS
4 IOP/IOA/IXA
C07
C08 5,6 IOP/IOA
C09 7,8 IOA
(B02)
IOP/IOA/IXS
IOP/IOA/IXS
IOP/IOA
IOA
(B01)
1,2
3,4
5,6
7,8
POWER
P02
C01
C02
C03
C04
POWER
P01
Slots Bus Number
PCI Cards
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
OP Panel
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
The #5088 PCI-X Expansion Unit is attached to the top of a #5074 PCI Expansion Tower,
#5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower, or #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure. The #0588 is mounted in a
#0551 System i 36U 1.8m Rack.
VPD
SPCN
Back
Front
Legend
Base Feature
Required Feature
Note 1: If C05 has an Integrated xSeries

Server, slot C06 is unavailable, and slot C07
is available only as a short slot. A #2792 does
not reduce a third slot to a short slot.
Slots
Unavailable if
Integrated xSeries
Server is installed
Note 2: If C11 has an Integrated xSeries

Server, slot C12 is unavailable, and slot C13
is available only as a short slot. A #2792 does
not reduce a third slot to a short slot.
Note 3: IXS placement is not

supported from plant. Only a
#2792 is allowed in this position.
345

The #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower is supported by Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, 800,
810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890.
Note: The total number of disk bays is 45.
FAN
B01
1,2
3
4
5,6
7,8
IOP/IOA/IXS
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA
IOA
HSL adapter
DISK SLOTS
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
DISK SLOTS
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
DB2
#5108
C07
C08
DB1
1,2 IOP/IOA/IXS
3 IOP/IOA
4 IOP/IOA
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
C05
C06
DISK SLOTS
7,8 IOA
DISK SLOTS
C04
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
1,2 IOP (#9844)/IOA/IXS

3,4 IOP/IOA/IXS
5,6 IOP/IOA
OP Panel
C01
C02
C03
Rem Media D41
FAN
B02
C09
DISK SLOTS
C10
DB3
Slots Bus Number
PCI Cards
Rem Media D42
VPD
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
SPCN
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P00
P01
346
P02
P03
AC Dist AC Dist
Box
Box
(A01)
(A02)
Back
Legend
Required Feature

only as a short slot. A #2792 does not reduce a
third slot to a short slot.
840 W
Power
Supply
Power supply slots are used as follows:

P01/P02: Base power
P03: Auxiliary DASD cage or
dual line cord
P00: Dual line cord or
auxiliary DASD cage
Front
Base Feature
840 W
Power
Supply
Unavailable if
Integrated xSeries
Server is installed

Note 3: IXS placement is not supported

from plant. Only a #2792 is allowed in
this position.
7.1.7 #5095/#0595 PCI-X Expansion Tower

The #5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower and #0595 PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack are supported
by Models 270, 520, 525, 550, 570, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890.
D12
DB2
Front
D11
Right (when stand-alone)
MAB
0
D10
DASD
MAB
1
DASD
B04
D09
B03
DASD
Fan
DASD
Fan
D07
B02
D06
D08
DASD
CB1
D04
DASD
IOA
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA
HSL adapter
D03
D05
NB1
DASD
B01
DASD
D02
Fan
DASD
Op Panel
DASD
DASD
D01
Fan
DB1
DASD
IOA
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA
IOP/IXS (#9844)
7,8 C08
5,6 C07
3,4 C06
1,2 C05
7,8 C04
5,6 C03
3,4 C02
1,2 C01
Power Supply P01

Power Supply P02 #5138
Top (when rack-mounted)
347
7.1.8 #5096 PCI-X Expansion Tower (no disk)

The #5096 PCI-X Expansion Tower (no disk) is supported by Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 595,
800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890.
FAN
B02
1
C15
1,2
3
4
5,6
7,8
C11
IOP/IOA/IXS
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA
IOA
HSL adapter
C10
C12
C13
C14
4 IOP/IOA
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
1,2 IOP/IOA/IXS
3 IOP/IOA/IXS
C05
C06
C07
C08
C09
1,2 IOP (#9844)/IOA/IXS
3,4 IOP/IOA/IXS
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
C02
C03
C04
C01
No Disk Slots
Slots Bus Number
PCI Cards
FAN
B01
VPD
SPCN
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P00
P01
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P02
P03

P01/P02: Base power
P03: Auxiliary DASD cage or
dual line cord
P00: Dual line cord or
auxiliary DASD cage
Legend
Required Feature

348
(A01)
(A02)
Back
Front
Base Feature
AC Dist AC Dist
Box
Box
Unavailable if
Integrated xSeries
Server is installed

Note 3: IXS placement is not supported

from plant. Only a #2792 is allowed in
this position.
7.1.9 #5294 PCI-X Expansion Tower

The #5294 1.8m I/O Tower is supported by Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 820, 825, 830, 840,
870, and 890. The #5294 consists of two #5094 PCI-X Expansion Towers with side covers
and casters removed.
Note: The total number of disk bays is 2 x 45.
7,8 IOA
C15
4 IOP/IOA
5,6 IOP/IOA
C14
3 IOP/IOA
C12
C13
HSL adapter
7,8 IOA
1,2 IOP/IOA/IXS
C11
(A01)
(A02)

Integrated xSeries Server,
short slot. A #2792 does not
reduce a third slot to a short
slot.

supported from plant.
Only a #2792 is allowed in
this position.
FAN
B02
1
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
HSL adapter
1,2 IOP/Int. xSeries Svr.
3 IOA
4 IOA
C08
C09
C10
C11
C12
C13
7,8 IOA
4 IOA
C07
C15
3 IOP/IOA
C06
5,6 IOP/IOA
1,2 IOP/IOA/IXS
C05
7,8 IOA
C04
DISK SLOTS
AC Dist
Box
5,6 IOP/IOA
DISK SLOTS
FAN
B01
AC Dist
Box
C03
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
P03
3,4 IOP/IOA
DISK SLOTS
P02
Unavailable if
Integrated xSeries
Server is installed

slot.
1,2 IOP (#9844)/IOA/IXS
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
840 W
Power
Supply
C01
DISK SLOTS
P01
840 W
Power
Supply
C02
OP Panel
P00
DISK SLOTS
PCI Cards
Bus Number
Rem Media D41
840 W
Power
Supply

P01 - Base power
P02 - Base power
P03 - Auxiliary DASD cage (standard)
P00 - Dual line cord
Slots
Rem Media D42
840 W
Power
Supply
C14
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
C10
SPCN
DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
C09
4 IOP/IOA
VPD
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
DISK SLOTS
5,6 IOP/IOA
3 IOP/IOA
1,2 IOP/IOA/IXS
7,8 IOA
5,6 IOP/IOA
3,4 IOP/IOA /IXS
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
DISK SLOTS
C08
C07
C06
C05
DISK SLOTS
C04
DISK SLOTS
C03
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
1,2 IOP (#9844)/IOA/IXS
DISK SLOTS
Base Feature
Required Feature
C02
DISK SLOTS
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
Legend
FAN
B02
C01
OP Panel
PCI Cards
Bus Number
Rem Media D41
FAN
B01
DISK SLOTS
Slots
Rem Media D42
VPD
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
SPCN
DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P00
P01
P02
P03

P01 - Base power
P02 - Base power
AC Dist
Box
AC Dist
Box
(A01)
(A02)
349
7.1.10 #5296 1.8m I/O Tower (no disk)

The #5296 1.8m I/O Tower (no disk) is supported by Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 820, 825,
830, 840, 870, and 890. The #5296 consists of two #5094 PCI-X Expansion Towers with side
covers and casters removed.
Base Feature
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
C15
C14
3 IOP/IOA
4 IOP/IOA
C13
C12
1,2 IOP/IOA/IXS
HSL adapter
C10
C11
7,8 IOA
C09
4 IOP/ IOA
3 IOA
1,2 IOP/IXS
5,6 IOP/IOA
C08
C07
C06
C05
7,8 IOA
C04
C03
3,4 IOA
5,6 IOP/IOA
Required Feature
C02
1,2 IOP (#9844)/IOA/IXS
Legend
FAN
B02
C01
Slots
Bus Number
PCI Cards
FAN
B01

VPD
SPCN
840 W
Power
Supply
P00
P01
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P02
P03

P01 - Base power
P02 - Base power
AC Dist
Box
(A01)
(A02)
FAN
B02
1
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
4 IOP/IOA
C13
C15
3 IOP/IOA
C12
C14
HSL adapter
1,2 IOP/IOA/IXS
7,8 IOA
C09
C11
5,6 IOP/IOA
C08
1,2 IOP/IOA/IXS
C05
4 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
C04
C07
5,6 IOP/IOA
C03
3 IOA
3,4 IOA
C06
1,2 IOP (#9844)/IOA/IXS
C02
C01
Slots Multi-Adapter Bridge

Bus Number
PCI Cards
FAN
B01
AC Dist
Box
C10
No Disk Slots
840 W
Power
Supply
VPD
SPCN
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P00
P01
P02
P03

P01 - Base power
P02 - Base power
350
AC Dist
Box
AC Dist
Box
(A01)
(A02)
Unavailable if
Server is installed
a short slot. A #2792 does
not reduce a third slot to a
short slot.
slot.
supported from plant.
Only a #2792 is allowed in
this position.
7.1.11 #5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Drawer/#5787 TotalStorage

Expansion 24 Disk Tower
The #5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Drawer/#5787 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk
Tower provide slots for up to 24 disk units in a 4 EIA unit high rack drawer or stand-alone
tower. They are supported on Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595, and
9411-100.
The following figure shows the rear view of the #5786.
Power Supply 1
Power Supply 2
The following figure shows the front view of the #5786.
Fan 1
Fan 2
Fan 3
351
Note: On the #5787 tower models, the locations of C3 and C5 are on the top, and the
locations of C2 and C4 are on the bottom. When viewed from the rear, C3 it on the top left,
and C5 is on the top right. C2 is the bottom left and C4 is the bottom right.
7.1.12 #5790 PCI Expansion Drawer

The #5790 PCI Expansion Drawer is supported on Models 520, 525, 550 and 570. The #5790
mounts in #0551, #0553, #0554, and #0555 iSeries racks and uses four EIA units (half-width
of the rack).
HSL
Redundant Power Supplies
Slots
P1-C2
P1-C3
P1-C4
P1-C7
I0A
I0P|I0A|IXS
P1-C1
I0P|I0A
P1-T3
I0A
SPCN
Ports
I0P|I0A|IXS
P1-T2
I0P|I0A
P1-T1
Note: A #4812 PCI Integrated xSeries Server consumes two slots.
7.1.13 #5796 PCI-DDR 12XExpansion Drawer

The #5796 12X PCI Expansion Drawer is supported on the Model 570 (POWER6). The
#5796 mounts in #0551, #0553, #0554 and #0555 iSeries racks and uses four EIA units
(half-width of the rack).
352
P1-C6
P1-C5
Note: A #5796 PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer supports only I/O Adapters that can run
without an IOP (IOP-less mode).
7.1.14 #8093 Optional Base 1.8 m I/O Rack

The #8093 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack is the 1.8m optional base I/O rack for the Model 870 and
890.
FAN
B01
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
DISK SLOTS
AC
Input
DISK SLOTS
T01
765 W
Power
Supply
765 W
Power
Supply
A01
A02
A03
T02
(1-x-2-7)
(1-x-2-6)
(1-x-2-4)
(1-x-1-4)
(1-x-1-4)
(1-x-2-5)
(1-x-2-3)
(1-x-2-4)
(1-x-2-3)
OP Panel
(1-x-1-3)
(1-x-1-3)
Required
DVD-ROM
765 W
Power
Supply
Unavailable if
Integrated xSeries
Server is installed
a short slot.
a short slot.
Note 3: The position of the cards
may change depending on the
console and other features selected.
(unused)
Batteries
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
(1-x-0-7)
Rem Media D42
C05 1,2 IOP/Int. xSeries Svr.

3 IOA
C06
4 IOA
C07
HSL adapter
C09 5,6 IOP/IOA
C10 7,8 IOA
IOP
IOA
IOP/IOA
IOA
1,2
3,4
5,6
7,8
Multi-Adapter
Bridge Bus
Number
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
Slots
C01
C02
C03
C04
DISK SLOTS
PCI Cards
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
DISK SLOTS
Required Feature
IOP/Int. xSeries Svr.
IOA
IOA
IOP/IOA
IOA
DISK SLOTS
Base Feature
1,2
3
4
5,6
7,8
OP Panel
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
Rem Media D41
Legend
FAN
B02
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
DISK SLOTS
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
Rem Media D42
T03
T05
T04
FAN
FAN
B01
B02
(3-x-2-7)
(3-x-2-6)
Serial-1
(3-x-1-7)
(3-x-1-6)
(3-x-1-5)
(3-x-1-4)
(3-x-1-3)
(2-x-1-7)
(2-x-1-6)
(2-x-1-5)
(2-x-1-4)
(2-x-1-3)
(3-x-0-7)
(3-x-0-6)
(3-x-0-5)
(3-x-0-4)
(3-x-0-3)
(2-x-0-7)
(2-x-0-6)
(2-x-0-5)
(2-x-0-4)
(2-x-0-3)
JTAG-A
Mfg Int
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
See the #9094 PCI Card Enclosure

for card placement details.
HSL
#9844/#9943
#9793 / #9794
(1-x-1-7)
(1-x-1-6)
(1-x-1-6)
(1-x-1-5)
(1-x-1-5)
(3-x-2-5)
D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
(3-x-2-4)
(2-x-2-7)
(2-x-2-6)
(2-x-2-5)
(2-x-2-4)
(2-x-2-3)
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35
(3-x-2-3)
(1-x-0-5)
(1-x-0-4)
(1-x-0-3)
(1-x-0-2)
(1-x-0-1)
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
V/S Comm
SPCN
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P00
P01
P02
P03
AC Dist
Box
AC Dist
Box
(A01)
(A02)
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
353
7.1.15 #8094 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack

The #8094 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack is the base I/O rack for the Model 870 and 890. It consists
of a #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower on top and a #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure on the
bottom with side covers and casters removed.
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
1,2 IOP//IOA/IXS
3 IOA
4 IOA
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
C05
C06
C08
C09
1,2 IOP/IOA
3 IOP/IOA
4 IOP/IOA
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
C12
C13
C14
C15
HSL adapter
C10
C11
Required Feature
C07
DISK SLOTS
C04
DISK SLOTS
C03
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
1,2 IOP(#9844)/IOA/IXS
DISK SLOTS
3,4 IOA
DISK SLOTS
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
Base Feature
C02
OP Panel
Legend
FAN
B02
C01
Rem Media D41
FAN
B01
DISK SLOTS
Multi-Adapter Bridge PCI Cards
Slots Bus Number
Rem Media D42
VPD
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
SPCN
DISK SLOTS
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
DISK SLOTS
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
Rem Media D42
Rem Media D41
OP Panel
DISK SLOTS
P00
P01
P03

slot.
AC Dist
Box
AC Dist
Box
(A01)
(A02)
FAN
B02

slot.
Note 3: Integrated xSeries

Server placement is not
supported from the plant.
Only a #2792 is allowed in this
position.
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
DISK SLOTS

DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
DISK SLOTS
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
354
P02
B01
JTAG-A
Mfg Int
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
DISK SLOTS
840 W
Power
Supply
FAN
Serial-1
DISK SLOTS
840 W
Power
Supply

P01 - Base power
P02 - Base power
DISK SLOTS
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
DISK SLOTS
840 W
Power
Supply
HSL adapter
DISK SLOTS
840 W
Power
Supply
#9844/#9943
#9793
DISK SLOTS
Unavailable if Integrated
Netfinity Server is
installed
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P00
P01
V/S Comm
SPCN
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P02
P03

P01 - Base power
P02 - Base power
P03 - Dual line cord (standard)
AC Dist
Box
AC Dist
Box
(A01)
(A02)
7.1.16 #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure

The #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure is the base I/O expansion unit for the Model 870 and 890.
(1-x-2-7)
(3-x-2-7)
(3-x-2-6)
(3-x-2-5)
(3-x-2-4)
(3-x-2-3)
B01
B02
HSL adapter
#9844/#9943
#9793
(1-x-1-7)
(1-x-1-6)
(1-x-1-6)
(1-x-1-5)
(1-x-1-5)
(1-x-1-4)
(1-x-1-4)
(1-x-1-3)
(1-x-1-3)
PCI
Serial-1
Mfg Int
(3-x-1-7)
(3-x-1-6)
(3-x-1-5)
(3-x-1-4)
(3-x-0-7)
(3-x-0-6)
D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
(3-x-0-5)
(2-x-0-7)
(2-x-0-6)
(2-x-0-5)
(2-x-0-4)
(2-x-0-3)
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
FAN
D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
(3-x-0-4)
(2-x-1-7)
(2-x-1-6)
(2-x-1-5)
(2-x-1-4)
(2-x-1-3)
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25
FAN
See #9094 PCI Card Enclosure for card placement details
D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
(3-x-1-3)
(2-x-2-7)
(2-x-2-6)
(2-x-2-5)
(2-x-2-4)
(2-x-2-3)
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35
(3-x-0-3)
(1-x-0-4)
(1-x-0-5)
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
(1-x-0-3)
(1-x-0-2)
(1-x-0-1)
OP Panel
(1-x-2-6)
Required
DVD-ROM
(1-x-2-5)
(1-x-2-3)
(1-x-2-4)
(1-x-2-3)
(1-x-0-7)
Rem Media D42
(1-x-2-4)
Dual Line Cord
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
JTAG-A
V/S Comm
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P00
P01
SPCN
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P02
P03
Note: Power supply slots are used as follows

P01 - Base power
AC Dist
P02 - Base power
Box
P00 - Auxiliary DASD backplane
(A01)
AC Dist
Box
(A02)
#5107
Back
Front
LEGEND
= Base feature
(W-X-Y-Z)
= Required feature
Kn
W = DS Card Address
X = IOA number
Y = SCSI bus number
Z = AS/400 Drive Address
Kn = Physical Address
Note: Hot plug and concurrent add of PCI cards, disk units, and removable media devices
are supported.
355
7.1.17 #9094 PCI Card Enclosure
Base Feature
Unavailable if
Integrated xSeries
Server is installed
Required Feature

C15
HSL adapter
1,2 IOP/IXS
3 IOA
4 IOA
C10
Legend
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
7,8 IOA
C09
C11
C12
C13
5,6 IOP/IOA
4 IOA
1,2 IOP/IXS
3 IOA
C05
C07
C08
3,4 #9793
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
C06
1,2 #9844 / #9943

C01
C14
C02
C03
C04
Slots
Multi-Adapter Bridge PCI

Bus Number
Cards
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
#9094 PCI Card Enclosure

Note 3: Slot C01 in the #9094 for a Model 870 has

a #9844, and a #9844 or #9943 for a Model 890.
7.2 Required EIA units

The IBM marketing configurator does not manage rack space in System i racks. See the
following table to determine the number of EIA units that are required for each Hardware
Management Console (HMC), System i system unit, processor enclosure, or expansion tower
installed in a System i rack.
System i model or tower
#0551 System i 36U

1.8m Rack
#0553 System i 42U

2.0m Rack
#0554 System i
11U .6m Rack
#0555 System i
25U 1.3m Rack
Model 270 system unit
16, includes two EIA for

the #0133 and #0137
Model 515 System Unit
N/A
N/A
N/A
Model 570 (POWER5 and

POWER6) processor enclosure
0/4 - 4
5/8 - 8
9/12 - 12
13/16 - 16
356
System i model or tower
#0551 System i 36U

1.8m Rack
#0553 System i 42U

2.0m Rack
#0554 System i
11U .6m Rack
#0555 System i
25U 1.3m Rack
Model 595 processor enclosure
Not available in a #0551

System i 36U 1.8m Rack
16 (includes two EIA for

the #0133 and #0137)

the #0133 and #0137)

the #0133 and #0137)

the #0133 and #0137)

the #0134 and #0138)

the #0134 and #0138)
#0595 PCI-X Expansion Unit in

Rack
#0588 PCI-X Expansion Unit in

Rack
18
18 (reference RPQ
#847215)
18 (reference RPQ
#847215)
#5096 PCI-X Expansion Tower (no

disk)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
#5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24

Disk Drawer
#5790 PCI Expansion Drawer (half

wide)
#5796 12X PCI Expanstion

Drawer (half wide)
#6586 Modem Tray for 19-Inch

Rack
1U
1U
1U
1U
Model 7310-CR2 HMC rack

mountable console
18
357
358
Chapter 8.
Storage and media for IBM

System i family models
In this chapter, we summarize i5/OS tape hardware-level support. We include specifications
for internal tape devices for -inch cartridge (QIC), Linear Tape Open (LTO), VXA, and 4mm,
8mm, 3570, 3590, and 3592 compatibility. We also cover optical device and DVD device
support, alternate installation device capabilities, and initial program load (IPL) terminology,
as well as cable information.
Consider reviewing the Redbooks publication Implementing IBM Tape in i5/OS, SG24-7440,
for information about configuring i5/OS tape support of IBM System Storage LTO Ultrium
products.
359
8.1 External tape for System i family of models

External tape drives, media auto loaders, and tape library subsystems offer an optional I/O
attachment for data interchange or backup and recovery purposes. The following tables
provide a quick reference for each tape drive and tape library with supported attachment to
i5/OS. Some tape drives and tape library products listed have been withdrawn from
marketing.
The following feature codes are associated with each input/output adapter (IOA) controller
that supports tape device attachments via low voltage differential (LVD), high voltage
differential (HVD), and Fibre Channel attachment interfaces:
LVD: # 5702, #5705, #5712, #5715, #5736, and #5775
HVD: #2749
Fibre Channel: #2765, #5704, and #5761
Note: In this publication we have included the #5749 and #5774 in this chapter and in the
features description chapter (Chapter 4, POWER5, POWER6, and System i Models 800,
810, 825, 870, 890: Features and placement on page 135). These 2-port Fibre Channel
adapters support external tape and disk devices. They are supported only on POWER6
processor-based servers running IBM i 6.1 (also known as i5/OS V6R1) or later. The
9406-MMA POWER6 570 is included in this publication.
In the tables that follow we have also indicated, in the IOP-less support column, if IBM i 6.1
or later is required. There is no other V6R1 information in this publication. Full treatment of
POWER6 processor-based servers and IBM i 6.1 is planned for a future publication.
Notes:
Some System i models do not support all listed I/O controllers (IOAs).
Some IOP-less IOAs might not support older tape or optical devices. An IOP-IOA pair
should support these devices. See the IOP-less column in the tables in this topic and
notes in 8.1.1, Notes for storage and media support under i5/OS on page 378, for
more details.
Through December 2007, all announced and supported LTO tape drives attach to a
tape IOA that requires a controlling input/output processor (IOP).
IBM i (i5/OS) does not formally support the WORM (Write Once, Read Many) function
supported by several IBM tape devices described in this chapter. WORM support on
tape devices requires special I/O instructions and a tape media designed for WORM
usage. If WORM support is critical to an i5/OS environment, explore the possibilities of
submitting an RPQ - Request for Price Quote proposal with an IBM representative.
For each LVD, HVD, and Fibre Channel attached device listed in the following tables, the
required controller is dependent on the operating system level and I/O enclosure type. Some
internal and external tape devices, optical disk, CDs, and DVDs can be driven by IOP-less
controllers. For further information about the controller requirements, see the specific IOA
feature number descriptions in Chapter 4, POWER5, POWER6, and System i Models 800,
810, 825, 870, 890: Features and placement on page 135.
i5/OS supports Library Managed Encryption (LME), sometimes also referred to as
Transparent Encryption. With LME, the encrypting tape (LTO 4 or 3592 E05) must be in a
library such as the 3494, 3584, 3577, 3576 or 3573 for encryption to be available. The library
360
and drive work together with the required Encryption Key Manager (EKM) component that is
available on the hardware to provide data encryption without any host involvement.
The LTO Ultrium columns in the following tables denote that the listed tape drive and
library-only supports tape drives of the specified Ultrium LTO type. For example, the machine
type 3573 tape library supports either LTO Ultrium 3 or LTO Ultrium 4 tape drives. This
column does not refer to the LTO Ultrium formats that can be written to and read.
Storage and media for IBM System i family models
361
1889
Withdrawn from
marketing
Encryption a
IOP-less
Fibre Channel
HVD
LVD
3952-J1A
3952-E05
3590
3570
LTO Ultrium 4
Format
LTO Ultrium 3
Model
number
LTO Ultrium 2
Machine
type
LTO Ultrium 1
The following table lists the external tape drive features.
VXA-2
3570
3580
H23
LTO
3580
L23
LTO
3580
L33
LTO
3580
L3H
LTO
3580
L43
LTO
3588
F3B
LTO
3588
F4A
LTO
3590
E11
3590
3590
E1A
3590
3590
H11
9
9
9
9
9
9
3590
3590
H1A
3590
3592
E05
3592
3592
J1A
3592
5753
QIC SLR60
5754
QIC SLR100
5755
HH LT0-2
6258
DAT72
6279
VXA-320
7206
336
DAT72
7206
VX3
VXA-320
7206
VX2
VXA-2
7207
122
QIC
7207
330
QIC SLR60
7208
012
8mm
7208
342
8mm
7208
345
8mm
7212
10x
9348
00x
9
9
9
9
9
a. Although some drives support LTO 3 and LTO 4, only the LTO 4 drives are encryption enabled.
b. The #3590 with 384 tracks compared to Exx models using 256 tracks.
c. The 7212 tape and optical enclosure is capable of supporting multiple media formats: with FC #1107 (SLR60), FC #1108
(SLR100), FC #1104 (VXA-2), FC #1114 (VXA-320), FC #1109 (HH LTO-2), and FC #1108 (DAT72).
1. IBM i 6.1 (formerly i5/OS V6R1) or later.
362
D12
3590
D22
3592
HA1
3592
HA1
9
9
3592
L10*
3590
L12
3590
L22
3592
Bxx
3570
Cxx
3570
Lxx
LTO
Fxx
LTO
3575
Lxx
3570
3576
E9U
LTO
L5B
LTO
3577
L5U
3592
3580
H23*
LTO
L23*
LTO
L33
LTO
L3H
LTO
L43
LTO
F3H
LTO
F28
LTO
H17
LTO
H23
LTO
L23
LTO
L28
LTO
L3H
LTO
3582
L23
LTO
3583
Lxx
LTO
3570
3573
3581
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Withdrawn from
Marketing
Encryption a
3590
IOP-less
D10
HVD
3494
LVD
Format
3590
Model
number
3570
Machine
type
Fibre Channel
3952-J1A
3952-E05
LTO Ultrium 4
LTO Ultrium 3
LTO Ultrium 2
LTO Ultrium 1
The following table lists the tape library features.
9
9
363
IOP-less
Encryption a
Withdrawn from
Marketing
Fibre Channel
9
D22
3592
L32
LTO
L32
LTO
D32
LTO
D32
LTO
L53
LTO
D53
LTO
3995
Cxx
UDO-1 l
3996
032, 080,
174.
UDO-1/2
UDO-1
399F
(Plasmon
G-Series)
HVD
3952-J1A
9
LVD
3952-E05
9
3590
3592
3570
L22
LTO Ultrium 4
3584
LTO Ultrium 3
Format
LTO Ultrium 2
Model
number
LTO Ultrium 1
Machine
type
9
9
9
1
a. Although some drives support LTO 3 and LTO 4, only the LTO 4 drives are encryption enabled.
1. IBM i 6.1 (formerly i5/OS V6R1) or later
A description of each tape device listed in the previous tables is provided in the following
sections. For more information about storage products supported on the System i platform,
refer to the IBM System Storage and TotalStorage products Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/product/i.html
Refer to IBM TotalStorage Tape Selection and Differentiation Guide, SG24-6946, to assist
you in finding the best tape product solution for the designated backup environment.
3580-H23 and L23 IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Drive

The IBM 3580 Model H23 comes with an Ultra SCSI HVD attachment, and the Model L23
comes with a SCSI Ultra 160 LVD attachment, for connection to a wide spectrum of open
system servers. The Ultrium Tape Drive 3580 Model H23 incorporates the IBM LTO Ultrium 2
Tape Drive. The IBM LTO Ultrium 2 Tape Drive is the second generation LTO Ultrium Tape
Drive in the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium family of products. The Ultrium 2 Tape Drive offers
significant improvements over the Ultrium 1 Tape Drive.
3580-L33 IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Drive

The IBM 3580 Ultrium 3 Tape Drive Model L33 incorporates the LTO IBM TotalStorage
Ultrium 3 Tape Drive, which more than doubles maximum tape drive throughput data rate
performance over the LTO generation 2 Tape Drive (Ultrium 2), up to 80 MBps native data
transfer rate. In addition, with the use of the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data
Cartridge the Ultrium 3 Tape Drive doubles the tape cartridge capacity up to 400 GB native
physical capacity (800 GB with a two to one (2:1) compression). IBM Ultrium 3 Tape Drives
can read and write LTO Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges and read LTO Ultrium 1 Data Cartridges.
The Model L33 comes with a SCSI Ultra160 LVD attachment, for connection to a wide
spectrum of open system servers.
364
3580-L43 and S43 IBM System Storage TS2340 Tape Drive Express
The IBM System Storage TS2340 Tape Drive Express Model L43 is available as an external
stand-alone model or within rack-mountable units. These tape devices are designed to offer
high capacity and performance for the midrange open systems environment. These models
incorporate the LTO IBM System Storage Ultrium 4 Full-High Tape Drive, which is designed
to provide maximum tape drive throughput native data rate performance of up to 120 MBps,
compared to the IBM LTO generation 3 Tape Drive (Ultrium 3, LTO-3) at up to an 80 MBps
native data transfer rate. In addition, with the use of the IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data
Cartridge, the Ultrium 4 Tape Drive provides double the tape cartridge capacity up to 800 GB
native physical capacity (1,600 GB with a 2:1 compression) compared to previous Ultrium 3
Tape Drives. IBM Ultrium 4 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 3 data cartridges
and can read LTO Ultrium 2 data cartridges.
3580-H3L System Storage TS2230 Tape Drive Express

The System Storage TS2230 Tape Drive Express Model is an excellent tape storage solution
for businesses that require backup or low-cost, real-time archival of their data within a small
window of time. TS2230 Tape Drive Model H3L uses a Low Voltage Differential (LVD) Small
Computer System Interface (SCSI) and offers LTO-3 support. The TS2230 has a storage
capacity of up to 800 GB (with 2:1 compression) in conjunction with the IBM TotalStorage
LTO Ultrium 400 GB data cartridge, which is double the capacity of the Ultrium 2 technology.
Along with its higher capacity, the performance of the TS2230 Tape Drive has more than
doubled over the previous generation of half-high LTO drives in the market, for a native data
transfer rate of up to 60 MBps.
The TS2230 Tape Drive provides an excellent alternative to slower and smaller capacity
-inch, 4 mm, and 8 mm DLT/SDLT tape drives.
3588-F3B IBM System Storage TS1030 Tape Drive

The IBM System Storage TS1030 Tape Drive Model incorporates the LTO IBM Ultrium 3
Tape Drive, which more than doubles maximum tape drive throughput over the IBM LTO
generation 2 Tape Drive (Ultrium 2). It has a native data transfer of up to 80 MBps. In
addition, with the use of the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge, the
TS1030 Tape Drive Model F3B doubles the maximum tape cartridge capacity up to 400 GB
native physical capacity (800 GB with 2:1 compression), as compared to the IBM Ultrium 2
Tape Drives and cartridges. IBM Ultrium 3 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 2
Data Cartridges and read LTO Ultrium 1 Data Cartridges. The TS1030 Tape Drive Model F3B
has a 4-Gbps Fibre Channel interface for connection to a wide spectrum of open system
servers.
3588-F4A IBM System Storage TS1040 Tape Drive

The IBM 3588 Model F4A incorporates the LTO IBM Ultrium 4 Tape Drive, with enhanced
maximum tape-drive throughput over the IBM LTO generation 3 Tape Drive (Ultrium 3). It has
a native data transfer of up to 120 MBps. In addition, with the use of the IBM LTO Ultrium 800
GB Data Cartridge, the TS1040 doubles the maximum tape cartridge capacity by providing up
to 800 GB of native physical capacity (1,600 GB with 2:1 compression), as compared to the
IBM Ultrium 3 Tape Drives and cartridges. IBM Ultrium 4 Tape Drives can read and write LTO
Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges and read LTO Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges. The TS1040 has a
4-Gbps Fibre Channel interface for connection to a wide spectrum of open system servers.
3590-E11 and H11 IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive

The IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive 3590 Models E11 and H11 are the
rack-mountable models that include a 10-cartridge Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF) that
can be used in random access mode as a mini-library. Up to four 3590 Model E11 Tape
365
Drives can be installed in a rack, thus reducing the floor space required. The ACF can be
quickly loaded with a new magazine.
This model can be ordered with either an integrated SCSI-3 controller with two ports that
support a 16-bit, fast-and-wide, Ultra SCSI differential interface or a dual ported Fibre
Channel attachment interface. It can also be mounted in an IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape
Drive Frame 3590 Model A14 with the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Controller 3590
Model A60 for non-library attachment to ESCON and FICON channels. The Model E11
Tape Drive has a 14 MBps native data rate (with compression up to 40 MBps sustained data
rate with Fibre Channel). The Model H11 Tape Drive has a 14 MBps native data rate.
3590-E1A and H1A IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive

The IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive 3590 Models E1A and H1A come without the
ACF, and each is designed to go into the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Automated Tape
Library 3494. It can also go in the IBM TotalStorage Silo Compatible Tape Drive Frame 3590
Model C12 or C14 for attachment to a StorageTek Automated Cartridge System (ACS).
This model can be ordered with either an integrated SCSI-3 controller with two ports that
support a 16-bit, fast-and-wide, Ultra SCSI differential interface or a dual ported Fibre
Channel attachment interface. The Model E1A tape drive has a 14 MBps native data rate
(with compression up to 40 MBps sustained data rate with Fibre Channel). The Model H1A
tape drive has a 14 MBps native data rate.
3592-E05 IBM System Storage TS1120 Tape Drive

The IBM System Storage TS1120 Tape Drive Model is supported for integration in the IBM
System Storage Tape Libraries, TS7700 Virtualization Engine, 3494 Virtual Tape Server
(VTS), and tape controllers. The TS1120 Tape Drive is designed to provide higher levels of
performance, reliability, security, and cartridge capacity than the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise
Tape Drive 3592 Model J1A. The TS1120 E05 Tape Drive can help address the needs of tape
customers across a broad range of computing environments.
The IBM System Storage TS1120 Tape Drive has been enhanced to provide the customer the
option of using drive-based data encryption. This encryption capability is now standard on all
new TS1120 Tape Drives and is a chargeable upgrade feature for existing installed TS1120
Tape Drives. The encryption capability includes drive hardware as well as microcode
additions and changes. Also being introduced is a new, separate IBM Encryption Key
Manager component for the Java Platform (EKM) program that supports the generation and
communication of encryption keys for the tape drives across the enterprise.
The TS1120 drives encryption capability and its subsystem integration support help provide
customers with a flexible tape data encryption solution that supports encryption and key
management across a variety of environments. It supports a single point of control for all
encryption keys and most importantly can help customers protect tape data in a cost-effective
way.
The TS1120 E05 Tape Drive is designed to support the IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Extended,
providing up to 700 GB rewritable (JB) or WORM (JX) native physical capacity. Or the TS1120
E05 Tape Drive can support the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Cartridge 3592 providing
up to 500 GB rewritable (JA) or WORM (JW) or 100 GB rewritable (JJ) or WORM (JR) native
physical capacity.
3592-J1A IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive

The IBM 3592 TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive Model J1A has a dual-ported 2-Gbps Fibre
Channel interface Fibre Channel attachment to host systems or a switched fabric
environment. It has a high-technology design that increases the native data rate to up to 40
MBps, over 2.5 times the 14 MBps data rate of the 3590 E or H Models, and over four times
366
the 9 MBps data rate of the 3590 B Models. With data compression and a 32 K block size, the
Model J1A is designed to offer up to 2.5 times the data rate of the 3590 E model.
9348 IBM Magnetic Tape Unit

The IBM 9348 Magnetic Tape Unit is a compact, front-loading, 1600/6250 bpi streaming tape
drive. The 9348 autoloads/autothreads reels of industry-standard -inch magnetic tape. The
9348 has a data rate of 200 KB per second (maximum) at 1600 bpi or 781 KB per second
(maximum) at 6250 bpi. It consists of a tape controller and an integrated tape unit and can be
used for backup operations, program distribution, or data interchange with other systems.
Model 9348-001
The IBM 9348 Model 001 is mounted in an IBM 9309 rack enclosure and attaches via a SCSI
differential adapter to all AS/400 9406 models.
Model 9348-002
The IBM 9348 Model 002 is mounted in a table-top enclosure and attaches via a SCSI
differential adapter to AS/400 9402 Models C04 and C06, all models of the 9404, and AS/400
Advanced System 9406 Models 300, 310, and 320.
The 9348 Model 2 is a table-top enclosure that attaches via SCSI adapter to the 9402 Models
C04 and C06, all models of the 9404, and AS/400 Advanced System 9406 Models 300, 310,
and 320. A nine-foot power cord is provided with the 9348 Model 2. Optional 12 and 20 meter
signal cables allow placement remote from the CPU.
3494 IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Library

The IBM TotalStorage 3494 Enterprise Tape Library is designed to grow as your storage and
usage needs grow. The cartridge capacity is determined by whether an optional Convenience
I/O Station is installed. With the 30-cartridge Convenience I/O Station installed, the cartridge
storage capacity is 160; with the 10-cartridge Convenience I/O Station installed, the cartridge
storage capacity is 210; without either one, the capacity is 240.
The storage capacity and number of drives can be increased by adding either the IBM
TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Storage Frame Model S10 or the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise
Tape Drive Expansion Frame Models D10, D12, and D14. A Model B16 VTS with an attached
Model D12 can also be added for a total of 15 additional frames and up to 6240 tape
cartridges. TS7500 Virtualization Engines, TS7700 Virtualization Engines, and Virtual Tape
Systems can be externally attached to the 3494 Tape Library. Up to 32 tape control unit
functions can be supported by the Model L10, L12, or L14. The total quantity of supported
tape drives is dependent on the combination of installed B16 VTSs and tape subsystems. The
3494 can be accessed by multiple systems such as the IBM eServer iSeries, AS/400,
pSeries, RS/6000, RS/6000 SP, eServer zSeries, ES/3090, ES/9000, S/390, Hewlett
Packard (HP), and Sun processors, as well as Intel-based processors running Microsoft
Windows.
Model 3494-D10
The IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive Expansion Frame Model D10 for the Enterprise
Tape Library 3494 supports the IBM 3490E Magnetic Subsystem Models C1A, C2A, and
F1A. The Model D10 can contain zero or one 3490E tape drive unit (Model C1A or C2A) or up
to two 3490E Model F1A Tape Drives and 400 or 300 tape cartridge storage cells.
Model 3494-D12
The IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library Frame Model D12 for the 3494 Tape Library
supports the 3590 Model H1A, E1A, or B1A Tape Drive and is designed to grow as your
storage and tape drive needs grow. The base configuration of no tape drive unit and 400 tape
367
cartridge storage cells can be expanded with up to a total of six tape drive units and 250 tape
storage cells.
Model 3494-HA1
The IBM TotalStorage Enterprise High Availability Tape Frames Model HA1 for the Enterprise
Tape Library 3494 includes a second library manager and accessor, two service bays and
required hardware and are designed for concurrent maintenance. The Model HA1 operates in
stand-by mode to provide a redundant library manager and accessor or improved availability.
With the Dual Active Accessor (DAA) feature active on the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape
Library Base Frame Model L10, L12, or L14, both accessors can operate simultaneously to
increase mount performance of the library. With two library managers and dual accessors,
and each containing two disk drives for duplication of the library databases, maintenance can
now be performed in most situations on the failing library control unit component, while the
3494 is still available for customer production. The Model HA1 Frames contain no storage
cells for tape cartridges.
Model 3494-L10
The IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Library Base Frame Model L10 for the Enterprise Tape
Library 3494 contains the automation, the library manager, either a 3490E Model C1A or C2A
or up to two 3490E Model F1A Tape Drives, and storage cells for tape cartridges. The Model
L10 can be upgraded to a Model L12 or L14.
Model 3494-L12
The IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library Frame Model L12 for the 3494 Tape Library contains
the automation, the library manager, up to two 3590 Tape Drives, and storage cells for -inch
tape cartridges.
Model 3494-L14
The IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Library Base Frame Model L14 for the Enterprise Tape
Library 3494 contains the automation, the library manager, and storage cells for -inch tape
cartridges.
Model 3494-L22
The IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library Frame Model L22 for the 3494 Tape Library contains
the automation, the library manager, up to four 3592 Tape Drives, and storage cells for -inch
tape cartridges.
3570 IBM Magstar MP Tape Drive

The IBM Magstar MP (Multi-Purpose) 3570 Tape Library provides a compact, integrated
tape storage solution that delivers high performance, extraordinary reliability, and optimized
read-and write-intensive operations. The Magstar MP 3570 Tape Library significantly expands
the functional utility of tape storage with its revolutionary fast data recall performance that
supports both current and emerging tape applications.
In addition, the Magstar MP 3570 Tape Library addresses the growing storage needs of
customers by offering a more durable technology designed to meet the tougher demands of
automation. Magstar MP 3570 Tape Library Models B0x, B1x, C0x, and C1x attach to
AS/400, RS/6000, HP-UX, Sun Solaris, Microsoft Windows, and other SCSI-attach
systems. Magstar MP 3570 Tape Library Models B2x and C2x are supported on selected IBM
Netfinity and IBM PC Server systems. The Magstar MP offers the following features:
Fast access capability to support high I/O operations where multiuser access is required
Support for time-sensitive applications where fast access to data is important (for
example, storage management, network serving)
368
Both automated backup/restore and archive storage and retrieval
Model 3570-B00
The IBM 3570 Model B00 is a drive unit with one tape drive and one cartridge. It has a tape
drive data rate of 2.2 MBps and is a stand-alone unit.
Model 3570-B01
The IBM 3570 Model B01 is a library subsystem with one tape drive and 20 cartridges. It has
a tape drive data rate of 2.2 MBps and is a stand-alone unit.
Model 3570-B02
The IBM 3570 Model B02 is a library subsystem with two tape drives and 20 cartridges. It has
a tape drive data rate of 2.2 MBps and is a stand-alone unit.
Model 3570-B1A
The IBM 3570 Model B1A enhances the Magstar MP Tape Drives with a Drive Load-to-Ready
time of 6.7 seconds (typical), a drive average search time of 8 seconds, and a cartridge
capacity up to 15 GB using a three to one (3:1) compression. Model B1A is designed
specifically for field inclusion in the IBM Magstar MP 3575 Tape Library Dataserver, providing
a mid-range and network server tape storage solution that combines reliable, automated tape
handling and storage with reliable, high-performance Magstar MP Tape Drives.
The attractive IBM Magstar MP 3575 Tape Library extends automated tape handling with
optimized read-and write-intensive tape drives to RS/6000 and other popular SCSI-attach
open systems. The Magstar MP Fast Access Linear Tape used in the IBM Magstar MP 3575
Tape Library offers ultra-fast access time to data that sets it apart from comparable products.
Additionally, Magstar MP offers technology designed for the tougher demands of automated
tape handling.
Model 3570-B11
The IBM 3570 Model B11 is a library subsystem with one tape drive and 20 cartridges. It has
a tape drive data rate of 2.2 MBps and is a rack-mount unit.
Model 3570-B12
The IBM 3570 Model B12 is a library subsystem with two tape drives and 20 cartridges. It has
a tape drive data rate of 2.2 MBps and is a rack-mount unit.
Model 3570-C00
The IBM 3570 Model C00 is a drive unit with one tape drive and a cartridge capacity of one.
The tape drive data rate is 7.0 MBps, and the case is stand-alone.
Model 3570-C01
The IBM 3570 Model C01 is a library subsystem with one tape drive and a cartridge capacity
of 20. The tape drive data rate is 7.0 MBps, and the case is stand-alone.
Model 3570-C02
The IBM 3570 Model C02 is a library subsystem with two tape drives and a cartridge capacity
of 20. The tape drive data rate is 7.0 MBps, and the case is stand-alone.
Model 3570-C11
of 20. The tape drive data rate is 7.0 MBps, and the case is rack-mounted.
369
Model 3570-C12
of 20. The tape drive data rate is 7.0 MBps, and the case is rack-mounted.
Model 3570-C21
of 20. The tape drive data rate is 7.0 MBps, and the case is a PC Rack-mount.
Model 3570-C22
of 20. The tape drive data rate is 7.0 MBps, and the case is a PC Rack-mount.
3573 IBM System Storage TS3200 Tape Library Express

The 3573 IBM System Storage TS3200 Tape Library Express Model is designed to offer high
capacity, performance, and technology for the midrange open systems environment and is an
addition to the family of IBM System Storage tape library offerings. The TS3200 Tape Library
is an external 4U stand-alone or rack-mountable unit that incorporates up to two LTO IBM
TotalStorage Ultrium 3 Tape Drives, which more than doubles tape drive performance over
the previous generation IBM LTO Ultrium 2 Tape Drives. It has a native data transfer rate of up
to 80 MBps per drive.
Model 3573-F3H
The 3573 TS3200 Tape Library Express Model F3H comes with an Ultrium 3 4 Gb Fibre
Channel Drive, which allows connection to a wide spectrum of open systems servers. Up to
two IBM Ultrium 3 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges at original
Ultrium 2 capacities. IBM Ultrium 3 tape drives can also read LTO Ultrium 1 Data Cartridges
with improved data rates of up to 20 MBps native data transfer rate.
Model 3573-L2U
The 3573 TS3100 Tape Library Model L2U is an external 2U standalone or rack-mountable
unit that incorporates a single LTO IBM TotalStorage Ultrium 3 Tape Drive, which more than
doubles tape drive performance over the previous generation IBM LTO Ultrium 2 Tape Drives.
It has a native data transfer rate of up to 80 MBps.
Model 3573-L3H
The 3573 TS3200 Tape Library Express Model F3H comes with an Ultrium 3 4 Gb Fibre
Channel Drive, which allows connection to a wide spectrum of open systems servers. Up to
two IBM Ultrium 3 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges at original
Ultrium 2 capacities. IBM Ultrium 3 tape drives can also read LTO Ultrium 1 Data Cartridges
with improved data rates of up to 20 MBps native data transfer rate.
Model 3573-L4U
The IBM 3573 Model L4U has up to two LVD SCSI drives (feature number 8043) or native
switched fabric 4 Gbps Fibre channel drives (feature number 8044) and Ultrium 3 library
native data physical capacities up to 17.6 TB (up to 35.2 TB using 2:1 compression) with 44
data cartridge slots. It also has a standard three cartridge I/O station, 44 data cartridge slots,
and one dedicated cleaning cartridge slot.
3575 IBM Magstar MP Tape Library

The Magstar MP 3575 Tape Library Dataserver has been enhanced with the addition of a
patented new Multi-Path architecture, which supports the sharing by homogeneous and
heterogeneous hosts. The 3575 supports up to six SCSI-attach systems, in up to three logical
libraries, sharing a common tape cartridge inventory and robotics. Support for Magstar MP
370
Model C tape drives, with increased aggregate data rates (up to 15 MBps using maximum
data compression), and the ability to configure 14 bulk I/O slots within the library, in addition
to the two-cartridge I/O slot, are part of the Multi-Path feature.
The 3575 Tape Library provides a mid-range and network server tape storage solution that
combines reliable, field-proven, automated tape handling and storage with reliable,
high-performance Magstar MP tape drives. Customers can tailor the library to match their
system capacity and performance needs from 420 GB to 2.26 TB (1.26 TB to 6.8 TB with 3:1
compression) with Fast Access Linear Tape C-Format XL Data Cartridge, using up to six
Magstar MP tape drives. Aggregate sustained data rates of 108 GB to 324 GB/hour with
maximum compression allow extremely high data transfer performance. The 3575 offers
outstanding retrieval performance with typical cartridge move times of less than four seconds.
Native device driver support is included for AS/400, RS/6000, and other popular SCSI-attach
open systems from manufacturers such as Hewlett-Packard, Sun, and Microsoft Windows.
Model 3575-L06
The IBM 3575 Model L06 has 60 cartridge slots and, with feature 1401, includes one Magstar
MP Model C tape drive. With Fast Access Linear Tape C-Format XL Data Cartridge, data
capacity is 420 GB in native mode and 1.26 TB with Lempel-Ziv (3:1) compression.
Model 3575-L12
The IBM 3575 Model L12 offers customers up to 840 GB of uncompressed data storage with
their choice of up to four Magstar MP Model C tape drives. The library has 120 cartridge slots
and, with feature 1400, includes two Magstar MP Model C tape drives.
Model 3575-L18
The IBM 3575 Model L18 offers customers up to 1.26 TB of uncompressed data storage with
their choice of two through six Magstar MP Model C tape drives. The library has 180 cartridge
slots and, with feature 1400, includes two Magstar MP Model C tape drives.
Model 3575-L24
slots and, with feature 1400, includes two Magstar MP Model C tape drives.
Model 3575-L32
slots, and with feature 1400, includes two Magstar MP Model C tape drives, and supports up
to four additional tape drives. Data capacity is 2.26 TB in native mode, 6.8 TB with Lempel-Ziv
(3:1) compression.
3576-E9U IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Expansion Modules

The IBM 3576 System Storage TS3310 Tape Module Model E9U is an optional 9U expansion
module. Each E9U expansion module can accommodate up to four LTO Ultrium Tape Drives
and up to 80 tape cartridge slots and a configurable I/O station of 0-12 slots (dependent on
the I/O configuration of the L5B). Up to four of these TS3310 E9U Tape Library modules can
be added to a TS3310 Model L5B Tape Library forming an integrated tape library (5U base
library and up to four 9U expansion modules).
The license key included with the model L5B activates one half of the total available storage
of the E9U. Enablement of the remaining storage slots for each E9U expansion module
requires purchase of the capacity expansion feature (#1640).
371
3576-L5B IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library

The IBM 3576 System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Model L5B is a 5U base library unit that
contains the library control module, fixed tape cartridge storage of 30 slots, a configurable I/O
station of six slots, a touch-screen display, cartridge handling robotics, and up to two LTO
Ultrium tape drives. The library comes standard with enablement allowing access to one half
of the total storage slots of the first Model E9U Expansion Module for future expansion of the
TS3310 Tape Library.
3577-L5U IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library

The IBM 3577 TS3400 Tape Library Model L5U is an external 5U stand-alone or
rack-mountable unit that incorporates up to two IBM System Storage TS1120 Tape Drives
Model E05 (Machine Type 3592, Model E05), which are ordered separately. It comes with
4-Gbps dual-ported switched fabric Fibre Channel attachment. The TS1120 Tape Drive has a
native data transfer rate of up to 100 MBps per drive.
3581 TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Autoloader

The IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Autoloader models offer high capacity, performance, and
technology designed for the midrange open systems environment. These models incorporate
a single LTO IBM TotalStorage Ultrium 2 Tape Drive, which more than doubles tape drive
performance over the generation 1 LTO Ultrium Tape Drives (Ultrium 1), for up to 35 MBps
native data transfer rate (70 MBps with 2:1 compression).
In addition, with the use of the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge, the
Ultrium 2 Tape Drive has the capability of writing twice as much data, up to 200 GB native
capacity (400 GB with 2:1 compression). IBM Ultrium 2 Tape Drives can read and write
original LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 1 capacities and with an improved
performance of up to 20 MBps for the native data transfer rate.
Model 3581-H17 and L17

The IBM 3581 Models H17 and L17 have seven cart slots, 0.7 TB data capacity (native), 1.4
data capacity (compaction), and one Ultrium tape drive. The H17 Model is equipped with an
HVD Ultra SCSI, and the L17 Model is equipped with an LVD Ultra2 SCSI.
Model 3581-H23 and L23

The IBM 3581 Model H23 comes with an HVD Ultra SCSI attachment for connection to a wide
spectrum of open systems servers. The IBM 3581 Model L23 comes with an LVD Ultra160
SCSI attachment.
Model 3581-F28 and L28

The IBM 3581 Model L28 comes with a LVD Ultra 160 SCSI attachment. It can be converted
to an HVD Ultra SCSI attachment with HVD Converter Kit feature number 3104. The IBM
3581 Model F28 comes with a Native Switched Fabric Fibre Channel attachment.
Model 3581-F3H and L3H

The IBM 3581 Model L3H comes with an LVD Ultra160 SCSI attachment, and the Model F3H
comes with a native switched fabric 2 Gbps Fibre Channel attachment. Both models come
with a Rack Mount Kit (kit includes a rack mount power cord) and no country external power
cord.
The 3581 Tape Autoloader is an external 2U stand-alone or rack-mountable unit that
incorporates a single IBM LTO Ultrium 3 Tape Drive. The 3581 Tape Autoloader capacity is
eight tape cartridges, providing a media capacity of up to 3.2 TB (6.4 TB with 2:1
compression) data storage per unit.
372
Other Ultrium 3 Tape Drive enhancements to help improve performance and reliability include
the addition of a dual-stage 16-head actuator, independent tape loader and threader motors
with positive pin retention, graceful dynamic braking, a larger 128 MB internal buffer, and
highly integrated electronics using IBM-engineered copper technology.
3582-L23 IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Library

The IBM 3582-L23 is an entry-level Ultrium Tape Library that can accommodate one or two
Ultrium 3 or Ultrium 2 Tape drives and comes standard with a one-cartridge I/O station and 23
data cartridge slots, giving a native library capacity of up to 9.6 TB uncompressed data
storage.
3583 TotalStorage Ultrium Scalable Tape Library

The IBM 3583 TotalStorage Ultrium Scalable Tape Library is an automated tape library that
incorporates IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drives. It attaches to iSeries, AS/400,
pSeries, RS/6000, RS/6000 SP, xSeries, Netfinity, zSeries, Linux, and other UNIX and PC
servers that support OS/400, AIX, Sun Solaris, HP-UX, Microsoft Windows NT, Microsoft
Windows 2000, and Microsoft Windows 2003 open systems with a SCSI.
Model 3583-L18
The IBM 3583 Model L18 has 18 cartridge slots and one to six IBM Ultrium Tape Drives.
Model 3583-L36
The IBM 3583 Model L36 has 36 cartridge slots and one to six IBM Ultrium Tape Drives.
Model 3583-L72
The IBM 3583 Model L72 has 72 cartridge slots, including a 12-cartridge I/O station, and one
to six IBM Ultrium Tape Drives.
3584-L22 IBM TS3500 Tape Library

The IBM TotalStorage 3584 Tape Library Base Frame Model L22 has 58 to 260 cartridge
slots. It also has support for up to twelve IBM System Storage TS1120 Tape Drives (3592
Model E05) or IBM TotalStorage 3592 Tape Drives Model J1A with an incremental reduction
of storage slots beyond four drives or with Additional I/O Slots.
This model has the same footprint as the Model L52, which is a smaller footprint than the
Model L32. Data capacity for the Model L22 using 3592 data cartridges is 130 TB native and
52 to 390 TB using 3592 data compression at 3:1 compression. Aggregate library data rates
of up to 75 TB/hour for a fully configured 3584 library allow extremely high data transfer
performance. Up to 15 IBM TotalStorage 3584 Tape Library Expansion Frame Models D22,
D32, or D52 can be attached to the Model L22, supporting IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium 1 or
2 Tape Drives and cartridges or the IBM 3592 Tape Drives and cartridges. Up to 12 logical
libraries or up to 12 control paths can be configured for each frame. Each Model L22 library
has a standard 16-slot cartridge I/O station for importing or exporting 3592 cartridges from
the library without requiring a re-inventory. Optional features can provide an additional 16 I/O
slots for LTO Ultrium or 3592 tape cartridges.
For bulk-loading of tape cartridges, the library door can be opened. Each time the library door
is closed, a barcode reader mounted on the autochanger scans the cartridge labels enabling
a re-inventory of the cartridges in the library frame in less than 60 seconds. A door lock is
included to restrict physical access to cartridges in the library. The library capacity and
number of drives can be expanded to meet changing needs.
373

The IBM 3584 TS3500 Tape Library Model L23 is a base frame designed for TS1120 or 3592
Tape Drives and 3592 data cartridges. The Model L23 base frame has 58 to 260 cartridge
slots and support for up to 12 tape drives with an incremental reduction of storage slots for
more than four drives or with the additional I/O station installed. This model has a smaller
footprint than the Model L32. The TS3500 Tape Library Model L23 is designed with an
optimized gripper for use with LTO or 3592 tape cartridges. Up to 12 logical libraries (one per
tape drive) can be configured for each frame.
Each Model L23 library has a standard 16-slot cartridge I/O station for importing or exporting
3592 tape cartridges from the library without requiring a re-inventory. An additional 16-slot
cartridge I/O is optionally available for either LTO or 3592 data cartridges. Libraries that
contain a mixture of LTO and 3592 drive technologies must have one LTO I/O station and one
3592 I/O station. For bulk loading of tape cartridges, the library door can be opened. Each
time the library door is closed, a barcode reader mounted on the autochanger is designed to
scan the cartridge labels, which enables a re-inventory of the cartridges in the library frame in
as little as 60 seconds. A door lock is included to restrict physical access to cartridges in the
library.
3584-L52 IBM TotalStorage Tape Library

The IBM TotalStorage 3584 Tape Library Base Frame Model L52 has 64 to 287 cartridge
slots. It also has support for up to twelve IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drives with an
incremental reduction of storage slots beyond four drives or with additional I/O slots. This
model has the same footprint as the Model L22, which is a smaller footprint than the Model
L32.
Up to 15 IBM TotalStorage 3584 Tape Library Expansion Frame 3584 Models D22, D32, or
D52 can be attached to the Model L52, supporting IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drives
and cartridges or the IBM TotalStorage 3592 Enterprise Tape Drive and cartridges. Up to 12
logical libraries and/or up to 12 control paths can be configured for each frame. Each Model
L52 library has a standard 16-slot cartridge I/O station for importing or exporting LTO
cartridges from the library without requiring a re-inventory. Optional features can provide an
additional 16 I/O slots for LTO Ultrium or 3592 tape cartridges.
For bulk-loading of tape cartridges, the library door can be opened. Each time the library door
is closed, a barcode reader mounted on the autochanger scans the cartridge labels enabling
a re-inventory of the cartridges in the library frame in less than 60 seconds. A door lock is
included to restrict physical access to cartridges in the library. The library capacity and
number of drives can be expanded to meet changing needs.

The IBM 3584 TS3500 Tape Library Model L53 is a base frame designed for TS1030 LTO
Ultrium Fibre Channel Tape Drives and LTO data cartridges. The Model L53 base frame has
64 to 287 cartridge slots. It has support for up to 12 tape drives with an incremental reduction
of storage slots for more than four drives or with the additional I/O station installed. This
model has a smaller footprint than the Model L32. The TS3500 Tape Library Model L53 is
designed with an optimized gripper for use with LTO or 3592 tape cartridges. Data capacity
for the Model L53 depends on the types of LTO Ultrium cartridges, up to 230 TB of physical
capacity (at 2:1 compression) using LTO-DC with Ultrium 3 data cartridges. Up to 12 logical
libraries (one per tape drive) can be configured for each frame.
Each Model L53 library has a standard 16-slot cartridge I/O station for importing or exporting
LTO tape cartridges from the library without requiring a re-inventory. An additional 16-slot
cartridge I/O is optionally available for either LTO or 3592 data cartridges. Libraries that
374
contain a mixture of LTO and 3592 drive technologies must have one LTO I/O station and one
3592 I/O station.
For bulk loading of tape cartridges, the library door can be opened. Each time the library door
is closed, a barcode reader mounted on the autochanger is designed to scan the cartridge
labels enabling a re-inventory of the cartridges in the library frame in as little as 60 seconds. A
door lock is included to restrict physical access to cartridges in the library.
3995-Cxx IBM Optical Library Dataserver

The IBM 3995 C-Series family is based upon 5.2 GB (8x) 5.25-inch Extended Multifunction
optical drive technology, which enables support for magneto-optical (MO) rewritable,
Permanent Write Once/Read Many (WORM), and Continuous Composite WORM (CCW)
recording technologies in a single library. The latest generation of the 3995 C-Series family
features 5.25-inch, industry-standard 5.2 GB (referred to as 8x) Extended Multifunction
Optical Drives. This family provides double the capacity over the previous 2.6 GB technology,
allowing twice as much data to be stored on an optical cartridge.
Five SCSI-attached models are available, ranging from 104 GB to 1.341 TB (unformatted
capacity), to support solutions in the open systems environment. Five AS/400-attached
models are available, ranging from 104 GB to 1.341 TB (unformatted capacity) to support
solutions in the AS/400 environment. Five LAN-attached models are available, ranging from
104 GB to 1.341 TB (unformatted capacity) to support solutions in the token-ring and
Ethernet LAN environments. Four S/390-attached models are available, ranging from 270 GB
to 1.341 TB (unformatted capacity) to support solutions in the S/390 environment. Three
expansion units are available to further increase S/390 storage capacity up to 2.682 TB
(unformatted capacity) per optical library subsystem.
3996 IBM Optical Library with Ultra Density Optical

The 3996 IBM Optical Library with Ultra Density Optical (UDO) is an externally attached
storage library that uses 60-GB and 30-GB optical disc technology. The 3996, which is offered
in three models, is available for use with the System i (i5/OS V5R4) and System p family of
workstations and systems. It attaches through an external system adapter.
The 3996 library must be the only device attached to an adapter on a System i or System p
model. Attaching a second external device to the same adapter as 3996 is not supported.
The 3996 uses an LVD SCSI.
Each 3996 library supports the following features:
Support of an optical drive that is capable of reading or writing on optical discs, providing
up to 60 GB of optical storage if that library has either a 60 GB Gen 2 optical drive or a mix
of both 60 GB Gen 2 and 30 GB Gen 1 optical drives
Compatibility of the two optical disk storage types:
The Ultra Density Optical level 2 (UDO2) optical disk, which is designed to hold up to
60 GB per cartridge and is read and write compatible in a Gen 2 drive only
The Gen 1 disk, which is designed to hold up to 30 GB per cartridge
Gen 1 media is read and write compatible in a Gen 1 UDO drive, and read-only
compatible in a UDO Gen 2 drive.
Support of WORM and rewritable recording technologies in a single library
An orderable update feature to the microcode of an installed 3996 Optical Library (Model
032, 080, and 174) to the latest microcode firmware level
A barcode reader as an optional feature
375
An LVD SCSI
There are three models of the 3996 Library:

Model 032 has storage slots for up to 32 optical disk cartridges.
If the 30 GB Gen 1 drive feature is selected in a Model 032, total maximum storage
capacity is 960 GB. If the 60 GB Gen 2 drive feature is selected in a Model 032, maximum
storage capacity is 1.92 TB (one terabyte equals 1,000 GB).
The model 032 has one optical disk drive and an option for adding a second drive. If two
drives are selected, they may be either Gen 2, Gen 1, or a combination of one Gen 2 and
one Gen 1. Maximum capacities achieved in the library vary with the mix of optical disk
media loaded in the library.
If the Gen 1 drive feature is selected in a Model 080, total maximum storage capacity is
2.4 TB. If the Gen 2 drive feature is selected in a Model 080, maximum storage capacity is
4.8 TB.
The Model 080 has two optical disk drives with an option of increasing to up to four drives.
Adding more drives reduces the number of disk slots to 72. If additional drives are
selected, they may be either Gen 2 or Gen 1 drives. Maximum capacities achieved vary
with the mix of optical disk media and the number of optical drives installed in the library.
If the Gen 1 drive feature is selected in a Model 174, total maximum storage capacity is
5.2 TB. If the Gen 2 drive feature is selected in a Model 174, maximum storage capacity is
10.4 TB.
The Model 174 has two optical disk drives with an option of increasing to up to four drives.
Adding more drives reduces the number of disk slots to 166. If additional drives are
selected, they may be either Gen 2 or Gen 1 drives. Maximum capacities achieved in the
library vary with the mix of optical disk media and the number of optical drives in the
library.
The 3996 Optical Library models ship with Gen 1 30 GB drives unless feature #9200 (Ship
with 60 GB Gen 2 Drives) is specified. This feature applies only when ordering the base
library. Feature numbers for additional drives are available and must also be specified.
The supported media includes:
Rewritable (Gen 1) 30 GB Media 10 pack: Provides ten rewritable 30 GB media

WORM (Gen 1) 30 GB Media 10 pack: Provides ten WORM 30 GB media
Rewritable (Gen 2) 60 GB Media 10 pack: Provides ten rewritable 30 GB media
WORM (Gen 2) 60 GB Media 10 pack: Provides ten WORM 30 GB media
Cleaner cartridge: Compatible with both Gen 1 and Gen 2 drives
The maximum number of these features that may be ordered (in any combination) with the
3996 Model 032 is two. For the 3996 Model 080 and 3996 Model 174, the maximum is four. If
additional media are required, see announcement letter 107-425 (July 2007) for ordering
instructions.
The 3996 with Gen 1 30 GB drives is supported with System i software level i5/OS V5R3 or
later. The 3996 Optical Library with Gen 2 60 GB drives, or with a mix of Gen 1 and Gen 2
drives, is supported with System i software level i5/OS V5R4 or later.
376
7206-336 IBM External 36 GB DAT72 Tape Drive

The IBM 7206 Model 336 External 36 GB DDS Gen5 Tape Drive is a stand- alone, SCSI,
4 mm streaming tape drive that attaches externally to the System i and System p servers.
7206-VX3 IBM External Tape Drive

The IBM 7206-VX3 External Tape Drive is a stand-alone, SCSI, VXA-320 streaming tape
drive that writes data to tape using a Discrete Packet Format. The tape drive provides a
media capacity of up to 160 GB (320 GB with 2:1 compression) of data storage per cartridge
and a sustained data transfer rate of up to 12.0 MBps.
7206-VX2 IBM External Tape Drive

The IBM 7206-VX2 External Tape Drive is a stand-alone, SCSI, VXA-2 streaming tape drive
that attaches externally to the iSeries server. The 7206-VX2 External Tape Drive writes data
to tape using a Discrete Packet Format. The tape drive provides a media capacity of up to
80 GB (160 GB with 2:1 compression) data storage per cartridge. It has a sustained data
transfer rate of up to 6.0 MBps.
7207-122 IBM 4 GB External SLR5 QIC Tape Drive

The IBM 7207-122 provides up to 4 GB (8 GB with 2:1 compression) data storage per
cartridge, which is over three times the capacity of the 7207 Model 012. It has a sustained
data transfer rate of 380 KB per second (760 KB per second with 2:1 compression). It has two
dual-ported wide connectors and attaches to a wide SCSI bus. New to the Model 122 is an
internal self-test capability so the drive can be checked to verify that it is working properly.
The tape media is enclosed in a self-contained cartridge to minimize wear and avoid
contamination.
7207-330 IBM External SLR60 Tape Drive

The IBM 7207-330 30 GB External SLR60 Tape Drive is an entry-level save and restore
device for medium-capacity fixed disk drive data and applications. The 7207 Model 330 is a
stand-alone streaming tape drive in a single, externally attached enclosure, incorporating new
4-Channel Scalable Linear Recording (SLR) technology for attachment to the iSeries server.
The 7207-330 provides up to 30 GB (60 GB with 2:1 compression) data storage per cartridge
and a sustained data transfer rate of 4 MBps.
7208-012 IBM External 8mm Tape Drive

The IBM 7208-012 is a 5 GB External 8-mm tape drive. Model 012 features a media capacity
of 5 GB per cartridge and a sustained data transfer rate of 500 KB per second. The 7208
Model 012 features data compression hardware using an adaptation of the IBM Improved
Data Recording Capability (IDRC) algorithm, which provides an effective capacity of up to 10
GB typical per cartridge and an effective data transfer rate of 1 MBps typical, depending on
the type of data transferred. Feature Code #0501 counts as one 7208, and the #0502 counts
as two 7208s.
7208-342 IBM 20GB External 8mm Tape Drive

The IBM 7208 Model 342 20GB External 8mm Tape Drive is a stand-alone, SCSI, 8mm
streaming tape drive packaged in a black enclosure that attaches to the AS/400 family of
servers and systems. It provides a media capacity of 20 GB (40 GB with 2:1 compression)
data storage per cartridge and a sustained data rate of 3.0 MBps (6.0 MBps with 2:1
compression). This tape drive has four times the capacity and six times the data rate of the
IBM 7208 Model 012. The 7208 Model 342 features data compression hardware using an
adaptation of the IBM IDRC algorithm
377
7208-345 IBM 60 GB External 8mm Tape Drive

The IBM 7208-345 has a media capacity of 60 GB (150 GB with 2.5:1 compression) data
storage per cartridge and a sustained data rate of 12 MBps (30 MBps with 2.5:1
compression). This tape drive has three times the capacity and four times the data rate of the
IBM 7208 Model 341. The Model 345 features data compression hardware using Adaptive
Lossless Data Compression (ALDC), a state-of-the-art data compression technique
developed by IBM. It also utilizes the IBM Mammoth-2 Advanced Metal Evaporated (AME)
media data cartridge with SmartClean technology.
7212-10x IBM System Storage Tape and DVD Enclosure

The IBM 7212 System Storage Tape and DVD Enclosure Express Model 102 or 103 is
designed to mount in one EIA Unit of a standard 19-inch rack, using an optional rack-mount
hardware feature kit. The 7212 Express Model can be configured with one or two tape or
DVD-RAM optical drives and can be configured for desktop installation. The base unit allows
for a split-bus configuration for connection of each drive to individual external SCSI-LVD
adapters on System i and System p servers. An optional single-bus configuration of the
7212-102 or 103 allows for connection of both drives to only one external SCSI-LVD adapter.
The Express offering for the IBM 7212 Model 102 or 103 is intended to provide external tape
or optical drive options that can be compatible with other archival storage and retrieval
technologies already installed in existing IT facilities. Optional drive technologies available in
the 7212-103 Express offering are:
4mm - DAT72 36 GB tape drive (7212-103 Only)

VXA, VXA-2 80 GB tape drive
VXA-320 160 GB tape drive
SLR (-inch format) - SLR60 37.5 GB tape drive
SLR100 50 GB Tape Drive
LTO - HH-LTO2 200 GB tape drive
DVD-RAM - 9.4 GB optical drive
8.1.1 Notes for storage and media support under i5/OS

The following notes apply to many of the tape device and tape library products and features
previously listed:
The LTO Ultrium tape technologies can read and write to version n-1 and read only to
version n-2. For instance, the LTO Ultrium 4 tape drives can read and write to LTO Ultrium
3 tapes, and can only read LTO Ultrium 2 tapes. An LTO Ultrium 4 tape drive cannot read
or write an LTO Ultrium 1 tape.
i5/OS V5R2 or later is required for LTO 3 support.
i5/OS V5R3 or later is required for LTO 4 support.
The TS3100, TS3200, TS3310, and TS3500 Tape Library products support LTO 3 and
LTO 4 tape drives. The LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive has maximum rated native data rate of
up to 120 MB. LTO Ultrium 3 Tape Drive has a maximum rated native data rate of up to 80
MBps.
The IBM TS2340 is an Ultrium LTO 4 tape drive. It is supported within the IBM System
Storage TS3100 Tape Library to the IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library.
378
For tape support information on the Web, including System i support, refer to the following
Web pages:
For assistance in identifying the Fibre Channel adapter feature numbers that support
tape attachment to System i models, refer to the Host bus adapters (HBAs) Web page
at:
http://www-01.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/config/hba/index.wss
On this page, under Products, select the tape (or disk) storage product. Then under
Operating Systems, select i5/OS under the appropriate IBM System i servers section.
Then click Submit.
For latest marketing status of tape and disk storage related products, see the IBM
System Storage and TotalStorage products Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/product/i.html
The #5775 PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller without IOP provides a PCI-X Disk/Tape SCSI
Controller with zero write cache and without RAID support. Removable media devices
(tape, optical libraries, DVD-ROM, or DVD-RAM) are also supported on the #5775.
The #0647, #5736, #5766, and #5775 are physically the same adapter card. The #5775
should be the first choice over #0624/#0645 (#5702 and #5712 IOP-less equivalent) or
#5705/#5715 controllers for systems running i5/OS V5R3 or later when attaching devices
that do not require an IOP and IOA combination.
The #5775 does not support 358x or 359x tape library devices (includes 3580). Use a
#5702, #5705, #5712, #5715, #5736, or #5766 (IOP-based) to attach a 358x or 359x.
Use the #5775 for attaching a 7210-030 DVD drive, 7212-103 with DVD, LTO-2, -inch
tape drive, or VXA-320 tape drive.
Consider using the #5776 (IOP-less, disks only) controller for disks within a #5095/#0595
I/O enclosure or an EXP24.
Several older technology tape devices supporting QIC SLRnn, 8mm, and early VXA-nn,
data formats are not supported on IOP-less controllers (IOAs). See the IOP-less column in
the two tables at the beginning of this chapter for supported tape devices on IOP-less
controllers.
If a tape or optical device is attached to an IOA or an IOP-IOA combination and that device
is not supported by that hardware feature combination, you will see a System Reference
Code in the Product Activity Log (PAL). A properly authorized user to the Start Service
Tools command functions can view this log. SRC codes in the PAL that indicate device
not supported include:
63A03202 or 57xx3202: The attached device type is not supported in an IOP-less

environment.
63A09020 or 57xx9020: This error is reported when one of the following conditions
occur:
An unsupported device type or model is attached to the system.
Both tape and disk drive devices are attached to an IOP or IOA card that does not
support both tape and disk devices at the same time.
The tape library requires a resource, and no resource is reported.
Two tape library resources are attempting to allocate the same resource.
For D-mode IPL, the device SCSI address must be set to 0.

3580 L33/L3H and H3L (Ultrium 3) support requires V5R2 or later. There is no HVD
support for Ultrium 3.
379
The maximum number of automated tape library drives supported depends on the adapter
that is used to attach to the System i model.
External optical storage for System i models includes the 3995 Optical Library Dataserver,
the 3996 Optical Library, 399F Optical Library (Plasmon G-Series), 7210-020 External
CD-ROM, the 7210-025 External DVD-RAM and the 7210-030 External DVD-RAM.
For more information on 399F refer to the Plasmon Web site at:
http://www.plasmon.com
The following optical devices are supported on IOP-less IOAs:
4.7 GB DVD-RAM: #6330, #6333, #7210-025 (#6330), #7210-030 (#6333), #7212-102

with FC #1103 (#6333), #7212-102 with FC #1102 (#6330)
4.7 GB SLIM DVD-RAM: #6331
DVD-ROM: #6336, #7212-102 with FC #1106 (#6336)
SLIM DVD-ROM: #6337
For information on optical devices supported under i5/OS, refer to:
http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i/hardware/storage/optical/index.html
Update Device Microcode API: The Update Device Microcode API (QTAUPDDV) allows
tape device microcode to be updated using an image that is copied from the Web. This
function is supported with Version 5 and later i5/OS systems and OS/400.
8.1.2 Alternate IPL or alternate installation device considerations

The term alternate IPL or ALT-IPL is used in this publication to describe both alternate IPL
devices and alternate installation devices. It is important to understand the differences. For
pre-POWER5 and POWER6 processor-based servers, an alternate IPL device must be
attached to the first system bus (bus one), and an alternate installation device can be
attached to any bus except bus one.
Alternate installation device support allows you to perform installation and recovery
procedures using a combination of devices. Prior to OS/400 V4R1, these types of activities
can only be performed using devices that are attached to the first system bus. The first
system bus connects to the service processor IOP. Typically, this is where the optical device
or tape devices used for installations are attached. From OS/400 V4R1 onward, you have
more choices depending upon the processor technology of the system, the POWER5 and
POWER6 partition configuration, use of an HMC, and specific disk, tape, and optical
attachment adapters and attached devices that support alternate IPL, alternate installation,
and load source.
An alternate restart (IPL) device can be a tape drive or an optical device. The media in the
alternate restart device is what the system uses to start from when you perform a D-mode
initial program load (IPL). The alternate restart device loads the Licensed Internal Code
contained on the removable media instead of the code on the load source disk unit.
Not all tape and optical devices and adapters supported on the system can be used for
alternate restart (IPL). Over time, some of these restrictions will be removed for selected
hardware. Review the individual adapter and device feature descriptions in this publication in
380
When ordering a new configuration, the System Planning Tool (SPT) can be used to assist
you in the alternate restart device placement for your IBM i logical partitions. For more
information on SPT, go to:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/power/csp/
For multiple partition environments, you must specify an adapter that has a supported
alternate IPL device attached for your partition. Starting with POWER6 models, you can do
an IPL-type D from a tape device attached by a Fibre Channel interface only when it is
attached to an adapter without an input/output processor (IOP). Two adapters supporting this
are the #5749 and #5774.
For other system models and configurations, a tape device attached by a Fibre Channel
adapter supporting alternate IPL can be explicitly set up as an alternate installation device.
You use the Dedicated Service Tools (DST) interface to ensure this is set up correctly and
perform the function. In a multiple partition environment you can use the HMC to specify the
IOP or adapter with a device supporting alternate IPL and activate DST for a partition.
Refer to the following publications or Web sites for more information on how to effectively set
up alternate IPL or alternate installation devices.
Support up through IBM i 5.4: System i and System p Logical Partitioning Guide,
SA76-0098-02 available at:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/iseries/v5r4/index.jsp
Expand Systems management Logical partitioning

Select Partitioning an iSeries server Printable PDFs
IBM i 6.1: System i Systems management Logical partitions Version 6 Release 1,
available at:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/scope/i5os/index.jsp
Expand Systems management Logical partitions

Select PDF file for logical partitions
System i and System p: Partitioning for i5/OS with an HMC, PDF, available at:
IBM i 5.4: IBM Systems - iSeries Backup and Recovery Version 5 Revision 4,
SC41-5304-08, PDF, available at:
Search for SC41-5304

IBM i 6.1: System i Systems management Recovering your system Version 6 Release 1,
SC41-5304-09, PDF, available at:
8.2 SAN components for System i and iSeries systems

i5/OS supports tape attachment via SAN using Fibre Channel Tape Controller (Adapter)
features #2765, #5704, or #5761. Disk attachment via storage area networks (SAN) is
supported by Fibre Channel Disk Controller features #2766, #2787, or #5760.
381
For information about SANs that are supported by iSeries servers, refer to the following Web
pages:
Storage area network (SAN) scalable, flexible storage infrastructure
http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/storage/san/index.html
Support for Storage area network (SAN)

http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/san/index.html
8.2.1 Virtualization Engine TS7510 and TS7520 support

i5/OS supports the hardware attachment of the TS7510 and TS7520 via Fibre Channel Tape
Controller (Adapter) features #2765, #5704, or #5761 at i5/OS V5R2 and later. The TS7510
and TS7520 are hardware and software solutions that can assist multiple open systems
backups. The operating system sees tape library devices and thus uses tape configuration
and interfaces, but the data is stored on disks.
Support under i5/OS is available as a request for price quotation (RPQ). RPQ-level support
indicates limited availability of the support, and there are currently restrictions in that support
under i5/OS.
To order the i5/OS RPQ that supports attachment of the IBM System Storage Virtualization
Engine TS7510 and TS7520, contact your local IBM System Storage representative. They
will submit a request through the country-specific RPQ order process.
For more information, consult the following Redbooks publications:
The IBM Virtualization Engine TS7510: Getting Started with i5/OS and Backup Recovery
and Media Services, SG24-7510
IBM TS7520 Virtualization Engine: Planning, Implementation, and Usage Guide,
SG24-7520
Implementing IBM Tape in i5/OS, SG24-7440
382
8.3 QIC tape specifications and compatibility for System i

models
The following table provides device specifications, performance, and compatibility details for
internal QIC tape formats.
IBM tape device
QIC2 GB
QIC2 GB
DC
Drive storage capability
2.5 GBa
MLR3
SLR
60
SLR
100
2.5 GBa 4 GB
13 GBa 16 GB
25 GB
30 GB
50 GB
LZ1
LZ1
LZ1
LZ1
LZ1
LZ1
LZ1
V4R1
V4R1
V4R1
V3R7
V4R1
V4R1
V4R5
V5R1
Native
data
transfer
rate
Media
Media part #6380

number
#6480
#6381
#6481
#4482
#4582
#6382
#6482720
7-122
#6385b
#6485b
#4483
#4583
#6383
#6483
#4486
#4586
#6386
#6486
#4584
#4684
#5753c
#6384
#6484
#9284
#9653c
7207-330
#4487
#4587
#5754c
#8287
#8754c
#4687
7329-380
25 GBe
2 MBps
MLR3-25GB
59H4128
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
R/W
R/W
16 GB
1.5 MBps
MLR1-16GB
59H4175
--
--
--
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
13 GB
1.5 MBps
DC5010
16G8574
--
--
--
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Capacity
Format
MLR3 d
QIC5010
MLR1
QIC
5010
DC
MLR1
QIC
5010
DC
Compaction algorithm
Minimum OS/400 level
4/8GB
SLR5
QIC4 GB DC
2 GB
1.5 MBps
MLR1-2 GB
35L0589
--
--
--
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
8 GB
760 KB/s
SLR5-4 GB
59H3660
--
--
R/W
--
QIC4GB
4 GB
380 KB/s
SLR5-4 GB
59H3660
--
--
R/W
--
QIC2DCf
5 GB
600 KB/s
DC9250
16G8436
--
R/W
R/W
--
QIC2GB
2.5 GB
300 KB/s
DC9250
16G8436
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
QIC1000
1.2 GB
300 KB/s
DC9120
21F8730
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
--
--
QIC525
525 MB
200 KB/s
DC6525
21F8597
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/Wg
--
--
QIC525
320 MB
200 KB/s
DC6320
21F8583
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
--
--
QIC120
120 MB
120 KB/s
DC6150
21F8578
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/Wg
--
--
QIC24h
60 MB
--
--
--
--
SLR100
50 GB
5 MBps
SLR10050GB
35L0968
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
5 GB
5 MBps
SLR1005GB
35L0961
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
R/W
30 GB
4 MBps
SLR6030GB
19P4209
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
R/W
37.5 GB
4 MBps
SLR6037.5 GB
24R0146
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
R/W
QIC4DC
SLR60
DC6150
a. Available as a migration feature only during an upgrade.

b. The internal 13 GB tape drives with feature code #6385 or #6485 also supports the 16 MB IBM MLR1 tape media.
c. Requires i5/OS V5R3
d. Indicates that the capacity can double typically when the compression option is selected.
e. Minimum operating system to support the 25GB capacity cartridge drive: V4R1.
f. QIC-2DC and QIC-4DC are compression formats. Cartridge capacity is data dependent. Capacities shown are typical.
g. Use of DC6150 and DC6525 media can shorten the life of the tape device and require more frequent maintenance.
h. QIC24 format is written by S/36.
383
8.4 VXA, LTO, and DAT tape specifications and compatibility

for System i models
The following table provides device specifications, performance, and compatibility details for
internal LTO and VXA tape formats.
IBM tape device
VXA-2
VXA 320 LTO-2

4MM
Tape Unit DAT72
Drive storage capability
80 GB
160 GB
200 GB
Compaction algorithm
ALDC
ALDC
SLDC
Minimum operating system level
OS/400
V5R1
i5/OS
V5R3
i5/OS
V5R3
i5/OS
V5R4
#5755
6258
9258
36 GB
Format
Native
Media
Capacity
Native
data
transfer
ratea
Media
Media part
number
#1889b
#4585
#4685
#9285
#9689b
#6279
VXA1f,b
59 GB
6 MBps
V17-59GB
19P4877
R/W
--
--
20 GB
6 MBps
V6-20GB
19P4878
R/W
--
--
20 GB
6 MBps
V6-test
19P4879
R/W
--
--
80 GB
6 MBps
V23-80GB
19P4876
R/W
R/W
--
59 GB
6 MBps
V17-59GB
19P4877
R/W
--
--
20 GB
6 MBps
V6-20GB
19P4878
R/W
--
--
20 GB
6 MBps
V6-test
19P4879
R/W
--
--
80 GB
6 MBps
X23-80GB
24R2137
R/W
R/W
--
40 GB
6 MBps
X10-40GB
24R2136
R/W
R/W
--
20 GB
6 MBps
X6-20GB
24R2134
R/W
R/W
--
20 GB
6 MBps
X6-test
24R2135
R/W
R/W
--
80 GB
12 MBps
V23-80GB
19P4876
--
R/W
--
80 GB
12 MBps
X23-80GB
24R2137
--
R/W
--
40 GB
12 MBps
X10-40GB
24R2136
--
R/W
--
20 GB
12 MBps
X6-20GB
24R2134
--
R/W
--
20 GB
12 MBps
X6-test
24R2135
--
R/W
--
LTO 1
100 GB
24 MBps
LTO Ultrium 1
09L9120
R/W
--
LTO 2
200 GB
35 MBps
LTO Ultrium 2
08L9870
R/W
--
DAT72f
(DDS5)
36 GB
3 MBps
DAT72
18P7912
--
--
--
R/W
20 GB
3 MBps
DDS4
59H4456
--
--
--
R/W
12 GB
3 MBps
DDS3
59H3465
--
--
--
R/W
VXA2
VXA3
f,c
f,d,e,5
a. Throughput up to 2X with data compression.

b. Feature Code #8755 is an optional replacement for a 4 mm tape drive in System i Model 515 Express
Configuration 1 or 3.
c. The VXA-2 drive can use VXA1 and VXA2 formats.
d. The VXA3 format doubles the native capacity of the media.
e. The VXA-320 drive can use VXA2 and VXA3 formats. The VXA-320 drive can read VXA-1 formats.
f. Indicates that the capacity and data transfer rate can double typically when the compression option is
selected.
384
8.5 External SCSI, Fibre Channel tape, and optical cable part
numbers for IBM System i and iSeries systems
The following tables provide the cable part number for SCSI and Fibre Channel-attached
devices. Part numbers might not be available in all countries or regions.
Note: The length in feet is rounded to the nearest whole number.
SCSI cables for #2729 PCI Magnetic Media Controller, #2749 PCI Ultra Magnetic Media Controller, #6534 Magnetic Media
Controller, and #6501 Tape/Disk Device Controller
Tape drive
Length
Part number
Feature code
3490 C10, C11, C22

with #5040 - SCSI attach
#6501 attach only
4.5m (15 ft)

12.0m (39 ft)
18.0m (59 ft)
61G8328
61G8329
61G8330
6045
6120
6180
3490 E01, E11

3590 B11, B1A, E11, E1A, H11, H1A
2.8m (9 ft) (HD68 to HD68)

4.5m (15 ft) (HD68 to HD68)
12.0m (39 ft)(HD68 to HD68)
18.0m (59 ft)(HD68 to HD68)
25.0m (82 ft)(HD68 to HD68)
05H4647
05H4648
05H4649
05H4650
05H4651
5128
5145
5112
5118
5125
3490 F00, F01, F11

3570 BXX and CXX
7208 - 342
9427 - 210, 211
0.5m (2 ft) (HD68 to HD68)

4.5m (15 ft) (HD68 to HD68)
12.0m (39 ft)(HD68 to HD68)
18.0m (59 ft)(HD68 to HD68)
25.0m (82 ft)(HD68 to HD68)
49G6456
49G6457
49G6458
49G6459
08L6201
5205
5245
5212
5218
5225 (3570 Cxx)
3580-H11, H13, H23

3581-H17
3581-L28 (with #3104 HVD converter)
3582-L23
3583 HVD drives
3584 HVD drives
#1455 if shipped prior to 31 August
2001, and HVD drives #1465 a
0.41m (1.5 ft)(HD68 to HD68)

0.72m (2.4 ft) (HD68 to HD68)
2.5m (8 ft)(HD68 to HD68)
5.0m (16 ft) (HD68 to HD68)
10.0m (33 ft)(HD68 to HD68)
18.0m (59 ft) (HD68 to HD68)
25.0m (82 ft) (HD68 to HD68)
VHDCI to HD68 interposer
Interposer for #6501
19P0872
19P0873
35L1307
19P0052
19P0053
19P0097
19P0054
19P0482
05H3834
5302 (9702 - 3580, 3581)

5305 (9705 - 3583)
5310
5318
5325
5099
2895
a. 3584 HVD drives #1455 shipped on or after 31 August 2001 and HVD drives #1475 have VHDCI connectors. These drives can
use the VHDCI to HD68 cables shown for adapters #5702 and #5705, or they require the VHDCI to HD68 interposer.
385
SCSI cables for #2729 PCI Magnetic Media Controller, #2749 PCI Ultra Magnetic Media Controller, and #6534 Magnetic Media
Controller
Tape drive
Length
Part number
Feature code
3995 - C4x
12.0m (39 ft)

12.0m (39 ft) (for #2621 attach only)
05H5543
05H5439
7401/9401
7400/9400
7208 - 012
1.5m (5 ft)
4.0m (13 ft)
12.0 (39 ft)
52G0174
59H3462
59H3463
2871
2903
2904
7208 - 222/ 232/234

9348 - 001/002
1.0m (3 ft)
4.0m (13 ft)
12.0m (39 ft)
06H6037
59H3460
59H3461
2875
2901
2902
7208 - 342
4.5m (15 ft)

12.0m (39 ft)
18.0m (59 ft)
49G6457
49G6458
49G6459
5245/9245
5212/9212
5218/9218
SCSI cables for #2718 PCI Magnetic Media Controller and #2768 PCI Magnetic Media Controller
Tape drive
Length
Part number
Feature code
7206-VX2
7206-VX3
1.5m (5 ft) (HD68 to HD68)

2.5m (8 ft) (HD68 to HD68)
19P4506
35L1307
5300/9750
5302/9752
7207 - 122
7207 - 330
7208 - 345
1.5m (5 ft) (HD68 to HD68)

2.5m (8 ft) (HD68 to HD68)
19P4506
35L1307
5300/9750
5302/9752
7210 - 020
1.0m (3 ft) (HD68 to LD50)
06H6037
2872/9148
7210 - 025a
7210 - 030b, c
7212 - 102b, c
1.5m (5 ft) (HD68 to HD68)

2.5m (8 ft) (HD68 to HD68)
19P4506
35L1307
5300/9750
5302/9752
7329 - 308
2.4m (8ft) (HD68 to HD68)
67G1260
5224/9224
a. Maximum cable length for the 7210-025 is 2.5 m.

b. The Model 7210-030 and 7212-102 do not connect via the #2718.
c. The maximum cable length attached to the #2768 is 2.5 m.
386
SCSI cables for the #5715/#5705 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller (one port), #5702 PCI-X Ultra Tape Controller/#5712 PCI-X
Tape/DASD Controller (two ports, VHDCI interface), #0647/#5775 PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller without IOP and #5736 PCI-X
Disk/Tape Controller with IOP/#5766 PCI-X Tape Controller
Tape drive
Length
Part number
Feature code
3580-L23
3582 Drives #8103, #8203
3583 Drives #8103
2.5m (8 ft) (VHDCI to HD68)

4.5m (14.5 ft) (VHDCI to HD68)
Interposer VHDCI to HD68
19P0279
19P0050
19P0048
19P0049
35L1977
19P0872
5602 (9703 - 3580)

5604 (9704 - 3583)
5610
5620
5625
5099
3581-L28

CRUa
5602 (9703)
5604
5610
5625
3584 Drives #1474
4.5m (14.5 ft) (VHDCI to VHDCI)

10.0m (33 ft) (VHDCI to VHDCI)
19P2499
09L0881
19P1904
19P2500
5704
5710
5702
5725
3996-032, 080, 174

19P0050
19P0048
5604
5610
7206-VX2
7206-VX3
7206-336
7208-345

4.5m (14.5 ft) (VHDCI to HD68)b
10.0m (33 ft) (VHDCI to HD68) b
19P4508
19P0279
19P0050
19P0048
5601/9761
5602/9762
5604/9764
5610/9760
7207 - 122

19P4508
19P0279
5601/9761
5602/9762
7207 - 330

10.0m (33 ft) (VHDCI to HD68)b
19P4508
19P0279
19P0050
19P0048
5601/9761
5602/9762
5604/9764
5610/9760
7210 - 020
1.0m (3 ft) (HD68 to LD50)

also require interposer VHDCI to HD68
06H6037
19P0482
2872/9148
5099
7210 - 025

19P4507
19P4508
19P0279
5600/9765
5601/9761
5602/9762
7210 - 030b

19P4507
19P4508
19P0279
19P0050
5600/9765
5601/9761
5602/9762
5604/9764
7212 - 102b

10.0m (33 ft) (VHDCI to HD68)b
19P4507
19P4508
19P0279
19P0050
19P0048
5600/9765
5601/9761
5602/9762
5604/9764
5610/9760
a. Customer Replaceable Unit; use feature code to order.

b. The 4.5 m and 10.0 m cable can be used only if the 7206-VX2, 7206-336, 7207-330, 7212-102, or 7208-345 is the only device
on the bus.
387
Fibre Channel cables for #5704 PCI-X Fibre Channel Tape Controller (LC) and #2765 PCI Fibre Channel Tape Controller (LC)
Tape device
Length
Part number
Feature code
3581-F28
5m (16 ft) Fibre Channel (LC-LC)

7m (23 ft) Fibre Channel (LC-SC)
CRUa
#6005
#6025
#6061
#5907
#5922
#5961
3582 Drives #8105, #8205

19K1252
11P3880
19K1253
11P3884
11P3895
11P3896
11P3897
11P3900
#6005
#6013
#6025
#6061
#5907
#5913
#5922
#5961
3583 Drives #8105 or

SDGM

5m (16 ft) Fibre Channel (SC-SC)
19K1252
11P3880
19K1253
11P3884
11P3895
11P3896
11P3897
11P3900
03K9202
54G3386
03K9204
54G3390
#6005
#6013
#6025
#6061
#5907
#5913
#5922
#5961
#5805
#5813
#5825
#5861
3584 Fibre Channel Drives

#1456, #1466, #1479

19K1252
11P3880
19K1253
11P3884
11P3895
11P3896
11P3897
11P3900
03K9202
54G3386
03K9204
54G3390
#6005
#6013
#6025
#6061
#5907
#5913
#5922
#5961
#5805
#5813
#5825
#5861
3590-E1A, E11, H1A, H11

11P3895
11P3896
11P3897
11P3900
03K9201
54G3386
03K9203
54G3390
#5907
#5913
#5922
#5961
#5805
#5813
#5825
#5861
3592-J1A

19K1252
11P3880
19K1253
11P3884
11P3895
11P3896
11P3897
11P3900
#6005
#6013
#6025
#6061
#5907
#5913
#5922
#5961
a. Customer Replaceable Unit; use feature code to order
388
8.6 Device cabling rules for #5702, #5705, #5712, #5715, #5736,
#2718, and #2768 PCI Magnetic Media Controller
The #2718, #2768, #5702, #5705, #5712, and #5715 provide Ultra SCSI attachment
capability for an external tape, an external CD-ROM device, or an external DVD-RAM device
that has a Single Ended SCSI. The #5702 PCI-X Ultra Tape Controller and #5712 PCI-X
Tape/DASD Controller have two SCSI ports, each port providing the same attachment
capability of the #2718, #2768, #5705, and #5715. This doubles the capability.
The following devices are supported:
7206-VX2 80 GB External VXA-2 Tape Drive

7206-VX3 160 GB External VXA-320 Tape
7206-336 External DDS Gen 5 Tape Drive
7207-122 4 GB External SLR5 Tape Drive
7207-330 30 GB External SLR60 Tape Drive
7208-345 60 GB External 8mm Tape Drive
7212-102 IBM TotalStorage Storage Device Enclosure
The following combination of devices is supported:
One 7206-VX2
One 7206-VX3
One 7206-336
One 7207-122
One 7207-330
One 7208-345
One 7210-020
One 7210-025
One 7210-030
One 7212-102
One 7329-308
Two 7210-025s
The two devices are daisy-chained.

Two 7210-030s
The two devices are daisy-chaned.

One 7210-025 and one 7210-020
The two devices are daisy-chained with the 7210-025 physically connected first; no #0120
attachment specify code is required for the 7210-020.
One 7210-030 and one 7207-122
The two devices are daisy-chained with the 7207-122 physically connected first.
One 7210-030 and one 7208-345
The two devices are daisy-chained withe the 7208-345 physically connected first.
One 7210-030 and one 7210-025
389
One 7207-122 and one 7210-020
One 7207-122 and one 7210-025
One 7208-345 and one 7210-020
One 7208-345 and one 7210-025
The #0120 7210-020 Attachment Specify is required for each 7210-020 External CD-ROM
drive to be connected directly (not daisy-chained) to the system through a #2718, #2768,
#5702, or #5705.
7210-020: If the 7210-020 is to be daisy chained with another external device, this specify
code must not be present.
The #0162 Extended Single Ended Attach Specify is required when these devices are directly
attached (not second on a daisy-chained string) to an iSeries server via a #2718 PCI
Magnetic Media Controller, #2768 PCI Magnetic Media Controller, #5702 PCI-X Ultra Tape
Controller/#5712 PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller, or #5705//#5715 PCI-X Tape/DASD
Controller.
#0162: If any of these devices are daisy-chained off another device, the #0162 specify
must not be present.
390
Chapter 9.
Customer Card Identification

Numbers cross-reference
In this chapter, we list the Customer Card Identification Number (CCIN) and feature code for
many System i5 family features. The purpose of this chapter is to assist IBM Clients and
personnel in configuring Miscellaneous Equipment Specifications (MES) and upgrades. In
this chapter, we provide a cross-reference for the CCIN reported by the Hardware Resources
Listing with a feature code used for ordering.
The CCIN is used when working from a Hardware Resource Listing. The Hardware Resource
Listing is also known as the Rack Configuration Listing. The entries selected are those that
are most useful when interpreting Hardware Resource Listings.
See Chapter 10, Feature code cross-reference on page 413, for a list of CCINs sorted by
feature code. The feature code is used by marketing to report configurations and work with
upgrades.
Changes have been made to this chapter as of 7 September 2007.
391
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
0047
0121
0122
0135
0136
0145
0150
0151
0152
0165
0226
0272
0290
0297
0298
0299
0047
0121
0122
0135
0136
0145
0150
0151
0152
0165
0226
0272
0290
0297
0298
0299
0329
032A
032B
032C
0330
0331
0332
0333
0334
0335
0336
0337
0338
0339
0340
0341
0342
0343
0344
0348
0349
0350
0351
0352
0353
0354
0355
0356
0357
0358
0359
0360
0361
0362
0364
0365
0368
0380
0381
0382
0329
0327
0328
0367
0330
0331
0332
0333
0334
0335
0336
0337
0338
0339
0340
0341
0342
1460
0344
0348
0349
0350
0351
0352
0353
0354
0355
0356
0357
0358
0359
0360
1461
0362
0364
0365
1462
0380
0381
0382
Device Parity RAID-6 All

Rear Cover - CEC only
Rear Cover - CEC with #7116
AIX Partition Specify
820 Base Processor
820 Base Processor
820 Base Processor
VHDCI Attachment
1 Gbps Ethernet Specify
Renovated by IBM
Ext Tape Attached via #5736, #5775
Model 250 Package - 2295
Model 250 Package - 2296
MES Conversion Analysis for
#5580, #5581
V.24/EIA232 80-ft Cable
Operations Console Cable
Operations Console PCI Cable
V.24/EIA232 20-ft Enh Cable
V.35 20-ft Cable
V.35 50-ft Cable
V.35 80-ft Cable
X.21 20-ft Cable
X.21 50-ft Cable
3m Copper HSL Cable
20-ft Comm Console Cable
V.24/EIA232 20-ft PCI Cable
V.24/EIA232 20-ft E PCI Cable
V.35 20-ft PCI Cable
X.21 20-ft PCI Cable
6m Copper HSL Cable
Comm Console PCI Cable
Parallel Cable
15m Copper HSL Cable
Remote Control Panel Cable
392
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
0383
0446
0446
0446
0447
0447
0448
0448
0530
0531
0532
0550
0551
0553
0599
1307
1308
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1481
1482
1483
1485
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1531
1532
0383
0426
0446
9726
0427
0447
0428
0448
0530
0531
0532
0550
0551
0553
0599
1307
1308
1468
1468
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1481
1482
1483
1485
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1531
1532

512 MB Server Memory
512 MB DDR Server Memory
Base 512 MB Server Memory
1 GB Server Memory
1 GB DDR Server Memory
2 GB Server Memory
Software Version V5R3
#0531 i5/OS V5R3M5 LIC
V5R4 OS, V5R4M0 LIC
#0550 iSeries Rack - 830 Rack
Rack filler kit
1.75 m HSL-2 Cable
2.5 m HSL-2Cable
250 m Optical SPCN Cable
4.3m/200V/25A HD Wired EMEA
6m HSL Optical Cable
6m HSL to HSL-2 Cable
10m HSL to HSL-2 Cable
1.2m HSL-2 Cable
3.5m HSL-2 Cable
10m HSL-2 Cable
15m HSL-2 Cable
Interactive Capacity Card
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1576
1577
1578
1579
1581
1583
1585
1587
1588
1591
1800
1801
1802
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1576
1577
1578
1579
1581
1583
1585
1587
1588
1591
1800
1801
1802
1806
1807
180A
181A
181C
182A
185D
185E
185F
2010
2030
2031
2032
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2050
2051
2052
2058
2066
206A
206B
206C
206D
206E
206F
207A
1806
1807
7882
5636
5639
1827
1857
1858
1859
2010
2030
2031
2032
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2050
2051
2052
4805
2066
2061
2061
2061
2062
2062
2062
2062

Interactive Capacity Card #5229
HSL-2 Ports - 2 Copper
HSL-2 Ports - 2 Optical
12X Channel CEC GX Adapter
IBT 2 port
SCSI to IDE Converter Card
#5636 - IVE - 2x1Gb Ethernet
#5639 - IVE - 4x1Gb Ethernet
Serial-UPS Conversion Cable
2 Enclosure SP Flex Cable
1.6 SPPR CPU for Model 20S
0.7 SPPR CPU for Model 200
1.1 SPPR Processor
1.6 SPPR Processor
2.0 SPPR Processor
3.0 SPPR Processor
5.0 SPPR Processor
6.4 SPPR Processor
11.4 SPPR Processor
16.8 SPPR Processor
PCI Crypto Accelerator
Model 730 2-way Processor
720 (240 CPW) with #1500 Interactive
207B
207C
207D
207E
207F
208A
208B
208C
208D
2114
2118
2159
2160
2164
2176
2183
2207
2208
2248
2250
2252
2253
2289
2290
2290
2291
2291
2292
2295
2295
2296
2296
22A2
22A4
22A5
22A7
22A8
22AA
22AB
2315
2316
2318
2341
2349
2351
2352
2353
2354
2383
2384
2385
2386
2388
2395
2396
2397
2398
23A1
2063
2063
2063
2063
2064
2064
2064
2064
2064
2114
1850
2159
2160
2164
2176
2183
2207
2208
2248
2250
2252
2253
2289
2290
2298
2291
2299
2292
0297
2295
0298
2296
2248
2250
2250
2252
2252
2253
2253
2315
2316
2318
2341
2349
2351
2352
2353
2354
2383
2384
2385
2386
2388
2395
2396
2397
2398
2395

External SCSI Y-Cable
VHDCI to P Converter Cable
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model S40 8-way Processor
Model 270 Processor
Model 270 Processor
Model 270 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor Package 64 MB
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 250 Package
Model 250 Processor
Model 250 Package
Model 250 Processor
270 (950CPW) with #1519 Interactive
Model SB2 8-way Processor
Model S40 ISV 12-way Processor
Model 830 4/8-way Processor
Model 830 1/8-way POD
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 820 Processor
Model 820 Processor
Customer Card Identification Numbers cross-reference
393
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
23A2
23A3
23A4
23A9
23AA
23AB
23AC
23AD
23B1
23B2
23B3
23B4
23B5
23B6
23B8
23B9
23BA
23BB
23BC
23BD
23BE
23C1
23C2
23C3
23C4
23C5
23D1
23D2
23D3
23D4
23D5
23D6
23D8
23D9
23DA
23DB
23DC
23DD
23DE
23E7
23E8
23E9
23EA
23EB
23EC
23ED
23EE
23F0
23F1
23F4
23F5
23F8
23F9
23FA
23FB
23FC
23FD
23FE
2395
2395
2395
2396
2396
2396
2396
2396
2397
2397
2397
2397
2397
2397
2398
2398
2398
2398
2398
2398
2398
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2402
2402
2402
2402
2402
2402
2403
2403
2403
2403
2403
2403
2403
2431
2418
2418
2418
2418
2418
2418
2418
2432
2432
2434
2434
2420
2420
2420
2420
2420
2420
2420

Model 270 Processor with #1518
23FF
2400
2402
2403
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2416
2417
2418
2419
241B
241B
241C
241D
241F
2420
2422
2423
2424
2424
2425
2425
2426
2427
242B
242C
242D
2431
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
243A
2452
2454
2456
2457
2458
245D
2461
25B9
25BA
25BA
25BA
25F0
25EB
246F
246F
25DC
25DC
2486
2487
2487
2420
2400
2402
2403
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2416
2417
2418
2419
2069
2070
2067
2068
2065
2420
2422
2423
1851
2424
1852
2425
2426
2427
2064
2062
2063
2431
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
2061
2452
2454
2456
2457
2458
0153
2461
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2469
0158
0159
2473
2495
2496
2487
2497

Dedicated Domino Processor
Dedicated Domino Processor (2-way)
100 Client Server Processor
3.0 SPPR Processor
6.1 SPPR Processor
Model 730 Processor
0.6m SCSI P-P Cable
Dedicated Domino 2-way Processor
2.5m SCSI P-P Cable
Model 720 Processor
Model 270 Processor
Model 820 Processor
Model 820 Processor
Model 720 Processor
394
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
2488
2488
2488
2498
249B
249C
249D
249E
24A8
24A9
24AA
24AB
24AC
24B0
24B1
24B2
24B3
24B4
24B5
24B8
24B9
24BA
24BB
24BC
24BD
24BE
24C0
24C1
24C2
24C3
24C4
24C5
24C6
24C8
24C9
24CA
24CB
24CC
24CD
24CE
24D0
24D1
24D2
24D3
24D4
24D5
24D6
24D7
24D8
24D9
24DA
24DB
24DC
24DD
24DE
2515
2516
2523
2488
2498
2499
0642
2435
2435
2435
2435
2436
2436
2436
2436
2436
2437
2437
2437
2437
2437
2437
2438
2438
2438
2438
2438
2438
2438
2416
2416
2416
2416
2416
2416
2416
2417
2417
2417
2417
2417
2417
2417
2419
2419
2419
2419
2419
2419
2419
2419
2349
2349
2349
2349
2349
2349
2349
2515
2516
2523

PCI Ultra-3 RAID Adapter
#1540 interactive 8/12-way 840 POD
#1531 Interactive 4/8-way 830 CUoD
C10 Floating Pt Processor
C20 Floating Pt Processor
D80 Processor
2525
2528
2530
2531
2533
2534
2536
2537
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2568
2582
2583
2584
2585
2585
2586
2587
2588
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
259A
25B9
25BA
25BA
25BA
25BA
25BA
25BC
25BD
25BE
25D3
25D5
25EB
25F0
25F8
2525
2528
2530
2413
2533
2534
2536
2537
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2568
2582
2583
9584
2414
9585
2586
2587
2588
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2463
2432
2452
2464
2465
2466
0150
0151
0152
0197
0198
2469
2467
7878
D02 Processor
16.8 SPPR CPU for Model F97
E04 Processor
E06 Processor
E20 Processor
E25 Processor
E35 Processor
E45 Processor
E02 Twinaxial
0.7 SPPR CPU for Model D35
D45 Processor
D50 Processor
D60 Processor
D70 Processor
C06 Processor
D06 Processor
D04 Processor
D10 Processor
D20 Processor
D25 Processor
C04 Processor 8 MB
E50 Processor
E60 Processor
E70 Sort Processor
E80 Sort Processor
E90 (2-way) Sort
E95 (2-way) Sort
F06 Processor
F25 Processor
ASCII Workstation Controller
F02 Processor
Twinaxial Workstation Controller
0.7 SPPR for F04
F10 Processor
F20 Processor
Ext. 1.44 GB Diskette Drive
F35 Processor
F45 Sort Processor
F50 Processor
F60 Sort Processor
F70 Processor 1-way
F80 Processor 2-way
F90 Processor 2-way
F95 Processor 2-way
Model 800 Processor
Model 270 Processor
Model 800 Processor
Model 810 Processor
Model 810 Processor
Model 820 Base Processor
Model 810 Processor
Serial/VPD PCI Card
395
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
2600
2601
2602
2602
2604
2605
2608
2600
2601
2602
2607
2604
2605
2608
2609
2609
2609
2609
2609
2609
2609
2610
2610
2610
2611
2612
2612
2613
2614
2617
2617
2618
2618
2619
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2623
2624
2624
2625
2626
2628
2629
2630
2634
2636
2637
2637
2637
2638
2644
2647
2651
2654
2654
2661
2661
2661
2663
2664
2665
2609
2654
2655
2657
2658
8863
8866
2610
2656
2659
2611
2612
9612
2613
2614
2617
9617
2618
8664
2619
9619
2620
2621
2622
2623
9623
2624
9624
2625
2626
2628
2629
8505
2634
2636
9144
9147
9150
9146
2644
2647
9651
8609
9609
9148
9151
9172
2663
2664
2665
Magnetic Storage Controller

9346 Magnetic Tape Unit Controller
Processor Expansion
9348 Magnetic Tape Unit Attachment
3422 3430 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
ISDN Basic Rate Adapter
2440/9348 HCD Magnetic Tape
Attachment
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line Adapter
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line 20E
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line 20
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line 50E
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line 50
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line 20E
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line 50E
X.21 2-Line Adapter
X.21 2-Line 20
X.21 2-Line 50
DASD Controller
Standard EIA 232/V.24 1-Line/Adapter
V.35 1-Line Adapter
X.21 1-Line Adapter
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
Base Ethernet IOP
Fiber Distributed Data Adapter
Optional Base Fiber DD Interface
16/4 Mbps Token-Ring Adapter
Base 16/4 Mbps Token-Ring IOP
Cryptographic Processor
Removable Media Device Attachment
3490 Magnetic Tape Attachment
Six-Line Comm Controller
Standard Six Line Comm Controller
Storage Device Controller
Store Device Control Specify
Ethrnet/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
Cryptographic Processor-Comm
LAN/WAN/Workstation IOP
I/O Card Unit Conversion
Standard MFIOP/ASCII WSC
Standard MFIOP/Twinaxial WSC
34xx Magnetic Tape Attachment
9348 Model 2 Tape Attachment
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line
Standard EIA 232/V.24 2-line
Twinaxial MFIOP
I/O Attachment Processor
Integrated Fax Adapter
Copper Dist Data Interface
2665
2666
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2673
2674
2680
2682
2683
2685
2686
2688
2691
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2699
2699
26A8
26A9
26AA
26AB
26AC
26AD
26AE
26B0
26B1
26B2
26B3
26B4
26B5
26B6
26B8
26B9
26BA
26BB
26BC
26BD
26BE
26BF
26C0
26C1
26C2
26C3
26C4
26C5
26C6
26C7
26C8
26D0
26D1
8665
2666
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
9673
2674
2680
2682
2683
2685
2686
2688
2691
9691
2692
2693
2694
2695
9696
2699
9699
2351
2351
2351
2351
2351
2351
2351
2352
2352
2352
2352
2352
2352
2352
2353
2353
2353
2353
2353
2353
2353
2353
2354
2354
2354
2354
2354
2354
2354
2354
2354
2461
2461
Optional Base Shielded DD Interface

Frame Relay Adapter
AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter
Shared Bus Interface Card
System Unit Expansion Tower (optical)
PCI Bus IOP
PCI Bus IOP
Optical Bus Adapter
Standard Optical Bus Adapter
Optical Bus Adapter
Optical Bus Receiver (266 Mbps)
Opitcal Bus Receiver (1063 Mbps)
266 Mbps OptiConnect Receiver
1063 Mbps OptiConnect Receive
Optical Link Processor (266 Mbps)
Optical Bus Adapt w/Token Ring
#9691 Base Bus Adapter HSL Copper
Optional Bus Adapt w/Ethernet
Optional Bus Adapt w/Token Ring
Optical Bus Adapter
Base Optical Bus Adapter
2-Line WAN IOA
Base 2-Line WAN IOA
Model 830 1/8-way POD with #1531
Model 840 24-way Processor with #1540
396
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
26D2
26D4
26D5
26D6
26D7
26D8
26EA
26EA
26F2
26F2
26F2
26F2
26F2
2705
2706
2713
2715
2718
2720
2720
2721
2721
2722
2723
2723
2723
2724
2724
2726
2728
2729
2730
2732
2732
2732
2735
2736
2737
2737
2738
2739
2739
273B
2740
2740
2741
2742
2742
2742
2743
2743
2744
2744
2745
2745
2745
2745
2745
2461
2461
2461
2461
2461
2461
8961
8961
8971
8971
8971
8971
8971
2705
2706
2713
2715
2718
2720
9720
2721
9721
2722
2723
4723
9723
2724
9724
2726
9728
2729
2730
2732
9732
9733
2735
2736
2737
9737
2738
2739
9739
9730
2740
9740
2741
0613
2742
6805
0601
2743
0603
2744
0398
0608
2745
4745
9745

570 CUoD 0/2way 1.65 HZ Processor
M1 Filler Tray
M2 Terminator Tray
SPD I/O Regulator
Processor/Memory Regulator
PCI Magnetic Media Controller
PCI WAN/Twinaxial IOA
Base PCI WAN/Twinaxial IOA
PCI 2-Line WAN IOA
Base PCI 2-Line WAN IOA
PCI Twinaxial Workstation IOA
PCI Ethernet IOA
PCI 10 Mbps Ethernet IOA
Base Ethernet IOA
PCI 16/4 Mbps Token-Ring IOA
Base 16/4 Mbps Token-Ring IOA
PCI RAID Disk Unit Controller
Base PCI Disk Unit Controller
Programmable Regulator
PCI Serial HIPPI Adapter
Base HSL Ports - 8 Copper
Optical Bus Adapter
Optical Bus Adapter
PCI USB 1.1 Adapter
HSL Ports - 8 Copper
Optical Bus Adapter
Base HSL-2 Ports - 4 Copper
Base PCI RAID Disk Unit Controller
Linux Direct Attachment - #2742
PCI 2-Line WAN IOA
PCI 2-Line WAN IOA No IOP
PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOA
PCI 100 Mbps Token-Ring IOA
Operations Console Package
PCI 2-Line WAN IOA
PCI 2-Line WAN IOA
2746
2746
2746
2748
2748
2748
2748
2749
2750
2750
2751
2751
2754
2754
2754
2754
2755
2755
2757
2757
2758
2758
2758
2758
2759
2759
2760
2760
2761
2761
2763
2763
2765
2765
2766
2766
2767
2768
2771
2772
2772
2772
2772
2773
2776
2778
2778
2778
2778
2780
2780
2782
2782
2785
2785
2786
2786
2787
2746
4746
9746
0605
2748
4748
9748
2749
2750
4750
2751
4751
2754
2777
9752
9777
2755
9755
0618
2757
2758
2774
9758
9774
2759
9759
0602
2760
2761
4761
0604
2763
0611
2765
0612
2766
9767
2768
9771
0609
0610
2772
2773
0610
2776
0606
2778
4778
9778
0627
2780
0619
2782
2785
9785
2786
9786
0626

Base PCI Twinaxial Workstation IOA
PCI Ultra Magnetic Media Controller
PCI ISDN BRI U IOA
PCI ISDN BRI S/T IOA
HSL Ports -16 Copper
Base HSL Ports -16 Copper
PCI-X Ultra RAID Disk Controller
HSL Ports - 2 Optical/6 Copper
Base HSL Ports - 2 Optical/6 Copper
Base HSL Ports-4 Optical/12 Copper
PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet UTP IOA
PCI Integrated Analog Modem
Direct Attachment #2765
PCI Fibre Channel Tape Controller
PCI Fibre Channel Disk Controller
Base PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem
PCI Dual WAN/Modem IOA
PCI Dual WAN/Modem IOA (ANSI)
PCI Ultra 4 SCSI Disk Controller
PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller
HSL Ports - 2 Optical
Base HSL Ports - 2 Optical
397
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
2788
2789
2789
2793
2793
2793
2793
2793
2793
2793
2793
2793
2793
2793
2793
2793
2793
27AE
27AF
2800
2801
2801
2802
2802
2805
2805
2805
2805
2805
2805
2806
2809
280E
280D
2788
2789
9789
0614
0615
2793
2794
6803
6804
6833
6834
9493
9494
9793
9794
9933
9934
7865
7877
9800
2801
9801
2802
9802
0616
0617
2805
2806
6808
6809
0617
2809
5760
5758
2842
2842
2843
2843
2844
2844
2847
2849
2849
2849
2849
284A
284B
284C
284D
284E
2850
2850
2850
2850
2850
2850
0636
2842
2843
9943
2844
9844
2847
0623
0633
2849
9749
280D
2810
2811
2812
2813
2813
2815
2815
2816
2816
2817
2818
2818
2819
2824
2830
2838
2838
2838
2838
283F
283F
283F
5761
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
4815
2816
4816
2817
2818
4818
2819
2824
2830
0607
2838
4838
9738
7123
7127
7133

PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem
PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem CIM
PCI WAN for ECS No IOP
PCI WAN for ECS (CIM)
PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem No IOP
PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem No IOP CIM
Base PCI WAN for ECS
Base PCI WAN for ECS CIM
Base PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem CIM
PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem NoIOP
PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem NoIOP CIM
L/ML CEC Backplane
Model 520 Power Regulator
Internal Disk Unit (640 MB)
1.96 GB Internal Disk Unit
Internal Disk Unit (1 GB)
Standard 2.0 GB Int Disk Unit
PCI Quad Modem IOA
PCI Quad Modem IOA CIM
PCI 4-Modem WAN IOA No IOP
PCI 4-Modem WAN IOA NoIOP CIM
Linux Direct Attachment - #0617 (CIM)
PCI LAN/WAN/Workstation IOP
PCI-X Fibre Channel Disk Controller
#5758 PCI-X 4Gbps Fibre Channel
1-Port
PCI-X Fibre Channel Tape Controller
LAN/WAN IOP
PCI 25 Mbps UTP ATM
PCI 45 Mbps Coax T3/DS3 ATM
PCI 155 Mbps MMF ATM
PCI 155 Mbps UTP OC3 ATM
PCI 155 Mbps SMF OC3 ATM
PCI 34 Mbps Coax E3 ATM
Main Storage Expansion
PCI 100/10 Mbps Ethernet IOA
Base PCI 100/10 Mbps Ethernet
DASD Expansion Unit
DASD Expansion Unit
DASD Concurrent Maint Cage
2850
2850
2850
2853
2855
2856
2860
2861
2861
2862
2863
2864
2867
286C
286D
286F
2877
287F
2881
2884
2886
2886
2887
2887
2888
2890
2890
2890
2890
2890
2890
2892
2892
2892
2892
2865
2866
2868
2853
2855
2856
2860
1855
2861
2862
2863
2864
2867
Graphics Adapter (GXT4500P)

PCI IOP
PCI IOP
Base PCI IOP
PCI IOP
Base PCI IOP
Fibre Channel IOP for SAN load source
LANAI+ (GXT 135P)
Base PCI 100/10 Ethernet IOA
IOP Embedded
IOP Embedded
IOP Embedded
IOP Embedded
IOP Embedded
Integrated PC Server 32 MB
PCI Integrated PC Server
FSIOA 128 MB Memory Keyboard
Mouse
PCI Integrated Netfinity Server
3450 0.66m system to device cable
16 MB IOP Memory
4-port EIA 232 Cable
32 MB IOP Memory
128 MB IOP Memory
Cable, Artic960HX
Cable, Artic960HX
256 MB IOP Memory
IOP Embedded
IOP Embedded
IOP Embedded
Cable H.100 BUS
Model 825 Embedded 10/100 Ethernet
Optical Bus Adapter
HSL-2 Bus Adapter
Base HSL-2 Bus Adapter
HSL-2/RIO-G Ports - 2 Copper
PCI Integrated xSeries Server
398
2850
2851
2852
2854
2857
2858
2877
2881
2884
2886
9886
2887
9887
2888
2790
2791
2799
2890
2891
2899
2792
2892
4710
4810
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
2892
2895
2895
2896
2896
2897
2897
28B3
28BC
28CD
28CD
28D2
9792
2795
2895
2796
2896
2797
2897
9787
7124
7136
7137
6574
2A6D
2065
2A6E
2066
2A6F
2066
2B6A
2066
2B6B
2066
2B6C
2066
2B6D
2067
28D4
28D7
28D8
28D9
28DA
28DB
28DC
28DD
28DF
1846
7883
7818
7867
7866
7868
7869
7870
6584
2B6E
2067
2B6F
2067
2C6A
2067
2C6B
2067
2C6C
2068
28E7
28E7
28E8
28EA
28EB
28EF
28F6
6417
9517
7875
7881
7819
0632
6592
2C6D
2068
2C6E
2068
2C6F
2068
2D6A
2068
28F7
6593
2D6B
2069
291E
292C
292D
2D6C
2069
2D6D
2069
2D6E
2069
292D
7876
4270
5592
571B
5593
571B
6594
2E6A
2070
2934
2936
2943
2944
2946
2947
2951
2952
2953
2953
2962
2A6A
2934
2936
2943
0634
2946
2947
2951
2952
2953
2954
0635
2065
2E6B
2070
2E6C
2070
2E6D
2070
2E6E
2070
2A6B
2065
2A6C
2065
Base PCI Integrated xSeries Server

1 GB Server Memory
1 GB Server Memory
DASD Expansion Unit - 5 slot
DASD Concurrent Maintenance
#6574 - 4-Disk Slot Exp Base Controller
Operator Panel - Model 570
Model 520 SP Card
HSL-2/RIO-G 2-Ports Copper
L/ML Mid-backplane
I/O PCI Backplane
L/ML DASD Backplane
Removable Media Backplane
Power Supply Dist Backplane
#6584 - 4-Disk Slot Exp PCI-X Controller
HSL-2/RIOG Bus Adapter
Base HSL-2/RIOG Bus Adapter
L/ML CPU Regulator
Service Processor
HSL/RIO 2-Ports Optical
USB 2.0 PCI Adapter
#6592 - 4-Disk Slot Exp - Base
Controller
Model 520 Media Backplane Card
#4270 - Controller to External Port Cable
4 Disk Slot Exp
PCI-X Disk Controller-90MB No IOP
4 Disk Slot Exp
PCI-X Disk Controller-90MB No IOP
#6594 - 4-Disk Slot Exp-PCI-X
Controller
Async Term/Printer Cable
Async Modem Cable-EIA232/188
8-port EIA232/422 Adapter
128-port ASYNC Adapter
622 MBS ADM Fiber Adapter
Artic960HX Adapter
Hermosa cable EIA232
Hermosa cable V.35
Hermosa V.36
Hermosa cable X.21
SDLC/X.25 - 2-port Adapter
560 CPW Model 730 Processor with
#1506 Interactive Feature
3001
3002
3002
3002
3003
3004
3004
3005
3005
3006
3001
3000
3002
3062
3003
3004
3064
3005
3065
3006

#1511 Interactive Processor
_4550 CPW Model 740 Processor with
32 MB Main Storage
Migrated 128 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
292D
399
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
3006
3007
3007
3009
3015
3016
3017
3018
3020
3021
3022
3024
3025
3026
3027
3029
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3054
3055
3060
3061
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
303E
304E
309B
309B
309D
309E
309F
30AA
30AC
30B3
30D2
30D3
30D5
30DC
30DE
30DF
30F0
30F2
30F3
30F7
30F8
3066
3007
3067
3009
3015
3016
3017
3018
3020
3021
3022
3024
3025
3026
3027
3029
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3054
3055
3060
3061
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
7816
7828
4443
4444
4452
4490
4453
4454
4450
4491
4447
4445
4449
7814
7890
7891
7892
7893
7894
4492
7935
512 MB Main Storage

1 GB Main Storage
1 GB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
8 GB Main Storage
8 GB Main Storage
32 GB Main Storage
32 GB Main Storage
4 GB Main Storage
4 GB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
1 GB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
1 GB Main Storage
16 GB Main Storage
16 GB Main Storage
64 GB Main Storage PDIMM
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
1024 MB Main Storage
4 MB Additional Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
2/4 GB CUoD Main Storage
CUoD 8/16 GB (4X4 GB)
512 MB DDR
1 GB DDR DIMMs
2 GB Memory (4x512 MB DIMMs)
4 GB Memory (4x1 GB DIMMs)
16 GB DDR DIMMs
2 GB DDR DIMMs
4 GB DDR DIMMs
8 GB DDR DIMMs
4 GB Main Storage
4/8 GB CUoD DDR1 Memory
8/16 GB DDR-1 Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage DDR2 DIMM
4 GB Main Storage DDR2 DIMM
30F3
30F7
30F8
3100
3101
3102
3103
3103
3104
3104
3104
3108
3109
3110
3110
3110
3116
3117
3117
3118
3118
3119
3120
3120
3121
3121
3122
3122
3124
3125
312F
3130
3131
3131
3132
3132
3133
3133
3134
3134
3134
3135
3135
3135
3135
3136
3136
3138
3138
313A
313B
313D
313E
3140
3141
3142
3144
3144
7894
4492
7935
3100
3101
3102
3103
4103
3104
4204
9304
3108
3109
3110
8210
9110
3116
3117
4117
3118
4118
3119
3120
4120
3121
4121
3122
4122
1873
1874
4497
3130
3131
9231
3132
9232
3133
4133
3134
4134
9234
3135
4135
7135
8135
3136
4136
3138
4138
4400
4474
4475
4477
3140
3141
3142
3144
4144

16 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
16 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
Standard 64 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
Optional 64 MB Main Storage
MFIOP Storage Expansion
8 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage SIMM
16 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
Drawer to Drawer Serial Cable
Rack to Rack Serial Cable
32 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
Optional Base 64 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
16 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
400
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
3145
3145
3146
3146
3147
3147
3149
3149
314C
314E
3152
3152
3153
3153
3154
3154
3154
3155
3155
3155
3156
3156
3156
3156
3157
3157
3157
3157
3158
3158
3158
3158
3159
3159
3160
3160
3160
3161
3161
3161
3162
3162
3163
3163
3163
3164
3164
3164
3165
3165
3165
3166
3166
3166
316A
316B
316C
316D
3145
4145
3146
4146
3147
4147
3149
4149
4498
4496
3152
9252
3153
8253
3154
8254
9254
3155
7255
8255
3156
4156
8156
9156
3157
4157
7157
8157
3158
4158
7158
8158
3159
9159
3160
8160
9160
3161
4161
9161
3162
9262
3163
7263
9263
3164
7264
8264
3165
7265
8265
3166
7266
9266
4500
4501
4502
4503
16 MB Main Storage
16 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
8/16 GB DDR2 Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
16 MB Main Storage
Optional Additional 16 MB Main Storage
Standard 16 MB (2 SIMM)
32 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
0/4GB 533 MHz DDR2 Memory
316F
3172
3172
3172
3172
3172
3172
3179
3179
3180
3180
3184
3184
3185
3185
3185
3186
3186
3186
3187
3187
3187
3189
3190
3190
3191
3191
3192
3192
3193
3193
3195
3196
3197
3198
31B5/
319B
31B6/
319C
31B9/
319D
31B7/
319E
31BD/
319F/
31BA/
31BC
3273
3274
3275
3277
3278
3279
3612
3613
3614
3628
3636
3637
4495
3172
3182
4172
8172
9272
9282
3179
9179
3180
8180
3184
9184
3185
8185
9185
3186
7186
8186
3187
7187
8187
3189
3190
9190
3191
8191
3192
8192
3193
8193
3195
3196
3197
3198
5692

32 MB Main Storage (2 SIMMs)
32 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
Delt Price 32 MB
256 MB Main Storage
Base 256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
5693
5695
5694
5696
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
3612
3613
3614
3628
1876
3637
36.4 GB 10k rpm Disk Unit

146.8 GB Disk Unit
Black P260/P275 Color
L200 Flat Panel Monitor
T541H/L150PTFT Color
401
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
3638
3639
3641
3643
3644
3645
4326
4326
4327
4327
4327
4327
4327
4328
4328
4328
4330
433B
3638
3639
3641
3643
3644
3645
1266
4326
1267
4327
5559
5572
7509
1268
4328
7510
3585
3676
433C
3677
433D
3678
3660
3664
3665
1875
4010
4011
4012
4104
9904
4114
4263
1266
4326
7508
1267
4327
7509
1268
4328
7510
1269
4329
7516
1292
4332
4690
4691
4692
4693
4800
4801
4802
4803
4804
4806
4811
Black C220P Color Monitor

Black L170P TFT Display
T115 TFT 15-inch Color Display
#4326 in 5786/5787
#4327 in 5786/5787
Quantity 16 of #4327
Quantity 4 of #4327 Package
#4328 in #5786/#5787
300 GB 15k rpm EXP24 Disk Unit
69.7 GB 15k rpm SAS Disk Unit
AIX/Linux
AIX/Linux
Processor Fabric Cable - 2 Drawer
Serial Port Converter Cable
4 MB Write Cache
8 MB Data Store
32 MB Data Store
4 MB Main Storage
4 MB Main Storage
4 MB Main Storage Expansion
Direct Attachment Tape Cables
141.12 GB15k rpm SAS Disk Unit
282.25 GB 15k rpm EXP24 Disk Unit
282.25GB 15k rpm Disk Unit
300GB 15k rpm EXP24 Disk Unit
Fibre Channel Loop Controller
Rack Status Beacon Assem
Rack Status Beacon Cable
Junction Box Cable
Rack Beacon Junction box
PCI Cryptographic Coprocessor (-001)
PCI-X Cryptographic Coprocessor
4812
4812
4953
4957
4959
4960
4961
4961
4962
4963
5033
5034
5035
5052
5066
5066
506E
506D
5078
5078
5079
5079
5088
5088
5094
5094
5095
5097
5111
4812
4813
4953
4957
4959
4960
0637
4961
4962
4963
5033
5034
5035
8052
0565
5066
5741
5742
0578
5078
0574
5079
5088
0588
0694
5094
0595
5097
5111
5121
5130
5133
5133
5135
5136
5140
5141
5142
5143
5144
5145
5146
5147
5148
5149
5150
5151
5152
5153
5156
5157
5159
515F
5160
5161
5162
5163
5121
5130
5133
5134
5135
5136
5140
5141
5142
5143
5144
5145
5146
5147
5148
5149
5150
5151
5152
5153
5156
5157
5159
5138
5160
5161
5162
5163

155 MBps ATM UTP Adapter
155 MBps ATM Fiber Adapter
4/16 Token-ring Adapter
Crypto SSL HW Accelerator
100/10 Mbps 4-port Ethernet Adapter
240V, 6ft, 30A Line Cord
Ethernet/LAN Encryption
Cryptographic Coprocessor
#5033 Migration Tower I
Optional 16 Disk Unit Expansion
#5065 Equivalent
1.8 M I/O Tower
EXP24 6 Disk Slot Enabler
EXP24 6/12 Disk Slot Enabler
PCI Expansion Unit in Rack
PCI Expansion Unit
#5074 Equivalent
1.8 M I/O Tower
PCI-X Expansion Unit
PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack
#5094 Equivalent
PCI-X Expansion Tower
PCI-X Tower Unit in Rack
1.8M I/O Rack
#5111 30 Disk Expansion with Dual Line
Cord
Power Regulator Card
Tower Attachment Power (RISC)
Feature Power Supply
Regulator
3.6V I/O Regulator
Tower Attachment Power
Feature Power Supply (400W)
BBU External (Optional)
BBU Internal (Optional)
Redundant Power (Bulk Reg)
Feature Power - 560W
Additional Battery Backup Internal
Battery Backup (External)
Power Supply (650 Watts)
#5157 Feature Power Supply
850 W Power Supply
Redundant Power and Cooling
Power Dist Unit 3 Phase PDU
3925
4010
4011
4012
4104
4104
4114
4263
433B
433B6
433B
433C
433C
433C
433D
433D
433D
4329
4329
4329
4330
4332
4690
4691
4692
4693
4758
4758
4758
4758
4758
4764
4812
402
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
51B6
5228
5229
5229
522A
522A
522A
522A
522A
522A
5237
528C
528C
52A4
53BE
5700
5700
5700
5701
5701
5701
5702
5702
5702
5702
5702
5702
5703
5703
5704
5706
5706
5707
5707
5708
5158
8954
5229
8955
5230
8950
8951
8952
8953
8972
8958
7813
8966
8981
8968
0620
5700
6800
0621
5701
6801
0624
0645
5702
5705
5712
5715
0628
5703
0625
0643
5706
0644
5707
5580
850 W Power Supply

0/8 GR 1.8 GHz CUoD MCM
595 1.9 Ghz Proc 0/16-way
Model 595 Processor Book
Linux Direct Attachment-5701
Linux Direct Attachment-5702
Ultra320 SCSI
PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller
PCI-X RAID Disk Controller
Dual Port 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet
Dual Port 1Gbps Ethernet-SX IOA
Auxiliary write cache card for orderable
#5580 - #2780 with auxiliary Write
Cache. Shown as 5580b for card
placement using the System Planning
Tool.
Auxiliary write cache card for orderable
feature #5581 - #2757 with auxiliary
Write Cache. Shown as 5581b for card
Tool.
#5709 RAID Enabler Card
10 GB Ethernet (Fiber)
PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller w/o IOP
PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller w/IOP
PCI-X Tape Controller
PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller w/o IOP
PCI-X Disk Controller- 90 MB w/o IOP
PCI-X Disk Controller- 90 MB w/IOP
PCI-X Disk Controller- 90 MB w/o IOP
#5738 PCI-X Ultra320 SCSI Disk
Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read
caches with IOP
571E
5777
571E
5582
571E
5583
571E
0649
571F
5739
571F
5778
571F
5781
571F
5782
571F
5799
571F
5800
571F
0650
571F
0651
571F
0651
5727
573A
573B
573B
573C
573C
573D
573D
9510
5721
5713
5783
5714
5784
5570
4327
5571
4327
5727
573D
574F
5728
5582
574F
5583
574F
5590

caches without IOP
#5738 Controller with 1.5 GB Auxiliary
Write Cache with IOP
#5583 Controller with 1.5GB Auxiliary
Write Cache without IOP
#5582/#5583 PCI-X disk controller AIX
direct
#5739 PCI-X EXP24 Controller - 1.5GB
Write/1.6GB Read caches with IOP
Write/1.6GB Read caches without IOP
#5739/#5778 PCI-X EXP24 disk
controller disk Linux or AIX direct
#5781/#5782 PCI-X EXP24 disk
controller Linux or AIX direct
#5799/#5800 PCI-X EXP24 disk
controller Linux or AIX direct
Base Integrated Cache - 40 MB
PCI-X 10Gbps Ethernet-SR IOA
PCI-X 1 Gbps iSCSI TOE-Copper
PCI-X 1 Gbps iSCSI HBA Copper
PCI-X 1 Gbps iSCSI
PCI-X 1 Gbps iSCSI HBA Fiber
#5727 Cache
2 #4327 70.56 GB Disks
#5727 Cache
6 #4327 70.56 GB Disks
Integrated Cache - 40 MB
Models 515, 520, 525, or 550
Integrated Cache - 40 MB Model 570
Auxiliary 1.5 GB write cache card for
#5582 (#5738 Controller w/Auxiliary
Write Cache). Shown as 5582b for card
Tool.
#5583 (#5777 Controller w/Auxiliary
Write Cache). Shown as 5583b for card
Tool.
orderable feature #5590 (#2780 PCI-X
Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller with 757 MB
Write cache). Shown as 5590b for card
Tool.
5708
5581
5709
5716
5718
571A
571A
571A
571A
571B
571B
571B
571E
5709
0646
5718
0647
5736
5766
5775
0648
5737
5776
5738
573D
403
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
574F
5591
575B
5739
575B
5778
575B
5781
575B
5782
575B
5799
575B
5800
5767
5768
576A
576B
5767
5768
5722
5749
576C
576C
576C
576C
5870
5871
5872
5875
2893
2894
9693
9694
5774
5870
5871
5872
5875
5876
5876
5890
5891
5892
5895
5896
6001
6006
6007
6008
6010
6011
6018
6021
6028
6029
5890
5891
5892
5895
5896
6001
6006
6007
6008
6010
6011
6018
6021
6028
6029

orderable feature #5590 (#2757 PCI-X
Ultra4 RAID Disk Controller with 757 MB
Write cache). Shown as 5591b for card
Tool.
Auxiliary 1.5 GB write cache card
embedded with orderable feature #5739
(EXP24 controller). Shown as 5739b for
card placement using the System
Planning Tool
(EXP24 controller). Shown as 5778b for
card placement using the System
Planning Tool
(EXP24 controller)
(EXP24 controller)
(EXP24 controller)
(EXP24 controller)
PCIe 1Gb Ethernet UTP 2 Port
PCIe 1Gb Ethernet Fiber 2 Port
PCI-X 10Gbps Ethernet-LR IOA
#5749 4Gbps PCI-X Fibre Channel
2-Port
PCIe 2-Line WAN w/ Modem
PCIe 2-Line WAN w/ Modem CIM
Base PCIe 2-Line WAN w/ Modem
Base PCIe 2-Line WAN w/ Modem CIM
PCIe 4Gb Fibre Channel 2Port
Model 595 8/16-way Standard Edition
Model 595 2/16-way Capacity BackUp
Standard Edition
Standard Edition
Model 595 8/16-way Enterprise Edition
Model 595 2/16-way CBU Edition
SPCN Power Cable - 2 m
Model 515 Express Configuration 1
Model 515 Base Product Config 1
6040
6041
6050
6050
6053
6054
6054
6054
6068
6080
6100
6100
6102
6103
6103
6104
6104
6104
6105
6105
6105
6105
6105
6107
6107
6107
6107
6107
6107
6109
6109
6109
6109
6109
6109
6109
6109
6109
6109
6110
6110
6111
6111
6112
6120
6122
6134
6140
6140
6141
6141
6146
6147
6148
6149
6149
6150
6151
6040
6041
6050
9050
9053
6054
8054
9054
6068
7841
6100
9100
9102
6103
9103
6126
7840
9104
1105
1200
6105
6108
9106
1107
1201
6107
6120
6121
9120
1109
1202
1210
6109
6123
6124
6125
6127
8123
9109
6110
8110
6111
8111
6112
1889
9122
6134
6140
9140
6141
9141
6146
6147
6148
6149
9249
6150
6151

Base Twinaxial Workstation Controller
Standard Twinaxial WSC Specify
Local Talk Controller
LocalTalk Adapter
Standard LocalTalk Controller
Opt Front Door for 1.8m Rack
Ruggedize Rack Pack
Disk Unit (315 MB)
315 MB Disk Unit Relocation
Standard 320 MB Disk Unit
Single Disk Unit (400 MB)
Base DASD Replace (988 MB)
Side-by-side for 1.8m Racks
Single Disk Unit (320 MB) Kit
Additional Dual Disk (640 MB)
Standard Dual Disk (640 MB)
Dual Disk Unit (800 MB)
Additional Disk Unit (988 MB)
Base DASD Upgrade (1976 MB)
Standard 988 MB Disk Unit Spec
Magnetic Storage Dev Controller
Standard Magnetic Storage Controller
Standard Magnetic Storage Controller
Magnetic Storage Device Controller
80 GB VXA-2 Tape Drive
Standard 851 MB Disk Unit (RPQ)
60 GB 8 mm Tape Unit
Twinaxial Workstation Control
ASCII Workstation Control
Diskette Adapter
Diskette Adapter
8-Port Twinaxial Expansion
16/4 Mbps Token-Ring IOA
Three-Line Communication Controller
X.21 1-Line 20
404
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
6151
6152
6152
6152
6152
6152
6152
6152
6153
6153
6160
6180
6180
6181
6181
6183
6202
6204
6230
6231
6235
6246
6258
6258
6312
6320
6321
6321
6321
6321
6321
6330
6330
6330
6331
6331
6333
6333
6333
6335
6335
6335
6335
6336
6336
6336
6337
6337
6337
6340
6341
6341
6342
6342
6342
6343
6343
6343
6171
6152
6154
6155
6174
6175
9862
9865
6153
6173
6160
6180
9280
6181
9381
6183
6203
6204
0638
0639
0640
6246
6258
9258
6312
9520
4425
4525
4625
6325
6425
4430
4530
4630
5751
5757
4533
4633
5752
1262
1335
6335
6365
4431
4531
4631
2640
5750
5756
6340
6341
9341
6342
8342
9342
5343
6343
7343
X.21 1-Line 50
EIA 232/V.24 Adapter
EIA 232/V.24 1-Line 20E
EIA 232/V.24 1-Line 20
EIA 232/V.24 1-Line 50E
EIA 232/V.24 1-Line 50
EIA 232/V.24 1-Line 20E
EIA 232/V.24 1-Line50E
V.35 1-Line (20-ft Cable)
Token-Ring Network Adapter
Twinaxial Workstation IOA
Base Twinaxial WSC
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 IOA
Base Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 IOA
6 port ASCII IOA
PCI Ultra3 SCSI Adapter
Differential SCSI Adapter
SSA (40 MBps) Adapter
128 MB DIMM & CD-ROM
Fast Write Cache Option
1.8m Rack Trim Kit
Quad Digital Trunk Adapter
Standard CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
DVD
DVD-RAM
840 MB QIC-3040-MC
6335 External Conversion Kit
840 MB QIC-mini Tape Unit
840 MB QIC-mini Tape External
DVD-ROM
DVD-ROM
DVD-ROM
DVD-ROM - Slimline
DVD-ROM - Slimline
DVD-ROM - Slimline
13 GB QIC mini Tape Unit
120 MB -inch Cartridge Tape
Standard 120 MB -inch Tape
Base Tape Replace (1.2 GB)
1.2 GB -inch Cartridge Tape
6343
6343
6344
6344
6344
6345
6345
6346
6347
6347
6347
6347
6348
6348
6348
6348
6348
6349
6349
6349
6349
6350
6366
6366
6368
6369
6370
6378
6378
6379
6379
6379
6380
6380
6380
6380
6380
6380
6380
6385
6385
6385
6387
6387
6390
6390
6390
6390
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
8343
9343
6344
7344
8344
6345
8345
6346
6347
7347
8347
9347
5348
6348
7348
8348
9348
5349
6349
7349
8349
6350
6366
6367
6368
6369
6370
1250
1378
1251
1349
1379
1252
1260
1350
1380
6380
6480
9380
1355
6385
6485
4487
4587
1261
1360
6390
6490
4482
4483
4486
4487
4582
4583
4584
4585
4586
4587

Standard 1.2 GB -inch Tape
13 GB -inch Cartridge Tape
Base Tape Upgrade (525 MB)
525 MB -inch Tape Kit
525 MB -inch Cart Tape Kit
1.2 GB -inch Tape Kit
1.2 GB -inch Cart Tape Kit
2.5 GB -inch Tape
2.5 GB -inch Cart Tape
50 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Device
7.0 GB 8 mm Cart Tape
7.0 GB 8 mm Cartridge Tape Kit
7 GB 8 mm Cartridge Tape Unit
7 GB 8 mm Cartridge Tape
405
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
6500
6501
6502
6502
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6509
6512
6513
6517
6520
6529
6530
6530
6532
6533
6534
6535
4682
4683
4684
4685
4686
4687
5753
5754
5755
6279
6381
6382
6383
6384
6386
6481
6482
6483
6484
6486
8287
8753
8755
9284
9285
9653
6500
6501
6502
6522
6516
6517
6518
6519
6526
6527
6528
6529
8716
8717
8718
8719
8726
8727
8728
8729
6509
6512
6513
9517
6520
9529
6523
6530
6532
6533
6534
6536

200 GB LTO-2 Tape Unit
Optional Base 50 GB QIC Tape
200GB LTO-2 Tape Unit
Base 30 GB -inch Cart Tape
Base 80 GB VXA-2 Tape Drive
Base 30 GB -inch Tape
Disk Controller
Tape/Disk Device Controller
Disk Unit Controller for RAID
Disk Unit Cntrlr for RAID
16 MB One-Port FSIOP
16 MB 2-Port FSIOP
32 MB 2-Port FSIOP
48 MB 2-Port FSIOP
64 MB 2-Port FSIOP
Optional 16 MB 1-Port FSIOP
Additional 16 MB FSIOP Memory
Internal Tape Device Controller
Standard File Server 32 MB 1 Port
Upgrade 1 to 2 Port FSIOP
Disk Unit Controller
RAID Disk Unit Controller
Magnetic Media Controller
SSA Disk Unit Controller
6535
6580
6586
6587
6601
6601
6601
6602
6602
6602
6602
6602
6602
6602
6602
6602
6602
6602
6602
6602
6602
6602
6602
6603
6603
6603
6603
6603
6603
6603
6603
6603
6603
6603
6603
6603
6603
6605
6605
6605
6605
6605
6605
6605
6606
6606
6606
6606
6606
6606
6606
6606
6606
6606
6606
6607
6607
6607
6537
6580
6586
6587
6601
6701
9601
1203
1211
1213
1312
1322
1602
4211
4652
6602
6612
6652
6802
6812
8612
9602
9652
1204
1212
1214
1313
1323
1603
4212
4650
6603
6613
6650
7613
8613
8650
1205
1325
4205
4605
6605
9605
9705
1206
1326
1336
4206
4606
6606
6806
6906
8606
8706
9606
1207
1327
1337
SSA RAID Disk Unit Controller

Optional Rack Security Kit
Modem Tray for 19-inch Rack
Model 515, 520, 525 Rear Cover
Base Disk Replace (1.0 GB)
Standard 1.0 GB Disk Unit
Additional Disk Unit (1.031 GB)
Standard Disk Unit (1.031 GB, 2 byte)
1-byte 1.03 GB Disk Unit Kit
Single Disk Unit Kit (1.03 GB)
Dual Disk Unit (2.0 GB)
Base Disk Replacement (1.0 GB)
Base 2.0 GB Dual Disk Unit
Optional Base Disk Unit (1.967 GB, 2b)
Single Disk Unit Kit (1.96 GB
Additional Disk Unit (1.967 GB, reg)
Dual Disk Unit (4 GB)
Optional Disk Unit (1.967 GB, 2 byte)
Additional 1.031 GB Disk Unit
1.03 GB Disk Unit
Standard 1.031 Disk Unit
Standard 1.031 Disk Unit regulated
1.96 GB Disk Unit
1.96 GB Disk Unit
1.96 GB Disk Unit
Optional Base Disk Unit (1.967 GB)
Base 1.96 GB Disk Unit
406
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
6607
6607
6607
6607
6607
6607
6607
6607
6607
6607
6607
6616
6617
6617
6713
6713
6713
6713
6713
6713
6713
6713
6713
6714
6714
6714
6714
6714
6714
6714
6714
6717
6717
6717
6717
6717
6717
6717
6718
6718
6718
6718
6718
6718
6718
6719
6719
6731
6731
6750
6751
6752
6753
6753
6754
6831
6863
6864
4207
4308
4607
6607
6807
6907
7607
8607
8707
9707
9907
6616
6617
6618
1333
4314
6713
6813
7500
7713
8713
8813
9313
1334
4324
6714
6824
7503
8714
8824
8924
4317
6717
6817
7501
8617
8817
8917
4318
6718
6818
7502
8618
8818
8918
4319
7504
4331
6831
6750
9751
6752
6753
9753
9754
6831
6863
6864

4.19 GB Disk Unit
4.19 GB Disk Unit
4.19 GB Disk Unit
4.19 GB Disk Unit
Optional Base 4.19 GB Disk Unit
Optional Base DASD (4.194 GB, reg)
Integrated PC Server
Integrated Netfinity Server
8.58 GB Disk Unit
8.58 GB Disk Unit
8.58 GB Disk Unit
17.54 GB Disk Unit
17.54 GB Disk Unit
17.54 GB Disk Unit
Optional Base 8.58 GB 10k rpm Disk
Optional Base 17 GB 10k rpm Disk
1.6 GB Read Cache Device
MFIOP
Base MFIOP with RAID
MFIOP
MFIOP
Base MFIOP
System i5 Slim-Line Doors
System i5 Acoustic Doors
6910
6913
6914
7000
7104
7116
7117
7126
7128
7130
7140
7141
7142
7143
7144
7147
7148
7152
7154
7155
7180
7181
7182
7183
7188
7194
7197
7198
7199
7256
7257
7258
7259
7260
7261
7307
7320
7323
7341
7350
7352
7354
7355
7357
7366
7373
7374
7375
7390
7391
7391
7392
7392
7395
7396
7397
7400
7404
6910
6913
6914
9000
7104
9116
9117
9126
7128
7130
7140
7141
7142
7143
7144
7147
7148
7152
7154
7155
7180
7181
7182
7183
7188
7194
7197
7198
7199
7256
7257
7258
7259
7260
7261
7307
7320
7323
7341
7350
7352
7354
7355
7357
7366
7373
7374
7375
7390
7391
7393
7392
7394
7395
7396
7397
7400
7404
Model 525 CBU Configuration 1

Model 525 Oracle JD Edwards
Model 525 SAP Applications
Panel Keylock Feature
System Unit Expansion
High Performance CD Enable
Expansion Unit 1
Standard Mixed Disk Enabler
#7128 DASD Expansion Unit
#7130 Expansion Unit Tape Cage
520 Express Configuration
Value Edition for #09XX
Standard Edition for #0910
Enterprise Edition for #0910
Acoustic Front Door
Easy-Access Front Cover
515, 520, 525 Rack Mount
550 Rack Mount
Power Disk Unit - Side Mount
570 Front Bezel
Adjustable Depth Rack Rails
Acoustic Front Door
520 Enterprise Enablement
570 Full Enterprise Enablement
Dual I/O Unit Enclosure
515, 520, 520+, 525 One Procr Activan
550 One Processor Activation
550 On/Off Proc Day Billing
Value Edition for #0975
Accelerator for System i5
Solution Edition for #0906
HA Edition for #0906
Model 520 Value/Express Edition
Model 800 Value Edition
Model 810 Standard Edition
407
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
7406
7407
7408
7409
7410
7412
7416
7418
7418
7419
7421
7421
7422
7424
7424
7425
7427
7427
7428
7429
7430
7431
7433
7433
7439
7440
7441
7445
7446
7447
7448
7450
7450
7450
7450
7451
7451
7451
7452
7452
7453
7454
7455
7456
7457
7458
7459
7462
7463
7469
7470
7471
7472
7473
7474
7475
7476
7480
7406
7407
7408
7409
7410
7412
7416
7418
7434
7419
7421
7436
7422
7424
7437
7425
7427
7438
7428
7429
7430
7431
7433
7435
7439
7440
7441
7445
7446
7447
7448
7411
7413
7417
7450
7414
7420
7451
7452
7552
7453
7454
7455
7456
7457
7458
7459
7462
7463
7469
7470
7471
7472
7473
7474
7475
7476
7480
Model 810 Enterprise Edition

Model 810 Standard/Domino Edition
Model 800 Advanced Edition
Model 825 High Availability Edition
Model 520 Express Config
Model 870 Capacity BackUp Edition
Model 520 Express Configuration
7481
7481
7482
7483
7483
7484
7485
7486
7487
7488
7489
7490
7491
7494
7495
7496
7497
7498
7499
7530
7531
7532
7481
7580
7482
7483
7581
7484
7485
7486
7487
7488
7489
7490
7491
7494
7495
7496
7497
7498
7499
7530
7531
7532
7533
7534
7541
7551
7553
7554
7555
7558
7559
7560
7561
7562
7563
7570
7580
7581
7583
7590
7618
7620
7621
7622
7624
7625
7629
7630
7631
7632
7640
7641
7663
7680
7681
7682
7687
7533
7534
7541
7551
7553
7554
7555
7558
7559
7560
7561
7562
7563
7570
7580
7581
7583
7590
7618
7620
7621
7622
7624
7728
7629
7630
7631
7632
7640
7641
7663
7680
7681
7682
7687

Enterprise Edition for 8966
Model 59516/32-way Standard Edition
Model 5501/4-way Domino
Model 5501/4-way Solution E1
Model 5501/4-way CRM (Clear Tech
w/Domino)
Model 5501/4-way SAP 2-way
Model 520 Solution Edition
Model 5501/4-way Solution
CBU Edition for #0944
520 On/Off Proc Enablement
520 Reserve Capacity Prepaid
Domino Edition for #0910
Sol Ed-PeopleSoft EnterpriseOne
C2CRM Solution Ed w/Domino
2-way SAP Solution Edition
570 1 GB Mem Activation
408
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
7734
7735
7736
7738
7741
7747
7748
7749
7757
7758
7759
7760
7763
7764
7765
7768
7784
7785
7790
7791
7792
7801
7802
7815
7817
7862
7863
7864
7879
7884
7885
7886
7887
788A
7897
7950
7951
7952
7954
7956
7957
7971
7972
7975
8093
8094
8133
8136
8137
8244
8312
8325
8327
8330
8338
8410
8413
8452
7734
7735
7736
7738
7741
7747
7748
7749
7757
7758
7759
7760
7763
7764
7765
7768
7784
7785
7790
7791
7792
7801
7802
7815
7817
7862
7863
7864
7879
7884
7885
7886
7887
7880
7897
7950
7951
7952
7954
7956
7957
7971
7972
7975
8093
8094
8133
8136
8137
8244
8312
8325
8327
8330
8338
8410
8413
8452

570 Base Proc Activation
CPU Power Regulator
6m HMC Attachment Cable
SNI Fiber Adapter
Blind-swap Cassette (long)
Blind-swap Cassette (Double)
Blind-swap Cassette (DTXA)
Headless Enclosure
520 Rack Mount
515, 520, 525 Deskside
SF4 Rack Mount
SF4 Deskside
Model 570 Base Enclosure
570 CUoD Proc Activation
570 1 GB CUoD Mem Activation
570 On/Off Mem Enablement
570 Res Cap PrePaid
570 1 GB Mem Day Billing
Optional Base 1.8 M I/O Rack
RJ45 to DB25 Interposer
Remote ASYNC Node (Rack)
Remote ASYNC Node
PCI WS Audio Adaptor
550 1.9 GHz Proc 0/2-way
520 1.9 GHz Processor
520 1.9 GHz Processor 0/2-way
520 Base Processor Activation
8457
8470
9004
9020
9021
9022
9023
9024
9025
9026
9027
9079
9079
9094
9143
9145
9149
9152
9152
9153
9162
9162
9163
9164
9174
9174
9175
9175
917A
917C
918D
918E
9206
9211
9212
9212
9213
9214
9215
9219
9243
9299
9301
9570
9613
9803
9814
9815
9820
9835
9836
9838
9839
9853
9854
9865
9876
9877
8457
8470
9004
9020
9021
9022
9023
9024
9025
9026
9027
8079
9079
9094
9143
9145
9149
8152
9152
9153
8162
9162
9163
9164
7174
9174
7175
9175
9171
9173
9177
9176
1463
9211
0369
9212
1465
1466
9215
1464
9243
9299
9301
9570
9613
9803
9814
9815
9820
9835
9836
9838
9839
9853
9854
9855
9876
9877

570 Base 1 GB Mem Activation
South Hemisphere Designator
V.35 Cable 20-ft
X.21 Cable 20-ft
EIA232 20-ft Cable
V.24 20-ft Enhanced Cable
Token-Ring Cable (2.44 m)
Ethernet Cable AUI (3 m)
EIA 232 6 m Client Acc cable
EIA 232 2.5 m Clint Acc cable
#9079 Base I/O Tower for 840 or SB3
Base PCI-X I/O Enclosure
Twinaxial passthu adapter
Optional Base Twinaxial
Standard MFIOP wo/Twinaxial WSC
Optional Base MFIOP w/Twinaxial
Standard MFIOP w/Twinaxial WSC
Standard MFIOP
Standard MFIOP
Ethernet IOA
Base Ethernet IOA
Token Ring IOA
Base Token Ring IOA
Standard MFIOP/LocalTalk WSC
Ethernet MFIOP
Base MFIOP
2m SPCN Cable
60m SPCN Optical cable
100m Optical SPCN Cable
15m SPCN Cable
30m SPCN Cable
60m SPCN Copper Cable
6m SPCN Cable
400W Availability Bulk
Base Enterprise Enablement
Upgraded 30-Disk Expansion
Reserved Rack Space
Base 70GB 15k rpm Disk Unit
2.5m DFCI cable
20-ft Antenna Cable Wireless
2nd Bus cable for Model 300
V.24 Cable 50-ft Enhanced
EIA232 Cable 50-ft
V.35 Cable 50-ft
X.21 Cable 50-ft
20.0m optical bus cable
60m optical bus cable
100.0 M optical bus cable
409
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
9879
9880
9882
9883
9884
9895
9885
9927
9928
9929
9930
9980
N/A
9879
9880
9882
9883
9884
0366
9885
9927
9928
9929
9930
9980
0302
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5590
0347
0423
0531
0532
0533
0641
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0719
0720
0721
0725
0836
0838
0839
0860
0861
0862
0868
0889
0900
0901
0902
0903
0904
0905
0906
0909
0910
0914
0915
0919
0920
0921
0922
0923
0924
0926
0928
0930
0934
0935
0936
0937
0940
20-ft/6m V.35 Cable

80-ft/24.4m V.35 Cable
20-ft/6m V.36 Cable
150-ft/45.7m V.36 Cable
Optical Bus Cable (20 m)
20-ft/6m X.21 Cable
Channel Box and cable
1.7m Attachment cable
Serpentine Cable Connector
Specify code for EXP24 attaching via
existing disk controller
RAID Hot Spare Specify
Admin MMA Enclosure Count
V5R4 OS, V5R4M0 LIC
V5R4OS, V5R4M5 Machine Code
Direct Attachment #2780 Controller with
Auxiliary Write Cache
Load Source Not in CEC
Load Source in #0595/#5095
#4328 Load Source Specify
iSeries Server #2463
Solution Package for #8950
1-way Server Feat 520 1 x #8327/#8330
1/2-way Server Feat 525 1 x #8330
Solution package for #8961
Capacity Backup for #8971
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0941
0943
0944
0953
0954
0955
0958
0959
0970
0975
1614
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1688
1689
1691
1692
1695
1774
1784
1829
1830
1834
1840
3646
N/A
3647
N/A
53CF
53CF
53CF
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3648
4910
4911
4912
5403
5550
5553
5554
5555
5556
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5557
5560
5561
5562
5563
5564
5646
5647
5648
5656
5657
N/A
5660
N/A
N/A
5680
5691

1-way Server Feat 520 1 x #8325/#8327
1-way Server Feat 520 1 x #8325/#8327
870 POD Activation
On/Off Prepaid for Model 825
TCoD Enablement for Model 870
TCoD Billing for Model 870
0.6 meter 12X Cable
1.5 meter 12X Cable
8.0 meter 12X Cable
3.0 meter 12X Cable
73.4GB 15k rpm SAS Disk Unit
AIX/Linux
146.8GB 15k rpm SAS Disk Unit
AIX/Linux
300GB 15k rpm SAS Disk Unit AIX/Linux
1/4W Server Feature MMA 2 x #7380
MMA One Processor Activation
Sys Console on HMC
Sys Console-Ethernet w/o IOP
Mirror 35 GB Disk/Controller Package
Mirror 141.12 GB Disk/
Controller Package
Mirror 35 GB Drawer Package
Mirror 35 GB Tower Package
Mirror 141.12 GB Drawer Package
PCIe Blind Swap Casette Short
PCIe Blind Swap Cassette Std
Service Interface Card
On/Off 1 Procesor One-day Billing
Service processor Interface Cable 2 Drawer
1 GB CUoD Memory Activation
On/Off 1 GB-1Day Memory Bill
410
CCIN
Feat.
code
Description
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5740
9548
9549
9553
1 Gbps BaseT Ethernet (4-Port)

Base 1 GB Main Storage
411
412
10
Chapter 10.
Feature code cross-reference

In this chapter, we list the feature code, Customer Card Identification Number (CCIN) and a
description for many System i5 family system features. The purpose of this chapter is to
assist IBM Clients and personnel in configuring Miscellaneous Equipment Specifications
(MES) and upgrades. In this chapter, we provide a cross-reference for the feature code used
for ordering with a CCIN reported by the Hardware Resources Listing.
The listing in this chapter is sorted by feature code. The feature code is used by marketing to
report configurations and work with upgrades. The entries selected are those that are most
useful when interpreting Hardware Resource Listings.
Refer to Chapter 9, Customer Card Identification Numbers cross-reference on page 391, for
a listing of the features sorted by CCIN. The CCIN is used when working from a Hardware
Resource Listing. The Hardware Resource listing is also known as the Rack Configuration
Listing.
Changes have been made to this chapter as of 7 September 2007.
413
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
0047
0121
0122
0135
0136
0145
0150
0150
0151
0151
0152
0152
0153
0158
0159
0165
0197
0198
0226
0272
0290
0297
0297
0298
0298
0299
0047
0121
0122
0135
0136
0145
0150
25BC
0151
25BD
0152
25BE
245D
246F
246F
0165
25D3
25D5
0226
0272
0290
0297
2295
0298
2296
0299
0302
N/A
0327
0328
0329
0330
0331
0332
0333
0334
0335
0336
0337
0338
0339
0340
0341
0342
0344
0347
0348
0349
0350
0351
0352
0353
0354
0355
0356
0357
0358
032A
032B
0329
0330
0331
0332
0333
0334
0335
0336
0337
0338
0339
0340
0341
0342
0344
N/A
0348
0349
0350
0351
0352
0353
0354
0355
0356
0357
0358
Device Parity RAID-6 All

Rear Cover - CEC only
Rear Cover - CEC with #7116
AIX Partition Specify
820 Base Processor
820 Base Processor
820 Base Processor
VHDCI Attachment
1 Gbps Ethernet Specify
Renovated by IBM
Ext Tape Attached via #5736, #5775
Model 250 Package - #2295
Model 250 Package
Model 250 Package - #2296
Model 250 Package
MES Conversion Analysis for
#5580, #5581
Specify code for EXP24 attaching via
existing disk controller
V.35 20-ft Cable
V.35 50-ft Cable
V.35 80-ft Cable
X.21 20-ft Cable
X.21 50-ft Cable
20-ft Comm Console Cable
RAID Hot Spare Specify
414
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
0359
0360
0362
0364
0365
0366
0367
0369
0380
0381
0382
0383
0398
0423
0426
0427
0428
0446
0447
0448
0530
0531
0532
0533
0550
0551
0553
0565
0574
0578
0588
0595
0599
0601
0602
0603
0604
0605
0606
0607
0608
0609
0610
0611
0612
0613
0614
0615
0616
0617
0618
0619
0620
0621
0623
0624
0625
0626
0359
0360
0362
0364
0365
9895
032C
9212
0380
0381
0382
0383
2745
N/A
0446
0447
0448
0446
0447
0448
0530
N/A
N/A
N/A
0550
0551
0553
5066
5079
5078
5088
5095
0599
2743
2760
2744
2763
2748
2778
2838
2745
2772
2773
2765
2766
2742
2793
2793
2805
2806
2757
2782
5700
5701
2849
5702
5704
2787

Comm Console PCI Cable
Parallel Cable
Optical Bus Cable (20 m)
Operations Console PCI Cable
Operations Console Package
Admin MMA Enclosure Count
1 GB Server Memory
2 GB Server Memory
512 MB DDR Server Memory
Software Version V5R3
V5R4 OS, V5R4M0 LIC
V5R4 OS, V5R4M5 Machine Code
#0553 iSeries 2.0m Rack
#5065 Equivalent
#5074 Equivalent
PCI Expansion Unit in Rack
PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack
PCI-X Tower Unit in Rack
Rack filler kit
Linux Direct Attach - #2743
Direct Attach #2765
Linux Direct Attach - 0
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
0627
0628
0629
0632
0633
0634
0635
0636
0637
0638
0639
0640
0641
0642
0643
0644
0645
0646
0647
2780
5703
5758
28EF
2849
2944
2962
2842
4961
6230
6231
6235
2780
574F
2498
5706
5707
5702
5716
571A
0648
571B
0649
571E
0650
571E
0651
571F
0654
0694
0719
0720
0721
0725
0836
0838
0839
0860
0861
0862
0868
0889
0900
0901
0902
0903
0904
0905
0906
0909
0910
0914
0915
0919
0920
0921
0922
571F
5094
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

Direct Attach #5758
USB 2.0 PCI Adapter
LANAI+ (GXT 135P)
128-port ASYNC Adapter
SDLC/X.25 - 2-port Adapter
Graphics Adapter (GXT4500P)
100/10 Mbps 4-port Ethernet Adapter
SSA (40 MBps) Adapter
128 MB DIMM & CD-ROM
Fast Write Cache Option
(#0641) - Direct Attach #5590 PCI-X
Ultra320 SCSI Disk Controller
PCI Ultra-3 RAID Adapter
Direct Attach #5712
Direct Attach #5716
DIrect Attach PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller
w/o IOP
Direct Attach PCI-X Disk Controller 90 MB w/o IOP
Direct Attach PCI-X Disk Controller 1.5 GB Linux or AIX
Direct Attach PCI-X Disk Controller 1.5 GB EXP24 disk controller
Direct Attach PCI-X Disk Controller 1.5 GB EXP24 disk controller with
embedded auxiliary write cache
Direct attached #5800
#5094 Equivalent
Load Source Not in CEC
1-way Server Feat 520 1 x #8327/#8330
Solution package for #8961
0923
0924
0926
0928
0930
0934
0935
0936
0937
0940
0941
0943
0944
0953
0954
0955
0958
0959
0970
0975
1105
1107
1109
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1250
1251
1252
1260
1261
1262
1266
1267
1268
1269
1292
1307
1308
1312
1313
1322
1323
1325
1326
1327
1333
1334
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
6105
6107
6109
6105
6107
6109
6602
6603
6605
6606
6607
6109
6602
6603
6602
6603
6378
6379
6380
6380
6390
6335
4326
4327
4328
4329
4330
1307
1308
6602
6603
6602
6603
6605
6606
6607
6713
6714

Capacity Backup for #8971
1-way Server Feat 520 1 x #8325/#8327
1-way Server Feat 520 1 x #8325/#8327
Optional Base Disk Unit (1.967 GB, 2b)
525 MB -inch Tape Kit
2.5 GB -inch Tape
7.0 GB 8 mm Cart Tape
840 MB QIC-3040-MC
#4326 in 5786/5787
#4327 in 5786/5787
#4328 in 5786/5787
282.25 GB 15k rpm EXP24 Disk Unit
300 GB 15k rpm EXP24 Disk Unit
1.75m HSL-2 Cable
2.5m HSL-2Cable
415
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
1335
1336
1337
1349
1350
1355
1360
1378
1379
1380
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1468
1468
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1481
1482
1483
1485
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1531
1532
6335
6606
6607
6379
6380
6385
6390
6378
6379
6380
0343
0361
0368
9206
9219
9213
9214
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1481
1482
1483
1485
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1531
1532
6335 External Conversion Kit

7.0 GB 8 mm Cartridge Tape Kit
525 MB -inch Cart Tape Kit
3m Copper HSL Cable
6m Copper HSL Cable
15 m Copper HSL Cable
2 m SPCN Cable
6 m SPCN Cable
15 m SPCN Cable
30 m SPCN Cable
250 m Optical SPCN Cable
4.3m/200V/25A HD Wired EMEA
6 m HSL Optical Cable
6 m HSL to HSL-2 Cable
10 m HSL to HSL-2 Cable
1.2 m HSL-2 Cable
3.5 m HSL-2 Cable
10 m HSL-2 Cable
15 m HSL-2 Cable
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1576
1577
1578
1579
1581
1583
1585
1587
1588
1591
1602
1603
1614
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1688
1689
1691
1692
1695
1774
1784
1800
1801
1802
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1576
1577
1578
1579
1581
1583
1585
1587
1588
1591
6602
6603
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1800
1801
1802
1806
1807
1827
1829
1830
1834
1840
1846
1850
1851
1852
1855
1857
1858
1859
1806
1807
182A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
28D4
2118
2424
2425
2861
185D
185E
185F

Single Disk Unit Kit (1.03 GB)
Single Disk Unit Kit (1.96 GB
870 POD Activation
TCoD Enablement for Model 870
TCoD Billing for Model 870
12X Channel CEC GX Adapter IBT
2 port
Serial-UPS Conversion Cable
0.6 meter 12X Cable
1.5 meter 12X Cable
8.0 meter 12X Cable
3.0 meter 12X Cable
Operator Panel - Model 570
VHDCI to P Converter Cable
0.6m SCSI P-P Cable
2.5m SCSI P-P Cable
4-port EIA 232 Cable
416
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
1873
1874
1875
1876
1889
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
2010
2030
2031
2032
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2050
2051
2052
2061
2061
2061
2061
2062
2062
2062
2062
2062
2063
2063
2063
2063
2063
2064
2064
2064
2064
2064
2064
2065
2065
3124
3125
3925
3636
6120
3273
3274
3275
3277
3278
3279
2010
2030
2031
2032
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2050
2051
2052
206A
206B
206C
243A
206D
242C
206E
206F
207A
207B
207C
242D
207D
207E
207F
208A
208B
208C
208D
242B
241F
2A6A
2066
2B6B
2066
2B6C
2067
2067
241C
2B6D
2067
2B6E
2067
2B6F
2067
2C6A
2067
2C6B
2068
2068
241D
2C6C
2068
2C6D
2068
2C6E
2068
2C6F
2068
2D6A
2069
2069
241B
2D6B
2069
2D6C
2069
2D6D
2069
2D6E
2070
2070
241B
2E6A
2070
2E6B
2070
2E6C
2070
2E6D
2070
2E6E
2065
2A6B
2065
2A6C
2065
2A6D
2066
2066
2066
2A6E
2066
2A6F
2066
2B6A
Drawer to Drawer Serial Cable

Rack to Rack Serial Cable
Serial Port Converter Cable
L200 Flat Panel Monitor
146.8 GB Disk Unit
1.6 SPPR CPU for Model 20S
1.1 SPPR Processor
1.6 SPPR Processor
2.0 SPPR Processor
3.0 SPPR Processor
5.0 SPPR Processor
6.4 SPPR Processor
11.4 SPPR Processor
16.8 SPPR Processor
Model 720 Processor
Model 720 Processor
Model 730 Processor
2114
2159
2160
2164
2176
2183
2207
2208
2248
2248
2250
2250
2250
2252
2114
2159
2160
2164
2176
2183
2207
2208
2248
22A2
2250
22A4
22A5
2252

External SCSI Y-Cable
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 270 Processor
Model 270 Processor
Model 270 Processor
417
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
2252
2252
2253
2253
2253
2289
2290
2291
2292
2295
2296
2298
2299
2315
2316
2318
2341
2349
2349
2349
2349
2349
2349
2349
2349
2351
2351
2351
2351
2351
2351
2351
2351
2352
2352
2352
2352
2352
2352
2352
2352
2353
2353
2353
2353
2353
2353
2353
2353
2353
2354
2354
2354
2354
2354
2354
2354
2354
22A7
22A8
2253
22AA
22AB
2289
2290
2291
2292
2295
2296
2290
2291
2315
2316
2318
2341
2349
24D8
24D9
24DA
24DB
24DC
24DD
24DE
2351
26A8
26A9
26AA
26AB
26AC
26AD
26AE
2352
26B0
26B1
26B2
26B3
26B4
26B5
26B6
2353
26B8
26B9
26BA
26BB
26BC
26BD
26BE
26BF
2354
26C0
26C1
26C2
26C3
26C4
26C5
26C6

270 (950CPW) with #1519 Interactive
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 250 Processor
Model 250 Processor
Model S40 ISV 12-way Processor
2354
2354
2383
2384
2385
2386
2388
2395
2395
2395
2395
2395
2396
2396
2396
2396
2396
2396
2397
2397
2397
2397
2397
2397
2397
2398
2398
2398
2398
2398
2398
2398
2398
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2402
2402
2402
2402
2402
2402
2402
2403
2403
2403
2403
2403
2403
2403
2403
2407
2408
2409
2410
26C7
26C8
2383
2384
2385
2386
2388
2395
23A1
23A2
23A3
23A4
2396
23A9
23AA
23AB
23AC
23AD
2397
23B1
23B2
23B3
23B4
23B5
23B6
2398
23B8
23B9
23BA
23BB
23BC
23BD
23BE
2400
23C1
23C2
23C3
23C4
23C5
2402
23D1
23D2
23D3
23D4
23D5
23D6
23D8
23D9
23DA
23DB
23DC
23DD
23DE
2403
2407
2408
2409
2410

Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 170 Processor
Model 820 Processor
Model 820 Processor
Dedicated Domino Processor (2-way)
100 Client Server Processor
418
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
2411
2412
2413
2414
2416
2416
2416
2416
2416
2416
2416
2416
2417
2417
2417
2417
2417
2417
2417
2417
2418
2418
2418
2418
2418
2418
2418
2418
2419
2419
2419
2419
2419
2419
2419
2419
2419
2420
2420
2420
2420
2420
2420
2420
2420
2420
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2431
2431
2432
2432
2432
2434
2411
2412
2531
2585
2416
24C0
24C1
24C2
24C3
24C4
24C5
24C6
2417
24C8
24C9
24CA
24CB
24CC
24CD
24CE
23E8
23E9
23EA
23EB
23EC
23ED
23EE
2418
2419
24D0
24D1
24D2
24D3
24D4
24D5
24D6
24D7
23F8
23F9
23FA
23FB
23FC
23FD
23FE
23FF
2420
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
23E7
2431
23F0
23F1
25BA
23F4
3.0 SPPR Processor

6.1 SPPR Processor
E06 Processor
F02 Processor
840 (10000 CPW) with #1540 Interact.
Model 270 Processor
Model 270 Processor
2434
2434
2435
2435
2435
2435
2435
2436
2436
2436
2436
2436
2436
2437
2437
2437
2437
2437
2437
2437
2438
2438
2438
2438
2438
2438
2438
2438
2452
2452
2454
2456
2457
2458
2461
2461
2461
2461
2461
2461
2461
2461
2461
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2469
2473
2486
2487
2488
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
23F5
2434
2435
249B
249C
249D
249E
2436
24A8
24A9
24AA
24AB
24AC
2437
24B0
24B1
24B2
24B3
24B4
24B5
2438
24B8
24B9
24BA
24BB
24BC
24BD
24BE
2452
25BA
2454
2456
2457
2458
2461
26D0
26D1
26D2
26D4
26D5
26D6
26D7
26D8
25B9
25BA
25BA
25BA
25F0
25EB
25DC
2486
2487
2488
25DC
2486
2487
2488
2488

Model 820 Processor
Model 820 Processor
419
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
2515
2516
2523
2525
2528
2530
2533
2534
2536
2537
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2568
2582
2583
2586
2587
2588
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2604
2605
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2617
2618
2515
2516
2523
2525
2528
2530
2533
2534
2536
2537
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2568
2582
2583
2586
2587
2588
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
259A
2600
2601
2602
2604
2605
2602
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2617
2618
C10 Floating Point Processor

C20 Floating Point Processor
D80 Processor
D02 Processor
16.8 SPPR CPU for Model F97
E04 Processor
E20 Processor
E25 Processor
E35 Processor
E45 Processor
E02 Twinaxial
0.7 SPPR CPU for Model D35
D45 Processor
D50 Processor
D60 Processor
D70 Processor
C06 Processor
D06 Processor
D04 Processor
D10 Processor
D20 Processor
D25 Processor
C04 Processor 8 MB
E50 Processor
E60 Processor
E70 Sort Processor
E80 Sort Processor
E90 (2way) Sort
E95 (2way) Sort
F06 Processor
F25 Processor
0.7 SPPR for F04
F10 Processor
F20 Processor
Ext. 1.44 GB Diskette Drive
F35 Processor
F45 Sort Processor
F50 Processor
F60 Sort Processor
F70 Processor 1-way
F80 Processor 2-way
F90 Processor 2-way
F95 Processor 2-way
Magnetic Storage Controller
9346 Mag Tape Unit Controller
Processor Expansion
3422 3430 Mag Tape Subsystem
ISDN Basic Rate Adapter
9348 Mag Tape Unit Attachment
2440/9348 HCD Mag Tape Attachment
X.21 2-Line Adapter
DASD Controller
V.35 1-Line Adapter
X.21 1-Line Adapter
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
Fiber Distributed Data Adapter
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2628
2629
2634
2636
2640
2644
2647
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2663
2664
2665
2666
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2680
2682
2683
2685
2686
2688
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2699
2705
2706
2713
2715
2718
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2726
2729
2730
2732
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2628
2629
2634
2636
6337
2644
2647
2609
2609
2610
2609
2609
2610
2663
2664
2665
2666
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2680
2682
2683
2685
2686
2688
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2699
2705
2706
2713
2715
2718
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2726
2729
2730
2732

Cryptographic Processor
Removable Media Device Attachment
3490 Magnetic Tape Attachment
Six-Line Comm Controller
Ethrnet/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
Cryptographic Processor - Comm
LAN/WAN/Workstation IOP
DVD-ROM Slimline Drive
34xx Magnetic Tape Attachment
9348 Model 2 Tape Attachment
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line 20E
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line 20
X.21 2-Line 20
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line 50E
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line 50
X.21 2-Line 50
I/O Attachment Processor
Integrated Fax Adapter
Copper Dist Data Interface
Frame Relay Adapter
AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter
Shared Bus Interface Card
System Unit Expansion Tower (optical)
PCI Bus IOP
PCI Bus IOP
Optical Bus Adapter
Optical Bus Adapter
Optical Bus Receiver - 266 Mbps
Opitcal Bus Receiver (1063 Mbps)
Optical Bus Adapt w/Token Ring
Optional Bus Adapt w/Token Ring
Optical Bus Adapter
2-Line WAN IOA
M1 Filler Tray
M2 Terminator Tray
SPD I/O Regulator
Processor/Memory Regulator
PCI WAN/Twinaxial IOA
PCI 2-Line WAN IOA
PCI Ethernet IOA
PCI 16/4 Mbps Token-Ring IOA
Programmable Regulator
PCI Serial HIPPI Adapter
420
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2748
2749
2750
2751
2754
2755
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2763
2765
2766
2768
2772
2773
2774
2776
2777
2778
2780
2782
2785
2786
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2799
2801
2802
2805
2806
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2748
2749
2750
2751
2754
2755
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2763
2765
2766
2768
2772
2772
2758
2776
2754
2778
2780
2782
2785
2786
2788
2789
2890
2890
2892
2793
2793
2895
2896
2897
2890
2801
2802
2805
2805
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2813
Optical Bus Adapter

Optical Bus Adapter
PCI USB 1.1 Adapter
Optical Bus Adapter
PCI 2-Line WAN IOA
PCI 100 Mbps Token-Ring IOA
PCI 2-Line WAN IOA
PCI Ultra Mag Media Controller
PCI ISDN BRI U IOA
HSL Ports -16 Copper
PCI-X Ultra RAID Disk Controller
HSL Ports - 2 Optical/ 6 Copper
PCI Fibre Channel Tape Controller
PCI Fibre Channel Disk Controller
PCI Dual WAN/Modem IOA
PCI Dual WAN/Modem IOA(ANSI)
HSL Ports - 2 Optical/ 6 Copper
PCI Ultra 4 SCSI Disk Controller
PCI-X RAID Disk Unit Controller
PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem
PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem (CIM)
1 GB Server Memory
PCI Quad Modem IOA
PCI Quad Modem IOA (CIM)
LAN/WAN IOP
PCI 25 Mbps UTP ATM
PCI 45 Mbps Coax T3/DS3 ATM
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2824
2830
2838
2842
2843
2844
2847
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2824
2830
2838
2842
2843
2844
2847
2849
2850
2850
2850
2853
2850
2855
2856
2850
2850
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2877
2881
2884
2886
2887
2888
2890
2891
2892
2893
2984
2895
2896
2897
2899
2934
2936
2943
2946
2947
2951
2952
2953
2954
3000
3001
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2850
2850
2867
2850
2877
2881
2884
2886
2887
2888
2890
2890
2892
576C
576C
2895
2896
2897
2890
2934
2936
2943
2946
2947
2951
2952
2953
2953
3002
3001

PCI 34 Mbps Coax E3 ATM
PCI IOP
PCI IOP
PCI IOP
Fibre Channel IOP for SAN load source
Integrated PC Server 32 MB
FSIOA 128 MB Memory Keyboard
Mouse
16 MB IOP Memory
32 MB IOP Memory
128 MB IOP Memory
Cable, Artic960HX
Cable, Artic960HX
256 MB IOP Memory
Cable H.100 BUS
Optical Bus Adapter
HSL-2 Bus Adapter
HSL-2/RIO-G Ports - 2 Copper
PCIe 2-Line WAN w/Modem
PCIe 2-Line WAN w/Modem CIM
1 GB Server Memory
Async Term/Printer Cable
Async Modem Cable-EIA232/188
8-port EIA232/422 Adapter
622 MBS ADM Fiber Adpt
Artic960HX Adpt
Hermosa cable EIA232
Hermosa cable V.35
Hermosa V.36
Hermosa cable X.21
Migrated 128 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
421
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3009
3015
3016
3017
3018
3020
3021
3022
3024
3025
3026
3027
3029
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3054
3055
3060
3061
3062
3064
3065
3066
3067
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3100
3101
3102
3103
3104
3108
3109
3110
3116
3117
3118
3119
3120
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3009
3015
3016
3017
3018
3020
3021
3022
3024
3025
3026
3027
3029
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3054
3055
3060
3061
3002
3004
3005
3006
3007
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3100
3101
3102
3103
3104
3108
3109
3110
3116
3117
3118
3119
3120
128 MB Main Storage

256 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
1 GB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
8 GB Main Storage
8 GB Main Storage
32 GB Main Storage
32 GB Main Storage
4 GB Main Storage
4 GB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
1 GB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
1 GB Main Storage
16 GB Main Storage
16 GB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
1 GB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
16 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
16 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
MFIOP Storage Expansion
8 MB Main Storage
16 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
3121
3122
3130
3131
3132
3133
3134
3135
3136
3138
3140
3141
3142
3144
3145
3146
3147
3149
3152
3153
3154
3155
3156
3157
3158
3159
3160
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3172
3179
3180
3182
3184
3185
3186
3187
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3195
3196
3197
3198
3585
3612
3613
3614
3628
3637
3638
3639
3121
3122
3130
3131
3132
3133
3134
3135
3136
3138
3140
3141
3142
3144
3145
3146
3147
3149
3152
3153
3154
3155
3156
3157
3158
3159
3160
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3172
3179
3180
3172
3184
3185
3186
3187
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3195
3196
3197
3198
4330
3612
3613
3614
3628
3637
3638
3639
8 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
16 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
16 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
16 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage (2 SIMMs)
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
512 MB Main Storage
300GB 15k rpm EXP24 Disk Unit
Black P260/P275 Color
T541H/L150PTFT Color
Black C220P Color Monitor
Black L170P TFT Display
422
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
3641
3643
3644
3645
3646
3641
3643
3644
3645
N/A
3647
N/A
3648
N/A
3660
3664
3665
3676
3677
3678
4010
4011
4012
4103
4104
4114
4117
4118
4120
4121
4122
4133
4134
4135
4136
4138
4144
4145
4146
4147
4149
4156
4157
4158
4161
4172
4204
4205
4206
4207
4211
4212
4263
4270
4308
4314
4317
4318
4319
4324
4326
4327
433B
433C
433D
4010
4011
4012
3103
4104
4114
3117
3118
3120
3121
3122
3133
3134
3135
3136
3138
3144
3145
3146
3147
3149
3156
3157
3158
3161
3172
3104
6605
6606
6607
6602
6603
4263
292C
6607
6713
6717
6718
6719
6714
4326
4327

73.4 GB 15k rpm SAS Disk Drive
AIX/Linux
AIX/Linux
300GB 15k rpm SAS Disk Drive
AIX/Linux
4 MB Write Cache
8 MB Data Store
32 MB Data Store
32 MB Main Storage
4 MB Main Storage
4 MB Main Storage Expansion
8 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
8 MB Main Storage
16 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
128 MB Main Storage
256 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
32 MB Main Storage
64 MB Main Storage
Addt Disk Unit (1.031 GB)
Addt Disk Unit (1967 MB)
Direct Attach Tape Cables
#4270 - Controller to External Port Cable
4.19 GB Disk Unit
8.58 GB Disk Unit
17.54 GB Disk Unit
4328
4331
4332
4400
4425
4430
4431
4443
4444
4445
4447
4449
4450
4452
4453
4454
4474
4475
4477
4482
4483
4486
4487
4487
4490
4491
4492
4495
4496
4497
4498
4500
4501
4502
4503
4525
4530
4531
4533
4582
4583
4584
4585
4685
4586
4587
4605
4606
4607
4625
4630
4631
4633
4650
4652
4682
4683
4684
4328
6731
4332
313A
6321
6330
6336
309B
309B
30D3
30D2
30D5
30AC
309D
309F
30AA
313B
313D
313E
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
309E
30B3
30F7
316F
314E
312F
314C
316A
316B
316C
316D
6321
6330
6336
6333
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
6605
6606
6607
6321
6330
6336
6333
6603
6602
63A0
63A0
63A0

Fibre Channel Loop Controller
CD-ROM
DVD-RAM
DVD-ROM
512 MB DDR
1 GB DDR DIMMs
4 GB DDR DIMMs
2 GB DDR DIMMs
8 GB DDR DIMMs
16 GB DDR DIMMs
2 GB Memory (4 x 512 MB DIMMs)
4 GB Memory (4 x 1 GB DIMMs)
CD-ROM
DVD-RAM
DVD-ROM
DVD-RAM
CD-ROM
DVD-RAM
DVD-ROM
DVD
423
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
4685
4686
4687
4690
4691
4692
4693
4710
4723
4745
4746
4748
4750
4751
4761
4778
4800
4801
4802
4803
4804
4805
4806
4810
4811
4812
4813
4815
4816
4818
4838
4910
4911
4912
4953
4957
4959
4960
4961
4962
4963
5033
5034
5035
5066
5078
5079
5088
5094
5097
5111
63A0
63A0
63A0
4690
4691
4692
4693
2892
2723
2745
2746
2748
2750
2751
2761
2778
4758
4758
4758
4758
4758
2058
4764
2892
4812
4812
4812
2815
2816
2818
2838
53CF
53CF
53CF
4953
4957
4959
4960
4961
4962
4963
5033
5034
5035
5066
5078
5079
5088
5094
5097
5111
5138
5140
5141
5142
5143
5144
5145
5146
5147
5148
5149
5150
5151
5152
5153
5156
5157
5158
5159
5160
5161
5162
5163
5229
5230
5343
5348
5349
5403
5404
5460
5461
5462
5490
5491
5550
5553
5554
5555
5556
515F
5140
5141
5142
5143
5144
5145
5146
5147
5148
5149
5150
5151
5152
5153
5156
5157
51B6
5159
5160
5161
5162
5163
5229
522A
6343
6348
6349
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5557
5559
5560
5561
5562
5563
5564
5570
5121
5130
5133
5134
5135
5136
5121
5130
5133
5133
5135
5136

Rack Status Beacon Assembly
Rack Status Beacon Cable
Junction Box Cable
Rack Beacon Junction box
PCI 10 Mbps Ethernet IOA
PCI 2-Line WAN IOA
PCI Crypto Coprocessor (-001)
PCI Crypto Accelerator
PCI-X Cryptographic Coprocessor
155 MBps ATM UTP Adapter
155 MBps ATM Fiber Adapter
4/16 Token-ring Adapter
Crypto SSL HW Accelerator
240V, 6ft, 30A Line Cord
Ethernet/LAN Encryption
Cryptographic Coprocessor
1.8 M I/O Tower
PCI Expansion Unit
1.8 M I/O Tower
PCI-X Expansion Unit
1.8M I/O Rack
#5111 30 Disk Expansion with
Dual Line Cord
Power Regulator Card
Tower Attach Power (RISC)
N/A
4327
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
573D
4327
573D
4327
4327
2780
5708
Redundant Power and Cooling

Regulator
3.6V I/O Regulator
Tower Attach Power
BBU External (Optional)
BBU Internal (Optional)
Feature Power -560W
Additional Battery Backup Internal
Battery Backup (External)
Power Supply (650 Watts)
#5157 Feature Power Supply
850 W Power Supply
850 W Power Supply
Power Dist Unit 3 Phase PDU
MMA One Processor Activation
Utility Billing 100 Processor Minutes
Base Edition for #4910 1/4W
MMA Enterprise Enablement
MMA Full Enterprise Enablement
System Console on HMC
System Console-Ethernet w/o IOP
Mirror 141.12 GB Disk/
Controller Package
Mirror 141.12 GB Drawer Package
#5727 Cache
2-#4327 70.56GB Disks
#5727 Cache
6-#4327 70.56GB Disks
Quantity 4 of #4327 Package
RAID Disk Unit Controller with auxiliary
Write Cache. Shown as 5580b in the
System Planning Tool.
424
5571
5572
5580
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
5581
2757
5708
5582
571E
RAID Disk Unit Controller with auxiliary

Write Cache. Shown as 5581b in the
caches with IOP
Aux Write Cache. Shown as 5582b in the
caches without IOP
Auxiliary Write Cache Shown as 5583b
in the System Planning Tool.
#2780 Controller w/Auxiliary
Write Cache
1.5 GB Auxiliary Write Cache. Shown as
5590b in the System Planning Tool.
#2757 Controller w/Auxiliary Write
Cache
1.5 GB Auxiliary Write Cache. Shown as
5591b in the System Planning Tool.
4 Disk Slot Exp
PCI-X Disk Controller - 90 MB No IOP
4 Disk Slot Exp
PCI-X Disk Controller - 90 MB No IOP
DVD Enclosure and Backplane
#5636 - IVE - 2 x 1 Gb Ethernet
#5639 - IVE - 4 x 1 Gb Ethernet
PCIe Blind Swap Casette Short
PCIe Blind Swap Cassette Standard
Service Interface Card
On/Off 1Procesor -1-day Billing
SAS RAID Enablement with 175 MB
write cache
Auxiliary Write Cache. Shown as 5679b
1 GB CUoD Memory Activation
On/Off 1GB-1Day Memory Bill
0/2 GB 667 MHz DDR2 Memory
5707
5707
5709
5712
5713
5714
5715
5718
5721
5722
5727
5707
5707
5709
5702
573B
573C
5702
5718
573A
576A
573D
5728
5736
5737
5738
5739
573D
571A
571B
571E
571F
575B
Dual Port 1Gbps Ethernet-SX IOA

PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet 2- port
Ultra320 SCSI Raid
Ultra320 SCSI
PCI-X 1 Gbps iSCSI TOE-Copper
PCI-X 1 Gbps iSCSI
PCI-X Tape/DASD Controller
10 GB Ethernet (Fiber)
PCI-X 10Gbps Ethernet-SR IOA
PCI-X 10Gbps Ethernet-LR IOA
Integrated Cache - 40 MB
Models 515, 520, 525, or 550
Integrated Cache - 40 MB Model 570
PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller w/IOP
PCI-X Disk Controller - 90 MB w/IOP
PCI-X Disk Controller - 1.5 GB w/IOP
PCI-X EXP24 Controller - 1.5 GB w/IOP
Aux Write Cache. Shown as 5739b in the
1 Gbps BaseT Ethernet (4-Port)
EXP24 6 Disk Slot Enabler
EXP24 6/12 Disk Slot Enabler
#5749 4Gbps PCI-X Fibre Channel
2-Port
DVD-ROM - Slim Line
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
DVD-ROM Drive IDE Slimline
DVD-RAM Drive IDE Slimline
#5758 PCI-X 4Gbps Fibre Channel
1-Port
PCI-X Fibre Channel Disk Controller
PCI-X Fibre Channel Tape Controller
PCI-X Tape Controller
PCIe 1Gb Ethernet UTP 2Port
PCIe 1Gb Ethernet Fiber 2Port
PCI-X Disk/Tape Controller-No IOP
PCI-X Disk Controller-90 MB No IOP
PCI-X Disk Controller-1.5 GB No IOP
PCI-X EXP24 Controller-1.5 GB No IOP
PCI-X EXP24 Controller-1.5 GB w/IOP
PCI-X 1 Gbps iSCSI HBA Copper
PCI-X 1 Gbps iSCSI HBA Fiber
#5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk
Drawer
PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer
574F
5583
571E
574F
5590
2780
574F
5591
2757
574F
5592
5593
5629
5636
5639
5646
5647
5648
5656
5657
292D
571B
292D
571B
181A
181C
5660
5679
57B8/
57B7
5680
5691
5692
5693
5694
5695
5696
5700
5701
5702
5703
5705
5706
319B/
31B5
31B6/
319C
31B7/
319E
31B9/
319D
31BD/
319F/
31BA
31BC
5700
5701
5702
5703
5702
5706

5740
5741
5742
5749
506E
506D
576B
5750
5751
5752
5753
5754
5755
5756
5757
5758
6337
6331
6333
63A0
63A0
63A0
6337
6331
280D
5760
5761
5766
5767
5768
5773
5774
5775
5776
5777
5778
280E
280D
571A
5767
5768
5781
571F
575B
5782
571F
575B
5783
5784
5786
573B
573C

PCI-X RAID Disk Controller
Dual Port 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet
5796
5774
571A
571B
571E
571F
575B
425
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
5799
571F
575B
5800
571F
575B
PCI-X EXP24 Controller-1.5 GB w/IOP

1/4W MMA Processor Enclosure Drawer
Standard Edition
Standard Edition
Local Talk Controller
Opt Front Door for 1.8m Rack
Disk Unit (315 MB)
Magnetic Storage Device Controller
Diskette Adapter
Diskette Adapter
8-Port Twinaxial Expansion
16/4 Mbps Token-Ring IOA
Three-Line Communication Controller
6151
6152
6153
6154
6155
6160
6171
6173
6174
6175
6180
6181
6183
6203
6204
6246
6258
6279
6312
6325
6335
6340
6341
6342
6343
6344
6345
6346
6347
6348
6349
6350
6365
6366
6367
6368
6369
6370
6380
6381
6382
6383
6384
6385
6386
6390
6417
6425
6446
6457
6480
6481
6482
6483
6484
6485
6486
6490
6151
6152
6153
6152
6152
6160
6151
6153
6152
6152
6180
6181
6183
6202
6204
6246
6258
63A0
6312
6321
6335
6340
6341
6342
6343
6344
6345
6346
6347
6348
6349
6350
6335
6366
6366
6368
6369
6370
6380
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
6385
63A0
6390
28E7
6321
X.21 1-Line 20
EIA 232/V.24 Adapter
EIA 232/V.24 1-Line 20E
EIA 232/V.24 1-Line 20
Token-Ring Network Adapter
X.21 1-Line 50
EIA 232/V.24 1-Line 50E
EIA 232/V.24 1-Line 50
Twinaxial Workstation IOA
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 IOA
6 port ASCII IOA
PCI Ultra3 SCSI Adapter
Differential SCSI Adapter
1.8 m Rack Trim Kit
Quad Digital Trunk Adapter
CD-ROM
840 MB QIC-mini Tape Unit
13 GB QIC mini Tape Unit
840 MB QIC-mini Tape External
7 GB 8 mm Cartridge Tape Unit
HSL-2/RIOG Bus Adapter
CD-ROM
12X Short Run 5796 Attach
12X Long Run 5796 Attach
7 GB 8 mm Cartridge Tape
5801
5870
5871
5872
5875
5870
5871
5872
5875
5876
5876
5890
5891
5892
5895
5896
6001
6006
6007
6008
6010
6011
6018
6021
6028
6029
6040
6041
6050
6054
6068
6100
6103
6105
6107
6108
6109
6110
6111
6112
6120
6121
6123
6124
6125
6126
6127
6134
6140
6141
6146
6147
6148
6149
6150
5890
5891
5892
5895
5896
6001
6006
6007
6008
6010
6011
6018
6021
6028
6029
6040
6041
6050
6054
6068
6100
6103
6105
6107
6105
6109
6110
6111
6112
6107
6107
6109
6109
6109
6104
6109
6134
6140
6141
6146
6147
6148
6149
6150
426
6380
63A0
63A0
63A0
63A0
6385
63A0
6390
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
6500
6501
6502
6509
6512
6513
6516
6517
6518
6519
6520
6522
6523
6526
6527
6528
6529
6530
6532
6533
6534
6536
6537
6574
6580
6584
6500
6501
6502
6509
6512
6513
6506
6506
6506
6506
6520
6502
6530
6506
6506
6506
6506
6530
6532
6533
6534
6535
6535
28D2
6580
28DF
6586
6587
28F6
28F7
6594
6601
6602
6603
6605
6606
6607
6612
6613
6616
6617
6618
6650
6652
6701
6713
6714
6717
6718
6750
6752
6753
6800
6801
6802
6803
292D
6601
6602
6603
6605
6606
6607
6602
6603
6616
6617
6617
6603
6602
6601
6713
6714
6717
6718
6750
6752
6753
5700
5701
6602
2793
6804
6805
6806
6807
6808
6809
6812
6813
6817
6818
6824
6831
6833
6834
6863
6864
6906
6907
6910
6913
6914
7053
7058
7063
7104
7123
7124
7127
7128
7130
7133
7135
7136
7137
7140
7141
7142
7143
7144
7147
7148
7152
7154
7155
7157
7158
7174
7175
7180
7181
7182
7183
7186
7187
7188
7194
7197
7198
2793
2742
6606
6607
2805
2805
6602
6713
6717
6718
6714
6731
2793
2793
6863
6864
6606
6607
6910
6913
6914
6586
6587
6592
6593
Disk Controller
Tape/Disk Device Controller
Additional 16 MB FSIOP Memory
Internal Tape Device Controller
Upgrade 1 to 2 Port FSIOP
Disk Unit Cntrlr for RAID
Disk Unit Controller
16 MB 2-Port FSIOP
32 MB 2-Port FSIOP
48 MB 2-Port FSIOP
64 MB 2-Port FSIOP
Magnetic Media Controller
SSA Disk Unit Controller
SSA RAID Disk Unit Controller
#6574 - 4-Disk Slot Exp - Base Controller
Optional Rack Security Kit
Modem Tray for 19-inch Rack
Model 515, 520, 525 Rear Cover
#6592 - 4-Disk Slot Exp - Base Controller
#6594 - 4-Disk Slot Exp-PCI-X Controller
1.03 GB Disk Unit
1.96 GB Disk Unit
4.19 GB Disk Unit
Dual Disk Unit (2.0 GB)
Dual Disk Unit (4 GB)
Integrated Netfinity Server
Base Disk Replace (1.0 GB)
8.58 GB Disk Unit
17.54 GB Disk Unit
MFIOP
MFIOP
MFIOP
PCI WAN for ECS
PCI WAN for ECS (CIM)

PCI 2-Line WAN IOA No IOP
1.96 GB Disk Unit
4.19 GB Disk Unit
PCI 4-Modem WAN IOA No IOP
PCI 4-Modem WAN IOA No IOP CIM
8.58 GB Disk Unit
17.54 GB Disk Unit
PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem No IOP
PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem No IOP CIM
System i5 Slim-Line Doors
System i5 Acoustic Doors
1.96 GB Disk Unit
4.19 GB Disk Unit
Model 525 CBU Configuration 1
Model 525 Oracle JD Edwards
Model 525 SAP Applications
System Unit Expansion
DASD Expansion Unit
DASD Expansion Unit
#7128 DASD Expansion Unit
#7130 Expansion Unit Tape Cage
DASD Concurrent Maint Cage
DASD Concurrent Maintenance
Value Edition for #09XX
Ethernet IOA
Token Ring IOA
Acoustic Front Door
515, 520, 525 Rack Mount
550 Rack Mount
Power Disk Unit - Side Mount
570 Front Bezel
Adjustable Depth Rack Rails
7104
283F
28BC
283F
7128
7130
283F
3135
28CD
28CD
7140
7141
7142
7143
7144
7147
7148
7152
7154
7155
3157
3158
9174
9175
7180
7181
7182
7183
3186
3187
7188
7194
7197
7198
427
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
7199
7255
7256
7257
7258
7259
7260
7261
7262
7263
7264
7265
7266
7307
7314
7320
7323
7341
7343
7344
7347
7348
7349
7350
7352
7354
7355
7357
7366
7373
7374
7375
7380
7390
7391
7392
7393
7394
7395
7396
7397
7400
7404
7406
7407
7408
7409
7410
7411
7412
7413
7414
7416
7417
7418
7419
7420
7421
7199
3155
7256
7257
7258
7259
7260
7261
N/A
3163
3164
3165
3166
7307
N/A
7320
7323
7341
6343
6344
6347
6348
6349
7350
7352
7354
7355
7357
7366
7337
7374
7375
53CF
7390
7391
7392
7391
7392
7395
7396
7397
7400
7404
7406
7407
7408
7409
7410
7450
7412
7450
7451
7416
7450
7418
7419
7451
7421
Acoustic Front Door

Dual I/O Unit Enclosure
Dual 5796 Unit Enclosure
515, 520, 520+, 525 One Procr Activan
Base Tape Upgrade (525 MB)
4.7 GHz Proc Card 0/2-way
Model 800 Value Edition
Model 800 Advanced Edition
7422
7424
7425
7427
7428
7429
7430
7431
7433
7434
7435
7436
7437
7438
7439
7440
7441
7445
7446
7447
7448
7450
7451
7452
7453
7454
7455
7456
7457
7458
7459
7462
7463
7469
7470
7471
7472
7473
7474
7475
7476
7480
7481
7482
7483
7484
7485
7486
7487
7488
7489
7490
7491
7494
7495
7496
7497
7498
7422
7424
7425
7427
7428
7429
7430
7431
7433
7418
7433
7421
7424
7427
7439
7440
7441
7445
7446
7447
7448
7450
7451
7452
7453
7454
7455
7456
7457
7458
7459
7462
7463
7469
7470
7471
7472
7473
7474
7475
7476
7480
7481
7482
7483
7484
7485
7486
7487
7488
7489
7490
7491
7494
7495
7496
7497
7498

428
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
7499
7500
7501
7502
7503
7504
7508
7509
7510
7511
7516
7530
7531
7532
7499
6713
6717
6718
6714
6719
4326
4327
4328
4329
4329
7530
7531
7532
7533
7534
7541
7551
7552
7553
7554
7555
7558
7559
7560
7561
7562
7563
7570
7580
7581
7583
7590
7607
7613
7618
7620
7621
7622
7624
7629
7630
7631
7632
7640
7641
7663
7680
7681
7682
7687
7713
7728
7734
7735
7736
7738
7533
7534
7541
7551
7452
7553
7554
7555
7558
7559
7560
7561
7562
7563
7570
7580
7581
7583
7590
6607
6603
7618
7620
7621
7622
7624
7629
7630
7631
7632
7640
7641
7663
7680
7681
7682
7687
6713
7625
7734
7735
7736
7738

Model 5501/4-way Domino
Model 5501/4-way Solution E1
Model 5501/4-way CRM
(Clear Tech w/Domino)
Model 520 Solution Edition
Model 5501/4-way Solution
520 On/Off Processor Enablement
520 On/Off Processor Day Billing
Domino Edition for #0910
Sol Ed-PeopleSoft EnterpriseOne
C2CRM Solution Ed w/Domino
570 1 GB Mem Activation
7741
7747
7748
7749
7757
7758
7759
7760
7763
7764
7765
7768
7784
7785
7790
7791
7792
7801
7802
7813
7814
7815
7816
7817
7818
7819
7828
7840
7841
7862
7863
7864
7865
7866
7867
7868
7869
7870
7875
7876
7877
7878
7879
7880
7881
7882
7883
7884
7885
7886
7887
7890
7891
7892
7893
7894
7897
7935
7741
7747
7748
7749
7757
7758
7759
7760
7763
7764
7765
7768
7784
7785
7790
7791
7792
7801
7802
528C
30DC
7815
303E
7817
28D8
28EB
304E
6104
6080
7862
7863
7864
27AE
28DA
28D9
28DB
28DC
28DD
28E8
291E
27AF
25F8
7879
788A
28EA
180A
28D7
7884
7885
7886
7887
30DE
30DF
30F0
30F2
30F3
7897
30F8

CPU Power Regulator
0/8 GR 1.8 GHz CUoD MCM
4 GB Main Storage
2/4 GB CUoD Main Storage
SNI Fiber Adapter
HSL-2/RIO-G 2-Ports Copper
HSL/RIO 2-Ports Optical
CUoD 8/16 GB (4 x 4 GB)
Side-by-side for 1.8m Racks
Ruggedize Rack Pack
Blind Swap Cassette (long)
Blind Swap Cassette (Double)
Blind Swap Cassette (DTXA)
L/ML CEC Backplane
I/O PCI Backplane
L/ML Mid-backplane
L/ML DASD Backplane
Removable Media Backplane
Power Supply Dist Backplane
L/ML CPU Regulator
Model 520 Media Backplane Card
Model 520 Power Regulator
Serial/VPD PCI Card
Headless Enclosure
Model 570 Base Enclosure
Service Processor
SCSI to IDE Converter Card
Model 520 SP Card
520 Rack Mount
515, 520, 525 Deskside
SF4 Rack Mount
SF4 Deskside
4/8 GB CUoD DDR1 Memory
512 MB Main Storage DDR2 DIMM
570 CUoD Processor Activation
429
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
7950
7951
7952
7954
7956
7957
7971
7972
7975
8052
8054
8079
8093
8094
8110
8111
8123
8133
8135
8136
8137
8152
8156
8157
8158
8160
8162
8172
8180
8185
8186
8187
8191
8192
8193
8210
8244
8253
8254
8255
8264
8265
8287
8312
8325
8327
8330
8338
8342
8343
8344
8345
8347
8348
8349
8410
8413
8452
7950
7951
7952
7954
7956
7957
7971
7972
7975
5052
6054
9079
8093
8094
6110
6111
6109
8133
3135
8136
8137
9152
3156
3157
3158
3160
9162
3172
3180
3185
3186
3187
3191
3192
3193
3110
8244
3153
3154
3155
3164
3165
63A0
8312
8325
8327
8330
8338
6342
6343
6344
6345
6347
6348
6349
8410
8413
8452
570 1 GB CUoD Mem Activation

570 On/Off Memory Enablement
570 Res Cap PrePaid
570 1 GB Memory Day Billing
Optional 16 Disk Unit Expansion
LocalTalk Adapter
Standard Mag Storage Controller
Standard Mag Storage Controller
RJ45 to DB25 Interposer
Remote ASYNC Node (Rack)
Remote ASYNC Node
Optional Base Twinaxial
Optional Addtl 16 MB Main Storage
Optional Base MFIOP w/Twinaxial
Delt Price 32 MB
PCI WS Audio Adapter
Optional Base 50 GB QIC Tape
550 1.9 GHz Proc 0/2-way
8457
8470
8478
8505
8606
8607
8609
8612
8613
8617
8618
8650
8664
8665
8706
8707
8713
8714
8716
8717
8718
8719
8726
8727
8728
8729
8753
8755
8813
8817
8818
8824
8847
8849
8863
8866
8877
8917
8918
8924
8950
8951
8952
8953
8954
8955
8958
8961
8961
8966
8968
8971
8971
8971
8971
8971
8972
8977
8457
8470
8478
2630
6606
6607
2654
6602
6603
6717
6718
6603
2618
2665
6606
6607
6713
6714
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
6506
63A0
63A0
6713
6717
6718
6714

570 Base 1 GB Mem Activation
256GB CUoD Memory Activate
I/O Card Unit Conversion
Optional Base DASD (4.194 GB, reg)
EIA 232/V.24 2-Line
Base 2.0 GB Dual Disk Unit
Optional Disk Unit (1.967 GB, 2 byte)
Optional Base Fiber DD Interface
Optional Base Shielded DD Interface
Base Service Interface Cable-2 Drawer
Base Service Interface Cable-4 Drawer
EIA 232/V.24 Two line 20E
EIA 232/V.24 Two line 50E
Base Proc Fabric Cable-2 Drawer
570 Model 2/4-way Processor
570 CUoD 0/2way 1.65HZ Processor
Base Processor Fabric Cable-3 Drawer
430
2609
2609
6717
6718
6714
522A
522A
522A
522A
5228
5229
5237
26EA
26EA
528C
53BE
26F2
26F2
26F2
26F2
26F2
522A
Feat.
code
8979
8981
9000
9004
9020
9021
9022
9023
9024
9025
9026
9027
9050
9053
9054
9079
9094
9100
9102
9103
9104
9106
9109
9110
9116
9117
9120
9122
9126
9140
9141
9143
9144
9145
9146
9147
9148
9149
9150
9151
9152
9153
9156
9159
9160
9161
9162
9163
9164
9171
9172
9173
9174
9175
9176
9177
9179
9184
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
52A4
7000
9004
9020
9021
9022
9023
9024
9025
9026
9027
6050
6053
6054
9079
9094
6100
6102
6103
6104
6105
6109
3110
7116
7117
6107
6122
7126
6140
6141
9143
2637
9145
2638
2637
2661
9149
2637
2661
9152
9153
3156
3159
3160
3161
9162
9163
9164
917A
2661
917C
9174
9175
918E
918D
3179
3184
Base Processor Fabric Cable-4 Drawer

Model 595 Processor Book
Panel Keylock Feature
South Hemisphere Designator
V.35 Cable 20-ft
X.21 Cable 20-ft
EIA232 20-ft Cable
V.24 20-ft Enhanced Cable
Token-Ring Cable (2.44 m)
Ethernet Cable AUI (3 m)
EIA 232 6m Client Access cable
EIA 232 2.5m Client Access cable
Base Twinaxial Workstation Controller
Standard Twinaxial WSC Specify
Standard LocalTalk Controller
#9079 Base I/O Tower for 840 or SB3
Base PCI-X I/O Enclosure
315 MB Disk Unit Relocation
Standard 988 MB Disk Unit Specify
High Performance CD Enable
Expansion Unit 1
Standard 851 MB Disk Unit (RPQ)
Standard Mixed Disk Enabler
Twinaxial passthu adapter
Standard MFIOP w/o Twinaxial WSC
Standard 16 MB (2 SIMM)
Standard MFIOP w/Twinaxial WSC
Standard MFIOP
Standard MFIOP
Twinaxial MFIOP
Standard MFIOP/LocalTalk WSC
Base Ethernet IOA
Base Token Ring IOA
Base MFIOP
Ethernet MFIOP
9185
9190
9211
9212
9215
9231
9232
9234
9243
9249
9252
9254
9258
9262
9263
9266
9272
9280
9282
9284
9285
9299
9301
9304
9313
9341
9342
9343
9347
9348
9369
3185
3190
9211
9212
9215
3131
3132
3134
9243
6149
3152
3154
6258
3162
3163
3166
3172
6180
3172
63A0
63A0
9299
9301
3104
6713
6341
6342
6343
6347
6348
5095
9370
9371
4327
2888
9372
5095
9374
506E
9375
506D
9376
571F
575B
9377
571F
575B
9378
5786
9379
571F
575B
9380
9381
9397
6380
6181
571E
574F
9493
9494
2793
2793

60m SPCN Copper Cable
400W Availability Bulk
36GB 4mm Tape Unit
Base Twinaxial WSC
Base 30 GB -inch Cart Tape
Base 80 GB VXA-2 Tape Drive
Base Enterprise Enablement
Upgraded 30-Disk Expansion
Standard 1.2 GB -inch-inch Tape
#0595 PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack in
disk package #5568
1267 (4327) disk in disk package 5569
#2888 HSL-2/RIO-G Ports - 2 Copper in
disk packages 5567, 5568
#5095 PCI-X Expansion Tower in disk
package 5567
#5741 EXP24 6 Disk Slot Enabler in disk
package 5569
#5742 EXP24 6/12 Disk Slot Enabler in
disk package 5569
#5778 PCI-X EXP24 Controller-1.5 GB
No IOP with auxiliary write cached in disk
package 5569
Write/1.6GB Read caches without IOP in
disk package 5569
#5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk
Drawer in disk package 5569
Write/1.6GB Read caches without IOP in
disk package 5569
Base Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 IOA
#5583 Controller with 1.5GB Auxiliary
Write Cache without IOP in disk package
55569
Base PCI WAN for ECS
Base PCI WAN for ECS (CIM)
431
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
Feat.
code
CCIN
Description
9510
9517
9517
9520
9529
9548
9549
9553
9570
9584
9585
9601
9602
9605
9606
9609
9612
9613
5727
6517
28E7
6320
6529
9570
2584
2585
6601
6602
6605
6606
2654
2612
9613
9617
9619
9623
9624
9651
9652
9653
9673
9691
9693
9694
9696
9699
9705
9707
9720
9721
9723
9724
9726
9728
9730
9732
9733
9737
9738
9739
9740
9745
9746
9748
9749
9751
9752
9753
9754
9755
9758
9759
2617
2619
2623
2624
2651
6602
63A0
2673
2691
576C
576C
2696
2699
6605
6607
2720
2721
2723
2724
0446
2728
273B
2732
2732
2737
2838
2739
2740
2745
2746
2748
2849
6751
2754
6753
6754
2755
2758
2759
Base Integrated Cache - 40 MB

Base HSL-2/RIOG Bus Adapter
Standard CD-ROM
Reserved Rack Space
Standard 1.031 Disk Unit
Standard EIA 232/V.24 2-line
Standard EIA 232/V.24 1-Line/Ad
#4327 70GB 15k rpm Disk Unit in disk
packages #5567, #5568
Base Ethernet IOP
Base 16/4 Mbps Token-Ring IOP
Standard Six Line Comm Controller
Store Device Control Spec
Base 30 GB -inch Tape
Standard Optical Bus Adapter
#9691 Base Bus Adapter HSL Copper
Base PCIe 2-Line WAN w/Modem
Base PCIe 2-Line WAN w/ Modem CIM
Base 2-Line WAN IOA
Standard 1.031 Disk Unit regulated
Base PCI WAN/Twinaxial IOA
Base Ethernet IOA
Base 512 MB Server Memory
Base PCI 100/10 Mbps Ethernet
Base PCI Twinaxial Workstation IOA
Base PCI 100/10 Ethernet IOA
Base MFIOP
Base HSL Ports -16 Copper
9767
9771
9774
9777
9778
9785
9786
9787
9789
9792
9793
9794
9800
9801
9802
9803
9814
9815
9820
9835
9836
9838
9839
9844
9853
9854
9855
9862
9865
9876
9877
9879
9880
9882
9883
9884
9885
9886
9887
9904
9907
9927
9928
9929
9930
9933
9934
9943
9980
2767
2771
2758
2754
2778
2785
2786
28B3
2789
2892
2793
2793
2800
2801
2802
9803
9814
9815
9820
9835
9836
9838
9839
2844
9853
9854
9865
6152
6152
9876
9877
9879
9880
9882
9883
9884
9885
2886
2887
4104
6607
9927
9928
9929
9930
2793
2793
2843
9980

Base PCI Integrated xSeries Server
Base PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem (CIM)
Internal Disk Unit (640 MB)
Internal Disk Unit (1 GB)
Standard 2.0 GB Int Disk Unit
2.5m DFCI cable
2nd Bus cable for Model 300
V.24 Cable 50-ft Enhanced
EIA232 Cable 50-ft
V.35 Cable 50-ft
X.21 Cable 50-ft
Base PCI IOP
20.0m optical bus cable
60m optical bus cable
100.0 M optical bus cable
EIA 232/V.24 1-Line 20E
EIA 232/V.24 1-Line 50E
20-ft/6m V.35 Cable
20-ft/6m V.36 Cable
150-ft/45.7m V.36 Cable
20-ft/6m X.21 Cable
4 MB Main Storage
Channel Box and cable
1.7m attach cable
6.6m attach cable
24.0m attach cable
PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem NoIOP
PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem NoIOP CIM
Base PCI IOP
Serpentine Cable Connector
432
11
Chapter 11.
Software enhancements
In this chapter, we provide information about new and enhanced i5/OS and program products
for V5R4 announced January 2007 through October 2007. Specifically, we cover the following
items:
An important new and more flexible i5/OS V5R4 licensing approach, with the introduction
of the 9407-515 and 9406-525, to meet the changing needs of innovative companies
Additional i5/OS licensing flexibility on 9406-550, 9406-570, 9406-MMA, and 9406-595
models with the introduction of a lower priced i5/OS entitlement on 9406-MMA models and
environments specified as application serving (running i5/OS V5R4, but do not use DB2
for i5/OS)
A new Secure Perspective for System i product to ease setting up and managing i5/OS
and other operating systems security, with a focus on easing security auditing
A set of capabilities for Web enablement under i5/OS made easier to get a Web
application server environment up and running faster
Also provided are a Web Performance Advisor and Web Performance Monitor that
minimize the amount of IBM WebSphere Application Server expertise required for good
performance. Other enhancements in this category include an IBM-provided example
i5/OS 5250 application that can be run from a browser workstation by using interfaces that
are enabled by the IBM WebFacing Tool and WebSphere Host Access Transformation
Services (HATS).
Related to the new Web application serving capabilities, new and expanded Web services
and service-oriented architecture (SOA)-related capabilities are available in 4Q 2007. In
addition, an integrated Web application server was introduced that can run many inhouse
and IBM Web applications. This server can reduce the need to run more robust IBM
WebSphere Application Server servers, which can require more system resources.
Depending upon the specific capability, support includes both i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4.
A new version for WebSphere Development Studio Client for iSeries that delivers
enhanced modernization tools with IBM ClearCase integration and improved RPG
support for i5/OS
433
A new MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS product, which is a popular open source database
software and has high Affinity with PHP
This was announced from MySQL AB and IBM in July 2007.

The new licensed program, DB2 Web Query for System i, which delivers a graphical,
Web-based query and report writing function
Value Packs for Popular i5/OS Software Products, which includes DB2 Value Pack for
i5/OS and Operations Value Pack for i5/OS
These value packs became available exclusively on 9406-MMA models. The Zend and
MySQL Value Pack for i5/OS product was also made available for POWER5, POWER6,
and older technology systems running i5/OS V5R4.
Also in this chapter, we include a summary of IBM Systems Workload Estimator (WLE)
enhancements that were made available between April 2007 and September 2007 for the
System i platform.
11.1 Secure Perspective for System i

Secure Perspective for System i (5733-SP1) is a tool that significantly eases security and
compliance. It enables you to create a data centric security policy using a nontechnical
language interface and then to apply that policy selectively to i5/OS, Microsoft Windows
systems, AIX systems, and DB2 databases from one central location. Then the tool
configures the operating system (system or partition) to use that policy after informing you of
potential impacts. The tool produces a compliance report to show an auditor that the
data-centric security implementation represents the given policy. In general, data centric is a
rigorous type of security, but is also difficult to deploy and maintain. Secure Perspective for
System i answers this issue, enabling clients to protect their system to the object or folder
level.
The outstanding feature of Secure Perspective is that the configuration of security policies is
done, managed, and viewed via a natural language interface, with the implementation using
security constructs that are unique to the supported operating systems. With Secure
Perspective, you can manage security of data on multiple hardware platforms and operating
systems from a central location. The central location can either be an i5/OS instance or a
Microsoft system.
Originally announced as supporting only i5/OS partitions, support for AIX and Windows was
announced and generally available during October 2007.
The remainder of this topic is focused only on i5/OS because support on the other operating
systems was not available at the time of writing this paper about how the Secure Perspective
constructs map to the other operating systems.
11.1.1 Secure Perspective features and benefits

Secure Perspective for System i enables organizations to create enforceable security policies
using natural language. Business leaders know how information should be protected. They
can create policies without needing to know where that information is stored or details about
i5/OS. Data owners and system administrators can then map the terms from the policies to
digital assets. The organizations policies can then be enforced or compliance checked.
Secure Perspective for System i provides proof of compliance for auditors in a straightforward
manner. Secure Perspective for System i offers tools to create organizationally appropriate
434
security. Because of the natural language approach, the policies that define security are
understandable and mindful to all parties. You can verify compliance with the policies
automatically. Additionally, natural language policies fit well in implementing the dictates of
regulation. Changes to the security policies in response to an auditors request can be quickly
made and applied instantly, minimizing the effort to make changes.
Secure Perspective for System i uses the security and auditability features of the i5/OS
operating system.
Features and benefits

Creates well-structured natural language security policies
Facilitates the mapping of policy to digital assets
Allows policy application or compliance check with the click of a button
Keeps a record of policy applications and compliance activity
Shows how applying a policy affects business processes
Enables a policy to be undone if undesired consequences occur
Enables executives and data owners to define a security policy as it pertains to securing
business assets with a human language interface
The tool implementing the given policy to the i5/OS partition
Notifies the system administrator of the impact of the policy before executing
Generates a compliance report on demand
Reports all security policy changes or deviations
11.1.2 Ordering and installing IBM Secure Perspective for System i

The ordering and charging details for 5733-PS1 are as follow:
It is supported on i5/OS V5R3, V5R4, and later.
A charge is per managed processor within each partition.
You can have 5733-PS1 an a CD or DVD media inserted into the i5/OS partitions optical
device. To install 5733-PS1:
1. Ensure the i5/OS HTTP Administration server (*ADMIN) is not active.
2. Perform GO LICPGM or use the RSTLICPGM LICPGM(5733PS1) command.
3. Start the HTTP Adminstration Server:
STRTCPSVR SERVER(*HTTP) HTTPSVR(*ADMIN)
Since Secure Perspective for System i runs as a Web application under the integrated Web
application server of the i5/OS HTTP Server Administration Server (*ADMIN), you must have
this ADMIN server up and running. To run this Web application, enter the following URL from
your browser workstation using either Internet Explorer or FireFox:
http://host name /IP address:port number/SecurePerspective
Consider the following example:

http://rchas55:2001/SecurePerspective
You must do some detailed planning regarding your security policies. You must identify a
meaningful naming convention for your policies, actions and so forth as summarized in the
remainder of this topic.
435
For more information about Secure Perspective for System i, refer to the following resources:
Secure perspectives tab on the System i Security Web page
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/security
IBM Systems Information Center

IBM Rochester Lab Services by telephone at 704-594-4015

IBM Global Business Services by telephone at 512-823-0665 for customized business
services
IBM System i Business Partners who specialize in security
Before you start setting up your policies through the Secure Perspective Web interface, you
must do adequate planning. You must also identify the i5/OS user ID who initially has the
responsibility for setting up your polices and associating them with i5/OS user profiles and
objects (within QSYS.LIB and the i5/OS integrated file systems folders). For example, select
the primary i5/OS user profile that has all object authority that you want to be the first user to
sign on to Secure Perspective.
The Secure Perspective Home page running on your i5/OS partition provides a list in an easy
to follow format that takes you through the configuration and implementation of the policies,
when followed in order.
Secure Perspective for System i configuration and usage examples

In this section, we briefly explain the terminology and the process of configuring Secure
Perspective for System i to illustrate its interface and capabilities. We show some product
windows so that you can see how to use Secure Perspectives capabilities.
The following key terms are used with Secure Perspective for System i:
Term dictionary
Contains the building blocks of policies. The dictionary has a set of

Actors, Resources, Actions, and Purposes.
Policy
Contains statements about which actions and access should be

allowed on a partition; can be created, edited, or deleted.
Security domain configuration
Identifies managed systems (i5/OS partition TCP/IP host names) that

should comply with your policies.
Term mapping
Manages systems that should comply with the policy.
Policy actions
Create and edit term mappings that have information about how terms
in the dictionary (Actors, Resources, and so on) correspond to system
objects.
View Event History
Contains logs on all activities associated with policies established

under Secure Perspectives. Selecting this option makes it easy to
meet the auditing requirement.
Administration
Manage user : Allows the addition or removal of allowed users. Users
can also be granted authorization to use features of secured
perspectives.
Manage sessions: Allows locked objects to be released and user
sessions to be terminated.
436
The Secure Perspective Home page, which is shown in the following figure, allows the
configuration or change of any feature of the product by selecting any of the items. Each item
has a brief description of its functions associated with it. You select an item and then
double-click it to open the configuration pages.
In the following examples, we show how you can define, deploy and audit with Secure
Perspective for System i.
437
The Policy Text Screen example illustrates the natural language approach to define and
implement data security policies of a company. It shows how the policies can be mapped to
actors (users) and the actions they are allowed to perform. In the following figure, we show an
example of Secure Perspective Resource Access Statements page. In our example, we
defined the three natural language policy statements that are shown. This example also gives
you an indication of the possible actors, actor actions, and resource classifications that you
can define.
http://hostname:9080/SecurePerspective/xxxxxx
438
The Secure Perspective Edit Term Mappings page example, shown in the following figure,
illustrates how an actor is associated with the user profiles of the system, enabling the
implementation of the defined security policies established in Secure Perspective.
439
After you perform a few other steps, you see a preview of the actions that you have set up.
After you set up the policies and deploy them, you can track the status of your security
compliance. The following figure shows an example of a Compliance Report for System
xxxxxx page, which indicates policy and object compliance information. The red circles
indicate additional action that should be taken. See the problems listed under Detailed access
information.
440
In the following figure, we show an example of a System History page, which shows change,
history, and compliance information. Options are available to view the details of the actions
and to undo the changes.
The previous figures provide only a sampling of the pages that are used to configure and
maintain security policies and to view an auditing of security events under Secure Perspective
for System i.
Before you start using Secure Perspective for System i, refer to the System i Information
Center for more information to help get you started:
11.2 i5/OS licensing by user

i5/OS licensing by concurrent user delivers a more flexible licensing approach to meet the
changing needs of innovative companies. Small-to-medium business clients can now tap into
the full performance of POWER5 technology, enabling the deployment of additional solutions,
while benefiting from the legendary capabilities of the System i platform. i5/OS licensing by
concurrent user enables you to better align the cost of i5/OS with the value it delivers by
purchasing the software for the number of users on your system. In the April 2007
announcements, i5/OS licensing by user is offered for the new Models 515 and 525.
441
For additional i5/OS licensing by user information, refer to:

System i Information Center
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/
Select i5/OS and related software Maintaining and managing i5/OS and related
software Working with software agreements and licenses.
System i Express i5/OS Licensing by User Frequently Asked Questions
This paper is available on the IBM System Sales Web page. From this page, select the
System i Sales Kit, which itself has links to additional information.
IBM Business Partner System Sales
http://w3-1.ibm.com/sales/systems/portal/_s.155/254?navID=f340s240&geoID=All&prodID=
IBM%20Systems????
IBM System Sales

http://w3-1.ibm.com/sales/systems/portal/_s.155/253?navID=Home&geoID=All&prodID=IBM%
20eServer%20And%20TotalStorage%20Products&x=7&y=10
On the general System Sales Web page, follow these steps:

i. Select System i in the Product field. Click GO.
ii. On the next Web page, under Featured content, click the System i master sales
kit link.
iii. On System i master sales kit page, scroll down to the Frequently Asked Question
(FAQ) List section. Under that heading, click the link for i5/OS Licensing by User
Frequently Asked Questions.
Alternatively, at the time of at which this paper was published, the paper was directly
available at the following Web address:
http://w3-1.ibm.com/sales/systems/portal/_s.155/254?navID=f220s240&geoID=AM&prodID=Syste
m%20i&docID=sitli5OSLicensingUserFAQ
11.2.1 i5/OS entitlements

This new licensing approach is currently supported only on System i Models 515 and 525. It
aligns software value with an associated i5/OS price (separate from hardware). It enables you
to license the i5/OS software specifically for the number of users who derive value from the
i5/OS operating system and the applications running under i5/OS.
For the Models 515 and 525, i5/OS licensing is now available as processor entitlements and
user entitlements:
Each i5/OS processor must have one i5/OS Processor Entitlement.
This entitlement is identical to i5/OS Processor Entitlements on other System i5 models.

Each i5/OS user must have one i5/OS user entitlement.
This entitlement by i5/OS users on Models 515 and 525 is separate and distinct from
i5/OS Processor Entitlement.
11.2.2 i5/OS Processor Entitlements

i5/OS Processor Entitlement has been available prior to April 2007. You must obtain one
i5/OS Processor Entitlement for each processor that is used for the i5/OS operating system
by purchasing a feature to authorize (SW Key) a processor.
442
The requirement for an i5/OS Processor Entitlement is consistent with previous entitlement
requirements on other System i models. i5/OS Processor Entitlements can be included in a
hardware and software package or can be purchased as needed. With the introduction of
i5/OS licensing by users, the price of i5/OS Processor Entitlements is significantly reduced on
Models 515 and 525. This new entitlement structure on these new System i models allows
customers to purchase licensing for the appropriate number of users and align the total price
with the value that is delivered.
11.2.3 i5/OS user entitlement details

In this section, we provide i5/OS user entitlement details for Models 515 and 525 for:
Unlimited collaboration users for 515 and 525.
Standard 515 and 525 i5/OS user entitlements.
Model 525 Solution Editions: The following Model 525 Solution Editions have unique
i5/OS user entitlement that is not described in this section:
System i 525 Solution Edition for Oracle JD Edwards Enterprise One (#6913)
System i 525 Solution Edition for SAP Applications (#6914)
See 3.10.4, Solution Editions on page 76, for more information about these editions.
Unlimited Collaboration Users for Models 515 and 525

For Models 515 and 525, the i5/OS Unlimited Collaboration Users feature offers a
cost-effective option for adding IBM Lotus collaboration solutions. The feature includes
entitlement for an unlimited number of users who access i5/OS solely for the use of IBM Lotus
collaboration products. A license for the IBM Lotus product is also required. The following
collaboration products are available:
Lotus Domino
Lotus Sametime
Lotus Quickr
Lotus QuickPlace
i5/OS licensing by users is generally identified by order number 5722-SSC on Models 515
and 525. i5/OS Unlimited Collaboration Users require the following One-time Charge feature
numbers:
Model 515: #1650
Model 525: #1651
For additional information, visit the 5/OS licensing Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/os/i5os/licensinginformation
Standard i5/OS user entitlement details for Models 515 and 525
In this section, we describe the user entitlement details for Models 515 and 525 that apply
outside of any of the following areas:
Models 515 and 525 Solution editions (see 3.10.4, Solution Editions on page 76)
Unlimited collaboration users for use with Lotus Collaboration products (see Unlimited
Collaboration Users for Models 515 and 525.
Effective 17 May 2007, i5/OS user entitlement on a System i5 Model 515 or 525 is based
upon the number of concurrently authenticated i5/OS users across all currently active i5/OS
partitions. An i5/OS user is a person who accesses the i5/OS operating system through one
443
or more connections. The user becomes authenticated by exchanging credentials (user

identifications) either directly with the operating system or indirectly through an application or
middleware software that is supported by i5/OS. Examples include the IBM middleware
WebSphere Application Server Version 6.1 for i5/OS (5733-W61) or Lotus Domino 7, licensed
program 5733-LD7.
Although closely associated with i5/OS licensing per processor, i5/OS user entitlement
accounting does not consider the number of processors that being used by each i5/OS
partition. For example, adding processor capacity to an i5/OS partition has no affect on i5/OS
user entitlement accounting.
On System i Models 9407-515 and 9406-525, you must acquire entitlement for the maximum
number of i5/OS users who are simultaneously authenticated on the system (concurrent
i5/OS users). To authorize users to the i5/OS operating system who are either employees or
similar personnel of your enterprise or individuals to whom you provide hosted services, you
need one i5/OS user entitlement for each concurrent i5/OS user.
The following tables summarize the i5/OS user entitlement licensing choices that are
available. i5/OS licensing by users is generally identified by order number 5722-SSC. The
following table shows the base and maximum user entitlements for Models 515 and 525.
i5/OS users
Model 515
Model 525
Base (no charge)
30/150/unlimited
Maximum
40a
Unlimited
a. Some geographies might also support an unlimited number of users on the Model 515. Contact your IBM
representative to determine if this is available in your country (region). You should always size your
workloads to evaluate whether the maximum hardware configuration can sustain a large number of users.
The following table shows the optional entitlements for Models 515 and 525.
i5/OS user entitlements
Model 515
Model 525
Blocks of users
Yes (5 per block)
Yes (10 per block)
Unlimited users
Noa
Yes
i5/OS external access

entitlements
Model 515
Model 525
External access
Yes
Yes
a. Some geographies might also support an unlimited number of users on the Model 515. Contact your IBM
representative to determine if this is available in your country (region). You should always size your
workloads to evaluate whether the maximum hardware configuration can sustain a large number of users.
i5/OS user entitlements: Block of users

On the Model 515, users are sold in a block of five users, with a maximum of seven blocks
orderable for the Model 515. On the Model 525, users are sold in a blocks of 10 users. The
Model 525 does not have a maximum amount of users. Blocks of users can be purchased to
equal the amount of users on the 525 system, or the Unlimited Users offering can be
purchased for the Model 525.
i5/OS user entitlements: Unlimited Users

Purchase an i5/OS user entitlement for Unlimited Users. With this option, you can authorize
an unlimited number of users to the 5/OS operating system on a Model 525.
444
i5/OS external access entitlements

You can authorize i5/OS users, such as customers or business partners, to access to i5/OS if
such users are not employees or similar personnel of your enterprise or individuals to whom
you provide hosted services. You have three licensing options for doing this:
Acquire the i5/OS User Entitlement option for each concurrent i5/OS user who is external
to the enterprise, in blocks of a fixed number of users.
Acquire the i5/OS External Access option for your Model 515 or 525.
Acquire the Unlimited i5/OS User Entitlements option on your Model 525.
Some i5/OS user license entitlement considerations

IBM might audit your compliance with User Entitlement terms with reasonable advance
notice. In this topic, we list key considerations of Model 515 and 525 i5/OS user license
entitlement. Refer to System i Express i5/OS Licensing by User Frequently Asked Questions,
which is available from the IBM System Sales Web site, for additional considerations:
http://w3-1.ibm.com/sales/systems/portal/_s.155/254?navID=f220s240&geoID=AM&prodID=System%2
0i&docID=sitli5OSLicensingUserFAQ
A concurrent i5/OS user is a person who is authenticated with i5/OS or an application on

i5/OS.
i5/OS User Entitlement gives a user the right to access i5/OS either directly or via an
application accessing i5/OS.
You must acquire i5/OS User Entitlement for the maximum number of concurrent i5/OS
users who are authenticated to the i5/OS.
IBM provides several tools for estimating the number of concurrent users for whom you
need a user entitlement. These tools help you assess the number of concurrent user
entitlements that you should purchase. The number of user entitlements that you purchase
is based upon good faith usage of these tools. See Tools available for estimating the
number of concurrent i5/OS users on page 446.
Exchanging credentials (authentication) can be performed in several ways. The most
commonly used functions that exchange credentials with i5/OS include:
5250 workstation signon process

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) signon
Signing on to i5/OS through a browser interface to a Web application
Use of Kerberos authentication
Using i5/OS as a file server, for example, a Windows workstation with a network drive
to the i5/OS integrated file server
A remote application accessing the i5/OS database via, for example, the i5/OS
database server jobs providing ODBC, .Net, or Java Database Connectivity (JDBC)
interfaces.
If no user authentication (exchange of credentials) is performed, user license entitlement
is not required.
i5/OS User License Entitlement applies across all active i5/OS partitions on the same
system. That is, a single user license entitlement is accounted when that person has
been authenticated in any active i5/OS partition on the system.
You do not need an i5/OS User Entitlement for every i5/OS user profile that is defined on
the system. i5/OS User Entitlements are required for the number of concurrent i5/OS
users.
445
You need an i5/OS User Entitlement for the system administrator and the operator, that is
for people, not for specific user profiles, such as QSECOFR and QSYSOPR.
If one person signs onto multiple i5/OS applications from one device, one i5/OS User
Entitlement is required.
If one person signs onto i5/OS multiple times from multiple devices, one i5/OS User
Entitlement is required.
If 20 people, for example, use one i5/OS user profile to concurrently exchange credentials
with i5/OS, an i5/OS application, or middleware, you require 20 i5/OS User Entitlements,
because 20 different persons are authenticated through their credentials.
In cases where it is unknown how many authenticated users will be active at the same
time, consider selecting the Unlimited Entitlements option.
A batch job that was submitted by an i5/OS user is not accounted toward the current
licensed User Entitlement number.
When considering upgrading from a System i model, such as a Model 810, which has no
limit to the number of i5/OS users, to a Model 525, consider the number of active 525
users and the cost of its user entitlement options. For example, the Model 525 might come
with user license entitlement of 30 i5/OS users. If the Model 525 environment requires
more than 30 i5/OS users, you must purchase an additional 150 or unlimited i5/OS user
entitlements. You might find that upgrading to a Model 520 is a lower-cost solution.
Remember both Models 520 and 525 have the same I/O attachment and maximum
configuration capabilities.
The i5/OS External Access option provides an unlimited number of concurrent i5/OS User
Entitlements for i5/OS users who are external to the enterprise on the system. For
example, if you have multiple i5/OS partitions on the System i, one i5/OS External Access
option provides access for an unlimited number of concurrent i5/OS User Entitlements for
i5/OS users who are external to the enterprise across one or multiple i5/OS partitions.
You do not need to purchase the i5/OS External Access option if you have already
purchased the Unlimited i5/OS User Entitlement option. The Unlimited i5/OS User
Entitlement option provides an unlimited number of concurrent i5/OS User Entitlements for
a system for i5/OS Users within and external to the enterprise.
The Unlimited User feature of iSeries Access Family (5722-XW1) is included with System i
515 and 525 Express configurations. Each i5/OS entitled user is also entitled to use any
client in the iSeries Access Family at no additional charge.
Tools available for estimating the number of concurrent i5/OS users

In the following sections, we describe the 5/OS tools that are available for estimating,
monitoring, and identifying the number of concurrent i5/OS authenticated users. None of
these tools count 100% of all authenticated concurrent users because of the various
application-specific and middleware-specific authentication implementations.
The information reported by these tools helps you identify those users who might possibly be
authenticated concurrently and thus are accounted toward your currently licensed user value.
i5/OS Work with License Information command

The Work with License Information (WRKLICINF) is used to show the number of enabled
i5/OS user profiles for a single i5/OS partition as well as for all active i/OS partitions. Knowing
the number of enabled user profiles relative to your i5/OS User License Entitlement value
serves as a base for how many concurrent active users there might be. Use of the
WRKLICINF output and associated messages does not assist in estimating the actual the
number of currently authenticated i5/OS users at a particular time period.
446
The i5/OS software key licensing information is visible to customers on installed systems that
use the Work with License Information (WRKLICINF) command. The keys are:
5050 - Version and Release.
The 5050 is the software license key for the i5/OS operating system with 70-day trial
periods.
5051 - Processor Quantity.
The 5051 is the processor entitlement key, which indicates the number of processors used
by the operating system.
5052 - User Quantity (only seen on Models 9407-515 and 9406-5525 with V5R4 or later).
The 5052 is the user entitlement key, which indicates the number of users authorized to
use the i5/OS operating system. The 5052 displays under the WRKLICINF command only
on System i Models 515 and 525.
The i5/OS internal component Software License Manager/400 assists you with license
compliance. i5/OS messages are issued to indicate when you approach and exceed your
user entitlement number. Using the i5/OS WRKLICINF command, you can view your currently
licensed entitlement number (usage limit) and the users accounted toward that entitlement
number (usage count).
The following figure shows an example of the initial WRKLICINF PRDID(*ALL) display on a
Model 515. i5/OS user entitlement information is associated with 5722-SS1 feature 5052,
which appears only on a Model 515 or 525.
Work with License Information
03/23/07
System serial number . . . . . . . . . :
Processor group . . . . . . . . . . . :
10XXXXX
P05

1=Add license key
2=Change 5=Display detail
8=Work with license users ...
Opt Product
5722SS1
5722SS1
_5_ 5722SS1
5722SS1
5722SS1
5722SS1
5722SS1
SYSTEMX
12:46:15
6=Print detail
License
Term
Feature Description
V5R4M0
5050
i5/OS
V5
5051
i5/OS
V5
5052
i5/OS
V5R4M0
5103
Media and Storage Extensions
V5
5109
NetWare Enhanced Integration
V5R4M0
5112
PSF 1-45 IPM Printer Support
V5R4M0
5113
PSF 1-100 IPM Printer Support
More...
Parameters or command
===>
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F11=Display Usage Information
F12=Cancel
447
WRKLICINF Option 5 shows the usage limit and a count of all user profiles across all i5/OS
partitions that are accounted against your usage limit. See the Usage limit field for 5722-SS1,
5052 feature code, in the following figure.
Under Usage Count Information, you see the Local partition field. The value shown indicates
the number of i5/OS user profiles that are accounted against your user entitlement for this
partition. On a system with no i5/OS partitions, you do not see the All partitions field.
Display License Information
03/23/07
Product ID .
License term
Feature . . .
Description .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
5722SS1
V5
5052
i5/OS
Compliance type . . . . . . :
Usage type . . . . . . . . :
*KEYED
*REGISTERED
Usage limit . . . . . . . . :
Last update . . . . . . . . :
15
02/22/07 13:56:13
Threshold . . . . . . . . . :
14
Usage Count Information:

All partitions . . . . . :
Local partition . . . . .:
Peak Usage Information:
Peak usage . . . . . . . :
Last peak . . . . . . . . :
Log violations . . . . . . :
Message queue/Library . . . :
Keyed compliance information:
Expiration date . . . . . :
Grace period . . . . . . :
Date grace period expires :
SYSTEMX
12:51:16
12.00
. 3.00
<< SHOWN ONLY ON A PARTITIONED SYSTEM
12.00
03/12/07 12:08:36
*NO
ADMIN QUSRSYS
*NONE
0
*NONE
Remember that your user entitlement number is for users who are active in all partitions. In
our example, we have a system-wide entitlement number of 15 users. In this partition, we
have three user profiles that are accounted and system-wide. We have a total of 12 user
profiles accounted against the user entitlement number (Usage limit value).
From an auditing viewpoint, i5/OS currently accounts an i5/OS user as part of the user
entitlement count based upon the i5/OS user profiles enabled (*ENABLED on system
screens) status. Accounting is not done at the time of user authentication.
IBM i5/OS user profiles, such as QSECOFR, QSYSOPR, QUSER, QNOTES, QBRMS, and
so forth, are not counted toward the number of enabled user entitlement licenses. There is no
distinction at the i5/OS accounting level between internal or external i5/OS users.
448
Messages are issued when a user profile is created in the enabled status or enabled
(previously disabled) and the number of enabled i5/OS users when either of the following
situations are true:
A user enablement causes the current count to reach the current user license
entitlements threshold number.
CPI9E19: Usage limit threshold exceeded for product 5722SS1.

A user enablement causes the current count to exceed the current user license
entitlements number.
CPF9E17: Usage limit exceeded - operator action required.

The associated user profile is identified in the message.
You can use the WRKLICINF for 5052 Peak Usage information to determine whether you
have gone over your entitlement number. You can use the Change License Information
function to set the threshold value different than the default.
Use the WRKLICINF command for 5722-SS1, option 8 for 5052, to see the enabled user
profiles that are currently holding a license (accounting toward your entitlement number). See
the following example.
Work with License Users
03/23/07
Product ID .
License Term
Feature . .
Description
Usage type .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
:
SYSTEMX
13:00:11
5722SS1
V5
5052
i5/OS
*REGISTERED

5=Display Detail
Opt
License
User
CWILK
FRED
GMHDDBDHHM
Parameters or command
===>
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
Number
Uses
1.00
1.00
1.00
F12=Cancel
------Request-----Date
Time
02/22/07 13:56:13
03/13/07 14:04:53
03/15/07 07:52:59
F15=Sort by date/time
User
CWILK
CWILK
CWILK
F17=Position to
You are responsible for monitoring your compliance by using the WRKLICINF command and
the reviewing the messages we have shown here. IBM may audit your compliance with the
licensing terms or provide additional auditing tools upon reasonable advance notice to you.
Notes:
As previously described, the WRKLICINF Usage Count Information count and License
User user profiles shown are only those that are currently in the *ENABLED status. You
can change i5/OS user profiles to *DISABLED status or delete *ENABLED user profiles
to stay within your license entitlement number.
Any number of users can be signed on as one of the accounted user profiles. The count
(number uses) shown for that same profile is one.
449
Display Estimated Users command

The Display Estimated Users (DSPESTUSR) command takes a snapshot of the number of
distinct active users on the system in order to provide an estimate of the concurrent user
licenses required.
To learn how to download and run this command, go the Licensing tab of the i5/OS Web page
at the following address and look for the System i 515 and 525 heading:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/os/i5os/licensing.html
The DSPESTUSR command counts the distinct active users on the system in two different
categories:
Category 1 includes all interactive (running 5250 workstation jobs) users and the current
users of prestart jobs, such as those used by iSeries Navigator.
Category 2 includes all other users.
This command does not count any profiles that begin with the letter Q.
Read the DSPESTUSR.PDF document for more information about using the tool. The i5/OS
library save file and this Portable Document Format (PDF) are included in the downloaded
material from the i5/OS licensing Web site from the Download this tool link.
Other tools for estimating the concurrently authenticated users

The following tools or methods are offered to estimate the number of concurrently
authenticated users that is not processed by the DSPESTUSR command. If you have other
tools or methods for the following applications or for other applications, use those instead.
For active Domino users, use the appropriate Domino release-level interfaces to view
active users over the time period that you select. For example, you might simply look at the
highest number of active users over the time period and use that number as your active
Domino users to account for.
For active WebSphere Application Server instances or profiles, use the appropriate
WebSphere Application Server level interfaces to view active users over the time period
that you select. Some parameters might show the highest number of active threads, which
can include one thread per active authenticated user or multiple threads per single active
user.
Use i5/OS Collection Services and associated performance database files over the time
period that you select. Either write your own queries against the QAPMJOBSL file or print
the Performance Tools for iSeries, 5722-PT1, Component Report. Examine the output for
jobs that consumed CPU utilization during the selected time period.
For users that are directly authenticated to i5/OS, use the Work with Active Jobs
(WRKACTJOB) command or its generally corresponding iSeries Navigator function Work
Management Active Jobs. Periodically refresh the display or window output over the
time period that you select.
Using the previously listed tools and interfaces or others that you might know about, you can
come up with your best estimate of the number of concurrent user entitlements that you
should purchase.
450
The following figure shows an example using Work Management Active Jobs in iSeries
Navigator. The window was refreshed over 7 minutes and 45 seconds. Using this tool, you
estimate the number of concurrent authenticated users to be 3:
AS0301
JCook
AS0310
451
11.3 Initial Software Maintenance for Model 515

For Model 515, there is a new initial Software Maintenance (SWMA) product number in
addition to already available SWMA product numbers on System i Models 515 Express
Config 1 and Base Config 1 and 2. It is an initial order only SWMA for the 9407-515
configuration.
Program number
3 Months - Standard on 515
5733-SPN
1 - YR. EXTENDED SWMA
5733-SPM
3 - YR. EXTENDED SWMA
5733-SPO
On the Model 515 after the initial new SWMA, renewals to continue the SWMA coverage are
done with the existing per processor-based SWMA products. The Model 525 does not have a
new SWMA number. It uses the existing per processor SWMA numbers.
The following table shows by model (515 and 525 only) the SWMA that will be used
depending on whether it is an initial registration or a renewal.
Type-model
SWMA type-model
9407-515
5733-SPN 3 months initial registration
9407-515
5733-SPM 1 year initial registration
9407-515
5733-SPO 3 year initial registration
9407-515
5733-SPP 1 year initial reg. or renewal
9407-515
5733-SPE 3 year initial registration
9407-515
5733-SP3 3 year renewal
9406-525
5733-SPP 1 year initial reg. or renewal
9406-525
5733-SPE 3 year initial registration
9406-525
5733-SP3 3 year renewal
11.4 i5/OS Application Server, 5722-SSB

IBM adds flexibility by offering application server licensing by processor on System i Models
550, 570, 9406-MMA, and 595. This introduces a lower priced i5/OS entitlement that can be
used when the work within an i5/OS partition is application serving. This means that
applications run under i5/OS V5R4 in a partition, but do not use DB2 for i5/OS in that
partition.
The new i5/OS Application Server entitlement offers a reduced charge specifically for i5/OS
partitions doing non-database work. This option can be purchased for processors that are
assigned to logical partitions (LPARs) that host applications that access DB2 for i5/OS data
residing in a different i5/OS partition or system. It also can be used for applications that are
running in a partition that simply to do not execute DB2 for i5/OS functions anywhere.
The new i5/OS Application Server Processor Entitlement option enables you to leverage the
benefits of i5/OS work management, security, and scalability in new applications even more
452
economically. Additionally you can manage these applications with the same resources and
skills that support all other i5/OS business applications.
In general, the i5/OS Application Server license entitlement is designed to support partitions
that run products, such as Lotus Domino and Sametime, that do not require DB2 Universal
Database to execute. It is also ideal for Web application serving workloads such as Java
language business applications that run under WebSphere Application Server.
This i5/OS Application Server license entitlement can also apply to partitions that run PHP or
Apache-based applications that run on i5/OS, all of which might typically access only DB2
data in other i5/OS partitions or servers.
Program name
PID number
Charge metric
i5/OS Application Server
5722-SSB
Per Processor
11.4.1 i5/OS Application Server Processor Entitlement details

An i5/OS Application Server Processor Entitlement allows the use of i5/OS, except for
restrictions on the use of the integrated database, DB2 for i5/OS. Under this entitlement, you
are entitled to use DB2 for i5/OS only if it is used:
By an IBM software product that already includes DB2 entitlement in its license
agreement.
By i5/OS itself to perform its functions.
For minor, incidental purposes and is not intended for productive use of DB2 for i5/OS for
the storage, retrieval, and management of data by your applications.
The use of this i5/OS Application Server Processor Entitlement for a partition restricts any
other i5/OS entitlements for that partition in the same manner as this entitlement.
To obtain an i5/OS Application Server entitlement for a processor that does not use the
function DB2 for i5/OS, purchase the i5/OS Application Server Processor Entitlement feature
under product identifier (PID) 5722-SSB. Refer to the following tables for normal i5/OS
Processor Entitlement features and i5/OS Application Server processor entitlements for the
550, 570, and 595 application server.
The following table is for the Model 550.
KEY
PID
No charge entitlement
feature
Priced entitlement
feature
Entitlement description
5051
5722-SS1
1507
----
i5/OS Processor Entitlements
5051
5722-SSA
----
1538
Additional i5/OS Processor

Entitlements
NA
5722-SSB
----
1592

processor entitlements
453
The following table is for Models 570 and POWER6 570.

KEY
PID
No charge
entitlements feature
Priced entitlement
feature
5051
5722-SS1
1516
----
5051
5722-SSA
----
1540

Entitlements
NA
5722-SSB
----
1598

The following table is for Model 570 (POWER6).

KEY
PID
No charge
entitlements feature
Priced entitlement
feature
5051
5722-SS1
1618
----
5051
5722-SSA
----
1540

Entitlements
NA
5722-SSB
----
1598

The following table is for Model 595.

KEY
PID
No charge entitlement
feature
Priced entitlement
feature
5051
5722-SS1
1526
----
5051
5722-SSA
----
1540

Entitlements
NA
5722-SSB
----
1598

License key considerations include:

Partitions that use DB2 for i5/OS entitlements.
For those customers who purchase i5/OS Processor Entitlements, a key (5051) is
generated by IBM that contains the quantity of processors that are entitled for DB2 use.
The i5/OS Processor Entitlement key (5051) is entered in each partition that requires DB2
function. i5/OS internal component Software License Manager (SLM) assists with license
compliance by counting the number of activated processors available to a partition that will
be used for DB2 work. This value is compared to the 5051 key quantity to determine
license compliance.
Partitions that do not use DB2 for i5/OS entitlements.
For those customers who purchase i5/OS Processor Entitlements and i5/OS Application
Server Processor Entitlements, only one key (5051)is generated by IBM that contains the
total quantity of processors that are entitled for both DB2 and non-DB2 use.
The i5/OS Processor Entitlement key (5051) must be entered in every partition, those
partitions that require DB2 function and those that do not require DB2 function.
SLM assists license compliance by counting the number of activated processors that are
available to a partition that will not be used for DB2 work. This value is compared to the
454
key quantity (total quantity of i5/OS Processor Entitlements plus i5/OS Application Server
Processor Entitlements), to determine license compliance.
For example, you might have the following networked partitions on the same Model 570 that
all need to be entitled for i5/OS:
Partition AP1 (does not require DB2 for i5/OS) has two processors assigned.
In this partition, an order entry application runs that accesses database data on partition
DB1. Alternatively, no applications running in this partition access DB2 for i5/OS data
anywhere.
Partition AP2 (does not require DB2 for i5/OS) has three processors assigned.
In this partition, the order entry application also runs as well as a sales tracking
application. Both of these applications access DB2 for i5/OS data in partition DB1.
Alternatively, no applications running in this partition access DB2 for i5/OS data anywhere.
Partition DB1 (uses DB2 for i5/OS) has three processors assigned.
The following table shows the entitlement results of our example for i5/OS Processor
Entitlements and i5/OS Application Server Entitlements. One 5051 key is provided that
entitles eight processors on the system: three of the processors are entitled to use i5/OS for
DB2, and five of the processors are not entitled.
Partition
Base i5/OS Processor

Entitlements (5722-SS1)

Entitlements (5722-SSA)
i5/OS Application Server Processor

Entitlements
Key/number of
processors
Feature/
purchased
quantity
AP1
5051/2
1595/2
AP2
5051/3
1595/3
Key/number of
processors
DB1
5051/1
Feature/
purchased
quantity
1516/1
Key/number of
processors
5051/2
Feature/
purchased
quantity
1539/2
As of April 2007, the WRKLICINF command interface has not been updated to show this
entitlement information after you successfully enter the license key. An update was planned to
be available in 3Q 2007.
11.4.2 Software Maintenance for entitlements

SWMA for System i is sold on a per-processor basis. You are encouraged to purchase SWMA
for each i5/OS Processor Entitlement and i5/OS Application Server Processor Entitlement on
the System i server.
One year of Software Maintenance for i5/OS is included with an i5/OS Application Server
Processor Entitlement. Renewals and three-year extensions are done under the normal
SWMA for i5/OS and Selected Programs offering.
455
11.5 System x and BladeCenter integration for i5/OS

System i integration with iSCSI-attached BladeCenter and System x servers, introduced with
i5/OS V5R4, was enhanced during July 2007 and October 2007:
Multipath I/O (MPIO) on iSCSI-attached BladeCenter and System x servers running
Windows Server 2003
A single target iSCSI host bus adapter (HBA) installed in the iSeries system and assigned
to an i5/OS partition is capable of supporting several servers or hosted systems. Each
initiator HBA in the System x or blade system is also capable of connecting to multiple
target iSCSI HBAs that are assigned to an i5/OS partition.
You can configure the iSCSI environment to support multiple target iSCSI HBAs, multiple
iSCSI initiator HBAs, and multiple storage connections.
Paths are connection points between virtual devices and iSCSI HBAs that are owned by
an i5/OS partition. A virtual device that is being hosted by i5/OS is said to be linked to a
path. Initiator iSCSI HBA ports access the virtual device through the path:
Single path: Virtual storage or devices that are linked to a specific iSCSI HBA can only
be accessed through that adapter by a hosted system.
Multipath I/O: A hosted system can use multiple iSCSI data paths to access virtual
disks hosted by i5/OS. You can configure a multipath group of two or more target iSCSI
HBAs and then specify that a virtual disk be accessed using the multi-path group
instead of a single iSCSI HBA. With this configuration, the data on the virtual disk can
be accessed using any of the iSCSI HBAs in the multipath group.
The advantage of the multipath configuration is that, in case of a problem with a target
iSCSI HBA, an initiator iSCSI HBA, or a switch, the hosted system can continue to
access the virtual disks that are configured to use another path (HBA) within the
multipath group.
For more information about which BladeCenter and System x models are supported
over iSCSI, how to obtain the i5/OS PTFs for this support, and additional multipath
configuration documentation, refer to the links to this information provided on the
System i integration with BladeCenter and System x Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/bladecenter
VMware ESX Server on iSCSI-attached BladeCenter and System x servers
Integrated support of i5/OS V5R4 iSCSI-attached System x and BladeCenter was

enhanced to support virtual storage for VMware ESX server V3.0.1. VMware is one of the
leading virtualization products for x86 processor-based servers.
VMware ESX Server is the host server for abstracting processor, memory, storage, and
networking resources of a physical server into multiple virtual machines. The ESX Server
is part of the VMware Infrastructure. It has been demonstrated to help reduce the number
of physical servers through virtualization. It also enables multiple virtual machines, each
with an installed network operating system running on a single server.
VMware ESX supports Windows, Linux, NetWare, and Solaris virtual machines. You can
install the ESX server on an iSCSI-attached BladeCenter or System x server and use the
System i disks of an i5/OS partition for all of the storage for the ESX server, extending the
value of the i5/OS storage management. VMware ESX is enabled through a program
temporary fix (PTF) to i5/OS V5R4.
456
For more information about which BladeCenter and System x models are supported for
VMware ESX over iSCSI, how to obtain the i5/OS PTFs for this support, and additional
information about VMware ESX Server support, refer to the links to this information
provided on the System i integration with BladeCenter and System x Web page:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/bladecenter
To learn more about the VMware Infrastructure, refer to the VMware Web site:
http://www.vmware.com
11.6 Web Enablement Made Easy

On 10 April 2007, the Web Enablement Made Easy announcement letter 207-064 included a
set of capabilities that help you to get up and running in a Web-enabled environment in a
minimum time period. The enhancements in this announcement letter include and build upon
a similar set of Web-enablement enhancements that were announced October 2006 in
announcement letter 206-256.
The objective of these kinds of enhancements is to get you up and running with good
performance in an IBM WebSphere Application Server-based environment with a minimum of
expertise in the WebSphere Application Server versions. The enhancements also enable you
to familiarize yourself with use of the IBM WebFacing Tool and HATS products capabilities.
These products make your existing 5250-based applications accessible to Web users, without
first installing and using the WebSphere Development Studio Client for iSeries product
running on a PC workstation.
The capabilities that were available October 2006 through December 2006 were
re-announced with the April 2007 Web Enablement Updates announcement and new
capabilities were added. Refer to IBM System i5 V5R4 Technical Overview Redbook,
SG24-7271, which highlights the capabilities announced in October 2006 through December
2006 with examples. The capabilities announced in October 2006 and April 2007 were
available for both i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 in June 2007. Most capabilities were already
available as of April 2007.
Some enhancements are made available through specific product ordering numbers and
others via specific PTFs. The set of enhancements includes the following features:
Ordering PID Web Enablement for i5/OS (5722-WE2)
The 5722-WE2 and its associated software features offer no-charge capabilities and are
available with each order of i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 delivered as either CD or DVD media:
You can get media that contains each the following Application Server - Express for
i5/OS versions 5.1, 6.0, and 6.1 or select version. By default, V6.0 is shipped.
WebSphere Express Runtime V1R1M0 or V1R2M0 on CD or DVD media includes
media containing HTTP Server for i5/OS, 5722-DG1, a WebSphere Application Server
version and a set of unique i5/OS applications that you can run under a WebSphere
Application Server profile configured on your i5/OS partition. As discussed later,
specifying V1R1M0 or V1R2M0 determines which WebSphere Application Server
version you receive.
With WebSphere Express Runtime software, a set of installation wizards and unique
IBM-provided i5/OS Web applications that include:
A wizard to install, if not already installed, HTTP Server for i5/OS, 5722-DG1.
A wizard to install, if not already installed, the provided WebSphere Application Server
Version 5.1, 6.0, or 6.1.
457
The ability to install associated i5/OS group PTFs for these products.
A wizard to install, if not already installed, iSeries Access for the Web, 5722-XH2.
Configuration of a matched paired HTTP server and WebSphere Application Server
profile (instance).
The ability to install (deploy) unique i5/OS Web applications into your named
WebSphere Application Server profile (instance), in addition to other IBM-provided
WebSphere Application Server applications that already come with each specific
WebSphere Application Server version on all supported operating systems:
iSeries Access for Web
A 5250-based example flight reservation application, flght400
HATS-enabled, WebFaced enabled, and Web Services-enabled versions of the

flght400 application
HTTP Server for i5/OS, 5722-DG1 enhancements
HTTP Server for i5/OS already provides its IBM Web Administration for i5/OS interface to
configure and start and stop all HTTP servers and WebSphere Application Server profile
(formerly called an instance) application servers that you want. This includes ones that you
might have configured outside of the new wizards as well as new ones that you might have
created with the wizards that we previously described.
Announced in April 2007, the IBM Web Administration for i5/OS interface also helps you
set up instances of IBM WebSphere Portal Express for i5/OS instances on i5/OS V5R3
and V5R4. The IBM Web Administration for i5/OS interface also has links to the Web
Performance Advisor and Web Performance Monitor, if installed, which are provided in
separate PTFs:
Web Performance Advisor assists in viewing and modifying (with advice) several i5/OS
system values and WebSphere Application Server parameter settings that affect
performance.
As of April 2007, support is available on i5/OS V5R3 and for WebSphere Application
Server V6.1. WebSphere Application Server V6.1 support includes support for using
both IBM Technology for Java (32-bit) and classic (64-bit) Java virtual machines
(JVMs).
Web Performance Monitor provides a look at transaction counts and average response
times of your WebSphere Application Server applications, including the unique i5/OS
Web applications that you installed with the new wizards.
As of April 2007, support is available on i5/OS V5R3 and for WebSphere Application
Server V6.1. WebSphere Application Server V6.1 support includes support for using
both IBM Technology for Java (32-bit) and classic (64-bit) JVMs.
General WebSphere Application Server on i5/OS enhancements
i5/OS Collection Services collects partition performance data.

New Collection Services support collects performance data for WebSphere Application
Server V6.0 (and new in April 2007 V6.1) Express, Base, and Network Deployment
editions. Normal Collection Services functions create performance database files,
places the collected performance data, including the new WebSphere performance
data into specific i5/OS QAPMxxxx database file members. The performance data in
these files can be input to sizing tools, such as the IBM Systems Workload Estimator,
through the use of the Performance Manager for System i product and service.
458
WebSphere Application Server 6.1 for i5/OS can run with Classic JVM and IBM
Technology for JVM.
WebSphere Application Server 6.1 for i5/OS includes an i5/OS Qshell script than can
switch between JVMs. This enableJVM script sets a desired JVM for one or more
WebSphere Application Server profiles.
All of these Web-enablement capabilities assist you in getting an operational Web application
server environment up and running with a minimum of expertise required. The following topics
provide additional information.
11.6.1 Web Enablement for i5/OS, 5722-WE2

Web Enablement for i5/OS is an orderable feature number (PID) only. The following table lists
the orderable features and associated installation on i5/OS PID that are available under
5722-WE2 as of April 2007.
Feature
Order
feature
PID after i5/OS

installation
Media
Default
WAS-Express V5.1
#5901
5733-W51
CD
No
WAS-Express V6.0
#5902
5733-W60
CD
Yes
WAS-Express V6.1
#5903
#5904
5733-W61
CD and DVD
No
Express Runtime Web Environments V1R1M0
#5905
#5906
5733-SO1
CD and DVD
Yes
Express Runtime Web Environments V1R2M0
#5907
#5908
5733-SO1
CD and DVD
No
Refer to the IBM e-Config for the specific ordering process and information about how the CD
or DVD media is packaged upon delivery. Alternatively, the WE2 features can be ordered
electronically through the IBM Electronic Software Delivery Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/ess
11.6.2 Express Runtime Web Environment for i5/OS capabilities overview

IBM Express Runtime Web Environments for i5/OS is distributed by via CD or DVD. These
CDs or DVDs can be run only on a Windows workstation. The Windows workstation must be
connected to the installation target i5/OS partition. After starting IBM Express Runtime Web
Environments for i5/OS on the workstation, you must specify the IP address or host name of
the target i5/OS partition.
IBM Express Runtime Web Environments for i5/OS provides an integrated package of
software products that you install and configure to your i5/OS, according to your needs, using
the provided wizard.
The main advantage of using IBM Express Runtime Web Environments for i5/OS is that it is
an easy way to install all of the components necessary for a working Web environment. Only
a basic understanding of how an HTTP server and a WebSphere Application Server profile
(instance) operates is required. Using this tool is an ideal way to get someone who is
considering or just starting to run a WebSphere Application Server-based application, quickly
up and running with an example environment.
459
IBM Express Runtime Web Environments for i5/OS is offered as a feature of IBM Web
Enablement for i5/OS (5722-WE2), which is shipped by default when you order i5/OS V5R4.
All WebSphere Application Server for i5/OS - Express products can be ordered through the
5722-WE2 product or separately under IBM Passport Advantage.
IBM Express Runtime Web Environments for i5/OS is available free of charge, because you
are already entitled to V5R4 embedded products at no cost.
You can select to install and configure the following Web serving products using Express
Runtime Web Environments for i5/OS. If the product is already installed, the corresponding fix
level that shipped with the 5722-WE2 media is applied, if necessary.
HTTP Server for i5/OS (5722-DG1)
WebSphere Application Server for i5/OS - Express V5.0 (5733-W51)
This is currently the default version provided.

iSeries Access for Web (5722-XH2)
Note: IBM Express Runtime Web Environments for i5/OS does not include an iSeries
Access Family 5722-XW1 license. This means formally you have 70 days of use until
you must purchase a 5722-XW1 user license.
The IBM-provided i5/OS flght400 5250-based application, which you can run from a 5250
workstation interface as well as a WebFaced application, a HATS application, and as a
Web Services application
The unique sample RPG program (flght400) 5250-based application has already been
processed by IBM to illustrate ways in which you can use the IBM technologies and products
such as WebSphere Development Studio Client, IBM WebFacing Tool, and the WebFacing
Deployment Tool with HATS Technology and as a Web Service.
When the installation has completed, you have an up and running matched HTTP server and
Web application server profile that is ready for you to run the applications installed.
As part of this automated set up, a desktop icon labeled first steps is on your installation
workstations desktop. You can click this icon to begin a browser session to the FirstSteps
Web application page. You can continue to used this icon for later use or note the associated
URL and use the URL later in a browser on any workstation.
460
The FirstSteps Web page, as shown in the following figure, helps you get started running the
i5/OS applications.
11.6.3 Web Performance Advisor

Web Performance Advisor retrieves specific i5/OS system values and unique parameter
values to supported releases of WebSphere Application Server 5.0.x, 5.1.x, 6.0.x, and 6.1.x
and Portal Server and Workplace. You get the current values, text that explains them, and,
for certain parameters, a recommended value for improved performance. Some parameter
value changes can be made in real time, while for others, you have to shut down the server,
make the change, and start the server to put them into effect.
The advisor interfaces to the performance parameters of WebSphere Application Server and
their values. Therefore, you do not have to know how to use the Administration Console
interface of WebSphere Application Server to find the parameter settings. This is especially
important when various software versions of WebSphere Application Server might each have
a unique interface to these parameters.
You can easily restore changed settings while you try different configurations for performance
improvements.
461
Use this support as an additional tool for improving your Web serving needs for HTTP,
WebSphere Application Server - Express V6.0 and V6.1, both 32-bit and 64-bit JVMs, and
portal and collaboration servers.
Support for WebSphere Application Server V6.0 using classic (64-bit) JVM is currently
available for i5/OS V5R4 with the currently available level of the HTTP Server group PTF
SF99114. Support for i5/OS V5R3 became available on 1 June 2007 and requires group PTF
SF99099 to be installed.
Support for WebSphere Application Server V6.1 using both IBM Technology for Java (32-bit)
and classic (64-bit) JVMs on i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 became available on 1 June 2007 and
requires PTF SF99099 for V5R3 and PTF SF99114 for V5R4, level 8.
After WebSphere Application Server 6.1 fix level 6.1.0.7 is loaded and its update installer has
been run, 32-bit Java (J9) is supported.
See also special instructions for PTF SI26736, which lists several other fix levels for
WebSphere Application Server that might need to be installed.
The Web Performance Advisor, after it is installed, is displayed as an option under the IBM
Web Administration for i5/OS interface as part of the no-charge HTTP Server i5/OS
Administration Server (*ADMIN), which can be started by using the following command:
Select the IBM Web Administration for i5/OS Application Servers tab to access the Web
page that shows the Web Performance Advisor link.
11.6.4 Web Performance Monitor

Support is provided for monitoring the performance usage of the application transactions of
Web Application Server that transverse several i5/OS jobs (and, possibly multiple i5/OS
partitions). The transaction monitoring encompasses programs that are running under
multiple i5/OS jobs, such as HTTP server WebSphere Application Server, and DB2 for i5/OS
server and Integrated Language Environment (ILE) applications.
This real-time i5/OS performance monitoring and statistics reporting is an i5/OS higher level
version of detailed performance monitoring and reporting that is available using the Tivoli
Performance Viewer. Tivoli Performance Viewer requires significant knowledge of
WebSphere Application Server and can be included with the WebSphere Application Server
products that are available on several operating systems, including i5/OS.
After Web Performance Monitor is installed, the i5/OS Web performance monitor function can
be selected from a Web Administration for i5/OS window. You select a specific HTTP server
instance or a WebSphere Application Server profile (instance) to be monitored. The
monitored and reported information includes CPU utilizations, transaction counts, and
average response times.
Support for i5/OS V5R4 is currently available via the current level (6 or higher) of the HTTP
Server for i5/OS group PTF SF99114.
Support for monitoring supported WebSphere Application Server products on i5/OS V5R3
became available on 1 June 2007, and requires V5R3 HTTP Server for i5/OS group PTF
SF99099. Check the Fix Central Web page for a description of SF99099 to determine the
level that supports the Web Performance Monitor on V5R3 and SF99114 for V5R4 level 8.
462
After you install the Web Performance Monitor, it is displayed as an option under the IBM Web
Administration for i5/OS interface as part of the no charge HTTP Server i5/OS Administration
Server (*ADMIN) server, which you can start by entering the following command:
11.6.5 WebSphere performance data collected by i5/OS Collection Services

In December 2006, Collections Services, which is a component of i5/OS V5R4, was
enhanced to collect performance data for active WebSphere Application Server instances.
Collection Services collects performance data at specific time intervals, providing a snapshot
of activity during the time interval. As with other Collection Services data collected in this
manner, to be useful to i5/OS users, the collected data must be exported to a set of
performance database files. These files are commonly known by their file names starting with
the prefix QAPMxxxxx. The performance database files can be specified to be created
(exported) via an option on the Start Collection Services function or the Create Performance
Data (CRTPFRDTA) command.
A WebSphere Application Server V6.0 or V6.1 profile (instance) must be active for Collection
Services to retrieve the performance data. The performance database file names or
WebSphere Application Server are as follows:
QAPMWASCFG - WebSphere server configuration

QAPMWASSVR - WebSphere servers
QAPMWASAPP - WebSphere applications
QAPMWASEJB - WebSphere Enterprise JavaBean (EJB) data
QAPMWASRSC - WebSphere pooled resource data
Refer to V5R4 Information Center for the field definitions for these files:
Support for WebSphere Application Server V6.0 is currently available with WebSphere
Application Server fix pack V6.0.2.17 or later. This is i5/OS WebSphere Application Server
V6.0 on V5R4 group PTF SF99312, level 14. For planned availability of WebSphere
Application Server V6.1 with fix pack V6.1.0.9 (i5/OS WebSphere Application Server V6.0 on
V5R4 group PTF SF99323), refer to the WebSphere Application Server Web page:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/software/websphere/wsappserver/
Follow the links there for each WebSphere Application Server version that is supported under
i5/OS. One of the links takes you to PTF information.
WebSphere Application Server V6.0.2.15 (already available on i5/OS) supports the utility
processStats. Collection Services uses this utility to collect performance data from a running
WebSphere Application Server application.
Starting in November 2006 Performance Manager for System i (PM/400) collects, if available,
the WebSphere performance data in the QAPMxxxx files listed previously. You can import its
summarization of that data into the IBM Systems Workload Estimator to be used as input into
sizing a WebSphere Application Server workload.
You must use the Performance Manager for System i Web page to take advantage of this
capability. For additional information about Workload Estimator, see 11.11, IBM Systems
Workload Estimator enhancements on page 486.
463
11.6.6 Web Administration for i5/OS configuration for a portal server

The Web Administration for i5/OS interface, which is available with the HTTP Server for i5/OS
Administration (*ADMIN) server, includes a wizard to set up and configure a portal server on
i5/OS. The Web browser-based interface quickly guides you through the setup of WebSphere
Portal Server V6.0 and WebSphere Portal - Express V6.0.
Support for these portal products on i5/OS V5R4 became available on 1 May 2007. It requires
HTTP Server for i5/OS group PTF SF99114 at the latest level available. See the Fix Central
description of SF99114 to ensure that the appropriate level is identified.
11.7 i5/OS and Web services related enhancements

i5/OS, in conjunction with Web services capabilities under the application development
product WebSphere Development Studio for System Client V7 (see 11.9, IBM WebSphere
Development Studio Client V7.0 on page 477), has provided a base Web Services
environment for i5/OS-based applications.
With the October 2007 announcement letter (207-242), Web services integration and SOA
capabilities are extended in the following ways:
Simplifying the implementation of Web services for ILE products
Integrating a Web services server and client
Extending SOA enablement with new SOA-related offerings
The suite under the title Web Services and SOA for i5/OS (5722-SS1, Option 3, Extended
Base Directory Support) includes the following services, components, and products:
i5/OS Integrated Web Services Server for ILE (5722-SS1 Option 3) V1.0
WebSphere Application Server V6.1 Feature Pack for Web Services
WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus V6.1
WebSphere Process Server V6.1
WebSphere Integration Developer V6.1
i5/OS Integrated Web Application Server V7.1
SOA is an approach to define integration architectures based on the concept of a service.

Applications collaborate by invoking each others services, typically across a network.
Services can be composed into larger sequences to implement business process functions.
The following Web services and SOA overview information is extracted from Getting Started
with WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus V6, SG24-7212.
The most commonly agreed-on aspects of a Web service are that it:
Encapsulates reusable business functions.
Is defined by explicit, implementation-independent interfaces.
Is invoked through communication protocols that stress location transparency and
interoperability.
The following core technologies are used for Web services:

Extensible Markup Language (XML) underlies most of the specifications used for Web
services. XML is a generic language that can describe any kind of content in a structured
way, separated from its presentation to a specific device.
SOAP is a network, transport, and programming language and platform-neutral protocol
that allows a client to call a remote service. The message format is XML.
464
Web Services Description Language (WSDL) is an XML-based interface and

implementation description language. The service provider uses a WSDL document to
specify the operations that a Web service provides, and the parameters and data types of
these operations, as well as how to access or invoke the service.
Web Services Inspection Language (WSIL) is an XML-based specification that locates
Web services without using Universal Description, Discovery, and Integration (UDDI).
While WSIL and UDDI are distinct, WSIL can be used with UDDI and does not replace
UDDI.
Universal Description, Discovery, and Integration is both a client-side API and a
SOAP-based server implementation that can be used to store and retrieve information
about service providers and Web services.
The following sections present an overview of the capabilities of the services, components,
and products that were announced in October 2007 as now available or enhanced on i5/OS
V5R4.
Note: In addition to the basic Web services enablement provided in the October 2007
announcement and described in this section, consider WebSphere Development Studio
Client for iSeries for getting applications up and running as a service (runs the Web server
module) or as a consumer (requester of the Web service).
WebSphere Development Studio Client for iSeries provides application development and
deployment tools for applications running under i5/OS and in conjunction with i5/OS. It
helps you develop ILE RPG, ILE COBOL, or ILE C/C++ applications that run under i5/OS.
It also helps you to develop modern Web and GUI front ends to i5/OS business logic to
integrate applications using Web services.
For information about these application development tools, go to the System i software
Web page at the following address and search under the Application development
category:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/software/
For information about IBM and non-IBM application development tools for the System i
platform, refer to the System i Network Web site at:
http://www.systeminetwork.com/
Click the Article Archive link and search on web enablement.

Some ISVs included on that Web site provide Web Services links for RPG, COBOL, and
C/C++ i5/OS programs and Web Services links between other ISV products, such as
between Oracle JD Edwards OneWorld applications and CRM applications.
11.7.1 i5/OS integrated Web services server for ILE

The integrated Web services server offers a basic starting step for ILE applications to use
Web services and SOA under i5/OS. The Web services server supports the consumption and
externalization of services within the ILE programming environment. The Web services server
includes Web services engine and runtime components that support, for example ILE RPG
and COBOL applications that are slightly modified to use SOA interfaces that enable them to
be either a server or a client application.
The Web services server includes base Web services capabilities. Other components and
products that are provided under the i5/OS and Web services-related technologies and
465
products included in the October 2007 announcements extend these capabilities. We explain
these components and products in the following sections.
Integrated Web services server

The integrated Web services server greatly simplifies the process of externalizing ILE
business logic as a service via the Web Administration for i5/OS GUI. You configure and
manage this server under this interface similar to the way in which you manage HTTP servers
and WebSphere Application Server technology-based servers. This method significantly
simplifies the complexities of using Web services, essentially making the externalization of
RPG and COBOL business logic as a Web service simply an administrative task under the
Web Administration for i5/OS GUI.
Under this server, i5/OS integrates Web services run time into the operating system and
enables SOA technologies directly for interaction with the operating system. This integration
opens the i5/OS system to a variety of Web service client implementations, including RPG,
COBOL, C, C++, Java, .NET, PHP, WebSphere Process Server, enterprise service bus, and
Web 2.0.
Highlights of this integrated Web services server include:
Acts as easy initial step on path toward Web services and SOA on the System i platform
Supports enablement of the ILE service program and programs as services
Automatically generates and binds service information when compiling the ILE program or
service program
Uses the Web Administration for i5/OS GUI with PTFs included in HTTP Server for i5/OS,
5722-DG1, V5R4 group PTF SF99114, planned for December 2007 availability
The capabilities include:

Create a Web services server with a few easy steps
Select and deploy ILE programs and service programs as services
Easily view and manage all services available on the system
Uses an administrative task to export ILE (RPG,COBOL) program or service program
business logic
Externalizes business tasks as a Web service natively on ILE (services provider)
Opens ILE (RPG and COBOL) to business logic for a variety of Web service clients,
including RPG, COBOL, C, C++, Java, .NET, PHP, and more
Enables i5/OS to be SOA ready for service deployment
Does not require new skills or tools for ILE enablement
Uses and enhances existing i5/OS development skills to interact with Web services and
integrate SOA
Dynamically generates WSDL representation for client invocation of an ILE program or
service program
WSDL is a document written in XML. The document describes the Web service. It
specifies the location of the service, the operations (or methods) that can be performed,
and the parameters that are expected by the service (program).
Helps ILE programmers externalize a program or service program as a service
Uses fast interoperability of ILE programming architecture for minimal consumption of
i5/OS resources
466
Integrates into i5/OS with PTFs planned for December 2007 availability for:
5722-SS1 Option 3 PTFs

December 2007 level of group PTF SF99114
The Web services server runs under the i5/OS integrated Web application server V7.1 as
explained in i5/OS Integrated Web application server (part of 5722-DG1) on page 475.
Programming considerations and overview of the enablement process

Program objects must be stateless, that is:
After a request is sent, the logic is performed and a response is returned.
Your program must comply so that, when it is identified in the create Web services server
process, i5/OS can generate the appropriate Program Control Markup Language (PCML)
statement. If you are sufficiently knowledgeable, you can alternatively provide a PCML file.
In the simplest case, you allow the i5/OS-based software to generate the PCML.
For i5/OS V5R4, you create or recreate your ILE program and specify the following option
in the source program:
For RPG the header specification:
H PGMINFO(*PCML:*MODULE)
For COBOL:
PROCESS OPTIONS PGMINFO(PCML MODULE)
The following steps summarize how to create the Web service and associated Web services
server:
1. Create the server to run a service, using a new Create New Web Services Server link on
i5/OS Web Administration GUI Web page:
http://hostname:2001/HTTPAdmin
2. Select Install a new service - externalize an i5/OS program.

3. Select a program to externalize as a service. Identify the library, program name, and
program type (service or program).
4. Name and describe the new service.
5. Specify which items in the ILE program to externalize, such as field names and file
attributes (for example, numeric, character, and so forth). These are the input and output
variables that are processed by the program.
6. Create the actual Web services server and specify its i5/OS security attributes.
7. The program might use other programs and libraries on the system. Identify other libraries,
for example, that the program might use when it runs.
8. Review the summary of servers, services, and operations that you explicitly defined, for
example the server and service name, operations and procedure names. Also review
those items that you implicitly defined, for example the URL of the server.
When finished, click Finish to create the Web service server.
9. Use the GUI to view and manage the server and service. This is one of the server types
that can be managed from the i5/OS Web Administration GUI. You can also view the
generated WDSL file.
Other Web services consumers can now request your service.
467
Integrated Web services client

The integrated Web services client for ILE includes an internal engine that supports the ILE
environment to act as a client that is available to the ILE programming languages under
i5/OS, including RPG, COBOL, C, and C++. This means an ILE RPG, COBOL, C, or C++
application can act as a consumer (requester) of a Web service. The client support can call
a variety of Web service implementations, including RPG, COBOL, C, C++, Java, PHP, .NET,
WebSphere Process Server, Enterprise Services Bus, Web 2.0, and more.
The client support characteristics include:
Supports enablement of an ILE program to consume services
Invokes Web service client from ILE programs (RPG, COBOL, C, and C++)
Enables an ILE programmer to consume services from a program or service program
Uses ILE enablement to bind and call a service directly from an i5/OS program or service
program
Leverages WSDL to generate proxy client code to be integrated in a program or service
program
Uses and enhances existing System i development skills to interact with Web services and
SOA
Uses quick interoperability of ILE programming architecture for minimal consumption of
i5/OS resources with a small system footprint
i5/OS support ships via PTF delivery for 5722-SS1 Option 3
Supports a Web service client module for C, C++, RPG, and COBOL
Supports document style literal only
Complies with the Web Services Invocation 1.1 basic profile
Supports Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for ILE service
Implements staged development for ILE:
Generate proxy code

Examine proxy code
Integrate proxy code into ILE source code
Compile and bind program or service program
Run ILE program or service program as a Web service
You make small changes to your ILE program to use interfaces to be a client and request a
service. For example, you use the eval RPG calculation statement to request (via a URL) the
Web service and pass parameter data to the service program, so that you are can process
the received parameter data values and results from the service.
For more i5/OS-based information, refer to Building SOA-based Solutions for IBM System i
Platform, SG24-7284.
WebSphere Application Server V6.1 Feature Pack for Web services

WebSphere Application Server V6.1 for i5/OS is available as:
5733W61 - BASE, feature 5050 (WebSphere Application Server V6.1 for i5/OS)
5733W61 - Option 2, feature 5102 (WebSphere Application Server V6.1 (Base))
5733W61 - Option 3, feature 5103 (WebSphere Application Server V6.1 Network
Deployment)
468
The feature pack extends the capabilities of WebSphere Application Server V6.1 under i5/OS
to enable Web services messages to be exchanged asynchronously, reliably, and securely
with other IBM and non-IBM products supporting Web services. The focus of the feature pack
is interoperability.
Through support for key Web services, programming interfaces provide simplified application
development through a standard annotation-based program model to develop Web service
providers and clients. A common set of binding rules for XML and Java makes it easy to
incorporate XML data and processing functions in Java applications.
A further set of enhancements helps you send binary attachments, such as images or files,
along with your Web services requests.
Using Web services profiles makes it easier to configure, reuse, and manage configurations,
so you can introduce new Web services profiles seamlessly in the future. These
configurations are captured in a grouping called policy sets that enable you to select, and
associate with an application, different qualities of service. You can configure the policy sets
to allow only those capabilities within a given WS-Interoperability (WS-I) profile. This helps
ensure that the only configurable portions are those that you choose.
WS-I: WS-I is an open industry organization chartered to promote Web services
interoperability across platform systems and programming languages.
The capabilities within this feature pack are provided by PTFs included in HTTP Server for
i5/OS, 5722-DG1, V5R4 group PTF SF99114, planned for December 2007 availability.
For more information about WS-I, refer to the WS-I Web site at:
http://www.ws-i.org/
For more information about the feature pack, refer to the WebSphere Application Server at:
http://www.ibm.com/software/webservers/appserv/was/featurepacks/
WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus V6.1

In the context of the WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus, an enterprise service bus is an
architectural construct for infrastructure-type middleware, based on standards, that enables a
common interface for applications from various vendors to communicate with each other in
the context of Web services.
In general, an enterprise service bus generally provides an abstraction layer on top of an
implementation of an enterprise messaging system, which allows applications to exploit the
value of messaging and events without writing a significant amount of code. The enterprise
service bus interface allows applications that are written on a variety of operating systems to
communicate with each other efficiently whether the applications are located in the same
system or in a distributed network.
The enterprise service bus is directed toward an enterprise-wide infrastructure pipeline that
exchanges messages among statically defined end points (FTP directories, message
queues, Web services, HTTP URLs, database connections, and so forth). The enterprise
service bus does not implement an SOA, but rather provides the features with which one can
be implemented.
WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus is the connectivity infrastructure provided by IBM for
integrating applications and services. It is designed to enable the development of an SOA.
Built on top of WebSphere Application Server, WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus delivers a
standards-based connectivity and integration solution that allows you to create and deploy
469
interactions quickly and easily between applications and services, with a reduced number and
complexity of interfaces.
In an enterprise service bus, there is no direct connection between the consumer (requester
of service) and provider. Consumers access the enterprise service bus to invoke services.
The enterprise service bus acts as an intermediary, passing the request to the provider using
the appropriate protocol, transport, and interaction pattern for the provider. This mediation
enables the enterprise service bus to shield the consumer from the infrastructure details of
how to connect to the provider.
The enterprise service bus supports several integration mechanisms. All of the mechanisms
can be described as invoking services through specific addresses and protocols, even if in
some cases the address is the name of a CICS transaction and the protocol is a Java 2
Platform, Enterprise Edition (J2EE) resource adapter that integrates with the CICS
Transaction Gateway. By using the enterprise service bus, consumers are unaware of how
the service is invoked on the provider.
Because the enterprise service bus removes the direct connection between the service
consumer (requester) and providers, an enterprise service bus enables the substitution of
one service implementation by another with no effect on the consumers of that service.
The following figure illustrates the WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus, the components in the
product, and the features and functions that are associated with the product.
Terminology
In this section, we have defined most of the acronyms shown in this figure. Here are
additional acronyms and terms that you should understand:
Adapters: The WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus provides adapters provide connection
to the Web services functions and hundreds of IBM and ISV solutions. Pre-built mediation
function saves time and development costs. The provided adapters include:
WebSphere Adapter for JDBC V6.1

WebSphere Adapter for Flat Files V6.1
WebSphere Adapter for Email V6.1
470
WebSphere Adapter for FTP V6.1

WebSphere Adapter for SAP Software V6.1
WebSphere Adapter for Siebel Business Applications V6.1
WebSphere Adapter for PeopleSoft Enterprise V6.1
WebSphere Adapter for Oracle e-Business Suite V6.1
WebSphere Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne V6.1
WebSphere Business Adapter for iSeries:
Enables integration between other applications and applications running through an

integration broker
Supports execution of RPG programs on i5/OS and posts the results from the same
to the Integration broker
Supports bidirectional exchange of messages to and from i5/OS data queues
Is metadata driven and includes object discovery capabilities for both the RPG
programs and the data queues
Uses IBM Toolbox V5R2 for Java to execute an RPG program under i5/OS
For more information about available adapters, refer to the WebSphere Adapters page at:
http://www.ibm.com/software/integration/wbiadapters/
Common Event Infrastructure (CEI): WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus uses the
Common Event Infrastructure to provide event management services, such as event
generation, transmission, persistence, and consumption. The format of those events is
defined by the Common Base Event (CBE) specification.
Java Messaging Services (JMS): The JMS specification addresses the demands of
loosely coupled distributed systems in a coherent manner. Web services is based on JMS
and the exchanging of asynchronous messages. JMS offers an API and a set of semantics
that prescribe the interface and general behavior of a messaging services.
Of the Java messaging solutions that are currently available, two architectural approaches
are commonly used:
Stand-alone messaging server
JMS embedded within an application server
The pairing of XML and Java messaging promotes highly flexible and scalable designs
that can better accommodate the rapid change that distributed systems face in todays
business environments.
The IBM WebSphere MQ product delivers reliable application integration for applications
and can be used with Web services.
Mediation: Mediations process the flow of services requests between service consumers
and providers.
Mediations are provided by SCA and Service Message Objects (SMO). Service
Component Architecture (SCA) supports the description of every mediation module
through a technology-neutral interface. As stated earlier, SMO is based on Service Data
Object (SDO) and supports the representation of a binding-specific data format in a
common, neutral way. The application of this SCA/SMO-based programming model allows
for the configurable assembly of different mediation modules that contain the mediation
flow.
Mediation functions are built upon the mediation base and consist of one or more
mediation modules. An SCA/SMO-based mediation module is composed of different
parts, such as imports representing providers, exports representing service consumers
and a mediation flow component representing integration and mediation functionality.
471
The WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus provides the following standard mediation
primitives:
The MessageLogger logs a copy of a message to a database for future retrieval or
audit. The integration developer can customize the primitive by, for example, naming
the database.
The DatabaseLookup primitive retrieves values from a database to add them to a
message.
The MessageFilter primitive compares the content of a message to expressions
configured by the developer and routes the message to the next mediation primitive
based on the result.
The XSLT primitive transforms messages according to transformations defined by an
Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) stylesheet.
Service Component Architecture: WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus implements a
mediation layer that consists of a mediation base and mediation functions. This mediation
framework is different from the one implemented by WebSphere Application Server
because it is based on SCA. This mediation framework allows enhanced flexibility,
encapsulation, and reuse. You can continue to use mediations that you may have
implemented for WebSphere Application Server together with WebSphere Enterprise
Service Bus, but the new tooling i that is provided for WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus
V6.1 does not support the modification of these mediations.
Service Data Object: Mediation components are part of the enterprise service bus
implementation. A mediator is commonly concerned with the flow of messages through
the infrastructure and not just with the business content of the message. The information
that governs their behavior is often held in headers that flow with the business message.
Therefore, the SMO pattern for SDO is introduced to support this pattern. SMOs are
enhanced SDOs to provide an abstraction layer for processing and manipulate messages
exchanged between services.
Service Message Object: An SMO is based on an SDO SMO and supports the
representation of a binding-specific data format in a common, neutral way.
Support features
WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus V6.1 includes platform support for i5/OS for
communication with other implementers using the enterprise service bus. The support
includes the following features:
Is built as a service bus based on the messaging backbone of the WebSphere platform
WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus is packaged both as part of WebSphere Process

Server and as a stand-alone product.
Provides Web services connectivity, MQ and MQ/JMS messaging, and service-oriented
integration using WebSphere Adapters
Integrates seamlessly with the industry-leading WebSphere platform for streamlined IT
operations.
Delivers business-critical, quality-of-service features from WebSphere Application Server
Network Deployment
Is easily extended to WebSphere Process Server for service orchestration and business
process management
Provides an integrated solution for both service mediation and service hosting
472
Leverages WebSphere Application Server for other solutions, in addition to inheriting new
features and benefits introduced in WebSphere Application Server V6.1
Supports i5/OS and remote DB2 support to enable integration with i5/OS applications and
leverage relational database management servers running on i5/OS
WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus V6.1 was announced on 9 October 2007 for i5/OS and
includes enhancements on other supported operating systems. See announcement letter
207-230, dated 9 October 2007 for the most complete description of WebSphere Enterprise
Service Bus V6.1.
For more information, refer to go to Getting Started with WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus
V6, SG24-7212, and the IBM Enterprise Service Bus Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/software/integration/wsesb
WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus V6.1 is planned to be available 21 December 2007, as a

Web download from Passport Advantage.
WebSphere Process Server V6.1

WebSphere Process Server is built on WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus. This foundation
provides the process server with the mediation functionality of WebSphere Enterprise Service
Bus and the qualities of service that WebSphere Application Server provides (for example
clustering, failover, scalability, and security).
WebSphere Process Server adds the ability to build business processes that orchestrate
multiple services to achieve a business goal. It helps ensure that the processes that you
design in WebSphere Business Modeler or WebSphere Integration Developer are executed in
a consistent, reliable, secure manner with transactional integrity. Built on open standards, it
deploys and executes processes that orchestrate services (people, information, systems, and
trading partners) within your SOA or non-SOA infrastructure.
When combined with the power of WebSphere Business Monitor, processes can be
optimized to meet changing business requirements, assisting in giving the business a
competitive advantage. WebSphere Process Server is built on, and contains, WebSphere
Enterprise Service Bus functions. WebSphere Process Server V6.1 includes i5/OS V5R4
support.
You can use the features of a number of supporting services in WebSphere Process Server.
Most of these can be classified as some form of transformation. There are a number of
transformation challenges when connecting components and external services, each of
which is addressed by a component of WebSphere Process Server:
Interface maps
Frequently interfaces of existing components match semantically but not syntactically.

Interface maps allow the invocation of these components by translating these calls.
Additionally business object maps can be used to translate the actual business object
parameters of a service invocation.
Business object maps
A business object map is used to translate one type of business object into another type of
business object.
Relationships
In business integration scenarios, you must often access the same data in various
backend systems, for example in both an enterprise resource planning (ERP) system and
a customer relationship management (CRM) system. A common problem for keeping
473
business objects synchronized is that different backend systems use different keys to
represent the same objects.
The relationship service in WebSphere Process Server can be used to establish
relationship instances between objects in these disparate backend systems. These
relationships are accessed from a business object map when translating one business
object format into another.
Dynamic service selection
A selector component allows dynamic selection and invocation of different services, which
all share the same interface.
Mediation
The mediation component is inherited from WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus.
The primary development tool for WebSphere Process Server is WebSphere Integration
Developer. This is the same tool used for WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus development
tasks.
New or enhanced WebSphere Process Server V6.1 features leverage:
WebSphere Application Server in addition to inheriting new features and benefits
introduced in WebSphere Application Server V6.1.
Running under i5/OS.
Relational database management servers with DB2 support.
WebSphere Process Server V6.1 was announced for i5/OS on 9 October 2007 and includes
enhancements on other supported operating systems. See announcement letter 207-230,
dated 9 October 2007, for the most complete description of WebSphere Portal Server V6.1.
For more information, refer to Getting Started with WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus V6,
SG24-7212, as well as the IBM WebSphere Process Server Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/software/integration/wps
WebSphere Process Server is planned to be available 21 December 2007 as a Web

download from Passport Advantage.
WebSphere Integration Developer V6.1

WebSphere Integration Developer is the one tool, one set of skills solution for end-to-end
integration in your SOA. This Eclipse-based tool builds SOA-based business process
management and integration solutions across WebSphere Process Server, WebSphere
Enterprise Service Bus, and WebSphere Adapters. It simplifies integration with features that
accelerate the adoption of SOA by rendering existing IT assets as service components,
encouraging reuse and efficiency. It enables integration developers to assemble business
solutions, whether processes, mediations, adapters, or code components with minimal skills.
You construct process and integration solutions using drag-and-drop technology to define, in
a visual way, the sequence and flow of business processes. WebSphere Integration
Developer supports development deployment to WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus and
WebSphere Process Server on i5/OS V5R4 and other operating systems.
One of the primary purposes of WebSphere Integration Developer is to provide the
appropriate tools to build and test SCA-based applications easily. WebSphere Integration
Developer is built on the Rational Software Development Platform, which is based on
Eclipse 3.0 technology.
474
Two user roles are associated with WebSphere Integration Developer:

Integration developer
The integration developer is the primary role. It focuses on building service-oriented

solutions. For this user role, the tool is expected to simplify and abstract advanced IT
implementation details.
Application developer
The application developer is knowledgeable in development platforms such as J2EE,

understands SOA, Web services, and Java. Application developers implement
application-specific business logic and expose it as a service.
New features in WebSphere Integration Developer V6.1 offer:
Increased developer productivity with ease-of-use enhancements.

Enhanced human workflow.
Improved business-driven development capabilities.
Better connectivity.
WebSphere Integration Developer V6.1 was announced for i5/OS on 9 October 2007 and
includes enhancements on other supported operating systems. See announcement letter
207-230, dated 9 October 2007, for the most complete description of WebSphere Integration
Developer V6.1.
For more information, see Getting Started with WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus V6,
SG24-7212, as well as the IBM WebSphere Integration Developer Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/software/integration/wid
i5/OS Integrated Web application server (part of 5722-DG1)

The Integrated Web application server was introduced with PTFs included in the HTTP
Server for i5/OS V5R4 group PTF SF99114 in November 2006. Newer levels of SF99114
became available in 2007 prior to December 2007. The levels include enhanced support for
specific IBM-controlled Web applications, such as:
iSeries Navigator on the Web
Secure Perspective for System i (5722-PS1); see 11.1.1, Secure Perspective features
and benefits on page 434
DB2 Web Query, 5722-QU2; see 11.12.1, DB2 Web Query for System i, 5733-QU2 on
page 490
The i5/OS Integrated Web application server was not formally announced until October 2007.
This formally announced version will become available as part of the planned December
2007 level of SF99114 PTFs. PTFs to 5722-SS1, Option 3, are included within the December
SF99114 group of PTFs. This December 2007 version is referred to as Integrated Web
application server Version 7.1. IBM software support representatives refer to the pre-V7.1
version as V6.5. V7.1 is required to run i5/OS Integrated Web services server for ILE
described in 11.7.1, i5/OS integrated Web services server for ILE on page 465.
After you install the appropriate level of group PTF SF99114, and any requisite PTFs, when
you start the IBM-provided HTTP Server for i5/OS Administration server *ADMIN (for
example, using the STRTCPSVR SERVER(*HTTP) HTTPSVR(*ADMIN) command), you
must activate the integrated Web application server. You can determine if this integrated
server is active by looking at the active jobs within the subsystem QHTTPSVR. Look for an
active HTTP server job with the function identified as PGM-QLWISVR.
475
The integrated Web application server integrates an Open Services Gateway Initiative
(OSGi)-based Web servlet container with the i5/OS operating system. OSGi is an
independent, non-profit corporation that is working to define and promote open specifications
for the delivery of managed services to networked environments. The Integrated Web
application server is considered a Web container that includes the basics for getting
applications to be up and running quickly and effectively on the Web. The integrated Web
application server is a good place to prototype new applications or run existing small footprint
or low-use applications.
For applications that require a high degree of scalability, we recommend that you use
WebSphere Application Server Express. The integrated Web application server can be
considered an initial deployment to the more scalable solution. This Web container is easy to
use and configure, does not require any additional products to install, and uses minimal
system resources.
The integrated Web application server can be completely administered using the Web
Administration for i5/OS GUI (at port 2001). You can also use this GUI to manage all HTTP
servers, WebSphere Application Server profiles (servers), and WebSphere Portal servers.
With this interface, you can create, start, stop, and manage all these servers.
The integrated Web application server offers the following key benefits:
OSGi-based Web servlet container

Support for JDK 1.5 run by default on IBM technology for Java (32-bit)
Support for DB2 for i5 using Toolkit for Java or Java native implementations
GUI to manage all aspects of the integrated Web application server:
Wizard to create a new server instance
Wizard to deploy applications to the instance of choice
Interface to manage applications, server properties, and database connection
information
Ability to view all servers on the System i platform; start, stop, or delete servers in one
easy-to-use display
The GUI support for this integrated server will be shipped with the latest update to HTTP
Server for i5/OS V5R4 group PTF SF99114, which is planned to be available on 21
December 2007.
11.8 Running either 64-bit JVM or 32-bit JVM under WebSphere

Application Server 6.1 for i5/OS
i5/OS V5R4 supports running Java applications under either the 64-bit JVM (referred to as
Classic JVM on i5/OS) or the 32-bit JVM (referred to as IBM Technology for Java Virtual
Machine).
Classic JVM was the original JVM available under i5/OS, which includes support of large
address spaces for applications that use it. i5/OS V5R4 introduced support for the 32-bit JVM,
based upon the 32-bit JVM that is supported on all IBM operating systems. The 32-bit JVM
offers less main storage requirements and associated latest JVM performance
enhancements. The smaller main storage requirements are ideal for use on System i models
in the 525 through mid-sized 570 configurations. Within applications that require extremely
large address spaces, the 64-bit JVM is the best choice.
476
For more information, refer to the Java performance chapter in the System i Performance
Capabilities Reference, SC41-0607, manual, which is available on the Web at:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/iseries/v5r4/topic/books/sc410607.pdf
By default, WebSphere Application Server Version 6.1 uses Classic JVM (64-bit) for all newly
created profiles. If you want to use IBM Technology for Java VM (32-bit JVM), you must use a
special Qshell script included with WebSphere Application Server Version 6.1 for i5/OS.
The following i5/OS Qshell script can switch the JVM type. If you do not use the default
installation directory, adjust these instructions accordingly.
/QIBM/ProdData/WebSphere/AppServer/V61/Base/bin/enableJvm
This i5/OS Qshell script requires a user to have *ALLOBJ authority. The command syntax is:
enableJVM <parameters>
The parameters are:

-jvm [std32 | classic]
This is a required parameter that specifies the JVM to use:

std32 = IBM Technology for JVM
classic = Classic JVM
-profile <profile_to_be_enabled>
This is an optional parameter that specifies the specific profile for which you enable a
desired JVM. It is important to note that, if a profile is not specified, all profiles are
switched to the specified JVM.
-verbose
This is an optional parameter that enables additional trace statements.

Here is an example of the i5/OS Qshell script:
enableJVM -jvm std32 -profile default -verbose
In this example, we set the profile default to run on IBM Technology for JVM and show
additional details on the display.
With WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.1, it is possible to include
servers with Classic JVM and IBM Technology for JVM in the same cell.
For additional details about this topic, refer to IBM Technote Switching between JVMs in
WebSphere Application Server 6.1 for i5/OS, TIPS0666.
11.9 IBM WebSphere Development Studio Client V7.0

WebSphere Development Studio Client for System i is a collection of workstation-based
application development tools. These tools can help solution providers and customers rapidly
and cost-effectively deliver applications for On Demand Business for the System i platform.
WebSphere Development Studio Client for System i consolidates key System i
workstation-based development tools into one attractively-priced offering. It is also part of
WebSphere Development Studio for System i.
477
Effective 16 March 2007, new orders for V5R3 and V5R4 (5722-WDS) include the new V7.0
workstation tools, WebSphere Development Studio Client for iSeries. Effective 16 March
2007, existing V5R3 and V5R4 (5722-WDS) customers, who have acquired the program
previously and who have a current System i Software Maintenance or Software Subscription
contract, can use the #2658 no-charge feature number to order the new V7.0 workstation
tools.
The WebSphere Development Studio Advanced Edition for iSeries is no longer offered. New
customers should acquire the advanced workstation tools, 5724-D46, via the Passport
Advantage channel because the entitlement of the advanced WebSphere Development
Studio client tools is no longer offered.
11.9.1 WebSphere Development Studio Client V7.0, ClearCase Integration, and

Improved RPG support
WebSphere Development Studio Client for iSeries V7.0 inherits and extends the robust,
easy-to-use Rational Software Delivery Platform and a subset of Rational Application
Developer for WebSphere Software V7.0. It delivers an integrated development environment
(IDE) with tools for developing Web, Web services, client/server, and i5/OS server
applications using programming languages such as RPG, COBOL, CL, and Java.
WebSphere Development Studio Client Advanced Edition for iSeries V7.0 contains all of the
development tools that are included in WebSphere Development Studio Client. In addition, it
inherits and builds on additional premium Web, EJB, and J2EE development capabilities from
IBM Rational Application Developer V7.0. In addition, it provides specific advanced System i
tools including data definition specification (DDS), application diagram support, ClearCase
integration, and an Eclipse-based Screen designer technology preview.
The focus for WebSphere Development Studio Client V7.0 is to deliver the power of the
Rational Software Delivery Platform to the System i market and to provide enhancements for
System i application developers. WebSphere Development Studio Client Advanced Edition
V7.0 includes additional capabilities to meet more advanced development needs.
11.9.2 New in WebSphere Development Studio Client V7.0

Installation
The WebSphere Development Studio Client and WebSphere Development Studio Client
Advanced Edition installations now provide a selective installation for flexibility. Using the new
installer, you can install only the options you need. You can also perform multiple installations
onto the same workstation to create different workbench configurations.
You can now install into an existing Eclipse installation.
Remote System Explorer

Remote System Explorer offers the following features:
iSeries Data Table View
You can display the contents of members of a data physical file by using the iSeries Data
Table View. This view applies only to data physical files, not source, and operates only on
one member of a data physical file at a time. The file records in the member are displayed
as rows in a table, with columns in the table according to the fields in the record format of
the file, and the field values presented in a formatted fashion according to the field data
type.
478
iSeries Table View default column layout
The default column layout in the iSeries Table view is changed for the library, object, and
members. The Text field is a larger field because the Status field is no longer displayed.
iSeries Remote System Explorer (RSE) Getting Started page
This page is displayed when you open the RSE perspective. You can follow the steps on
this page to quickly get started using the RSE.
Programming Development Manager (PDM) and Source Entry Utility (SEU) Transition
Guide
This revised guide tells you about the most commonly performed tasks on your iSeries
system using RSE and the Remote Systems LPEX Editor. It also explains why you should
adopt these tools instead of using PDM and SEU. See First Steps in the Welcome view
to see this guide.
ILE RPG SQL support
A new parser type for ILE RPG SQL is added to accept SQL statements. You can define
source member types to be associated with this parser. For the source members
associated with the ILE RPG SQL parser type, the following features have been added:
Support for tokenizing embedded SQL statements
Support for uppercasing, indenting and formatting of SQL statements in free format ILE
RPG
Commonly used templates to assist in editing SQL statements in free format ILE RPG
(You can also add your own SQL templates.)
iSeries projects
iSeries project development enhancements include:
Label decorations
All workbench decorations, including the iSeries decorations, are now displayed in the
iSeries Navigator view. On the Label Decorations preference page, you can control which
decorations to display in the iSeries Project Navigator.
Sequence numbers
A new preference is added to have sequence numbers and timestamp information

automatically removed from members when they are downloaded to an iSeries project
and added when they are uploaded back to the remote library. In addition, actions are
available so you can add and remove this information from members within an iSeries
project.
Sequence numbers make it easier to use iSeries projects with a Source Configuration
Management (SCM) tool provider, such as Rational ClearCase, which keeps track of
source changes and therefore remove the need for the timestamps.
Push method selection during compile
You can select which push method to use during a compile or bind operation on the Build
and Compile page of iSeries Projects preferences. The options are to push all changed
resources in the project or to push only the selected resources if there are any changes.
Cheat sheet to help create an iSeries project-based application in the Help menu
Cheat sheets are an important productivity tool for Eclipse users.
479
Remote Systems LPEX Editor

The LPEX editor enhancements include:
Language template locations
The templates are now grouped by language, one for COBOL, one for C/C++, and one for
ILE RPG. The template ILE RPG FREE-FORM is renamed to FREE-FORM.
ILE RPG SQL
This new parser type accepts SQL statements. You can define source member types to be
associated with this parser.
Source members associated with the ILE RPG SQL parser type
Support for tokenizing embedded SQL statements

Support for uppercasing, indenting, and formatting of SQL statements in free-format
ILE RPG
Commonly used templates to assist in editing SQL statements in free format ILE RPG
Show block nesting
Selecting the start or end of a code block and selecting the Show Block Nesting action add
connector bars to the editor margin that connects the start and end of the selected block
and up to five nested blocks of code.
Outline view
Control Language (CL) information for labels and subroutines used in a member is now
shown in the Outline view.
New shortcuts
New shortcuts have been added to the editor for opening the declaration of a subroutine or
procedure in RPG IV (F3) and jumping to the start or end of a code block (Ctrl+Shift+M).
i5/OS Web and Java tools

Specific i5/OS Web and Java tool enhancements include:
iSeries Web Component Tag Library and Web Interaction wizard
The iSeries Web Component Tag Library and the Web Interaction wizard are deprecated
(supported, but discouraged) in V7.0. You should now use the JSF Widget Library (JWL),
which implements the JSF standard. The JWL is the strategic direction for Web widgets.
Most of the functions provided by iSeries Web Component Tag Library and the Web
Interaction wizard in Version 6.x can be done in V7.0 using the Program Call wizard (or
Web Services wizard) and the base JSF tools. There is no JSF subfile support in V7.0.
Information messages or warning messages are issued if you use iSeries Web
Component Tag Library and the Web Interaction wizard.
Program Call wizard
Usability enhancements for creating JSFs applications

Additional program and service program structure data type support
Web Services wizard
Several usability enhancements are added for easier creation of Web services and Web
services clients.
480
Integrated iSeries Debugger

The Integrated iSeries Debugger now supports debugging a suspended program. After a
program has found an exception and is waiting on a message queue, the debugger can
attach to the job and allow the developer to look at the call stack and field information to assist
in determining why the problem occurred.
IBM WebFacing Tool

Linked HATS/WebFacing application
IBM WebFacing Tool delivers extensions to allow Web-enabled applications that are
created with the WebFacing Tool to interoperate with HATS applications in a browser. You
can now build linked HATS and WebFacing applications and customize them to have the
same design and functionality.
WebFacing Deployment Tool for WebSphere Development Studio with HATS Technology
licensing change
WebFacing applications, HATS applications, and linked HATS and WebFacing applications
all use the IBM WebFacing Deployment Tool for WebSphere Development Studio with
HATS technology V7.0 license to enable the respective runtimes for production
deployment. Otherwise the applications are limited to two user connections for testing
purposes.
WebFacing Web Project wizard redesigned
The WebFacing Web Project wizard now provides improved usability and greater
customization capabilities. Two new styles have been added to assist in developing linked
WebFacing and HATS applications.
Project migration
The migration of existing WebFacing projects to V7.0 has been simplified by using the new
WebFacing Migration wizard. Unmigrated projects are now distinguished with unique
icons.
WebFacing cheatsheet in the Help menu
The new cheatsheet helps you create a WebFacing application for the Web.
WebFacing Developer role added to the Welcome view
Using the WebFacing Developer role, you can enable or disable the views and tools in the
WebFacing perspective. By default, this role is enabled.
HATS Toolkit
With HATS, you can transform access to your existing host applications by using rich client
GUI applications that run in Eclipse Rich Client Platform (Eclipse RCP) or Lotus Expeditor
Client environments. The Eclipse RCP is a subset of plug-ins that are provided by the
Eclipse platform, which is best known as an open-source tooling platform.
The introduction of Eclipse RCP lets you use the core functionality provided by Eclipse to
build native client applications targeted for a users desktop. Lotus Expeditor Client
provides a rich client run-time environment and integrated middleware components for
extending many enterprise applications to server-managed laptop and desktop systems.
A rich client environment offers capabilities that are not available in a traditional Web
environment, including:
Improved response time

Richer set of user interface (UI) widgets, which provide for a more native application
appearance, for example, native tab folder control, editable combo boxes, toolbars,
menu bars, and tables.
481
No dependency on WebSphere Application Server or WebSphere Portal.

Client-side processing (distributed, not centralized on a single server).
For more information for HATS, refer to announcement letter 207-032, dated 27 February
2007.
With HATS and WebFacing application runtime interoperability, you can perform DDS
transformation, as well as 5250 data stream transformation, within the same Web
application. This function is particularly useful for those who have built a DDS
source-based transformation application, using the IBM WebFacing Tool, that need to
interact with a host application that has been transformed using the HATS tool.
This function is also useful for HATS users who want to take advantage of transformation,
based on DDS, provided by the WebFacing tool. With this support, a HATS application and
a WebFacing application can be linked together to interoperate as a single enterprise
application and use a single connection to a WebFacing server.
11.9.3 New in WebSphere Development Studio Client Advanced Edition V7.0

In addition to the enhancements described in WebSphere Development Studio Client V7.0
text, WebSphere Development Studio Client Advanced Edition V7.0 includes the following
enhancements.
RSE
Application Diagram
The Application Diagram provides a graphical view of the different resources in an i5/OS
native application and their relationships to each other. It helps to prepare you for
understanding and modernizing your application architecture.
There are two different diagrams that you can look at in the Application Diagram view, a
Source Call Diagram and a Program Structure Diagram. The Source Call Diagram takes
ILE RPG and ILE COBOL source as input and displays a call graph showing subroutine
and procedure calls. The Program Structure Diagram takes program and service program
objects as input and displays the binding relationships between them as well as the
modules bound into each program and service program.
Technology Preview
A Screen Designer is now integrated with the Remote System Explorer to allow you to
graphically design and modify DDS display files while making direct source code
modifications. The graphical editor is integrated with the Remote Systems LPEX editor so
you can easily switch between graphical editing and source editing modes.
iSeries projects
You can now add save files to iSeries projects from RSE connections and push save files
from local iSeries projects to the host. One of the benefits of adding save files in iSeries
Projects is that you can package the contents of your source, binaries, and other objects in
save files, which can then be checked in and versioned using an SCM tool, such as IBM
Rational ClearCase or CVS. This gives an indirect way of allowing non-source resources to
be versioned in an SCM stream file based SCM repository.
482
IBM WebFacing Tool

The general enhancements to the IBM WebFacing Tool include:
WebFacing Portlet Project wizard redesign. The WebFacing Portlet Project wizard has
changed. The new wizard delivers improved usability and greater customization
capabilities.
WebFacing cheatsheet in the Help menu. A new cheatsheet helps you create a
WebFacing portlet application.
For additional information, refer to the WebSphere Development Studio Client for System i
page at:
http://www-306.ibm.com/software/awdtools/wdt400/
11.9.4 Hardware requirements: WebSphere Development Studio Client and

WebSphere Development Studio Client Advanced Edition
Intel Pentium III 800 MHz processor minimum (higher is recommended)
768 MB RAM; 1 GB RAM recommended
For the i5/OS Development Tools, Remote System Explorer, and iSeries Projects, 256 MB
RAM recommended
Reduce or increase disk space requirements depending on the features that you install:
For installing the i5/OS Development Tools feature only, 1.5 GB of disk space
Of this disk space, only 500 MB is used during the installation process and can be
recovered after the installation is complete.
WebSphere Development Studio Client for a default installation, a minimum of 5 GB of
disk space
Some of this disk space (500 MB) is used only during the installation process and can
be recovered after the installation is complete.
WebSphere Development Studio Client Advanced Edition for a default installation, a
minimum of 5.5 GB of disk space
Some of this disk space (500 MB) is used only during the installation process and can
be recovered after the installation is complete.
Additional disk space, for developing applications
Additional disk space, if you download the product package to install this product
Additional disk space, if you use FAT32 file system instead of NTFS
An additional 500 MB of disk space, in the directory pointed to by your environment
variable TEMP
Display resolution: 1024 x 768 minimum
CD-ROM drive
Software requirements under i5/OS

The following software products and release levels are required:
i5/OS V5R3 or V5R4 is required.
WebSphere Development Studio Client and WebSphere Development Studio Client
Advanced Edition V7.0 support for the i5/OS release will end when that i5/OS release
officially ends service, or when service is officially ended.
483
Some WebSphere Development Studio Client components need additional PTFs. The
PTF information is available on the Web at the following address:
http://ibm.com/software/awdtools/iseries
To find more information about any required i5/OS PTFs:

a. Open the RSE perspective if it is not already open. The name of the current
perspective is shown in the top left corner of the title bar for the Window. To open the
RSE perspective, select Window Open Perspective Other and select Remote
System Explorer from the list.
b. Create a connection to your iSeries by expanding New Connection iSeries.
c. Expand your new connection and right-click iSeries Objects and select Verify
Connection.
A window opens that shows which required PTFs are already installed on the system
and which ones are missing.
i5/OS is required only if the programming objects are located, or the applications contain
back-end code, on the System i5 model.
To compile RPG, COBOL, C, C++, CL, or DDS under i5/OS using the RSE or CODE,
5722-WDS (including option 60) must be installed.
11.10 WebFacing Deployment Tool V7.0 with HATS technology

Using IBM WebFacing Deployment Tool for WebSphere Development Studio with HATS
technology V7.0, you have the flexibility to use both the IBM WebFacing Tool V7.0 and HATS
V7.0 technologies to achieve your UI modernization goals. The IBM WebFacing Tool V7.0 and
the HATS Toolkit V7.0 are included in WebSphere Development Studio Client for iSeries V7.0
and WebSphere Development Studio Client Advanced Edition for iSeries V7.0.
IBM WebFacing Deployment Tool for WebSphere Development Studio with HATS technology
V7.0 acts as a run-time-enablement key for applications that are created with these tools.
IBM WebFacing Tool technology

The IBM WebFacing Tool quickly, easily, and cost-effectively generates Web interfaces to
5250 applications. It supports the following features:
Generates a new, fully functional Web user interface based on DDS source code
Provides comprehensive DDS keyword support
Allows quick and easy conversion of non-WebFaced DDS displays or system displays in
refaced applications
Generates portals for host access in a portal environment (WebSphere Development
Studio Client Advanced Edition for iSeries only)
Removes the requirement for online transaction processing (OLTP)
HATS technology
HATS includes a default transformation engine that quickly and easily generates a dynamic
Web interface from a 5250 datastream. The resulting Web interface can also be customized
with the HATS Toolkit.
Browser interface to host applications
Improvement of navigation of host applications
484
Generation of portals for host access in a portal environment (WebSphere Development

Studio Client Advanced Edition for iSeries only)
No requirement to access to source code
No requirement for OLTP starting with i5/OS V5R4
HATS and WebFacing application run-time interoperability

Interoperability between HATS and the WebFacing Tool provides the ability to perform DDS
source transformation, as well as 5250 data stream transformation, within the same Web
application. This function is particularly useful for those who have built a DDS source-based
transformation application using the IBM WebFacing Tool that needs to interact with a 5250
application that has been transformed using HATS.
This function is also useful for HATS users who want to take advantage of transformation,
based on DDS source files, provided by the IBM WebFacing Tool. With this support, a HATS
application and a WebFacing application can be linked together to interoperate as a single
enterprise application and use a single connection to a WebFacing server. This function is not
supported in a portal environment.
Requirement: The use of this function requires either WebSphere Development Studio
Client for iSeries or WebSphere Development Studio Client Advanced Edition for iSeries
and a license for IBM WebFacing Deployment Tool for WebSphere Development Studio
with HATS technology.
Additional enhancements in the HATS Toolkit V7.0

For additional HATS V7.0 information, see announcement letter 207-032, dated 27 February
2007 for WebSphere Host Access Transformation Services Toolkit V7.0. A summary of these
enhancements includes:
Eclipse Rich Client Platform support.
Simplified combination of multiple screens of tabular data.
Conversion of HATS table component data to a spreadsheet file.
Integration of the Host Simulator tool with HATS toolkit to allow easier offline HATS
development.
Additional enhancements in the IBM WebFacing Tool V7.0

For additional IBM WebFacing Tool enhancements, see announcement letter 207-030, dated
27 February 2007 for WebSphere Development Studio Client for iSeries V7.0. A summary of
these enhancements includes:
Linked HATS and WebFacing application.
Redesign of the WebFacing Web Project wizard and WebFacing Portlet Project wizard
(WebSphere Development Studio Client Advanced Edition for iSeries only) to provide
improved usability and greater customization capability.
WebFacing cheatsheet in the Help menu to assist in creating WebFacing Web
applications.
WebFacing cheatsheet in the Help menu to assist in creating WebFacing portlet
applications (WebSphere Development Studio Client Advanced Edition for iSeries only).
New WebFacing Migration wizard to simplify the migration of WebFacing projects to V7.0.
New WebFacing Developer role in the Welcome view.
485
For a detailed comparison of the IBM WebFacing Tool and HATS, see the Comparing the
WebFacing Tool and HATS Toolkit Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=swg27007084
11.11 IBM Systems Workload Estimator enhancements

The IBM Systems Workload Estimator is a Web-based sizing tool for System i, System p, and
System x environments. You can use this tool to size a new system, to size an upgrade to an
existing system, or to size a consolidation of several systems. The Workload Estimator uses
measurement input to best reflect your current workload and provides a variety of built-in
workloads to reflect your emerging application requirements. Virtualization can be used to
yield a more robust solution.
The Workload Estimator provide current and growth recommendations for processor,
memory, and disk that satisfy the overall client performance requirements.
Workload Estimator was enhanced several times during 2007, including support of
performance data from IBM System WebSphere Application Server as input (see 11.6.5,
WebSphere performance data collected by i5/OS Collection Services on page 463).
The following additional enhancements were made in Workload Estimator 2007.2 (April
2007), 2007.3 (May 2007), 2007.3.update.1 (July 2007), and 2007.4 (September 2007):
New System p and System i POWER6 models:
The POWER6 System p 570 (p570) models ranging from 2 to 16 processor cores, now
ordered as 9117-MMA, which comes in a variety of clock speeds up to 4.7 GHz
The POWER6 System i 570 (i570) models ranging from 2 to 16 processor cores, now
ordered as 9406-MMA, which comes with a clock speed of 4.7 GHz
Virtualization support for POWER6 models
Hypervisor and virtualization sizing algorithms were updated to support considerations for
both POWER6 and POWER5.
New IBM System i models
Support was added for the IBM POWER5+ processors for Models 515, 525, and 595.
New IBM System x models supported
Support was added for the most recent IBM System x models.
New System x default disk attachment type
The default disk attachment type has been changed from Ultra SCSI 3 to Serial SCSI to
reflect currently shipping hardware. Users can change their defaults on the Options page.
Different disk attachment types result in a different number of recommended drives based
on the throughput capabilities of each attachment type.
Redundant Virtual I/O Servers (VIOS)
Current VIOS support was enhanced to allow sizing of redundant VIOS. Through this
enhancement, resources in a redundant VIOS partition can be available for a failover in
case the primary VIOS partition is down for maintenance.
HATS workload update for i5/OS
The HATS workload was enhanced to support HATS V7 and WebSphere V6.1.
486
WebSphere workload for i5/OS
The WebSphere workload was enhanced with improved calculations for memory and disk
requirements.
Portal Express workload update for i5/OS
The WebSphere Portal workload was updated for WebSphere Portal Express 6.0 and
includes support for the following components:
Custom Application
Portal Document Manager
Web Content Management
Enhancements for disk
Disk sizing support was enhanced with additional customer representative data.
Additional information was provided in the user options help text to assist in selection of
the appropriate IOA type.
New disk models: Several new disk attachment types were added. See a summary
table found in the user options.
Disk calculation improvements: Calculations involving the number of disk arms in the
recommendation were enhanced, especially those involving mirroring.
System Planning Tool (SPT) updates for POWER6
The linkage between the Workload Estimator and SPT was updated to support POWER6
and the new models.
Size retired System p models
You might need to perform sizing on a model that is no longer sold by IBM. In doing so,
you might want to add workload to your existing system or consolidate work onto an older
existing system. After completing a System p estimation, a new option called Retired
Sizing is available on the Selected System panel to help you determine whether a
particular retired model meets the requirements of the sizing. Supported systems include
selected 5xx models.
Miscellaneous improvements to the Workload Developer
The Workload Developer component has also been updated with many enhancements.
Be sure to read the Whats New information in the help menu of Workload Developer.
Remember that Workload Developer is included in the download version of Workload
Estimator.
Added RedHat Enterprise Linux x Version 5 (RHEL5)
RHEL5 was added as a supported operating system. Several workload plug-ins for Linux
partitions were updated to support RHEL5.
Updates to workloads and sizing guides
The Workload Estimator provides a large number, and scope, of workloads to help
characterize your environment to be sized. Some are built-in workloads provided within
Workload Estimator. Others are called sizing guides and are available as front ends to
Workload Estimator; see:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/sizing
Collectively, these workloads have frequent additions and updates:

3COM Telephony workload
This workload for the System i platform is now added as a built-in dynamic solution
workload. Previously, it existed only on the IBM Sizing Guide Web site.
487
i5/OS workload updates for Domino and WebSphere

These workloads were updated to better represent POWER6 and to be more customer
representative.
PM workload updates for the System i and System p platforms
The workload of the Workload Estimator for measured data from Performance
Manager for System i and System p was updated with improved usability.
Clone function
Using Workload Estimator, you can now do large-scale sizings more quickly with the clone
function. This function was added so that you can easily clone workloads and
configuration objects such as partitions, systems, and tiers.
Dynamic solutions
Workload Estimator offers better support of dynamic solutions, which are solutions that
determine the base configuration, based on the responses to the workload and
questionnaire. On the Workload Configuration panel, dynamic workloads have been
added at the solution level instead of at the partition level. Some IBM Sizing Guides
(Workload Estimator plug-ins) hosted on other Web sites use this approach. Some of the
workloads that result in dynamic solutions will begin to be included on the list of built-in
workloads of Workload Estimator.
Be sure to use the links in the Help area of the Workload Estimator License Agreement Web
page to find tutorials on how to use Workload Estimator and Whats New information for
each update to Workload Estimator. There are important Workload Estimator enhancements
over the last 12 months of which you should be aware.
You can find the IBM Systems Workload Estimator on the Web at:
http://www-304.ibm.com/jct01004c/systems/support/tools/estimator/index.html
Note: At the time this paper was being published, Midrange Performance Group (MPG)
announced that a new release of its Performance Navigator product supports the new IBM
System i5 processor models. For more information, refer to the MPG Web site at:
11.12 MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS, 5639-MYS

MySQL is a popular open source database that is often used with PHP-based Web
applications. The announcement of MySQL support for i5/OS follows the successful
introduction of PHP supported by Zend on i5/OS in 2006. Now many companies are
extending the value of their traditional transaction processing applications by integrating them
with PHP-based Web applications running on i5/OS.
It is developed and distributed by MySQL AB, which is a company that builds its business by
providing services around MySQL. MySQL first was developed for UNIX and Linux
applications. It became popular when Internet service providers (ISP) discovered that MySQL
could be offered free of charge to their Internet customers and it was able to provide most of
the storage and retrieval functionality that a dynamic Web application needs. MySQL is now
in use as an integrated database in many applications on almost every operating system.
In 2007, MySQL AB and IBM announced a joint technology and reseller agreement to bring
support for the MySQL open source database to the IBM System i business computing
platform.
488
MySQL Enterprise is provided as an annual subscription offering from MySQL AB that

includes:
MySQL Enterprise Server software, a reliable, highly secure, and up-to-date version of the
open source database.
MySQL Network Monitoring and Advisory Service that continuously monitors your
database and proactively provides guidance on how to best implement MySQL.
MySQL Production Support to assist you in the development, deployment, and
management of MySQL applications.
MySQL is a client-server architecture based on TCP/IP. The MySQL server waits for
connections on a specified port and responds to SQL statements from a client.
MySQL Enterprise Server supports multiple storage engines. The following storage engines
are supported with MySQL for i5/OS:
The MyISAM storage engine manages non-transactional tables. It provides high-speed
storage and retrieval, as well as full text searching capabilities. MyISAM is supported in all
MySQL configurations. It is the default storage engine unless you have configured MySQL
to use a different one by default.
The MEMORY storage engine provides in-memory tables. Using the MERGE storage
engine, a collection of identical MyISAM tables can be handled as a single table. Like
MyISAM, the MEMORY and MERGE storage engines handle non-transactional tables.
Both are also included in MySQL by default.
The EXAMPLE storage engine is a stub engine that does nothing. You can create tables
with this engine, but no data can be stored in them or retrieved from them. This engine is
used to illustrate how to begin writing new storage engines. As such, it is primarily of
interest to developers.
The ARCHIVE storage engine stores large amounts of data without indexes with a small
storage area.
The comma separated values (CSV) storage engine stores data in text files using the CSV
format.
The MySQL Network Monitoring and Advisory Service is like having a virtual database
assistant (DBA) at your side. This service recommends best practices to help eliminate
security vulnerabilities, improve replication, optimize performance, and more. It continuously
monitors your MySQL servers and alerts you to potential problems before they impact your
system. As a result, the productivity of your developers, database administrators, and system
administrators is improved significantly.
MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS is available to be ordered from IBM in three service levels: silver,
gold, and platinum. IBM will pass the order for 5639-MYS to MySQL AB for fulfillment. The
software license and support is provided by MySQL AB.
You can find more information about MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS on the Web at the following
locations:
IBM System i
http://www.ibm.com/systemi
DB2 for i5/OS

http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/db2/
MySQL Web site:

http://www.mysql.com
489
11.12.1 DB2 Web Query for System i, 5733-QU2

DB2 Web Query for System i (DB2 Web Query) is a comprehensive, Java-based business
intelligence tool that delivers graphical, Web-based query and report writing functions. It is
positioned as an enhanced version of the IBM Query for iSeries (popular as Query/400)
product, 5722-QU1. Use DB2 Web Query to make DB2 data accessible to analysts and
executives with equal ease. With the DB2 Web Query import function, you can modernize
existing Query for iSeries reports or enable them for the Web. DB2 Web Query lays the
foundation for more sophisticated BI applications.
Parameterized reporting, which uses input values to complete report processing, makes
analyzing data simple and intuitive. It improves productivity while significantly reducing the
number of reports to maintain. It gives the power of the data to users, reducing the
dependence on IT staff for building customized reports based on user requests.
The DB2 Web Query for System i product is available from and supported by IBM, under
licensed program 5733-QU2. DB2 Web Query for System i was developed expressly for IBM
and the System i environment by Information Builders, Incorporated. As such 5733-QU2
capabilities are based upon those of WebFOCUS by Information Builders.
This IBM product has a base product and additional product components. The following
topics describe the base and optional features.
For more detailed information about the overall DB2 Web Query capabilities, see Getting
Started with DB2 Web Query for System i, SG24-7214. Also refer to the following pages on
the IBM Web site:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/db2
Support for System i:

Base features
The following list highlights some of the main features of DB2 Web Query that are available
with the 5733-QU2 base product:
Browser-based interface
A Web browser interface is used by either DB2 Web Query developers or those users who
perform the queries. This provides a graphical environment without the requirement of
installing additional desktop software or plug-ins on each users PC.
Query/400 report modernization
DB2 Web Query provides built-in adapters to import existing *QRYDFN objects without
requiring any changes to those objects. After the appropriate metadata is created from the
import process, the queries can be invoked from a browser interface and results displayed
to the browser. This feature provides a modernized interface for both running existing
queries and the report output.
Web-based query and reporting of data stored in DB2 for i5/OS
Included in DB2 Web Query is a component known as Report Assistant. This is an

HTML-based graphical tool that allows you to create new queries or modify existing ones,
including imported Query/400 queries. You can select a data source, specify any sorting
or grouping information, and display the report in your browser or another desktop
application. When you use Report Assistant, DB2 Web Query creates a styled report that
490
you can deploy on the Web without the necessity of learning the complexities of any
reporting language.
Deliver output content in various modernized formats for Web browsers and wireless
devices
By default, DB2 Web Query generates HTML and displays the query results to the
browser. However, you can optionally specify other output formats. The following list
shows some of the more commonly used formats that are available:
Excel (97 and 2000)

PDF
XML
Microsoft Word document (DOC)
PostScript (PS)
In addition, you can direct your DB2 Web Query report output to the traditional i5/OS
spooled file and database file formats.
Easy Report graph generation
Graph Assistant is an HTML-based tool that guides you step-by-step through the creation
of a graph. By using Graph Assistant, you can create and style your graphs.
What You See Is What You Get (WYSIWYG) report building
Power Painter is a Web layout and report creation tool that is built using Asynchronous
JavaScript and XML (AJAX) technology. With this tool, you can create output and page
layout formats. Power Painter combines reporting, graphs, and page layout design in a
single tool. The framework makes Power Painter a thin-client tool that looks, responds,
and performs like a Windows-based facility.
Data adapters
Data adapters manage the communication between DB2 Web Query and the DB2 for
i5/OS database through the use of SQL statements or other data access methods. Three
adapters are provided with the base product:
Query/400 adapter
This adapter retrieves the associated Query/400 query.
DB2 CLI adapter
This adapter generates appropriate SQL statements to submit to the DB2 for i5/OS
database engine.
System i Heritage Files adapter
This adapter generates the appropriate OPNQRYF command to handle reports that
are based on data in multi-member or multi-format files.
Runs under i5/OS
Each server-side component of the DB2 Web Query solution runs under i5/OS. This
integrated environment equates to a more simplified environment. There are fewer servers
and operating systems to set up, administer, secure, backup, and maintain.
Ability to use matrix reporting, ranking, color coding, drill-down, and font customization to
enhance the visualization of DB2 data
Federated DB2 for i5/OS data access
Customers with multiple System i servers or i5/OS partitions will value the federated query
capabilities of DB2 Web Query. This feature provides the ability to develop a single report
against multiple DB2 for i5/OS databases.
491
Optional features available from IBM

In addition to the base product, you can add the following optional features to DB2 Web
Query for multi-dimensional reporting, disconnected data analysis, and customization and
metadata management:
OLAP module
The DB2 Web Query OLAP feature adds multi-dimensional analysis to your reports. With
the OLAP feature, you can view the data in an almost unlimited number of ways. This
satisfies a broad range of analytical needs and gives users the ability to dynamically
interact with the data. By OLAP enabling a report, DB2 Web Query can automatically
provide an interface with drop-down lists and drill-capable columns that allow the user to
slice and dice, or pivot their data, and perform a variety of local analysis on the original
report.
Developer Workbench
DB2 Web Query Developer Workbench is an add-on component that provides a rich client
development environment for building customized business intelligence applications.
While you do not need Developer Workbench to create DB2 Web Query reports, there are
some compelling reasons to consider using it as your report development tool:
Enables multidimensional data analysis
Define hierarchies to be stored in the metadata

Prerequisite for the OLAP module
Shields users from the complexity of the databases
Include meaningful field (column) names

Include multilingual titles
Provides an SQL Wizard that allows a developer to use, type in, or copy and paste SQL
statements directly into the tool
Includes an HTML Layout Painter tool
With the HTML Layout Painter, you can combine reports, graphs, and other elements
together in a single HTML document or layout. It provides a WYSIWYG design
environment to help you create professional looking layouts that require more
advanced components such as custom HTML, HTML template files, and cascading
stylesheets (CSS).
Includes advanced programmer tools:
Data Profiling
Impact analysis
Ability to change field types (including integer or alpha to recognized date fields)
Automatic date decomposition
Active Reports
Many mobile workers need access to important information stored in their analytic reports
while disconnected from the Internet. With DB2 Web Query Active Reports, such users
can take the power of business intelligence with them wherever they go. By combining
data and interactive controls into a single, self-contained HTML file, Active Reports
delivers analytic capabilities in a completely portable and disconnected environment, with
absolutely no software required.
Additional user licenses
If you need more users than the base option provides or you need more than you are
currently licensed for, you can purchase additional licenses. For more details and support,
contact your IBM representative.
492
The following figure shows an example of an interface of DB2 Web Query for System i. A
graph chart and a pie chart in the upper area of the interface of DB2 Web Query can be
created by using Graph Assistant. The two tables that are shown can be created by using
Report Assistant. The layout of the Web interface can be created by using Power Painter.
i5/OS integrated Web application server Version 7.1: DB2 Web Query, 5733-QU2,
requires use of the i5/OS integrated Web application server at Version 7.1 level,
announced 9 October 2007. This i5/OS Web integrated application server at an earlier
version was included in the PTFs under HTTP Server for i5/OS V5R4 group PTF SF99114.
A level of SF99114 planned for December 2007 availability will upgrade the integrated
application server to V7.1. Prior to the availability of this December 2007 level of SF99114,
if you already have group PTF SF99114 installed, you can install PTFs to update the
integrated Web application server to Version 7.1. See Information APAR II14318 for DB2
Web Query installation and PTF requirements at:
http://www-304.ibm.com/jct01004c/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
brandmain?brandind=5000027
11.13 Value Packs for Popular i5/OS Software Products

In 2007, IBM announced Value Packs for Popular i5/OS Software Products (Value Packs for
i5/OS) as new software offering for i5/OS V5R4. This offering includes the following software
packages:
DB2 Value Pack for i5/OS, 5722-DVP
Operations Value Pack for i5/OS, 5722-SVP
Zend and MySQL Value Pack for i5/OS, 5639-MVP
These offerings can provide savings to clients who require the key database and operations
software provided by these packages. The bundles offer a discount versus purchasing these
i5/OS-based software products individually and represent the majority of popular software
493
products that have been packaged with the POWER5 550, 570, and 595 Enterprise Editions.
These Value Packs are designed to offer these valuable software products, at a savings, to
clients who purchase a new POWER6 570, which no longer bundles these software products
in the base configuration. One value pack includes older technology systems as described in
the following section.
11.13.1 DB2 Value Pack for i5/OS, 5722-DVP

DB2 Value Pack for i5/OS is for 570 (POWER6) models only and contains the following
products and functions:
DB2 Query Manager and SQL Development Kit, 5722-ST1
This program provides an interactive query and report writing interface, as well as
precompilers and tools to assist in writing SQL application programs in high-level
programming languages. Query Manager offers a prompt-driven interactive interface to
help you develop reports that fit your needs.
SQL Development Kit contains SQL precompilers for developing database applications in
several programming languages. It also includes an SQL statement processor for SQL
scripts and Interactive SQL, a prompt-driven interface for testing and running SQL
statements.
DB2 Symmetric Multiprocessing (DB2 SMP), 5722-SS1, Option 26
DB2 SMP expands on the parallel capabilities of DB2 for i5/OS. This feature improves
performance on the industrial-strength System i database by extending the capabilities of
DB2 for i5/OS on any IBM System i server that has multiple CPUs, or in some cases, even
with single CPU configurations. This improved performance is critical, especially in a data
warehouse or analytical query environment. The performance gains provided by this
feature allow for better, more effective business decisions to be made in a more timely
manner.
With the DB2 SMP feature installed and enabled, a single database operation can run on
multiple processors at the same time (in parallel). These database operations are typically
queries, which are run through any SQL or query interface, but the SMP feature can
enhance other database operations as well, including index builds, table reorganizations,
and bulk loads.
System administrators can enable DB2 SMP differently for each user of the system, giving
the system administrator greater control over how system resources are used. With this
flexibility administrators can balance the needs of all users against the available
resources.
DB2 Universal Database Extender, 5722-DE1
DB2 Universal Database Extender consists of two components: the XML Extender and a
linguistic search engine called Text Extender.
DB2 XML Extender for i5/OS includes new data types to store XML documents in the
DB2 database and new functions to work with these structured documents. Managed
by DB2, these documents are stored as character data or external files. With the
retrieval functions, you can retrieve complete documents or individual elements.
Use DB2 XML Extender to extract XML elements and attributes into traditional SQL
data types, leveraging the sophisticated indexing and SQL query functionality of DB2
for i5/OS.
Leverage the ability to store, retrieve, or update XML documents in a single DB2
column, or store XML documents as a collection of DB2 data in multiple columns and
tables. Compose existing DB2 data into XML documents and leverage the compatibility
494
with the powerful search functions of the Text Extender component to search one or
more sections within a set of XML documents.
DB2 Text Extender for i5/OS delivers powerful and flexible full-text search. Using SQL
for linguistic functions enables thorough searching of documents where the need is
complex and the quality and precision of the search results outweigh the retrieval time.
Text search functions are integrated into SQL, which is widely used and available for
many programming languages and environments. Maintain the text indexes
automatically through incremental or asynchronous full-text index update with
automatic synchronization. The Text Extender provides linguistic indexing and search
for 22 languages including English, German, French, and Japanese. Leverage
Boolean, wildcard, free-text and fuzzy search options, or proximity search for words
within the same paragraph and sentence, or documents that contain specific text.
XML Toolkit for IBM System i5 (XML Toolkit), 5733-XT1
This program is designed to provide key development enablement components, XML
parsers, to assist in the use of XML for general application or business-to-business
solutions. The XSL transformer allows you to reformat or reorganize XML documents
to other formats (for example, XML or HTML).
The XML Toolkit for System i5 is based on cross-platform, open-source code that is
designed to be compliant with industry standards. Parser version 5.6 corresponds to
Xerces-C Version 2.6 from Apache Software Foundations with fixes. The XSL
transformer corresponds to Xalan-C Version 2.0 from Apache Software Foundations. In
addition to providing the XML for C++ parser and the XSL transformer for C++, a
unique interface called XML procedural parser is provided to the XML for C++ parser
that allows applications written in RPG, C, or COBOL to access an XML parser.
Also included with the XML Toolkit is XML Scripting for IBM System i5. XML Scripting
for System i5 provides an XML-based build tool.
11.13.2 Operations Value Pack for i5/OS, 5722-SVP

Operations Value Pack for i5/OS is only for 570 (POWER6) systems and contains the
following products and functions:
Backup Recovery and Media Services (BRMS), 5722-BR1
BRMS is the strategic solution for planning and managing the backup of the System i
platform. BRMS provides i5/OS support for policy-oriented setup and automated archive,
backup, recovery, and other removable-media- related operations. BRMS uses a
consistent set of intuitive concepts and operations that you use to develop and implement
a backup strategy tailored to your business requirements.
BRMS improves productivity by assisting customers who define, implement, and maintain
a technical strategy for managing their i5/OS backups and backup media. Systems
management and user productivity will be enhanced through consistent, intuitive,
policy-driven operations. Policy support enables a customer to establish control and
evaluation criteria on an operation, object, object group, media, device, system, or location
basis. BRMS provides cost savings, reduces complexity and improves operational
productivity.
BRMS supports unattended operations by automatically recovering from media-related
errors that may occur while using tape automation, reducing the need for operator
intervention.
BRMS Network Feature, 5722-BR1, Option 1
This feature enables a BRMS system to connect to other BRMS systems in the network
using native TCP/IP, APPN, or both. A BRMS network system shares the inventory and
495
policies that are associated with media managed by a central BRMS system. In addition,
you can view the saved history of any system in the network from a single system. The
networking feature also allows you to offload your media duplication task by using one
system in the network to duplicate media on behalf of another system in the network. The
systems in a BRMS network can be other i5/OS systems or individual i5/OS partitions.
Media and Storage Extensions, 5722-SS1, Option 18
With this option, you can use APIs for media and storage management that enable
monitoring and control of media usage, including volumes to be selected and volume
expiration dates. This option is a prerequisite feature to BRMS.
Performance Tools for i5/OS, 5722-PT1, and Performance Tools Manager, 5722-PT1,
Option 1
These program provide a complete set of reporting, analysis, and modeling functions to
assist the user in managing the performance of the System i platform. It provides printed
and online reports, either in graphic or tabular form, portraying the performance and
utilization of i5/OS applications. The Performance Advisor function assists the user in
analyzing system performance, diagnosing performance problems, pinpointing
performance bottlenecks, and providing recommendations to eliminate those bottlenecks.
11.13.3 Zend and MySQL Value Pack for i5/OS, 5639-MVP

The Zend and MySQL Value Pack for i5/OS value pack includes a combination of Zend and
MySQL products, at a reduced price, compared to the price of the individual products. The
Zend and MySQL Value Pack includes software packages to support an environment for Web
application development and deployment on i5/OS:
Zend Core for i5/OS with gold support

Zend Studio for i5/OS with gold support
Zend Platform for i5/OS with gold support
MySQL Enterprise with silver support
This value pack requires i5/OS V5R4 and Portable Application Solution Environment (PASE)
5722-SS1 Option 33. It is for the following systems:
POWER6 technology-based System i Model 570

System i5 Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595
eServer i5 Models 520, 550, 570, and 595
iSeries Models 270, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and SB2
The following products and support are included in this value pack:
Zend Core for i5/OS is a fully tested and enhanced version of the open source PHP
product. Offering PHP run time, it is packaged to make your software installation easier
and faster with instant PHP setup. Core for i5/OS is enhanced to take advantage of
specific i5/OS resources and capabilities. Zend Core extensions and the toolkit enable you
to access DB2 and applications on i5/OS.
The Value Pack comes with a license for Zend Core for one server and one year of gold
support for one processor. Gold support includes telephone support for business hours
Monday through Friday as well as Web-based support and software updates. This support
is provided by Zend.
Zend Studio for i5/OS is a PHP IDE that is designed for professional developers. It
includes all the development components that are necessary for the full PHP application
life cycle. Through a comprehensive set of editing, debugging, analysis, optimization,
database tools, and testing, Zend Studio can speed development cycles and simplify
complex projects. Zend Studio for i5/OS is enhanced to work with the integration toolkit
496
that is provided with Zend Core on i5/OS. The Zend Studio client is supported on the
Microsoft Windows, Linux, and Macintosh platforms.
The Value Pack comes with a license for Zend Studio for one client and one year of gold
support for one client. Gold support includes telephone support for business hours
Monday through Friday as well as Web-based support and software updates. This support
is provided by Zend.
Zend Platform for i5/OS is a robust PHP production environment that helps ensure that
applications that are written in PHP run smoothly at all times. Zend Platform for i5/OS is
designed for IT personnel and businesses that require commercial-grade Web
applications in highly reliable production environments,. It offers high performance and
scalability for an improved Web experience and response time. Zend Platform can deliver
application uptime and reliability through enhanced PHP monitoring and immediate
problem resolution.
The Value Pack comes with a license for Zend Platform and includes one processor for
one year and one year of gold support for one processor. Gold support includes telephone
support for business hours Monday through Friday as well as Web-based support and
software updates. This support is provided by Zend.
MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS includes:
MySQL Enterprise Server 5.0 software, which is an up-to-date version of MySQL open
source database for cost-effectively delivering e-commerce, online transaction
processing, and data warehousing applications.
MySQL Network Monitoring and Advisory Service, which gives developers, database
administrators, and system administrators a virtual DBA to enforce MySQL
recommended best practices.
MySQL Production Support, which helps you to get your toughest technical questions
answered quickly.
The Value Pack comes with a one-year subscription for MySQL Enterprise for one server
and one year of silver support for one server. Silver support includes telephone support for
business hours Monday through Friday as well as Web-based support and software dates.
This support is provided by MySQL AB.
11.14 Analyze Object Conversion tool

In 2008, IBM plans to deliver i5/OS V6R1, which was announced as a July 2007 product
preview. With this new release, IBM will require conversion of all programs that are created
under previous releases that use the i5/OS machine interface (MI). The purpose of the
conversion is to upgrade and refreshe programs to take advantage of the latest system
enhancements, including enhanced system integrity, improved performance, and a range of
new operating system and processor capabilities. In order for a program to be converted, its
creation data (sometimes referred to as observability) must be available. Programs created
for V5R1 or later have their creation data automatically saved during program creation.
Clients and ISVs with programs created for OS/400 V4R5 and earlier must ensure that the
creation data is available for the conversion process.
IBM will provide the Analyze Object Conversion (ANZOBJCVN) tool for i5/OS V5R3 and
V5R4 to help you plan for the program conversion. This tool helps you identify potential
conversion difficulties, if any, and estimates the time required for program conversion. It also
provides information about two other types of conversions: integrated file system names and
spooled files.
497
V6R1 is planned to be supported on Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, POWER6 570, 595,
800, 810, 825, 870, and 890. It is not planned to be supported on iSeries Models 270, 820,
830, 840, SB2, and SB3, as well as earlier members of the iSeries family. For more
information about the V6R1 release, see the i5/OS V6R1 preview page on the Web at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/os/i5os/v6r1preview/
Program analysis and conversion are part of the overall planning required prior to an
operating system upgrade to V6R1. Consider the preparation documented in i5/OS Program
Conversion: Getting ready for i5/OS V6R1, REDP-4293, in conjunction with the following
references. The information in the following documentation will be updated over time:
System i: Installing, upgrading, or deleting i5/OS and related software
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/scope/i5os/index.jsp?topic=/
rzahc/rzahc1.htm
System i Upgrade planning Web page

http://www-304.ibm.com/jct01004c/systems/support/i/planning/upgrade/index.html
V6R1 Memo to Users
Code that is created on V6R1 POWER5+ systems will run without conversion on V6R1
POWER6 systems. Additional information regarding the creation of POWER6
technology-specific programs on POWER6 systems and running them on a supported
pre-POWER6 technology system will become available prior to the announcement of i5/OS
V6R1.
11.15 i5/OS V5R4 and Java JDK 6

JDK Standard Edition (SE) 6 is the latest release of the Java programming language. JDK
SE 6 contains many new features and enhancements to collections, jconsole, debug,
monitoring and management, instrumentation, reflection, performance, and more.
The JDK SE became available in September 2007 for i5/OS. Consult the Support for System i
Web page to determine how to obtain this new support:
The following enhancements are primary to JDK SE 6:

New collection interfaces
DEQUE: Double-ended queue supports element insertion and removal at both ends.
Extends the Queue interface.
BLOCKINGDEQUE: Deque with operations wait for the deque to become non-empty
when retrieving an element and wait for space to become available in the deque when
storing an element. Extends both the Deque and BlockingQueue interfaces. This
interface is part of java.util.concurrent.
NAVIGABLESET: SortedSet extended with navigation methods reports closest
matches for given search targets. A NavigableSet can be accessed and traversed in
either ascending or descending order. This interface is intended to supersede the
SortedSet interface.
498
NAVIGABLEMAP: SortedMap extended with navigation methods returns the closest

matches for given search targets. A NavigableMap can be accessed and traversed in
either ascending or descending key order. This interface is intended to supersede the
SortedMap interface.
CONCURRENTNAVIGABLEMAP: ConcurrentMap is also a NavigableMap. This
interface is part of java.util.concurrent.
New concrete implementation classes
ARRAYDEQUE: Efficient resizable-array implementation of the Deque interface

CONCURRENTSKIPLISTSET: Concurrent scalable skip list implementation of the
NavigableSet interface
CONCURRENTSKIPLISTMAP: Concurrent scalable skip list implementation of the
ConcurrentNavigableMap interface
LINKEDBLOCKINGDEQUE: Concurrent scalable optionally bounded FIFO blocking
deque backed by linked nodes
ABSTRACTMAP.SIMPLEENTRY: Simple mutable implementation of Map.Entry
ABSTRACTMAP.SIMPLEIMMUTABLEENTRY: Simple immutable implementation of
Map.Entry
Existing classes have been retrofitted to implement the new interfaces in JDK 6:
LINKEDLIST: Deque
TREESET: NavigableSet
TREEMAP: NavigableMap
New methods added to the Collections utility class
NEWSETFROMMAP(MAP): Creates a general-purpose set implementation from a

general-purpose map implementation.
ASLIFOQUEUE(DEQUE): Returns a view of a Deque as a last-in-first-out (LIFO)
queue.
JCONSOLE enhancements. The Java SE platform already includes a graphical
monitoring tool called JConsole. The tool implements the Java Management Extensions
(JMX) API, which enables you to monitor the performance of a JVM and any
instrumented applications. Introduced in Java 2 Platform, Standard Edition 5.0 (J2SE),
JConsole became an officially supported feature of J2SE 6.
The major JConsole tool enhancements in J2SE 6 include:

JConsole tool. JConsole Plugin support enables you to build your own plug-ins to run
with JConsole. For example, you can add a custom tab to access MBeans for your
applications.
Dynamic attach capability. Dynamic attach capability enables you to connect JConsole
to any application that supports the dynamic Attach API, which was also added in
J2SE 6.
An enhanced user interface to make data more easily accessible
New Overview and VM Summary tabs to enable a better presentation of general
information about your JVM
Improved presentation of MBeans to make it easier to access the operations and
attributes of your MBeans
New Monitoring and Management API Enhancements
499
J2SE now includes an API to allow you to monitor and manage the JVM and other
applications in the package java.lang.management. The J2SE 6 platform includes the
following enhancements to this API:
Support for java.util.concurrent locks
New classes and methods added in the java.lang.management package for obtaining
the list of locks owned by a thread and to report which stack frame locked a monitor:
New LockInfo class
New MonitorInfo class
New ThreadInfo methods getLockInfo(), getLockedMonitors(), and

getLockedSynchronizers()
New ThreadMXBean methods dumpAllThreads() and getThreadInfo(long ids,

Boolean lockedMonitor, Boolean lockedSynchronizers)
New functions added to the java.lang.instrument package
Support for retransformation of class files was added. To facilitate dynamic transformation
of classes that are already loaded, the following methods are added:
Instrumentation.retransformClasses(Class...)
Instrumentation.addTransformer(ClassFileTransformer, Boolean)
Instrumentation.isModifiableClass(Class)
Instrumentation.isRetransformClassesSupported()
These methods are suited to such operations as adding instrumentation to methods

whose classes have already been loaded. Support for retransformation means that access
to the original class file is no longer required in order to instrument loaded classes. They
enable the easy removal of applied transformations and are designed to work in
multi-agent environments.
New support for instrumenting native methods. The following methods enable native
methods to be instrumented by including a JVM-aware mechanism for wrapping the native
method:
Instrumentation.setNativeMethodPrefix(ClassFileTransformer,String)
Instrumentation.isNativeMethodPrefixSupported()
New support for appending to the class loader search. The following methods enable
instrumentation support classes to be defined in the appropriate class loader:
Instrumentation.appendToBootstrapClassLoaderSearch(JarFile)
Instrumentation.appendToSystemClassLoaderSearch(JarFile)
500
12
Chapter 12.
Software for System i models

In this chapter, we cover the i5/OS V5R4 and V5R3 capabilities that were announced during
2007 up to this date at which this paper was published. For IBM System i telephony
capabilities, which were introduced during 2006 and enhanced during 2007, refer to 3.6.2,
System i and 3Com IP Telephony on page 56, and 3.6.3, System i IP Telephony Express
offerings on page 61.
Notes:
V5R4 and V5R3 of i5/OS are currently supported for the System i family of systems and
servers included in this paper:
POWER6 technology-based Model MMA

POWER5 technology-based Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595
Pre-POWER5 technology-based Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890
POWER6 technology-based processors require V5R4 with License Internal Code
V5R4M5 or later. i5/OS POWER5 technology-based processors require i5/OS V5R3 or
later. POWER4 is the chip technology that is used in Models 825, 870, and 890.
i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 also run on older processor technology systems. For hardware
information about older processor technologies that are not covered in this paper, see:
IBM eServer iSeries and AS/400e System Builder: IBM OS/400 Version 4 Release 3
- Version 5 Release 2, REDP-0542
PCI Card Placement Rules for the IBM eServer iSeries Server OS/400 Version 5
Release 2: September 2003, REDP-3638
This paper does not contain detailed ordering instructions or pricing information. For
additional information, we recommend that you contact either an IBM representative or
an authorized IBM Business Partner. You can go to the IBM System i How to Buy Web
page at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/buy/marketing/
From this page, you can choose to be put in contact with an IBM Business Partner or
IBM Sales Representative. You can also request a price quote. To contact an IBM U.S.
Sales Representative, call 1-888-SHOP-IBM.
501
12.1 Minimum i5/OS and OS/400 software-level requirements

for System i models
The following tables identify the software release of the minimum operating system that is
required for IBM System i family of systems. The features that are supported in these
processors might be supported by earlier releases of i5/OS or OS/400 than the processor
itself. Many of the feature codes that are supported in these processors are also represented
in this chapter.
The following table summarizes the i5/OS release levels, starting with V5R3, that are
supported on the System i processor technologies.
System i model
V5R3
V5R4
V6R1a
V6R2a
POWER6 models
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
POWER5+ Models 515, 525
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
POWER5/5+ Models 520, 550, 570, and 595
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not planned
Models 270, 820, 830, and 840
Supported
Supportedb
Not supported
Not planned
a. All statements regarding future direction and intent of IBM are subject to change or withdrawal without
notice, and represent goals and objectives only. For more information, refer to the Upgrade planning Web
page for future software releases:
http://www-304.ibm.com/jct01004c/systems/support/i/planning/upgrade/futuresftwr.html
b. V5R4M5 Licensed Internal Code is not formally supported on these models. V5R3M5 and V5R4M0
Licensed Internal Code is supported. Always verify the latest i5/OS release support status at the planning
and upgrade Web site listed for table note a.
Note: OS/400 software releases up to and including V3R2 run only on CISC models of the
AS/400 system (Models Bx0, Cx0, Dx0, Exx, Fx0, P0x, 100, 135, 140, 200, 20S, and 3x0).
For information about software that supports these CISC systems, refer to AS/400 CISC
System Builder, REDP-0042.
OS/400 software releases from V3R6 and V3R7 through V5R2 run on AS/400e systems
(Models 150, 4xx, 5xx, and 6xx). For information about software that supports these RISC
systems, refer to IBM eServer AS/400e RISC System Builder Version 3 Release 6 Version 5 Release 2, REDP-0342.
502
OS/400 V5R1
OS/400 V5R2
9406-270 #2431, #2432, #2434 Processors

9406-270 #2452, #2454 DSD Processors
9406-820 #0150, #0151, #0152, #2435, #2436, #2437, #2438
Processors
9406-820 #2456, #2457, #2458 DSD Processors
9406-830 #0153, #2349, #2351 Processors
9406-840 #0158, #0159, #2461 Processors
9406-8x0 #235x CUoD
#037x LC-SC Adapter Kit
#1422 PDU Line Cord
#147X Optical HSL Cable
#1548 Interactive Capacity Card
#275x HSL Ports
#2773 PCI Dual WAN/Modem IOA (ANSI)
#2777 HSL Ports - 8 Copper - 8 Copper
#3007 1 GB main storage
#3009 128 MB main storage
#4319 35.16 GB 10k RPM Disk Unit
#4487 50 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Device
#510x PCI Disk Expansion Unit
#516x Power Dist Unit
#9002 Dual Line Cord Enabler
#9752 Base HSL Ports - 8 Copper
7207-330 External SLR60 Tape Drive
9406-800 #2463, #2464 Processors

9406-810
#2465, #2466, #2467, #2469
Processors
9406-825 #2473, #2495 Processors
9406-870 #2486, #2489, #2496 Processors
9406-890 #0197, #0198, #2487, #2488, #2497, #2498, #2499
Processors
#15xx Interactive Card
#2742 Two-Line WAN IOA
#2793/#9793 Two-Line WAN IOA with Modem
#2794/#9794 Two-Line IOA with Modem
#2844 PCI IOP
#30941024 MB main storage
#4531 DVD-ROM
#4631 DVD-ROM
#5116 Dual Line Cords #5294 Tower
#5700 PCI 1 Gbps Ethernet IOAl
#7116 System Unit Expansion
503
OS/400 V5R1
OS/400 V5R2
(contd.)
#7137 DASD Concurrent Maintenance
#9746 Base PCI Twinaxal IOA
#9749 Base PCI 100/10 Ethernet IOA
#9844 Base PCI IOP
i5/OS V5R3 with V5R3M5 LIC
i5/OS V5R4
9406-520 #8325, #8327, #8330 Processors

#0906 1-way Server Feature
#2888 RIO-G Ports - 2 Copper
#5159 850 Watt Power Supply
#7320 520, 520+ One Processor Activation
#7355 Accelerator for System i5
#7357 Accelerator for System i5
#7373 High Availabilty Edition for #0906
#9299 Base Enterprise Enablement for 520
9406-595 #8968 0/16-way 2.3 GHz Processor

#0953 8/16-way Server Feature 595 1x8968
#7320 515, 520, 520+, 525 One Processor Activation
9406-525 #0909 1/2W Server Feature 525 1x8330
#6910 525 CBU Configuration 1
#7790 525 Express Configuration 1
9407-515 #4901, #4903 Server features
#6018 515 Base Product Config 1
#6028 515 Base Product Config 2
#0047 Device Parity RAID-6 All,
#5583 Controller with 1.5GB Auxiliary Write Cache without IOP
#5777 PCI-X Ultra320 SCSI Disk Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB
Read caches without IOP
#5778 PCI-X EXP24 Controller - 1.5GB Write/1.6GB Read caches
without IOP
without IOP
without IOP
#6800 PCI 1Gbps Ethernet IOA
#6801 PCI 1Gbps Ethernet UTP IOA
504
i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5
i5/OS V5R4 with License Internal Code V5R4M5 (contd.)
9406-MMA #7380 0/2-way 4.7GHz processor card

#4910 1/4W Serv Feat 570 (POWER6) 2x7380
#0302 SCSI Controller Port Attach
#0347 RAID Hot Spare Specify
#0423 Admin 570 (POWER6) Enclosure Count
#0533 V5R4OS, V5R4M5 Machine Code
#0719 No disk drives in the system unit
#0720 Load Source in #0595/5095
#0721 Load Source in #5094/5294
#0725 Load Source in #5786/5787
#0838 #3676 Load Source Specify
#0839 #3677 Load Source Specify
#1802 12X Channel CEC GX Adapter
#2893 PCIe 2-Line WAN w/Modem
#2894 PCIe 2-Line WAN w/Modem CIM
#3648 300GB 15k rpm SAS Disk Drive
#5403 One Processor Activation
#5404 Utility Billing 100 Proc Min
#5490 Enterprise Enablement
#5491 Full Enterprise Enable
#5629 DVD Enclosure and Backplane

#5646 PCIe Blind Swap Casset Short
#5647 PCIe Blind Swap Cassette Std
#5648 Service Interface Card
#5656 On/Off 1Proc-1Day Billing
#5691 On/Off 1GB-1Day Memory Bill
#5692 0/2GB DDR2 Memory
#5756 DVD-ROM Drive IDE Slimline
#5757 DVD-RAM Drive IDE Slimline
#5767 PCIe 1Gb Ethernet UTP 2Port
#5768 PCIe 1Gb Ethernet Fiber 2Port
#5773 PCIe 4Gb Fibre Channel 1Port
#5774 PCIe 4Gb Fibre Channel 2-Port
#5796 PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer
#6446 12X Short Run 5796 Attach
#6457 12X Long Run 5796 Attach
#6805 PCI 2-Line WAN IOA No IOP
#6808 PCI 4-Modem WAN IOA No IOP
#6809 PCI 4-Modm WAN IOA NoIOP CIM
#6833 PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem, No IOP
#6834 PCI 2-Ln WAN w/Mod, No IOP CIM
#7262 Quantity 150 of #1292
#7314 Dual 5796 I/O Unit Enclosure 19-inch Rack Mounting
Hardware
#7516 Quantity 150 of #1269
#8478 256GB CUod Memory Activate
#9693 PCIe 2-Line WAN w/Modem
#9694 PCIe 2-Line WAN w/Modem CIM
#9933 PCI 2-Line WAN w/Modem NoIOP
#9934 PCI 2-Ln WAN w/Mod NoIOP CIM
Verification: You can verify this information by using the Offering Information (OITool),
IBMLink, or other online tools. You can find the OITool on the internal Web at:
http://w3-3.ibm.com/sales/ssi/
505
12.2 i5/OS and OS/400 general availability and support

The following table shows the availability, withdrawal, and end of support dates for each
release of the operating system. Note that i5/OS V5R4, V5R3, and OS/400 V5R2 are the
supported levels of operating system for the System i models. All earlier releases of OS/400
are withdrawn from IBM marketing and support.
Release
End of program support
R7.5 SSP
08 March 1996
09 February 1999
31 May 2000
V3R0.5
03 June 1994
11 February1997
31 May 1997
V3R1
30 June 1995
11 February 1997
31 October 1998
V3R2
21 June 1996
10 February 1998
31 May 2000
V3R6
29 September 1995
19 August 1997
31 October 1998
V3R7
09 November 1996
01 September 1998
30 June 1999
V4R1
29 August 1997
09 February 1999
31 May 2000
V4R2
27 February 1998
09 February 1999
31 May 2000
V4R3
11 September 1998
15 February 2000
31 January 2001
V4R4
21 May 1999
31 May 2001
31 May 2001
V4R5
28 July 2000
2 July 2002
31 December 2002
V5R1
25 May 2001
21 November 2003
30 September 2005
V5R2
30 August 2002
01 October 2005
30 April 2007
V5R3
28 May 2004
04 January 2008
---
V5R4
14 February 2006
---
---
12.3 i5/OS and OS/400 upgrade paths

The following table shows the valid upgrade paths for i5/OS and OS/400.
To:
From:
V4R2 a
V4R3a
V4R4a
V4R5 a
V5R1a
V5R2
i5/OS
V5R3
i5/OS
V5R4
V4R1
V4R2
V4R3
V4R4
V4R5
V5R1
V5R2
V5R3
a. Withdrawn from IBM support.

b. OS/400 V4R5 is the last release to offer single-step CISC-to-RISC upgrade capabilities from V3R2.
Refer to the appropriate software installation manual for instructions to upgrade software.
Single step RISC-to-RISC upgrades are supported as normal upgrade procedures.
506
12.4 Current-release to previous-release support for i5/OS and

OS/400
The Target Release (TGTRLS) parameter specifies the valid i5/OS or OS/400 release of the
operating system on which you intend to restore and use the object.
Values for TGTRLS parameter
Current i5/OS or
OS/400 release
*CURRENT
*PRV
Other valid values
V5R4
V5R4
V5R3
V5R2
V5R3
V5R3
V5R2
V5R1
V5R2
V5R2
V5R1
V4R5
V5R1
V5R1
V4R5
V4R4
V4R5
V4R5
V4R4
V4R3 V4R2 V3R2
12.5 Software ordering terminology

In this section, we explain standard terminology that is used for all software versions:
Product identifier (PID): All IBM Licensed Programs including i5/OS and OS/400 have a
product identifier. The format is 57xx-yyy. For example, i5/OS V5R4 is 5722-SS1.
HIPO: New preload orders of Version 5 are defined with HIPO numbers associated with
the hardware product order. For example, HIPO feature 5372-IS5 is for new orders of
Version 5. The 5372-IS5 contains features, with each feature indicating the software
product to be loaded. For example, #1002 indicates BRMS (5722-BR1). It serves as an
(administrative) software preload ordering vehicle. The term HIPO is not an acronym.
Additional feature: Additional features are product and associated HIPO features that
relate to an optional feature of a licensed program. The additional feature provides the
delivery mechanism for the licensed program.
Skip ship: For Version 5, some products have a skip ship from a previous release. They
retain their original product identifiers, but can still be ordered.
507
12.6 i5/OS V5R4 software

The following tables show the V5R4 i5/OS-based software products that are most commonly
ordered. It is not a definitive list of all System i software products that are now available. See
12.10, Notes for Version 5 software tables on page 526, for Version 5 software group
information.
Operating system and base products
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature
(5372-IS5)2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
Maintenance
delivery8
Operating System/400 6,7
---
5722-SS1
1000
5050
i5/OS Users
---
5052
Block of 250 users
---
5053
Unlimited users
---
5054
---
5722-SS1
Option 18
1500
5103
OptiConnect for OS/400
---
5722-SS1
Option 23
1515
DB2 Symmetric Multiprocessing
---
5722-SS1
Option 26
1517
DB2 MultiSystem
---
5722-SS1
Option 27
1518
Print Services Facility (PSF/400)

1-45 IPM
1-100 IPM
Any speed
---
5722-SS1
Option 36
Option 37
Option 38
High Availability Switchable Resource
---
High Availability Journal Performance
S
1501
1502
1503
5112
5113
5114
5722-SS1
Option 41
1505
5116
---
5722-SS1 Option
42
1545
5117
S/38 Utilities for AS/4006
5722-DB1
1021
HTTP Server for iSeries
---
5722-DG1
---
IBM Toolbox for Java
---
5722-JC1
---
IBM Developer Kit for Java
---
5722-JV1
---
DB2 Query Manager and SQL Development Kit for

iSeries 6, 7
---
5722-ST1
1011
iSeries Access for Windows
---
5722-XE1
---
508
5050
OS/400 complementary database software
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature
(5372-IS5)2
DB2 OLAP Server for iSeries V8.110
---
5724-B78
---
DB2 UDB Warehouse Manager Standard Edition V8
5724-E66
DB2 Universal Database Extenders for iSeries V7.2
---
5722-DE1
DB2 DataPropagator for iSeries Version 8.1
5722-DP4
DB2 QMF Distributed Edition V8.1 for

Multiplatforms
---
5724-E86
i5/OS Integration for Linux on xSeries
---
5722-LSV
---
Query for iSeries6,
---
5722-QU1
1009
System Openness Includes
---
5722-SS1
Option 13
---
---
5722-SS1
Option 25
---
Portable Application Solution Environment
---
5722-SS1
Option 33
---
TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities for iSeries
---
5722-TC1
---
iSeries Access for Linux
5722-XL1
---
5722-XH2
iSeries Access for Wireless
---
5722-XP1
iSeries Access Family6,7
---
5722-XW1
Networking products
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature2
(5372-IS5)
Host On-Demand Version 6.0
5733-A59
---
5733-B41
---
---
5722-CM1
1003
5050
5722-CR1
1020
---
---
WebSphere MQ Version 5.3
Communications Utilities for iSeries6

6
Cryptographic Support for AS/400
iSeries Cryptographic Device Manager

Communications Server for Windows NT Version 6.1
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
Maintenance
delivery8
1004
5050
1035
5050
5050
S
5050
1012 Client
Processor 1013 Client
User
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
M
5733-CY1
P
5639-F25
Network Authentication Enablement for i5/OS
5722-NAE
NetView FTP
5798-TBG
509
WebSphere and on demand business products
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
IBM Business Solutions
5722-BZ1
5724-H89
WebSphere Application Server Version 6.0 Developer

Edition for iSeries
WebSphere Application Server Express V5.1 iSeries
HIPO
features2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
5722-E51
6007
WebSphere Commerce for iSeries V5.6, Business

Edition, Professional Edition, and Express
5724-I38
5724-I40
5724-I36
---
Software Integration Assistant for iSeries
5722-IA1
WebSphere Application Server Version 5.1 for iSeries
5733-W51
WebSphere Application Server V 6.0 for i5/OS
5733-W60
WebSphere Application Server 6.1 for i5/OS
5733-W61
WebSphere Enablement
5733-WE2
Systems management products
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
Backup Recovery and Media Services for iSeries6

Network Feature
Advanced Feature
---
5722-BR1
1002
1506
1507
5050
5101
5102
IBM Secure Perspective
---
5733-PS1
6011
Product Code
IBM Director with VE Console for i5/OS V5.10
5733-DR1
Product Code
IBM Director V5.20 (replaces 5733-DR1 starting

December 2006)
5722-DR1
Product Code
VE Enterprise Workload Manager for i5/OS V2.1
New
5733-EWA
PATROL for iSeries Predict
---
5620-FIF
Product Code
---
Tivoli Storage Manager Enterprise Edition V5.1
---
5698-ISE
---
---
Tivoli Storage Manager V5.1
---
5698-ISM
---
---
Advanced Job Scheduler for iSeries6
---
5722-JS1
1007
Tivoli Management Agent
---
1TME-LCF
---
---
Managed System Services for iSeries6
---
5722-MG1
1030
Performance Tools for iSeries6,7

Manager Feature
Agent Feature
---
5722-PT1
Option 1
Option2
1008
1508
1509
Content Manager OnDemand for iSeries6

PDF Indexer Feature
Web Enablement Kit Feature
---
5722-RD1
Option 12
Option 11
1010
1510
1511
VE Resource Dependency Service V2.1
New
5733-RDS
---
5722-SM1
System Manager for
510
iSeries6
5050
5050
5101
5102
Product Code
1032
Application development products
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature2
CICS Transaction Server for iSeries6
---
5722-DFH
1025
WebSphere Application Server Version 6.0 Developer

Edition for iSeries
5724-H89
Portable Utilities
5733-SC1
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
S
M
WebSphere Development Studio (Toolset)
---
5722-WDS
1015
XML Toolkit for iSeries
5733-XT1
---
Office support and printing products
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
Advanced Function Printing Utilities for AS/4006
5722-AF1
1001
5050
5722-AP1
1014
5050
5648-B45
---
5722-DS1
1027
AS/4006
Advanced DBCS Printer Support for
AFP Font Collect ion for Workstation and OS/400

6
Business Graphics Utility for AS/400
5050
S
S
Facsimile Support for iSeries
5798-FAX
---
Advanced Function Printing Fonts for AS/4006
5769-FNT
---
Options 1-15
--1520-1534
Font Options
Advanced Function Printing DBCS Fonts for

AS/4006
Font Options
5769-FN1
--1535-1539
Domino Fax for iSeries
5733-FXD
---
Infoprint Fonts for Multiplatform
5648-E77
Infoprint Designer for iSeries
5733-ID1
6003
Infoprint Server for iSeries
---
5722-IP1
1006
Lotus Domino for iSeries Version 6.0
5733-LD7
---
Lotus Domino 6.5 for iSeries
5733--L65
---
QuickPlace for iSeries Version 2.0
5733-LQP
---
Content Manager for iSeries
5722-VI1
1034
Object Server
Option 1
---
Advanced Workflow
Option 4
---
HIPO feature2
Additional database products
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS
---
5639-MYS
5733-QU2
5050
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
511
Product
identifier
HIPO feature2
Host Access Client Package for iSeries, Version 5.0

Personal Communications V5.8
WebSphere Host On-Demand V9.0
5724-I21
---
Host Access Client Package for Multiplatforms,

Version 5.0
5724-I20
---
ValuPak for V5R3:

5722-SS1: 1-45 ipm feature
5722-XW1: iSeries Access
5722-QU1: Query 400
5722-ST1: DB2/400 Query Manager and SQL
Development Kit
5722-PT1: Performance Tools (Manager feature)
5722-VP1
---
DB2 Value Pack for i5/OS

5722-ST1: DB2 Query Manager and SQL
Development Kit
5722-SS1, Option 26: DB2 Symmetric
Multiprocessing (DB2 SMP)
5722-DE: DB2 UDB Extender
5733-XT1: XML Toolkit for IBM System i5 (XML
Toolkit)
5722-DVP
Operations Value Pack for i5/OS

5722-BR1: Backup Recovery and Media Services
(BRMS)
5722-BR1, Option 1: BRMS Network Feature
5722-SS1, Option 18: Media and Storage Extensions
5722-PT1: Performance Tools for i5/OS
5722-PT1, Option 1: Performance Tools Manager
5722-SVP
Additional and packaged products
Skip
ship2
Telephony products and packaging
Skip
ship2
System i IP Telephony Express offerings

Telephony Express 250 (#7382
Telephony Express HA500 (#0488
---
3Com IP Telephony Suite for IBM System i
512
Product
identifier
HIPO feature2
5639-3CM
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
12.7 i5/OS V5R3 software

The following tables show the V5R3 i5/OS-based software products that are most commonly
ordered. It is not a definitive list of all System i software products that are now available. See
12.10, Notes for Version 5 software tables on page 526, for Version 5 software group
information.
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature
(5372-IS5)2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
Operating System/4006,7
---
5722-SS1
1000
5050
---
5722-SS1
Option 18
1500
5103
---
5722-SS1
Option 23
1515
---
5722-SS1
Option 26
1517
DB2 MultiSystem
---
5722-SS1
Option 27
1518

1-45 IPM
1-100 IPM
Any speed
---
5722-SS1
Option 36
Option 37
Option 38
---
S
1501
1502
1503
5112
5113
5114
5722-SS1
Option 41
1505
5116
---
5722-SS1
Option 42
1545
5117
IBM Business Solutions
New
5722-BZ1
---
5722-DG1
iSeries Enterprise Edition Installation Edition
---
5733-ED1
Software Integration Assistant for iSeries
5722-IA1
---
5722-JC1
---
5722-JV1
---
M
---
---
1TME-LCF
---
---
---
5722-TC1
---
---
5722-XE1
---
iSeries Integration for Windows Server
---
5722-WSV
---
513
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature
(5372-IS5)2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
DB2 Warehouse Manager V8
5724-B08
---
5722-DE1
1004
5050
5722-DP4
1035
5050
DB2 QMF Distributed Edition V8.1 for Multiplatforms
New
5724-E86
DB2 Table Editor for iSeries Version 4.3
5697-G84
---
DB2 Web Query Tool for iSeries Version 1.3
5697-G85
---
---
5724-B78
---
DB2 Spatial Extender Version 8
New
5765-F40
DB2 UDB Workgroup Server Edition
New
5733-LD1
Query for iSeries6,
---
5722-QU1
1009
---
5722-SS1
Option 13
---
---
5722-SS1
Option 25
---
---
5722-SS1
Option 33
---
---
5722-XH2
iSeries Access for Linux
New
5722-XL1
New
5722-XP1
---
5722-XW1
1012 Client
User
5050
Networking products
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature2
(5372-IS5)
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
Cryptographic Access Provider 128-bit6
---
5722-AC3
1017
MQSeries for iSeries Version 5.36
5724-B41
---
---
5722-CE3
1019
---
5722-CM1
1003
5722-CR1
1020
iSeries Cryptographic Device Manager
New
5733-CY1
Portable Utilities for i5/OS
New
5733-SC1
---
---
5639-F25
---
---
NetView FTP
5798-TBG
iSeries Client Encryption
(128-bit)6

Cryptographic Support for
514
AS/4006
5050
S
-
M
S
5050
S
S
Y
---
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO
features2
Connect for iSeries V2 10
5733-CO2
---
WebSphere Application Server Version 5.1

Developer Edition for iSeries 10
5724-D18
WebSphere Application Server - Express V5.1 for

iSeries
5722-E51
Grid Toolbox V3 for OS/400
New
5733-GT1
WebSphere Commerce Payments for iSeries V5.5
---
5733-PYS
WebSphere Application Server - Express V5.0 for

iSeries and Express V5.1 for iSeries
5722-IWE
5722-E51
WebSphere Advanced Edition V4.0.16
5733-WA4
WebSphere Commerce for iSeries V5.5
5733-WC5
WebSphere Advanced Edition Single Server V4.0.1
5733-WS4
WebSphere Application Server Version 5.0 for iSeries P
5733-WS5
WebSphere Application Server Version 5.1 for iSeries P
5733-W51
WebSphere Application Server Version 6.0 for i5/OS
5733-W60
WebSphere Enablement
New
5733-WE1
Web Enablement for i5/OS
New
5733-WE2
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8

Network Feature
Advanced Feature
---
5722-BR1
1002
1506
1507
5050
Director with VE Console for i5/OS V5.10
New
IBM Director V5.20 (replaces 5733-DR1 starting

December 2006)
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
S
6007
6007
M
M
5102
5733-DR1
5722-DR1
Product Code
VE Enterprise Workload Manager for i5/OS V2.1
New
5733-EWA
---
5620-FIF
5698-ISE
---
---
---
5698-ISM
---
---
---
5722-JS1
1007
Managed System Services for iSeries6
---
5722-MG1
1030
---
5722-PT1
Option 1
Option2
1008
1508
1509

PDF Indexer Feature
---
5722-RD1
Option 12
Option 11
1010
1510
1511
VE Resource Dependency Service V2.1
New
5722-RDS
System Manager for iSeries6
---
5722-SM1
Performance Tools for

Manager Feature
Agent Feature
iSeries6,7
M
---
5050
S
S
5050
5101
5102
M
1032
515
Skip
ship2
WebSphere Commerce for iSeries V5.6, Business

Edition, Professional Edition, and Express
Product
identifier
HIPO feature2
5724-I38
5724-I40
5724-I36
---
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
---
5722-DB1
1021
---
5722-DFH
1025
Application Program Driver
5722-PD1
1031

iSeries6, 7
---
5722-ST1
1011
Visualage Generator Server for iSeries
5769-VG1
1033
---
5722-WDS
1015
---
5733-XT1
---
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
5722-AF1
1001
5050
Advanced DBCS Printer Support for AS/4006
---
5722-AP1
1014
5050
5648-B45
---
---
5722-DS1
1027
InfoPrint Fonts for Multiplatforms5
New
5648-E77
Content Manager for iSeries V8.2
---
5724-F73
5798-FAX
---
5769-FNT
---
Options 1-15
1520-1534
5769-FN1
---

Advanced Function Printing Fonts for
AS/4006
Font Options
AS/4006
Font Options
5733-FXD
---
5733-ID1
6003
---
5722-IP1
1006
5722-VI1
1034
Object Server
Option 1
---
Advanced Workflow
Option 4
---
516
5050
S
5050
S
S
1535-1539
S
S
5050
S
M
Product
identifier
HIPO feature2

5724-F68
---
Host Access Client Package for multiplatforms,

Version 4.0
5724-F69
---
Lotus Domino 7
5733-LD7
Lotus Enterprise Integrator for iSeries6
Skip
ship2
---
ValuPak for V5R3:

5722-SS1: OS/400
5722-XW1: Client Access Family/iSeries Access
5722-QU1: Query 400
5722-ST1: DB2/400 Query Manager and SQL
Development Kit
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
5769-LNP
---
5722-VP1
---
12.8 OS/400 V5R2 software

The following tables show the V5R2 OS/400-based software products that are most
commonly ordered. It is not a definitive list of all iSeries software products that are now
available. See 12.10, Notes for Version 5 software tables on page 526, for Version 5
software group information.
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature
(5372-IS5)2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
---
5722-SS1
1000
5050
---
5722-SS1
Option 18
1500
5103
---
5722-SS1
Option 23
1515
---
5722-SS1
Option 26
1517
DB2 MultiSystem
---
5722-SS1
Option 27
1518

1-45 IPM
1-100 IPM
Any speed
---
5722-SS1
Option 36
Option 37
Option 38
---

S
1501
1502
1503
5112
5113
5114
5722-SS1
Option 41
1505
5116
---
5722-SS1
Option 42
1545
5117
---
5722-DB1
1021
517
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature
(5372-IS5)2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
---
5722-DG1
---
---
5722-JC1
---
---
5722-JV1
---

iSeries6, 7
---
5722-ST1
1011
---
5722-WSV
---
5050
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
Warehouse Manager for iSeries
5724-B08
DCE Base Services
5769-DC1
1023
DCE DES Library Routines
5769-DC3
1024
---
5722-DE1
1004
5050
New
5722-DP4
1035
5050
DB2 QMF Distributed Edition V8.1 for Multiplatforms
New
5724-E86
QMF for Windows for iSeries Version 7.2
5697-G24
---
DB2 Table Editor for iSeries Version 4.3
5697-G84
---
DB2 Web Query Tool for iSeries Version 1.3
5697-G85
---
DB2 Intelligent Miner for Data V6.1
5733-IM3
---
iSeries ODBC Driver for Linux
---
5733-LO1
---
---
5686-OLP
---
Query for iSeries6,
---
5722-QU1
1009
Electronic Service Agent for iSeries
---
5798-RZG
---
---
5722-SS1
Option 13
---
---
5722-SS1
Option 25
---
---
5722-SS1
Option 33
---
---
5722-TC1
---
Client Access Express - Windows/iSeries Access for

Windows
---
5722-XE1
---
New
5722-XH2
New
5722-XP1
---
5722-XW1
iSeries Access
518
Family6,7
HIPO feature
(5372-IS5)2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
5050
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
S
1012 Client
User
5050
Networking products
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature2
(5372-IS5)
---
5722-AC3
1017
MQSeries for iSeries Version 5.26
5733-A38
---
Host On-Demand Version 6.0
5733-A59
---
iSeries Client Encryption (128-bit)6
---
5722-CE3
1019
---
5722-CM1
1003
---
5722-CR1
1020
DCE Base Services for AS/4006
5769-DC1
1023
DCE DES Library Routines for AS/4006
5769-DC3
1024
5639-F25
---
---
Personal Communications for Windows Version 5.5
5639-I70
5733-A59a
---
5722-XE1
---
New
5722-XH2
5722-XP1
-----
S
S
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
S
5050
a. Ordering ID
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO
features2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
WebSphere V4.0.1 for iSeries6
5722-AS4
---
Connect for iSeries V2 10
5733-CO2
---
WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries
5722-IWE
6007
5733-WA4
6000
5733-WS4
6005
5733-WS5
6006
WebSphere Application Server
519
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
Intelligent Communications Trace Analyzer for iSeries, Version

1.0
New
5733-AZ1

Network Feature
Advanced Feature
---
5722-BR1
HIPO
feature2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
1002
5050
5101
5102
1507
New
5620-FIF
---
---
5698-ISE
---
---
---
5698-ISM
---
---
---
5722-JS1
1007
---
1TME-LCF
---
---
---
5722-MG1
1030
---
5722-PT1
Option 1
Option2
1008
1508
1509

PDF Indexer Feature
---
5722-RD1
Option 12
Option 11
1010
1510
1511
---
5722-SM1
1032
Software Subscription for iSeries 1-year
New
5733-SU1
Software Subscription for iSeries 3-years
New
5733-SU3
Software Technical Support for iSeries 1-year, renewable
New
5733-SX1
---
Software Technical Support for iSeries 3-years, renewable
New
5733-SX3
---
Skip
ship2
Advanced Job Scheduler for
iSeries6

Managed System Services for
Performance Tools for
Manager Feature
Agent Feature
iSeries6
iSeries6,7
WebSphere Commerce Product V5.5
5050
5050
5101
5102
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Product
identifier
HIPO
feature2
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
5724-A18
---
Screen Customizer Version 2.0.60
5648-D76
---
---
5722-DFH
1025
5799-GPC
6004
ILC C Compiler
5733-LD6
---
5769-LNT
---
QuickPlace for iSeries Version 2.0
5733-LQP
---
5722-PD1
1031
5769-VG1
1033
---
5722-WDS
1015
Application Development ToolSet6
---
Option 21
Application Development Manager
---
Option 22
1543
Application Dictionary Services
---
Option 23
1544
520
5050
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
---
Options 31-35
---
Options 41-45
ILE C++ for AS/400
---
Options
52, 54
ILE C for AS/4006
---
Options
51, 53
5733-XT1
---
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO
feature2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
---
5722-AF1
1001
5050
AFP PrintSuite for AS/4006

APU Advanced Print Utility
PPFA Page Printer Formatting Aid
AF3 SAP R3 AFP Print
5798-AF3
Option 1
1514
5101
---
5722-AP1
1014
5050
5648-B45
---
ILE RPG for iSeries6

ILE COBOL for
iSeries6
HIPO
feature2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
Dictionaries and Linguistic Tools for iSeries6
5769-DL1
1026
---
5722-DS1
1027
---
5798-FAX
---
5769-FNT
---
Options 1-15
--1520-1534
5769-FN1
--1535-1539
5733-FXD
---
S
S
Font Options
Advanced Function Printing DBCS Fonts for AS/4006
Font Options

5733-ID1
6003
---
5722-IP1
1006
5722-VI1
1034
Object Server
Option 1
---
Advanced Workflow
Option 4
---
5050
S
M
521
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO
feature2

Screen Customizer Version 1.0.70
5733-A78
---
Host Access Client Package for multiplatforms, Version 3.0

Screen Customizer V2.0.70
5648-E81
---
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
---
5769-LNP
---
Lotus Domino Enterprise Server for iSeries
5769-LNT
6001
CISC to RISC Upgrade Kit
5798-TBU
---
ValuPak for V5R2:

5722-SS1: OS/400
5722-QU1: Query 400
5722-ST1: DB2/400 Query Manager and SQL Development Kit
5722-VP1
---
12.9 OS/400 V5R1 software

The following tables show the V5R1 OS/400-based software products that are most
commonly installed. It is not a definitive list of all possible IBM software products for the
iSeries or AS/400e. See 12.10, Notes for Version 5 software tables on page 526, for
Version 5 software group information.
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature
(5372-IS5)2
V5R1
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
---
5722-SS1
1000
5050
---
5722-SS1
Option 18
1500
5103
---
5722-SS1
Option 23
1515
---
5722-SS1
Option 26
1517
DB2 MultiSystem
---
5722-SS1
Option 27
1518

1-45 IPM
1-100 IPM
Any speed
---
5722-SS1
Option 36
Option 37
Option 38
----1503
---
5722-DB1
1521
---
5722-DG1
---
---
5722-JC1
---
522
5112
5113
5114
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature
(5372-IS5)2
V5R1
---
5722-JV1
---

iSeries6, 7
---
5722-ST1
1011
---
5722-WSV
---
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO feature
(5372-IS5)2
DCE Base Services
5769-DC1
1023
DCE DES Library Routines
5769-DC3
1024
---
5722-DE1
---
5050
5769-DP3
1005
5050
QMF for Windows for iSeries
V5R1
5697-G24
---
DB2 Table Editor for iSeries
V5R1
5697-G84
---
DB2 Web Query Tool
V5R1
5697-G85
---
DB2 Intelligent Miner for Data V6.1
V5R1
5733-IM3
---
iSeries ODBC Driver for Linux
---
5733-LO1
---
---
5686-OLP
---
Query for iSeries6,
---
5722-QU1
1009
5798-RZG
---

DB2 DataPropagator for iSeries Version
7.16
(V5R1)
Electronic Service Agent for iSeries
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
S
5050
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
5050
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
---
5722-SS1
Option 13
---
---
5722-SS1
Option 25
---
---
5722-SS1
Option 33
1519
---
5722-TC1
---
Client Access Express - Windows/iSeries Access for

Windows
---
5722-XE1
---
---
5722-XW1
1012
5050
523
Networking products
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO
feature2
(5372-IS5)
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Cryptographic Access Provider 56-bit6 (V5R1)
---
5722-AC2
1016
---
5722-AC3
1017
MQSeries for iSeries (V5.2)6
5733-A38
---
iSeries Client Encryption (56-bit)6 (V5R1)
---
5722-CE2
1018
iSeries Client Encryption (128-bit)6
---
5722-CE3
1019
---
5722-CM1
1003
---
5722-CR1
1520
DCE Base Services for AS/4006
5769-DC1
1023
DCE DES Library Routines for AS/4006
5769-DC3
1024
Communications Server for Windows NT
V5R1
5639-F25
---
MQSeries Integrator for iSeries (V5R1)
---
5697-F49
---
---
5722-XE1
---
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
5050
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO
features2
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
WebSphere Standard Edition6 (V5R1)
5733-AS3
---
Connect for iSeries (V5R1)
5733-B2B
---
WebSphere Advanced Edition V3.56
5733-WA3
6002
---
5733-WA4
6000
---
5733-WS4
---
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO
feature2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8

Network Feature
Advanced Feature
-----
5722-BR1
1002
1506
1507
5050
5101
5102
---
5722-JS1
1007
5050
1TME-LCF
---
--S

6
Managed System Services for iSeries
---
5722-MG1
1030
Performance Tools for iSeries6,7

Manager Feature
Agent Feature
---
5722-PT1
Option 1
Option2
1008
1508
1509

PDF Indexer Feature
---
5722-RD1
Option 12
Option 11
1010
1510
1511
---
5722-SM1
1032
524
5050
5101
5102
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO
feature2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
---
5722-DFH
1025
Lotus Domino for iSeries
5733-LD6
---
Lotus Domino for iSeries
5769-LNT
---
QuickPlace for iSeries
5733-LQP
---
5722-PD1
1031
WebSphere Payment Manager for iSeries (V5R1)
5733-PY2
---
5769-VG1
1033
WebSphere Commerce Suite, Pro Edition for AS/400,

Version 4.1
5798-WC4
WebSphere Commerce Suite, Pro Edition for iSeries,

Version 5.1
5798-WC5
---
---
5722-WDS
1015
ILE COBOL for iSeries
---
Options
41-45
ILE RPG for iSeries6
---
Options
31-35
ILE C++ for AS/400
---
Options
52, 54
ILE C for AS/4006
---
Options
51, 53
Application Development ToolSet6
---
Option 21
Application Development Manager
---
Option 22
1543
Application Dictionary Services
---
Option 23
1544
5733-XT1
---
5050
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO
feature2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
---
5722-AF1
1001
5050
AFP PrintSuite for AS/400

APU Advanced Print Utility
PPFA Page Printer Formatting Aid
AF3 SAP R3 AFP Print
5798-AF3
Option 1
---
5101
---
5722-AP1
1014
5050
5648-B45
---

6
Dictionaries and Linguistic Tools for iSeries
5769-DL1
1026
---
5722-DS1
1027
---
5798-FAX
5769-FNT

6
525
Skip
ship2
Font Options
Font Options
AS/4006
Product
identifier
HIPO
feature2
Options 1-15
1520-1534
5769-FN1
1535-1539
5733-FXD
---
---
5733-ID1
6003
---
5722-IP1
1006
5722-VI1
1034
Object Server
Option 1
---
Advanced Workflow
Option 4
---
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
S
5050
S
S
Skip
ship2
Product
identifier
HIPO
feature2
Keyed
Stamped
Media9
Software
subscription or
maintenance8
5769-LNP
---
Lotus Domino Enterprise Server for iSeries
5769-LNT
6001
CISC to RISC Upgrade Kit
5798-TBU
---
ValuPak for V5R1:

5722-SS1: OS/400
5722-QU1: Query 400
5722-ST1: DB2/400 Query Manager and SQL Development Kit
5722-VP1
---
12.10 Notes for Version 5 software tables

Note 1
V5 is supported on the following AS/400e RISC models only. See the overview table in the model chapters for the minimum
OS/400 release to support each model.
9401-150 (V5R1 does not support 5649-nnn products. 5722-nnn programs in group P05 support the 9401-150.)
9402/4-4xx (V5R1 only)
9404/6-5xx (V5R1 only)
9402/4/6-620, 630, 640, S20, S30, S40
9406-170
9402/4/6-720, 730, 740
9406-250
9402/4/6-270
9402/4/6-800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890
9406-SB2/SB3
9405-520 (V5R3 or later)
9406-520, 550, 570, 595 (V5R3 or later)
9407 515, 9406 525 (V5R4 or later)
V5 is not supported on any AS/400 CISC models.
526
Note 2
Products marked with a check mark (9) in the Skip ship column are unchanged from a previous version or release and are
referred to as being skip shipped. These products retain their original product identifiers.
The HIPO feature column provides the feature codes that are included in the HIPO (5732-IS5) when a specific product or
feature is ordered to be preloaded in the factory. If you order a software upgrade, or if the initial order does not include the
#5000 software preload code, the order does not include the HIPO (5732-IS5).
With the introduction of Keyed Stamped Media in V4R4, all products the client ordered are no longer stacked on a single set
of CDs. The client receives a grouping of CDs. With V5R2, this includes:
Licensed Internal Code (I_Base_01)
OS/400 Base Operating System CD (B29xx_01)
OS/400 No Charge Options (B29xx_02 to B29xx_06)
No charge License Programs (B29xx_07 to B29xx_09)
Set of Keyed Stamped Media CDs (L29xx_01 to L29xx_02)
Individual CD for each product ordered that is not part of Keyed Stamped Media (F29xx_01 and higher)
Cumulative PTF CDs (Cydddvrm_01)
Secondary Languages if ordered (N29xx_01)
iSeries Information Center (SK3T-4091)
Note 4
Alternate IPL device feature codes

The following feature codes are hardware features. They are used to specify which storage device is to be used as an alternate
IPL device. They are not required when ordering Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890.
#5502 840 MB Mini -inch Cartridge Tape Unit (not 250, 270, 520, 550, 570, 595, 720, 730, 740, 800, 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, 870, 890)
#5503 9347 Tape Unit (not 250, 270, 520, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890)
#5504 3490 E01/E11 Tape Units*
#5505 2440 Tape Unit (not 250, 270, 520, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890)
#5506 4 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Unit*
#5507 9348 Tape Unit*
#5508 3422 Tape Subsystem (not 250, 270, 520, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890)
#5509 3430 Tape Subsystem (not 250, 270, 520, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890)
#5511 3480 Tape Subsystem*
#5512 3490 C10/C11/C22 Tape Unit*
#5514 7208 8 mm Tape Drive and Internal 8 mm Tape Unit*
#5516 1.2 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Unit
#5517 2.5 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Unit*
#5518 13 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Unit
#5519 3590 Tape System*
#5521*
#5531 16 GB or 30 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Unit*
#5536 25 GB or 50 GB -inch Cartridge Tape Unit*
#5537 358x Ultrium*
#5538 DVD-RAM*
#5599 No Save/Restore Device*
Refer to Chapter 8, Storage and media for IBM System i family models on page 359, and the internal tape unit sections of
each processors chapter to see which tapes are supported for that model.
*: Those features marked with an asterisk (*) #5504, #5506, #5507, #5511, #5512, #5513, #5514, #5515, #5517, #5519,
#5521, #5531, #5536, #5537, #5538, and #5599 were withdrawn from marketing as of 1 December 2005.
Note 5
Maximum number of chargeable users by product
5722-DFH
5722-RD1
5769-VI1
CICS for iSeries

OnDemand for iSeries - concurrent user
P05
450
---
P10
450
---
Maximum number of users

P20
P30
P40
P50
450
450
450
450
No maximum limit
-No maximum limit
--
P60
450
---
The number of individual user licenses that, when priced, equate the tier (based on processor) pricing and are the maximum
that can be used in a conversion for user based to tier (processor) pricing in that tier:
5722-XW1
iSeries Access Family
10
40
100
150
200
250
300
527
Note 6
These products are licensed using the International Program License Agreement (IPLA). For Version 4 level software, the
remaining V4 licensed programs are licensed under the International Customer Agreement (ICA) or IBM Agreement for
Programs (IAP) terms.
Three documents, Proof of Entitlement (POE), License Information Document (LID), and International Program License
Agreement, are provided with IPLA software as proof of a valid license. Some IPLA software can be sold to another party. See
the important note listed below.
You must notify the purchaser of the programs terms and provide the POE, LID, and IPLA documents to the purchaser. IBM
licenses the purchaser when that party accepts the program's license terms by initial use of the program. The sellers license
is terminated at this time.
Important:
For Version 4 and OS/400 V5R1 AND V5R2 products purchased prior to 11 June 2004, the capability to transfer those
products outside the enterprise will continue to require a hardcopy POE. For V5R1 and V5R2 software releases
purchased after 11 June 2004, an ePoE is available. When a product is upgraded, destroy the original IBM-printed
POE.
Starting with i5/OS V5R3, these programs are not transferable to another party outside of the enterprise and its
subsidiaries (where a subsidiary is more than 50% owned by the enterprise).
When ordering upgrades to software licensed under the IPLA, such as IBM i (i5/OS, OS/400), a copy of the POE should be
provided by the client to validate the license to the software.
Note 7
The following products are also offered in software packages:

5722-VP1 ValuPak for OS/400 (not available on OS/400 V4R5) includes:
5722-SS1
Operating System/400
5722-PSF
1-45 ipm Option 36 of OS/400
Provides this number of users
5722-XW1
iSeries Access Family :
P05/10 P10/20 P20/50 P30/70 P40/125 P50/150
5722-QU1
Query/400
P60/175
5722-ST1
DB2/400 Query Manager and SQL Development Kit
57xx-PT1
Performance Tools (Option 1 Manager feature)
528
Note 8
New versions and updates to these products are covered by one of the following three methods:
iSeries Software Maintenance (SWMA)
Passport Advantage (PA) Software Maintenance
Product Code = Separate Maintenance by individual product codes
SWMA indicates that the product is on the Eligible Products List for Software Subscription. Clients must purchase the Software
Maintenance Subscription when they move to Version 4 or later to upgrade to new versions or releases. Software Subscription
is available at prepaid options of one year or three years.
For some products, Software Maintenance is covered by Passport Advantage. To register products via the Passport Advantage
Web page and for more information, go to the following Web address:
http://www-142.ibm.com/software/sw-lotus/services/cwepassport.nsf/wdocs/softwaremaintenance
The third method is to purchase an individual product code that covers an individual product. For example, clients who
purchase VE Enterprise Workload Manager for i5/OS V2.1 (5733-EWA) must also purchase 5662-EWA to have a 3-year
registration for the product.
The price of Software Subscription is the same regardless of whether the software has been licensed to a system. Most iSeries
software delivered by HIPO is covered by Software Subscription. Clients who do not have a valid Software Maintenance are
not entitled to new versions or releases and must either re-license the software or purchase the After License For iSeries
license to join if they want to upgrade to a new version or release. You can find a current list of program products covered by
Software Subscription on the Web at:
http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/sftsol/subscript2.htm
Software Subscription is ordered as a unique product/model combination depending upon the method of payment:
5733-SW1 Software Subscription for AS/400 1-Year Prepay. Withdrawn from marketing.
5733-SW3 Software Subscription for AS/400 3-Year Prepay. Withdrawn from marketing.
5733-CA1 After License for iSeries
For the prepayment options and the Subscription After License, specify the corresponding processor-based feature for
5733-SWx.
M indicates Software Maintenance, which differs from Software Subscription. It requires maintenance to be purchased
separately based on an individual product. Some products that were covered by Software Subscription are now covered by
Software Maintenance. Clients who have these products covered under an existing Software Subscription are still eligible for
upgrades under Software Subscription, but need to carefully plan their requirements when that Software Subscription expires.
You can find a list of program products covered by Software Maintenance and their Maintenance product codes on the Web
address listed previous in this note.
Note 9
A number (representing the Installation ID of the product) in the Keyed Stamped Media column indicates that the product is
one of those provided in V5R1 on iSeries Keyed Stamped Media and shipped with OS/400. This number indicates on demand
delivery of these products and features and allows a 70-day evaluation period for any of the provided products or features. To
use the software distributed on the Keyed Stamped Media after the 70-day evaluation period, order a Software License Key.
New Software License Keys are also required when the version, release, or modification level of the software changes. If the
software is transferred to a different system, a new software key is required. Some software is keyed based on the Software
group, and a new software key must be obtained when the Software group changes.
When a Software License Key is ordered, retain the Software License Key Sheet that IBM provides.
If a Keyed Stamped Media product or feature is to be upgraded, the current Software License Key Sheet for the product must
be provided as proof of license.
Note 10
DB2 OLAP Server for iSeries V8.1 (5724-B78) was withdrawn from IBM marketing as of 09 November 2005. Connect for
iSeries V2 (5733-CO2) was withdrawn from IBM marketing as of 13 December 2005. WebSphere Application Server Version
5.1 Developer Edition for iSeries (5724-D18) was withdrawn from IBM marketing as of 14 September 2005. The replacement
product is WebSphere Application Server Version 6.0 Developer Edition for iSeries (5724-H89).
12.11 i5/OS and OS/400 software pricing groups

OS/400 software is priced by software groups. In this section, we show the software group for
each iSeries and AS/400e processor for Version 5 and Version 4. Use the Work with License
529
Information (WRKLICINF) command to display the software group of the installed AS/400e or
iSeries server.
For information about software groups for earlier systems, refer to IBM eServer AS/400e
RISC System Builder Version 3 Release 6 - Version 5 Release 2, REDP-0342.
12.11.1 i5/OS and OS/400 Version 5 software groups

In the following table, we show the software group for each IBM System i processor supported
by i5/OS Version 5 Release 4 or Release 3, or OS/400 Version 5 Release 2 or Release 1.
Hardware
models
Processor feature
Interactive feature or Server/Edition

feature
Version 5 group
515
#8327 (1 proc) /
#8330 (2 proc)
#4901(1) / #6010, #6011, #6018;

#4903 (2) / #6021, #6028
P05
520
#8325
#0970 / #7140, #7141, #7142
P05
#8325
#0975 / #7350
P05
#8327
#0906 / #7366, #7373, #7374, #7734,

#7735, #7784
P10
#8327
#0970 / #7143, #7144, #7148, #7152
P10
#8327
#0975 / #7352
P10
#8330
#0906 / #7375, #7736, #7785
P20
#8950
#0900 / #7450, #7390, #7391, #7393
P05
#8951
#0901 / #7392, #7394, #7451
P10
#8952
#0902 / #7458, #7459, #7541, #7552
P10
#8953
#0903 / #7452, #7453, #7553
P10
#8954
#0904 / #7454, #7455, #7553
P20
#8955
#0905 / #7456, #7457, #7455
P20
#8972
#8972 / #7395, #7396
P10
525
#8330(1/2)
#0909 / #7791, #7792, #7793,

#6910 CBU, #6913, #6914
P10
550
#8958
#0915 / #7462, #7463, #7530, #7531,

#7532, #7533, #7534, #7558
P20
#8312
#0910 / #7154, #7155, #7551, #7629,

#7630, #7631, #7632, #7640, #7641
P20
#8961
#0919 / #7488, #7489
P30
#8961
#0920 / #7469, #7470
P30
#8971
#0921 / #7494, #7495, #7560
P30
#8971
#0922 / #7471, #7472, #7561
P40
#8971
#0924 / #7473, #7474, #7562
P40
#8971
#0926 / #7475, #7476, #7563
P40
#8971
#0928 / #7570
P30
#8971
#0930 / #7490, #7491, #7559
P30
#8338
#0934 / #7747, #7757, #7763
P30
#8338
#0935 / #7748, #7758, #7764
P40
#8338
#0936 / #7749, #7759, #7765
P40
#8338
#0937 / #7760
P30
570
530
Hardware
models
Processor feature

feature
Version 5 group
595
#8981
#0946 / #7496, #7497
P50
#8981
#0947 / #7498, #7499
P50
#8981
#0952/ #7984, #7985
P60
#8966
#0940 / #7480, #7481, #7580
P50 (1.9 GHz)
#8966
#0941/ #7482, #7483, #7581
P50 (1.9 GHz)
#8966
#0943 / #7486, #7487, #7583
P60 (1.9 GHz)
#8966
#0944 / #7590
P50 (1.9 GHz)
8973
#0940 / #7900, #7901, #7580
P50 (1.9 GHz)
8973
#0942 / #7903, #7904, #7581
P50 (1.9 GHz)
8973
#0943 / #7906, #7907, #7583
P60 (1.9 GHz)
8973
#0957 / #7910 (CBU Std), #7911 (CBU)
P50 (1.9 GHz)
8973
#0944 / #7912 (CBU Std), #7909 (CBU)
P50 (1.9 GHz)
8968
#0953 / #5870, #5890
P50 (2.3 GHz)
8968
#0954 / #5871, #5891
P50 (2.3 GHz)
8968
#0955 / #5872, #5892
P60 (2.3 GHz)
8968
#0958 / #5875 (CBU Std), #5895(CBU)
P50 (2.3 GHz)
8968
#0959 / #5876 (CBU Std), #5896 (CBU)
P50 (2.3 GHz)
#1500
P10
#1501, #1502
P20
720
#2061
#2062
#2063
#2064
730
#2065
#2066
#2067
#2068
740
#2069
#2070
800
810
#1500
P10
#1501, #1502, #1503
P20
#1500
P20
#1502, #1503, #1504
P30
#1500
P20
#1502, #1503, #1504, #1505
P30
#1506
P20
#1507, #1508, #1509
P30
#1506
P20
#1507, #1508, #1509, #1510
P30
#1506
P30
#1508, #1509, #1510, #1511
P40
#1506
P30
#1508, #1509, #1510, #1511
P40
#1510, #1511, #1512
P50
#1514
P40
#1510, #1511, #1512, #1513
P50
#1514
P40
#2463
#7400
P05
#2464
#7408
P10
#2465
#7404, #7406
P10
#2466
#7407, #7408, #7409
P10
#2467
#7410, #7411, #7412
P10
#2469
#7428, #7429, #7430
P20
531
Hardware
models
Processor feature

feature
Version 5 group
820
#0150, #0151
P20
#0152
P30
#2395
#1521
P10
#1522, #1523, #1524
P20
#1522, #1523, #1524, #1525
P30
#2396
#2397
#2398
P20
P30
#1521
P30
#1522, #1523, #1524, #1525,

#1526, #1527
P40
#2425
P05
#2426, #2427
P10
#2435
#2436
#2437
#2438
#1521
P10
#1522, #1523, #1524
P20
#1521
P20
#1522, #1523, #1524
P30
#1521
P20
#1522, #1523, #1524, #1526, #1527
P30
#1521
P30
#1522, #1523, #1524, #1525,

#1526, #1527
P40
#2456
P05
#2457, #2458
P10
825
#2473, #2495
#7416, #7418, #7434, #7439
P30
830
#0153
P30
#2349
#2400
#2402
#2403
532
#1521
#1522, #1523, #1524, #1525, #1526
#1531
P30
#1532, #1533, #1534, #1535,

#1536, #1537
P40
#1531
P20
#1532, #1533, #1534, #1535
P30
#1531
P30
#1532, #1533, #1534, #1535, #1536
P40
#1531
P40
#1532, #1533, #1534, #1535,

#1536, #1537
P50
Hardware
models
Processor feature

feature
Version 5 group
840
#0158, #0159
P40
#2352
#2353
#2354
#2416
#2417
#2418
#2419
890
#1540
P40
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544,

#1545, #1546, #1547
P50
#1540
P40
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544,

#1545, #1546, #1547, #1548
P50
#1540
P40
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544,

#1545, #1546
P40
#1540
P40
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544,

#1545, #1546
P50
#1540
P40
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544,

#1545, #1546
P50
#1540
P40
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544, #1545,

#1546, #1547
P50
#1540
P40
#2420
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544, #1545,

#1546, #1547
P50
#1540
P40
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544, #1545,

#1546, #1547, #1548
P50
#2486
#7419, #7421, #7436
P40
#2489
#7431, #7433, #7435
P40
#2496
#7440
P40
#0197, #0198
P50
#2487
#1576
P50
#2487
#1577, #1578, #1579, #1581, #1583,

#1585, #1587, #1588
P60
#2488
9411-100
P40
P50
#2420
#2461
870
#1540
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544,
#1545, #1546
#1576
P50
#1577, #1578, #1579, #1581, #1583,

#1585, #1587, #1588, #1591
P60
#2497, #2498, #2499
#7422, #7424 #7425, #7427, #7437,

#7438, #7441
P50
9117-570
P30
9119-595
P30
533
12.11.2 OS/400 Version 4 software groups

The following table shows the software group for each iSeries and AS/400e processor
supported by OS/400 Version 4.
Hardware
model
Processor feature
Interactive feature
Version 4 group
250
#2295, #2296
PPS
270
#2248
#1517
P05
#2250
#1516, #1518
P10
#2252
#1516, #1519
P10
#2253
#1516, #1520
P20
#2422, #2423
P05
#2424
P10
#2431
#1518
P10
#2432
#1516, #1519
P10
#2434
#1516, #1520
P20
#2452, #2454
P05
#2061
#1500
P10
#1501, #1502
P20
#1500
P10
#1501, #1502, #1503
P20
720
#2062
#2063
#2064
730
#2065
#2066
#2067
740
P30
#1500
P20
#1502, #1503, #1504, #1505
P30
#1506
P20
#1507, #1508, #1509
P30
#1506
P20
#1507, #1508, #1509, #1510
P30
P30
#1508, #1509, #1510, #1511
P40
#2068
#1506
P30
#1508, #1509, #1510, #1511
P40
#2069
#1510, #1511, #1512
P50
#2395
#2396
#2397
#1514
P40
#1510, #1511, #1512, #1513
P50
#1514
P40
#1521
P10
#1522, #1523, #1524
P20
#1521
P20
#1522, #1523, #1524, #1525
P30
#1521
P20
#1522, #1523, #1524, #1525, #1526
P30
#1521
P30
#1522, #1523, #1524, #1525,

#1526, #1527
P30 or P40
#2425
---
P05
#2426, #2427
---
P10
#2398
534
P20
#1502, #1503, #1504
#1506
#2070
820
#1500
Hardware
model
Processor feature
Interactive feature
Version 4 group
830
#2400
#1531
P20
#1532, #1533, #1534, #1535,

#1536, #1537
P30
#1531
P30
#1532, #1533, #1534, #1535, #1536
P40
#2402
#2403
840
#2416
#2417
#2418
#2419
#2420
#1531
P40
#1532, #1533, #1534, #1535,

#1536, #1537
P50
#1540
P40
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544, #1545,

#1546, #1547
P50
#1540
P40
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544, #1545,

#1546, #1547
P50
#1540
P40
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544, #1545,

#1546, #1547
P50
#1540
P40
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544, #1545,

#1546, #1547
P50
#1540
P40
#1541, #1542, #1543, #1544, #1545,

#1546, #1547
P50
SB2
#2315
P30
SB3
#2316, #2318
P40
12.12 Release-to-release software product mapping

The following table shows a list of System i software products, with the product number
associated with each i5/OS and OS/400 release level. Use this information to understand how
a particular software product is offered for a given i5/OS or OS/400 installed release.
The products are listed in sequential order by the software products model number in the
right-most column (the latest release of i5/OS). For example, 5722-SS1 is listed prior to
5722-TC1 and after 5733-CO2. V5R2 is the column used as a sorting reference.
An asterisk (*) in the column indicates the product is skip-shipped for that release. The
dashes (---) indicate that the product was not offered for that release. The letters N/A indicate
that the product is not supported for that release.
Refer to IBM eServer AS/400e RISC System Builder Version 3 Release 6 - Version 5 Release
2, REDP-0342, for a software product map for releases prior to OS/400 V4R2.
For a list of withdrawn software products and their recommended replacements, as well as
further information, refer to the iSeries Planning Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/support/planning
535
V4R2
V4R3
V4R4
V4R5
V5R1
V5R2
V5R3
V5R4
---
---
---
---
---
5724-A18
N/A
5769-MQ2
5733-A38
P/N
P/N
---
---
---
5733-A47
N/A
N/A
N/A
---
---
5648-DO1
5648-DO1
5733-A61
5733-A78
5724-F68
5724-I20
---
---
5748-C54
5733-A61
5733-A78
5724-F68
5724-I20
---
5769-AC2
5722-AC2
N/A
N/A
N/A
---
5769-AC1
5722-AC3
5722-AC3
5722-AC3
N/A
5769-AF1
5722-AF1
5722-AF1
5798-AF3
N/A
N/A
5769-AP1
5722-AP1
5722-AP1
5722-AP1
---
---
5769-AS1
5733-AS3
5724-D06
5722-WE2
5722-WE2
---
---
---
---
---
5733-AZ1
5769-BR1
5722-BR1
5722-BR1
5722-BR1
5722-BR1
---
---
---
---
---
5724-B08
5724-E66
N/A
---
---
---
---
---
5648-B45
*
N/A
---
---
---
5733-B2B
5733-CO2
5716-CP2*
5769-CP4
5648-C69
N/A
N/A
N/A
---
---
5769-CE1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
---
---
5769-CE2
5722-CE2
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
---
---
5769-CE3
5722-CE3
5722-CE3
5722-CE3
5769-CF1
5769-CF1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5769-CM1
5769-CM1
5722-CM1
5722-CM1
5722-CM1
5722-CM1
5769-CP4
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5769-CR1
5769-CR1
5722-CR1
5722-CR1
---
---
---
---
---
---
5733-CY1
5733-CY1
5769-DB1
5769-DB1
5722-DB1
5722-DB1
5722-DB1
---
---
5769-DC1
N/A
N/A
---
5769-DC3
N/A
N/A
---
---
---
---
---
---
5733-DIR
5733-DIR
---
---
---
---
---
---
5733-DR1
5733-DR1
---
---
---
---
5722-DE1
5722-DE1
5722-DE1
5722-DE1
5769-DFH
5769-DFH
5769-DFH
5722-DFH
5722-DFH
5722-DFH
5722-DFH
5716-DCT*
5769-DL1
N/A
N/A
5769-DP1
5769-DP2
5769-DP3
5722-DP4
5769-DS1
5722-DS1
5722-DS1
5722-DS1
5722-DS1
---
---
---
---
---
----
5648-E77
5648-E77
---
---
---
5648-E09
5733-A57
5733-E81
5724-F69
5724-I20
---
---
---
---
---
---
5733-EWA
5733-EWA
---
---
---
---
---
---
5733-EWM
5733-EWM
5798-TBY
5798-FAX
5798-FAX
---
---
---
---
---
5620-FIF
5769-FN1
5769-FNT
5769-FW1
5769-FW1
5769-FW1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
---
---
5733-FXD
5639-F25
5639-F25
---
---
---
---
5697-G14
N/A
N/A
N/A
---
---
---
---
5697-G23
N/A
N/A
N/A
---
---
---
---
5697-G24
5724-E86
5724-E86
536
V4R2
V4R3
V4R4
V4R5
V5R1
V5R2
V5R3
---
---
---
---
5697-G84
V5R4
N/A
---
---
---
---
---
5697-G85
N/A
---
---
---
---
5733-ID1
---
---
---
---
5733-IM3
N/A
N/A
---
---
---
---
---
5698-ISE
N/A
---
---
---
---
5722-IP1
5722-IP1
5722-IP1
---
---
---
---
---
5722-IWE
N/A
N/A
---
---
5798-JC1
N/A
N/A
5769-JS1
5769-JS1
5769-JS1
5722-JS1
5722-JS1
5722-JS1
5722-JS1
---
---
---
---
---
1TME-LCF
---
---
---
---
---
5733-LD6
N/A
N/A
P/N
P/N
---
---
---
---
---
5733-LE1
---
---
5769-LNP
P/N
N/A
---
---
5769-LNT
P/N
P/N
P/N
5769-MG1
5722-MG1
5722-MG1
5722-MG1
5722-MG1
5769-PD1
5722-PD1
N/A: For
assistance,
see
http://www.
softlanding.
com
5769-PT1
5769-PT1
5769-PT1
5722-PT1
5722-PT1
5722-PT1
5722-PT1
---
---
5733-PY1
5733-PY2
5733-PY3
N/A
N/A
5716-QU1
5769-QU1
5769-QU1
5769-QU1
5722-QU1
5722-QU1
5722-QU1
5722-QU1
5769-RD1
5769-RD1
5769-RD1
5722-RD1
5722-RD1
P/N
P/N
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5733-RDS
5733-RDS
5716-SM1
5769-SM1
5769-SM1
5769-SM1
5722-SM1
5722-SM1
5722-SM1
5722-SM1
5716-PM1
---
5769-PM1
5722-SS1
5769-SS1
5722-SS1
5722-SS1
5722-SS1
5722-SS1
5716-ST1
5769-ST1
5769-ST1
5769-ST1
5722-ST1
5722-ST1
5722-ST1
5722-ST1
5716-SV2
5769-SV3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
---
5798-TBG
5716-VG1
5769-VG1
N/A
---
---
5733-A18
5769-VI1
5722-VI1
5722-VI1
P/N
P/N
---
5733-WA2
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
---
5733-WA3
5733-WA4
N/A
---
---
5798-WC4
N/A
N/A
N/A
---
---
5798-NC3
5798-WC5
N/A
N/A
N/A
5769-PW1
5769-PW1
5769-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5769-CL3
5769-CL3
5769-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5769-CX2
5769-CX2
5769-CX2
5769-WDS
5716-CX4*
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
Windows and
CX5
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5769-CB1
5769-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5716-CX5*
5769-CX5
5769-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5769-PW1
5769-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5769-RG1
5769-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
5722-WDS
---
---
---
---
---
5733-WS5
N/A
---
---
---
---
---
5733-XT1
5733-XT1
5733-XT1
5769-XW1
5769-XW1
5769-XW1
5769-XW1
5722-XW1
5722-XW1
5722-XW1
5722-XW1
537
538
13
Chapter 13.
HSL, 12X, SPCN, line cord, and

communication cables for the
System i family of models
In this chapter, we provide feature code descriptions for the high-speed link (HSL), 12X,
System Power Connection Network (SPCN), dual line cords, and communication cables that
are used with the System i5, eServer i5, and iSeries servers.
539
13.1 HSL cables

Use the following tables as a reference for the HSL, 12X, and SPCN cables that are
supported on the System i5, eServer i5, and iSeries servers. For more information, refer to
the IBM System Hardware Information Center at:
Refer to the following publications for an explanation of HSL configuration rules and
placement considerations:
IBM eServer iSeries Migration: A Guide to Upgrades and Migrations to POWER
Technology, SG24-7200
This book also contains configuration rules for eServer i5 Models and towers.
SG24-6055
This book also contains configuration rules for iSeries models and towers.
IBM eServer i5 and iSeries System Handbook i5/OS Version 5 Release 3 October 2005 Draft, GA19-5486
Cable feature
520
525
550
570
595
570
(POWER6)
Xa
Xa
#1460 3m Copper HSL Cable
800
810
825
870/890
Copper
5a
#1482 3.5m HSL-2 Cable
#1485 15m HSL-2 Cablec
#1470 6m Optical HSL Cable
Xb
Fiber optic
12X
540
Cable feature
520
525
550
570
595
570
(POWER6)
800
810
825
870/890
SPCN e
#0369 100m Optical SPCN Cable f
#1463 2m SPCN Cable
#1464 6m SPCN Cable
#1468 250m Optical SPCN Cable g

Xh
Xh
Xh
a. Cannot be plugged into a rack-mounted model system unit.

b. Maximum of one when in a cluster environment.
c. Use when a greater distance is required. Performance can be degraded.
d. A fiber optic cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the system.
e. Fiber optic SPCN cables include two copper to fiber adapter, p/n 90H6827.
f. Cannot be directly attached to an SPCN port on a Model 550 or 570 system unit. Can be attached to SPCN ports of I/O
tower/drawers.
g. Cannot be directly attached to an SPCN port on a Model 550, 570, or 595 system unit. Can be attached to SPCN ports of I/O
tower/drawers.
h. Cannot be plugged into a rack mounted model.
Cable feature
#5074
#5079
#8079
IXA
card
#5094
#9094
#5095
#0595
#5088
#0588
#5294
#8094
#5790
Xa
Xa
#5796
Copper
#1481 - 1 m HSL-2 Cable
#1482 3.5m HSL-2 Cable
Fiber opticb
HSL, 12X, SPCN, line cord, and communication cables for the System i family of models
541
Cable feature
#5074
#5079
#8079
IXA
card
#5094
#9094
#5095
#0595
#5088
#0588
#5294
#8094
#5790
#5796
12X
SPCNc,
#1463 2m SPCN Cable
#1464 6m SPCN Cable
Xa
Xa
Xa
a. Cannot be used on rack mounted towers.

b. Optical cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the tower.
c. Fiber optic SPCN cables include two copper to fiber adapter, p/n 90H6827.
d. On Models 520, 550, 570, and 595, SPCN cabling must be a single closed loop across all I/O towers or drawers.
542
13.1.1 HSL cable feature descriptions

HSL cables
#1307

The #1307 -1.75m Copper HSL-2 Cable is used to connect HSL-2/RIO-G ports in towers and system units.
Supported on Models 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), and 590
Not supported in rack-mounted 520 or 550 system units
#1308
#1308 - 2.5m Copper HSL-2 Cable

The #1308 - 2.5m Copper HSL-2 Cable is used to connect HSL-2/RIO-G ports in towers and system units.
#1460
#1460 - 3.0m Copper HSL Cable

The #1460 - 3.0m HSL Cable is used to connect HSL ports in towers and system units.
Some restrictions apply. On Models 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 825, 870, and 890, this cable cannot be directly
attached to any system HSL-2 adapter port. However, it can be used in between I/O expansion towers on the HSL loop
that. A different HSL or HSL-2 adapter cable must be used to connect to the systems HSL adapter port.
Supported on Models 270, 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 800, 810, 825, 820, 830, 840, 870, and 890
#1461

Some restrictions apply. On Models 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 825, 870, and 890, this cable cannot be directly
attached to any system HSL-2 adapter port. However, it can be used in between I/O expansion towers on the HSL loop
that. A different HSL or HSL-2 adapter cable must be used to connect to the systems HSL adapter port.
Supported on Models 270, 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 800, 810, 820, 830, and 840
#1462

Some restrictions apply. The #1462 cable cannot be attached to system port A1 of a Model 820 unless only a migration
tower is connected. On Models 270, 800, and 810, the #1462 cable cannot be attached directly to any system port. It can
be used to connect I/O expansion towers that are attached to those systems. On Models 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6),
595, 825, 870, and 890, the #1462 cable cannot be attached directly to any system port. It can be used to connect I/O
expansion towers (HSL) that are attached to those systems via an HSL to HSL-2 adapter cable.
Supported on Models 270, 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 800, 810, 820, 830, and 840
#1470
#1470 - 6.0m Optical HSL Cable

The #1470 - 6.0m HSL cable is used to connect optical HSL ports in towers and system units.
Supported on Models 550, 570, 595, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890
#1471

543
#1472

#1473

#1474

The #1474 - 6m HSL to HSL-2 Cable is used to connect HSL and HSL-2/RIO-G ports in towers and system units.
Supported on Models 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890
#1475

The #1475 - 10m HSL to HSL-2 Cable is used to connect HSL and HSL-2/RIO-G ports in towers and system units.
#1481
#1481 - 1.2m HSL-2 Cable

The #1481 - 1.2m HSL-2 Cable is used to connect HSL-2/RIO-G ports in towers and system units.
#1482
#1482 - 3.5m HSL-2 Cable

The #1482 - 3.5m HSL-2 Cable is used to connect HSL-2/RIO-G ports in towers and system units.
Supported on Models 520, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890
#1483
#1483 - 10m HSL-2 Cable

The #1483 - 10m HSL-2 Cable is used to connect HSL-2/RIO-G ports in towers and system units.
#1485
#1485 - 15.0m Copper HSL-2 Cable

The #1485 - 15m HSL-2 Cable is used to connect HSL-2/RIO-G ports in towers and system units.
Some restrictions apply. On Models 800 and 810, this cable cannot be attached directly to any system port. However, it can
be used in between I/O Expansion towers that are attached to those systems.
#1487

The #1487 - 3m HSL/RIO to HSL-2/RIO-G Cable is used to connect a tower and system unit with an HSL/RIO port to a
tower and system unit with an HSL-2/RIO-G port.
Supported on Models 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890
544
13.1.2 12X cable feature descriptions

HSL cables
#1829

The #1829 0.6 Meter 12X Cable is used to connect 12X ports in drawers and system units.
Because of the short length of the #1829, it cannot be used for attaching a 12X drawer to a system unit. It does not allow
the system unit to be pulled out for service.
The #1829 can be used to connect adjacent 12X I/O drawers in a rack.
#1830

The #1830 1.5 Meter 12X Cable is used to connect 12X ports in drawers and system units.
Because of the short length of the #1830, it cannot be used for attaching a 12X drawer to a system unit. It does not allow
the system unit to be pulled out for service.
The #1830 can be used to connect adjacent 12X I/O drawers in a rack.
#1834

The #1834 provides an 8.0 meter 12X cable that is used in a 12X loop.
#1840

The #1840 provides a 3.0 meter 12X cable that is used in a 12X loop.
13.2 SPCN (power) cables

Use the following table as a reference for the power cords that are supported on the System
i5, eServer i5, iSeries and AS/400e systems. For more information, use the following online
resource.
SPCN cables
#6001

The #6001 is a 2m SPCN Power Control Cable. It can also be used for rack mounted systems, but is too short. We
recommend that you use longer SPCN cables for rack mounted systems.
#6006

The #6006 is a 3m SPCN Power Control Cable.
#6007

#6008

545
#6029

Special Power and Control Cables

#1422
#1422 PDU Line Cord

The #1422 PDU Line Cord is used from a rack-mounted device to a #5160, #5161, #5162, #5163, or #7188 Power
Distribution Unit in that same rack.
Supported on Models 520, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, 890, and #0578, #0595,
#7104 and #7188 expansion units
#1827
#1827 Serial-UPS Conversion Cable

The #1827 is a 0.14M adapter cable with a female 9-pin D-shell connector on each end. The #1827 converts the system
unit system port 2 to an SPCN/uninterruptible power supply port, providing an additional port for uninterruptible power
supply control. The mode of the port cannot be changed during runtime. A re-IPL is required to change the mode when the
adapter cable is connected or disconnected.
THe #1827 Serial-UPS Conversion Cable is required to provide uninterruptible power supply control and feedback
information for the Models 520, 550, 570, and 570 (POWER6). This does not impact the ability of the uninterruptible power
supply to provide power in case of an outage. Its presence enables the uninterruptible power supply for alerting the Model
520, 550, and 570 that it is under uninterruptible power supply power and advising the server of the amount of remaining
uninterruptible power supply battery power.
System i5 servers use a different physical port, not the J14 port, to attach the uninterruptible power supply communications
control cable. The J14 port was used by previous iSeries servers. This applies to any uninterruptible power supply that must
provide control information to the eServer i5 port.
The #1827 Serial-UPS Conversion Cable attaches to one of the system ports on the back of Models 520, 550, and 570 and
to the previously existing control cable provided with the uninterruptible power supply.
Supported on Models 520, 550, 570, and 570 (POWER6).
Minimum operating system level: The latest level of Model 520, 550, 570, and 570 (POWER6) Licensed Internal Code is
required for full uninterruptible power supply communications capability.
#6458
#6458 14-Ft Int 250V/10A Pwr Cd

The #6458 PDU Power Cord is used from a rack-mounted device to a #5160, #5161, #5162, #5163, or #7188 PDUs in the
same rack.
Supported with Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), and 9411-100 and the 7310-CR2 rack mounted Hardware
Management Console (HMC)
#6459
#6459 12-Ft 250V/10A RA Pwr Cd

The #6459 is a 12-foot 250V/10A power cord that distributes power from a Power Distribution Unit to a drawer in an
expansion tower/rack. The #6459 has an IEC320 C14 plug and a right-angle IEC320 C13 connector.
Supported on Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, and 9411-100.
#6654
#6654 14-Ft 1PH/24-30A Pwr Cd

The #6654 is a 14-FT/4.3m 200-240V/24A locking power cord with a Type 12 plug that distributes power from a power
source to a Power Distribution Unit.
Supported on Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, and 9411-100.
#6655
#6655 14-Ft 1PH/24-30A WR Pwr Cd

The #6655 is a 14-FT/4.3m 200-240V/24A water-resistant power cord with a Type 40 plug that distributes power from a
power source to a Power Distribution Unit.
Supported on Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, and 9411-100
#6671
#6671 9Ft IEC 320 C13/C14 PDU Cord

This power cord is used from a racked device to a power distribution unit in that same rack. This cord is primarily intended
for use with the smaller #0554 11U and #0555 25U racks.
546
#6672
#6672 5Ft IEC 320 C13/C14 PDU Cord

This power cord is used from a racked device to a Power Distribution Unit in that same rack. This cord is primarily intended
for use with the smaller #0554 11U and #0555 25U racks. Use care before ordering this cord to ensure that it has sufficient
length, especially when used with a drawer that slides out for concurrent maintenance service.
13.3 Dual line cords

Use the following table as a reference for the dual line cords that are supported on System i5,
eServer i5, or iSeries systems. For more Information use the following online resource:
Dual line cords
#5105
#5105 Dual Line Cords - I/O Tower

The #5105 Dual Line Cords - I/O Tower provides dual line cord capability for a #5079 and a top unit in an #8079 Optional
Base 1.8 M I/O Rack or #8093 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack. Two #14xx line cords must be ordered for each #5074 PCI
Expansion Tower with a #5105 when a #5105 is ordered on an initial order of a #5074. When ordering a #5105 as an MES
against an existing #5074, one additional #14xx line cord is required to be ordered (for a total of two line cords for a #5074).
A #5074 mounted in a #0551 iSeries Rack is supported with the #5105.
Convert any #5101 30 Disk Unit Expansion features installed in the #5074 to #5111 30 Disk Expansion with Dual Line
Cords features. No parts are shipped.
Supported on standalone #5074 or the top unit in a #8079
#5106
#5106 Dual Line Cords - #5079 Tower

The #5106 Dual Line Cords - #5079 Tower provides dual line cord capability for a single unit in a #5079 1.8 M I/O Tower.
Two #14xx line cords must be ordered for each #5106 present, when a #5106 is ordered on an initial order of a #5079.
When ordering a #5106 as an MES, against an existing #5079, one additional #14xx line cord is required to be ordered for
each #5106 ordered. The IBM marketing configurator defaults a quantity of two #5106s, for each #5079 ordered, on a
system that has dual line cords on the system unit.
Convert any #5101 30 Disk Unit Expansion features installed in the #5079 to #5111 30 Disk Expansion with Dual Line
Cords features. No parts are shipped.
#5114

The #5114 Dual Line Cords Tower provides dual line cord capability for the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure and the lower
unit in an #8093 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack/#8094 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack. Two #14xx line cords must be ordered on an initial
order or a model upgrade into a Model 890 from a non-Model 890. When ordering a #5114 as an MES, one additional #14x
line cord is required to be ordered. One 840W power supply is shipped.
The #5114 has country-specific or region-specific usage.
#5115

The #5115 Dual Line Cords Tower is a dual line cord enabler for the upper unit in an #8094 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack and
for the #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower. One 840W power supply is shipped. A second line cord must be ordered for each
tower that is installing a #5115.
Maximum: One #5115 per #5094 PCI-X Expansion Tower and one per top unit of an #8094 Optional 1.8 M I/O Rack
Supported on Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, and 9411-100, and 870, 890, and #5094/#5294.
#5116
#5116 Dual Line Cords - #5294

The #5116 Dual Line Cords - #5294 provides dual line cord capability for a single unit in a #5294 1.8m I/O Tower. Two line
cords are required for each #5116 present. One 840W power supply is shipped.
The IBM marketing configurator defaults a quantity of two #5116s for each #5294 ordered on a system that has dual line
cords on the system unit.
Supported on Models 520, 525, 550, 570, 570 (POWER6), 595, and 9411-100, and #5294.
547
#5164
#5164 Dual Power Cords - #8294/#9194

The #5164 provides dual line cord capability for the #9194 Base PCI-X Expansion Tower and the lower enclosure in the
#8294 Optional Base 1.8m Rack. An additional line cord must be specified if #5164 is ordered on the #9194/#8294. When
ordering a #5164 for an installed #9194/#8294, an additional line cord must also be ordered. The configurator defaults to
a #5164 if the #9194/#8294 is ordered on a system that has dual line cords on the system unit.
Plugging in the second line cord, even if to the same outlet, enables the ac power modules to be redundant.
A #9194 Base PCI-X Expansion Tower or #8294 Optional Base 1.8m Rack is required.
Initial order or MES supported
Supported on Model 595 attached towers
The #5164 is an IBM Service Representative setup feature.
#5165
#5165 Dual Power Cords - #8294

The #5165 provides dual line cord capability for the upper enclosure in the #8294 Optional Base 1.8m Rack. An additional
line cord must be specified if the #5165 is ordered on the #8294. When ordering a #5165 for an installed #8294, an
additional line cord must also be ordered. The configurator defaults to a #5165 if the #8294 is ordered on a system that has
dual line cords on the system unit.
Plugging in the second line cord, even if to the same outlet, enables the ac power modules to be redundant.
A #8294 Optional Base 1.8m Rack is required.
Supported on Model 595 attached towers
The #5165 is an IBM Service Representative setup feature.
13.4 Communication cables

Use the following part numbers to order cables for the System i5, eServer i5, and iSeries
models. The following part numbers might not be available in all countries or regions, or on all
models, and can change.
Description
Length
Part number
Feature code
6.1m (20 ft)

6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
22F0149
22F0150
22F0151
22F9348
21F9953
21F9349
72X5643
21F4415
#9022
#9022
#9022
#9836
#9836
#9836
#9840
#9840
6.1m (20 ft)

6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
24.2m (80 ft)
22F0152
22F0153
22F0154
21F9350
21F9352
21F9351
74F1837
#9023
#9023
#9023
#9835
#9835
#9835
#9869
6.1m (20 ft)

15.2m (50 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
3m (10 ft)
72X5641
21F9357
74F1839
72X5640
21F9356
21F9345
#9020
#9838
#9870
#9021
#9839
#9843
SPD communication cables non-enhanced

RS232 Cable
RS232 Cable - Germany
RS232 Cable - Japan
RS232 Cable
RS232 Cable - Japan
RS366 Cable
RS366 Cable - Japan
SPD communication cables enhanced
V.24 Cable
V.24 Cable - Germany
V.24 Cable - Japan
V.24 Cable
V.24 Cable - Japan
V.24 Cable
Other SPD communication cables
V.35 Cable
V.35 Cable
V.35 Cable
X.21 Cable
X.21 Cable
2 Port Communication Cable
548
#2666 High-Speed Communications Adapter (SPD)

RS449 Cable
RS449 Cable
RS449 Cable
V.35 Cable
V.35 Cable
X.21 Cable
6.1m (20 ft)

24.4m (80 ft)
45.7m (150 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
17G4000
17G4001
17G4002
17G3991
17G3992
17G3987
#9882
#9883
#9884
#9879
#9880
#9885
2.4m (8 ft)
2.4m (8 ft)
2.4m (8 ft)
3.0m (10 ft)
2.4m (8 ft)
86G7712
46G3658
46G3585
86G7691
6339098
#5144
#9886
#9887
#9025
#9024
PCI/SPD miscellaneous server cables

BBU Cable
Diskette Cable
Diskette/Twinaxial Cable
Ethernet Cable
Token Ring Cable
PCI Communication Cables for Models 150, 600, S10, 620, S20, 720, 250, 270, 820, 830, SB2, 840, SB3, and 890
RS232 Cable
RS232 Cable - Japan
V.24 Cable
V.24 Cable
V.24 Cable
V.35 Cable
V.36 Cable
X.21 Cable
Client Access Console Cable
6.1m (20 ft)

6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
44H7480
44H7482
44H7484
44H7486
44H7489
44H7492
44H7495
44H7498
44H7501
44H7504
97H7557
97H7591
#0348
#0348
#0348
#0350
#0350
#0350
#0353
#0356
#0359
#0362
#0367
#0381
PCI Communication Cables for Models 170, 600, S10, 620, S20, 720, 250, 270, 820, 830, SB2, 840, SB3, and 890
RS232 Cable
RS232 Cable - Japan
V.24 Cable
V.24 Cable - Japan
V.24 Cable
V.24 Cable - Japan
V.24 Cable
V.24 Cable - Japan
V.35 Cable
V.35 Cable
V.36 Cable
V.36 Cable
X.21 Cable
15.2m (50 ft)

15.2m (50 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
45.7m (150 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
44H7481
44H7483
44H7485
44H7487
44H7490
44H7493
44H7488
44H7491
44H7494
97H7386
97H7387
97H7388
44H7496
44H7497
44H7499
44H7500
44H7502
#0349
#0349
#0349
#0351
#0351
#0351
#0352
#0352
#0352
#0365
#0365
#0365
#0354
#0355
#0357
#0358
#0360
549
SPD Communication Cables for Models 600, 620, 640, 650, S10, S20, S30, S40 and SB1
RS232 Cable
RS232 Cable - Japan
RS232 Cable
RS232 Cable - Japan
V.24 Cable
V.24 Cable - Japan
V.24 Cable
V.24 Cable - Japan
V.24 Cable
V.24 Cable - Japan
V.35 Cable
V.35 Cable
V.35 Cable
V.36 Cable
V.36 Cable
V.36 Cable
X.21 Cable
X.21 Cable
6.1m (20 ft)

6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
45.7m (150 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
24.4m (80 ft)
15.2m (50 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6.1m (20 ft)
6m (20 ft)
2.5m (8 ft)
21H3764
21H3765
21H3766
21H3767
21H3768
21H3769
21H3770
21H3771
21H3772
21H3773
21H3774
21H3775
21H3776
21H3777
21H3778
21H3787
21H3788
21H3789
21H3783
21H3792
21H3785
21H3786
21H3779
21H3782
97H7556
97H7584
46G0450
46G0479
#0330
#0330
#0330
#0331
#0331
#0331
#0332
#0332
#0332
#0333
#0333
#0333
#0334
#0334
#0334
#0335
#0336
#0337
#0341
#0338
#0339
#0340
#0342
#0344
#0328
#0380
#9026
#9027
Modem (telephone) Cables for #9771 Base PCI Two-Line WAN with integrated modem, #2761 Integrated Analog Modem, and
#4761 PCI Integrated Analog Modems
Modem Cable - Africa
Modem Cable - Australia
Modem Cable - Austria
Modem Cable - Belgium
Modem Cable - Denmark
Modem Cable - Finland/Norway
Modem Cable - France
Modem Cable - Germany
Modem Cable - China (Hong Kong S.A.R.)/New Zealand
Modem Cable - Iceland/Sweden
Modem Cable - Israel
Modem Cable - Italy
Modem Cable - Netherlands
Modem Cable - Switzerland
Modem Cable - United Kingdom
Modem Cable - U.S./Canada
9.1m (30 ft)

9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
9.1m (30 ft)
39J5808
39J5813
39J5818
39J5819
39J5807
39J5815
39J5810
39J5811
39J5817
39J5812
21H4905
39J5809
39J5816
39J5806
39J5817
42R5087
#1012
#1019
#1010
#1011
#1024
#1021
#1015
#1016
#1020
#1018
#1013
#1014
#1022
#1023
#1017
#1025
For a complete list of System i cables, see the iSeries Information Center Web sites at:
For POWER6 technology systems
Search on cables.
In the left navigation area, expand Systems hardware System i information
Planning and select Plan for cables.
For POWER5 technology systems
Select IBM Systems Hardware Information Center. In the left navigation area expand
Planning and select Plan for cables.
550
14
Chapter 14.
Withdrawals announced January

2007 through October 2007
In this chapter, we list the withdrawal announcements of software products, hardware features
and model conversions from January 2007 through October 2007.
551
14.1 Selected System i program features withdrawn

The following features of the indicated programs are withdrawn. While only the features are
withdrawn, the programs remain available.
Program number
Feature name
Feature number
Effective date
5639-3CM
Conferencing/Server
0003
10 July 2007
5639-3CM
IP Presence 200 Client
0016
10 July 2007
5639-3CM
3ComIP Teleph Msg & Conf on DVD
0018
10 July 2007
5639-3CM
Audio Conferencing/Port Lic
0036
10 July 2007
5639-3CM
Audio Confer/Port Lic Blk 25
0037
10 July 2007
5722-WE2
V5.3 WebSphere Express 5.1
5901
10 July 2007
14.2 Products and features no longer marketed by IBM

When products and features are withdrawn from marketing, they are removed from this paper.
The tables in this section identify such products.
Review the System i Upgrade Planning Web page for the latest information about supported
hardware and withdrawn hardware. It also provides guidance in replacing the withdrawn
hardware from the marketing hardware features:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/support/iseries/planning/upgrade/
You can find alternate solutions for features that are no longer supported at V5R3 and V5R4
(and earlier releases) on the Web at the following Upgrade planning pages:
For V5R3
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/support/iseries/planning/upgrade/v5r3/index.html
For V5R4
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/support/iseries/planning/upgrade/v5r4/index.html
552
14.2.1 Hardware no longer marketed by IBM

The following table lists the hardware that was withdrawn from marketing. It shows the
hardware products and features with the withdrawal dates.
Feature
Description
Withdrawal date
Type
Models
#0554
1 April 2008
9405, 9406
System Unit Rack
515, 520 525, 550, 570, 570

(POWER6), 9411-100
#0627,
#0628,
#0648,
#0649
#0650,
#0651
AIX/Linux direct attach for #2780,

#5703, #5737, #5583, #5778, and
#5782 large cache disk controllers
9 October 2007
9406 570
(POWER6)
All POWER6 models
#0649
#0650,
#0651,
#0654
AIX/Linux direct attach for #5583,

#5778, #5782, and #5800 large cache
disk controllers
9 October 2007
9405, 9406
All POWER5 processors: 515,

520, 535, 550, 570, 595
#9844
Base PCI IOP
9 October 2007
9407, 9406
515, 525 Express, and CBU

editions except support
remains for 515 Express #6011
#1894
13 July 2007
9405, 9406
520, 550, 570
#1895
13 July 2007
9405, 9406
520, 550, 570
#6251
Slimline Doors-Primary Rack
13 July 2007
9406
595
#6252
Acoustic Doors-Primary Rack
13 July 2007
9406
595
#0496
Force i5/OS Preload
24 July 2007
9405, 9406, 9407
515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#1268
24 July 2007
9406
800, 810, 825, 870, 890
#5555
Mirror 70 GB Disk/
Controller Package
24 July 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595,

800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840,
870, 890
#5556
Mirror 141 GB Disk/

Controller Package
24 July 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#7522
24 July 2007
9406
825, 870, 890
#1299
300 GB 10k rpm Disk Unit
24 October 2007
Feature is withdrawn
for new orders only.
Conversions to feature
remain available.
9405, 9406
520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#4494
6 GB DDR-1 Main Storage
24 October 2007
9406
570
#7049
24 October 2007
9406
570
#7211
24 October 2007
9406
550, 570, 595
#0356
V.36 20-Ft PCI Cable
1 December 2007
9401, 9402, 9404,

9405, 9406, 9407,
9411
All
#0940
8/16W Server Feature 1x8966/73
1 December 2007
9406
595
Withdrawals announced January 2007 through October 2007
553
Feature
Description
Withdrawal date
Type
Models
#0941
1 December 2007
remain available.
9406
595
#0943
1 December 2007
remain available.
9406
595
#0944
1 December 2007
remain available.
9406
595
#0957
2/16W Server Feature 595 1x8973
1 December 2007
9406
595
#1398
4.3m 100V/10A Power Cord Brazil
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 270, 520, 525, 550, 570,

595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830,
840, 870, 890
#1406
200V 16A 14-Ft TL Line Cord
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
All
#1410
200V 6-Ft Line Cord
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 270, 520, 525, 550, 570,

595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830,
840, SB2, SB3
#1411
200V 14-Ft Line Cord
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 270, 520, 525, 550, 570,

595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830,
840, 870, 890, SB2, SB3
#1412
125V 6-Ft Line Cord
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 270, 520, 525, 550, 570,

595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830,
840
#1414
200V 6-Ft Locking Line Cord
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 270, 520, 525, 550, 570,

595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830,
840, SB2, SB3
#1415
200V 6-Ft Watertight Line Cord
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 270, 520, 525, 550, 570,

595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830,
840, SB2, SB3
#1422
3m IEC 320 C13/14 PDU Cord
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 270, 520, 525, 550, 570,

595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830,
840, 870, 890, SB2, SB3
#1440
4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord Denmark
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 250, 270, 520, 525, 550,

570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, SB2, SB3
#1442
4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord Swiss
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 250, 270, 520, 525, 550,

570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, SB2, SB3
#1443
4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord UK
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 250, 270, 520, 525, 550,

570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, SB2, SB3
#1444
4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord Italy
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 250, 270, 520, 525, 550,

570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, SB2, SB3
554
Feature
Description
Withdrawal date
Type
Models
#1445
4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord Israel
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 250, 270, 520, 525, 550,

570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, SB2, SB3
#1457
200V 6-Ft Upper Line Cord
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595,

800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840,
870, 890
#1458
200V 6-Ft Upper Locking Cord
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595,

800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840,
870, 890
#1468
1 December 2007
9406
550, 570, 595, 825, 830, 840,

870, 890
#2887
HSL-2 Bus Adapter
1 December 2007
9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595,

825, 830, 840, 870, 890
#4319
1 December 2007
9402, 9404, 9406
All
#6451
14-Ft 250V/10A Power Cord
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6452
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6453
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6454
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6455
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6456
14-Ft 200-240V/12A Power Cord
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6461
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6462
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6463
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6464
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6465
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6466
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6467
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6495
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9407,

9411
100, 515, 520, 525, 550, 570,

595, 800, 810, 825, 870, 890
#6498
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9407,

9411
100, 515, 520, 525, 550, 570
#6499
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6663
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6664
7-Ft 200V PDU Power Cable
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6681
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 520, 525, 550, 570, 595
#6690
1 December 2007
9405, 9406, 9407,

9411
100, 515, 520, 525, 550, 570,

595, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830,
840, 870, 890
#7194
1 December 2007
9406
550
#7373
1 December 2007
9406
520
#7374
1 December 2007
9406
520
555
Feature
Description
Withdrawal date
Type
Models
#7375
1 December 2007
9406
520
#7750
1 December 2007
9405, 9406
520
#7751
1 December 2007
9406
550
#7900
1 December 2007
9406
595
#7901
Enterprise Edition for #0940.

Feature is withdrawn for new orders
only. Conversions to feature remain
available.
1 December 2007
9406
595
#7903
Standard Edition for #0941.

available.
1 December 2007
9406
595
#7904

available.
1 December 2007
9406
595
#7906
Standard Edition for #0943.

available.
1 December 2007
9406
595
#7907

available.
1 December 2007
9406
595
#7909
CBU Edition for #0944.

available.
1 December 2007
9406
595
#7910
CBU Std Edition for #0957
1 December 2007
9406
595
#7911
1 December 2007
9406
595
#7912
CBU Std Edition for #0944.

available.
1 December 2007
9406
595
The following table shows the hardware products and features with the withdrawal date and
the recommended replacement.
Product or feature
Withdrawal date
Types
Models
Recommended replacement
#3641 T115 TFT 15-inch

Color Display
13 July 2007
9405, 9406
520, 550, 570, 595
#3645 T117 TFT 17-inch Color

Display
#5580-#2780 Controller
with Auxiliary Write Cache
13 July 2007
9402, 9404,
9405, 9406,
9411
100, 270, 520, 550, 570,

595, 800, 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, 870, 890
#5590 #2780 Controller with

#5581-#2757 Controller
with Auxiliary Write Cache
13 July 2007
9402, 9404,
9405, 9406,
9411
100, 270, 520, 550, 570,

595, 800, 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, 870, 890
#5591 #2757 Controller with

556
The following table lists replacement product information.

Product or feature
Recommended replacement
Models 810 and 825 to 5xx conversions
Model 5xx
#0940 8/16W Server Feature 1x8966/73
#0953 8/16W Server Feature 595 1x8968
#0957 2/16W Server Feature 1x8973
#1398 4.3m 100V/10A Power Cord Brazil
#6471 9-Ft 125V/15A Power Cord
#1410 200V 6-Ft Line Cord
#1414 200V 6-Ft Locking Line Cord
#1440 4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord Denmark
#1442 4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord Swiss
#1443 4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord UK
#1444 4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord Italy
#1445 4.3m 200V/10A Power Cord Israel
#1457 200V 6-Ft Upper Line Cord
#1458 200V 6-Ft Upper Locking Cord
#1454 200V 12A 14-Ft TL Line Cord
#4494 16 GB DDR-1 Main Storage
#4491 16GB DDR-1 Main Storage
#7049 8/16 GB DDR-1 Main Storage
#4491 16GB DDR-1 Main Storage
#7373 HA Edition for #0906
#7910 CBU Std Edition for #0957
Model 870 and 890 to 570 and 595 conversions
Model 5xx
557
The following table lists the feature conversion withdrawals from 13 July 2007.
From feature
To feature
To machine type
To model
#9726
#0446
9406
550, 570, 595
#2780
#5580
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 270, 520, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, 870, 890
#2757
#5581
9405, 9406, 9411
100, 270, 520, 550, 570, 595, 800, 810, 820, 825,
830, 840, 870, 890
The following table lists the feature conversion withdrawals from 24 July 2007.
From feature
To feature
Machine type
To model
#7734
#7790
9402, 9404, 9406
All
The following table lists the feature conversion withdrawals from 24 October 2007.
From feature
To feature
Type
Model
#7199
#7194
9406
550
#7753
#7750
9405, 9406
520
#7754
7751
9406
550
#9793
#9493
9405, 9406, 9407
515, 520, 525,550, 570, 595
#9794
#9494
9406, 9407
515, 520, 525,550, 570, 595
The following table shows model conversions.

Machine type
From model
Withdrawal date
To model
9406
825
1 December 2007
9406
870, 890
1 April 2008
The following table lists the feature conversions withdrawals from 1 December 2007 by
ascending order in the To feature column.
558
From feature
To feature
Type
Model
#5705
#0624
9406
525
#0946, #2486, #2487, #2488, #2489, #2497,

#2498
#0940
9406
595
#0920, #0921, #0922, #0924, #0926, #0934,

#0935, #0936, #0946, #0947, #2486, #2487,
#2488, #2489, #2497, #2498
#0941
9406
595
#0922
#0943
9406
All
#0920, #0921, #0924, #0926, #0934, #0935,

#0936, #0946, #0947, #0952, #2486, #2487,
#2488, #2489, #2497, #2498
#0943
9406
595
#0928, #0937, #0938, #0939, #2486, #2488,

#2489, #2497, #2498, #2499
#0944
9406
595
From feature
To feature
Type
Model
#2486, #2489, #2497, #2498
#0957
9406
595
#9749
#2849
9406
525
#4525
#4625
9406
525
#4530
#4630
9406
525
#4531
#4631
9406
525
#4533
#4633
9406
525
#4582
#4682
9406
525
#4583
#4683
9406
525
#4584
#4684
9406
525
#4585
#4685
9406
525
#4587
#4687
9406
525
#2473, #2495
#4910
9406
#2473, #2495
#4911
9406
#2473, #2495
#4912
9406
#7416, #7418
#5460
9406
#7416, #7418
#5461
9406
#7416, #7418
#5462
9406
#5705
#5702
9406
525
#2793
#6833
9406
#2794
#6834
9406
#7439
#7053
9406
#7439
#7058
9406
#7439
#7063
9406
#7419, #7422, #7425, #7431, #7496
#7900
9406
595
#1576, #1577, #1578, #1579, #1581, #1583,

#1585, #1587, #1588, #1591, #7421, #7424,
#7427, #7433, #7497
#7901
9406
595
#7419, #7422, #7425, #7431, #7469, #7471,

#7473, #7475, #7480, #7494, #7496, #7498,
#7757, #7758, #7759
#7903
9406
595
#1576, #1577, #1578, #1579, #1581, #1583,

#1585, #1587, #1588, #1591, #7421, #7424,
#7427, #7433, #7470, #7472, #7474, #7476,
#7481, #7495, #7497, #7499, #7747, #7748,
#7749
#7904
9406
595
#7419, #7422, #7425, #7431, #7469, #7471,

#7473, #7475, #7480, #7482, #7494, #7496,
#7498, #7757, #7758, #7759, #7984
#7906
9406
595
559
From feature
To feature
Type
Model
#1576, #1577, #1578, #1579, #1581, #1583,

#1585, #1587, #1588, #1591, #7421, #7424,
#7427, #7433, #7470, #7472, #7474, #7476,
#7481, #7483, #7495, #7497, #7499, #7747,
#7748, #7749, #7985
#7907
9406
595
#1576, #1577, #1578, #1579, #1581, #1583,

#1585, #1587, #1588, #1591, #7421, #7424,
#7427, #7433, #7570, #7760, #7915, #7917
#7909
9406
595
#7419, #7422, #7425, #7431,
#7910
9406
595
#7421, #7424, #7427, #7433,
#7911
9406
595
#7419, #7422, #7425, #7431, #7914, #7916,

#7918
#7912
9406
595
The following table lists the feature conversion withdrawals for 1 April 2008, by ascending
order in the To feature column.
560
From feature
To feature
Type
Model
#5766
#0647
9406
525
#9943
#2843
9406
525
4586
4686
9406
525
#2489
#4910
9406
#2486, #2489, #2496
#4911
9406
#2486, #2487, #2488, #2489, #2496,

#2497, #2498
#4912
9406
8094
5294
9406
#7431, #7433
#5460
9406
#7419, #7421, #7431, #7433
#5461
9406
#1576, #1577, #1578, #1579, #1581,

#1583, #1585, #1587, #1588, #1591,
#7419, #7421, #7422, #7424, #7425,
#7427, #7431, #7433
#5462
9406
#5766
#5736
9406
525
#7440
#7058
9406
#7440
#7063
9406
#9887
#9877
9406
525
15
Chapter 15.
iSeries Model 800, 810, 825, 870,

890 processor features
features that are associated with each iSeries 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 server. You can
find feature descriptions, including details about power and packaging and main memory, in
Model
Processor
Announce date
date
Withdrawn from
marketing
800
#2463, #2464
28 January 2003
28 February 2003
01 October 2005
810
#2465
13 May 2003
23 May 2003
01 October 2005
#2466, #2467, #2469
28 January 2003
28 February 2003
01 October 2005
#2473
28 January 2003
28 February 2003
01 October 2005
#2495, #2496
5 September 2003
12 September 2003
01 October 2005
#2486
28 January 2003
28 February 2003
01 October 2005
#2489
22 July 2003
30 July 2003
01 October 2005
#0197, #0198, #2487, #2488
14 May 2002
30 August 2002
07 May 2003
#2497, #2498
28 January 2003
28 February 2003
01 October 2005
#2499
5 September 2003
12 September 2003
01 October 2005
825
870
890
Note: The darker shaded areas in the following tables and figures represent the base
configuration of the system. The capacities that are shown might require prerequisites.
Some combinations of features are not valid.
561
15.1 iSeries Model 800 overview

The following tables provide the minimum and maximum system capacities for the Model 800.
To review the footnotes for these tables, see 15.6, Notes for iSeries Models 800, 810, 825,
870, and 890 overview on page 570.
Model 800
Processor feature
#2463 and #2463
Server feature
#2464
#0863
#0864
#0865
300
300
950
Value and Standard6a
25
25
Advanced6a
50
1/SStar/540 MHz
1/SStar/540 MHz
1/SStar/540 MHz
L2 Cache (MB)
1, 2
Relative system performance

Processor CPW
5250 CPW
81929a
512 to 81929a
Main storage (MB minimum to maximum)
256 to 8192
512 to
1/8
1/8
1/8
V5R2
V5R2
V5R2
P05
P05
P10
8a

Software
group6a
Numbers are for all 800 processor
Base system
#7116 System
#5095/#0595 PCI-X
#5094 PCI-X
Total system
Integrated minimum
17.5
17.5
17.5
17.5
Integrated maximum
423.3
846.7
846.7
3175.2
4445
4375
Total maximum
4445
DASD arms maximum
12
12
45
63
Internal arms
12
12
45
63
External LUNs
62
External HSL ports
External HSL loops
Embedded IOP
PCI card slots
14
21
11
17
18
20
44
60
11
11
15
Disk storage (GB)
External
maximum7
Physical packaging
Maximum PCI IOA cards

Communication lines
LAN ports
Integrated xSeries
Servers10a
562
Base system
#7116 System
#5095/#0595 PCI-X
#5094 PCI-X
Total system
160
200
440
600
External tape
11
15
11
15
Internal CD/DVD/tape

Model 810
Processor feature
#2465
#2466
#2467
#2469
Server feature
#0868
#0866
#0867
#0869
750
1020
1470
2700
Relative system
performance1, 2
Processor CPW
5250
CPW5a
Standard6b
6b
750
1020
1470
2700
Availability6b
750
1020
1470
2700
1/SStar/540 MHz
1/SStar/540 MHz
1/SStar/750 MHz
2/SStar/750 MHz
Main storage (MB minimum to maximum)
512 to 16384
512 to 16384
512 to 16384
512 to 16384
1/8
1/8
2/16
V5R2
V5R2
V5R2
V5R2
P10
P10
P10
P20
Enterprise
High
Main storage DIMMs (minimum/maximum) 1/8

Software
group6b
8b
iSeries Model 800, 810, 825, 870, 890 processor features
563
The following tables provide the minimum and maximum system capacities for the Model 810
iSeries for Domino.
Model 810 iSeries for Domino
Processor feature
#2466
#2467
#2469
#0769
#0770
#0771
1020
1470
2700
3100
4200
7900
1/SStar/540 MHz
1/SStar/750 MHz
2/SStar/750 MHz
Main storage (GB minimum to maximum)
1.5 to 16
3.5 to 16
5.5 to 16
Main storage DIMMs (maximum)
16
Minimum OS/400 level8b
V5R2
V5R2
V5R2
P10
P10
P20
9c
Server feature
Relative system
performance1, 2
Processor CPW
2a
Mail and Calendar Users (MCU)

5250
CPW5a
Domino6b
9b
6b
Software group
Base system
#7116 System
Unit Expansion
#5095/#0595 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
#5094 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
Integrated minimum
17.5
17.5
17.5
17.5
Integrated maximum
423.3
846.7
846.7
3172.5
13971
13901
Total maximum
13971
DASD arms maximum
12
12
45
198
Internal arms
12
12
45
198
External LUNs
197
External HSL ports
External HSL loops
Embedded IOP
PCI card slots
14
63
11
50
18
20
44
192
LAN ports
11
36
13
11
48
160
200
440
1920
10
11
18
Numbers are for all 810

processor features
Total system
maximum
Disk storage (GB)
External
maximum7
Physical packaging

Communication lines
Internal
CD/DVD/tape4
External tape
564
Numbers are for all 810

processor features
Base system
#7116 System
Unit Expansion
#5095/#0595 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
#5094 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
Total system
maximum
11
18

Model 825
Processor feature
Server
#2473
feature7
#2495
#0873
#0890
#0772
#0773
3600/6600
1250/6600
11600
17400
Standard and Domino6c
Enterprise6c
Maximum
Maximum
Maximum
Number/type/
speed of processor
3/6 / POWER4/
1.1 GHz
4 / POWER4/
1.1 GHz
6 / POWER4
1.1 GHz
1/6 / POWER4/
1.1 GHz
16
16
16
16
0.72
0.72
0.72
0.72
2 to 48
6 to 48
12 to 48
2 to 48
8/24
8/24
8/24
8/24
level8b
V5R2
V5R2
V5R2
V5R2
P30
P30
P30
P30
Domino9c
Server feature for

Relative system
performance1, 2
Processor CPW
Mail and Calendar Users (MCU)
5250
2a
CPW5b
6c
High Availability
Capacity
Backup6c

9b
Minimum OS/400
Software group
6c
565

features
Base system
#5095/#0595 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
#5094 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
Total
maximum
Integrated minimum
17.5
17.5
Integrated maximum
1058.4
846.7
3175.2
58216
External maximum7
58145
Total maximum
58216
Internal arms
15
12
45
825
External LUNs
824
PCI Expansion Towers
16
16
PCI-X Expansion Towers
18
18
18
18
Embedded IOP
19
Embedded IOA
PCI card slots
10
14
262
11
205
Communication lines3a
30
20
44
320
LAN ports
11
96
36
11
135
200
200
440
5400
Internal CD-ROM/DVD-RAM/tape4
18
External tape/optical/CD/DVD
11
18
Disk storage (GB)9b
DASD arms maximum
Physical packaging
566

Model 870
Processor feature
#2486
#2489
#2496
#0886
#0889
#0891
11500/20000
7700/11500
0
Maximum
Maximum
--
0
Maximum
Maximum
--
3200/20000
-0
--Maximum
8/16/POWER4/1.3 GHz
5/8/POWER4/1.3 GHz
2/16/POWER4/1.3 GHz
L2 and L3 Cache (MB/processor)
16.72
16.72
16.72
8 to 128
8 to 64
8 to 128
Main storage cards (minimum/maximum)
2/4
2/2
2/4
V5R2
V5R2
V5R2
P40
P40
P40
Server feature
Relative system performance
Processor CPW
5250 CPW5c
Standard6d
Enterprise6d
High Availability6d
Capacity BackUp6d
Minimum OS/400
Software group
1, 2
level8b
6d
#9094 Base
Tower
#5095/#0595 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
#5094 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
Integrated minimum
17.5
17.5
17.5
Integrated maximum
3175.2
846.7
3175.2
144446
External maximum7
144375
Total maximum
144446
Internal arms
45
12
45
2047
External LUNs
2046
External HSL/RIO-G ports
-/16
-/16
External HSL/RIO-G loops
-/8
-/8
PCI/PCI-X Expansion Towers
47
47
60
60
Embedded IOP
Embedded IOA
PCI card slots
14
14
672
11
11
528
38
20
44
480
LAN ports
128
48

features
Total system
maximum
Disk storage (GB)
DASD arms maximum
Physical packaging
567

features
#9094 Base
Tower
#5095/#0595 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
#5094 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
Total system
maximum
11
180
360
200
440
7200
26
11
26
32
Internal
CD/DVD/tape4a

Model 890
Processor feature
#2497
#2498
#2499
Server feature
#0897
#0898
#0892
20000/29300
29300/37400
5600/37400
0
Maximum
Maximum
-
0
Maximum
Maximum
-
0
Maximum
16/24 / POWER4/1.3 GHz
24/32 / POWER4/1.3 GHz
4/32 / POWER4/1.3 GHz
16.72
16.72
16.72
8 to 192
16 to 256
16 to 256
2/6
4/8
4/8
Minimum OS/400 level8b
V5R2
V5R2
V5R2
Software group6e
P50
P50
P50

Processor CPW
5250 CPW5c
Standard6e
Enterprise6e
High Availability6e
Capacity Backup6e
568
Model 890
Processor feature
#2487
#2488
#0197
#0198
20200 - 29300
29300 - 37400
120
240
560
1050
2000
4550
10000
16500
20200
-
120
240
560
1050
2000
4550
10000
16500
20200
37400
29300
0
-
37400
0
-
Number/type/
speed of processor
16/24/ POWER4/
1.3 GHz
24/32/ POWER4/
1.3 GHz
24/POWER4/
1.3 GHz
32/POWER4/
1.3 GHz
L2 Cache (MB)
1.5 MB/chip set
1.5 MB/chip set
1.5 MB/chip set
1.5 MB/chip set
16.72
16.72
16.72
16.72
16 to 192
24 to 256
16 to 192
24 to 256
2/6
4/8
2/6
4/8
V5R2
V5R2
V5R2
V5R2
Software group6e
P50 or P60
P50 or P60
P50
P50

features
#9094
Base Tower
#5095/#0595 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
#5094 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
Integrated minimum
17.5
17.5
17.5
Integrated maximum
3172.5
846.7
3175.2
144446
11290
3175
13548
144375
14462
4021
16720
144446
Internal arms
45
12
45
2047
External LUNs
160
127
192
2046
External HSL/RIO-G ports
-/24
-/24
External HSL/RIO-G loops
-/12
-/12
PCI/PCI-X Expansion Towers
47
47
60
60
Embedded IOP
Embedded IOA
PCI card slots
14
14
672
11
11
528
38
20
44
480
128

Processor CPW
5250 CPW5c
#1576 (Base)
#1577
#1578
#1579
#1581
#1583
#1585
#1587
#1588
#1591
8b
Total maximum
Disk storage (GB)
External
maximum7
Total maximum
DASD arms maximum
Physical packaging
Communication
LAN ports
lines3
569

features
#9094
Base Tower
#5095/#0595 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
#5094 PCI-X
Expansion Tower
Total maximum
48
11
180
360
200
440
7200
26
11
26
32
Internal
CD-ROM/DVD-RAM/tape4a
15.6 Notes for iSeries Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890
overview
Note 1
Commercial processing workload (CPW) is used to measure the performance of all iSeries and AS/400e processors
announced from September 1996 onward. The CPW value is measured on maximum configurations. The type and number
of disk devices, the number of workstation controllers, the amount of memory, the system model, other factors, and the
application running determine what performance is achievable.
Note 2
Processor performance represents the relative performance (maximum capacity) of a processor feature running CPW in a
client/server environment. Processor capacity is achievable when the commercial workload is not constrained by main
storage and direct access storage device (DASD). Performance of the 5250 CPW represents the relative performance that
is available to perform host-centric workloads. The amount of 5250 CPW capacity consumed reduces the available processor
capacity by the same amount.
Note 2a
Mail and Calendar Users (MCU) is a relative performance measurement derived by performing mail and calendar functions
using Domino and Notes clients. The MCU workload represents concurrent users on a Notes client who are reading,
updating, or deleting documents in an e-mail database. It also represents users who are performing lookups in the Domino
Directory and scheduling calendar appointments and invitations. Reported values reflect 70% processor utilization to allow
for growth and peak loads in excess of customer workload estimates.
Note 3
Console on 100 Mbps Token Ring or #5548 System Console on 100 Mbps Ethernet is selected and the #0367 Operations
Console PCI Cable is connected.
Note 3a
Console on 100 Mbps Ethernet is selected and the #0367 Operations Console PCI Cable is connected.
Note 4
There must be one DVD-ROM or DVD-RAM per system.
Note 4a
There must be one DVD-RAM or DVD-ROM in the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure.
Note 5a
Model
810
that perform 5250-based tasks. Remember the following points:
The iSeries Enterprise Edition provides maximum 5250 CPW support (up to 100% of the capacity of the active
processor CPW). The iSeries Standard Edition provides zero CPW for 5250 work.
Any task that uses a 5250 data stream is considered 5250 online transaction processing (OLTP) work and requires
some amount of 5250 CPW to process regardless of how the task started.
A task submitted through a 5250 session (5250 device or 5250 emulation) that does display or printer input/output (I/O)
requires 5250 CPW.
A task submitted through a 5250 session (5250 device or 5250 emulation) as a batch job is not considered 5250 OLTP
work and does not require any 5250 CPW unless the task does display or printer I/O.
Limited 5250 CPW is available with the Standard Edition for a system administrator to use 5250 display device I/O to
manage various aspects of the server. Multiple administrative jobs exceed this capability.
570
Note 5b
Model
825
that perform 5250-based tasks. Remember the following points:
processor CPW). The iSeries Standard Edition provides limited CPW for 5250 work.
Any task that uses a 5250 data stream is considered 5250 OLTP work and requires some amount of 5250 CPW to
process regardless of how the task started.
A task submitted through a 5250 session (5250 device or 5250 emulation) that does display or printer I/O requires 5250
CPW.
Maximum 5250 CPW is equivalent to the processor CPW for the active processor.
Note 5c
Models
870 890
performing 5250-based tasks. Remember the following points:
processor CPW). The iSeries Standard Edition provides zero CPW for 5250 work.
Any task that uses a 5250 data stream is considered 5250 OLTP work and requires some amount of 5250 CPW to
process regardless of how the task started.
A task submitted through a 5250 session (5250 device or 5250 emulation) that does display or printer I/O requires 5250
CPW.
Maximum 5250 CPW is equivalent to the processor CPW for the active processor.
Note 6a
Model
800
Software group is determined by the combination of Processor feature and Edition feature. This table provides a
cross-reference. Display the QPRCFEAT system value on DSPHDWRSC TYPE(*AHW) to display the processor feature code
value.
Processor
Server feature
Edition feature
Software group
Processor feature code

or QPRCFEAT value
#2463
#0863
#7400 Value
P05
7400
#0864
#7400 Standard
P05
7400
#0865
#7408 Advanced
P10
7408
#2464
Note 6b
Model
810
Software group is determined by the combination of Processor feature and Edition feature. This table provides a cross
reference. Display the QPRCFEAT system value on DSPHDWRSC TYPE(*AHW) to view the processor feature code value.
Processor
Server feature
Edition feature
Software group

or QPRCFEAT value
#2465
#0868
#7404 Standard
P10
7404
#7406 Enterprise
P10
7406
P10
7406
#7407 Standard
P10
7407
#7409 Enterprise
P10
7409
P10
7409
#0769
#7407 Domino
P10
7407
#0867
#7410 Standard
P10
7410
#7412 Enterprise
P10
7412
P10
7412
#7410 Domino
P10
7410
#2466
#2467
#0866
#0770
571
Note 6b
Model
810
(contd.)
Processor
Server feature
Edition feature
Software group

or QPRCFEAT value
#2469
#0869
#7428 Standard
P20
7428
#7430 Enterprise
P20
7430
P20
7430
#7428 Domino
P20
7428
#0771
Note 6c
Model
825
Software group is determined by the combination of Processor feature and Edition feature. This table provides a
cross-reference. Display the QPRCFEAT system value on DSPHDWRSC TYPE(*AHW) to view the processor feature code
value. This value is also shown for the Capacity Card CCIN value when using SST to display system capacity information.
Processor feature
Server feature
Edition feature
Software group

or QPRCFEAT value
#2473
#0873
#7416 Standard
P30
7416
#7418 Enterprise
P30
7418
P30
7418
#0772
#7416 Domino
P30
7416
#0773
#7416 Domino
P30
7416
#0890
P30
7439
#2495
Note 6d
Model
870
Software group is determined by the combination of Processor feature and Edition feature. This table provides a cross
reference. Display the QPRCFEAT system value on DSPHDWRSC TYPE(*AHW) to view the processor feature code value.
This value is also shown for the Capacity Card CCIN value when using SST to display system capacity information.
Processor feature
Server feature
Edition feature
Software group

or QPRCFEAT value
#2486
#0886
#7419 Standard
P40
7419
#7421 Enterprise
P40
7421
P40
7421
#7431 Standard
P40
7431
#7433 Enterprise
P40
7433
P40
7433
P40
7440
#2489
#2496
572
#0889
#0891
Note 6e
Model
890
value or DSPHDWRSC TYPE(*AHW) to display the processor feature code value. This value is also shown for the Capacity
Card CCIN value when using SST to perform a Capacity Upgrade on Demand.
Processor feature
Interactive feature
Software group

or QPRCFEAT value
#0197
N/A
P50
0197
#0198
N/A
P50
0198
#2487
#1576
P50
2AF0
#1577
P60
2AF1
#1578
P60
2AF2
#1579
P60
2AF3
#1581
P60
2AF5
#1583
P60
2AF7
#1585
P60
2AF9
#1587
P60
2AFB
#1588
P60
2AFC
#1576
P50
2AD0
#1577
P60
2AD1
#1578
P60
2AD2
#1579
P60
2AD3
#1581
P60
2AD5
#1583
P60
2AD7
#1585
P60
2AD9
#1587
P60
2ADB
#1588
P60
2ADC
#1591
P60
2ADF
#7422 Standard
P50
7422
#7424 Enterprise
P50
7424
P50
7424
#7425 Standard
P50
7425
#7427 Enterprise
P50
7427
P50
7427
P50
7441
#2488
#2497
#2498
#2499
#0897
#0898
#0892
Note 7
External DASD capacity assumes 70.56 GB LUNs. External DASD cannot exceed maximum system capacity or the
maximum number of disk arms.
Note 8a
Model
800
OS/400 V5R2 with the February 2003 level of Licensed Internal Code and Cumulative PTF package identified in Information
APAR II13365 on the Support for IBM System i Web page at: http://www-304.ibm.com/jct01004c/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/brandmain?brandind=5000027
573
Note 8b
Models
810 825
870 890
(#2497
#2498)
OS/400 V5R2 with the February 2003 level of Licensed Internal Code (LIC) and PTFs identified in Information APAR II13551
on the Support for IBM System i Web page at: http://www-304.ibm.com/jct01004c/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
Note 9a
System can run with 256 MB, but the #0864 and #0865 server features require a minimum of 512 MB of main storage.
Note 9b
Models
810 825
The Domino Edition servers require a minimum disk and memory capacity as follows.
Server feature
Disk
Memory
#0769
105 GB
1.5 GB
#0770
315 GB
3.5 GB
#0771
525 GB
5.5 GB
#0772
560 GB
6 GB
#0773
945 GB
12 GB
Note 9c
The server features used for iSeries for Domino specify the minimum amount of disk, memory, and Domino licenses required
for an initial order.
Note 10a
Not supported in the #5094 by the IBM marketing configurator.
574
15.7 9406 Model 800 system unit schematic

#2463 and #2464 Processors
Bus Number
*C07
# PCI Cards
Embedded IOP
2-Line WAN w/Modem short
Console
short
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA/Int. xSeries Server
PCI
C06
C05
C04
1
2
4
5
6
PCI
PCI
DISK IOA
C03
C02
C01
7 IOP/IOA
8 IOA
3 DISK IOA
A0
A1
HSL
HSL
1
1
Rem Media
CD/DVD
OP Panel
OP Panel
Fan
B02
Fan
B02
Fan
B01
Fan
B01
(C07 is short if Int. xSeries Svr.)
See the following

diagram for the
processor and
memory layout
625W
625W
Power Supply
Power Supply
PO1
PO1
Disk Unit
Cage
3
DB1
DISK SLOTS
Front
Left
Back
D08 Rem Media

D07 CD/DVD
D01
D02
D03
D04
D05
D06
Slots
PCI
PCI Short
PCI Short
PCI
Legend
Note 1: Cards may be reversed depending on the choice of console.

Note 2: Card slots do not support hot plugging with the #2463 processor.
Note 3: Non-concurrent maintenance cage of the #2463 processor.
Concurrent maintenance cage of the #2464 processor.
Base Feature
Required Feature
Unavailable if
Integrated xSeries
Server is installed
* Embedded
Model 800 Processor and Memory
#2463 and #2464
Processor
w/o
Cache
Memory
Controller
DIMM CONN - J3H

DIMM CONN - J0L
DIMM CONN - J2H
DIMM CONN - J1L
DIMM CONN - J1H
DIMM CONN - J2L
DIMM CONN - J0H
DIMM CONN - J3L
H
A
F
C
D
E
B
G
Processor
Regulator
575
For a schematic of the #7116 System Unit Expansion for the Model 800, refer to 15.9, iSeries
Models 800 and 810 #7116 System Unit Expansion schematic on page 577.

#2465, #2466, #2467, and #2469 Processors
Multi-Adapter Bridge Bus
Number
EMBED
# PCI Cards
Embedded IOP
2-Line WAN w/Modem short
Console
short
IOP/IOA
IOP/IOA/Int. xSeries Svr.
PCI
C07
C06
C05
C04
1
2
4
5
6
PCI
PCI
DISK IOA
C03
C02
C01
7 IOP/IOA
8 IOA
3 DISK IOA
PCI
PCI Short
PCI Short
PCI
A0
A1
HSL
HSL
Rem Media
CD/DVD
1
1
(C07 is short if Int. xSeries Svr.)
See following diagram

for processor and
memory layout
OP Panel
OP Panel
Fan
B02
Fan
B02
Fan
B01
Fan
B01
Disk Unit
Cage
Concurrent
Maintenance
625W
625W
Power Supply
Power Supply
PO1
PO1
Back
D08 Rem Media

D07 CD/DVD
DB1
Left
DISK SLOTS
D01
D02
D03
D04
D05
D06
Slots
Front
Legend
Note 1: Cards may be reversed depending on the choice of console.

Note 2: Card slots do not support hot plugging with the #2466 and #2467 processors.
Base Feature
Required Feature
Unavailable if
Integrated xSeries
Server is installed
576
Model 810 Processor and Memory

#2465, #2466, #2467
Processor
w/o
Cache
Memory
Controller
Processor
Regulator
DIMM CONN - J3H

DIMM CONN - J0L
DIMM CONN - J2H
DIMM CONN - J1L
H
A
F
C
DIMM CONN - J1H
DIMM CONN - J2L
DIMM CONN - J0H
DIMM CONN - J3L
CCIN 2884 Memory Riser Card
#2469
M02
Processor
CPU
Regulator
DIMM CONN - J2A
DIMM CONN - J0A
DIMM CONN - J2B
DIMM CONN - J0B
DIMM CONN - J2C
DIMM CONN - J0C
DIMM CONN - J2D
DIMM CONN - J0D
SMI
M01
Memory Riser Card
Regulator
SMI
SMI
SMI
DIMM CONN - J3D
DIMM CONN - J1D
DIMM CONN - J3C
DIMM CONN - J1C
DIMM CONN - J3B
DIMM CONN - J1B
DIMM CONN - J3A
DIMM CONN - J1A
15.9 iSeries Models 800 and 810 #7116 System Unit Expansion
schematic
DB3
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
Disk Unit Cage

Fan
B03
#7136
Fan
B03
DISK SLOTS
DB2
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D09
DISK SLOTS
Front
Disk Unit Cage

Concurrent
Maintenance
Right
625W
625W
Power Supply
Power Supply
PO2
PO2
Back
577

DB1
OP-Panel NB1
RM
D17
RM
D17
RM
D18
RM
D18
Power Supply
DB2
1040W
DASD Cage
FAN
B01
Concurrent
Maintenance
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05
P01
DB3
DASD Cage
#7124
FAN
Power Supply
B02
D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
DB4
1040W
DASD Cage
#7124
P02
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Right
Front
Power Supply
MB2
MB1
C
0
C
1
OP Panel
NB1
Processor - Memory (M02)
HSL-C
Processor - Memory (M01)

Processor - Memory (C13)
Fan
PCI-X
PCI-X
P01
Power Supply
P02
Back
PCI-X
A1
B1
A0
B0
C12 1,2
IOP/IOA
C11 3,4
IOP/IOA
C10 7,8
C09
C08
IOA
HSL - A
HSL -B
PCI-X
C07 1,2
PCI-X
C06 5,6
ECS (#9793)
PCI-X
C05 7,8
PCI-X - IXS
C04 1,2
SCSI
IOP/IOA/IXS
PCI-X
C03 3,4
IOP/IOA
PCI-X
C02
5,6
IOP/IOA
PCI-X
C01 7,8
Slot
MAB
2
IOP (#9844)
IOA
Multi-Adapter
Bridge Bus Number
Fan
MAB
1
MAB
0
Left
* Embedded Ethernet 10/100 Mbps CCIN 287F

Supports LAN Console
578
B01
B02
Note: Hot plug and concurrent add of the following components are supported:
PCI cards
Disk units
Removable media
Power supplies
Fans
9406 Model 825 Processor and Memory

DIMM Sockets (8X)
J2A -- D
J2C -- H
J0A -- C
J0C -- G
SMI
Processor
SMI
SMI
SMI
J3C -- F
J3A -- B
J1C -- E
J1A -- A
L3 Cache
Note: DIMM quad plugging is A, B, C, D and then E, F, G, H
579

The following figure shows a schematic of the Model 870 system unit.
BPD - 3A (Unused)
BPD - 3B (Unused)
BPD - 2A (Unused)
BPD - 2B (Unused)
BPD - 1A (Unused)
BPD - 1B (Unused)
BPC - B
BPC - A
Bulk
Power
Fan A
BPR - 1A
BPR - 1B
Blower
HSL
1
SP/
HSL
0
M40
M41
HSL
2
M30
DCA - Base
DCA - Base
CAP - Base
DCA - Base
Unused
Unused
Unused
Empty
Empty
Memory Card 4
Blower
Memory Card 5
Blower
Memory Card 1
Empty
Memory Card 2
Memory Card 0
BPR - 3B (Unused)
Memory Card 3
BPR - 3A (Unused)
Memory Card 7
BPR - 2B (Unused)
Memory Card 6
BPR - 2A (Unused)
Bulk
Power
Fan B
M31 M32 M33M34M35 M36M37 M38
HSL
3
M39
Blower
Front
Back
For a schematic of the #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure for the Model 870, refer to 15.13,
iSeries Models 870 and 890 #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure schematic on page 587.
580
The following figure shows a schematic of the backplane of the Model 870 system unit.
HSL Connector 1
HSL Connector 2
Memory Card 4
M25
Memory Card 5
M08
Memory Card 1
M24
Memory Card 2
M07
L3
M23
L3
M13
L3
M22
L3
M12
MCM
(0)
M16
Clock
Card
Top
Bottom
M15
MCM
(2)
L3
M20
L3
M10
M14
L3
M19
L3
M09
Memory Card 0
M18
Memory Card 3
Memory Card 7
M17
Memory Card 6 M01
M02
HSL Connector 3
HSL Connector 0
(The HSL connectors are on the back side of the backplane.)
Front
Note: Multichip module (MCM) slots 0 and 2 contain processor modules. MCM slots 1 and
3 have pass-through cards (CCIN 272D) installed.
581
15.11.1 Model 870 MCM and HSL relationship

The following figure represents the relationship of high-speed link (HSL) and MCM in a Model
870.
Note: The M40 and M41 are positioned at the rear of the card.
B1
D1
B0
D0
A1
A0
B1
582
C1
C0
D1
B0
D0
A1
C1
A0
C0
M41
M40
C0
C1
M
e
m
o
r
y
M
e
m
o
r
y
C
a
r
d
C
a
r
d
M17
M18
M
e
m
o
r
y
M
e
m
o
r
y
C
a
r
d
C
a
r
d
M01
M02
L3
M27
L3
M20
MCM
(0)
L3
M28
L3
M22
M21
Clock
Card
M15
L3
M10
L3
M04
MCM
(2)
M11
L3
M12
L3
M05
M30
M
e
m
o
r
y
M
e
m
o
r
y
C
a
r
d
C
a
r
d
M24
M25
M
e
m
o
r
y
M
e
m
o
r
y
C
a
r
d
C
a
r
d
M07
M08
M39
D0
D1
C0
A0
C1
A1
D0
B0
D1
B1

The following figure shows a schematic of the Model 890 system unit.
BPD - 3A (Unused)
BPD - 2A (Unused)
BPD - 1A
BPC - A
BPD - 3B (Unused)
BPD - 2B (Unused)
BPD - 1B
Bulk
Power
Fan A
BPR - 1A
BPC - B
Bulk
Power
Fan B
BPR - 1B
Blower
M41
Empty
DCA - Base
DCA - Base
M31 M32 M33 M34 M35
SP/
HSL
0
CAP - Base
M30
CAP - Base
HSL
2
DCA - Base
M40
DCA - Fourth MCM added
HSL
1
DCA - Base
Empty
Memory Card 4
Blower
Memory Card 5
Blower
Memory Card 1
Empty
Memory Card 2
Memory Card 0
BPR - 3B (Unused)
Memory Card 3
BPR - 3A (Unused)
Memory Card 7
BPR - 2B (Fourth MCM added)
Memory Card 6
BPR - 2A (Fourth MCM added)
M36 M37
M38
HSL
3
M39
Blower
Front
Back
583
The following figure shows a schematic of the backplane of the Model 890 system unit.
HSL Connector 1
HSL Connector 2
Memory Card 4
M25
Memory Card 5
M08
Memory Card 1
M24
Memory Card 2
M07
L3
M29
L3
M23
L3
M28
L3
M22
MCM
(1)
L3
M13
L3
M06
L3
M12
L3
M05
M16
Clock
Card
MCM
(0)
Top
M15
M21
L3
M27
L3
M20
L3
M26
L3
M19
MCM
(2)
Bottom
M11
MCM
(3)
M14
L3
M10
L3
M04
L3
M09
L3
M03
Memory Card 0
M18
Memory Card 3
Memory Card 7
M17
Memory Card 6 M01
M02
HSL Connector 3
HSL Connector 0
(The HSL connectors are on the back side of the backplane.)
Front
Note: One pass-through card (CCIN 272D) is installed with the 16/24-way processor to fill
the empty MCM slot 1.
584
15.12.1 Model 890 MCM and HSL relationship

The following figures represent the relationship of HSL and MCM in a Model 890.
Note: The M40 and M41 are positioned at the rear of the card.
B1
D1
B0
D0
A1
C1
A0
B1
C0
D1
B0
D0
A1
C1
A0
C0
M41
M40
C0
C1
M
e
m
o
r
y
M
e
m
o
r
y
C
a
r
d
C
a
r
d
M17
M18
M
e
m
o
r
y
L3
M26
L3
M27
L3
M19
L3
M20
MCM
(3)
MCM
1
M
e
m
o
r
y
C
a
r
d
C
a
r
d
M01
M02
M14
L3
M09
L3
M03
L3
M10
L3
M04
MCM 0
MCM
(0)
M21
Clock
Clock Card
Card
M15
MCM
(2)
M11
L3
M28
L3
M29
L3
M22
L3
M23
MCM
(1)
M16
M
e
m
o
r
y
M
e
m
o
r
y
C
a
r
d
C
a
r
d
M24
M25
MCM 3 Me
L3
M12
L3
M13
L3
M05
L3
M06
m
o
r
y
M
e
m
o
r
y
C
a
r
d
C
a
r
d
M07
M08
MCM 2
M30
M39
D0
D1
C0
A0
C1
A1
D0
B0
D1
B1
585
B1
D1
B0
D0
A1
C1
A0
B1
586
C0
D1
B0
D0
A1
C1
A0
C0
M41
M40
C0
C1
M
e
m
o
r
y
M
e
m
o
r
y
C
a
r
d
C
a
r
d
M17
M18
M
e
m
o
r
y
L3
M26
L3
M27
L3
M19
L3
M20
MCM
1
M
e
m
o
r
y
C
a
r
d
C
a
r
d
M01
M02
L3
M09
L3
M03
MCM
(1)
M14
L3
M10
L3
M04
MCM 0
MCM
(0)
M21
L3
M28
L3
M22
Clock
Clock Card
Card
M15
MCM
(2)
M11
M
e
m
o
r
y
C
a
r
d
MCM 3 Me
L3
M12
L3
M05
m
o
r
y
C0
A0
C1
A1
D0
B0
D1
B1
C
a
r
d
M07
D1
M24
MCM 2
M30
D0
M39
15.13 iSeries Models 870 and 890 #9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure
schematic
(1-x-2-7)
(3-x-2-7)
(3-x-2-6)
(3-x-2-5)
(3-x-2-4)
(3-x-2-3)
B01
B02
HSL
#9844/#9943
#9793
(1-x-1-7)
(1-x-1-6)
(1-x-1-6)
(1-x-1-5)
(1-x-1-5)
(1-x-1-4)
(1-x-1-4)
(1-x-1-3)
(1-x-1-3)
PCI
Serial-1
JTAG-A
V/S Comm
Mfg Int
(3-x-1-7)
(3-x-1-6)
(3-x-1-5)
(3-x-1-4)
(3-x-0-7)
(3-x-0-6)
D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
(3-x-0-5)
(2-x-0-7)
(2-x-0-6)
(2-x-0-5)
(2-x-0-4)
(2-x-0-3)
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
FAN
D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
(3-x-0-4)
(2-x-1-7)
(2-x-1-6)
(2-x-1-5)
(2-x-1-4)
(2-x-1-3)
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25
FAN
See #9094 PCI Card Enclosure for card placement details
D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
(3-x-1-3)
(2-x-2-7)
(2-x-2-6)
(2-x-2-5)
(2-x-2-4)
(2-x-2-3)
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35
(3-x-0-3)
(1-x-0-5)
(1-x-0-4)
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
(1-x-0-3)
(1-x-0-2)
(1-x-0-1)
OP Panel
(1-x-2-6)
Required
DVD-ROM
(1-x-2-5)
(1-x-2-3
(1-x-2-4)
(1-x-2-3))
(1-x-0-7)
Rem Media D42
(1-x-2-4)
Dual Line Cord
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P00
P01
SPCN
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P02
P03
Note: Power supply slots are used as follows

P01 - Base power
AC Dist
P02 - Base power
Box
P00 - Auxiliary DASD backplane
(A01)
AC Dist
Box
(A02)
#5107
Back
Front
LEGEND
= Base feature
(W-X-Y-Z)
= Required feature
Kn
W = DS Card Address
X = IOA number
Y = SCSI bus number
Z = AS/400 Drive Address
Kn = Physical Address
Note: Hot plug and concurrent add of PCI cards, disk units, and removable media devices
are supported.
587
Legend
Base Feature
Required Feature

Unavailable if
Integrated xSeries
Server is installed
Note 3: Slot C01 in the #9094 for a Model 870 has

a #9844, and a #9844 or #9943 for a Model 890.
588
7,8 IOA
#9886 / #9887
1,2 IOP/IXS
3 IOA
4 IOA
5,6 IOP/IOA
C10
7,8 IOA
IOP/IXS
IOA
IOA
IOP/IOA
1,2
3
4
5,6
C06
C07
C08
C09
C05
3,4 #9793
5,6 IOP/IOA
7,8 IOA
1,2 #9844 / #9943
C02
C03
C04
C01
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
PCI Cards
Bus Number
Slots
MultiAdapter
Bridge
Boundary
15.13.1 #9094 PCI Card Enclosure schematic
15.14 iSeries Models 870 and 890 #8094 Optional 1.8 m I/O
Rack schematic
7,8 IOA
C15
4 IOA
5,6 IOP/IOA
C14
C11
3 IOA
#9886 / #9887
1,2 IOP/IXS
C10
C13
7,8 IOA
C09
C12
4 IOA
3 IOA
C06
5,6 IOP/IOA
1,2 IOP/IXS
C05
C08
7,8 IOA
C04
C07
3,4 IOA
5,6 IOP/IOA
DISK SLOTS
Required Feature
C03
DISK SLOTS
Base Feature
C02
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
PCI Cards
DISK SLOTS
1,2 IOP(#9844)/IOA/IXS
DISK SLOTS
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
Legend
FAN
B02
C01
OP Panel
DISK SLOTS
Multi-Adapter
Bridge Bus
Number
Rem Media D41
FAN
B01
Slots
Rem Media D42
VPD
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
SPCN
DISK SLOTS
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
DISK SLOTS
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
Rem Media D42
Rem Media D41
OP Panel
DISK SLOTS
840 W
Power
Supply
P00
P01
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P02
P03

P01 - Base power
P02 - Base power
DISK SLOTS
AC Dist
Box
AC Dist
Box
(A01)
(A02)
FAN
FAN
B01
B02
DISK SLOTS

DISK SLOTS
Serial-1
DISK SLOTS
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
DISK SLOTS
DISK SLOTS
D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10
JTAG-A
Mfg Int
D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
DISK SLOTS
Note 3: Integrated xSeries

Server placement is not
supported from the plant.
Only a #2792 is allowed in this
position.
D46 D47 D48 D49 D50
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
DISK SLOTS

short slot.
short slot.
HSL
DISK SLOTS
840 W
Power
Supply
#9844
#9793
DISK SLOTS
Unavailable if
Server is installed
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P00
P01
V/S Comm
SPCN
840 W
Power
Supply
840 W
Power
Supply
P02
P03

P01 - Base power
P02 - Base power
AC Dist
Box
AC Dist
Box
(A01)
(A02)
589
15.15 iSeries Model 800 processors

The iSeries Model 800 initial installation is CSU. Processor upgrades within models are
Processor
feature
Server
feature
#2463
#0863
Edition
feature
Model 800 processor

300 CPW Uni-Processor in Client/Server Environment
SStar 540 MHz Uni (CCIN 25B9)
Includes eight DIMM memory positions (plug directly into the backplane, direct attach)
Includes embedded Base PCI IOP (CCIN 286C)
Includes Common Service Processor (CSP) (CCIN 25B9)
#7400
#0864
Value Edition
Provides 25 CPW for 5250 OLTP (CCIN 7400)
Includes Common Service Processor (CCIN 25B9)
#7400
#2464
#0865
Standard Edition
Includes a 2 MB L2 cache
Includes Common Service Processor (CCIN 25BA)
#7408
590
Advanced Edition

The iSeries Model 810 initial installation is CSU. Processor upgrades within models are
Processor
feature
Server
feature
#2465
#0868
Edition
feature
Model 810 processor

SStar 540 MHz Uni (CCIN 25BA)
Includes 2 MB L2 cache
Includes embedded Base IOP (CCIN 286D)
#2466
#7404
Standard Edition
#7406
Enterprise Edition
Provides up to 750 CPW for 5250 OLTP (CCIN 7406)
#7445
High Availability Edition

#0866

SStar 540 MHz Uni (CCIN 25BA)
Includes embedded Base IOP (CCIN 286D)
#0769
#2467
#7407
Standard Edition
#7409
Enterprise Edition
#7446

#7407
Domino Edition
#0867

SStar 750 MHz Uni (CCIN 25F0)
Includes 16 DIMM memory positions (plug directly into the backplane, direct attach)
Includes embedded Base IOP (CCIN 286E)
Includes Common Service Processor (CCIN 25F0)
#0770
#7410
Standard Edition
#7412
Enterprise Edition
#7447

#7410
Domino Edition
591
Processor
feature
Server
feature
#2469
#0869
Edition
feature
Model 810 processor

2700 CPW 2-way Processor in Client/Server Environment
SStar 750 MHz 2-way (CCIN 25EB)
Includes sixteen DIMM memory positions via the memory riser card (CCIN 2884)
Includes base I/O backplane (CCIN 282F)
Includes embedded Base IOP (CCIN 284E)
Includes Common Service Processor (CCIN 2249)
#0771
#7428
Standard Edition
#7430
Enterprise Edition
#7448

#7428
Domino Edition

The iSeries Model 825 initial installation and model upgrades are performed by an IBM
Service Representative.
Processor
feature
Server
feature
#2473
#0873
592
Edition
feature
Model 825 processor

3600/6600 CPW 3/6-way Processor in Client/Server Environment
Includes three POWER4 processor cards (CCIN 25DC)
Includes 96 MB L3 cache (16 MB L3/GP processor)
Includes Smart Chip Processor VPD card (CCIN 2484)
Includes base I/O backplane (CCIN 25CA)
Includes Connector Card (CCIN 289D)
Includes Expansion Card (CCIN 28B3), provides two RIO-G ports
#1609 processor activation feature, maximum of three
#1682 On/Off Capacity on Demand Prepaid feature for Standard Edition*
#1683 On/Off Capacity on Demand Prepaid feature for Enterprise and High Availability
Edition*
#1773 On/Off Capacity on Demand enablement feature.
* The On/Off Capacity on Demand features require PTFs that are identified in Information APAR
II13551 at: http://www-304.ibm.com/jct01004c/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
#7416
Standard Edition
#7418
Enterprise Edition
#7434

#0772
#7416
Domino Edition
#0773
#7416
Domino Edition
Processor
feature
Server
feature
#2495
#0890
Edition
feature
Model 825 processor

1250/6600 CPW 1/6-way Processor in Client/Server Environment
Includes three POWER4 processor cards (CCIN 25DC)
Includes 96 MB L3 cache (16 MB L3/GP processor)
Includes Smart Chip Processor VPD card (CCIN 2484)
Includes base I/O backplane (CCIN 25CA)
Includes Connector Card (CCIN 289D)
Includes Expansion Card (CCIN 28B3), provides two RIO-G ports
#1779 On/Off Capacity on Demand enablement feature*
* On/Off Capacity on Demand features require PTFs identified in Information APAR II13551 at:
#7439
Capacity BackUp Edition

Provides up to 6600 CPW for 5250 OLTP (CCIN 7439) for Capacity BackUp Edition
#1697 On/Off Capacity on Demand Prepaid feature *
#1797 TCoD Billing feature

Processor
feature
Server
feature
#2486
#0886
Edition
feature
Model 870 processor

115000 - 20000 CPW 8/16-way Processor in Client/Server Environment
Processor Capacity Card (CCIN 7419 or CCIN 7421)
Processor 0 (CCIN 25D3)
#1611 Capacity Upgrade on Demand activation code (up to eight on the #2486)
Editions*
#1776 On/Off Capacity on Demand enablement feature
* On/Off Capacity on Demand features require PTFs identified in Information APAR II13551
at: http://www-304.ibm.com/jct01004c/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
#7419
Standard Edition
#7421
Enterprise Edition
#7436

593
Processor
feature
Server
feature
#2489
#0889
Edition
feature
Model 870 processor

Processor Capacity Card (CCIN 7431 or CCIN 7433)
#1614 Capacity Upgrade on Demand activation code (up to three on the #2489)
Editions*
#2496
#7431
Standard Edition
#7433
Enterprise Edition
#7435

#0891

Processor Capacity Card (CCIN 7440)
#166x On/Off Capacity on Demand Prepaid feature
#7440

Provides up to 11800 CPW for 5250 OLTP (CCIN 7440) for the Capacity BackUp Edition
#1698 On/Off Capacity on Demand Prepaid feature*

Processor
Server feature
Model 890 processor
#0197
5250 Interactive
features

The #0197 is represented by Processor Feature Code 0197.
#0198
5250 Interactive
features

The #0198 is represented by Processor Feature Code 0198.
594
Processor
Server feature
#2487
Model 890 processor

#1610 CUoD activation code* (up to eight on the #2487)
#1576
Optional 120 CPW in 5250 Interactive Environment

The #2487-#1576 is represented by Processor Feature Code 2AF0.
#1577

#1578

#1579

#1581

#1583

#1585

#1587

The #2487-#1587 is represented by Processor Feature Code 2AFB.
#1588

The #2487-#1588 is represented by Processor Feature Code 2AFC.
#2488

#1610 CUoD activation code* (up to eight on the #2488)
#1576

The #2488-#1576 is represented by Processor Feature Code 2AD0.
#1577

#1578

#1579

#1581

#1583

#1585

#1587

The #2488-#1587 is represented by Processor Feature Code 2ADB.
#1588

The #2488-#1588 is represented by Processor Feature Code 2ADC.
#1591

The #2488-#1591 is represented by Processor Feature Code 2ADF.
595
Processor
feature
Server
feature
#2497
#0897
#2498
#2499
Edition
feature

Processor Capacity Card (CCIN 7422 or 7424)
#1612 Capacity Upgrade on Demand Activation code (up to eight on the #2497)
#1689 On/Off Capacity on Demand Prepaid feature for Enterprise and High
Availability Edition*
* On/Off Capacity on Demand features require PTFs identified in Information APAR
#7422
Standard Edition
#7424
Enterprise Edition
#7437

#0898

Processor Capacity Card (CCIN 2425 or 7427)
#1613 Capacity Upgrade on Demand Activation code (up to eight on the #2498)
#1692 On/Off Capacity on Demand Prepaid feature for Enterprise and High
Availability Edition*
#1778 On/Off Capacity on Demand enablement feature
#7425
Standard Edition
Provides limited 5250 OLTP CPW for Standard Edition (CCIN 7425).
#7427
Enterprise Edition
#7438

#1699 On/Off Capacity on Demand Prepaid feature*
#0892

#1781 On/Off Capacity on Demand enablement feature *
#7441
596
Model 890 processor

15.20 iSeries Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 features
You can find feature descriptions, including details about power and packaging and main
memory in Chapter 4, POWER5, POWER6, and System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890:
Features and placement on page 135.
15.21 Supported upgrades for Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and
890
supported for iSeries models.
597
598
16
Chapter 16.
System i family upgrades

IBM System i Models 520, 550, 570, POWER6 570, and 595, as well as iSeries Models 800,
810, 825, 870, and 890, support a large number of common I/O towers and I/O features.
None of these models support System Products Division (SPD) towers or expansion units.
Such towers and expansion units were used extensively with older models, such as the
iSeries Models 720, 730, and 740 or earlier, or with the iSeries Models 820, 830, and 840 with
the SPD migration tower.
Note: The #5065 Storage/PCI Expansion Tower is an SPD I/O tower.
599
16.1 Supported model-to-model upgrades

The following table shows an overview of the supported upgrades for System i models as of
October 2007.
9a
9a
890
870
825
595 2.3 GHZ
810
595 1.9 GHz
570+
570
525
550+
520+
550
520
515
800
595
From model
POWER6 570
To model
Model 515
Model 520
Model 520+
Model 525
Model 550
9
9
Model 550+
9
Model 570
Model 570+
Model POWER6 570

Model 595
Model 595+
9a
Model 800
9
Model 870
Model 890
Model 825
9a
Model 810
9a
9a
9a
a. Effective 1 June 2006, upgrades from Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 to Models 800, 810, 825, 870, and 890 are no longer
available. Effective 1 December 2007, upgrades from Models 810 and 825 to Models 5xx are no longer available. Effective
1 April 2008 upgrades from Models 870 and 890 to models 5xx are no longer available.
When upgrading from an IBM System i model that supports an unlimited number of i5/OS
users to the Model 525 with its i5/OS user-based license entitlement, for example, you
must consider the possible expense of needing a large number of user license
entitlements. For a workload environment with a large number of i5/OS users, the Model
520 might be the appropriate choice. In this paper, see 11.2, i5/OS licensing by user on
page 441.
The relationship between commercial processing workloads (CPWs) of the from and to
systems varies depending on the ratio of batch to interactive workload. Simple use of
CPW ratings might not be sufficient to appropriately size your configuration.
600
You must always understand your possible workload and application, and use a sizing or
capacity planning tool, such as those listed here:
IBM Systems Workload Estimator
Performance Navigator by Midrange Performance Group

BMC Patrol for iSeries - Predict

http://www.bmc.com/
To assist you in using these tools, refer to Sizing IBM i5/OS Work on IBM System i5
Partitions, SG24-6656, which contains examples of using these tools.
Refer to the Upgrade topic in the Find and Compare Tool (FACT) at the following Web page to
determine the supported upgrade paths for a given processor:
http://www-919.ibm.com/servers/eserver/fact/
For software considerations, refer to Software migration and upgrade paths in IBM System
i5 Handbook, SG24-7486. Use the IBM Prerequisite tool, which you can find at the following
Web address, for compatibility information about hardware and software features for
supported System i processors:
16.2 Upgrades for System i processors

IBM eServer iSeries Migration: A Guide to Upgrades and Migrations to POWER Technology,
SG24-7200, provides guidance for upgrading to eServer i5 Models 520, 550, 570, and 595.
Plans call for this publication to be updated to provide guidance for upgrading to the latest
System i models.
Processor upgrades within and to IBM System i models are performed by IBM Service
Representatives. A key upgrade to a System i POWER6 570 configuration requires
consideration of the following points:
Until a later announcement, you must use Hardware Management Console (HMC) with
Version 7 Release 3 or later installed.
You must consider the processor enclosure (system unit) PCI card.
Each POWER6 570 processor enclosure has few PCI-X slots and no IOP support.
Consider moving PCI cards to I/O towers before you begin an upgrade process. This might
require an additional I/O tower. Consider changing to use new PCIe cards.
You must consider disk support for the processor enclosure (system unit).
The processor enclosure supports only Serially Attached SCSI (SAS) disk technology
drives. SCSI disks are not supported. Currently the embedded disk controller supports
either no protection or mirroring. RAID protection is not an option. Also note that the
embedded SAS technology controller has no write cache.
Therefore, you must perform upgrade planning with the following points in mind:
Only SAS disk technology can be placed within the processor enclosure.
The processor enclosure disk controller has no RAID protection.
Workload environments that perform a significant number of write operations per
second to disks might experience a performance bottleneck when writing to SAS disks.
601
Note: Optionally, you can order a System i POWER6 570 with a specify code (#0719)
to not have any disk drives within the system unit (processor enclosure). You also can
specify, on a new system order, a load source disk location in an I/O tower, I/O
enclosure, or on a storage area network (SAN) device. See the feature #07nn and
#0837 (SAN load source) descriptions in Chapter 4, POWER5, POWER6, and System
i Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890: Features and placement on page 135, for additional
feature information.
There are stronger disk and disk-controller protection rules for POWER6 570, in contrast
to POWER5 technology-based models. If using RAID-5 or RAID 6 capable controllers, you
must protect the controllers cache with auxiliary write cache IOA. For example, a #5775
must be replaced with a disk controller for which an auxiliary write cache IOA can be used
(requires one more PCI slot). Alternatively, you can choose to mirror the disk controller
and its disk drives, which might require the purchase of more disk.
Each POWER6 570 processor enclosure comes with an embedded Integrated Virtual
Ethernet (IVE) adapter. This adapter is also commonly called a Host Ethernet Adapter
(HEA). You choose from either a 2 Ethernet port or 4 Ethernet port adapter. These new
Ethernet adapters offer enhanced virtualization capabilities compared to the POWER5
embedded 2 port Ethernet adapter. Up to a supported maximum, each port of the new IVE
adapter can be optionally shared by multiple partitions.
Refer to Chapter 6, Integrated Virtual Ethernet on page 329, for more information about
IVE and HEA.
You must thoroughly review the planning (and upgrade) information that is available on the
the System i Support Upgrade planning Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/i/planning/upgrade/index.html
SG24-6055, provides guidance for upgrading to Models 800, 810, 820, 830, 840, 825, 870,
and 890.
16.2.1 Side-by-side upgrades

For some upgrades, a new serial numbered machine replaces another serial numbered
machine, which provides for the transfer of licensed program products. See 16.4, Temporary
Software License on page 603, for information about managing the software licensing for this
kind of upgrade.
Side-by-side upgrades are miscellaneous equipment specification (MES) upgrades where a

customer keeps the same serial number and returns the replaced machine to IBM. The
side-by-side offering relates to the temporary use of hardware. It can be ordered in two-week
increments, for a maximum of eight weeks (56 days). See RPQ 847208 (for Model 520),
847188 (for Model 550), 847212 (for Model 570) or 847213 (for Model 595) for more
information.
16.2.2 5733-ITL license option

The 5733-ITL license option has replaced licensing option 5799-TLM as of July 2007.
If the replacement machine is ordered as a new machine from IBM and you specify transfer of
software from the original machine to the replacement machine (5733-NKY ordered), then the
customer is authorized for 15 days of concurrent use. If use of the licensed program products
602
(LPPs) are required on both the original and the replacement machine for more than 15 days,
a temporary license offering is available from IBM for up to 12 months.
Order 5733-ITL for the number of months required. This way you can have temporary
entitlement to use the software during the migration and eliminate the need to purchase
permanent OTC licenses. If more than 12 months of concurrent use is expected, purchase
permanent OTC licenses.
16.3 RISC-to-RISC Data Migration

The #0205 RISC-to-RISC Data Migration specify code is used when a client orders a new
(RISC) System i5 server to replace an existing iSeries or AS/400e RISC-based system. The
#0205 is ordered on the initial order of a Model 515, 520, 550, 570, or 595.
Manufacturing loads only the system licensed internal code up through QSYS of i5/OS when
the #0205 is ordered. Because of this limited loading of i5/OS by manufacturing, #5000
Software Preload Required is not allowed with the #0205. The #0205 RISC-to-RISC Data
Migration and #5000 Software Preload Required are mutually exclusive.
Note: The #0205 RISC-to-RISC Data Migration specify code was withdrawn from
marketing as of 1 April 2005 for machine type 9405.
16.4 Temporary Software License

System i Temporary Software License offers you the option to purchase a software license for
temporary use of a System i, eServer i5, iSeries, or AS/400 machine. The license is a
lower-cost option for clients who have a temporary requirement to license programs and
options when operating a machine. You might require temporary licensing for the following
reasons:
You acquire a replacement machine and must run both the original and replacement
machine concurrently for more than 15 days to facilitate the migration of your applications
and test the replacement machine.
You have a temporary need to operate a machine for 12 months or less and require
licensing for licensed programs or options.
If the replacement machine was ordered as a new machine from IBM and you specified a
transfer of software from the original machine to the replacement machine (5733-NKY
ordered), then the customer is authorized for 15 days of concurrent use. If use of the LPPs
are required on both the original and the replacement machine for more than 15 days, a
temporary license offering is available from IBM for up to 12 months. Simply order the
5733-ITL for the number of months that are required. This provides temporary entitlement to
use the software during the migration and eliminates the need to purchase permanent OTC
licenses. If more than 12 months of concurrent use is expected, purchase permanent OTC
licenses.
Temporary software keys are created for the products that require a key that is designated in
the order for 5733-ITL. These keys must be installed on the machine, even if a permanent key
for the program currently exists. You can obtain the keys by logging on the Entitled software
support Web page at:
https://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/ess
603
The questions and answers in this document apply to situations where a machine with a new
serial number is replacing another machine with a serial number and provides for the transfer
of LPPs. As mentioned earlier, side-by-side upgrades are MES upgrades where a customer
keeps the same serial number and the replaced machine is being returned to IBM. The
side-by-side offering relates to the temporary use of hardware. It can be ordered in two-week
increments, for a maximum of eight weeks (56 days). See RPQ 847208 (for Model 520),
847188 (for Model 550), 847212 (for Model 570), or 847213 (for Model 595) for more
information.
For addition information, refer to the following Web pages:
IBM System i Systems Sales (internal)
http://w3-1.ibm.com/sales/systems/portal/_s.155/253
From this Web site you can access the document System i Express i5/OS Licensing by
User Frequently Asked Questions. On the general System Sales Web page, follow these
steps:
a. Select System i in the Product field. Click GO.
b. On the next Web page, under Featured content, click the System i master sales kit
link.
c. On System i master sales kit page, scroll down to the Frequently Asked Question
(FAQ) List section. Under that heading, click the link for i5/OS Licensing by User
Frequently Asked Questions.
IBM Business Partners (external)
http://www.ibm.com/partnerworld/sales/systems/
From this Web page, you can also access the document System i Express i5/OS
Licensing by User Frequently Asked Questions. After you log in with a registered ID,
select System i Announcement Sales Kit - October 24. Then click the Frequently
Asked Questions link.
You can also contact your support representative for further information about Temporary
Software License offerings.
16.5 I/O considerations for upgrading to a 570 (POWER6)

configuration
Many, but not all of the POWER5 and POWER4 technology I/O devices, IOPs, IOAs
(controllers), and I/O enclosures (towers or drawers) are also supported on POWER6
technology systems. Some of the earlier I/O configuration products that are already installed
can be included in the upgrade, but some cannot be ordered new for a POWER6 technology
system.
As with some earlier technology upgrades, upgrading to a POWER6 570 involves several
technology changes for which you must plan, including:
Only SAS disk drives in POWER6 570 CEC

Four PCIe slots and two PCI-X DDR slots in POWER6 570 CEC, no IOPs
Choice of 12X and/or HSL-2 loops
Buffered DDR2 memory DIMMs
Ensure that you plan to run using i5/OS V5R4 if your non-POWER6 system is not running
V5R4.
604
Consider the following example of a recommended way to perform a weekend conversion:

1. Before the move bring the existing system to i5/OS V5R4 and machine code V5R4M5 (or
V6R1 in the future).
2. Bring HMC to firmware level V7R3 (new browser-based interface).
3. Move any SCSI disk drives out of the existing 570 processor enclosure into a I/O tower or
drawer supported by POWER6.
4. On your current system, implement more stringent disk protection configuration rules of
POWER6 (RAID or mirroring required).
5. Move any excess PCI-X adapters from the existing processor enclosure into an I/O tower
or drawer.
6. Upgrade any 0588 enclosure to HSL-2 using RPQ #847204 and feature #6417.
7. Replace older hardware that is not supported on POWER6.
8. Back up your system software and microcode.
9. Perform the upgrade.
Consider RPQ #847212 side-by-side for a multi-weekend move. Take note of the temporary
use software licensing announced in July 2007 and documented in 16.4, Temporary
Software License on page 603.
The following summary of I/O considerations is based upon what can be included in an
upgrade and can be ordered new for the 570 (POWER6) processor enclosure:
Use SAS-technology disk drives only. Currently there is no RAID protection capability and
essentially no write cache.
Choose an HSL-2 loop adapter, 12X loop adapter, or a combination, for up to two
maximum. You cannot mix 12X and HSL-2 drawers on the same loop.
Select one of two available IVE (HEA) adapters. These adapters have significantly
expanded virtualization capabilities. They must be configured through the HMC interface
before they can be seen by and configured by the operating system that will use them. The
operating system recognizes the logical host Ethernet adapter (on i5/OS CMNnn). The
hardware adapter itself is not owned by a partition as previously available LAN adapters
are.
Review the I/O tower and drawer migration rules for POWER5 570 to POWER6 570 as
shown in the following table.
From POWER5 570
POWER5 description or notes
To POWER6 570
5074/5079
HSL-1, 14 PCI slots

15-90 10k rpm disks
Not supported
5094/5294
HSL-2, 14 PCI slots

15-90 10k, 15k rpm disks
5094/5294
HSL-2, 14 PCI slots

15-90 15k rpm disk
10k disk supported, not recommended
Not sold as new
5096/5296
HSL-2, 14 PCI slots

For large disks on Fibre Channel
5096/5296
HSL-2, 14 PCI slots

For large disks on Fibre Channel
0588/5088
HSL-1, 14 PCI slots

Not sold as new
HSL-2 RPQ available
0588/5088
HSL-2, 14 PCI slots

Not sold as new
605
From POWER5 570
To POWER6 570
0595
0595
HSL-2, 7 PCI slots

12 10k, 15k rpm disks
PCI-X Expansion Unit in Rack: HSL-2,

7 PCI slots
5790
HSL-2, 6 PCI-X slots
5790
HSL-2, 6 PCI-X slots
5095
PCI-X Expansion Tower:

HSL-2, 7 PCI slots
Not supported
5796
Not supported
5796
12X, 6 PCI-X DDR slots
5096
PCI-X Expansion Tower (no disk)
Not supported
Always refer to the following Web pages for the latest information about hardware features
and on what processor models the feature is supported:
IBM Prerequisite Web page
IBM System i upgrade planning Web page

http://www-304.ibm.com/jct01004c/systems/support/i/planning/upgrade/
606
Appendix A.
Product previews, Statements of

Direction, and planning
statements for 2007
Statements of directions (long term) and product previews (targeted within 18 months)
identify plans and functions that IBM has committed to incorporate into future System i
hardware or software releases. Understanding them can provide insight into IBM plans and
directions for future System i hardware or software releases. The information released
represents the current intent of IBM.
Important: All statements regarding the plans, directions, and intent of IBM are subject to
change or withdrawal without notice. Any reliance on these product previews, statements
of direction and future planning is at the relying partys sole risk and will not create liability
or obligation for IBM.
Some of the product previews made early in 2007 became formal product announcements
during 2007. This is noted in the following sections.
607
Product previews
iSeries Access for Windows with Windows Installer technology
iSeries Access for Windows adds support for the Windows Installer technology. The first
implementation of this is a Technology Preview, which is available for download at:
http://www14.software.ibm.com/webapp/download/preconfig.jsp?id=2003-10-30+10%3A05%3A32.5274
05R&cat=&fam=&s=z&S_TACT=TrialsAndBetas&S_CMP=
This download package is iSeries Access for Windows V5R4 with the latest service pack
included. It is available only in English. The iSeries Navigator components are not included
with this install image.
In V6R1, IBM intends to make the iSeries Access for Windows, with the Windows Installer
technology, generally available. All components of iSeries Access for Windows, including
iSeries Navigator, will be supported and translated.
DB2 Query and Report Writer for the Web

IBM plans to deliver DB2 Web Query for System i, which is a Web-based query and report
writing product that replaces the IBM Query for iSeries product. Customers can continue to
use the IBM Query for iSeries product but should not expect to see any future enhancements
to that product. The new product includes the Query for iSeries technology to assist
customers in their transition to the new product, while offering a more modernized, pure
Java-based solution for a more robust and flexible reporting solution. This product provides
reporting and graphing assistants and a WYSIWYG report painter. Customers can
modernize existing Query for iSeries reports while providing a foundation for building more
complex business intelligence applications such as online analytical processing (OLAP), data
mining, dashboarding, or data warehouse implementations.
This capability was announced in July 2007. For more information, refer to 11.12.1, DB2 Web
Query for System i, 5733-QU2 on page 490. In addition, refer to the System i database Web
page at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/db2
System i POWER6 model 570 12-way processor

IBM plans to offer additional flexibility in configuring the POWER6 570 system unit. It plans to
support upgrades from an installed single (4-way) or dual (8-way) processor enclosure to a
triple (12-way) enclosure Model 570. IBM also plans to support upgrades from an installed
triple enclosure to a quad (16-way) enclosure using the #5801 1/4-way processor enclosure.
This capability was announced in October 2007. For more information, refer to 2.1, System i
POWER6 model 570 overview on page 12.
System i POWER6 model 570 redundant service processor

IBM plans to add redundant service processors to existing POWER6 processor-based
systems with two or more processor enclosures. This capability is planned through a firmware
upgrade, at no additional charge, by first quarter 2008. After the upgrade is applied, the
appropriate HMC connections are made, and the system is rebooted. Service processor
functions can maintain operational status if one of the service processors fails.
608
Major i5/OS V6R1 release

IBM plans to introduce i5/OS V6R1 during 2008. As stated earlier in this appendix, the
information released represents the current intent of IBM. All statements regarding the plans,
directions, and intent of IBM are subject to change or withdrawal without notice. Any reliance
on these product previews, Statements of Direction, and future planning is at the relying
partys sole risk and will not create liability or obligation for IBM.
The following key enhancement areas are planned:
With this new release, IBM will extend the implementation of the Java Virtual Machine
(JVM), which is being deployed across all IBM platforms. The new 64-bit JVM is expected
to help ISVs with application portability, configuration, and service tool compatibility when
they deploy new Java-based applications on i5/OS that were written on another platform.
It should also deliver significant performance improvements for Java-based applications.

IBM plans to include a new integrated Web application server with i5/OS to simplify the
deployment of Java applications. The integrated application Web server will support
applications written to use JavaServer Faces (JSF), JavaServer Pages (JSP), and
servlets and will require minimal system resources and administration.
This new integrated Web application server was formally announced for i5/OS V5R4
during October 2007. For an overview of V5R4 capabilities, see 11.7.1, i5/OS integrated
Web services server for ILE on page 465.
i5/OS V6R1 is planned to have additional enhancements.
Also planned is an integrated Web services environment with i5/OS for Integrated
Language Environment (ILE) programs. Utilities will generate high-level APIs for ILE
programs to invoke Web services. A Web services run time will also be included. This run
time can easily be used by an administrator with many existing RPG and COBOL
programs to expose these programs as Web services.
The support for making it easier to deploy and RPG or COBOL program as a Web service
and as a client requester (consumer) of a Web service was formally announced for i5/OS
V5R4 in October 2007. For an overview of V5R4 capabilities, see Integrated Web
services server on page 466 and Integrated Web services client on page 468.
i5/OS V6R1 is planned to have additional enhancements.
A new Web-based, multiplatform system management console will support i5/OS. It will
extend many of the management capabilities that are currently available in System i
Navigator for Windows and IBM Systems Director.
i5/OS workload management and virtualization support will be enhanced with new
features. For example, an i5/OS partition will be able to host storage of another i5/OS
partition, which can simplify testing and deployment of applications. Also, i5/OS will be
supported as a client of the Virtual I/O Server (VIOS), giving access to virtualized and
network storage.
A new graphical, Web-based performance data viewer will offer enhanced viewing and
analysis of i5/OS performance data.
Continued investments in i5/OS business resiliency include enhancements to cross-site
mirroring and further simplification of system object replication through the administrative
system domain.
i5/OS security enhancements will include encrypted backups to any tape or virtual tape
device, encryption of data stored on disk, and intrusion protection.
Product previews, Statements of Direction, and planning statements for 2007
609
IBM continues to pursue the integration of RPG with new technologies and languages.
With this new release, IBM will deliver the RPG compiler with extensions for multithreading
and addition of local file support.
With the shift of responsibility for the System i compilers and application development
products to the Rational line of business, IBM will work to enhance the integration and
synergy of the System i development products, such as WebSphere Development Studio
Client, with other Rational offerings. The Rational Suite of products provides key function
to enhance a developers environment in areas such as the rapid development of modern
application architectures for System i (Rational Business Developer, formerly Enterprise
Generation Language), modelling of application solutions, quality management, and
change and configuration management. The tighter integration of these products to the
System i development community will further enhance the comprehensive function
included in WebSphere Development Studio Client today.
i5/OS and System i hardware have enhanced integration and performance with IBM
System Storage over a storage area network.
Running on i5/OS V6R1 will require conversion of all programs and some other objects
created under previous releases that use the i5/OS machine interface. Program
conversion automatically upgrades and refreshes programs to take advantage of the latest
system technology enhancements, including enhanced system integrity, improved
performance, and a range of new operating system and processor capabilities.
In order for a program to be converted, its creation data (sometimes referred to as

observability) must be available. For all programs created for V5R1 or later, their creation
data is automatically saved during program creation. Clients and ISVs with programs
created for OS/400 V4R5, and earlier, need to ensure that the creation data is available for
the conversion process. IBM is providing an analyze object conversion (ANZOBJCVN) tool
for i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 to help you plan for the program conversion. The tool will help
identify potential conversion difficulties, if any, and estimate the time required for program
conversion.
The tool is offered as an aid and does not do the program conversion itself. This tool is
currently available. For more information, see Analyze Object Conversion tool on
page 497.
i5/OS V6R1 is planned to run on the following processor technology models:
All POWER6 models

All POWER5 models
Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890
V6R1 is not planned to run on models such as the 250, 270, 820, 830, and 840.
Some V6R1 enhancements will run only with hardware features that are available on
POWER6-based systems. Details will be available at time of formal announcement.
To learn more about the i5/OS V6R1 release, see the i5/OS V6R1 preview page on the
Web at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/os/i5os/v6r1preview/
Statements of Direction
Statements of Direction identify the commitment of IBM to direct System i servers toward a
given design or technology. Understanding them can provide insight into the design and
technology plans of IBM. All statements regarding IBM plans, directions, and intent are
subject to change or withdrawal without notice.
610
iSeries Access for Windows supports ADO.NET 2.0

In i5/OS V5R4, the .NET data provider (IBM.Data>DB2.iSeries) in iSeries Access for
Windows supports ADO.NET 1.0 and 1.1 interfaces. In the next release, IBM intends to
support ADO.NET 2.0 base classes and factories in the .NET data provider.
System i and MySQL AB joint Open Source database support

In April 2007, MySQL AB and IBM announced a joint technology and reseller agreement to
provide MySQL open source database access to the IBM System i DB2 for i5/OS data.
MySQL AB develops and supports a family of database products. The companys flagship
offering is MySQL Enterprise, which is a comprehensive set of production-tested software,
proactive monitoring tools, and premium support services.
MySQL produces a popular set of open source database software, with over 11 million active
installations. MySQL has headquarters in the United States and Sweden. IBM System i
clients have already had the ability to run MySQL applications within Linux. What is new is
that the two companies have announced that they will work together to offer the MySQL
Server for i5/OS, planning to deliver DB2 for i5/OS as a certified MySQL storage engine on
the System i platform. This will allow System i customers to implement online and
transactional MySQL applications while storing all data in a single i5/OS DB2 database.
In addition, MySQL Enterprise subscriptions, a comprehensive offering of MySQL database
software, services and support, will be made available to IBM clients worldwide through the
IBM reseller network and the System i sales team.
When these capabilities become available, many open source MySQL and PHP applications
become available to System i clients who access DB2 for i5/OS, with the support of both IBM
and MySQL.
With the planned DB2 storage engine for MySQL, System i customers will be able to run
MySQL applications while continuing to manage their DB2 for i5/OS databases. This storage
engine will plug into the MySQL Server and be managed as any other storage engine within
the database server. The DB2 storage engine will provide storage management, transaction
support, and database management for MySQL developers and database administrators.
This ability enables the sharing of data between MySQL and DB2 for i5/OS applications.
When System i clients deploy new Web applications, they will be able to consider
MySQL-based applications that can take advantage of DB2 for i5/OS.
The MySQL on i5/OS capabilities were announced during July 2007. For more information
refer to 11.12, MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS, 5639-MYS on page 488, as well as the following
locations on the Web:
The IBM System i Web sites:
IBM System i
http://www.ibm.com/systemi
DB2 of i5/OS
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/db2/
The MySQL Web site
http://www.mysql.com
611
Planning statements
i5/OS V5R4 is the final release that will support VisualAge Generator Server for AS/400.
You can migrate your VisualAge Generator source into the Enterprise Generation Language
(EGL) technology. EGL technology is a component that is shipped within WebSphere
Developer Studio Client V6.0 (Java Generation only) and WebSphere Developer Studio Client
- Advanced Edition V6.0 (Java generation and COBOL generation) or within Rational
Business Developer Extension V7.0.
The POWER5 Models 520, 525, 550, 570, and 595 are the last technology models to support
the following features:
#5074/#5079 I/O towers
Optical HSL
8 GB 10k rpm and 17GB 10k rpm disk drives
Thirteen older PCI cards including:
#2763, #2782, #4748, and #4778 Disk Controllers

#2765 and #2766 Fibre Channel Controllers
#2780/#2757 running RAID-5 without an auxiliary write cache input/output adapter (IOA)
Several older tape drives and media including:
9348 Tape Drive (-inch reels)

3570 and 3575 Tape Drives
3490 Tape Drives when attached via #2749 HVD SCSI Tape Controller
358x LTO-1 Tape Drives when attached via #2749
4 GB, 16 GB, and 25 GB QIC tape drives
All VXA tape drives
For POWER6 570 models, you must understand the following integrated xSeries (System x)
support and disk controllers with large write cache considerations:
Windows and Linux integration options:
The five oldest Integrated xSeries Server (IXS) features are not supported.
Integrated xSeries Adapter (IXA)-attached System x servers and the newest IXS
features are supported. However, as of July 2007, IBM is no longer marketing new IXS
and IXA features on the POWER6 570.
iSCSI hardware features can be ordered new for POWER6 570 models.
No disk controllers with large write caches and unprotected write cache will be supported.
Smaller cache controllers do not have auxiliary write cache IOA capability and need to be
replaced with disk controllers that have the auxiliary write cache.
For additional planning information about upgrading to a System i POWER6 model 570, see
16.5, I/O considerations for upgrading to a 570 (POWER6) configuration on page 604. For
the latest information, see the System i planning Web page at:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/i/planning/upgrade
612
There are several categories of information from which you can select including:
Planning (General)
Upgrade planning:
V6R1, V5R4, V5R3, V5R3

Preliminary V6R1 information is available in November 2007.
Future Hardware and Software
Release life cycle
We recommend that you review the V6R1 and Future Release links to Software information
periodically for the most complete summary of information that you should know before you
plan to upgrade to new system technologies and software release levels.
613
614
Abbreviations and acronyms

ACF
Automatic Cartridge Facility
EE
Enterprise Extenders
ACS
Automated Cartridge System
EGL
Enterprise Generation Language
AJAX
Asynchronous JavaScript and XML
EJB
Enterprise JavaBean
ALDC
Adaptive Lossless Data

Compression
EKM
Encryption Key Manager
EMV
Europay, Master Card, Visa
AME
Advanced Metal Evaporated
ERP
enterprise resource planning
APV
Advanced Power Virtualization
ESS
Enterprise Storage Server
ASP
auxiliary storage pool
FACT
Find and Compare Tool
ATA
Advanced Technology Attachment
FAQ
Frequently Asked Questions
ATAPI
Advanced Technology Attachment

Packet Interface
FCV
Function Control Vector
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
FIPS
Federal Information Processing

Standard
B2B
business-to-business
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
BI
business intelligence
HATS
BRMS
Backup Recovery and Media

Services
Host Access Transformation

Services
HBA
host bus adapter
CBE
Common Base Event
HDX
Half Duplex
CCIN
Customer Card Identification

Number
HEA
Host Ethernet Adapter
CCW
Continuous Composite WORM
HIPPI
High Performance Parallel Interface
HMC
Hardware Management Console
HMT
hardware multithreading
HP
Hewlett Packard
HSL
high-speed link
HSM
hardware security module
HVD
high voltage differential
i520
System i 520
IAP
IBM Agreement for Programs
IASP
independent auxiliary storage pool
IBTA
InfiniBand Trade Association
ICA
International Customer Agreement
IDE
Integrated Development
Environment
IDRC
IBM Improved Data Recording

Capability
CEC
Central Electronic Complex
CEI
Common Event Infrastructure
CL
Control Language
CPW
commercial processing workload
CRC
cyclic redundancy checking
CRM
customer relationship management
CRU
customer-replaceable unit
CSP
Common Service Processor
CSS
cascading stylesheet
CSU
customer setup
CUoD
Capacity Upgrade on Demand
CoD
Capacity on Demand
DAA
Dual Active Accessor
DASD
direct access storage device
DCM
dual-chip module
IETF
Internet Engineering Task Force
DDR
double data rate
ILE
Integrated Language Environment
DDS
data description specification
IOA
input/output adapter
DSP
Digital Signal Processor
IOP
input/output processor
DSU
Data Service Unit
IPL
initial program load
DoD
Department of Defense
IPLA
ECS
Electronic Customer Support
International Program License

Agreement
615
iSCSI
Internet Small Computer System

Interface
ISP
Internet service providers
ISV
PAL
Product Activty Log
PATA
Parallel Advanced Technology

Attachment
independent software vendor
PBX
private-branch-exchange
ITSO
International Technical Support

Organization
PCI
Peripheral Component Interconnect
PCIe
IVE
Peripheral Component Interconnect

Express
IXA
Integrated xSeries Adapter
PCML
Program Control Markup Language
IXS
Integrated xSeries Server
PDF
Portable Document Format
J2EE
Java 2 Platform, Enterprise Edition
PDU
power distribution unit
JMS
Java Messaging Services
PID
product identifier
JSF
JavaServer Faces
POE
Proof of Entitlement
JSP
JavaServer Pages
PS
PostScript
JVM
Java virtual machine
PSTN
public switched telephone network
JWL
JSF Widget Library
PTF
program temporary fix
LAN
local area network
RAN
Remote Async Node
LHEA
Logical Host Ethernet Adapter
RAS
LIC
Licensed Internal Code
reliability, availability, and

serviceability
LID
License Information Document
RCP
Rich Client Platform
LIFO
last-in-first-out
RISC
reduced instruction set computing
LLC
Logical Link Control
RPM
Revolutions Per Minute
LME
Library Managed Encryption
RPO
Record Purposes Only
LPAR
logical partition
RPQ
request for price quotation
LPP
licensed program product
RSE
Remote System Explorer
LR
long run
SAN
storage area network
LTO
Linear Tape Option
SAS
Serially Attached SCSI
LUN
logical unit number
SATA
LVD
low voltage differential
Serial Advanced Technology

Attachment
LVT
LPAR Verification Tool
SCA
Service Component Architecture
MAC
Media Access Control
SCM
Source Configuration Management
MCM
multichip module
SCM
single-chip module
MCU
SCSI
Small Computer System Interface
MDC
Manufacturing Default
Configuration
SDO
Service Data Object
SE
Standard Edition
MES
Miscellaneous Equipment
Specification
SEU
System Expansion Unit
SEU
Source Entry Utility
MI
machine interface
SIMPLE
MMF
Multi-Mode Fiber
SIP Instant Messaging and

Presence Leveraged Extensions
MO
magneto-optical
SIP
Session Initiation Protocol
MPG
Midrange Performance Group
SLIC
System Licensed Internal Code
MPIO
Multipath I/O
SLM
Software License Manager
OITool
Offering Information
SLR
Scalable Linear Recording
OLTP
online transaction processing
SMB
small and medium business
OSGi
Open Services Gateway Initiative
SMF
Single-Mode Fiber
PA
Passport Advantage
SMO
Service Message Object
616
SMP
symmetric multiprocessor
SMT
simultaneous multithreading
SNA
Systems Network Architecture
SNMP
Simple Network Management

Protocol
SOA
service-oriented architecture
SP
Service Processor
SPCN
System Power Connection Network
SPCN
System Power Control Network
SPD
System Products Division
SPT
System Planning Tool
SR
short run
SSL
Secure Sockets Layer
SST
System Service Tools
STRSST
Start System Service Tools
SWMA
Software Maintenance
TB
terabyte
TGTRLS
Target Release
TLS
Transport Layer Security
TOE
TCP/IP Offload Engine
UDDI
Universal Description, Discovery,

and Integration
UDO2
Ultra Density Optical level 2
UI
user interface
VIOS
Virtual I/O Server
VLAN
Virtual LAN
VPD
vital product data
VTS
Virtual Tape Server
VoIP
Voice over IP
WAN
wide area network
WLE
Workload Estimator
WORM
Write Once/Read Many
WSDL
Web Services Description

Language
WSIL
Web Services Inspection Language
WSU
Warranty Service Upgrade
Abbreviations and acronyms
617
618
Related publications
The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed
discussion of the topics covered in this paper.
IBM Redbooks and Redpapers

For information about ordering the following publications, see How to get IBM Redbooks on
page 623. Note that some of the documents referenced here might be available in softcopy
only and some may be available only in draft format, until a later date.
IBM eServer i5 and iSeries System Handbook i5/OS Version 5 Release 3 October 2005 -Draft, GA19-5486
SG24-6055
iSeries in Storage Area Networks A Guide to Implementing FC Disk and Tape with iSeries,
SG24-6220
IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Model 800, SG24-6424
Sizing IBM i5/OS Work on IBM System i5 Partitions, SG24-6656
Deploying IBM Workplace Services Express on the IBM eServer iSeries Server,
SG24-6664
IBM TotalStorage Tape Selection and Differentiation Guide, SG24-6946
A Systems Management Guide to Performance Management for System i and System p
servers, SG24-7122
IBM eServer iSeries Migration: A Guide to Upgrades and Migrations to System i5,
SG24-7200
Implementing Integrated Windows Server through iSCSI to System i5, SG24-7230
LPAR Simplification Tools Handbook, SG24-7231
PHP: Zend for i5/OS, SG24-7327
Implementing IBM Tape in i5/OS, SG24-7440
IBM System i5 Handbook IBM i5/OS Version 5 Release 4 January 2006, SG24-7486
IBM System i and IBM System p System Planning and Deployment: Simplifying Logical
Partitioning, SG24-7487
Hardware Management Console V7 Handbook, SG24-7491
The IBM Virtualization Engine TS7510: Getting Started with i5/OS and Backup Recovery
and Media Services, SG24-7510
IBM TS7520 Virtualization Engine: Planning, Implementation, and Usage Guide,
SG24-7520
Advanced POWER Virtualization on IBM System p5: Introduction and Configuration,
SG24-7940
IBM eServer iSeries Pocket Handbook: Version 5 Release 2 January 2003, SG24-9406
AS/400 CISC System Builder, REDP-0042
619
IBM eServer AS/400e RISC System Builder Version 3 Release 6 - Version 5 Release 2,
REDP-0342
IBM eServer iSeries and AS/400e System Builder: IBM OS/400 Version 4 Release 3 Version 5 Release 2, REDP-0542
2: September 2003, REDP-3638
Planning for IBM eServer i5 Data Protection with Auxiliary Write Cache Solutions,
REDP-4003
PCI and PCI-X Placement Rules for IBM System i models: i5/OS V5R3 and V5R4 (Fourth
edition), REDP-4011
WebSphere Message Broker V6, Best Practices Guide: Bullet Proofing Message Flows,
REDP-4043
IBM eServer iSeries Systems Management Handbook, REDP-4070
IBM System p Advanced POWER Virtualization Best Practices, REDP-4194
Advanced POWER Virtualization on IBM System p Virtual I/O Server Deployment
Examples, REDP-4224
i5/OS Program Conversion: Getting ready for i5/OS V6R1, REDP-4293
iSeries Model 825 High-speed Link Loop, TIPS-0297
Twinaxial Attached Device Throughput for Twinaxial Devices, TIPS-0358
Content Manager Server Log Utilities for Performance-Related Troubleshooting and
Analysis, TIPS0635
Where to Find Today and Yesterday's System i Technical Marketing Deliverables,
TIPS0637
Switching between JVMs in WebSphere Application Server 6.1 for i5/OS, TIPS0666
Other publications
The following publications are also relevant as further information sources:
AS/400 Physical Planning Reference, SA41-5109
AS/400 RoadMap for Changing to PowerPC Technology, SA41-5150
System Upgrade RoadMap (RISC to RISC), SA41-5155

iSeries Performance Capabilities Reference, SC41-0607

http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/perfmgmt/resource.htm
Software Installation, SC41-5120

Backup and Recovery, SC41-5304
620
Online resources
The following Web sites are also relevant as further information sources:
iSeries Online Library
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/pubs/html/as400/onlinelib.htm
iSeries Information Center

http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter
IBM announcement letters

http://www.ibm.com/common/ssi/index.wss
The IP/MPLS Forum (formerly ATM Forum)

IBM System i
http://www-1.ibm.com/systems/i
i5/OSEfficient, resilient business processing
This Web page includes i5/OS information about how to download the estimating number
of users tool that can help you to determine the number of active unique i5/OS users have.
This output can help you select which i5/OS user licensing feature you should order for a
Model 515 or 525.
http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/os/i5os
To find the estimating active users tool, click the Licensing tab and look for the System i
515 and 525 heading
System i (iSeries) Upgrade planning
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/i/planning/upgrade
IBM Prerequisite
This site provides compatibility information for hardware features. This tool helps you to
plan a successful system upgrade by providing you with the prerequisite information for
features you currently have or plan to add to your system.
http://www-912.ibm.com/e_dir/eServerPrereq.nsf/
Capacity Upgrade on Demand

http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/hardware/ondemand/
Capacity BackUp Editions

Logical partitioning
http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/lpar/
Windows Integration (with iSeries)

http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/integratedxseries/
Country- or region-specific keyboard or mouse and display support

http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/
System i software
http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/software
Offering Information (OITool)

http://w3-3.ibm.com/sales/ssi/OIN.wss
621
Software Subscription for iSeries

http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/sftsol/subscript.htm
Software Inventory Assistant

http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/iseries/sftsol/siu.htm
Electronic Support Access

IBM Systems Support for System i
This support Web site offers a wide range of tools and resources, including hardware and
software maintenance (for example, Fix Central capabilities) and technical documentation.
For accessing POWER6 hardware information, this site provides the most effective links to
available documents such the System i Overview (POWER6), and HMC documentation
specific to Version 7 Release 3.1.0. We recommend going to this Web site first to find the
appropriate categorization of hardware information.
Under the Select your product area, select the pull-down under Hardware. This produces
a hardware model specific list. Select the IBM System i 570 (POWER6) to link to the
appropriate hardware level documentation.
From any of the hardware links you can access documentation that applies to only
POWER5 models, only to POWER6 models, and both POWER5 and POWER6 models.
You may also use the Technical library link under Sources of information to link to
POWER6 information.
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/i/library/index.html
HMC and supported system firmware levels

http://www14.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/power5cm/supportedcode.html
System i Literature
http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/library
iSeries and AS/400 publications: Whats new by release

http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/pubs/html/as400/online/chgfrm.htm
IBM System i Developer Road Atlas

http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i/resources/roadmap/index.html
622
How to get IBM Redbooks

You can search for, view, or download Redbooks, Redpapers, Hints and Tips, draft
publications and Additional materials, as well as order hardcopy Redbooks or CD-ROMs, at
this Web site:
ibm.com/redbooks
Help from IBM

IBM Support and downloads
ibm.com/support
IBM Global Services

ibm.com/services
623
624
Index
Symbols
#12692 282 GB 15k rpm Disk Unit 268
#1292 300 GB 15k rpm Disk Unit 268
#1540 569
#1541 569
#1542 569
#1543 569
#1544 569
#1545 569
#1546 569
#1547 569
#2844 PCI IOP 214
#2847 PCI IOP for SAN Load Source 216
#5569 EXP24 Disk Pkg - 8 70 GB Disk with Controller
169
#5570 5727 Cache + 2 70 GB Disk Package 169
#5571 5727 Cache + 6 70 GB Disk Package 169
#5727/5728 Integrated Cache 40 MB 299
#5737 PCI-X Disk Controller 90 MB with IOP 300
#5741 Expansion 24 6 Disk Slot Enabler 301
#5741 single repeater 324
#5742 dual repeater 324
#5742 Expansion 24 6/12 Disk Slot Enabler 302
#5786 EXP24 Disk Drawer 311
#5786 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Drawer 170, 321
#5786/#5787 load source considerations 325
#5787 TotalStorage Expansion 24 Disk Tower 171, 321
#5796 PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer 311
#7966 51
#8094 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack schematic 589
#9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure schematic 587
#9094 PCI Card Enclosure schematic 588
#9844 211
inclusion rules 211
#9943 211
Numerics
12-way processor on POWER6 570 608
12X 539
12X channel 311
12X I/O architecture support 311
12X loop technology 12
32 processors maximum per i5/OS partition 25, 97
3575 370
3584-L22 373
3Com
IP messaging 57
IP Telephony solutions 57
3Com Enterprise Management 60
3Com IP Telephony Suite for IBM System i 60
3Com Telephony workload 487
515
configuration notes 90
configurations overview 48
Editions 48
logical partitioning 51
model 47
model overview 52
system unit schematics 97
515, 520, 520+ and 525 processors 112
515, 520, 520+, and 525 processors 112
520
Capacity BackUp (CBU) editions 55
Express Configurations 71
overview 72
520+
overview 68
525
Editions Overview 74
overview 77
Solution Editions 76, 443
5250 CPW 8, 21, 52, 68, 72, 77, 79, 81, 83, 86
5250 OLTP 8, 47, 74
550
overview 79
5639-MVP (Zend and MySQL Value Pack) 6
5639-MYS 7
5639-ZC1 7
570
570+
overview 81
5722-DVP 6
5722-PD1 537
5722-SSC (licensing by i5/OS user) 443444
5722-SVP 6
5733-ITL license option 602
5733-SP1 434
5733-WE2 460
595
overview 86
processors 125
64 i5/OS partitions maximum 25, 97
6-pack 322
800
#7116 System Unit Expansion schematic 577
9406 system unit schematic 575
features 597
model notes 570
625
processor features 562

processors 590
supported upgrades 597
810
#7116 System Unit Expansion schematic
features 597
model notes 570
processors 591
825
features 597
model notes 570
processors 592
870
#8094 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack schematic
#9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure schematic
features 597
MCM and HSL relationship 582
model notes 570
processors 593
890
#8094 Optional 1.8 m I/O Rack schematic
#9094 Base PCI I/O Enclosure schematic
features 597
MCM and HSL relationship 585
model notes 570
processors 594
9406 Model
9411-100 277278
eServer p5 I/O Subsystem for i5/OS 193
9944-100 224
577
B
Backup Recovery and Media Services (BRMS) 6
Base Product Configuration 48
BLOCKINGDEQUE 498
BRMS (Backup Recovery and Media Services) 6
building block 13, 104, 135, 267
589
587
589
587
A
ABSTRACTMAP.SIMPLEENTRY 499
ABSTRACTMAP.SIMPLEIMMUTABLEENTRY 499
Accelerator for System i5 feature 90
adapter 470
additional feature 507
administration 436
Advanced Power Virtualization (APV) 5051
features 183
advanced technology disk controller 310
AIX Partition Specify 143
alternate installation device 380
626
alternate IPL 380

Analyze Object Conversion (ANZOBJCVN) command
497
ANZOBJCVN (Analyze Object Conversion) command
497
Application Program Driver 537
APV (Advanced Power Virtualization) 5051
features 183
ARRAYDEQUE 499
ASLIFOQUEUE(DEQUE) 499
Autoloader 372
C
cables 539
Capacity on Demand 39
Capacity Upgrade on Demand 39
CBU Editions 56
CCIN (Customer Card Identification Number) 391, 413
CCIN 181a 335
CCIN 181C 335
CCIN values for POWER6 570 memory cards 198
CEI (Common Event Infrastructure) 471
Checksum Offload 251
Classic JVM 476
clustering 15
considerations 320
CMNXX 333
commercial processing workload (CPW) 7, 23, 90
Common Event Infrastructure (CEI) 471
CONCURRENTNAVIGABLEMAP 499
CONCURRENTSKIPLISTMAP 499
connection 314
console
features 223
supported under i5/OS 224
Convenience I/O Station 367
conversion of all programs 610
CPW (commercial processing workload) 7, 23, 90
Create Line SDLC (CRTLINSDLC) command 18
CRTLINSDLC (Create Line SDLC) command 18
Cryptographic Accelerator/Coprocessor 245
Customer Card Identification Number (CCIN) 391, 413
D
daisy chain 390
Database Lookup 472
DB2 Query and Report Writer for the Web 608
DB2 Value Pack for i5/OS 6
DB2 Web Query 490
Active Reports 492
Developer Workbench 492

optional features 492
DB2 Web Query for System i 6, 490
DCM (dual-chip module) 44
DDR (double data rate) 17
DEQUE 498
direct attach features 142
disaster 56
disk controller, advanced technology 310
Disk Model Identifier 264
disk protection features 264
disk slot enabler 322
placement and cabling recommendations 324
Display Estimated Users (DSPESTUSR) command 450
double data rate (DDR) 17
DSPESTUSR (Display Estimated Users) command 450
dual mode IOA 221
dual SCSI repeater 322
dual-chip module (DCM) 44
dynamic solutions 488
E
enableJVM script 459
encryption on tape 361363, 366
Enterprise Edition enhancements 7
Enterprise Extenders (EE) support 230
enterprise service bus 464, 469
entX 333
ESX Server 456
ethX 333
EXP24 Disk Enclosures 321, 329
EXP24 load source rules 326
expander 314
Express Configuration 48
Express Runtime Environment 459
Extensible Markup Language (XML) 464
F
Fabric Connection Cable 34
feature code cross reference 413
Fibre Channel Adapter 18
Fibre Channel tape 360
firmware level 25
G
GX Adapter Card 132133, 151152, 172, 175, 181,
186, 190192
H
Hardware Management Console (HMC) 224
configuration of the HEA 333
Web site 26
Hardware Management Console V7 Handbook 227
hardware multithreading (HMT) 45
Hardware Resource Listing 391, 413
HATS (Host Access Transformation Services) 8
and WebFacing application run-time interoperability
485
technology 484
HATS and WebFacing application run-time interoperability 485
HEA (Host Ethernet Adapter) 15, 329, 332
configuration from HMC 333
physical 225
high voltage differential (HVD) 360
HIPO 507
HMC (Hardware Management Console) 224
configuration of the HEA 333
Web site 26
HMT (hardware multithreading) 45
Host Access Transformation Services (HATS) 8
and WebFacing application run-time interoperability
485
technology 484
Host Ethernet Adapter (HEA) 15, 329, 332
configuration from HMC 333
physical 225
hot spare, RAID 14, 266, 318
HSL 2 port expansion card 132133, 151152, 172, 175
HSL, SPCN, line cord, and communication cables 539
HVD (high voltage differential) 360
I
I/O
considerations for upgrading to a 570 (POWER6)
604
enhancements for Model 570 311
tower 187188
i5/OS
application server 452
licensing by user 441
partitions on System p5 models 193
supported release levels summary 502
V5R4 software summary 508
V6R1 609
i5/OS and OS/400
general availability and support 506
upgrade paths 506
Version 5 software groups 530
IBM POWER6 System i 570 processors 36
IBM Technology for Java Virtual Machine 476
IBM Web Enablement for i5/OS 460
IBM WebSphere Development Studio Client V7.0 477
iCluster 320
IDE (integrated drive electronics) 48
ILE (integrated language environment) 466
inclusion rules, #9844 211
integrated drive electronics (IDE) 48
integrated language environment (ILE) 466
Integrated Virtual Ethernet (IVE) 15, 225, 329
integrated Web application server 435
integrated Web services
client 468
server 466
server for ILE 465
Integrated xSeries Server features 216217
interactive CPW 21, 52, 68, 72, 77, 79, 81, 83, 86
internal tape 507
Index
627
IOP
card 25
controlled IOA 221
IOP-less mode of operation 18
IOP-less only IOA 221
IP telephony 56
IP Telephony Express offerings 61
iSCSI 298
iSeries Access for Web 458
support of ADO.NET 2.0 611
with Windows Installer technology 608
iSeries Models 800, 810, 825, 870, 890 processor features 561
iSeries server 539
IVE (Integrated Virtual Ethernet) 15, 225, 329
J
Java Messaging Services (JMS) 471
Java Virtual Machine (JVM) 476
JConsole 499
JDK Standard Edition (SE) 6 498
JMS (Java Messaging Services) 471
JVM (Java Virtual Machine) 476
L
LAN and WAN adapters 228
lanes (PCIe) 17
large send 251
Layout Painter tool 492
LHEA (Logical Host Ethernet Adapter) 225, 333
adapter under i5/OS 337
Library Managed Encryption (LME) 360
LINKEDBLOCKINGDEQUE 499
LINKEDLIST 499
Linux Partition Specify 142
LME (Library Managed Encryption) 360
load source 41, 216
rules for #5786 and #5787 326
specify codes 267
logical Ethernet network 333
Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (LHEA) 225, 333
adapter under i5/OS 337
logical partition (LPAR) 51
low voltage differential (LVD) 360
LPAR (logical partition) 51
LTO tape drive support 360
LVD (low voltage differential) 360
M
Magstar MP Tape Library 370
Mail and Calendar Users (MCU) 24, 90
main storage features 197
manage sessions 436
manage user 436
MCU (Mail and Calendar Users) 24, 90
mediation (enterprise service bus) 471
memory affinity 45
628
memory features 197

for 570 models 198
for 595 models 201
rules 197
memory speed 197
MessageFilter 472
MessageLogger 472
Midrange Performance Group 488
mirrored disk protection features 264
Model 515 47
hardware support constraints 50
Model 520 Express configuration notes 71
Model 525 73
Model 570 I/O enhancements 311
Models 515, 520, 520+ and 525 CUoD and OLTP feature
116
Models 825, 870, and 890 Capacity on Demand 194
Multipath I/O (MPIO) on iSCSI-attached BladeCenter and
System x servers 456
MySQL 496, 611
MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS xvi, 67, 497
N
NAVIGABLEMAP 499
NAVIGABLESET 498
network device 333
NEWSETFROMMAP(MAP) 499
no disk in system unit (9406-MMA) 266
node 13, 104, 135
notes for Version 5 software tables 526
O
Offering Information Tool (OIT) 505
OIT (Offering Information Tool) 505
OLTP, 5250 CPW 8
On/Off Capacity on Demand 39
online resources (URLs) 621
Open Services Gateway Initiative 476
Operations Console support 227
Operations Value Pack for i5/OS 6
Optical Library support 375
ordering instructions 9, 501
OS Preload 143
OSGi 476
P
Partition Load Manager 183
path 314
Patrol for iSeries - Predict 601
PCI
card placement for IBM System i family of processor
models 138
configuration rules/validation on the iSeries server
539
IOP controllers 211
technology 539
PCIe (Peripheral Component Interconnect Express) 17
adapters (IOAs) 18
slots 17, 25
PCML (Program Control Markup Language) 467
Performance Manager for System i 463
Performance Navigator 488, 601
Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe) 17
adapters (IOAs) 18
slots 17, 25
phys (SAS physical links) 314
physical Host Ethernet Adapter 225
planning statements 612
PM/400 463
policy 436
actions 436
sets 469
port 314
features 151, 181, 191
power and packaging 138
POWER Hypervisor 45
POWER6 570 MMA memory features 30
Prerequisites Web site 621
presence publishing 58
pricing information 9, 501
processor
affinity 45
enclosure 13, 104, 135, 267
processStats utility 463
product identifier (PID) 507
product previews 607
Program Control Markup Language (PCML) 467
program conversions 610
protection (RAID, mirroring) features 264
PRPQ 9
Q
QAPMWASAPP file
QAPMWASCFG file
QAPMWASEJB file
QAPMWASRSC file
QAPMWASSVR file
QPRCFEAT 9193
Query/400 6
Adapter 491
463
463
463
463
463
R
rack
configurations 144
features 184185
Rack Configuration Listing 391, 413
RAID hot spare option 14, 266, 318
RAID-6 parity set 265
Redbooks Web site 623
Contact us xviii
redundant service processor on POWER6 570 608
related publications 619
release to release support 507
Report Assistant 490
Reserve Capacity on Demand 38
retired sizing 487
RPQs 9
RS545-A 16
S
SAS
address 314
disk as load source protection required 267
fabric 315
physical link (phys) 314
SAS (Serially Attached SCSI) xv
SCA (Service Component Architecture) 472
SCM (single-chip module) 26, 44
SCSI repeater 322
SDO (Service Data Object) 472
Secure Perspective for System i 434
terminology 436
security domain configuration 436
serial attached SCSI support 314
Serially Attached SCSI (SAS) xv
Service Component Architecture (SCA) 472
Service Data Object (SDO) 472
Service Message Object (SMO) 472
service processor function, redundant 183
service-oriented architecture (SOA) 464
shared memory interface (SMI II) chip 108
side-by-side upgrade 602
SIMPLE (SIP Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraged Extensions) 58
single job/console exception for interactive (5250 OLTP)
work 24, 91
single mode IOP-less IOA 221
single SCSI repeater 322
single-chip module (SCM) 26, 44
SIP Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraged Extensions (SIMPLE) 58
sizing guide 487
sizing information 24, 90
skip ship 507
SMO (Service Message Object) 472
SNA (Systems Network Architecture) 243, 248
restrictions 230
SOA (service-oriented architecture) 464
SOAP 464
software
capabilities covered in this publication 5
enhancements 433
maintenance 452
maintenance for entitlements 455
ordering terminology 507
System i family of models 501
tier group 55
Software Maintenance Agreement (SWMA) 51
SPCN (system power control network) 539
SPT (System Planning Tool) 325
Standard Edition 8
Statements of Direction 610
storage and media
IBM System i family models 359
notes regarding support under i5/OS 378
support 359
switch 311
Index
629
SWMA (Software Maintenance Agreement) 51

System i
3Com IP Telephony 56
family upgrades 599
Model 515 47
Model 515 overview 47
POWER6
Model 570 I/O enhancements 311
System i5 models processor information 43
System Planning Tool (SPT) 325
system power control network (SPCN) 539
System Sales 442
system unit 13, 104, 135, 267
schematics for 515, 520+, 520, 525 97
System x
BladeCenter integration 456
integration 456
Systems Network Architecture (SNA) 243, 248
restrictions 230
T
Tape Library support 367
tape support 359
TCP segmentation 251
term dictionary 436
term mapping 436
Thin Console 224
tower
features 153
schematics 339
transparent encryption 360
TREEMAP 499
TREESET 499
Trial CoD 40
TS1120 Tape Drive 366
TS3500 Tape Library 373
U
UDDI (Universal Description, Discovery, and Integration)
465
Universal Description, Discovery, and Integration (UDDI)
465
Update Device Microcode API 380
upgrades for System i processors 601
upgrading and sizing 600
Utility Billing 100 Processor Minute 37
Utility Capacity on Demand 39
Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) 51

VisualAge Generator Server for AS/400 612
VMware 456
VMware ESX 456
Server on iSCSI attached BladeCenter and System x
Servers 456
W
warranty options 51
Web Administration for i5/OS 464
Web and Java Tools 480
Web Enablement Made Easy 457
Web Performance Advisor 461
Web Performance Monitor 462
Web Services Description Language (WSDL) 465
Web Services Inspection Language (WSIL) 465
Web Services related enhancements 464
WebFacing Deployment Tool 484
WebFacing Tool 8, 481
technology 484
WebSphere Application Server V6.1 477
Feature Pack for Web services 468
WebSphere Development Studio Client for iSeries 8
WebSphere Development Studio with HATS Technology
8, 481
WebSphere Enterprise Service Bus 464
adapters 470
WebSphere Portal Server 464
WebSphere Process Server 473
withdrawals announced January 2007 through April 2007
551
WLE (Workload Estimator) 7, 21, 23, 52, 55, 61, 68, 72,
77, 79, 81, 83, 86, 90, 310, 486, 601
Workload Estimator (WLE) 7, 21, 23, 52, 55, 61, 68, 72,
77, 79, 81, 83, 86, 90, 310, 486, 601
workstation controllers and console features 223
WSDL (Web Services Description Language) 465
WS-I (WS-Interoperability) 469
WSIL (Web Services Inspection Language) 465
WS-Interoperability (WS-I) 469
X
X1 17
x8 (PCIe lanes) 17
XML (Extensible Markup Language) 464
xSeries server 262
XSLT 472
V5R3M5 required 90
V5R4M5 level LIC 16
V6R1 497
Value Pack 496
Popular i5/OS software products 6
Zend and MySQL Value Pack 6
View Event History 436
VIOS (Virtual I/O Server) 51
virtual I/O 51
Zend 496
Zend Core for i5/OS 7, 496
Zend Platform for i5/OS 497
Zend Studio for i5/OS 496
630
Back cover
IBM System i Overview

Models 515, 525, 550, 570, 595, and More
Redpaper
A system builder for
System i 515, 520,
525, 550, 570, 595,
800, 810, 825, 870,
890 models
IBM POWER6, Secure
Perspective for
System i auditing,
Web enablement, ...
IBM i5/OS licensing
options for selected
IBM System i5 models
This IBM Redpaper publication describes the IBM System i

technology-based hardware and software capabilities that were
announced between January 2007 and October 2007. From a System i
family hardware coverage viewpoint, this paper also integrates the new
hardware information that was announced in 2007 with previously
existing System i hardware information.
INTERNATIONAL
TECHNICAL
SUPPORT
ORGANIZATION
This paper describes the following hardware and software capabilities:

Hardware capabilities: System i 570 (POWER6), System i Models 515
and 525, faster processor (2.3 GHz) on System i Models 595, new
support of entry-level tape devices and associated media in DDS/DAT
formatted media, new higher performance capacity dual mode disk
controllers, support of disks packaged within the SCSI-attached
EXP24 Disk Enclosures, and an overview of System i and 3Com IP
Telephony capabilities
Software capabilities: Simplified IBM i5/OS V5R4 edition licensing for
the Model 570 (POWER6), concurrent user-based licensing on Models
515 and 525, application server i5/OS pricing on IBM System i5
Models 550, 570, and 595, Secure Perspective for System i, a set of
Web-enablement enhancements targeted to get you up and running
in an IBM WebSphere Application Server-based environment as
quickly as possible, a new version (V7.0) of WebSphere Development
Studio Client for System i, and an overview of the 2007
enhancements that are available for the IBM Systems Workload
Estimator for System i model sizings
System i Models 515, 520, 525, 550, 570, 9406-MMA and 595 are
summarized in this paper as well as System i Models 800, 810, 825, 870,
and 890 (all prior to IBM POWER5 technology).
REDP-5052-00
BUILDING TECHNICAL
INFORMATION BASED ON
PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE
IBM Redbooks are developed
by the IBM International
Technical Support
Organization. Experts from
IBM, Customers and Partners
from around the world create
timely technical information
based on realistic scenarios.
Specific recommendations
are provided to help you
implement IT solutions more
effectively in your
environment.
For more information:

ibm.com/redbooks

IBM System I Overview

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IBM System I Overview

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IBM System I Overview

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Front cover

IBM System i Overview

A system builder for System i 515, 520, 525, 550,

International Technical Support Organization

First Edition (July 2008)

Chapter 2. System i POWER6 model 570 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3. System i POWER5-based models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Copyright IBM Corp. 1997 - 2008. All rights reserved.

3.4.4 Logical partitioning on the Model 515 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

System i Models 515, 520, 520+, and 525 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6. Integrated Virtual Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7. System i towers schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1.8 #5096 PCI-X Expansion Tower (no disk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Chapter 16. System i family upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix A. Product previews, Statements of Direction, and planning statements for

Planning statements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

Copyright IBM Corp. 1997 - 2008. All rights reserved.

The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

MySQL Enterprise for i5/OS available from the MySQL AB Corporation

The team that wrote this IBM Redpaper

Become a published author

July 2008 update

Copyright IBM Corp. 1997 - 2008. All rights reserved.

Overview of this paper

Copyright IBM Corp. 1997 - 2008. All rights reserved.

1.1 Topics covered in this paper

1.2 Hardware capabilities in this paper

Overview of this paper

For older hardware technology information, refer to the following publications:

IBM Systems Information Center

IBM System i planning, including upgrades information

IBM System i hardware

1.3 Software capabilities in this paper

Overview of this paper

A set of Web enablement enhancements targeted to simplify the installation processes of

DB2 Query Manager and SQL Development Kit (5722-ST1)

DB2 Symmetric Multiprocessing (DB2 SMP) (5722-SS1, Option 26)

XML Toolkit (5733-XT1)

Operations Value Pack for i5/OS (5722-SVP)

Backup Recovery and Media Services (BRMS) (5722-BR1)

BRMS Network Feature (5722-BR1, Option 1)

Media and Storage Extensions (5722-SS1, Option 18)

Performance Tools for i5/OS (5722-PT1) - Manager (5722-PT1, Option 1)

Zend and MySQL Value Pack for i5/OS (5639-MVP)

Zend Core for i5/OS with gold support from Zend

IBM System i software Web page

1.4 The System i CPW workload performance rating

Overview of this paper

Aiming for Zero Interactive on iSeries

1.5 Pricing and contacting sales representatives

1.6 Special RPQs

Disk Content Security PRPQ #5799-SD1 (P84513)

Overview of this paper

System i POWER6 model 570

Copyright IBM Corp. 1997 - 2008. All rights reserved.

2.1 System i POWER6 model 570 overview

System i Model 570 with POWER6 Technology

POWER6 System i Model 570 Building Blocks

5,500 21,200 CPW